Sub-Saharan languages and peoples

Transcription

Electronic Bibliography for African Languages and Linguistics
Compiled by Jouni Filip Maho
SUB-SAHARAN LANGUAGES AND PEOPLES
a bibliographical survey of pre-1920 works
THIS VERSION DATED
16 april 2008
Compiled by Jouni Filip Maho
This bibliography is a work in progress. Many things still need to
be fixed. Suggestions, comments and corrections can be mailed
to the compiler at ‹[email protected]›.
Table of Contents
Introduction...............................................................................
5
BIBLIOGRAPHY SECTIONS
1.
Antique sources, up until AD 650.......................................
10
2.
Medieval sources, from AD 650 to the mid-1400s .............
16
3.
Pre-modern works, from the mid-1400s to c.1800.............
27
4.
Early modern works, 1800 to 1920: linguistics...................
95
5.
Early modern works, 1800 to 1920: unsorted works ..........
307
6.
Select bibliographical works ..............................................
575
APPENDIX
Select chronology of travellers in Africa (up to c.1900) .............
603
INDEXES
Author names............................................................................
615
( Language names, place names ) ..........................................
(653)
4
JFM -- EBALL -- 16 april 2008
INTRODUCTION
–– oOo ––
Th present bibliographical survey aims to list works dealing with African languages and/or peoples
and which were written, compiled and/or published prior to 1920.
This particular version contains a total of 10 189 unique entries.
IS THE COVERAGE REALLY SUB-SAHARA?
The original aim was to include as much as possible of the known linguistic and ethnographic
literature on sub-Saharan Africa. During the course of compiling, however, many references to
North Africa were also included. In due course, this will change, but at present I do not know for
certain whether I will expand the North African coverage or simply delete them altogether.
HOW ARE THE CONTENTS ORGANISED?
The bibliography is yet to find its final form (this concerns especially sections 4-5; for which, see
below). Currently, the references are grouped in four temporally defined categories followed by a
general bibliographical section:
1) Section 1 contains antique/classical sources dating from prior to AD 650.
2) Section 2 contains medieval sources dating from AD 650 to the mid-fifteenth century.
3) Section 3 contains pre-modern works dating from the mid-fifteenth century till c.1800.
4) Sections 4-5 contain pre-modern works covering the period 1800-1920. These are further
subdivided into linguistic works (section 4) and others or “the rest” (section 5).
5) Section 6 contains contains a selection of bibliographical works and such general survey
works from which valuable bibliographical data can be extracted.
Note that while the various sections contain references to works actually produced during the
respective time periods, they also contain references to later (post-period) reprints and translations.
The periods defining each bibliographical section have been chosen mainly for convenience. For
instance, the latest source in section 1 is the Christian topography by Cosmas Indicopleustes, a
Greek merchant who visited the Kingdom of Axum sometime during the sixth century. The next
source, chronologically speaking, is George Syncellus’ Ekloge chronographika, which dates from
the early ninth century. This temporal gap of c.250 years has provided a convenient time gap to use
for organising purposes. Hence Syncellus’ text is also the earliest source in section 2.
ANTIQUE / CLASSICAL WORKS, UP UNTIL AD 650
Section 1 includes the most important classical sources, more or less all of which deal with North
or North-East Africa, esp. Ancient Egypt. In fact, there are only two noteworthy sources that relate
to sub-Sahara. Both are sailors’ guides. One is the anonymous Periplus of the Erythrean Sea,
which has some interesting information on the (North) East African coast. The second is the
disputed Periplus of Hanno the Navigator, the journal of a Phoenecian admiral who sailed along
the North and West African coast(s), reaching present-day Senegal and possibly as far as Sierra
6
Leone, and, some say, even Cameroon. His journal is famed for the first known reference to
gorillas, with which he referred to what he thought was a group of ‘hairy women’. (However, he
probably saw chimpanzees, not what we today refer to as gorillas.)
MEDIEVAL WORKS, AD 650-1450
Section 2 includes references to works dating from AD 650 to the mid-fifteenth century. The
earliest source in this section is the ninth-century Ekloge chronographika by George Syncellus, a
valuable though somewhat garbled source on Manetho’s Ancient Egyptian king list. In section 2, I
have sought to include any source discussing sub-Sahara. By all accounts, this amounts to a fairly
small number of references. The majority of documents from this period are Arabic, virtually none
of which (except the work by al-‘Umarî) have anything substantial to say about languages. Most of
the information on sub-Saharan Africa in documents from this period is second-hand and often
anecdotal, although not without interest, esp. the writings of al-Bakrî.
There are at least two eye-witness reports from sub-Saharan Africa dating from this period. The
first one is by al-Mas‘ûdi, who visited East Africa in the 910s, and the second by Ibn Battûta, who
travelled extensively throughout Africa and Asia during the fourteenth century. Ibn Battûta’s
journal in particular is an unparalleled source on sub-Saharan Africa from a period otherwise
poorly documented with first-hand information. He visited the town of Kilwa on the East African
coast in 1331, and somewhat later, during the 1350s, the Mali Empire. During his travels he wrote
down detailed, down-to-earth comments and observations on many social and cultural phenomena.
In more ways than one, Ibn Battûta’s journal is a magnificent precursor to modern ethnography.
PRE-MODERN WORKS, 1450-1800
Section 3 covers the period from the mid-fifteenth century up until the year 1800 (or thereabouts).
The earliest sources listed in this section are journals describing the Chinese admiral Zheng He’s
travels in East Africa (Zheng He 1431/33, Gong Zhen 1434, Fei Xin 1436, Ma Huan 1451, see also
Zhang Tingyu 1679-1739, Snow 1988 and, in the bibliography section 11, Wheatley 1975). From
this period onwards, the European documents on sub-Saharan Africa start to appear. The earliest
ones are various Portuguese sailors’ journals. In general, these early documents provide little
information about ethnography and even less about languages. Still, a considerable amount of
useful, though general, information is provided.
The earliest documents of any substantial interest are all written in Arabic, and include the works of
the Bornu scholar Ibn Furtu and the writings of several Timbuktu scholars such as Ahmad Baba,
Mahmud Kati, and al-Sa‘dî. Jointly these cover a wide range of subjects, but generally nothing
about languages, save the odd lexical specimen (cfr Delafosse 1914, Meinhof 1919/20).
Among the more interesting texts, we find the anonymous Kilwa Chronicles, an Arabic document
from c.1520, which provides valuable information on the history of the town of Kilwa. (There exist
in fact several such town chronicles from East Africa, but most date from the late nineteenth
century.)
Several languages from the West African coast, from Senegal to Cameroon, are exemplified in brief
word lists in various sailors’ journals from the mid-fifteenth century onwards. Most of these
sources have been detailed and discussed in the many publications of Paul E.H. Hair (see
especially his ethnolinguistic inventories of the Guinea coast, publ. 1967-1969). The lexical
specimens found in these, and similar, publications derive from language varieties seemingly related
to present-day Wolof, Malinke, Banyun, Biafada, Temne, Akan, Duala, and a handful others.
Fragmentary linguistic specimens from eastern and southern African languages, presumably
representing early forms of Khoekhoe, Shona, Swahili, and maybe others, can also be found, but
the sources are few and often garbled (cfr Doke 1960). These kinds of sources increase
successively over the coming decades and centuries.
Substantial linguistic descriptions do not appear until the seventeenth century. From the beginning
of that century until the end of the eighteenth century, some thirteen African languages were
furnished with dedicated dictionaries (or longer vocabularies) and/or grammatical descriptions.
Sub-Saharan languages and peoples: pre-1920 works
7
Coptic
Nubian
Ge‘ez
Amharic
Fante
Twi
Ewe
Igbo
Makhuwa
Kongo
Mbundu
Malagasy
Sena
African languages with dictionaries
and/or grammar descriptions prior to 1800
Dictionaries and/or longer vocabularies were compiled for the following languages:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Malagasy (Houtman 1603, Arthus 1614, Flacourt 1658, Loderus 1707)
Kenzi-Nubian (Carradori 1635)
Ge‘ez (Wemmers 1638, Ludolfus 1661)
Kikongo (Vetralla 1650?, Gheel 1651, Tervelli 1652, Descourvières 1768/70, Anon. 1772)
Twi (Müller 1673)
Kimbundu (Castilla 1680)
Amharic (Ludolfus 1698)
Ewe (Peixoto 1731/41)
Coptic (Croze 1775)
Makhuwa (Mylius 1790)
Igbo (Crow 1790)
Grammar descriptions appeared for the following languages:
1.
4.
6.
12.
7.
8.
13.
Malagasy (Ravius 1648, Ludolfus 1681)
Kikongo (Tervelli 1652, Vetralla 1659)
Kimbundu (Pacconio & Couto 1661, Castilla 1680, Dias 1697)
Sena (Anonymous 1680, see Schebesta 1919/20)
Amharic (Ludolfus 1698)
Ewe (Labat 1730, Peixoto 1731/41)
Fante (Protten 1764)
All of the above may not, technically speaking, have been published by proper publishing houses,
but they are all considered here nonetheless.
8
PRE-MODERN WORKS, 1800-1920
Sections 4 and 5 contain references to post-1800 works. Due to the large number of titles in this
section, they need to be further sub-divided somehow. Currently, they are simply divided into any
of two categories: linguistics (section 4) or not (section 5). Obviously, this crude organisation
needs some work, but I have yet to find a satisfactory categorising principle of this lot. A simple
but cumbersome alphabetical listing would avoid the necessity of duplicating entries and seems,
unfortunately, also to be the only way to avoid an annoying “rest/unsorted” category. In order to
be useful, though, it would require a complex indexing system that presently cannot be
implemented.
The choice to use 1920 as a break-off point for sections 4-5 is largely arbitrary, but not entirely
without reason. There is a successive increase of number of titles all the way up until the late 1910s,
a decade marks the first noticeable numerical decrease (or levelling). This is no doubt a result of the
Great War (or, World War I), which lasted 1914-1918, after which the numbers start to increase
again.
The following table offers a select summary, decade-wise, of the number of titles contained in the
present bibliography.
DECADE(S)
ALL
TITLES
WORKS WITH ANY
LINGUISTIC MATERIAL
DICTIONARIES
AND GRAMMARS
1770s
1780s
1790s
1800s
1810s
1820s
1830s
1840s
1850s
1860s
1870s
1880s
1890s
1900s
1910s
27
37
66
99
93
135
185
311
440
612
711
1 191
1 541
1 700
1 580
9
11
13
35
36
49
56
137
131
128
195
360
488
694
739
4
4
3
6
9
11
28
60
72
56
84
179
239
360
344
The figures in the above table derive from the present bibliography. They should not be taken as
definite, as the bibliography is continually updated and revised. (Note that revised editions are
counted separately from first editions, but reprints are not.)
The main numerical trends (i.e. the relative increase and decrease from one decade to another)
should be useful indicators. The statistical jumps (bold-printed) -- specifically in the 1790s, the
1820s, the 1840s, the 1860s, and the 1880s -- could potentially be artefacts caused by a biased
coverage in the bibliography. However, considering that the bibliography contains roughly 10 000
entries, any such bias is likely to be of a minor significance.
The increase in the figures during the 1830s (and onwards) is a direct result of the escalating
activities of the Christian missionaries, who keep dominating African linguistics up until the mid20th century.
Up until the 1880s, the majority of sources containing linguistic and/or ethnographic information
are travelogues. These often include word lists of varying size and quality. The occasional
dictionary, even grammar book, did however also surface.
The 1880s saw the onset of the colonial era in Africa, and this is reflected in the dramatic increase
in the figures seen for the 1880s (and onwards).
The decrease of titles during the latter part of the 1910s has been used here as a convenient closing
date for the present bibiography. (Following the end of the war, the numbers start to increase again
during the early 1920s.)
9
BIBLIOGRAPHICAL WORKS
Section 6 includes references to relevant bibliographical works as well as some general research
surveys from which valuable bibliographical data can be extracted.
Following the bibliographical sections, there is first an appendix comprising a comprehensive(ish)
chronological list of known travellers in Africa prior to 1900, followed by an index of author
names. A second index with language and place names may or may not be added, depending on
technical feasibility.
A NOTE ON THE ANNOTATIONS
Many of the references are annotated. These annotations intend to:
1) comment on or clarify the subject matter (contents) of the referenced work in question,
provided the content is known to me and the title is not sufficiently self-explanatory;
2) specify uncertanties and ambiguities regarding bibliographical details, for instance, where
some bit of information (e.g. publisher, date of publishing, accurate phrasing of title, etc.) is
either uncertain or lacking completely;
3) provide details of the referenced work’s publishing history, for instance, by noting important
reprints or if a work is published under different titles in different countries;
4) make brief references to so-called peripheral literature (here referred to as peripherals), such
as book reviews, rejoinders, comments, miscellaneous follow-ups, etc. (In the case of
anonymous book reviews, I have added the actual author’s names in square brackets,
provided I know who they are.)
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Several people have helped me in various ways: Peter Andersson (early Arabic sources), Tore
Janson (miscellaneous), Karsten Legère (miscellaneous), Jan Retsö (Arabic sources), Bonny Sands
(lots), Thilo Schadeberg (Bantu languages), Moreno Vergari (corrections, pc 2006/03), Martin
Walsh (Tanzanian languages).
Section 1
ANTIQUE SOURCES
up until AD 650
–– oOo ––
[Anon.] 350 BC. Scylaxis periplus = Periplus of Scylax.
Anonymous Greek sailor’s guide often (wrongly?) credited to one Scylax of Caryanda. It is commonly dated to the
4th century BC. It “states that from an island called Kerne the Carthaginians traded with a great city of the
Ethiopians, though not for gold, but for skins, ivory and wine” (Fage 1995:46f). The original text has been
reprinted several times, e.g. 1855 as “Scylaxis periplus” in Geographi graeci minores (ed. by Karl Müller; FirminDidot). There are also many translations available, e.g. Latin translations appeared 1697 in Geographica antiqua
(ed. by Jacobus Grovonius; Jordanus Luchtmans); and 1712 as “Scylacis periplus” in Geographiae veteris scriptores
graeci minores (ed. by John Hudson; Oxonii).
[Anon.] AD 100. Periplus maris erythraei = Periplus of the Erythraean Sea.
The date is approximate. The Periplus of the Erythraean Sea is an early Greek sailors’ guide, which includes
descriptions of various ports in the Red Sea as well as round the Horn all the way down to Tanzania. The African
continent is referred to as ‘Azania’ and there are mentions of the (Zimbabwean?) gold trade. The Greek text has been
reprinted many times, e.g. 1608 by David Hoeschel (details?); and 1855 as “Anonymi periplus maris erythraei” in
Geographi graeci minores (ed. by Karl Müller; Firmin-Didot). There are also many translations, e.g. a Latin one
appeared 1712 as “Periplus maris erythraei eidem vulgo adscriptus” in Geographiae veteris scriptores graeci
minores (ed. by John Hudson; Oxonii).
Peripherals: Felix Chami, “Roman beads from the Rufiji Delta, Tanzania: first incontrovertible archaeological link
with Periplus”, Current anthropology, v. 40 (1999) p. 237-241; C. Robin, “L’Arabie du sud et la date du périple de
la mer érythrée”, Journal asiatique, v. 279 (1991) p. 1-30; Felix Chami, “The Egypto-Graeco-Romans and
Paanchea/Azania: sailing in the Erythraean Sea”, Trade and travel in the Red Sea Region: proceedings of Red Sea
project 1 (ed. by Paul Lunde & Alexandra Porter, The British Museum, 2002).
[Anon.] 1800/05. The periplus of the Erythraean sea. Translated from the Greek by William
Vincent. London: T. Cadell & W. Davies.
Reprinted several times, e.g. 1809 as The voyage of Nearchus, and the Periplus of the Erythraean sea by Oxford
University Press; and 1998 as The commerce and navigation of the ancients in the Indian Ocean: the Periplus of the
Erythrean sea by Asian Educational Services in New Delhi (ISBN-10 81-206-1092-X).
[Anon.] 1912. The periplus of the Erythraean sea: travel and trade in the Indian ocean by a
merchant of the first century. Translated from the Greek and annotated by Wilfred H.
Schoff. London. Pp 323.
Reprinted several times, e.g. 1995 by South Asia Books in India (ISBN-10 81-215-0699-9).
URL: www.fordham.edu/halsall/ancient/periplus.html
[Anon.] 1927. Le périple de la mer Erythrée, suivi d’une étude sur la tradition et la langue [traduit
et publié par Hjalmar Frisk]. Göteborgs högskolas årskrift, v. 33, 1, p. 1-22.
[Anon.] 1980. The periplus of the Erythraean Sea, by an unknown author. Translated and edited
by G.W.B. Huntingford. Works issued by the Hakluyt Society, second series, #151.
London. Pp xiv, 225. ISBN-10 0-904180-05-0.
[Anon.] 1989. The periplus maris erythraei: text with introduction, translation and commentary.
Translated, introduced and annotated by Lionel Casson. Princeton University Press. ISBN10 0-691-04060-5.
Africanus, Sextus Julius. AD 225. Chronographiai.
The date is a wild guess. Africanus’s Chronographiai is a history of the world in five books. It includes Manetho’s
Egyptian king list. The whole work is now lost, however, and exists only as quotations in the works of later
authors, e.g. Eusebius Pamphili and George Syncellus.
Caesar, Gaius Julius. 46 BC. De bello Africo = On the African war.
The text describes Caesar’s war campaign in northern Africa in 46 BC, during which time it was presumably also
written. Even though the text has occasionally been credited to Caesar himself, it was seemingly authored by one of
his commanding officers. Still, it seems convenient to list this, and its various translations, under Caesar’s name.
11
URL: www.intratext.com/X/LAT0241.HTM
Caesar, Gaius Julius. 1851. The African war. In: Caesar’s commentaries on the Gallic and Civil
Wars; with the supplementary books attributed to Hirtius, including the Alexandrian,
African, and Spanish wars, p. (?). Literally translated, with notes and a very elaborate index,
by W.A. McDevitte and W.S. Bohn. London: H.G. Bohn.
Either this translation has been copiously reprinted over the years, or there exist several revisions.
Caesar, Gaius Julius. 1967. The African war. In: Caesar: The Civil War; together with The
Alexandrian War, The African War, and The Spanish War, by other hands, p. (?).
Translated by Jane F. Mitchell. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books.
On reprints, of which there seems to be several, the translator’s name is given as “Jane F. Gardner”.
Caesar, Gaius Julius. 1997. The African war. In: The Civil War; with the anonymous Alexandrian,
African, and Spanish wars, p. (?). Translated with an introduction and notes by J.M. Carter.
Oxford University Press.
Cosmas Indicopleustes. AD 550. The Christian topography.
Cosmas Indicopleustes was a Greek merchant who travelled to North East Africa and India. During his travels, he
visited the Kingdom of Axum and he refers to the East African coast as ‘Zingium’. No original manuscript exists,
but three complete later copies do (as well as numerous fragments), the oldest of which is a 9th-century manuscript
kept at the Vatican.
Cosmas Indicopleustes. 1897. The Christian topography. Translated from the Greek, edited,
annotated and introduced by J.W. McCrindle. Works issued by the Hakluyt Society, #97.
London.
URL: www.tertullian.org/fathers/cosmas_00_1_preface.htm
Eusebius Pamphili. AD 303. Chronicon.
Eusebius Pamphili, a.k.a. Eusebius of Caesarea, lived 260-340. He wrote/finished his Chronicles c.303. It consists
of short historical surveys of various ancient peoples, including a discussion/description of Manetho’s Egyptian
king list. Chronicles was originally written in Greek, but exists now in full only in an Armenian translation. There
is also an incomplete Latin translation by St Jerome.
Eusebius Pamphili. 1818. Chronicon bipartitum nunc primum ex armeniaco textu in latinum
conversum adnotationibus auctum graecis fragmentis axornatum. Venetiis.
Includes the Armenian translation as well as texts in Latin and Greek.
Eusebius Pamphili. 1818. Chronicorum canonum libri duo. Diligenter expressum et castigatum
Angelus Maius et Johannes Zohrabus nunc primum coniunctis curis latinitate donatum
notisque illustratum additis graecis reliquiis ediderunt. Mediolani: Regiis Typis. Pp xxviii,
396.
Eusebius Pamphili. 1911. Die Chronik aus dem armenischen übersetzt mit textkritischem
Commentar. Herausgegeben im Auftrage der Kirchenväter-Commission des Königl.
Preussischen Akademie der Wissenschaften von Josef Karst. Griechischen christlichen
Schriftsteller der ersten drei Jahrhunderte, #20. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs’sche Buchhandlung.
Pp lvi, 319.
URL: www.tertullian.org/rpearse/eusebius/eusebius_chron_german.htm
Eusebius Pamphili. 1913/27. Die Chronik des Hieronymus / Hieronymi chronicon, 2 Bde.
Herausgegeben von Rudolf Helm. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs’sche Buchhandlung.
Includes St Jerome’s Latin translation and a reconstruction of the original Greek text.
Eusebius Pamphili. 1956. Die Chronik des Hieronymus / Hieronymi chronicon. Zweite Auflage,
herausgegeben und bearbeitet von Rudolf Helm. Eusebius-Werke, #7. Berlin: AkademieVerlag. Pp lii, 455.
Reprinted 1984 as “Dritte Auflage, unverändert” by the same publishers.
Freeman-Greenville, G.S.P. 1962. The East African coast: select documents from the first to the
early nineteeth century. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Pp xi, 314.
Includes, among other things, translations of early Chinese documents detailing Chinese knowledge about East
Africa. However, “Freeman-Greenville’s inadequate treatment of the original Chinese documents is potentially
problematic” (Shen 1995:352).
Peripherals: Kenneth Ingham, Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, v. 27 (1964) p. 208-209;
James Shen, “New thoughts on the use of Chinese documents in the reconstruction of early Swahili history”,
History in Africa, v. 22 (1995) p. 349-358.
12
early nineteeth century. Second edition. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
Hanno, [The Navigator]. 450 BC. Periplus.
Hanno the Navigator was a Carthaginian (Phoenecian) admiral who lived during the fifth century BC. He sailed
along the North and West African coast(s), reaching present-day Senegal, maybe as far as Sierra Leone, and, some
say, even Cameroon and Gabon. However, some interpreters “dismiss the whole second half of the periplus as
nothing more than a conflation of ancient myths” (Fage 1995:47). Hanno’s original report, now lost (though cited
by some ancient sources, e.g. Herodotus and Pliny the Elder), was originally inscribed in Punic in a temple wall in
Carthage. The oldest preserved version is an abridged Greek translation dating from the tenth century, which
comprises a total of 18 brief paragraphs. The 10th-century Greek text has been published many times, e.g. 1533 as
Periplus: Codex Heidelbergensis 398 (ed. by Sigmund Gelenius; Basel); 1855 as “Hannonis carthaginiensis
periplus” in Geographi graeci minores (ed. by Karl Müller; Firmin-Didot). There are also numerous translations
available, e.g. Latin translations appeared 1569 in Hannonis carthaginiensium ducis navigatio (publ. by Conrad
Gesner); and 1712 as “Hannonis periplus” in Geographi veteris scriptores graeci minores (ed. by John Hudson;
Oxonii).
URL: www.livius.org/ha-hd/hanno/hanno01.html
Peripherals: Pascal F.-J. Gosselin, Recherches sur la géographie systématique et positive des anciens (Paris,
1798/1813); W. Winwood Reade, “The habits of the gorilla”, The American naturalist, v. 1 (1867) p. 177-180; J.
de Hart & others, “Notes on the exploration of Africa among the ancients, with special reference to Hanno”, Journal
of the African Society, v. 25 (1926) p. 264-277; H. Richmond Palmer, The Carthaginian voyage to West Africa in
500 BC (Bathurst, 1931); W.L. Lorimer, “Hanno, periplus 3 (G.G.M.i.3)”, The classical review, v. 57 (1943) p. 14;
Aubrey Diller, The tradition of the minor Greek geographers (American Philological Association, 1952); Jacques
Ramin, Le périple d’Hannon/The periplus of Hanno (Cambridge, 1976); Christian Jacob, “Aux confins de
l’humanité: peuples et paysages africains dans le périple d’Hanno”, Cahiers d’études africaines, v. 121/122 (1991)
p. 9-27; W.F.G. Lacroix, Afrika in de oudheid: een linguistisch-toponymische analyse van Ptolemaeus’ kaart van
Afrika, aangevuld met een bespreking van Ofir, Punt en Hanno’s reis (Delft, 1993); W.F.G. Lacroix, Africa in
antiquity: a linguistic and toponymic analysis of Ptolemy’s map of Africa, together with a discussion of Ophir,
Punt, and Hanno’s voyage (Saarbrücken, 1998).
Hanno, [The Navigator]. 1893. De hannonis carthaginiensis periplo. Edited, commented and
published by Curtius Theodorus Fischer. Leipzig: B.G. Teubner. Pp iv, 134.
The present “work is more of a treatise on the literature of his subject than a treatise on the subject itself” (Torr
1893:326).
Peripherals: C. Torr, The classical review, v. 7 (1893) p. 326.
Hanno, [The Navigator]. 1912. The periplus of Hanno: a voyage of discovery down the West
African coast, by a Carthaginian Admiral of the fifth century BC. Including the Greek text,
with a translation, and explanatory passages quoted from numerous authors; published by
Wilfred H. Schoff. Philadelphia: Commercial Museum. Pp 31.
Peripherals: E.L. Stevenson, Bulletin of the American Geographical Society, v. 45 (1913) p. 296.
Hanno, [The Navigator]. 1931. The Carthaginian voyage to West Africa in 500 BC [introduced and
edited by Sir H. Richmond Palmer]. In: The Carthaginian voyage to West Africa in 500 BC /
Sultan Mohammed Bello’s account of the origin of the Fulbe, p. (?). Bathurst: J.M. Lawani,
Government Printer.
Not sure if this is in Greek or English, or both.
Peripherals: E.W. S[mith], Journal of the African Society, v. 30 (1931) p. 438-439.
Hanno, [The Navigator]. 1958. Il periplo. Firenze: Fussi. Pp 49.
Hanno, [The Navigator]. 1979. Hanno’s Periplus [translated from Greek]. In: The date and origin
of the Greek version of Hanno’s Periplus, p. (?). Ed. by Jerker Blomqvist. Lund:
LiberLäromedel; Gleerup.
Includes the Greek version as well.
Hanno, [The Navigator]. 1995. Periplus, or, Circumnavigation: Greek text with facing English
translation, commentary, notes and facsimile of Codex Palatinus Gr.398. Published by
Al.N. Oikonomides; third edition. Chicago: Ares Publ. Pp 56, 49. ISBN-10 0-89005-217-4.
Herodotus. 420 BC. Istoria.
Herodotus of Halicarnassus lived 484-420 BC. Istoria, written between 430-425 BC, is commonly divided into nine
parts/books, named after the Greek muses. The second of these, Euterpe, deals exclusively with Egypt and its
history, culture and conditions. Book 4, Melpomene, includes a survey of Libyan nomads such as the Adyrmachidai,
Gilimagai, Kyrenians, Nasamonians, Garamantians, etc., as well as Libyan soil-tillers such as the Maxyans,
Zauekes, and Gyzantes. Herodotus’s text has been published in many commented editions and translations.
Peripherals: Pascal F.-J. Gosselin, Recherches sur la géographie systématique et positive des anciens (Paris,
1798/1813); James Rennell, The geographical system of Herodotus, examined and explained by a comparison with
those of other ancient authors and with modern geography (2nd ed., London, 1830); C.W.R. Neumann, Afrika
13
westlich vom Nil nach Herodotus (dissertation, Universität Halle, 1893); Arthur W. Stiffe, “The circumnavigation
of Africa related by Herodotus”, The geographical journal, v. 17 (1901) p. 203-204; E.J. Webb, “On the pretended
Phoenecian circumnavigation of Africa”, The geographical journal, v. 28 (1906) p. 297-298; Raymond A. Dart,
“The Garamantes of central Sahara”, African studies, v. 11 (1952) p. 29-34; Thomas W. Africa, “Herodotus and
Diodorus on Egypt”, Journal of Near Eastern studies, v. 22 (1963) p. 254-258; Truesdell S. Brown, “Herodotus
speculates about Egypt”, American journal of philology, v. 86 (1965) p. 60-76; R.C.C. Law, “The Garamantes and
trans-Saharan enterprise in classical times”, Journal of African history, v. 8 (1967) p. 181-200; Thomas Harrison,
“Herodotus’ conception of foreign languages”, Histos, v. 2 (1998), online; Daniel E. MacCall, “Herodotus on the
Garamantes: a problem in protohistory”, History in Africa, v. 26 (1999) p. 197-217; H.M. Fanter, “Libyan tribes:
the Garamantians and the Nasamonians” (in Arabic), Adûmâtû, v. 5 (2002) p.(?).
Herodotus. 1584. The famous hystory of Herodotus: conteyning the discourse of dyuers
countreys, the succession of theyr kyngs, the actes and exploytes atchieued by them, the
lavves and customes of euery nation, with the true description and antiquitie of the same;
deuided into nine bookes, entituled vvith the names of the nine Muses. Translated into
English by R.B. London: Thomas Marshe. Pp 119.
Herodotus. 1862. History, 4 vols. Translated by George Rawlinson; new edition. London: John
Murray.
Previous edition appeared 1858/60. Reprints are plenty, e.g. 1964 by Dent & Sons in London; and 1996 by
Wordsworth in London (ISBN-10 1-85326-466-0); and 1997 as The histories by David Campbell in London, with a
new introduction by Rosalind Thomas (ISBN-10 1-85715-234-4; xliii+772 pp).
Peripherals: Anon, New Englander and Yale review, v. 19 (1861) p. 214-220.
Herodotus. 1890. The history of Herodotus, 2 vols. Translated by G.C. Macaulay. London:
Macmillan.
Several later printings exist. Not sure if they are revision or mere reprints.
URL: www.gutenberg.org/etext/2131
Herodotus. 1920. Herodotus, with an English translation. Translated by A.D. Godley. Cambridge
MA: Harvard University Press.
URL: www.perseus.tufts.edu/cgi-bin/ptext?lookup=Hdt.+1.1.0
Herodotus. 1954. The histories. Newly translated and with an introduction by Aubrey de
Sélincourt. Penguin classics, #L34. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books. Pp 599.
Reprinted 1965 with an index (624 pp).
Herodotus. 1972. The histories. Translated by Aubrey de Sélincourt; new edition, revised and
annotated by A.R. Burn. Penguin classics. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books. Pp 653. ISBN10 0-14-044034-8.
Herodotus. 1992. The histories. Translated from the text of Baehr by Henry Cary, with maps and a
geographical concordance by Andrew Heritage and P.J.M. Geelan; edited and annotated by
Chris Scarre. London: Folio Society. Pp xxi, 631.
Herodotus. 1996. The histories. Translated by Aubrey de Sélincourt; third edition, newly revised
and annotated by John Marincola. Penguin classics. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books. Pp
xlvi, 622. ISBN-10 0-14-044638-9.
Herodotus. 2003. The histories. Translated by Aubrey de Sélincourt; fourth edition, further revised
and annotated by John Marincola. Penguin classics. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books. Pp
xlv, 716. ISBN-10 0-14-044908-6.
Horapollo. AD 450? Hieroglyphica. Firenze: Biblioteca Laurenziana.
The date is a wild guess and most likely wrong. Horapollo may or may not have been among the very last Ancient
Egyptian priests. The text bearing his name, which seemingly dates from the fifth century, claims to be an
explanation of Ancient Egyptian hieroglyphs, but tends to be more mystical than anything else. It survives in a
Greek translation which was (re)discovered during the 1420s and subsequently published in Venice in 1505 (or
thereabouts). The Greek text has since been reprinted and reissued numerous times. There are also many translations
available.
Peripherals: Samuel Sharpe, “Notes on the hieroglyphics of Horapollo Nilous”, Original papers read before the
Syro-Egyptian Society, v. 1 (1845) p. 49-60.
Horapollo. 1505. Hieroglyphica. Venetiis: Aldus Manutius.
Horapollo. 1840. The hieroglyphics of Horapollo Nilous. Translated by Alexander Turner Cory.
London: William Pickering. Pp 174.
Includes the original Greek text. Reprinted 1987 by Chthonios in London (ISBN-10 0-948366-04-4).
URL: www.sacred-texts.com/egy/hh/index.htm
14
Horapollo. 1943. Traduction des Hieroglyphica d’Horapollon [par Badouin van de Walle et Jozef
Vergote]. Chronique d’Egypte: bulletin périodique de la Fondation Egyptologique Reine
Elisabeth, v. 18, 35-36, p. 39-89, 199-239.
URL: www.chez.com/asklepios/horapollo/horapollon.htm
Horapollo. 1950. The hieroglyphics of Horapollo. Translated by George Boas. Bollingen series,
#23. New York: Pantheon Books. Pp 134.
Reprinted 1993 by Princeton University Press (ISBN-10 0-691-00092-1).
Peripherals: S. Morenz, Artibus Asiae, v. 13 (1950) p. 313-316.
Manetho. 220 BC. Aegyptiaka.
Manetho wrote his Aegyptiaka sometime during 280-220 BC. In it, he grouped Egyptian kings into 30 dynasties, a
categorization that has persisted till present days. The work as such is lost, however, and is preserved in garbled
fragments in various classical sources.
Peripherals: W.G. Waddell, Manetho (Harvard University Press, 1940); Wolfgang Helck, Untersuchungen zu
Manetho und den ägyptischen Königslisten (Untersuchungen zur Geschichte und Altertumskunde Ägyptens, Bd 18,
1956); A. Lloyd, “Manetho and the thirty-first dynasty”, Pyramid studies and other essay (London, 1988) p. 154160; Ian Shaw & Paul Nicholson, “Manetho”, Dictionary of Ancient Egypt (British Museum, 1992) p. 169; G.
Verbrugghe & J.M. Wickersham, Berossus and Manetho (University of Michigan Press, 1996).
Pliny the Elder. AD 79. Naturalis historia = Natural history.
The date is arbitrary. Pliny the Elder was a Roman historian who lived AD23-79. His Natural history comprises a
total of 37 books. In book 6, he refers to Hanno’s original periplus in which one of the Canary Islands is
mentioned. Apparently, “there are some traces of buildings to be seen here” (quoted from Bostock’s English
translation, publ. 1855), but no people are mentioned, only “vast multitudes of dogs of very large size” (idem).
URL: penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Pliny_the_Elder/home.html
Pliny the Elder. 1634. The historie of the world: commonly called, the natural historie of C.Plinius
Secundus. Translated into English by Philemon Holland, Doctor of Physicke. London: Adam
Islip. Pp 1448.
This might have appeared earlier in fact. There is at least one abridged later reprint of this, publ. 1962 by Centaur
Books.
Pliny the Elder. 1855/57. The natural history of Pliny, 6 vols. Translated, with copious notes and
illustrations by John Bostock and H.T. Riley. London: H.G. Bohn.
Reprinted (and revised?) several times.
URL: www.perseus.tufts.edu/cgi-bin/ptext?lookup=Plin.+Nat.+1.dedication
Pliny the Elder. 1940/63. Natural history, 10 vols. Translated by Harris Rackham, W.H.S. Jones
and D.E. Eichholz. Cambridge MA: Harvard University Press.
Vols 1-5 and 9 translated by Rackham, vols 6-8 by Jones, and vol 10 by Eichholz.
Plutarch. AD 125. Moralia.
The date is approximate and most certainly wrong. Plutarch, a Greek historian and biographer, lived AD 46-127.
Moralia is a collection of essays and includes, e.g., “On the worship of Isis and Osiris” (or “De Iside et Osiride”),
which treats Egyptian religious rites.
Plutarch. 1744. Ploutarchou peri Isidos kai Osiridos / Plutarchi de Iside et Osiride liber: Graece
et Anglice. Graeca recensuit, emendavit, commentario auxit, versionem novam Anglicanam
adjecit Samuel Squire. Cantabrigiae: Typis Academicis. Pp 8, 189, xvi, 112.
Plutarch. 1924. Isis et Osiris. Traduction nouvelle par Mario Meunier. Paris: L’Artisan du Livre.
Pp 236.
Plutarch. 1936. Isis and Osiris. In: Plutarch’s Moralia, v. 5, p. 1-191. Translated by Frank Cole
Babbitt. London: Loeb Classical Library.
URL: penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Plutarch/Moralia/Isis_and_Osiris*/home.html
Plutarch. 1967. Über Isis und Osiris, 2 Bde. Herausgegeben von Theodeor Hopfner. Darmstadt:
Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft.
Plutarch. 1970. Plutarch’s De Iside et Osiride. Edited with an introduction, translation and
commentary by J. Gwyn Griffiths. Cardiff UK: University of Wales Press. Pp xviii, 648.
ISBN-10 0-900768-48-7.
Plutarch. 1970. De Iside et Osiride. Edited and introduced by J. Gwyn Griffiths. Cardiff UK:
University of Wales Press. Pp xviii, 648.
Polybius. 120 BC. Istoria.
15
Polybius of Megalopolis was a Greek historian who lived c.200-120BC. His Histories, esp. book 15, includes bits
about North Africa and Egypt.
Polybius. 1727. Histoire de Polybe, 6 vols. Nouvellement traduite du grec par dom Vincent
Thuillier. Paris: Pierre Gandouin.
Polybius. 1759. Histoire de Polybe, 7 vols. Traduite du grec par Vincent Thuillier; nouvelle edition,
revué, corrigé et augmenté, avec d’un supplement. Amsterdam: Zacharie Chatelain & fils.
Polybius. 1772. The general history of Polybius, 2 vols. Translated from the Greek by Mr
Hampton. London.
There are apparently several subsequent editions of this.
Polybius. 1889. The histories of Polybius, 2 vols. Translated by Evelyn S. Shuckburgh from the
text of F. Hultsch. London: Macmillan.
Reprinted several times, e.g. 1962 by Indiana University Press in Bloomington; and 1974 by Greenwood Press in
Westport CN (ISBN-10 0-8371-6468-0).
URL: www.perseus.tufts.edu/cgi-bin/ptext?lookup=Plb.+1.1
Polybius. 1922/27. The histories, 6 vols. With and English translation by W.R. Paton. Cambridge
MA: Harvard University Press.
Reprinted 1975/79 by Harvard University Press at Cambridge MA (ISBN-10 0-674-99142-7).
Polybius. 1969/90. Histoires, 10 vols. Paris: Belles Lettres.
Siculus, Diodorus. 30 BC. Bibliotheca historia.
Diodorus Siculus, a Greek historian, lived appr. 90-30BC. The Bibliotheca historia included a total of 40 books, of
which the first dealt with Egypt and the third with Ethiopia and Libya. Only books 1-5 and 11-20 have survived.
Peripherals: Thomas W. Africa, “Herodotus and Diodorus on Egypt”, Journal of Near Eastern studies, v. 22 (1963) p.
254-258; F.R. Walton, Diodorus of Sicily (London, 1967); A. Burton, Diodorus Siculus: a commentary (Leiden,
1972); Ian Shaw & Paul Nicholson, “Diodorus Siculus”, Dictionary of Ancient Egypt (British Museum, 1992) p. 86.
Siculus, Diodorus. 1814. The historical library of Diodorus the Sicilian in fifteen books, to which
are added the fragments of Diodorus and those published by H. Valesius, I. Rhodomannus,
and F. Ursinus. Translated by G. Booth. London: J. Davis.
URL: books.google.com/books?id=agd-eLVNRMMC&printsec=titlepage&output=html
Siculus, Diodorus. 1933. An account of Egypt. Bulletin of the Fac. of Arts, University of Egypt, v.
1, p. (?).
In two parts. Details wanting.
Siculus, Diodorus. 1972/93. Bibliothèque historique. Introduction générale par François Chamoux
et Pierre Bertrac. Paris: Belles Lettres.
Several volumes. Several translators. Not sure about the date range.
Siculus, Diodorus. 1985. On Egypt: book 1 of Diodorus Siculus’ historical library. Jefferson NC:
McFarland.
Siculus, Diodorus. 1990. The antiquities of Egypt. New edition, revised. New Brunswick NJ &
London: Transaction Publ. Pp xiv, 179. ISBN-10 0-8873-8303-3.
Previous edition titled simply On Egypt, publ. 1985.
Strabo. AD 25. Geographia.
Strabo of Amaseia, a Greek historian/geographer, lived c.63BC-AD21. His Geographia comprised originally 17
books, but only fragments have survived. It was an encyclopeadia of contemporary knowledge. “Although not
generally as informative as Herodotus, Strabo’s Geography is nevertheless a valuable record of Egypt in the first
century BC” (Shaw & Nicholson 1995:280).
Peripherals: Ian Shaw & Paul Nicholson, “Strabo”, Dictionary of Ancient Egypt (British Museum, 1992) p. 280.
Strabo. 1917/36. The geography of Strabo, 8 vols. With an English translation by Horace Leonard
Jones, based in part upon the unfinished version of John Robert Sitlington Sterett. London &
New York: Heinemann; George P. Putnam’s Sons.
URL: www.perseus.tufts.edu/cgi-bin/ptext?lookup=Strab.+6.1.1
Section 2
MEDIEVAL SOURCES
from AD 650 to the mid-1400s
–– oOo ––
[Anon.] 1191. Kitâb al-istibsâr.
Kitab al-istibsâr includes information on contemporary Western Sudan. Though the text is largely derivative of alBakrî, the “presentation is an interpretative adaptation ... taking account of changes in Western Sudan since the
middle of the eleventh century” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:137). The text was completed in 1191 by an anonymous
nazir ‘reviser’, and draws heavily from al-Bakrî’s works. The text as we have it today is in fact “a composite work
with three layers: (1) al-Bakrî’s text, written 460/1068, which provides the bulk of the material; (2) the original
[Kitab al-istibsâr], written c.529/1135, which is an updated adaptation of al-Bakri with a few pieces of original
information; (3) revisions and additions by the nazir in 587/1191, which rendered it a pro-Almohad document”
(Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:138).
Peripherals: Nehemia Levtzion & J.F.P. Hopkins, Corpus of early Arabic sources for West African history
(Cambridge University Press, 1981).
[Anon.] 1852. Kitab al-istibsar: description de l’Afrique par un géographe arabe anonyme du
sixième siècle de l’Hègire. Texte arabe, publié pour la première fois par Alfred de Kremer.
Vienne: Imprimerie Royale de Cour et d’Etat. Pp 4, iii, 3, 82.
[Anon.] 1900. Kitab al-istibsar: l’Afrique septentrionale au XIIe siècle de notre ère. Traduite par
E. Fagnan. Constantine: D. Braham.
Reprinted 1979 by Bibliothèque Nationale in Paris (in microfiche format).
Abû ’l-Fidâ. 1321/31. Taqwîm al-buldân.
The author first finished the text in 1321, “but he continuously added to the text until his death [in 1331]” (Levtzion
& Hopkins 1981:195). Though the author “does not add any original treatment on the Sudan, his text is important
as an example of a scholarly treatment and interpretation of earlier sources” (idem). It also contains snippets from a
now lost geographical work by al-Muhallabî.
Abû Hâmid al-Gharnâtî. 1170. Tuhfat al-albab.
The date is a wild guess. The author died in 1169/70 (Isl. 565). The text includes “some interesting ethnographic
data on the Sudan, but he ornaments it with legendary fables, taken from the lore on ancient Tubba’ kings of Yemen
and the romance of Alexander the Great” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:132). Apparently the author travelled widely in
the Muslim East (incl. East Africa?).
Abû Hâmid al-Gharnâtî. 1925. Tuhfat al-albab [publié par G. Ferrand]. Journal asiatique, v. 207,
p. (?).
Abû Hâmid al-Gharnâtî. 1990. Tuhfat al-albab / El reglo de los espíritus. Presentación, traducción
y notas por Ana Ramos. Fuentes arábico-hispanas, #10. Madrid: Consejo Superior de
Investigaciones Científicas. Pp 145. ISBN-10 84-00-07064-X.
Al-‘Umarî. 1312. Al-ta‘rîf bi-’l-mustalah al-sharîf = Instruction on the noble convention.
This is a kind of Arabic language manual. It “consists chiefly of forms and words used in the formal part of official
letters and other documents. The book also includes information about the provinces and kingdoms with which the
Mamluk chancellery was in correspondence” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:252f). The date looks odd/wrong.
According to Encyclopedia of Islam, new ed., the author was born in 1301, which means that he must have compiled
this when he was 11!
Al-‘Umarî. 1337/38. Masâlik al-absâr fî mamâlik al-amsâr = Pathways of vision in the realms of
the metropolises.
17
“Together with Ibn Khaldûn’s chronicle and Ibn Battûta’s eye-witness account, al-‘Umarî’s work is a major source
for the history of Mâlî in the fourteenth century” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:253).
Al-‘Umarî. 1927. Masâlik al-absâr fî mamâlik al-amsâr. Traduit et annoté avec une introduction
et cartes par Gaudefroy-Demombynes. Bibliothèque des géographes arabes, #2. Paris. Pp iii,
lxviii, 284.
Al-Bakrî. 1067. Al-masalik wa-’l-mamalik = Roots and realms.
Not sure about the date. Early geographical work with material on West Africa.
Al-Bakrî. 1852. Description de l’Afrique. Par un géographe arabe anonyme du sixième siècle de
l’Hègire; texte arabe, publiée pour la première fois par Alfred de Kremer. Vienne: Imprimerie
Impériale Royale de Cour et d’Etat. Pp 4, iii, 3, 82.
French translation based on an abridged version of al-Bakrî’s original text.
Al-Bakrî. 1857. Description de l’Afrique septentrionale. Texte arabe revu sur quatre manuscrits
par De Slane. Paris. Pp i, 214.
Reprinted 1965 in Baghdad.
Al-Bakrî. 1911. Description de l’Afrique septentrionale, 2 parties. Édition revue et corrigée; texte
arabe revu sur quatre manuscrits et publié sous les auspices de M. le Maréchal comte
Randon, par Mac Guckin de Slane. Alger: Librairie Adolphe Jourdan. Pp 407.
Reprinted 1965 by Adrien-Maisonneuve in Paris.
Al-Bîrûnî. 1025. Kitâb tahdîd nihâyât al-amâkîn li-tashîh masâfât al-masâkîn.
The date is a wild guess. The author died some time after 1050. some sort of geographical work.
Al-Bîrûnî. 1050. Kitâb al-djamâhir fî ma‘rifat al-djawâhir = The conglomerate book on the
knowledge of the gems.
The date is a wild guess. The author died some time after 1050. Al-Bîrûnî’s Kitâb al-djamâhir is on minerals, and
includes some information on the “silent trade” of Western Sudan. However, much of the information in the chapter
on gold “in fact refers to the gold of Sofala on the East African coast” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:56).
Al-Bîrûnî. 1936. Biruni’s picture of the world: compiled from excerpts from four works. Edited by
A. Zeki Velidi Togan. Memoirs of the archaeological survey of India, #53. Hyderabad.
Al-Dimashqî. 1327. Nukhbat al-dahr fî ‘ajâ’ib al-barr wa-’l-bahr = The choice of the age, on the
marvels of land and sea.
The date is a wild guess. The author died in 1327. The work itself contains little of originality and copies much
information from previous authors (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:204).
Al-Fazârî. AD 850. Kitab al-zij.
The date is a wild guess. Kitab al-zij is a lost work which is often cited in the works of others. It contains the first
known reference to the Ghana Kingdom (see Hadj-Sadok, in Al-Zuhrî 1968:26-31; Fage 1995:56; and Levtzion &
Hopkins 1981:379f).
Al-Idrîsî. 1154. Kitab nuzhat al-mushtak fi ’khtirak al-afak / Kitab rudjar.
Generally referred to as the “Great Idrisi”, and sometimes as the “Book of Roger” since it was originally written on
the order of Roger II, the Norman King of Sicily (see Encyclopedia of Islam, new ed.).
Peripherals: Johann Melchior Hartmann, Commentatio de geographia Africae Edrisiana (Göttingen, 1791); Johann
Melchior Hartmann, Edrisii [descriptio] Africa (Göttingen, 1796); Nehemia Levtzion & J.F.P. Hopkins, Corpus of
early Arabic sources for West African history (Cambridge University Press, 1981).
Al-Idrîsî. 1190s. Rawd al-uns wa nuzhat al-nafs.
A second geographical work written by al-Idrîsî which seems to have been lost (see Encyclopedia of Islam, new
ed.). The date is a wild guess, and probably erroneous.
18
Al-Idrîsî. 1270s. Uns al-muhajd wa rawd al-furadj / Rawd al-furadj wa nuzhat al-muhadj.
Usually referred to as the “Little Idrisi”. This is either based on extracts from al-Idrîsî’s lost second geographical
work, or on a summary of the “Great Idrisi”. It has seemingly been revised or even rewritten by others (see
Encyclopedia of Islam, new ed.).
Al-Idrîsî. 1592. Kitâb nuzhat al-mushtâk fî dhikr al-amsâr wa ’l-aktâr wa ’l-buldân wa ’l-djuzur
wa ’l-madâyin wa ’l-âfâk. Roma: Medici.
“In addition to the complete text of the Book of Roger there exists an abbreviated text in which here and there
sections have been cut, apparently without any precise motive” (G. Oman, in Encyclopedia of Islam, new ed.). This
abbreviated work apparently goes by many names and “Many studies have been published based on various parts of
the Medici text” (idem).
Al-Idrîsî. 1600. ... [Title wanting]. Université Montpellier.
Unpublished Italian translation of the Book of Roger (see Encyclopedia of Islam, new ed.).
Al-Idrîsî. 1619. Geographia nubiensis, id est accuratissima totius orbis in septem climata divisi
descriptio continens praesertim exactam universiae Asiae et Africae, rerumque in iis
hactenus incognitarum explicationem. Recens ex arabico in latinum versa a Gabriele Sionita
Syriacarum, et arabicarum literarum professore, et Ioanne Hesronita, earundem regio
interprete, Maronitis. Paris: Hieronymi Blageart. Pp 12, 274, 12, 54; 40.
Latin translation of the fragmented version of the “Great Idrisi” that was published in Rome 1592 (see Encyclopedia
of Islam, new ed.).
Al-Idrîsî. 1836/40. Géographie d’Edrisi, 2 vols. Traduite de l’arabe d’après deux manuscrits de la
Bibliothèque du Roi et accompagnée de notes par P.-A. Jaubert. Recueil de voyages et de
mémoires publié par la Société de Géographie de Paris, #5-6. Paris: Imprimerie Royale.
Complete French translation of the “Great Idrisi”.
Al-Idrîsî. 1866. Description de l’Afrique et de l’Espagne. Texte arabe publiée pour la première fois
d’après les man. de Paris et d’Oxford avec une traduction, des notes et une glossaire par R.
Dozy et M.J. de Goeje. Leiden: E.J. Brill. Pp xxiii, 391, 242.
Selected extracts from the “Great Idrisi”.
Al-Idrîsî. 1983. Le maghrib au 6e siècle de l’Hègire (12e siècle après J.-C.). Texte établi et traduit
en français par Mahammad Hadj-Sadok. Paris. Pp 187, 219.
Al-Istakhrî. AD 934. Kitâb al-masâlik wa-’l-mamâlik.
Early Arabic geographical work that includes something on East Africa and the Zanj.
Al-Istakhrî. 1845. Das Buch der Länder, von Schech Ishak el Farisi el Isztachri. Aus dem
Arabischen übersetzt von A.D. Mordtmann, nebst einem Vorworte von C. Ritter. Schriften
der Akademie von Hamburg, #1:2. Hamburg: Rauhen Hauses in Horn. Pp xx, 204.
Al-Istakhrî. 1870. Kitâb al-masâlik wa-’l-mamâlik. Editit M.J. de Goeje. Bibliotheca
geographorum arabicorum, #1. Lugduni Batavorum: E.J. Brill. Pp 348, xi.
Al-Khuwârizmî. AD 840s. Sûrat al-ard = Picture of the world.
The date is a wild guess. Much of the information in this derives directly from Ptolemy’s works. Al-Khuwârizmî
“provides an early record of three place names in Africa - states of Kanim, Kawkaw and Ghan. These correspond to
the three early states of Kanim, Gao and Ghana, which are described more in detail by al-Ya‘qûbî over 30 years later.
The three places, however, were located by [al-Khuwârizmî] too far to the east” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:6).
Al-Khuwârizmî. 1916. Afrika nach der arabischen Bearbeitung der ‘Geographike hyphegesus’
des Claudius Ptolemaeus von Mohammad ibn Musa al-Hwarizmi. Herausgegeben,
übersetzt und erklärt von Hand von Mzik. Denkschriften der kaiserliche Akademie der
Wissenschaften in Wien, philosophisch-historische Klasse, #59:4. Wien: Alfred Hölder. Pp
xii, 93.
Al-Khuwârizmî. 1926. Das Kitâb sûrat al-ard des Abu Ga‘far Muhammad ibn Musa
alHuwarizmi. Herausgegeben nach dem handschriftlichen Unikum der Bibliotèque
Nationale et Universitaire de Strassburg (Cod. 4247), von Hand von Mzik. Bibliothek
arabischer Historiker und Geographen, #3. Leipzig: Otto Harrassowitz Verlag. Pp xxxi, 163.
19
Al-Maqrizi. 1845. Macrizi’s Geschichte der Copten. Aus den Handschriften zu Gotha und Wien
mit Übersetzung und Anmerkungen von Heinrich Ferdinand Wüstenfeld. Abhandlungen der
königlichen Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften zu Göttingen, #3. Göttingen: Dieterich’sen
Buchhandlung. Pp 142, 70.
Extracts from a longer travelogue originally written in Arabic sometime during 14th/15th century. (Al-Maqrizi
lived 1364-1442.) Reprinted 1979 by Georg Olms Verlag in Hildesheim. A Latin translation appeared 1790 in
Leiden.
Al-Mas‘ûdî. AD 947/56. Murûj al-dhahab.
Includes a handful early Bantu words (Doke 1960:27). “Al-Mas‘ûdî is a major source for the early history of Islam in
East Africa, which he visited in 304/916-17. His references to West Africa, however, are mostly borrowed from
other sources” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:30). There is also a précis of this work titled Kitab al-tanbih wa-’l-ishraf,
‘The book of notification and supervision’ (idem). Moreover, “al-Mas‘ûdî frequently refers to his magnum opus
Akhbar al-zaman wa-man abadahu ’l-hidthan, ‘History of the ages and those whom events have annihilated’, of
which he states Muruj al-dhahab to be an abridged version. Akhbar al-zaman is lost, and it is doubtful whether any
part of it is extant” (idem:33).
Peripherals: Carl Meinhof, “Afrikanische Worte in orientalischer Literatur”, Zeitschrift für Eingeborenen-Sprachen,
v. 10 (1919/20) p. 147-152; C.M. Doke, “The earliest records of Bantu”, African studies, v. 19 (1960) p. 26-32;
Nehemia Levtzion & J.F.P. Hopkins, Corpus of early Arabic sources for West African history (Cambridge
University Press, 1981).
Al-Mas‘ûdî. 1861/77. Les prairies d’or, 9 vols. Texte et traduction par C. Barbier de Meynard et
Pavet de Courteille. Collection d’ouvrages orientaux. Paris: Imprimerie Impériale pour la
Société Asiatique.
Al-Muhallabî. AD 990. Al-masâlik wa-’l-mamâlik [al-‘azîzî].
Not sure about the date. The author died 990. Early geographical work with information on West Africa.
Al-Qalqashandî. 1412. Subh al-a‘shâ fî sinâ‘at al-inshâ’ = The dawn of the night-blind, on the art
of letter-writing.
This is “a sort of a manual for officials in the Mamluk chancellery, containing, among much other matter,
summaries of the history of the different states with whom the Mamluks had relations, descriptions of their
governments, and the formulae to be adopted in co[r]respondence with their rulers” (Levtzion & Hopkins
1981:343). “Al-Qalqashandî has some important pieces of information, mainly on Bornu, which is based on
original first-hand sources” (idem:344).
Al-Qalqashandî. 1927. ... [Subh al-a‘shâ fî sinâ‘at al-inshâ’]. In: “Masâlik el absâr fi mamâlik el
amsâr” par Ibn Fadl Allah al-‘Omari, p. 40-42. Ed. by Maurice Gaudefroy-Demombynes.
Bibliothèque des géographes arabes, #2. Paris.
Title wanting. Includes a French translation of the section dealing with Bornu.
Al-Qazwînî. 1275. ‘Ajâ’ib al-makhlûqât wa-âthâr al-bilâd = The marvels of the created beings and
the monuments of the lands.
Geographical dictionary that “seems to exist in several versions with variant titles” (Levtzion & Hopkins
1981:176). The author copied much from earlier works, incl. Yâqût al-Rûmî. “Al-Qazwînî’s original information
about the Sahara and the Sudan comes from two travellers to the Sudan. One was ‘Alî al-Janahânî al-Maghribî, who
described Kâkudam, Takrûr and the salt mines of Taghâza, and combined his observations with anecdotes about
jinns, termites and elephants. The other traveller, Abû ’l-Rabî‘ al-Multânî, described the route between Sijilmâsa
and Ghâna” (idem).
Al-Qazwînî. 1868. Zakarija ben Muhammed ben Mahmûd el-Khazwîni’s Kosmographie. Nach
der Wüstenfeldschen Textausgabe, mit Benutzung und Beifügung der reichhaltigen
Anmerkungen und Verbesserungen des Herrn Fleischer, aus dem Arabischen zum ersten
Male vollständig übersetzt von Hermann Ethé. Leipzig: Fues’s Verlag. Pp xii, 532.
Not sure this is complete.
Al-Qazwînî. 1986. Die Wunder des Himmels und der Erde. Aus dem Arabischen übertragen und
bearbeitet von Alma Giese. Bibliothek arabischer Klassiker, #11. Stuttgart: Thienemann. Pp
264. ISBN-10 3-522-62110-7.
Al-Sarakhsî. 1203. Rihla.
20
The date is a wild guess. The author was in service at the Almohad court during 1197-1203. He wrote a travelogue
which has survived only in quotations in the works of others, in particular al-Maqqarî. It has important historical
information on “the relations between the Almohads and the Sudan at the end of the twelfth century” (Levtzion &
Hopkins 1981:370).
Al-Sharîshî. 1222. Sharh al-maqâmât al-harîriyya.
The date is a wild guess. The author died in 1222 (Isl. 619). Not sure what title would be appropriate here. The author
“composed an elaborate commentary to the Maqamat of al-Hariri” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:152). These
commentaries include bits of information on Ghana, Islam and travelling traders (idem). Not sure if they were ever
translated, but seemingly several modern Arabic editions exist, most of which have been published in Cairo.
Al-Tijânî. 1309. Rihlat al-Tijânî.
The date is a wild guess. Al-Tijânî’s travels took place 1306-1309. The Arabic text was published/reprinted 1958 in
Tunis, edited by H. Hasanî ‘Abd al-Wahhâb.
Al-Tijânî. 1852. Voyage du Sheikh et-Tidjani dans la régence de Tunis pendant les années 706,
707 et 708 de l’Hègire (1306-1309) [traduit de l’arabe par A. Rousseau]. Journal asiatique,
4ème série, v. (?), p. 57-209.
The jorno vol is either 19 (= OS 60) or 20 (= OS 61).
Al-Ya‘qûbî. AD 872/73. Târîkh.
Al-Ya‘qûbî’s “account of the peoples and kingdoms of the Sudan, west of the Nile, provides the earliest insight into
the political history and the dynamics of state-building in West Africa ... [Al-Ya‘qûbî] remained the main source for
the kingdoms of Kanim, Kawkaw, and Ghana until the contribution of al-Bakrî” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:19).
Al-Ya‘qûbî. AD 889/90. Kitâb al-buldân = Book of countries.
As far as “the information about the Sahara and the Sudan is concerned, there is nothing in common between the
Tarikh and Kitâb al-buldân, though there is also nothing contradictory” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:19).
Peripherals: M.A. al Farra, A critical edition of Kitab al-buldan by Al-Ya‘qubi (PhD thesis, University of Exter,
1981); Nehemia Levtzion & J.F.P. Hopkins, Corpus of early Arabic sources for West African history (Cambridge
Al-Ya‘qûbî. 1883. Târîkh. Edited and translated by M.Th. Houtsma. Lugduni Batavorum: E.J.
Brill. Pp i, 629.
Not sure about the title on this. It’s presumably longer than just one word.
Al-Ya‘qûbî. 1937. Les pays. Traduction par Gasto Wiet. Publications de l’Inst. Français
d’Archéologie Orientale du Caire: textes et traductions d’auteurs orientaux, #1. Le Caire. Pp
xxxi, 291.
Translation of Kitab al-buldân. Reprinted 1997 by Johann Wolfgang Goethe University in Frankfurt-am-Main
(Publications of the Institute for the History of Arabic-Islamic Science, #265).
Al-Zuhrî. 1154. Kitâb al-jughrâfiyâ = The book of geography.
The date is a wild guess. “There are at least nine known manuscripts ... No two manuscripts are quite identical ...
[Nonetheless] al-Zuhrî’s text is of great importance, mainly in providing some valuable pieces of evidence about
the impact of the Almoravids on the western Sudan” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:93-94).
Al-Zuhrî. 1968. Kitâb al-ja‘râfiyya. Edité et traduite par Mahammad Hadj-Sadok. Bulletin
d’études orientales, #21. Inst. Français de Damas. Pp 194.
Chao Ju-kua. 1250. Chu fah chih = Gazetteer of foreigners.
Early Chinese source on East Africa (Wheatley 1975, Shen 1995). The date date is a wild guess. The author was
active sometime during the thirteenth century.
Peripherals: Paul Wheatley, “Analecta sino-africana recensa” and “Notes on Chinese texts containing references to
East Africa”, East Africa and the Orient (ed. by H.N. Chittick & R.I. Rotberg, 1975) p. 76-114, 284-290.
Chou Ch’u-fei. 1163. Ling-wai tai-ta = Information from beyond the mountains.
Early Chinese source on East Africa (Wheatley 1975, Shen 1995).
21
Hartmann, Johann Melchior. 1791. Commentatio de geographia Africae Edrisiana. Göttingen:
J.C. Dietrich. Pp iv, 170, 10.
Based on extracts from the “Great Idirisi”, originally published 1154 in Arabic.
Hartmann, Johann Melchior. 1796. Edrisii [descriptio] Africa. Editio altera. Göttingen.
New edition of Commentatio de geographia Africae Edrisiana. Not sure if the word “descriptio” really appears in the
title.
Ibn al-Faqîh. AD 903. Kitâb al-buldân.
Includes “the oldest recorded Bantu word for ‘God’ ... lmklwglw [in the language of the Zang, East Africa]” (Doke
1960:27). The date refers to a now lost first version. “It had been originally an encyclopedia of the Muslim world in
five volumes, but the extant text is an abridged version (mukhtasar), made in 413/1022 by ‘Ali al-Shayzari”
(Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:26). Ibn al-Faqîh borrowed much from the works of earlier authors. His “original
contribution is the description of a route from Ghana to Egypt” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:26). Later geographers,
such as al-Muqaddasî, criticized Ibn al-Faqîh’s work for “its imprecise geographical information and a number of
irrelevant digressions” (Encyclopedia of Islam III:761, new ed.).
Ibn al-Faqîh. 1885. Compendium libri kitâb al-boldân. Quod edidit, indicibus et glossario instruxit
M.J. de Goeje. Bibliotheca geographorum arabicorum, #5. Lugduni Batavorum: E.J. Brill. Pp
lxvii, 365.
Ibn al-Faqîh. 1973. Abrégé du livre des pays. Traduit de l’arabe par Henri Massé. Damascus: Inst.
Français de Damas. Pp vii, 440.
Ibn al-Khatîb. 1375. Al-ihâta fî târîkh Gharnâta.
The date is a wild guess. The author died in 1375. The work deals primarily with Granada (in Spain), but it also
contains a quotation from one Abû ‘Abd Allâh Muhammad al-Maqqarî, a native of Tlemcen, which in turn includes “a
detailed description of the operation of the trans-Saharan trade in the middle of the thirteenth century ... with some
insights into the conditions in the Western Sudan during a little known period, which marked the rise of Mâlî to
hegemony” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:306).
Ibn al-Nadîm. AD 987. Kitâb al-fihrist.
The Kitâb al-fihrist claims to be an index of all known books by Arabs or about the Arabian world. It includes
something on East Africa and the Zanj. There are two known contemporary versions, one longer, one abridged (cfr
Encyclopaedia of Islam, new ed.). The full Arabic text has been published/reprinted several times, e.g. 1991 by Al‘Arabi in Cairo (ISBN-10 977-50-4000-0).
Ibn al-Nadîm. 1998. The Fihrist: a 10th century AD survey of Islamic culture. Edited and
translated by Bayard Dodge. Chicago: KAZI Publ. Pp xxxiv, 1149.
Ibn al-Raqîq. 1028. Kitâb ta’rîkh Ifrîqiya wa ’l-Maghrib.
Early geographical work on (North) Africa. Several volumes. The date is a wild guess. The author died c.1028.
Ibn al-Raqîq. 1028/1994. Ta’rîkh Ifrîqiya wa al-Maghrib. Taqdim wa tahqiq wa ta‘liq Muhammad
Zaynham Muhammad ‘Azab. El Qahira: Dar al-Farjani.
Is this a reprint of some newly-found manuscript? (The first date refers to when the author died.).
Ibn Battûta. 1358. Tuhfat al-nuzzâr fî gharâ’ib al-amsâr wa-‘adjâ’ib al-asfâr.
Ibn Battûta travelled widely in Asia and Africa, and can in several ways be labelled as the first modern explorer. He
visited Kilwa in 1331 and the Mali Empire in 1351/52. His journal is filled with detailed observations on many
22
things. Ibn Battûta dictated his travels to Ibn Djuzayy, who acted as a kind of ghost-writer. The definite text, as we
know it, appeared in early 1358 (Encyclopedia of Islam, new ed.).
Peripherals: Prof. Paul Chaix, “On the travels of Ibn-Batútah”, Scottish geographical magazine, v. 4 (1888) p. 475479; Ivan Hrbek, “The chronology of Ibn Battuta’s travels”, Archiv orientální, v. 30 (1962) p. 409-486; Nehemia
Levtzion & J.F.P. Hopkins, Corpus of early Arabic sources for West African history (Cambridge University Press,
1981).
Ibn Battûta. 1829. The travels of Ibn Battuta. Edited and translated from abridged Arabic
manuscript copies by Reverend Samuel Lee. London: John Murray for the Oriental
Translation Committee. Pp xviii, 243.
Reprinted by Darf Publishers in London (ISBN-10 1-85077-035-2).
Ibn Battûta. 1853/59. Voyages d’ibn Battuta: texte arabe, 4 vols. Accompagné d’une traduction par
C. Defrémery et B.R. Sanguinetti. Paris.
Ibn Battûta. 1929. Ibn Battúta, travels in Asia and Africa, 1325-54. Translated and selected by
H.A.R. Gibb, with an introduction. Broadway travellers series. London: George Routledge &
Sons. Pp vii, 398.
Reprinted several times, e.g. 1983 by Darf Publishers in London (ISBN-10 1-85077-002-6).
Peripherals: A.E.R., Journal of the African Society, v. 28 (1929) p. 428.
Ibn Battûta. 1958/71. The travels of Ibn Battuta, A.D. 1325-1354, 3 vols. Translated with revisions
and notes by H.A.R. Gibb, from the Arabic text edited by C. Defrémery and B.R.
Sanguinetti. Works issued by the Hakluyt Society, second series, #110+117+141.
Cambridge: The University Press. Pp xvii, 269; xii, [271]-537; xi, [539]-771.
Peripherals: R.B. Serjeant, Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, v. 22 (1959) p. 145-146; J.F.P.
Hopkins, Journal of African history, v. 1 (1960) p. 173; R.B. Serjeant, Bulletin of the School of Oriental and
African Studies, v. 26 (1963) p. 655-657; R.B. Serjeant, Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, v.
35 (1972) p. 628-629.
Ibn Battûta. 1975. Ibn Battuta in Black Africa. Translated from the Arabic and edited by Said
Hamdun and Noel King. London: Collings. Pp 4, 99. ISBN-10 0-901720-57-7.
Selected extracts from Ibn Battûta’s travels.
Ibn Battûta. 1994. Ibn Battuta in Black Africa. Second edition, translated from the Arabic and
edited by Said Hamdun and Noel King, with a new foreword by Ross E. Dunn. Princeton
NJ: Markus Wiener Publ. Pp xxxii, 118. ISBN-10 1-55876-087-3 pb, 1-55876-088-1 pb.
Selected extracts from Ibn Battûta’s travels. There’s also a revised printing of this edition dated 1998.
Ibn Hawqal. AD 967/88. Kitâb sûrat al-ard = The picture of the Earth.
The work was first completed before 967. A second version appeared c.977, and a final one c.988. “In between [Ibn
Hawqal] continued his travels and other investigations, the results of which were incorporated in later versions,
sometimes without the necessary editorial care. This is one source for some obscurities and inconsistencies in [Ibn
Hawqal]’s work” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:44). Ibn Hawqal’s work seems to be a revision of an earlier
geographical work written by Ibrahim ibn Muhammad Istakhri (dated 951), which itself was based on a collection of
maps produced in early 10th century by Ahmad Ibn Sahl Balkhi (see Encyclopedia of Islam, new ed.).
Ibn Hawqal. 1800. The Oriental geography of Ebn Haukal, an Arabian traveller of the tenth
century. Translated from a manuscript in his own possession by Sir William Ouseley.
London: T. Cadell & W. Davies. Pp 4, xxxvi, 327, plate.
Ibn Hawqal. 1873. Kitâb al-masâlik wa-’l-mamâlik / Kitâb sûrat al-ard. Edited and translated by
Michael Jan de Goeje. Bibliotheca geographorum arabicorum, #2. Lugduni Batavorum: E.J.
Brill.
Based on three manuscripts located in Leiden, Paris and Oxford, respectively.
Ibn Hawqal. 1938/39. Opus geographicum: secundum textum et imagines codicis
constantinopolitani conservati in biliotheca antiqui palatii no 3346 cui titulus est “Liber
imaginis terrae”, 2 vols. Editit collato textu primae editionis aliisque fontibus adhibitis J.H.
Kramer. Bibliotheca geographorum arabicorum, #2. Lugduni Batavorum & Lipsiae: E.J.
Brill; Otto Harrassowitz Verlag.
This supersedes Goeje’s 1873-edition. It is based on “a better and more complete manuscript at the Old Seray
Library in Istanbul” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:44).
23
Ibn Hawqal. 1964. Configuration de la terre, 2 vols. Introduction et traduction, avec index, par J.H.
Kramer et Gaston Wiet. Collection UNESCO d’oeuvres représentatives, série arabe.
Beyrouth: Commission Internationale pour la Traduction des Chefs-d’Oeuvre.
French translation of Kramer’s edition, originally prepared by him, but later completed and published by G. Wiet.
Ibn Hawqal. 1971. Configuracion del mundo. Traducción e índices por M.J. Romani Suya. Textos
medievales, #26. Valencia. Pp 100.
Ibn Khaldûn. 1374-1406. Kitâb al-‘ibar wa-dîwân al-mubtada’ wa-’l-khabar fî ayyâm al-‘arab wa’l-najam wa-’l-barbar = The book of examples and the register of subject and predicate.
This is Ibn Khaldûn’s Universal History, a work which was never completed. It was written mainly during 1374-78,
but the author continued to add to it until his death in 1406. The complete Arabic text was published 1867 at Bûlâq
as Al-’ibar wa-dîwân al-mubtada’ wa ’l-khabar fî ayyâm al’Arab wa ’l-’ajam wa ’l-barbar wa-man ’âsarahum min
dhawî ’l-sultân al-akbar (a total of seven volumes). However, this “edition is generally inaccurate, especially as to
proper names, but sometimes it affords better readings than De Slane’s edition ... The Beirut edition of 1956-59
(reprinted 1961) is a copy of the Bûlâq one. The only critical edition (though now inadequate) is de Slane’s
publication of the sections on the Maghrib (and the Sudan). It contains material lacking in the Bûlâq edition and
presents it in a slightly different order” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:318).
(Cambridge University Press, 1981); Maya Shatzmiller, L’historiographie mérinide: Ibn Khaldûn et ses
contemporains (E J Brill, 1982).
Ibn Khaldûn. 1382-1406. Muqaddima.
This is the so-called Prolegomena, written as an introduction to the author’s Universal History. It is divided into 6
major sections/chapters: “Chapter 1: a general treatise of human society ... Chapter 2: on the societies of rural and,
generally speaking fairly primitive, civilization ... Chapter 3: on the different forms of government, on states and
institutions. Chapter 4: on the societies of urban civilization ... Chapter 5: on industries and economic affairs in
general. Chapter 6: on scholarship, literature and cultural matters in general” (M. Talbi, in Encyclopedia of Islam,
new ed.). The author kept revising the work till he died in 1406, and “the many existing MSS. (including an
autograph) illustrate this process. None of the printed editions measures up to modern standards of scholarship.
They follow two traditions: one whose sole representative is that of M. Quatremère (3 vols., Paris, 1858-68), and
the other which has its origin in the Bûlâq (Cairo) edition of 1247/1857 by Nasr al-Hûrînî. The latter is the ancestor
of all subsequent printed editions. One of Quatremère’s MSS. is the most complete one and incorporates Ibn
Khaldûn’s last modifications. The Bûlâq text, on the contrary, is based on one of the earliest versions and so
contains the least number of the author’s revisions” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:318).
Ibn Khaldûn. 1852/56. Histoire des berbères et des dynasties musulmanes de l’Afrique
septentrionale, 4 vols. Traduit de l’arabe par le Baron de Slane. Algiers.
Translations from Ibn Khaldûn’s Kitab al-‘ibar.
URL: books.google.se/books?id=TXVBAAAAIAAJ
Ibn Khaldûn. 1925/56. Histoire des berbères et des dynasties musulmanes de l’Afrique
septentrionale, 4 vols. Nouvelle édition, traduit de l’arabe par le Baron de Slane, publié sous
la direction de Paul Casanova, et suivie d’une bibliographie d’Ibn Khaldoun. Paris: Librairie
Orientaliste Paul Geuthner. Pp lxvi, 452; 605; 507; 628.
Ibn Khaldûn. 1950. An Arab philosophy of history: selections from the Prolegomena of ibn
Khaldun of Tunis. Translated and arranged by Charles Issawi. Wisdom of the East series.
London: John Murray.
Translation of Ibn Khaldûn’s Muqaddima. Reprinted (though labelled as a new edition?) in 1987 by Darwin Press at
Princeton NJ (ISBN-10 0-87850-056-1).
Ibn Khallikan. 1274. Wafayât al-a‘yân wa-anbâ’ abnâ’ al-zamân = Deaths of notables and news of
sons of the times.
Ibn Khallikan’s work “is especially valuable because he used sources which are now lost, such as the anonymous
history of the Maghrib written in Mosul in 579/1184 (or 599/1202)” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:163).
Ibn Khallikan. 1842-1871. Ibn Khallikan’s biographical dictionary, 4 vols. Translated from the
Arabic by Bn. MacGuckin de Slane. Publications of the Oriental Translation Fund, #59.
Paris & London: Oriental Translation Fund of Great Britain and Ireland.
Reprinted 1970 Librairie du Liban in Beirut.
Ibn Khurradâdhbih. AD 846/85. Kitâb al-masâlik wa-’l-mamâlik = The book roots and realms.
The book was first completed in 846, but the author continually revised it until his death in 885. “The text as we
have it is evidently a somewhat mutilated version” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:16). The information on Islamic
24
North Africa is seemingly reliable “but his accounts of remote countries read more like childish fables ... He had
practically no information about sub-Saharan Africa, but his vague reference to ‘the land of Zagbi b. Zaghi’ has
given rise to many speculations” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:16).
Ibn Khurradâdhbih. 1889. Kitâb al-masâlik wa-’l-mamâlik / Liber viarum et regnorum. Quae
cum versione Gallica edidit, indicibus et glossario instruxit M.J. de Goeje. Bibliotheca
geographorum arabicorum, #6. Lugduni Batavorum: E.J. Brill. Pp xxiii, 216, 308.
Ibn Qutayba. AD 880. Kitâb al-ma‘ârif = The book of knowledge.
Includes quoted passages from a number of previous sources, incl. one Wahb b. Munabbih who seems to have made
“the earliest known reference in Arabic sources to the peoples of the Sudan in general and to the Zaghawa in
particular” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:14).
Ibn Qutayba. 1850. Ibn Coteiba’s Handbuch der Geschichte. Aus den Handschriften der K.K.
Hofbibliothek zu Wien, der Herzoglichen Bibliothek zu Gotha, und der UniversitätsBibliothek zy Leyden, herausgegeben von Ferdinand Wüstenfeld. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck
& Ruprecht. Pp viii, 366.
Reprinted 1977 by O. Zeller in Osnabrück.
Ibn Rusta. AD 900. Kitâb al-a‘lâq al-nafîsa.
Date is approximate. Early Arabic geographical work, which has only survived in parts. Includes something on East
Africa and the Zanj.
Ibn Rusta. 1892. Al-mujallad al-sabi’ min kitâb al-a‘lâq al-nafîsa. Bibliotheca geographorum
arabicorum, #7. Lugduni Batavorum: E.J. Brill. Pp viii, 373.
Ibn Rusta. 1967. Al-mujallad al-sabi’ min kitâb al-a‘lâq al-nafîsa. Editio secunda. Bibliotheca
geographorum arabicorum, #7. Leiden: E.J. Brill. Pp viii, 373.
Ibn Sa‘îd al-Maghribî. 1255. Al-nafha al-miskiyya fi ’l-rihla al-Makkiyya.
Ibn Sa‘îd al-Maghribî wrote a travelogue during his return from his second pilgrimage, from Mecca to Tunisia (see
Encyclopedia of Islam, new ed.).
Ibn Sa‘îd al-Maghribî. 1269. Kitâb al-jughrâfiyâ = The book of geography.
Complete versions available at Bibliothèque Nationale in Paris (ref. 2234) and the British Library in London (ref.
Or. 1524). Includes many borrowings from al-Bakrî and al-Idrîsî. He makes references to “thirteen nations of
blacks, who extended across Africa, from Ghánah on the W. to the Bojá on the shores of the Red Sea” (Greenough
1841:liii). “Ibn Sa‘îd’s text is difficult to read and many names can hardly be identified. But his text contains many
pieces of original and valuable evidence. He is particularly important for his detailed and up-to-date information
about the area of Lake Chad and about the Kingdom of Kânim, which is poorly represented in the world of al-Bakrî
and al-Idrîsî. For some of his original information Ibn Sa‘îd is in debt to Ibn Fâtima, who had travelled in the
Sahara, the Sudan, and even in East Africa” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:181f).
Ibn Sa‘îd al-Maghribî. 1269. Kitâb bast al-ard fî ’l-tûl wa-’l-‘ard. Oxford: Bodleian Library,
Rhodes House.
Abridged version of Kitâb al-jughrâfiyâ.
Ibn Sa‘îd al-Maghribî. 1970. Kitâb al-jughrâfiyâ. Edited, with a preface and appendix by I. al‘Arabî. Beirut. Pp 262.
Kubbel, L.E.; Matveev, V.V.; Tolmalcheva, Marina. 1985. ... = Arabic sources of the 12-13th
centuries for the ethnography and history of Africa south of the Sahara. Leningrad.
Title wanting. In Russian and Arabic.
Kubbel, L.E.; Matveev, V.V.; Tolmalcheva, Marina. 2002. ... = Arabic sources of the 13-14th
centuries for the ethnography and history of Africa south of the Sahara. Moskva: Nauka.
Title wanting. In Russian and Arabic.
25
Levtzion, Nehemia; Hopkins, J.F.P. (Ed.) 1981. Corpus of early Arabic sources for West African
history. With texts translated from Arabic. Fontes historiae africanae, series arabica, #4.
Cambridge University Press. Pp xx, 492. ISBN-10 0-521-22422-5.
Contains translations of selected passages from the writings of al-Khuwârizmî, Ibn ‘Abd al-Hakam, Ibn Qutayba,
Ibn Khurradâdhbih, al-Baladhuri, al-Ya‘qûbî, al-Dinawari, Ibn Saghir, Ibn al-Faqîh (= al-Hamadhani), al-Hamdani,
al-Mas‘ûdî, Ishaq ibn al-Husayn, al-Ishtakhri, Ibn Hawqal, al-Muqaddasi, Ibn Abi Zayd, al-Bîrûnî, al-Maliki, alBakrî, al-Marwazi, al-Zuhrî, ‘Iyad, al-Idrîsî, Abu Hamid, Benjamin of Tuleda, al-Sharîshî, Ibn Hammad, al-Tadili,
Ibn al-Athir, Ibn Khallikan, Yâqût al-Rûmî, al-Qazwînî, Ibn Sa‘îd al-Maghribî, Abû ’l-Fidâ, al-Dimashqî, al-Tijânî,
Ibn Abi Zar‘, Ibn al-Dawadari, al-‘Umarî (Ibn Fadl Allâh al-‘Umarî), Ibn Battûta, Ibn Kathir, Ibn al-Khatîb, Ibn
Khaldûn, al-Qalqashandî, al-Maqrizi, Ibn Hajar, Ibn Taghri Birdi, al-Sakhawi, Ibn Iyas, Ibn Majid, al-Shammakhi,
al-Maqqarî, various anonymous authors, plus four “Ibadi extracts”.
Peripherals: H.T. Norris, Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, v. 45 (1982) p. 174-176.
Palmer, H. Richmond. 1928. Sudanese memoirs: being mainly translations of a number of Arabic
manuscripts relating to the central and western Sudan, 3 vols. Lagos: Government Printer.
Reprinted 1967 by Frank Cass & Co. in London (Cass library of African studies, general studies, #47).
Sâ‘íd al-Andalusî. 1070. Tabakât al-uman / Târîkh al-uman. Pp 80.
Not sure of the date. The author died in 1070.
Sâ‘íd al-Andalusî. 1935. Kitâb tabakât al-uman / Livre des catégories des nations. Traduction
avec notes et indices précédée d’une introduction par Régis Blachère. Publications de l’Inst.
des Haute Etudes Marocaines, #28. Paris. Pp 191.
Sâ‘íd al-Andalusî. 1991. Science in the medieval world: “Book of the categories of nations”.
Translated and edited by Sema‘an I. Salem and Alok Kumar. History of science series, #5.
Austin TX: University of Texas Press. Pp xxvi, 118. ISBN-10 0-292-70469-0 pb, 0-29271139-5 hb.
Reprinted 1996 by the same publishers.
Syncellus, George. AD 810. Ekloge chronographika.
The date is a guess. The author died c.810. Syncellus’s Chronography is a history of the world from Adam & Eve till
c.285. It quotes extensively from Africanus’s and Eusebius’s versions of Manetho’s Egyptian king list.
Syncellus, George. 1652. Georgiou Synkellou chronographia, ab Adamo usque as Diocletianum /
Georgii Syncelli chronographia. Adiecta versione latina, editus; cura et studio Iacobi Goar.
Parisiis.
Includes Syncellus’s Chronography together with another world history written by St Nicephorus also titled
Chronography. Reprinted or revised 1729 by Bartholomaei Javarina at Venetiis (i.e. Venice).
Syncellus, George. 1829. Gergius Syncellus et Nicephorus Cp. Ex recensione Guilielmi Dindorfii.
Bonnae: Weberi.
Includes the Chronographies of Syncellus and Nicephorus. Possibly identical to the 1652-title.
Syncellus, George. 1984. Ecloge chronographica. Edidit Alden A. Mosshammer. Bibliotheca
scriptorum Graecorum et Romanorum Teubneriana. Leipzig: B.G. Teubner.
Syncellus, George. 2002. The chronography of George Synkellos: a Byzantine chronicle of
universal history from the creation. Translated from Greek by William Adler and Paul
Tuffin. Oxford University Press.
URL: www.tertullian.org/rpearse/syncellus
Tu Huan. AD 775. Ching-shing chi = Records of travel.
Early Chinese source on East Africa (Wheatley 1975, Shen 1995). The date is a wild guess. The author lived during
the 8th century.
Tuan Ch’eng-shih. AD 863. Yu-yang tsa-tsu = Assorted dishes from Yu-yang.
Early Chinese source on East Africa (Wheatley 1975, Shen 1995). The date is a wild guess. The author died 863.
Yâqût al-Rûmî. 1212/24. Mu‘jm al-buldân = The dictionary of countries.
Includes an early recording of the name for Zanzibar, i.e. Langûjah (Doke 1960:27). Yâqût al-Rûmî’s Mu‘jm albuldân is a geographical dictionary with place names arranged alphabetically. The author began writing it in 1212.
“For entries on the Sahara and the Sudan Yâqût quotes the tenth-century Ibn Hawqal and the eleventh century alBakrî. But he also borrowed (without acknowledgement) from Ibn al-Faqîh ... But by far the most important
quotations are those from al-‘Azîzî, the lost work of al-Muhallabî” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:167).
26
Yâqût al-Rûmî. 1866/73. Jacut’s geographisches Wörterbuch. Aus den Handschriften zu Berlin,
St Petersburg und Paris auf Kosten der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft
herausgegeben von Ferdinand Wüstenfeld. Leipzig: F.A. Brockhaus.
Several volumes, but not sure exactly how many. Levtzion & Hopkins (1981:168) say 6, COPAC says 9.
Section 3
PRE-MODERN WORKS
from the mid-1400s to c.1800
–– oOo ––
[Anon.] 17xx. Manuscript grammar of the Angola.
Latham (1847:190) mentions an “MS grammar of the Angola”, but gives little details. He could be referring to
Descourvières (1770).
[Anon.] 1520s. The Kilwa chronicle(s).
An early Arabic document relating the history of the town of Kilwa. Both Swahili and English translations exist.
[Anon.] 1540s. Le langage de Guynee. Manuscrit, ref. MS Fr. 24269, f. 51f-52r. Paris:
Bibliothèque Nationale.
Not sure about the title. Contains a brief Krahn vocabulary of c.80 terms collected by an unknown Frenchman in the
1540s (Dalby & Hair 1964).
Peripherals: David Dalby & Paul E.H. Hair, “‘Le langage de Guynee’: a sixteenth-century vocabulary from the
Pepper Coast”, African language studies, v. 5 (1964) p. 174-191.
[Anon.] 1615. Ragvagli d’alcvne missioni fatte dalli padri della compagnia di giesv nell’indie
orientali, coie nelle Provincie di Goa e Coccinno e nell Africa il Capo Verde. Romae.
[Anon.] 1680. Arte da lingua de Cafre. Lisboa: Bibliotheca Nacional d’Ajuda. Pp 42.
Date uncertain. Anonymous grammar of an early dialect of Sena N44. “The present state of the MS. shews a large
number of unintelligent copyist’s errors” (Doke 1959:59).
Peripherals: F. Paul Schebesta, “Eine Bantugrammatik aus dem 17. Jahrhundert”, Anthropos, v. 14/15 (1919/20) p.
764-787; C.M. Doke, “The early literature: the age of Brusciotto”, African studies, v. 18 (1959) p. 59-60.
[Anon.] 1681-1729. Royal African Company records, 1681-1729. Unpublished records, ref. MS
Rawlinson C.745-747. Oxford: Bodleian Library, Rhodes House.
Referred to by Howell & Scheven (1996, #151).
[Anon.] 1696. Relations of the islands and adjacent places of the rivers of Bresalina, Gambia,
Zamenee, St. Domingo, Geve, &c. In: A new voyage to the East-Indies in the years 1690 and
1691; to which is added, a new description of the Canary Islands, Cape Verd, Senegal and
Gambia, pt. 2, p. 110-128. Done into English from the Paris edition. London: D. Dring.
The first part of the book is written by Abraham Duquesne (and deals with the “East-Indies”), and the second part is
by Jacques-Joseph le Maire, to which this anonymous section has been added.
[Anon.] 1701. The fifth part of the general English pilot, describing [...] the west coast of Africa
from the straits of Gibralter to the Cape of Good Hope. London: J. Matthews for Jeremiah
Seller & Charles Price. Pp 43.
There are many subsequent editions of this, e.g. the 3rd appeared 1739.
[Anon.] 1708. The falsities of private traders to Africa discover’d, and the mischiefs they occasion
demonstrated, and an account of the settlements on that coast purchased, built, and now
possest by the Company. London. Pp 4.
[Anon.] 1750. Tedzkiret en-Nisian.
A Timbuktu history chronicling kings, pashas, and various historical events.
[Anon.] 1755. Some facts regarding the conduct of the African Committee, and the chief agents
and officers by them appointed to have the management of affairs on the Gold Coast and
Whydah in Africa. London. Pp 3.
[Anon.] 1772. Dictionnaire congo-français. Manuscrit, ref. MS 33779. London: Grenville Library,
British Museum. Pp 990.
Unsure about the title, assuming it has one. Anonymous manuscript for a Kakongo-French dictionary, possibly
written by Father Proyart (Johnston 1919:802; cfr also Doke 1959:62f).
28
Peripherals: C.M. Doke, “The early literature: the age of Brusciotto”, African studies, v. 18 (1959) p. 62-63.
[Anon.] 1790. Proceedings of the Association for Promoting the Discovery of the Interior Parts of
Africa. London: C. Macrae. Pp xi, 236.
There are many subsequent parts of these proceedings. This one includes “Kanuri and Hausa numerals collected in
Fezzan from a merchant trading with Borno” (Newman 1996:44).
Africa. London: T. Cadell. Pp xvi, 351.
Africa. London: William Bulmer & Co. Pp 24.
[Anon.] 1795. An account of the colony of Sierra Leone, from its first establishment in 1793:
being the substance of a report delivered to the proprietors. London: James Philips. Pp 242.
Africa. London: William Bulmer & Co. Pp vii, 162.
[Anon.] 1799. New sailing directions for the coast of Africa. London: Robert Laurie; James
Whittle. Pp 102.
[Anon.] 1896/19xx. Precis of the archives of the Cape of Good Hope, 17 vols. Cape Town: W.A.
Richards & Sons.
Includes: Journal, 1699-1732 (v.1), Letters received, 1695-1708 (v.2), Letters despatched, 1696-1708 (v.3), The
defence of Willem Adriaan van der Stel (v.4), Riebeeck's journal, &c., pt. 1-3, Dec. 1651-May 1662 (v.5-7), ...
(v.8-9), Resolutiën van den commandeur en raden van het fort de Goede Hoop, 1652-1662 (v.10), Letters despatched
from the cape, 1652-1662 (v.11-13), Journal, 1662-1670 (v.14), Journal, 1671-1674 & 1676 (v.15), Requesten
(Memorials) 1715-1806 (v.16-17).
URL:
URL:
URL:
URL:
URL:
URL:
URL:
URL:
URL:
URL:
URL:
URL:
URL:
URL:
URL:
www.archive.org/details/precisofarchives01capeiala
Abrahams, Roger D.; Szwed, John F. 1983. After Africa: extracts from British travel accounts and
journals of the seventeenth, eighteenth and nineteenth centuries concerning the slaves, their
manners and customs in the British West Indies. New Haven CN: Yale University Press. Pp
444.
Adams, John [Capt.]. 1822. Sketches taken during ten voyages to Africa between the years 17861800, including observations on the country between Cape Palmas and the River Congo,
and cursory remarks on the physical and moral character of the inhabitants, with an
appendix containing an account of the European trade with the west coast of Africa. London
& Edinburgh: Hurst, Robinson & Co.; Arch. Constable & Co. Pp 119.
Includes brief ethnographic remarks about the Fante. Later edition(s) retitled Remarks on the country extending
from Cape Palmas to the River Congo.
Adams, John [Capt.]. 1823. Remarks on the country extending from Cape Palmas to the River
Congo. London: G. & W.B. Whittaker. Pp ix, 265.
New edition of Sketches taken during ten voyages to Africa, orig. published 1822. Reprinted 1966 by Frank Cass &
Co. in London.
Adanson, Michel. 1757. Histoire naturelle du Sénégal: coquillages, avec la relation abrégée d’un
voyage fait en ce pays, pendant les années 1749, 50, 51, 52 & 53. Paris: Jean-ClaudeBaptiste Bauche. Pp 190, xcvi, 275.
Adanson, Michel. 1773. Nachricht von seiner Reise nach Senegal und in Innern des Landes. Aus
dem franzözischen übersetzt. Leipzig: Crusius. Pp 223.
29
Africanus, [Joannes] Leo. 1550. Descrittione dell’Africa, & delle cose notabili che ivi sono. In:
Delle navigationi et viaggi, v. 1, p. (?). Ed. by Giovanni Battista Ramusio. Venezia: LucaAntonio Giunti.
Several 16th-century versions of Africanus’s text exist, but this ought to be the earliest. There are also several
translations to various European languages, e.g. English, Italian, French, etc. “Most of these later editions are of
rather poor quality, being arbitrarily abridged and including many errors in translation and in the transcription of
toponyms, with the noticeable exception of the French version by Jean Temporal who was the most faithful to the
Italian original. The Latin edition in particular ... contains many serious mistranslations” (Masonen 2000:182).
Later editions/reprints appeared in 1554, 1563, 1588, 1603, 1613, and 1837 (idem:185).
Peripherals: Pekka Masonen, “The ‘Description of Africa’ and its editions”, The Negroland revisited (Finnish
Academy of Science and Letters, 2000) p. 175-196.
Africanus, [Joannes] Leo. 1556. De totius Africae descriptione. Latin translation prepared by
Joannes Florianus. Antwerp.
Credited to Ioannis Leonis Africani. This Latin edition “prepared by Joannes Florianus, rector of a grammar school
in Antwerp, contains many serious mistranslations, which occasionally change the original meaning entirely”
(Masonen 2000:182). It was first reprinted 1559 in Zurich and later, 1632, in Leiden.
Africanus, [Joannes] Leo. 1556. Historiale description de l’Afrique, 2 vols. Traduit par Jean
Temporal. Lyon.
French translation. “Later in the same year, 1556, Christopher Plantin published a pirate version of Temporal’s
edition in Antwerp. Plantin’s edition, for its part, was pirated by Jean Bellere, also in Antwerp in the same year.
The content in these three French editions is identical” (Masonen 2000:181n87). Further editions appeared in 1830
and 1896/98. A completely new French translation appeared 1956.
Africanus, [Joannes] Leo. 1558. De totius Africae descriptione. Second edition. Antwerp.
Not sure how this differs from the first (which was later reprinted more than once).
Africanus, [Joannes] Leo. 1600. A geographical historie of Africa, written in Arabicke and Italian
by Iohn Leo a More, born in Granada, and brought up in Barbarie; before which [...] is
prefixed a generall description of Africa, and [...] a particular treatise of all the [...] lands
[...] undescribed by J. Leo. Translated and collected by John Pory. London: George Bishop.
Pp 420.
Reprinted 1969 in Amsterdam. There are numerous abridged and/or fragmented reprints of this book (cfr Masonen
2000:185).
Africanus, [Joannes] Leo. 1632. Africae descriptio ix. libris absoluta, 2 parts. Lugduni Batavorum:
Ex officina Elzeviriana. Pp 800, 16.
The most popular reprint of the first Latin translation (see Masonen 2000:181n88). Originally titled De totius
Africae descriptione.
Africanus, [Joannes] Leo. 1665. Pertinente beschryvinge van Africa met alle de landen,
koningrijken, steden, volken, gewoonten gedierten vogelen, boomen, aard-vruchten die daar
zijn; mitsgaders der koningen die daar geregeert, ende de oorlogen die sy gevoert hebben,
van den jare 1600 af. Vertaalt en uitgevet van Arnout Leers. Rotterdam.
A Dutch “translation of Leo Africanus’ account of Northern Africa. To fill up the volume, an anonymous editor added
to the account a brief conventional description of the coasts of Guinea (p. 289-307), based on current Portuguese
and Dutch navigational manuals, and ten pages of notes on contemporary Dutch commercial procedure in Guinea and
related matters (p. 308-18), most probably taken direct from manuscript sources. At the end of the notes appears a
single vocabulary (p. 319), comprising the numerals 1-10 and nearly forty other terms; there is no introduction or
explanation other than the bald title ‘Woorden in de Cameronis, Rio d’Elrey en ’t hooge land van Ambosus’” (Hair
1969:49). The language seems similar to present-day Duala.
Peripherals: Edwin Ardener, “Documentary and linguistic evidence for the rise of the trading polities between Rio
del Rey and Cameroons, 1500-1650”, History and social anthropology (ed. by I.M. Lewis, 1968) p. 81-126; P.E.H.
Hair, “The earliest vocabularies of Cameroons Bantu”, African studies, v. 28 (1969) p. 49-54; Pekka Masonen,
“The ‘Description of Africa’ and its editions”, The Negroland revisited (Finnish Academy of Science and Letters,
2000) p. 175-196.
30
Africanus, [Joannes] Leo. 1805. Johann Leo’s des Afrikaner’s Beschreibung von Afrika. Übersetzt
von Georg Wilhelm Lorsbach. Herborn (Deutschland).
First German translation. “This edition is nowadays extremely rare” (Masonen 2000:182n91).
Africanus, [Joannes] Leo. 1896. The history and description of Africa and of the notable things
therein contained, written by al-Hassan ibn Mohammed al-Wezaz, al-Fasi, a Moor,
baptized as Giovanni Leone, but better known as Leo Africanus, 3 vols. Done into English
in the year 1600 by John Pory, and now edited, with an introduction and notes by Robert
Brown. London: The Hakluyt Society.
Africanus, [Joannes] Leo. 1896/98. Description de l’Afrique, tierce partie du monde escrite par
Jean Leon African premièrement en langue arabesque, puis en touscane et à présent mise
en françois, 3 vols. Nouvelle édition français, annotée par Ch. Schefer. Recueil de voyages et
de documents pour servir à l’histoire de la géographie depuis le XIIIe jusqu’à la fin du XVIe
siècle, #13-15. Paris.
Based on Temporal’s original French translations.
Africanus, [Joannes] Leo. 1930. Littafi na bakwai na Leo Africanus. Sheffield.
Hausa translation. “This volume contains an English translation of the same section, which is in reality nothing
but a modernized version of Pory’s text of 1600” (Masonen 2000:185n112).
Africanus, [Joannes] Leo. 1952. De la descripción de África y de las cosas que ella se encuentran.
Publicaciónes del Inst. General Franco de Estudios e Investigaciòn Hispano-Árabe, sección
6a, #5. Tánger. Pp xxxvi, 228.
Spanish translation.
Africanus, [Joannes] Leo. 1956. Description de l’Afrique, 2 vols. Nouvelle édition français, traduite
de l’italien par Alexis Èpaulard et annotée par Alexis Èpaulard, Théodore Monod, Henri
Lhote et Raymond Mauny. Paris: Adrien Maisonneuve. Pp xvi, 629.
This new French translation was “based on Ramusio’s original text (1550) and compared to the Italian manuscript
discovered in 1931 ... Today Èpaulard’s edition is universally considered the best existing translation of Leo’s
work” (Masonen 2000:184). It was reprinted 1980.
Afzelius, Adam. 1967. Adam Afzelius: Sierra Leone journal, 1795-1796. Edited by Alexander
Peter Kup. Studia ethnographica upsaliensia, #27. Uppsala. Pp xv, 177, plates.
These were never previously published. The manuscripts, written in English though the author was a Swede, are
located at the university library in Uppsala, Sweden. “The journal will not only interest historians and botanists.
Anthropologists too may be interested, particularly in the detailed accounts of two trials by ordeal published on
pages 24-30 and 63-64” (Fyfe 1968:167).
Peripherals: Christopher Fyfe, Journal of African history, v. 9 (1968) p. 167.
Agrell, Olof. 1796. Bref om Maroko = Letters on Morocco. Stockholm: Johan A. Carlbohm. Pp
672.
Al-Kishnawi. 17xx. Bahjat al-afaq wa-idah al-labs wa ’l-ighlaq fi ‘ilm al-huruf wa ’l-aufaq.
Manuscript, ref. 39 (64496). Library of the School of Oriental and African Studies (SOAS),
University of London. Pp 119.
No idea what this is. May be of some interest for African studies.
Al-Maqqarî. 1632. Nafh al-tîb min ghusn al-Andalus al-ratîb = The fragrant scent from the tender
branch of al-Andalus.
The date is a wild guess. The author died 1632. The book includes extracts from a now lost travelogue by al-Sarakhsî
which is “an important source for the relations between the Almohads and the Sudan at the end of the twelfth
century” (Levtzion & Hopkins 1981:370).
Al-Sa‘dî. 1655. Ta’rîkh al-sûdân = Chronicle of the Sudan.
The date is a wild guess. The author died about 1655. This is one of the so-called Timbuktu Tarikhs.
31
Al-Sa‘dî. 1999. Ta’rîkh al-sûdân (translated from the Arabic). In: Timbuktu and the Songhay
Empire: al-Sa‘dî’s “Ta’rîkh al-sûdân” down to 1613, and other contemporary documents,
p. (?). Ed. by John O. Hunwick. Leiden & Boston: Brill Academic Publ.
Albuquerque, Affonso de. 1514/1899. Letter to the king of Goa, dated October 25, 1514. In:
Records of South-Eastern Africa, collected in various libraries and archive deposits in
Europe, v. 3, p. (?). Ed. by George McCall Theal. London: William Clowes & Sons for the
Government of the Cape Colony.
Mentions ‘Benamotapa’, i.e. Monomotapa (Doke 1960:28).
Peripherals: C.M. Doke, “The earliest records of Bantu”, African studies, v. 19 (1960) p. 26-32.
Alfonce, Jean. 1559. Les voyages avantureux: contenant les reigles et enseignements necessaires
à la bonne et seure navigation. Poitiers (France).
The author travelled to America, but there is at least some mention of the ‘Embours’ (= Mbo?) of Cameroons in the
journal somewhere (see Hair 1967:265). The work is sometimes given the title Les voyages avantureux du capitaine
Ian Alfonce, Sainctongeois, possibly on reprints.
Peripherals: Paul E.H. Hair, “Ethnolinguistic continuity on the Guinea coast”, Journal of African history, v. 8
(1967) p. 247-269; Paul E.H. Hair, “Some minor sources for Guinea, 1519-1559: Enciso and Alfonce/Fontebeau”,
Algaçova, Diogo d’. 1506/1898. Letter to king Dom Manuel, dated November 20, 1506. In:
Records of South-Eastern Africa, collected in various libraries and archive deposits in
Europe, v. 1, p. (?). Ed. by George McCall Theal. London: William Clowes & Sons for the
Contains “a report concerning Sofala, its trade, and the places in the interior from which the gold is obtained--in
the kingdom of Vealanga (Karanga) ... with some observations on Kilwa and Mombasa” (Doke 1960:28). It also
includes a few lexical specimens of what appears to be an early form of Shona.
Allibert, Claude. 1988. Un texte inédit sur l’Île d’Anjouan (Comores) en 1754. Bulletin des études
africaines de l’INALCO (Inst. National des Langues et Civilisations Orientales), v. 8, 16, p.
125-143.
Almada, André Álvares de. 1594. Tratado breve dos rios de Guiné do Cabo Verde: dês do Rio de
Sanagá até os baixos de Santa Ana, de todas as naçoes de negros que há na dita costa, e de
seus costumes, armas, trajos, juramentos, guerras.
Has plentiful information on Upper Guinean peoples (cfr Hair 1967). The originals were never published in full, or
even made available, during contemporary times (cfr Greenough 1841:lii). The first published full version did not
appear until 1841.
Peripherals: Paul E.H. Hair, “An ethnolinguistic inventory of the Upper Guinea coast before 1700”, African
language review, v. 6 (1967) p. 32-70; Paul E.H. Hair, “Ethnolinguistic continuity on the Guinea coast”, Journal of
African history, v. 8 (1967) p. 247-269; Paul E.H. Hair, “Sources on early Sierra Leone, 17: Álvares at Mitombo,
1611”, Africana research bulletin, v. 11 (1981) p. 92-140.
Almada, André Álvares de. 1841. Tratado breve dos Rios de Guiné do Cabo-Verde: desde o Rio
do Sanagá até aos baixos de Sant’ Anna. Publicado por Diogo Köpke. Porto: Typografia
Commercial Portuense. Pp xvi, 108.
Almada, André Álvares de. 1842. Traité succinct sur les rivières de Guinée du Cap Vert, depuis le
Sénégal jusqu’au fleuve Sainte-Anne. Nouvelles annales des voyages, de la géographie et de
l’histoire ou recueil des relations originales inédites, 4ème série, v. 10, p. 75-112, 356-379.
French translations of previously unpublished 16th century journals.
Almada, André Álvares de. 1964. Tratado breve dos rios de Guiné do Cabo Verde. Leitura,
introdçao e notas de António Brásio. Lisboa: Editorial LIAM(?). Pp xvi, 154, plates.
What’s LIAM?
Almada, André Álvares de. 1984. An interim and makeshift edition of André Álvares de Almada’s
‘Brief treatise on the the rivers of Guinea’, being an English translation of a variorum text
of ‘Tratado breve dos Rios de Guiné’, c.1594, 2 vols. Organized (together with incomplete
annotation) by the late Avelino Teixeira da Mota; translated, introduced and annotated by
Paul E.H. Hair, with additional annotations by Jean Boulègue. Dept. of History, University
of Liverpool. Pp 190; 224.
Available online via the Africana Digitization Project, Libraries of the University of Wisconsin-Madison.
URL: digicoll.library.wisc.edu/Africana/About.html
32
Almada, André Álvares de. 1994. Tratado breve dos rios de Guiné do Cabo Verde, feito pelo
capitao André Alvares d'Álmada, ano de 1594. Leitura, introduçao, modernizaçao do texto e
notas de António Luís Ferronha. Lisboa: Comemoraçoes dos Descobrimentos Portugueses;
Grupo de Trabalho, Ministerio da Educação, Portugal. Pp 164. ISBN-10 972-8186-02-9.
Almeida, Manoel de. 1646. Historia de Ethiopia a Alta, ou Abassia. Manuscript, ref. MS. 11966.
School of Oriental and African Studies (SOAS), University of London.
Not sure about the date.
Almeida, Manoel de. 1660. Historia geral de Ethiopia a Alta. Coimbra: M. Dias. Pp 736.
Almeida, Manoel de. 1907/08. Historia Aethiopiae, 3 vols. Rerum aethiopicarum scriptores
occidentales inediti a saeculo XVI ad XIX, #5-7. Roma: Casa Editrice Italiana di C. de Luigi.
Almeida, Manoel de. 1954. History of Ethiopia. In: Some records of Ethiopia, 1593-1646, p. (?).
Ed. by C.F. Beckingham & George Wynn Brereton Huntingford. Works issued by the
Hakluyt Society, second series, #107. London.
Alpini, Prosper. 1591. De medicina aegyptiorum, libri quatuor: in quibus multa cum de vario
mittendi sanguinis usu per venas, arterias, cucurbitulas ac scarificationes nostris
inusitatas, deque inustionibus, et aliis chyrurgicis operationibus, tum de quamplurimis
medicamentis apud aegyptios frequentioribus, elucescunt. Venetiis: Franciscum de
Franciscis Senensem. Pp xx, 150, xxv.
There are several subsequent editions and printings of this.
Alpini, Prosper. 1645. De medicina aegyptiorum libri quatuor. Editio ultima. Parisiis: Nicolaus
Redelichuysen.
Alpini, Prosper. 1745. De medicina aegyptiorum. Accessit huic editioni ejusdem auctoris liber De
balsamo, et rhapontico, ut et Jacobi Bontii Medicina Indorum. Lugduni Batavorum:
Gerardum Potvliet.
Alpini, Prosper. 1980. Le medecine des egyptiens, 1581-1584, 2 vols. Traduite du latin, présénté et
annoté par R. de Fenoyl. Le Caire: Inst. Français d’Archéologie Orientale (IFAO). Pp xiii,
589.
Alvares, Francisco. 1540. Verdadera informaçam das terras do Preste Joam das Indias. Lisboa.
Alvares travelled in Ethiopia during the 1520s.
Alvares, Francisco. 1550. Viaggio fatto nella Ethiopia. In: Delle navigationi et viaggi, v. 1, p. (?).
Ed. by Giovanni Battista Ramusio. Venezia: Luca-Antonio Giunti.
Alvares, Francisco. 1557. Historia de las cosas de Ethiopia: en la qual se cuenta muy
copiosamente, el estado y potécia del Emperador della; que es el que muchos an pensado
ser el Preste Iuan; con otras infinitas particularidades, assi dela religion de aquella gente,
como de sus cerimonias. Agora nueuamente traduzido de Portugues en Castellano, por el
Padre Fray Thomas de Padilla. Anvers: Iuan Steelsio. Pp 20, 207.
Not sure this is the first Spanish edition. It’s certainly not the only one.
Alvares, Francisco. 1558. Historiale description de l’Ethiopie: contenant vraye relation des terres,
& païs du grand roy, & empereur Prete-Ian, l’assiete de ses royaumes & prouinces, leurs
coutumes, loix & religion, auec les pourtraits de leurs temples & autres singularitez, cy
deuant non cogneües. Anvers: Iehan-Bellere. Pp 16, 341, 3.
Translated from Ramusio’s Italian text (see Alvares 1550).
Alvares, Francisco. 1881. Narrative of the Portuguese Embassy to Abyssinia during the years
1520-1527. Translated from the Portuguese, and edited, with notes and an introduction, by
Lord Stanley of Alderley. Works issued by the Hakluyt Society, #64. London. Pp xxvii, 416.
Alvares, Manuel. 1616. Descripção geográphica da Provincia da Serra Leoa. Manuscripto.
Biblioteca da Sociedade de Geográfia de Lisboa.
Alvares, Manuel. 1990. Etiópia Minor e descripção géographica da Província da Serra Leoa
(c.1615) / Ethiopia Minor and a geographical account of the province of Sierra Leone
(c.1615). Translated and introduced by Paul E.H. Hair, based on a transcription from an
unpublished manuscript by the late Avelino Teixeira da Mota and Luís de Matos on behalf of
the Centro de Estudoes de Cartografia Antiga of Lisbon. Dept. of History, University of
Liverpool. Pp 11, 304.
33
André, Bartholomeu. 1946. Uma tentativa de colonizaçao da Serra Leôa no século XVII [publicado
por Virgínia Rau]. Anales de la Asociación Española para el Progreso de las Ciencias
(Madrid), v. 11, 3, p. 607-631.
Reproduction of one or other early 17th-century document by André.
Peripherals: Paul E.H. Hair, “Sources on early Sierra Leone, 8: Bartolomeu André’s letter, 1606”, Africana research
bulletin, v. 6,3 (1976) p. 34-60.
Armand, Jean [Mustapha]. 1632. Voyages d’Afrique faicts par le commandement du Roy. Paris:
N. Traboulliet. Pp 320.
Arthus, Gotthard. (Ed.) 1612. Indiae orientalis, IX: historicam descriptionem nauigationis ab
Hollandis et Selandis in Indiam Orientalem, sub imperio Petri-Guilielmi Verhuffii, cum
nouem maiorum & quatuor minorum nauium classe, annis 1607 1608 & 1609 susceptæ &
peractæ, &c. continens. Francofurti: Wolffgangi Richteri.
On travels in Mozambique and possibly Madagascar.
Arthus, Gotthard. 1614. Dialogues in the English and Malaiane languages: certaine common
formes of speech, first written in Latin, Malaian, and Madagascar tongues, by the diligence
and painfull endeuour of Master Gotardus Arthusius, a Dantisker. Now faithfully translated
into the English tongue by Augustine Spalding Merchant, for their sakes, who happily shall
hereafter undertake a voyage to the East-Indies. London: Felix Kyngston for William Welby.
Pp 78.
Reprinted 1974 by Theatrum Orbis Terrarum in Amsterdam (ISBN-10 9-02-210640-3).
Atkins, John. 1735. A voyage to Guinea, Brazil and the West Indies, in Her Majesty’s ships the
Swallow and Weymouth: describing the several islands and settlements, viz. Madeira, the
Canaries, Cape de Verd, Sierraleon, Sesthos, Cape Apollonia, Cabo Corso, and others on
the Guinea Coast; Barbadoes, Jamaica, &c. in the West-Indie; the colour, diet, languages,
habits, manners, customs, and religions of the respective natives, and inhabitants; with
remarks on the gold, ivory, and slave-trade, and on the winds, tides, and currents of the
several coasts. London: Caesar Ward & Richard Chandler. Pp 4, xxv, 1, [19]-265, 7.
Reprinted 1970 by Frank Cass & Co. in London.
Atkins, John. 1737. A voyage to Guinea, Brazil and the West Indies, in Her Majesty’s ships the
Swallow and Weymouth: giving a genuine account of the several island and settlements
[...]. Second edition. London: Caesar Ward & Richard Chandler. Pp 2, xxv, 2, [19]-265, 3.
Avezac, G. d’. 1845. Vocabulaires guiolof, manding, foule, saracole, séraire, bagnon et floupe,
recueillis à la côte d’Afrique pour le service de l’ancienne Compagnie Royale du Sénégal.
Mémoires de la Société Ethnologique, #2. Paris.
Some (all?) of the vocabularies were collected during the 17th century (cfr Hair 1967). Latham (1847:159) gives the
title as Dictionnaire des langues françaises et negres dont on se sert dans la concession de la Compagnie Royal du
Sénégal, savoir: guiolof, foule, mandingue, saracolé, séraire, bagnon, floupe, papel, bizagots, nalous, et sapi. He
adds that “the four last [vocabularies] are missing” (idem). Apparently there’s a Benin (Edo) word list in there, too
(idem:171).
Peripherals: Robert Gordon Latham, “On the present state and recent progress of ethnographical philology”,
Reports of the meeting of the British Association for the Advancement of Science, v. 17 (1847) p. 154-229.
Avity, Pierre d’. 1614. Les estats, empires, et principavtez dv monde: representez par la
description des pays, moeurs des habitans, richesses des prouinces, les forces, le
gouuernement, la religion [...] auec l’origine de toutes les religions, et de tous les
cheualiers et ordres militaires. Saint-Omer (France): Charles Boscard. Pp 1104, 59.
There are several subsequent 17th-century editions of this. Paginations vary considerably. Not sure to what extent
the contents do.
Avity, Pierre d’. 1615. The estates, empires, and principalitiues of the world: represented by ye
description of countries, maners of inhabitants, riches of prouinces, forces, gouernment,
religion, and the princes that haue gouerned in euery estate. Translated out of French by
Edw. Grimstone. London: Mathewe Lownes & Iohn Bill. Pp 1234.
Avity, Pierre d’. 1617. Les estats, empires et principautez du monde. Nouvelle édition. Paris. Pp
1467.
Avity, Pierre d’. 1628. Les estats, empires et principautez du monde. Nouvelle édition. Rouen:
Adrian Ouyn. Pp 1396, 75.
34
Avity, Pierre d’. 1635. Les estats, empires, royaumes, et principautez du monde. Nouvelle édition,
augmentée. Paris. Pp 747, 416, 140.
Avity, Pierre d’. 1637. Description générale du monde, avec tous ses empires, royaumes, estats et
républiques - seconde partie: Afrique. Paris: Claude Sonnius. Pp 621.
Avity, Pierre d’. 1638. Neuwe archontologia cosmica: das ist Beschreibung aller Kayserthumber,
Konigreichen und Republicken der gantzen Welt [...] von Anfang bis auf unsere Zeit, das
Jahr Christi 1638. Verfasset durch J.L. Gottfried. Frankfurt am Mayn: M. Merianum. Pp
760.
Translated from the French edition, published 1635.
Avity, Pierre d’. 1644. Les estats, empires, royaumes, et principautez du monde. Nouvelle édition.
Rouen. Pp 1469, 75.
Avity, Pierre d’. 1660. Description générale du monde, avec tous ses empires, royaumes, estats et
républiques - seconde partie: Afrique. Nouvelle édition, revue, corrigé et augmenté par J.B.
de Rocoles. Paris: Denys Bechet & Louis Billaine. Pp 660.
Baba, Ahmad. 16xx. ... [Details wanting].
Ahmad Baba (1556-1627) is a reknowned Timbuctu scholar, who “composed many works on Islamic law, a
dictionary of Muslim scholars, and thirteen of his works are still in use in parts of West Africa” (Harris 1987:62;
see also Davidson 1984:197).
Bahrey, Abba. 1593. Zenahu la Galla. Manuscript, ref. MS Oriental 534. London: British
Museum.
Bahrey, Abba. 1893. Geschichte der Galla. Übersetzt von A.W. Schleicher. Berlin: Verlag von
Theodor Fröhlich. Pp 42.
Bahrey, Abba. 1954. History of the Galla. In: Some records of Ethiopia, 1593-1646, p. (?). Ed. by
C.F. Beckingham & George Wynn Brereton Huntingford. Works issued by the Hakluyt
Society, second series, #107. London.
Reprinted 1993 as a separate book by African Sun Publishing in Oakland CA (ISBN-10 1-88370-100-7; 93 pp).
Baker, Robert. 1824. Voyage to Guinea in 1563. In: A general history and collection of voyages
and travels, v. 7, p. (?). Ed. by Robert Kerr. Edinburgh: William Blackwood.
Baratti, Giacomo. 1670. The late travels of S. Giacomo Baratti, an Italian gentleman, into the
remote countries of the Abissins, or of Ethiopia interior; wherein you shall find an exact
account of the laws, government, religion, discipline, customs, &c., of the Christian people
that do inhabit there with many observations which some may improve to the advantage and
increase of trade with them; together with a confirmation of this relation drawn from the
writings of Damianus de Goes and Jo. Scaliger, who agree with the author in many
particulars. Translated by G.D. London: Benjamin Billingsley. Pp 238.
Barbosa, Duarte. 1518. Livro das cousas da India.
Unpublished journals. Barbosa travelled mostly in India, but he also did some visits to East Africa. His journals
have appeared in various editions and translations over the years. The first “proper” publication appeared 1812.
Barbosa, Duarte. 1550. Libro di Odoardo Barbessa. In: Delle navigationi et viaggi, v. 1, p. (?). Ed.
by Giovanni Battista Ramusio. Venezia: Luca-Antonio Giunti.
Summary-cum-extracts translated by the editor from Barbosa’s Portuguese manuscript.
Barbosa, Duarte. 1812. Livro de Duarte Barbosa.
The date of the first publication of Barbosa’s journal(s). Who’s the publisher? Details wanting.
Barbosa, Duarte. 1866. A description of the coast of East Africa and Malabar in the beginning of
the 16th century. Translated from an early Spanish manuscript in the Barcelona Library, with
notes and a preface by the Hon. Henry E.J. Stanley. Works issued by the Hakluyt Society,
#35. London. Pp xi, 236.
Reprinted 1995 by Asian Educational Services in New Delhi (ISBN-10 81-20-61020-2).
Barbosa, Duarte. 1918/21. The book of Duarte Barbosa: an account of the countries bordering on
the Indian Ocean and their inhabitants, 2 vols. Edited and annotated by Mansel Longworth
Dames. Works issued by the Hakluyt Society, second series, #44+49. London. Pp lxxxv,
238; xxxi, 286.
Translated from the Portuguese publication of 1812.
35
Barbosa, Duarte. 1989. Livro do que viue ouviu no Oriente. Biblioteca da expansao portuguesa,
#20. Lisboa: Publicações Alfa. Pp 174.
Barbosa, Duarte. 1996/2000. O livro de Duarte Barbosa, 2 vols. Edição critica e anotada por
Maria Augusta da Veiga e Sousa. Estudos de história e cartografia antiga, #26-27. Lisboa:
Comissão Nacional para as Comemoraçoes dos Descrobrimentos Portugueses; Inst. de
Investigação Científica Tropical (IICT); Ministerio da Ciência e da Tecnologia, Portugal.
ISBN-10 972-672-840-1.
Barbot, Jean. 1678/79. Barbot’s journal. Manuscript, ref. MS 28/788. London: British Museum
Library.
Barbot travelled to West Africa twice, first in 1678-79 and a second time in 1681-82. The journal of his second
voyage is believed to be lost.
Peripherals: Paul E.H. Hair, “Sources on early Sierra Leone, 18: Barbot 1678”, Africana research bulletin, v. 11,3
(1981) p. 46-60; Robin Law, “Jean Barbot as a source for the slave coast of West Africa”, History in Africa, v. 9
(1982) p. 155-173.
Barbot, Jean. 1688. Description de la cote d’Affrique depuis le Cap Bojador jusques à celui de
Lopo Gonzalvez. Manuscript, ref. ADM 7/830 A and B. London: Public Record Office.
Barbot wrote a general account of what he had learned during his West African travels and completed it in 1688, but
was never able to find a publisher. He also started on an English translation (publ. as Barbot 1732), but died before
it was completed.
Peripherals: Robin Law, “Jean Barbot as a source for the slave coast of West Africa”, History in Africa, v. 9 (1982)
p. 155-173.
Barbot, Jean. 1732. A description of the coasts of north and south Guinea, and of Ethiopia
Inferior, vulgarly Angola, being a new and accurate account of the western maritime
countries of Africa; in six books, containing a geographical, political, and natural history of
the kingdoms, provinces, common-wealths, territories, and islands belonging to it; their
product, inhabitants, manners, languages, trade, wars, policy and religion; with a full
account of all the European settlements. Translated from French. London: A. & J. Churchill.
Pp 716, 6.
Translated by the author himself. But, the translation was never finished and was published more or less as-is by the
Churchill brothers (cfr Law 1982). It contains brief specimens of several languages, e.g. “Kishi-Koñgw and a
dialect of north-west Cameroons, probably Barundw” (Johnston 1919:2), plus Wolof, Serer, Manding, ‘Fida and
Ardra’ (i.e. Ewe), and others. “Barbot plagiarized heavily from Dapper [1668] and Bosman [1704]” (Hair
1967:257). There are several subsequent editions and reprints.
Peripherals: C.M. Doke, “The early literature: the age of Brusciotto”, African studies, v. 18 (1959) p. 61; Paul E.H.
Hair, “Ethnolinguistic continuity on the Guinea coast”, Journal of African history, v. 8 (1967) p. 247-269; Robin
Law, “Jean Barbot as a source for the slave coast of West Africa”, History in Africa, v. 9 (1982) p. 155-173; Paul
E.H. Hair, “John Barbot’s alleged Manding vocabulary”, Africana marburgensia, v. 20 (1987) p. 49-51; Paul E.H.
Hair, Barbot’s West African vocabularies of c.1680 (Centre of African Studies, University of Liverpool, 1992); Paul
E.H. Hair, “On editing Barbot”, History in Africa, v. 20 (1993) p. 53-59.
Barbot, Jean. 1745. A description of Sierra Leone.
Not sure what this is. New edition? Abridged? Source? Details wanting.
Barbot, Jean. 1748. Eine Bescreibung von Sierra Leone.
Not sure what this is. Source? Details wanting.
Barbot, Jean. 1978. Journal d’un voyage de traite en Guinée, à Cayenne et aux Antilles fait par Jean
Barbot en 1678-1679 [présenté, publié, et annoté par Gabriel Debien, Marcel Delafosse, et
Guy Thilmans]. Bulletin de l’IFAN (Inst. Fondamentale de l’Afrique Noire), série B:
sciences humaines, v. 40, 2, p. 235-395.
Contains an early version of Barbot’s Gold Coast vocabulary (Akan/Twi). “The text of the vocabulary ... has been
checked against that of the original manuscript (British Library, Add. 28788) by Dr Adam Jones and [Paul Hair] and
a few errors in the edition have been detected” (Hair 1992:1n2).
Peripherals: Paul E.H. Hair, Barbot’s West African vocabularies of c.1680 (Centre of African Studies, University of
Liverpool, 1992).
Barbot, Jean. 1992. Barbot’s West African vocabularies of c.1680. Edited and annotated by Paul
E.H. Hair. Centre of African Studies (CAS), University of Liverpool. Pp 44.
“The four vocabularies are of the Wolof and Fula languages of Senegal, of the Akan/Twi language of ‘Gold Coast’
(modern Ghana), and of the Ewe/Fon language of Dahomey (today ‘Benin’). In his printed account Barbot also
included a brief and hybrid vocabulary allegedly of a language spoken at New Calabar (in modern Nigeria) ... A
vocabulary of Manding wrongly attributed to Barbot is discussed in Appendix B” (p. 1). The whole work is
36
URL: digital.library.wisc.edu/1711.dl/Africana.Hair01
Peripherals: Paul E.H. Hair, “On editing Barbot”, History in Africa, v. 20 (1993) p. 53-59.
Barbot, Jean. 1992. Barbot on Guinea: the writings of Jean Barbot on West Africa, 1679-1712, 2
vols. Translated from Portuguese, edited by P.E.H. Hair, Adam Jones and Robin Law.
London: The Hakluyt Society. Pp cxxii, 916. ISBN-10 0-904180-32-8, 0-904180-33-6.
Does not contain any vocabularies.
Peripherals: Paul E.H. Hair, “On editing Barbot”, History in Africa, v. 20 (1993) p. 53-59; Richard Rathbone,
Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, v. 57 (1994) p. 250-251.
Barbot, James; Casseneuve, John. 1746. An abstract of a voyage to Congo River, or the Zair, and to
Cabinde in the year 1700. In: A collection of voyages and travels, some now first printed
from original manuscripts, others now first published in English, v. 5, p. 560-616. Ed. by
Awnsham Churchill & John Churchill. London: A. & J. Churchill.
Includes a “Vocabulary of the Angoy language of Cabinde” containing “33 words, the numbers 1-15, etc., and 18
‘Conghese‘ words taken from Merolla [i.e. Sorrento 1692]” (Doke 1959:61). James Barbot was probably a son of
Jean Barbot (idem).
Peripherals: C.M. Doke, “The early literature: the age of Brusciotto”, African studies, v. 18 (1959) p. 61.
Barchewitz, Ernst Christoph. 1730. Allerneueste und wahrhafte Ost-Indianische ReiseBeschreibung, darinnen 1. seine durch Deutschland und Holland nach Indien gethane
Reise; 2. sein elff-jähriger Aufenthalt auf Java, Banda und den südwester Inseln [...]; 3.
seine Rückreise, der dabei erlittene grausame Sturm [...] beschrieben wird [...]. Chemnitz
(Deutschland): Össeln. Pp xx, 657.
Deals with Khoekhoe on p. 63-86, 629-634.
Barchewitz, Ernst Christoph. 1751. Neu-vermehrte Ost-Indianische Reise-Beschreibung, darinnen
I. seine durch Teutsch- und Holland nach Indien gethane Reise; II: sein elff-jähriger
Aufenthalt auf Java, Banda und den Südwester-Iusulen, Glücks- und Unglücks-Fälle,
seltsame Begebenheiten, auch remarquirte rare Gewächse, Bäume, Früchte, Thiere, Fische,
Insecten, Berge, Vestungen, Nationen, Gewohnheiten, Aberglauben der Wilden, und viele
andere Denckwürdigkeiten mehr; 3: seine Rück-Reise, der dabey erlittene grausame Sturm
und endlich glücklich erfolgte Ankunft in sein Vaterland umständlich erzehlet wird. Zweite
Ausgabe. Erfurt (Deutschland): Jungnicol. Pp x, 680, xvi.
Deals with Khoekhoe on p. 73-77.
Barchewitz, Ernst Christoph. 1762. Neu-vermehrte Ost-Indianische Reise-Beschreibung. Vierte
Auflage. Erfurt (Deutschland): Hartung. Pp 687.
Barradas, Manoel. 1634. Tractatus tres historico-geographici.
A historical and geographical account of Ethiopia, or parts thereof. Reprinted 1906 by C. de Luigi in Rome (Rerum
aethiopicarum scriptores occidentales inediti a saeculo XVI ad XIX, #4). An English translation, published by
Harrassowitz, appeared in 1996.
Barradas, Manoel. 1996. Tractatus tres historico-geographici (1634): a seventeenth century
historical and geographical account of Tigray, Ethiopia. Translated by Elizabeth Filleul and
edited by Richard Pankhurst. Äthiopische Forschungen, #43. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz
Verlag. Pp xx, 218. ISBN-10 3-447-03661-3.
Barreira, Balthasar. 16xx. ... [Title and details wanting].
Barreira was a Jesuit missionary working in western and central Africa, e.g. Sierra Leone, Benin, and Angola.
Peripherals: Paul E.H. Hair, “Sources on early Sierra Leone, 5: Barreira, letter of 23.3.1606”, Africana research
bulletin, v. 5,4 (1975) p. 81-118; Paul E.H. Hair, “Sources on early Sierra Leone, 6: Barreira on just enslavement,
1606”, Africana research bulletin, v. 6,1 (1976) p. 52-74; Paul E.H. Hair, “Sources on early Sierra Leone, 7:
Barreira, letter of 9.3.1607”, Africana research bulletin, v. 6,2 (1976) p. 45-70; Paul E.H. Hair, “Sources on early
Sierra Leone, 9: Barreira’s ‘Account of the coast of Guinea’, 1606”, Africana research bulletin, v. 7,1 (1976) p. 5070; Paul E.H. Hair, “Sources on early Sierra Leone, 13: Barreira’s report of 1607-1608 - the journey to Bena”,
Africana research bulletin, v. 8 (1978) p. 64-108; Paul E.H. Hair, “Sources on early Sierra Leone, 19: Barreira’s
report 1607-1608 - the deeds of King Pedro alias Tora”, Africana research bulletin, v. 12 (1983) p. 55-97; Paul E.H.
Hair, “Sources on early Sierra Leone, 22: Barreira’s report of 1607-8 - the deeds of King Philip”, Africana research
bulletin, v. 16 (1989) p. 57-78.
Barros, Joao de. (Ed.) 1552. Asia: dos fectos que os Portugueses fizeram no descobrimento,
conquista dos mares, terras do Oriente, 2 vols. Lixboa: Germao Galharde. Pp 128; 143.
Collections of early Portuguese travels. There’s apparently a total of 12 volumes, often referred to jointly as
Décadas. The last of these appeared more than a hundred years later, during the 1670s. There are several subsequent
editions of the Décadas, many of which have been reissued several times. There are also several early and modern
translations.
37
Barros, Joao de. 1706. De alder-eerste scheeps-togten der Portugysen, ter ontdekking van
vreemde landen uytgefonden, in het jaar 1419 en vervolgens: beginnende met het vinden van
de Caap Non en Bojador, tot de Caap de Bon Esperance, langs de geheele zee-kust van
Africa en daar ontrent gelegene eylanden. Alle uyt de eygene hand-schriften der ontdekkers
nu alder-eerst uyt het Portugijs vertaald en met noodig register en konst-printen verrijkt.
Leyden: Pieter vander Aa.
There’s also an edition dated 1727, which may or may not be different from this.
Barros, Joao de. 1945/46. Décadas, 4 vols. Selecçao, prefácio e notas de António Baiao. Lisboa:
Sá da Costa.
Barton, Matthew. 1760. An authentic narrative of the loss of His Majesty’s ship the Litchfield:
Capt. Barton, on the coast of Africa; with some account of the sufferings of the Capt. and
the surviving part of the crew, in a journal kept by a Lieutenant. London: Self-published. Pp
27.
Not sure about the details. See also Sutherland (1761).
Battell, Andrew. 1625. The strange adventures of Andrew Battell of Leigh in Angola and the
adjoining regions. In: Hakluytus posthumus: or, Purchas his pilgrimes, contayning a
history of the world in sea voyages and land travells, by Englishmen & others, p. (?). Ed. by
Samuel Purchas. London: William Stansby for Henrie Fetherstone.
Battell stayed in Angola between 1589 and 1607. His account includes “over forty Bantu words, including one
complete sentence; these words represent Ndongo (‘Kimbundu’), Kongo and Longo. The orthography is strange and
inconsistent” (Doke 1960:32).
Battell, Andrew. 1901. The strange adventures of Andrew Battell of Leigh in Angola and the
adjoining regions. Edited, with notes and a concise History of Kongo and Angola, by E.G.
Ravenstein. Works issued by the Hakluyt Society, #6. London.
Includes many added appendixes, e.g. “On the religion and the customs of the peoples of Angola, Congo and
Loango”, “Anthony Knivet in Kongo and Angola”, “A sketch of the history of Kongo to the end of the seventeenth
century”, “A list of the kings of Kongo”, “A sketch of the history of Angola to the end of the seventeenth century”,
and “A list of the governors of Angola, 1575-1702”.
Beaulieau, Augustin de [Gén.]. 1664. Mémoires du voyage aux Indes Orientales du Général
Beaulieu.
Details wanting. Beaulieau made a stop in West Africa on his way to Sumatra. Reprinted 1996 as Mémoires d'un
voyage aux Indes orientales, 1619-1622: un marchand normand à Sumatra by Maisonneuve & Larose in Paris,
annotated and edited by Denys Lombard.
Peripherals: Paul E.H. Hair, “Sources on early Sierra Leone, 1: Beaulieu 1619”, Africana research bulletin, v. 4,4
(1974) p. 41-50.
Beaver, Philip. 1805. African memoranda: relative to an attempt to establish a British settlement
on the island of Bulama, on the western coast of Africa in the year 1792 by Philip Beaver;
with a brief notice on the neighbouring tribes, soil, productions, etc., and some observations
on the facility of colonizing that part of Africa, with a view to cultivation. London: Baldwin.
Pp xv, 500.
Is there any mention of the Bijogo in this?
Beeckman, Daniel. 1718. A voyage to and from the island of Borneo, in the East Indies, with a
description of the said island; giving an account of the inhabitants, their manners, customs,
religion, product, chief ports, and trade; together with the re-establishment of the English
trade there, an. 1714, after our factory had been destroyed by the Banjareens some years
before; also a description of the islands of Canary, Cape Verd, Java, Madura; of the
Streights of Bally, the Cape of Good Hope, the Hottentots, the island of St. Helena,
Ascension, &c.; with some remarks and directions touching trade, &c.; the whole very
pleasant and very useful to such as shall have occasion to go into those parts. Illustrated
with several curious maps and cuts. London: Warner. Pp 16, 205, 3.
This “contains a most curious and lengthy description of the Hottentots” (Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:3).
Behrens, Carl Friedrich. 1737. Reise und Begebenheiten durch die bekannte und unbekannte
Südländer und um die Welt: worinnen die Canarische und Saltz-Insulen, Brasilien, die
Magellanische und Lameerische Strassen, Küste von Chili, die neu-entdeckte Insulen, gegen
Süden und unterschiedene Plätze in Asia, Africa und America; wie auch deren Einwohner
38
Lebens-Art, Policey, Commercien, Gottesdienst und dergleichen. Frankfurt-am-Main:
Joachim von Lahnen. Pp 16, 380.
Includes notes on Khoekhoe. Note that there’s also a similarly-titled book dated 1735 (only 55 pp), which may or
may not contain anything on Africa.
Behrens, Carl Friedrich. 1738. Der wohlversuchte Süd-Länder; das ist: ausführliche ReiseBeschreibung um die Welt, worinnen von denen Canarischen- und Saltz-Insuln, Brasilien,
der Strass Magellanus und Lamer-Küste, Chili, und neu-entdeckten Insuln gegen Süden,
dessgleichen von den Moluckischen Insuln und verschiedenen Plätzen in Asia und Africa,
als auch ihren Inwohnern, Lebens-Art, Policey, Handel Wandel und Gottesdienst gehandelt
wird; nebst einer accuraten Charte der gantzen Welt, und andern Kupffern. Zweite
Ausgabe. Leipzig: Joh. Georg Monath. Pp 14, 331.
Second edition of Reise und Begebenheiten durch die bekannte und unbekannte Südländer und um die Welt. Includes
notes on Khoekhoe.
Behrens, Carl Friedrich. 1739. Histoire de l’expédition de trois vaisseaux, envoyés par la
Compagnie des Indes Occidentales des Provinces-Unies aux terres Australes en
MDCCXXI, 2 tome. Traduit de l’allemand. La Haye.
Includes notes on Khoekhoe.
Behrens, Carl Friedrich. 1925. Der wohlversuchte Südländer: Reise um die Welt 1721-1722.
Zweite Ausgabe, bearbeitet von Hans Plischke. Alte Reisen und Abenteuer, #7. Leipzig: F.A.
Brockhaus. Pp 159.
Abridgement of the second edition, originally published in 1738. Deals with Khoekhoe on p. 144-155. Includes a
map of Khoekhoe settlements.
Bellefonds, Nicolas Villault de. 1669. Relation des costes d’Afriques appelées Guinée. Paris:
Denys Thierry. Pp 455.
Peripherals: F. Swanzy, “A French voyage to West Africa in 1666-1667”, Journal of the African Society, v. 7
(1908) p. 190-204; Paul E.H. Hair, “An ethnolinguistic inventory of the Upper Guinea coast before 1700”, African
language review, v. 6 (1967) p. 32-70.
Bellefonds, Nicolas Villault de. 1670. A relation of the coasts of Africk caled Guinee, with a
description of the countreys, manners and customs of the inhabitants; of the productions of
the earth, and the merchandise and commodities it affords; with some historical
observations upon the coasts; being collected in a voyage by the Sieur Villault, escuyer,
Sieur de Bellefond, in the years 1666 and 1667. Written in French, and faithfully Englished.
London: John Starkey. Pp 280.
Labelled “second edition”.
Belon, Pierre. 1554. Les obseruations de plusieurs singularitez & choses memorables, trouuées
en Grece, Asie, Iudée, Egypte, Arabie, & autres pays estranges, 3 liures. Paris: Guillaume
Cauellat. Pp 12, 211.
Early European travelogue. There are many later editions of this.
Belon, Pierre. 1555. Les obseruations de plusieurs singularitez & choses memorables, trouuées
en Grece, Asie, Iudée, Egypte, Arabie, & autres pays estranges, 3 liures. Anuers: Christofe
Plantin. Pp 8, 375.
Belon, Pierre. 1588. Les obseruations de plusieurs singularitez et choses memorables: trouuées
en Grece, Asie, Iudée, Egypte, Arabie, & autres pays estranges, 3 liures. Reueuz de nouueau
et augmentez de figures. Anuers: Hierosme de Marnef & Christofe Plantin. Pp 24, 468.
Benezat, Anthony. 1762. A short account of that part of Africa inhabited by the Negroes, with
respect to the fertility of the country, the good disposition of many of the natives, and the
manner by which the slave trade is carried on: extracted from divers authors, in order to
shew the iniquity of that trade, and the falsity of the arguments usually advanced in its
vindication, with quotations from the writings of several persons of note, viz. George
Wallis, Francis Hutcheson, and James Foster, and a large extract from a pamphlet, lately
published in London, on the subject of the slave trade. Second edition, with large additions
and amendments. Philadelphia: W. Dunlab. Pp 80.
URL: www.archive.org/details/shortaccountofth00benerich
Benezat, Anthony. 1768. A short account of that part of Africa inhabited by the negroes, with
respect to the fertility of the country, the good disposition of many of the natives, and the
manner by which the slave trade is carried on: extracted from divers authors, in order to
shew the iniquity of that trade, and the falsity of the arguments usually advanced in its
39
vindication. Third edition. Philadelphia & London: W. Dunlab; W. Baker & J.W. Galabin.
Pp 80.
Berg, Marcus. 1756. Beskrifning öfver barbariska slafveriet uti kejsardömet Fez och Marocco, i
korthet författad af Marcus Berg, som tillika med många andra christna det samma utstådt
twenne år och siu dagar, och derifrån blifwit utlöst tillika med åtta stycken andra swenska
den 30 augusti 1756 = Description of the slavery of Barbary in the kingdoms of Fez and
Marocco, briefly sketched by Marcus Berg, who like many other Christians suffered the
same during two years and seven days, and who was released together with eight other
Swedes on August 30, 1756. Stockholm: Lor. Ludv. Grefing. Pp 144.
Berg, Marcus. 1974. Description de l’esclavage barbaresque dans l’empire de Fez et au Maroc.
Traduit du suédois et présenté par Jacques Macau. Norrtälje (Suède): J. Macau. Pp 88.
Bergh, Oloff. 1683. Journael van de landtocht bij d’E. Vaenrich Oloff Bergh, Sargianten
Christoffel Henningh [...] gehouden bij de stuyrluyden Reynier Damie en Rosierich
Hermansz in den jare 1682. Manuscript. Den Haag: Hollandsche Reichsarchiv.
Bergh seems to be the first one ever to use the word “bosjesmans” (Barnard 1992:9). Reprinted 1931, with an
English translation, by E.E. Mossop (published by the Van Riebeek Society, Cape Town).
Bergh, Oloff. 1931. Joernale van die landtogte van die edele vaandrig Olof Bergh [with an English
translation by E.E. Mossop]. In: Joernale van die landtogte van die edele vaandrig Olof
Bergh (1682 en 1683) en die vaandrig Isaq Schrijver (1689) / The journals of the
expeditions of the honorable ensign Olof Bergh (1682 and 1983) and the ensign Isaq
Schrijver (1689), p. 1-191. Ed. by E.E. Mossop. Publications from the Van Riebeeck
Society, #12. Cape Town.
Berington, Simon. 1748. The adventures of Sigr. Gaudentio di Lucca: being the substance of his
examination before the fathers of the Inquisition at Bologna in Italy, giving an account of an
unknown country in the midst of the deserts of Africa. Faithfully translated from the Italian;
second edition. London: W. Innys, R. Manby, H.S. Cox. Pp xii, 24.
Fictional adventures. There are many editions and reprints of this.
Bermudez, Joao. 1565. Esta he hua breue relaçao da embaixada que o Patriarcha do Ioao
Bermudez trouxe do Emperador da Ethiopia, chamado vulgarmente Preste Ioao. Lisboa: F.
Correa. Pp 80.
Reprinted 1875 as Breve relaçao da embaixada que o patriarcha D. JoMo Bermudez trouxe do imperador da Ethiopia
vulgarmente chamado Preste JoMo (vi+127 pp) by Academia Real das Sciencias at Lisbon.
Bermudez, Joao. 1625. A briefe relation of the embassage which the Patriarch Don Iohn
Bermudez brought from the Emperour of Ethiopia, vulgarly called Presbyter John.
Translated from Portuguese. London?
There’s also a printing dated 1905, which may or may not be a reprint.
Beutler, A.F. 1752/1922. Journaal gehouden [...] op de togt [...] in de jaare 1752 [...]. In: Reizen in
Zuid-Afrika in de hollandse tijd, v. 3, p. 265-336. Ed. by Everhardus Cornelis GodéeMolsbergen. Werken uitgegeven door de Linschoten-Vereeniging, #20. ’s-Gravenhage:
Martinus Nijhoff.
Bisani, Alessandro. 1791. Lettres sur divers endroits de l’Europe, de l’Asie, et de l’Afrique,
parcourus en 1788 et 1789. Written by an Italian gentleman. Londres: Dennett Jacqut. Pp x,
259.
Not sure about the contents. Published anonymously.
Bisani, Alessandro. 1793. A picturesque tour through part of Europe, Asia, and Africa: containing
many new remarks on the present state of society, remains of ancient edifices, &c. Written
by an Italian gentleman, translated from the French. London: J. Davis. Pp xiv, 241, plates.
Published anonymously.
Boemus, Johannes. 1554. The discription of the contrey of Aphrique: the fyrst part of the worlde,
with the cituation of al the countreys together, with the perticuler maners lawes, and
ceremonies, of dyuers people inhabityng in the same part. Translated out of Frenche into
Englyshe by Wyllyam Prat of London, the fyrst daye of the newe yere, M.CCCCC.LIIII.
London. Pp 174.
Comes with the front-page recommendation: “Rede it dylygently, marke it perfectly, reuolue it thorowly, beare it
equally, beholde the auctours simplicitie, and prayse God almyghty”.
40
Boemus, Johannes. 1610. The manners, lavves, and customes of all nations. With a short
discourse of the Aethiopians, taken out of Ioseph Scaliger his seuenth booke de Emendatione
temporum, written in Latin, and now newly translated into English by Ed. Aston. London. Pp
589.
Includes a section titled “The faith, religion and manners of the Aethiopians”.
Bolton, S. 1794. Africa: with all its states, kingdoms, republics, regions, islands, & ca.; improved
and inlarged from d’Anville’s map, to which have been added a particular chart of the Gold
Coast, wherein are distinguished all the European forts and factories. In: A general atlas,
describing the whole universe: being a complete collection of the most approved maps
extant, p. (?). Ed. by Thomas Kitchin. London: Robert Laurie & James Whittle.
Bosman, William. 1704. Nauwkeurige beschrijving van de Guinese Goud-, Tand- en Slavenkust;
nevens alle desselfs landen, koningryken, en gemenebesten, van de zeeden der inwoonders
hun godsdienst, regeering, regtspleeging, oorlogen, trouwen, begraven, enz. Utrecht:
Anthony Schouten. Pp 24, 208, 280, 28, 17.
Several subsequent editions/printings exist.
(1967) p. 247-269.
Bosman, William. 1705. A new and accurate description of the Coast of Guinea, divided into the
Gold, the Slave and the Ivory Coast: containing a geographical, political and natural
history of the kingdoms and countries, with a particular account of the rise, progress and
present condition of all the European settlements upon that coast, and the just measures for
improving the several branches of the Guinea trade. Translated from Dutch. London: J.
Knapton & D. Midwinter. Pp 4, 361, 14, [369]-493, 9.
Several editions/imprints seems to exist. Reprinted 1967 by Frank Cass & Co. in London, with a new introduction
by John Ralph Willis plus notes by J.D. Fage and R.E. Bradbury.
Bosman, William. 1705. Voyage de Guinéa. Utrecht: Anthony Schouten. Pp 16, 520.
Translation of Nauwkeurige beschrijving van de Guinese Goud-, Tand- en Slavenkust. Reprinted 1977 by Hachette
in Paris.
Botero, Giovanni. 1592/96. Le relationi universali. Venetia: G. Angelieri.
Includes general information on Africa, esp. North and North-East Africa. There are many subsequent editions,
translations and reprints of this.
Botero, Giovanni. 1601. The trauellers breuiat: an historicall description of the most famous
kingdomes in the world, relating their situations, manners, customes, ciuill gouernment,
and other memorable matters. Translated into English. London: Iohn Iaggard. Pp 179.
Botero, Giovanni. 1603. An historicall description of the most famous kingdomes and commonweales in the worlde: relating their situations, manners, customes, civill government, and
other memorable matters. Translated into English, and enlarged with an addition of the
relation of the states of Saxony, Geneua, Hungary, and Spaine, in no language euer before
imprinted. London: Iohn Iaggard. Pp 268.
Botero, Giovanni. 1616. Relations of the most famous kingdoms and commonweales thorough the
world: discoursing of their scituations, manners, customes, strengths, greatnesse, and
policies. Enlarged, according to moderne obseruation. London: Iohn Iaggard. Pp 437.
Botero, Giovanni. 1630. Relations of the most famous kingdomes and common-wealths thorowout
the world: discoursing of their situations, religions, languages, manners, customes,
strengths, greatnesse, and policies. Translated out of the best Italian impression of Boterus;
and since the last edition by R.I. now once againe inlarged according to moderne observation;
with addition of new estates and countries; wherein many of the oversights both of the author
and translator, are amended; and unto which, a mappe of the whole world, with a table of the
countries, are now newly added. London: Iohn Hauiland. Pp 644.
Boulet, A. 1733. Histoire de l’empire de Cherifs en Afrique, sa description géographique et
historique, la relation de la prise d’Oran, 2 vols. Paris: Pierre Prault. Pp 354; 162.
Not sure who this is supposed to be credited to. Some sources say “Philippe V. Roy d’Espagne”.
Bövingh, Johann Georg. 1712. Curieuse Beschreibung und Nachrichten von den Hottentotten [...]
wobey noch eine gantz neue und accurate Beschreibung von dem jetzigen Religions Wesen,
samt angehängten Bericht, von einigen unter denen Herrn Missionaris daselbst
entstandenen Streitigkeiten. Kopenhagen. Pp viii, 48.
41
Reprinted 1933 in The early Cape Hottentots (ed. by Isaac Schapera; Van Riebeeck Society, Cape Town).
Peripherals: Hans van den Besten, “Deciphering three Pidgin Dutch statements concerning religion recorded by
Muller, Ten Rhyme, and Bövingh”, Quaterly bulletin of the National Library of South Africa, v. 57 (2003) p. 149155.
Bövingh, Johann Georg. 1714. Kurtze Nachricht von den Hottentotten oder denen Heyden welche
das äusserste africanische Vorgebirge Cabo de bona Esperanca genannt bewohnen. Zweite
Ausgabe. Hamburg: Caspar Jaehkel. Pp 30.
First edition titled Curieuse Beschreibung und Nachrichten von den Hottentotten.
Brásio, António. (Ed.) 1952-1985. Monumenta missionaria africana: Africa occidental, 14 vols.
Lisboa: Agência Geral do Ultramar; Academia Portuguesa da História.
Collection of original documents. Covers the years 1471-1531 (v1), 1532-1569 (v2), 1570-1599 (v3), 1469-1599
(v4), 1600-1610 (v5), 1611-1621 (v6), 1622-1630 (v7), 1631-1642 (v8), 1643-1646 (v9), 1647-1650 (v10),
1651-1655 (v11), 1656-1665 (v12), 1666-1885 (v13), and 1686-1699 (v14). There are a few supplements, too,
and possibly also revisions.
Peripherals: G. Hulstaert, Aequatoria, v. 18 (1955) p. 75-77; G. Hulstaert, Aequatoria, v. 21 (1958) p. 76-77; G.
Hulstaert, Aequatoria, v. 22 (1959) p. 38-39.
Brink, Carl Frederik. 1762. Dag register.
Early description of the Cape. Properly published 1947, with an English translation, by E.E. Mossop (Van Riebeek
Society, Cape Town).
Brink, Carl Frederik. 1778. Nouvelle description du Cap de Bonne-Espérence, avec un journal
historique d’un voyage de terre, fait par ordre du gouverneur Ryk Tulbagh, dans l’intérieur
de l’Afrique, par une caravane de 85 personnes, sous le commandement du Capitain Henri
Hop. Traduit de la néerlandaise par J.N.S. Allamand. Amsterdam: Schneider. Pp viii, 130,
100.
Brink, Carl Frederik. 1778. Nieuwste en beknopte beschryving van de Kaap der Goede Hoop,
nevens een Dag-Verhaal van eenen landtogt naar het binnenste van Afrika, door het land
der kleine en groote Namacquas. Amsterdam.
Brink, Carl Frederik. 1779. Neue kurzgefasste beschreibung des Vorgebirges der guten Hoffnung,
nebst dem Journal eines Landzuges in das Innerste von Afrika durch das Land der grossen
und kleinen Namacquas. Aus dem holländischen übersetzt, mit Anmerkungen von J.N.S.
Allamand und J.C. Klockner. Leipzig: Weygand.
Brink, Carl Frederik. 1947. ... [with an English translation by E.E. Mossop]. In: The journals of
Brink and Rhenius, being the journal of Carel Frederik Brink of the journey into Great
Namaqualand, 1761-1762, made by Captain Hendrik Hop, and the journal of Ensign
Johannes Tobias Rhenius, 1724, p. (?). Ed. by E.E. Mossop. Publications from the Van
Riebeeck Society, #28. Cape Town.
Title wanting.
Brisson, Pierre-Raymond de. 1789. Histoire du naufrage et de la captivité de Monsieur de
Brisson, officier de l’Administration de colonies; avec la description des déserts d’Afrique
depuis le Sénégal jusqu’à Maroc en 1785. Genève. Pp 200.
Reprinted 1984 by Nouvelles Editions Latines in Paris.
Brisson, Pierre-Raymond de. 1789. An account of the shipwreck and captivity of M. de Brisson,
containing a description of the deserts of Africa, from Senegal to Morocco. Translated from
the French. London: Johnson. Pp xii, 175.
There are apparently several English editions of this. One appeared in Perth, the same year, comprising a total of
228 pages.
Brisson, Pierre-Raymond de. 1792. An account of the shipwreck and captivity of M. de Brisson
[translated from the French]. In: Voyages to the coast of Africa, by Mess. Saugnier and
Brisson, containing an account of their shipwreck on board different vessels, and
subsequent slavery and interesting details of the manners of the Arabs of the desert, and of
the slave trade as carried on at Senegal and Galam, p. (?). London: G.G.J. & J. Robinson.
Broecke, Pieter van den. 1634. Korte historiael ende journaelsche aenteyckeninghe van al ’t gheen
merkwaerdich voorgevallen is , in de langhduerighe reysen, soo nae Cabo Verde, Angola
als insonderheydt van Oost-Indien. Haarlem.
Broecke, Pieter van den. 2000. Pieter van den Broecke’s journal of voyages to Cape Verde,
Gunea, and Angola (1605-1612). Translated and edited by J.D. la Fleur. Works issued by
the Hakluyt Society, third series, #5. London. Pp xv, 139.
42
Brosses, Charles de. 1760. Du culte des dieux fétiches ou parallèle de l’ancienne religion de
l’Egypte avec la religion actuelle de Nigritie. Paris. Pp 285.
Not sure what people or cultures this deals with; besides Ancient Egyptian, that is.
Browne, William George. 1799. Travels in Africa, Egypt and Syria, from the year 1792 to 1798.
London: T. Cadell & W. Davies; Thomas Norton Longman & Owen Rees. Pp xxxviii, 496.
Has something on the Aiki (p. 311-313).
Browne, William George. 1800. Nouveau voyage dan la Haute et Basse Egypte, la Syrie, le DarFour, où aucun européen n’avoit pénétré, fait depuis les années 1792 jusqu’en 1798, 2 vols.
Traduit de l’anglais sur la deuxième édition par J. Castéra; avec des notes critiques sur les
ouvrages de Savry et de Volney. Paris: E. Dentu.
Bruce, James [of Kinnaird]. (Ed.) 1790. Travels to discover the source of the Nile in the years
1768, 1769, 1770, 1771, 1772 and 1773, 5 vols. Edinburgh & London: J. Ruthven for
G.G.J. & J. Robinson.
A 6-volume edition was also apparently published 1791 in Dublin by William Sleater “for P. Wogan, L. White, P.
Byrne, W. Porter, W. Sleater, J. Jones, J. Moore, B. Dornin, C. Lewis, W. Jones, G. Draper, J. Milliken, and R.
White”. Several abridged editions seem to have appeared, too. Reprinted 1972 by Gregg International in Westmead
UK; and 1983/84 by Demand Reprints in Amersham UK.
Peripherals: Richard Wharton, Observations on the authenticity of Bruce’s travels in Abyssinia, in reply to some
passages in Brown’s travels through Egypt, Africa and Syria (Newcastle upon Tyne, 1800); Alexander Murray,
Account of the life and writings of James Bruce, author of ‘Travels to discover the source of the Nile’ (Constable,
1808).
Bruce, James [of Kinnaird]. (Ed.) 1790/92. Voyage aux sources du Nil, en Nubie et en Abyssinie,
pendant les annees 1768, 1769, 1770, 1771 & 1772, 5 vols. Traduit de l’anglais par M.
Castra. Paris.
Bruce, James [of Kinnaird]. (Ed.) 1860. Travels and adventures in Abyssinia. Reduced edition,
abridged by J. Morison Clingan. Edinburgh: Adam & Charles Black. Pp xxviii, 350.
Bruce, James [of Kinnaird]. (Ed.) 1873. Travels in Abyssinia and Nubia, 1768-1773, to discover
the source of the Nile. Second edition, abridged and edited by J. Morison Clingan.
Edinburgh: Adam & Charles Black. Pp xxxvi, 390.
Brun, Samuel. 1625. Fünf Schiffarten in unterschiedliche Königreich und Landschaften, nämlich
in Africane und dessen Provinzen Congo usw.: mit einem Anhang der Beschreibung des
Königreichs Congo. Frankfurt am Mayn.
Peripherals: Jürgen Zwernemann, “Zwei Quellen des 17. Jahrhunderts über die Vai in Liberia: Samuel Brun und Olfert
Dapper”, Neue afrikanistische Studien (ed. by Johannes Lukas, 1966) p. 293-318; Paul E.H. Hair, “Sources on early
Sierra Leone, 11: Brun 1624”, Africana research bulletin, v. 7,3 (1977) p. 52-64.
Brun, Samuel. 1913. Samuel Brun’s Schiffahrten (1624). In: Toortse der zeevaart / Samuel
Brun’s Schiffahrten, p. (?). Ed. by Samuel P. Naber. Werken uitgegeven door de LinschotenVereeniging, #6. ’s-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff.
Brun, Samuel; Hulsius, Levinus. 1926. Neuntzehende Schiffarth: inhaltendt fünff Schiffarthen
Samuel Brauns [...] so er vor kurtzen Jahren in unterschiedliche frembde Königreich und
Landschafften glücklich gethan, nemlich in Africam und dessen Provincien Congo, Bansa,
Loanga, Angola, Guinea, Morenland, Bennin, Amboisa, und zu dem Festen Castell Nassaw
in More. Frankfurt am Mayn: Wolfgang Richter. Pp 105.
Not sure about the title.
Bruns, Paul Jakob. 1794/95. Beskrifning om Egypten = Description of Egypt. Öfversättning ifrån
tyskan af J.A. Stechau; utgifven af C.C. Gjörwell. Stockholm: Anders J. Nordström.
Bruns, Paul Jakob. (Ed.) 1799. Neu systematische Erdbeschreibung von Africa, 6 Bde. Nürnberg:
Schneider & Weigel.
Burckhard, Christian. 1693. Ost-Indianische Reisebeschreibung, oder kurzgefaster Abriss von
Ost-Indien, und dessen angräntzenden Provincien [...]. Halle & Leipzig: J.F. Zeitler. Pp 24,
312.
Càda Mosto, Alvise da. 1460s. ... [Title wanting].
Càda Mosto travelled to Madeira, Canary Islands, and Cape Verde Islands in 1455/56, and Gambia in 1456. His
journals date from the 1460s and include lexical specimens of several languages.
Peripherals: Paul E.H. Hair, “The use of African languages in Afro-European contacts in Guinea 1440-1560”, Sierra
Leone language review, v. 5 (1966) p. 5-26; Paul E.H. Hair, “An ethnolinguistic inventory of the Upper Guinea
coast before 1700”, African language review, v. 6 (1967) p. 32-70; Paul E.H. Hair, “Ethnolinguistic continuity on
43
the Guinea coast”, Journal of African history, v. 8 (1967) p. 247-269; Paul E.H. Hair, “Early sources on religion
and social values in the Sierra Leone region, 1: Cadamosto 1463”, Sierra Leone bulletin of religion, v. 11 (1969) p.
51-64.
Càda Mosto, Alvise da. 1508. ... [Title wanting].
Early German translation of Càda Mosto’s journals. The travels as such took place during the mid-15th century.
This German translation was reprinted 1980 by Kümmerle in Göppingen (Litterae, #77; ISBN-10 3-87452-495-7;
68+xv pp).
Càda Mosto, Alvise da. 1550. Nauigationi di Al. da Mosto.
There are several 15th- and 16th-century Italian (Latin?) editions of Càda Mosto’s journals.
Càda Mosto, Alvise da. 1812. Navegaçoes de Luiz de Cadamosto, a que se ajuntou a viagem de
Pedro de Cintra, capitão portuguez.
Details wanting.
Càda Mosto, Alvise da. 1895. Relations des voyages à la côte occidentale d’Afrique d’Alvise de Cà
da Mosto, 1455-1457. Publiée par M. Charles Schefer. Bibliothèque de voyages anciens.
Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp 3, [ix]-xix, 206.
Càda Mosto, Alvise da. 1937. The voyages of Cadamosto and other documents on western Africa
in the second half of the fifteenth century. Translated and edited by G.R. Crone. Works
issued by the Hakluyt Society, #80. London. Pp xlv, 159.
Càda Mosto, Alvise da; Cintra, Piedro de [Capt.]. 1745. The voyage of A. da Cada Mosto, in 1455,
along the coast of Africa as far as Rio Grande / The second voyage of A. da Cada Mosto in
1456, in which the Cape Verde Islands were discovered / The voyage of Captain Piedro de
Cintra [...] to Sierra Leone.
Details wanting.
Càda Mosto, Alvise da; Cintra, Piedro de [Capt.]. 1748. Reise des Aluise da Cada Mosto, im Jahre
1455, längst der africanischen Küste bis Rio Grande, etc. / Die zweyte Reise nach der Küste
von Africa, im Jahre 1456, auf welcher die Jnseln des grünen Vorgebirges entdeckt worden,
etc. / Reise des Hauptmanns Piedro de Cintra [...] nach Sierra Leone. Aus dem
engländischen übersetzt.
Details wanting.
Càda Mosto, Alvise da; Cintra, Piedro de [Capt.]. 1948. Viagens de Luís de Cadamosto e de Pedro
de Sintra. Lisboa: Academia Portuguesa da História. Pp xvii, 209, plates.
Cadornega, António de Oliveira de. 1680/81. História geral das guerras angolanas, 3 tomos.
Luanda.
The third volume is some sort of geographical and ethnographical survey of Central Africa. Various peoples are
mentioned, e.g. Macoco/Anzico, Angois/Ngoio (Cabinda), Cacongo, Loango, Angola, Matamba, Dongo,
Benguela, and others (see Childs 1960). Reprinted in the 1940s by Agência Geral das Colónias in Lisboa.
Peripherals: Gladwyn Murray Childs, “The peoples of Angola in the seventeenth century according to Cadornega”,
Journal of African history, v. 1 (1960) p. 271-279.
Caille, Nicolas Louis de la. 1763. Journal historique du voyage fait au Cap de Bonne-Espérance.
Avec remarques et de réflexions sur les coutumes des Hottentots et des habitants du Cap.
Paris: Guillyn. Pp xxxvi, 380.
Includes biographical information about the author.
Caille, Nicolas Louis de la. 1776. Journal historique du voyage fait au Cap de Bonne-Espérance.
Deuxième édition. Paris: Guillyn.
Caille, Nicolas Louis de la. 1778. Reise nach dem Vorgebürge der Guten Hoffnung, nebst dem
Leben des Verfassers. Aus dem Französischen übersetzt, mit einem Anhang über Sitten und
Gebräuche der Hottentotten und der Einwohner des Vorgebürges der guten Hoffnung.
Altenburg: Richter. Pp xxviii, 227.
Caille, Nicolas Louis de la. 1976. Travels at the Cape, 1751-1753. Translated from French. Cape
Town & Rotterdam.
This could be a reprint of an earlier English edition. Unsure whether this is a translation of the first or second
French edition. The former appeared 1763, the latter 1776.
Caltanisetta, Luca da. 1970. Diairie congolais (1690-1701) de Fra Luca da Caltanisetta. Traduit
du manuscrit italien et annoté par F. Bontinck. Louvain & Paris: Editions E. Nauwelaerts.
44
Caravajal, Luys del Marmol. 1573/99. Descripcion general de Affrica, con todos los successos de
guerras que a auido entre los infideles, y el pueblo Christiano, y entre ellos mesmos desde
que Mahoma inueto su secta, hasta el ano del senor mil y quinientos y setenta y uno, 3
tomos. Granada (España) & Malaga: Rene Rabut & Iuan Diaz.
Reprinted in the 1950s, with a new introduction, by Instituto de Estudios Africanos in Madrid.
Peripherals: Paul E.H. Hair, “Sources on early Sierra Leone, 15: Marmol 1573”, Africana research bulletin, v. 9,3
(1979) p. 70-84.
Caravajal, Luys del Marmol. 1667. L’Afrique. De la traduction de Nicolas Perrot sieur
d’Ablancourt. Paris: T. Jolly.
Caravajal, Luys del Marmol. 1705. A description of Africa and all its provinces. London.
Carlet, David [Capt.]. 1824. A voyage to Guinea in 1564. In: A general history and collection of
voyages and travels, v. 7, p. (?). Ed. by Robert Kerr. Edinburgh: William Blackwood.
Carradori, Arcangelo. 1635. Ditionario della lingua italiana e nubiana. Manuscritto. Pistoia (Italia):
Biblioteca Forteguerriana.
A Nubian-Italian and Italian-Nubian dictionary of seventeenth-century Kenzi Nubian. A copy is/was available at the
Library of the Regio Liceo-Ginnasio Forteguerri in Pistoia (Zetterstéen 1911:42). An annotated version of the
Italian-Nubian part was published by K.V. Zetterstéen in the journal Le monde oriental (1911-1930). The whole
dictionary was reprinted 1975 in Bergen (Norway) by Jan Spaulding, as well as 1983 in Wien by Inge Hofmann.
URL: www.yourdictionary.com/elr/nubian.html
Peripherals: K.V. Zetterstéen, “Arcangelo Carradori’s Ditionario della lingua italiana e nubiana” (in 7 parts), Le
monde oriental, v. 5 (1911) p. 42-79, 137-167, v. 8 (1914) p. 203-236, v. 9 (1915) p. 17-55, v. 13 (1919) p. 184204, v. 24 (1930) p. 74-97; Jan Spaulding (ed.), Arcangelo Carradori’s dictionary of 17th century Kenzi Nubian
(University of Bergen, 1975); Inge Hofmann (ed.), Das nubische Wörterverzeichnis des Arcangelo Carradori
(O.F.M.) aus dem frühen 17. Jahrhundert (Afro-Pub, 1983).
Carradori, Arcangelo. 1911. Arcangelo Carradori’s Ditionario della lingua italiana e nubiana: A-B,
C [published by K.W. Zetterstéen]. Le monde oriental, v. 5, p. 42-79, 137-167.
An annotated version of Carradori’s Kenzi Nubian vocabulary from 1635. “Zetterstéen had been requested by the late
Leo Reinisch of Vienna, doyen of African linguists of the day and rival to Richard Lepsius as pioneering student of
Nubian, to edit and prepare for posthumous publication the Nubian grammar and lexicon of Zetterstéen’s senior
colleague at Uppsala, Herman Almkvist; this material was ultimately issued as Nubische Studien im Sudan.
Zetterstéen’s incomplete edition of Carradori (letters A through O), which appeared in several installments in Le
Monde Oriental, was thus accompanied by rather extensive notes, based largely upon Almkvist’s research but
incorporating references to the works of Reinisch and Lepsius” (Jay Spaulding 2000).
URL: www.yourdictionary.com/elr/nubianintro.html
Carradori, Arcangelo. 1914. Arcangelo Carradori’s Ditionario della lingua italiana e nubiana: D-F
[published by K.W. Zetterstéen]. Le monde oriental, v. 8, 3, p. 203-236.
Carradori, Arcangelo. 1915. Arcangelo Carradori’s Ditionario della lingua italiana e nubiana: G-L
[published by K.W. Zetterstéen]. Le monde oriental, v. 9, 1, p. 17-55.
Carradori, Arcangelo. 1919. Arcangelo Carradori’s Ditionario della lingua italiana e nubiana: M-O
[published by K.W. Zetterstéen]. Le monde oriental, v. 13, p. 184-204.
Carradori, Arcangelo. 1930. Arcangelo Carradori’s Ditionario della lingua italiana e nubiana: P-Q,
R-Z [published by K.W. Zetterstéen]. Le monde oriental, v. 24, p. 74-97, 205-228.
Carradori, Arcangelo. 1975. Arcangelo Carradori’s dictionary of 17th century Kenzi Nubian: the
oldest dictionary of an African language. Text and translation by Jay Spaulding. Occasional
papers from the Programme for Middle Eastern and African Studies, #4. Bergen: Historisk
Inst., Universitetet i Bergen. Pp vii, 298.
Carradori, Arcangelo. 1983. Das nubische Wörterverzeichnis des Arcangelo Carradori (O.F.M.)
aus dem frühen 17. Jahrhundert. Herausgegeben von Inge Hofmann, in Zusammenarbeit mit
Anton Vorbichler. Veröffentlichungen des Inst. für Afrikanistik und Ägyptologie der
Universität Wien, #26; Beiträge zur Afrikanistik, #19. Wien: Afro-Pub. Pp 381.
Castilla, L. de. 1680. Gramm. et vocab. linguae angolanae.
Referred to by Homburger (1925:167). No language specified, but probably Mbundu (or possibly Kikongo).
Cavendish, Thomas [Adm.]. 16xx. ... [Title wanting]. London.
Thomas Cavendish’s first journey, 1586-1588, took him round the world, during which he stopped at the Cape as
well as in West Africa. The second journey started 1591 and took him via Brazil to St Helena and Ascension, where
he died in 1592.
45
Peripherals: Paul E.H. Hair, “Sources on early Sierra Leone, 21: English voyages of the 1580s (Drake, Cavendish
and Cumberland)”, Africana research bulletin, v. 13 (1984) p. 62-88.
Cavendish, Thomas [Adm.]. 1975. The last voyage of Thomas Cavendish, 1591-1592: the
autograph manuscript of his own account of the voyage, written shortly before his death,
from the collection of Paul Mellon. With introduction, transcription and notes by David
Beers Quinn. Chicago: University of Chicago Press for the Newberry Library. Pp ix, 165.
ISBN-10 0-226-09819-2.
Chabigny, Assid el abd Salam. 1820. Relation d’une voyage de Fez à Timbouctou, fait vers l’année
1787. Nouvelles annales des voyages, de la géographie et de l’histoire ou recueil des
relations originales inédites, v. 7, p. 5-51.
Chaloner, Thomas. 1890. The voyage of Sir Thomas Chaloner to Alger. In: The principal
navigations, voyages, traffiques & discoveries of the English nation, v. 11, p. (?). New
(fourth) edition. Ed. by Richard Hakluyt & Edmund Goldsmid. Edinburgh: E. & C.
Goldsmid.
Sixteenth-century travels.
Chamberlayne, John. (Ed.) 1715. Oratio Dominica in diversas omnium fere gentium linguas
versa et propriis cujusque linguae characteribus expressa: una cum dissertationibus
nonnullis de linguarum origine, variisque ipsarum permutationibus. Amsterdam: Guilielmi
& Davidis Goerei. Pp 48, 94, 156.
Contains something on Tashlhiyt Berber (Jucovy & Alderete 2001).
Chambonneau, Louis Moreau de. 1677. ... [Title and details wanting].
Unpublished accounts of Senegal, written by one of Senegal’s early French governors. Details wanting.
Peripherals: C.I.A. Ritchie “Impressions of Senegal in the seventeenth century: excerpts from Louis
Chambonneau’s ‘treatise on the origin of negroes of Senegal, on the African Coast, about their country, religion,
customs, and habits’”, African studies, v. 26 (1967) p. 59-93; P.E.H. Hair, “The falls of Felou: a bibliographical
exploration”, History in Africa, v. 11 (1984) p. 113-120.
Chesneau, Jean. 1984. Le voyage en Egypte. In: Voyages en Egypte, 1549-1552, p. (?). Ed. by
Frank Lestringant. Le Caire: Inst. Français d’Archéologie Orientale (IFAO).
Churchill, Awnsham; Churchill, John. (Ed.) 1704/32. A collection of voyages and travels, some
now first printed from original manuscripts, others translated out of foreign languages and
now first published in English; to which are added some few that have formerly appear’d in
English, but do now for their excellency and scarceness deserve to be reprinted, 6 vols.
London: A. & J. Churchill.
The title varies somewhat on the various volumes.
Churchill, Awnsham; Churchill, John. (Ed.) 1744/46. A collection of voyages and travels, some
now first printed from original manuscripts, others now first published in English, 6 vols.
Third edition, prefixed with an introductory discourse on “The whole history of navigation
from its original to this time”. London: A. & J. Churchill.
Clifford, George [Earl of Cumberland]. 1625. A briefe relation of the seuerall voyages, vndertaken
and performed by the Right Honorable, George, Earle of Cumberland [...] written by
himself. London.
The Earl of Cumberland’s journeys took him to Sierra Leone (cfr Hair 1984). There are seemingly several 18thcentury editions/reprints of these journals. Not sure when the first edition appeared.
Cloppenburg, J.W. 1768. Journaal van myn reijs van 23 September tot 16 November 1768.
Onuitgegeve manuskrip. Kaapstad: Kaapse Argief.
Referred to by Nienaber & Raper (1980:770).
Peripherals: V.S. Forbes, “Clopperburg’s journey, 1768”, Africana notes and news (Johanneburg), v. 15 (1962/63)
p. 113-123.
Coelho, Francisco de Lemos. 1680s. ... [Title and details wanting].
Unpublished journals of travels to Guinea-Bissau made during the 1660s and the 1680s.
language review, v. 6 (1967) p. 32-70; Paul E.H. Hair, “Ethnolinguistic continuity on the Guinea coast”, Journal of
African history, v. 8 (1967) p. 247-269.
46
Coelho, Francisco de Lemos. 1953. Duas descrições seiscentistas da Guiné. Manuscritos inéditos
publicados com introduçao e anotaçoes históricas pelo académico de número Damiao Peres.
Lisboa: Academia Portuguesa da História. Pp xxxi, 283.
Coelho, Francisco de Lemos. 1985. Description of the coast of Guinea (1684). Translated and
edited by Paul E.H. Hair. Dept. of History, University of Liverpool. Pp 102.
Columbus, Christopher. 1491. Postils, handwritten notes.
“According to casual references, made in notes apparently either written or authorized by Columbus himself, he had,
at an unstated date, seen and perhaps been within the castle of São Jorge da Mina in Guinea ... [Assuming it to be so]
he had therefore sailed to Mina (Elmina in present-day Ghana), most probably, it is generally thought, between
1482 and 1484” (Hair 1995:223). “The references occur in the manuscript notes (‘postils’) added in poor Latin to
books owned by the Columbus brothers ... it appears to be generally supposed that the books were first read and at
least most of the postils added before 1492” (Hair 1995:231n2).
Peripherals: William Stevens III, “Africa: a place in the discovery of the Americas”, Five hundred magazine (Coral
Gables FL), v. 1 (1989) p.(?); Paul E.H. Hair, “Columbus from Guinea to America”, History in Africa, v. 17 (1990)
p. 113-129; José Luis Cortés López, “El tiempo africano de Cristóbal Colón: precisiones para su biografia”, Studia
historica (Salamanca), v. 8 (1990) p. 313-326; Paul E.H. Hair, “Was Columbus’ first very long voyage a voyage
from Guinea?”, History in Africa, v. 22 (1995) p. 223-237.
Colvin, Ian Duncan. 1912. The Cape of Adventure: being strange and notable discoveries, perils
shipwrecks, battles upon sea and land, with pleasant and interesting observations upon the
country and the natives of the Cape of Good Hope, extracted from the writings of the early
travellers. London.
URL: www.archive.org/details/capeofadventureb00colvuoft
Contant d’Orville, André Guillaume. 1770/72. Histoire des différens peuples du monde, cont. les
cérémonies religieuses et civiles, l’origine des religions, leurs sectes et superstitions, et les
moeurs et usages de chaque nation, 6 vols. Paris: Herissant.
Vol 4 contains notes on the Khoekhoe.
Corsali, Andrea. 1515. Lettera (allo illustrissimo Signore Duca Iuliano de Medici).
Corsali wrote a ‘lettera’ (dated January 6th, 1515) to the Medici family while on a Portuguese vessel on his way to
the Indian Ocean via southern Africa. He makes a brief mention about different languages being spoken on Africa’s
western and eastern coasts, respectively. Corsali wrote several letters, some of which later appeared in various
editions of Ramusio’s Delle navigationi et viaggi. They were also translated into several European languages, e.g.
English in 1555, German in 1576.
Peripherals: M.D.W. Jeffreys, “Corsali 1515 on Bantu and Sudanic languages”, African studies, v. 11 (1952) p.
191.
Courbe, Michel Jajolet de la. 1913. Premier voyage du Sieur de la Courbe fait à la coste d’Afrique
en 1685. Publié avec une carte de Delisle et une introduction par P. Cultru. Paris: Librairie
Ancienne Honoré Champion et Emile Larose, pour la Société de l’Histoire des Colonies
Françaises. Pp lviii, 319.
Crouch, Nathaniel. 1686. A view of the English acquisitions in Guinea and the East Indies, with an
account of the religion, government, wars, strange customs, beasts, serpents, monsters, and
other observables in those countries; together with a description of the Isle of St. Helena
and the Bay of Sculdania where the English usually refresh in their voyages to the Indies;
intermixt with pleasant relations and enlivened with picture. London: Nathaniel Crouch. Pp
182, plates.
Credited to R.B. (Richard Burton), a pseudonym of Nathaniel Crouch.
Crouch, Nathaniel. 1700. The English acquisitions in Guinea and East-India. New edition.
London: Nathaniel Crouch. Pp 179.
Credited to R.B. (Richard Burton), a pseudonym of Nathaniel Crouch.
Crow, Hugh [Capt.]. 1790. A small English-Eboe vocabulary.
“Ein kleines Vokabular ... wurde vom Captain Crow während seines Aufenthaltes als Sklavenhändler in etwa 10
jahren (von 1790 ab) in Bonny aufgenommen” (Hintze 1959:85). Hintze (idem) says the language is Igbo.
Croze, Maturino Veyssiere la. 1775. Lexicon aegyptiaco-latinum. Oxonii: Typographeo
Clarendoniano (Clarendon Press). Pp xi, 199, 67.
Early Coptic dictionary.
Cruse, Hieronymus. 1669/1916. Journael oft daghregister gehouden bijden Corporael Jeronimus
Croes vertreckende door last van d’E. Hr. Commandeur Jacobus Borghorst uyt het fort de
47
Goede Hope naer de Obiquas en Hessequaes om met deselve natie de veehandelingh door de
aen hem daertoe medgegeven coopmanschappen, en’t geene verder ten dienste ende tot profijt
van d’E. Conp. e soude mogen strecken, te bevorderen, 1669. In: Reizen in Zuid-Afrika in de
hollandse tijd, v. 1, p. 122-128. Ed. by Everhardus Cornelis Godée-Molsbergen. Werken
uitgegeven door de Linschoten-Vereeniging, #11. ’s-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff.
Publication of previously unpublished manuscripts (see Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:6).
Cugoano, Quobna Ottobah (John Stuert). 1787. Thoughts and sentiments on the evil and wicked
traffic of the slavery and commerce of the human species, humbly submitted to the
inhabitants of Great-Britain. London. Pp iv, 148.
There are several 1787-editions of this. One of them was reprinted 1969 as Thoughts and sentiments on the evil of
slavery by Dawsons of Pall Mall in London, with an introduction by Paul Edwards (ISBN-10 0-7129-0331-3).
Peripherals: Vincent Carretta, “Three West Indian writers of the 1780s revisited and revised”, Research in African
literatures, v. 29 (1998).
Cugoano, Quobna Ottobah (John Stuert). 1791. Thoughts and sentiments on the evil of slavery:
the nature of servitude as admitted by the law of God, compared to the modern slavery of
the Africans in the West-Indies, in an answer to the advocates for slavery and oppression;
addressed to the sons of Africa, by a native. London: Self-published. Pp 46.
Cugoano, Quobna Ottobah (John Stuert). 1999. Thoughts and sentiments on the evil of slavery,
and other writings. Edited, introduced and annotated by Vincent Carretta. London & New
York: Penguin. Pp xxxvi, 198. ISBN-10 0-14-044750-4.
Dalby, David; Hair, Paul Edward Hedley. 1964. “Le langage de Guynee”: a sixteenth-century
vocabulary from the Pepper Coast. African language studies, v. 5, p. 174-191.
Looks at an old Krahn vocabulary collected by one Mr Towerson in 1555.
Dalzel, Archibald. 1793. The history of Dahomy: an inland kingdom of Africa. London: T.
Spilsbury & Son for the author. Pp xxxi, xxvi, 230, plates.
Reprinted 1967 by Frank Cass & Co. in London.
Damberger, Christian Friedrich (Zacharias Taurinius). 1801. Landreise in das Innere von Afrika,
vom Vorgebirge der guten Hoffnung durch die Kaffarey, die Königreiche Mataman, Angola,
Massi, Monomuegi, Muschako, u.a.m., ferner durch die Wüste Sahara und die nördliche
Barbarey bis nach Morocco, in den Jahren 1781 bis 1797, 2 Bde. Leipzig: Martini. Pp vi,
218; 278.
“Fabricated travels; but contains good informations about Hottentots” (Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:7). Reprinted
1930 by Uhlenhorst-Verlag Brenner in Hamburg, though it could be an abridgement (315 pp).
Damberger, Christian Friedrich (Zacharias Taurinius). 1801. Travels through the interior of Africa
from the Cape of Good Hope to Morocco. Translated from German. London: Lee. Pp 360.
Abridged translation?
Damberger, Christian Friedrich (Zacharias Taurinius). 1801. Travels through the interior of Africa
from the Cape of Good Hope to Morocco; in the Caffraria, the kingdoms of Mataman,
Angola, Massi, Monoemugi, Muschako, Bahahara, Wangara, Haoussa, &c., &c., and
thence through the desert of the Sahara and the north of Barbary to Morocco, between the
years 1781 and 1797. Faithfully translated from German. London: Sir Richard Phillips &
Co. Pp xxii, 544.
URL: www.archive.org/details/travelsthroughin00tauriala
Damberger, Christian Friedrich (Zacharias Taurinius). 1801. Voyage dans l’intérieur de l’Afrique,
depuis le Cap de Bonne-Espérance, à travers la Cafrérie, les royaumes de Mataman, et
d’Angola, de Massi, de Monoémugi, de Muschako, etc., en continuant par le désert de
Sahara et la partie septentrionale de la Barbarie, jusqu’à Maroc, commencé en 1781 et
achevé en 1797, 2 vols. Traduit de l’allemand par L.H. Delamarre. Paris & Stuttgart: König.
URL: gallica.bnf.fr/scripts/ConsultationTout.exe?O=N084355&E=0
Dampier, William [Capt.]. 1697. A new voyage round the world: describing particularly the
Isthmus of Americ, several coasts and islands [...], New Holland, Sumatra, Nicobar Isles,
the Cape of Good Hope, and Santa Hellena; their soil, rivers, harbours, plants, fruits,
animals and inhabitants, their customs, religion, government, trade etc. London: James
Knapton. Pp vi, 550.
48
Contains a description of the ‘Homodods’, i.e. the Khoekhoe (Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:7). There are several
subsequent editions of this, some of which are abridged. There is also a reprint dated 1927 by Argonaut Press in
London, possibly abridged.
Isthmus of America, several coasts and islands in the West Indies, the isles of Cape Verd,
the passage by Terra del Fuego, the South Sea coasts of chili, Peru, and Mexico, the isle of
Guam, one of the Ladrones, Mindanao, and other Philippine and East-India islands near
Cambodia, China, Formosa, Luconia, Celebes &c., New Holland, Sumatra, Nicobar isles,
the Cape of Good Hope, and Santa Hellena. Second edition, corrected. London: James
Knapton. Pp vi, 550.
There exist several abridged 19th-century editions of this.
Isthmus of America, several coasts and islands in the West Indies, the Isles of Cape Verd,
the passage by Terra del Fuego, the South Sea Coasts of Chili, Peru, and Mexico, the Isle of
Guam, one of the Ladrones, Mindanao and other Philippine and East-India Islands near
Cambodia, China, Formosa, Luconia, Celebes &c., New Holland, Sumatra, Nicobar Isles,
the Cape of Good Hope, and Santa Hellena. Third edition, corrected. London: James
Knapton. Pp 550.
Dampier, William [Capt.]. 1715. Nouveau voyage autour du monde, 5 vols. Traduit de l’anglais.
Rouen.
Dantzig, Albert van. (Ed.) 1978. The Dutch and the Guinea Coast 1674-1742: a collection of
documents from the General State Archive at The Hague. Compiled and translated by Albert
van Dantzig. Accra: Ghana Academy of Arts and Sciences. Pp 375.
Dantzig, Albert van. (Ed.) 1980. Les hollandais sur la côte de Guinée à l’époque de l’essor de
l’Ashanti et du Dahomey, 1680-1740. Bibliothèque d’histoire d’outre-mer, nouvelle série,
#3. Paris: Société Française d’Histoire d’Outre-Mer. Pp xii, 327. ISBN-10 2-85970-003-X.
Dapper, Olfert. 1668. Naukeurige beschrijvinge der Afrikaensche Gewesten. Amsterdam: Van
Meurs.
This might a two-volume thing. It mentions several peoples, sometimes with specimens of languages (see Hair
1967), e.g. Bolm (Bullom), Cilm (Krim), Gebbe (Bassa-dialect), Quaabe (Krahn?), Gala (Gola), Kquoja (Vai),
Konde-Kquoja (Kono), Hondo (Mende?), Karradoboe (Koranko?), Folgia (Gio?), Manoe (Mano?), Duala, Khoekhoe,
Ijo.
Peripherals: P.E.H. Hair, “An early seventeenth-century vocabulary of Vai”, African studies, v. 23 (1964) p. 129139; Jürgen Zwernemann, “Zwei Quellen des 17. Jahrhunderts über die Vai in Liberia: Samuel Brun und Olfert
Dapper”, Neue afrikanistische Studien (ed. by Johannes Lukas, 1966) p. 293-318; Paul E.H. Hair, “Ethnolinguistic
continuity on the Guinea coast”, Journal of African history, v. 8 (1967) p. 247-269; P.E.H. Hair, “An
ethnolinguistic inventory of the Lower Guinea coast before 1700”, African language review, v. 7 (1968) p. 47-73,
v. 8 (1969) p. 225-236; P.E.H. Hair, “The earliest vocabularies of Cameroons Bantu”, African studies, v. 28 (1969)
p. 49-54.
Dapper, Olfert. 1670. Umbständliche und eigentliche Beschreibung von Afrika. Aus dem
holländischen übersetzt von J.C. Beer. Amsterdam: Van Meurs. Pp xvii, 695, 101.
Contains notes on ‘Mataman’ and ‘Klimbebe or Zimbebas’ on p. 601-602 plus Khoekhoe on p. 602-627
(Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:7). Reprinted 1967 by Johnson Reprint Corporation in New York (Landmarks in
anthropology series).
Dapper, Olfert. 1676. Naukeurige beschrijvinge der Afrikaensche Gewesten, 2 boeke. Tweede
uitgave. Amsterdam: Van Meurs.
The chapter entitled “Kaffrarie of Lant der Kaffers, anders Hottentots genaemt” was later republished and translated
by Schapera (1933).
Dapper, Olfert. 1676/1933. Kaffrarie, of lant der Kaffers, anders Hottentots genannt / Kaffraria, or
land of the Hottentots [with translation by Isaac Schapera]. In: The early Cape Hottentots, p.
6-77. Ed. by Isaac Schapera. Publications from the Van Riebeeck Society, #14. Cape Town.
Includes extracts and translations from the second edition of Dapper’s Naukeurige beschrijvinge der Afrikaensche
Gewesten.
Dapper, Olfert. 1686. Description de l’Afrique, contenant les noms, la situation et les confins de
toutes les parties, lers rivières, leurs villes et leurs habitations, leurs plantes et leurs
animaux; les moeurs, les coutûmes, la langue, les richelles, la religion, et le gouvernement
de les peuples. Traduite du Flamand. Amsterdam: Wolfgang, Waesberge, Boom & Van
Sommeren. Pp vi, 534, xii.
Reprinted 1970 by Johnson Reprint Corporation in New York (Landmarks in anthropology series).
49
Peripherals: Anon, Littell’s living age (New York), v. 66 (1860) p. 412.
Davenant, Charles. 1709. Reflections upon the constitution and management of the trade to Africa.
London.
Peripherals: John Chindley, John Chidley’s vindication of himself, from the slander and calumny cast upon him, in
the sixth and seventh pages of a book entitled, ‘Reflections upon the Constitution and Management of the trade to
Africa’ (London, 1709).
Davenant, Charles. 1710. An answer to several pretended arguments proving that our trade to
Africa cannot be preserved and carried on effectually by any other method than that of a
considerable joint-stock with exclusive privileges. London. Pp 4.
Degrandpré, Louis Maria Joseph. 1801. Voyage à la cotê occidentale d’Afrique, fait dans les
années 1786 et 1787, 2 vols. Paris.
Includes a short Congo vocabulary of c.120 words (p. 156-162).
Demanet, [Abbé]. 1767. Nouvelle histoire de l’Afrique françoise: enrichie de cartes et
d’observations astronomiques & géographiques, de remarques sur les usages locaux, les
moeurs, la religion et la nature du commerce général de cette partie du monde, 2 vols.
Paris: Veuve Duchesne.
URL: books.google.se/books?id=Mn4CAAAAYAAJ
Descourvières, M. 1770. Essay d’une grammaire congo, suivant l’accent Kakongo ou Malemba.
Roma: Musée du Congregation de la Propagande. Pp 48.
Bears no author name, but may have been written by Descourvières (Doke 1959:64). The manuscript itself was
originally found by R.P. Duparquet at the Loango mission in Angola (Doke 1959:63).
Descourvières, M.; Joli, M. 1768/70. Dictionnaire congo-français. Roma: Musée du Congregation
de la Propagande.
Bears neither name nor date, but is likely to have been compiled by missionaries Descourvières & Joli (Doke
1959:64). It comprises a complete dictionary from A-Z, and it was originally found by R.P. Duparquet at the Loango
mission in Angola (Doke 1959:63).
Dias, Pedro. 1697. Arte da lingua de Angola, oeferecida a Virgem Senhora N. do Rosario, Mãy,
and Senhora dos Mesmos Pretos. Lisboa: Officina de Miguel Deslandes, Impressor de Sua
Magestade. Pp 4, 48.
Grammar of Ndongo, a Kimbundu dialect. The second known Bantu grammar (cfr Doke 1945:22). The title contains
a misprint. It says “oeferecida” instead of “offerecida”.
Donelha, André. 1977. Descricão da Serra Leoa e dos rios de Guiné do Cabo Verde, 1625 /
Description de la Serra Leoa et de rios de Guiné du Cabo Verde, 1625. Edição do texto
português, introdução, notas e apêndices por Avelino Teixeira da Mota; notas por Paul E.H.
Hair; tradução francesa por Léon Bourdon. Série de memórias, Centro de Estudos de
Cartografia Antiga, secção de Lisboa, #18. Lisboa: Junta de Investigações Científicas do
Ultramar. Pp xiii, 472.
Donelha, André. 1977. Descricão da Serra Leoa e dos rios de Guiné do Cabo Verde, 1625 / An
account of Sierra Leone and the rivers of Guinea of Cape Verde, 1625. Edição do texto
português, introdução, notas e apêndices por Avelino Teixeira da Mota; notes and English
translation by Paul E.H. Hair. Série de memórias, Centro de Estudos de Cartografia Antiga,
secção de Lisboa, #19. Lisboa: Junta de Investigações Científicas do Ultramar. Pp xiii, 472.
Dornelas, A. 1625. Relação sobre a Serra-Leoa. Manuscripto. Lisboa: Biblioteca de Ajuda.
Drake, Francis [Sir]. 1628. The world encompassed by Sir Francis Drake. London: Nicholas
Bourne. Pp 110.
Sir Francis Drake started his round-the-world journey in 1577. He stopped at the Cape and Sierra Leone in 1580
before arriving back in England. Reprinted in various forms many times, e.g. 1926 by the Argonaut Press in
London.
Drury, Robert. 1729. Madagascar: Robert Drury’s journal during fifteen years’ captivity on that
island. Written by himself, digested into order, and now publish’d at the request of his
friends. London: W. Meadows. Pp xvi, 464.
50
Sometimes credited to Daniel Defoe and therefore often labelled fiction. Includes mentions of the ‘Verzimbers’ (=
Vazimba), and a Malagasy vocabulary (p. 457-464).
Drury, Robert. 1743. Madagascar: Robert Drury’s journal during fifteen years’ captivity on that
island, containing a description of that island. Written by himself, and now carefully revised
and corrected from the original copy. London: W. Meadows. Pp xii, 459.
Drury, Robert. 1897. Madagascar: Robert Drury’s journal during fifteen years captivity on that
island. New edition, supplemented with a further description of Madagascar by Abbé
Rochon; edited with an introduction and notes by Captain Pasfield Olive. London: T. Fisher
Unwin. Pp 400.
Drury, Robert. (Ed.) 1906. Les aventures de Robert Drury, pendant ses quinze années de captivité
à Madagascar et sons second voyage dans cette Île. Traduit de l’anglais. Collection des
ouvrages anciens concernant Madagascar, #4. Paris: Comité de Madagascar.
Duquesne, Abraham; Maire, Jacques Joseph le. 1696. A new voyage to the East-Indies in the years
1690 and 1691: being a full description of the isles of Maldives, Cicos, Andamants, and the
Isle of Ascention; to which is added, a new description of the Canary Islands, Cape Verd,
Senegal and Gambia, &c., illustrated with sculptures, together with a new map of the
Indies, and another of the Canaries. Done into English from the Paris edition. London: D.
Dring. Pp 187, 128.
Eden, Richard. 1890. A briefe description of Afrike. In: The principal navigations, voyages,
traffiques & discoveries of the English nation, v. 11, p. (?). New (fourth) edition. Ed. by
Richard Hakluyt & Edmund Goldsmid. Edinburgh: E. & C. Goldsmid.
This presumably appeared already in one of the sixteenth-century editions.
Ehrmann, Theophil Friedrich. 1791/98. Geschichte der merkwürdigsten Reisen, welche set dem
zwölften Jahrhunderte zu Wasser und zu Land unternommen worden sind, 22 Bde.
Frankfurt-am-Main: Hermannsche Buchhandlung.
Mentions/discusses a variety of African languages, Ngangela K12b, Shona S10, Herero R31, Susu, Bullom,
Timmani (Temne), Khoekhoe, and others.
Elbée, Sieur d’. 1671. Iournal du voyage du Sr Delbée, aux isles, dans la coste de Guinée. In:
Relation de ce qui s’est passé dans les isles & terre-ferme de l’Amerique, pendant la
dernière guerre avec l’Angleterre, et depuis en exécution du Traitte de Breda, p. 347-494,
495-558. Ed. by Jean Clodoré. Paris: Gervais Clouzier.
In two parts. Not sure about the title. It is sometimes given as “Journal du voyage du Sieur Delbée, commissaire
général de la marine, aux isles, dans la coste de Guynée, pour l’établissement du commerce en ces pays, en la année
1699”.
Equiano, Olaudah (Gustavus Wassa). 1789. The interesting narrative of the life of Olaudah
Equiano, or Gustavus Vassa, the African, written by himself, 2 vols. London: Selfpublished. Pp 16, 272, plates; 6, 255, plates.
The first nine editions (dated 1789, 1789, 1790, 1791, 1792, 1793, 1793, 1794, 1794) were printed and sold by
the author himself. In 1791, an unauthorized American edition appeared in New York, published by W. Durrell. After
Equiano’s death in 1797 many editions and reprints saw the light of day. An abridged edition appeared 1967 as
Equiano’s travels, published by Heinemann. A complete facsimile reprint of the first 1789-edition appeared 1969,
with a new introduction by Paul Edwards, published by Dawsons in London. There exist many reprints of the
different editions, most of which seem to be published in the US. In fact, new editions/reprints seem to pop up
every now and then. Sometimes they are retitled, sometimes not. There are also many translations into other
languages, e.g. Dutch, German, Swedish, Russian, Spanish.
URL: history.hanover.edu/texts/equiano/equiano_contents.html
Peripherals: Anon, review, The gentleman’s magazine, v. 59 (1789) p. 539; S.E. Ogude, “Facts into fiction:
Equiano’s narrative reconsidered”, Research in African literatures, v. 13 (1982) p.(?); Paul Edwards, “Equiano’s lost
family: ‘master’ and ‘father’ in the Interesting Narrative”, Slavery and abolition, v. 11 (1990) p.(?); Geraldine
Murphy, “Olaudah Equiano: accidental tourist”, Eighteenth-century studies, v. 27 (1994) p.(?); Adam Potkay,
“Olaudah Equiano and the art of spiritual autobiography”, Eighteenth-century studies, v. 27 (1994) p.(?); Vincent
Carretta, “Three West Indian writers of the 1780s revisited and revised”, Research in African literatures, v. 29
(1998) p.(?).
Equiano, or Gustavus Vassa, the African, written by himself, to which are added, poems on
various subjects, by Phillis Wheatley, Negro servant to Mr John Wheatley of Boston in New
England. Halifax: J. Nicholson & Co. Pp 514.
51
Equiano, or Gustavus Vassa, the African, written by himself. New edition, corrected. Leeds:
James Nichols. Pp x, 236.
In this edition, apparently, the so-called corrections have introduced substantial changes into the text. This version
has been reprinted more than once, e.g. 1987 by Mentor Books in New York; and 1999 by Dover Publ. in New
York.
Equiano, Olaudah (Gustavus Wassa). 1967. Equiano’s travels: his autobiography - the interesting
narrative of the life of Olaudah Equiano or Gustavus Vassa the African. Abridged and
edited by Paul Edwards. African writers series, #10. London & Ibadan: Heinemann
Educational Books. Pp xviii, 196.
Reprinted more than once (ISBN-10 0-435-90010-2).
Peripherals: Roger Anstey, Journal of African history, v. 9 (1968) p. 166-167.
Equiano, Olaudah (Gustavus Wassa). 1995. The interesting narrative and other writings. Edited,
introduced and annotated by Vincent Carretta. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books. Pp xxxvii,
355. ISBN-10 0-14-043485-2.
Reprint of the 9th edition, originally published 1794, here supplemented with letters and such.
Evesham, John. 1890. The voyage of John Evesham into Egypt. In: The principal navigations,
voyages, traffiques & discoveries of the English nation, v. 11, p. (?). New (fourth) edition.
Ed. by Richard Hakluyt & Edmund Goldsmid. Edinburgh: E. & C. Goldsmid.
Falconbridge, Alexander. 1788. An account of the slave trade on the coast of Africa. London: J.
Phillips. Pp iv, [5]-55.
Faro, André de. 1665. Relaçam.
Unpublished journal of missionary travels (1663-1664) to Sierra Leone.
Faro, André de. (Ed.) 1945. Peregrinaçao de André de Faro à terra dos gentios. As grandes
aventuras e os grandes aventureiros, #1. Lisboa: Livraria Bertrand. Pp lxi, 124.
Faro, André de. (Ed.) 1982. André de Faro’s missionary journey to Sierra Leone in 1663-1664. A
shortened version in English translation by Paul E.H. Hair. Occasional papers from the Inst.
of African Studies (IAS), #5. Freetown: University of Sierra Leone. Pp 75.
Fei Xin. 1436. Xingocha shenglan = The overall survey of the Star Raft.
Fei Xin accompanied Zheng He on several voyages, including the 7th voyage, which took him to East Africa. The
travelogue itself was finished in 1436, though the earliest known version dates from 1544. It mentions places like
Mogadishu, Brava, and Giumbo, all in East Africa.
Fei Xin. 1996. Hsing-ch’a sheng-lan: the overall survey of the Star Raft. Translated by J.V.G.
Mills; revised, annotated and edited by Roderick Ptak. South China and maritime Asia, #4.
Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz Verlag. Pp 153. ISBN-10 3-447-03798-8.
Fenner, George. 1824. A voyage to Guinea and the Cape de Verd Islands in 1566. In: A general
history and collection of voyages and travels, v. 7, p. (?). Ed. by Robert Kerr. Edinburgh:
William Blackwood.
Fernandes, Valentim. 150x. Descripçam de cepta por sua costa de Mauritania e Ethiopia (Codex
monacensis hispanicus 27). München: Bayerische Staatsbibliothek.
Early unpublished account of the Guinea coast, apparently compiled from various sources, e.g. Gomes de Zurara,
Alvise da Càda Mosto, Diogo Gomes, and others. The “larger part appears to come from a single author otherwise
unknown, whose name is given as Alvaro Velho” (Hair 1966:10). Contains much information about the Jolof, as
well as lexical specimens from several West African languages.
the Guinea coast”, Journal of African history, v. 8 (1967) p. 247-269.
Fernandes, Valentim. 1938. Description de la cote d’Afrique de Ceuta au Senegal. Edité et traduit
par Pierre de Cenival et Théodore Monod. Publications du Comité d’Etudes Historiques et
Scientifiques de l’Afrique Occidentale Française, série A, #6. Paris: Emile Larose. Pp 214.
52
Fernandes, Valentim. 1951. Description de la côte occidentale d’Afrique (Sénégal du Cap de
Monte, Archipels). Edité et traduit par Théodore Monod, A. Teixeira da Mota et Raymond
Mauny. Publicaçoes do Centro de Estudos da Guiné Portuguesa, #11. Bissau. Pp 223.
Fernandez, André. 1562/1899. Letter to the Brothers and Fathers of the Society of Jesus in
Portugal, dated from Goa, December 5, 1562. In: Records of South-Eastern Africa, collected
in various libraries and archive deposits in Europe, v. 2, p. 142. Ed. by George McCall
Theal. London: William Clowes & Sons for the Government of the Cape Colony.
Talks about Inhambane songs and gives lexical specimens of what could be early Sena (Doke 1960:29f).
Ferrand, Gabriel M. 1904. Un texte arabico-malgache du XVIe siècle transcrit, traduit et annoté
d’après les MSS. 7 et 8 de la Bibliothèque Nationale. Tiré des notices et extraits des
manuscrits de la Bibliothèque Nationales et autres bibliothèques, #38. Paris: Bibliothèque
Nationale.
Peripherals: Sidney H. Ray, Man, v. 7 (1907) p. 43-45.
Flacourt, Etienne de. 1658. Dictionnaire de la langue de Madagascar, avec un petit recueil des
noms et dictions propres des choses qui sont d’une mesme espère, plus quelques mots du
langage des sauvages de la baye de Bonne Espérance; un petit catéchisme et les prières du
matin et du soir que les missionnaires font et enseignent aux néophytes et cathéchumènes de
cette isle, le tout en françois et en cette langue. Paris: Josse. Pp xvii, 176, iv, 63, 114.
“Contains 7 p. of Hottentot words” (Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:113). Reprinted 1905 together with Flacourt’s
Histoire de la grande isle Madagascar (in one vol) by Gabriel M. Ferrand.
Flacourt, Etienne de. 1658. Histoire de la grande isle Madagascar, 2 vols. Paris: Pierre l’Amy. Pp
192; [193]-384, 42.
There’s also an edition/reprint dated 1661. Reprinted 1905 together with Flacourt’s Dictionnaire de la langue de
Madagascar (in one vol) by Gabriel M. Ferrand. An annotated reprint appeared 1995, published by Karthala in Paris.
Flacourt, Etienne de. 1905. Dictionnaire de la langue de Madagascar / Histoire de la grande isle
Madagascar. Publié par Gabriel M. Ferrand d’après l’édition de 1658 et 1661. Publications
de l’Ecole des Lettres d’Alger; Bulletin de correspondance africaine, #33. Paris: Ernest
Leroux. Pp xxxix, 296.
Contains reprints of Dictionnaire de la langue de Madagascar (1658) and Histoire de la grande isle Madagascar
(1661).
Flacourt, Etienne de. 1995. Histoire de la grande isle Madagascar. Éditée, annotée et présentée par
Claude Allibert. Paris: Editions Karthala. Pp 655. ISBN-10 2-86537-578-1.
Fosse, Eustache de la. 1479/80. Mina vocabulary.
Not sure what title to put on this. The date refers to when the vocabulary was recorded, not published.
Peripherals: René Basset, Notes sur la langue de la Guiné au XVe siècle (Imprensa da Universidade de Coimbra,
1913); Paul E.H. Hair, “A note on de la Fosse’s ‘Mina’ vocabulary of 1479-80”, Journal of West African languages,
v. 3 (1966) p. 55-57; Paul E.H. Hair, “The use of African languages in Afro-European contacts in Guinea 14401560”, Sierra Leone language review, v. 5 (1966) p. 5-26; David Dalby & Paul E.H. Hair, “A further note on the
Mina vocabulary of 1479-80”, Journal of West African languages, v. 5 (1968) p. 129-132; Alfredo Margarido,
“L’albinos du vocabulaire d’Eustache de la Fosse”, Cahiers d’études africaines, v. 46 (1972) p. 323-324; Paul E.H.
Hair, “Early sources on religion and social values in the Sierra Leone region, 2: Eustache de la Fosse 1480”,
Africana research bulletin, v. 4.1 (1974) p. 49-54.
Fosse, Eustache de la. 1897. Voyage à la côte occidentale d’Afrique, en Portugal et en Espagne,
1479-1480 [publié par R. Foulche-Delbosc]. Revue hispanique, v. 4, p. 177-181.
Fosse, Eustache de la. 1992. Crónica de uma viagem à Costa da Mina no ano de 1480. Tradução
e adaptação do texto de Pedro Alvim; con un prólogo de Joaquim Montezuma de Carvalho.
Lisboa: Vega. Pp 114. ISBN-10 972-699-332-6.
Fosse, Eustache de la. 1992. Voyage d’Eustache Delafosse sur la côte de Guinée, au Portugal et
en Espagne, 1479-1481. Transcription du manuscrit de Valenciennes, traduction et
présentation de Denis Escudier. Paris: Chandeigne. Pp 181. ISBN-10 2-906462-03-9.
53
Fréjus, Roland. 1670. Relatin d’un voyage fait dans le Mauritanie, en Affrique. Paris: Gervais
Clouzier. Pp 286.
Fréjus, Roland. 1671. The relation of a voyage made into Mauritania, in Africk, by the Sieur
Roland Frejus of Marseilles, by the French King’s order, in the year 1666, to Muley Arxid
King of Tafiletta, &c., for the establishment of a commerce in all the kingdom of Fez, and all
his other conquests. Translated from French. London: Godbid. Pp 119, 71.
Froger, François. 1698. Relation d’un voyage fait en 1695, 1696 et 1697 aux côtes d’Afriques,
détroit de Magellan, Brézil, Cayenne & Isles antilles, par une escadre des vaisseaux du Roy,
commandé par M. de Gennes. Paris: G. Saugrain. Pp 219.
Froger, François. 1698. A relation of a voyage made in the years 1695, 1696, 1697 on the coasts
of Africa, streights of Magellan, Brasil, Cayenna, and the Antilles, by a squadron of French
men of war, under the command of M. de Gennes. Translated from the French. London:
Gillyflower, Freeman, Wotton, Walthoe, and Parker. Pp 173.
Several subsequent English editions exist.
Froger, François. 1715. Relation d’un voyage de la Mer du Sud, detroit de Magellan, Bresil,
Cayenne et les isles Antilles. Amsterdam. Pp 227.
Seemingly a new edition.
Funnell, William. 1707. A voyage round the world, containing an account of Captain Dampier’s
expedition into the South-Seas in the ship St George in the years 1703 and 1704, with his
various adventures, engagements, etc. London: James Knapton. Pp 344.
Reprinted 1969 in Amsterdam (by whom?).
Galindo, Juan de Abreu de. 1632/1977. Historia de la conquista de las siete islas de Canaria.
Edición critica con introducción, notas e indice por Alejandro Cioranescu. Santa Cruz de
Tenerife: Goya Ediciones. Pp xliii, 367. ISBN-10 84-400-3645-0.
Galindo’s manuscript has been published in various editions since its (re)discovery in the 1760s.
Galindo, Juan de Abreu de. 1764. The history of the discovery and conquest of the Canary
Islands: translated from a Spanish manuscript lately found in the island of Palma, with an
enquiry into the origin of the ancient inhabitants; to which is added, a description of the
Canary Islands, including the modern history of the inhabitants, and an account of their
manners, customs, trade, &c. Translated and edited by George Glas. London: R. & J.
Dodsley. Pp viii, 368.
The manuscript in question was originally written sometime during the seventeenth century. Glas’s English
translation has been translated back to Spanish as Descripción de las Islas Canarias, 1764, published 1982 by
Instituto de Estudios Canarios (ISBN-10 84-600-0603-4).
Galindo, Juan de Abreu de. 1777. Geschichte der Entdeckung und Eroberung der Kanarischen
Inseln: aus einer in der Insel Palma gefundenen Handschrift übersetzt. Leipzig: Weygand.
Pp 3, 360.
Gheel, Georgius de [Pater]. 1651. Vocabularium latinum, hispanicum et congense. Romae.
Reprinted in revised form 1928 as Les plus ancien dictionnaire bantu by J. van Wing & C. Penders. “The question as
to whether Joris van Gheel was actually the author or but a copyist is discussed at some length in the introduction to
the [revised reprint] ... There can be no doubt, however, that he copied a manuscript known to be in existence at the
mission station of San Salvador before his arrival ... Though the dictionary is probably not the work of a single
person, it is practically certain that in the main it is to be ascribed to Robodero, a Spaniard whose name is the only
one mentioned in the original text” (Doke 1959:56).
Gheel, Georgius de [Pater]. 1928. Les plus ancien dictionnaire bantu / Het oudste bantuwoordenboek. Publié par Joseph van Wing et C. Penders. Bibliothèque Congo, #27.
Louvain: Imprimerie J. Kuyl-Otto. Pp xxxv, 365.
Revised reprint of Vocabularium latinum-hispanicum et congense, orig. published in 1651. “Unfortunately the
present editors have not published the manuscript in the form in which it was written, viz. Latin-Spanish-Kongo,
but have taken out the 7,000 odd Kongo words alphabetically, and then added French and Dutch equivalents. Since
54
the publishing of such a work to-day is not of everyday practical worth, but of great value to students, such a method
of handling the manuscript is the opposite of scientific” (Doke 1959:115).
Godée-Molsbergen, Everhardus Cornelis. (Ed.) 1916. Reizen in Zuid-Afrika in de hollandse tijd.
Deel 2: tochten naar het noorden 1686-1806. Werken uitgegeven door de LinschotenVereeniging, #12. ’s-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff.
Deel 1: tochten naar het noorden 1652-1686. Werken uitgegeven door de LinschotenVereeniging, #11. ’s-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff.
Deel 3: tochten langs de Z.O.-kust en naar het oosten 1670-1752. Werken uitgegeven door
de Linschoten-Vereeniging, #20. ’s-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff.
Deel 4: tochten in het Kafferland 1776-1805. Werken uitgegeven door de LinschotenVereeniging, #36. ’s-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff.
Goes, Damiao de. 1540. Fides, religio, moresque Aethiopium, sub imperio Precisio Joannis (quem
vulgo presbyterum Joannem vocant) degentium. Lovanii.
No idea what this is. A copy is held by the British Library. There are several subsequent 16th-century editions.
Golbéry, Sylvian Meinrad Xavier de. 1802. Fragments d’un voyage en Afrique, fait pendant les
années 1785, 1786, et 1787, dans les contrées occidentales de ce continent, comprises entre
le cap Blanc de Barbarie, par 20 degrés, 47 minutes, et le Cap de Palmes, par 4 degrés, 30
minutes, latitude boréale, 2 vols. Paris: Treuttel & Würtz. Pp iv, 512; iii, 522.
Has brief vocabulary items for Wolof, etc.
URL: books.google.se/books?id=nvsRAAAAYAAJ
Golbéry, Sylvian Meinrad Xavier de. 1802. Travels in Africa: performed during the years 1785,
1786, and 1787, in the western countries of the continent, comprised between Cape Blanco
in Barbary, situated in 20° 47’ and Cape Palmas, in 4° 30’ north latitude, 2 vols. Translated
from the French, without abridgement, by Francis Blagdon. London: James Ridgway.
Golbéry, Sylvian Meinrad Xavier de. 1808. Travels in Africa, performed by Silvester Meinrad
Xavier Golberry, in the western parts of that vast continent: containing various important
discoveries, with a particular account of the situation, extent, towns, rivers, lakes, mines,
minerals, fisheries, trade, commerce, agriculture, curiosities, religion, natural history, and
the internal government, both civil and military, of the various kingdoms and nations,
together with an account of the discovery of extensive gold mines, 2 vols. Translated from the
French, by W. Mudford; second edition. London: Jones & Bumford.
Note that this second edition credits a different translator than does the first.
Gomes, Bernardino António. 1992. El descubrimiento de Guinea y de las Islas Occidentales.
Filosofía y letras, #135. Sevilla: Universidad de Sevilla. Pp lxiii, 143. ISBN-10 84-7405-964X.
Gomes, Diogo. 1480s. De prima inventione guineae (Codex hispanicus 27). München: Bayerische
Staatsbibliothek.
Gomes made at least two journeys to West Africa during the mid-15th century. He visited, e.g., Gambia, Sierra
Leone, Cape Verde. His chronicle includes brief vocabularies of several West African languages.
the Guinea coast”, Journal of African history, v. 8 (1967) p. 247-269; David Dalby & Paul E.H. Hair, “A West
African word of 1456”, Journal of West African languages, v. 4 (1967) p. 13-14.
Gomes, Diogo. 1959. De la première découverte de la Guinée. Edité par Th. Monod, R. Mauny et
G. Duva. Bissau: Centro de Estudos da Guiné Portuguesa. Pp 83.
Gong Zhen. 1434. Xiyang fanguozhi = Records of foreing countries in the Western Ocean.
Gong Zhen was one of Zheng He’s officials. His travelogue is supposedly very similar in content to the one by Ma
Huan.
55
Gordon, R.J. [Capt.]. 1779. Journaal van de vierde reyse van Captain R.J. Gordon in het zuidelike
gedeelte van Africa, begonnen den 27. junij 1779 van de Caap de Goede Hoop. Kaapstad:
Kaapse Argief.
Peripherals: V.S. Forbes “Colonel R.J. Gordon’s contribution to Cape geography 1777-1795”, South African
geographical journal, v. 31 (1949) p. 3-35.
Graevenbroek, Jan Willem de. 1695. Elegans et accurata gentis africanae circa promontcrium
capitis bone spei vulgo Hottentotten nuncupatae descriptio epistolaris. Pp 62, ii, 121.
Credited to Johannes Gulielmus Grevenbroek (cfr Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:10).
Graevenbroek, Jan Willem de. 1695/1933. Gentis hottentotten nuncupatae descriptio / An account
of the Hottentots [with translation by B. Farrington]. In: The early Cape Hottentots, p. 161299. Ed. by Isaac Schapera. Publications from the Van Riebeeck Society, #14. Cape Town.
Includes extracts and translations from Graevenbroek’s Elegans et accurata gentis africanae.
Graevenbroek, Jan Willem de. 1886. Uit den ouden tijd (1695) [pt. 2; vertaalt van J.W.G. van
Oordt]. Het zuid-afrikaanse tijdschrift, Februarie 1886, p. 1-48.
Includes translated extracts from Graevenbroek’s Elegans et accurata gentis africanae.
Graevenbroek, Jan Willem de. 1886. Uit den ouden tijd (1695) [pt. 1; vertaalt van J.W.G. van
Oordt]. Het zuid-afrikaanse tijdschrift, Januarie 1886, p. 360-372.
Grandidier, Alfred. (Ed.) 1903/07. Collection des ouvrages anciens concernant
Madagascar, 7 vols. Paris: Comité de Madagascar.
Contains original documents (or, Ouvrages ou extraits d’ouvrages portugais, hollandais, anglais, français,
allemands, italiens, espagnols et latins relatifs à Madagascar) dating from 1500-1800. The fourth vol contains “Les
aventures de Robert Drury” and the seventh includes, among other things, a “dictionnaire de la langue de
Madagascar”.
Grandpierre, Dralse de. 1718. Relation de divers voyages faits dans l’Afrique, dans l’Amerique, et
aux Indes occidentales. Paris: Jombert. Pp 352.
Gray, John Milner [Sir]. 1947. Rezende’s description of East Africa in 1634. Tanganyika notes
and records, v. 23, p. 2-29.
Greaves, John. 1646. Pyramidographia: a description of the pyramids in Aegypt. London: George
Badger. Pp 13, 142 [=120].
There are several subsequent editions of this. The pagination is inconsistent and non-consecutive.
Green, John. (Ed.) 1745/47. A new general collection of voyages and travels: consisting of the
most esteemed relations, which have been hitherto published in any language, 4 vols.
London: Thomas Astley.
Commonly known as the “Astley Collection”. Vol 2 contains “chapters dealing with the early history of the Gold
Coast” (Ademekey 1970:2). Reprinted 1968 by Frank Cass & Co. in London.
Gröben, Otto Friedrich von der. 1694. Orientalische Reise-Beschreibung, nebst der
Brandenburgischen Schiffahrt nach Guinea und der Verrichtung zu Morea. Marienwerder
(Deutschland): Simon Reiniger. Pp 399, 134, tables.
The part dealing with Guinea has been reprinted separately as Guineische Reise-Beschreibung several times, e.g.
1913 by Insel-Verlag in Leipzig; and 1981 by Berliner Handpresse.
Peripherals: Paul E.H. Hair & A.T. Jones, “Sources on early Sierra Leone, 20: Von der Gröben 1682”, Africana
research bulletin, v. 13 (1984) p. 78-116.
Gröben, Otto Friedrich von der. 1981. Guineische Reise-Beschreibung, oder, Gründung der
Churfürstl.-Brandenburgischen Veste Gross-Friedrichsburg auf der Küste von Guinea den
ersten Januarii Anno 1683 durch Otto Friedrich von der Gröben, Marienwerder, Anno
1694. Herausgegeben und mit kritischen Anmerkungen versehen von Uwe Otto. Berlin:
Berliner Handpresse. Pp 40.
Includes a reprint of Gröben’s original text on Guinea together with a bunch of other related documents.
Guattini, Michele Angelo de; Carli, Dionigi de. 1674. Viaggio del padre M.A. de Guattini da
Reggio et del P. Dioniggi de Carli da Piacenza capuccini, predicatori, et missionari
apostolici nel Regno del Congo. Bologna: Gioseffo Longhi. Pp 274.
Travels to west-central Africa. Sometimes referred to with its half title, Viaggio nel regno del Congo. Several early
Italian/Latin editions exist.
Guattini, Michele Angelo de; Carli, Dionigi de. 1680. Relation curieuse et nouvelle d’un voyage de
Congo, 1666-67. Lyon: Thomas Amaulry.
56
Early French translation.
Guattini, Michele Angelo de; Carli, Dionigi de. 1732. A curious and exact account of a voyage to
Congo in the years 1666, and 1667. Translated from the Italian. London: A. & J. Churchill.
One of several early English translations.
Guattini, Michele Angelo de; Carli, Dionigi de. 2006. La mission au Kongo des pères Guattini et
Dionigi Carli (1668). Traduit de l’italien par Alix du Cheyron d’Abzac. Paris: Chandeigne.
Pp 301.
Guerreiro, F. 1603/11. Relaçao anual das coisas que fizeram os padres da Companhia de Jesus
nas suas missoes do Japao, China, Cataio, Tidore, Ternate, Ambóino, Malaca, Pegu,
Bengala, Bisnagá, Maduré, costa da Pescaria, Manar, Ceilao, Travancor, Malabar,
Sodomala, Goa, Salcete, Lahor, Diu, Etiopia a alta ou Preste Joao, Monomotapa, Angola,
Guiné, Serra Leoa, Cabo Verde e Brasil (nos anos de 1600 a 1609), 5 vols.
Details wanting. Much of the information herein apparently derived from Almada’s Tratado breve dos rios de Guiné
do Cabo Verde, publ. 1594 (cfr Hair 1967:32). Reprinted 1930-1942 as a “nova edição” by Imprensa da
Universidade, Coimbra.
Gumprecht, Thaddäus Eduard. 18xx. Die Reise des Paters Krump nach Nubien in den Jahren
1700-1702 und dessen Mittheilungen über Abyssinien. Manuskript. Kapstadt: Grey
Sammlung, Südafrikanische Öffentliche Bibliothek.
Not sure what date to put on this. Includes notes on Khoekhoe on p. 39-88 (Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:10-11).
Hacke, William. 1699. Captain William Ambrosia Cowley’s voyage around the world. In: A
collection of original voyages, p. (?). Ed. by William Hacke. London: James Knapton.
Contains an account of the ‘Hodmandods’, i.e. Khoekhoe (Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:6).
Haimendorf, Christoph Fürer von. 1646. Reis-Beschreibung in Egypten, Arabien, Palästinam,
Syrien, etc. Mit kurtzen Anhang Jacob Fürers von Haimendorff, seines Bruders,
Constantinopolitanischer Reise. Nürnberg: Endter. Pp 384.
Hair, Paul Edward Hedley. 1981. The earliest extant wordlist of Swahili, 1613. African studies, v.
40, 2, p. 151-153.
Hair, Paul Edward Hedley. (Ed.) 1989. Jesuit documents on the Guinea of Cape Verde and Cape
Verde Islands 1585-1617 in English translation. Translated by Paul E.H. Hair, based on
documents assembled by the late Avelino Teixeira da Mota. Dept. of History, University of
Liverpool. Pp 340.
Hakluyt, Richard. (Ed.) 1589. The principall navigations, voiages and discoueries of the English
nation, 3 vols. London: George Bishop, Ralph Newberie, Robert Barker. Pp 825.
Reprinted 1965 by the Hakluyt Society at Cambridge.
Peripherals: Clements R. Markham, Richard Hakluyt: his life and works, with a short account of the aims and
achievements of the Hakluyt Society (Hakluyt Society, 1896); D.B. Quinn, The Hakluyt handbook (Hakluyt
Society, 1974); Pamela Neville-Sington & Anthony Payne, Richard Hakluyt and his books: an interim census of
surviving copies of Hakluyt’s ‘Divers voyages’ and ‘Principal navigations’ (Hakluyt Society, 1997).
Hakluyt, Richard. (Ed.) 1599/1600. The principall navigations, voiages and discoueries of the
English nation: made by sea or ouerland, to the remote and farthest distant quarters of the
earth, at any time within the compasse of these 1600 yeres, 3 vols. Second edition. London:
George Bishop, Ralph Newberie, Robert Barker.
Hakluyt, Richard. (Ed.) 1809/12. The principal navigations, voyages, traffiques & discoveries of
the English nation: made by sea or over-land to the remote and furthest distant quarters of
the earth at any time within the compasse of these 1600 yeeres. Third edition. London: G.
Woodfall.
Reprinted 1903/05 by James MacLehose & Sons in Glasgow.
Hakluyt, Richard; Goldsmid, Edmund. (Ed.) 1885/90. The principal navigations, voyages,
traffiques & discoveries of the English nation, made by sea or over-land to the remote and
furthest distant quarters of the earth at any time within the compasse of these 1600 yeeres,
16 vols. New (fourth) edition, re-arranged. Edinburgh: E. & C. Goldsmid.
57
This includes the contents of the earlier editions, but here the contents has been re-arranged in geographic themes.
(The original editions employed an arbitrary organisation.) Volume 11 is devoted almost entirely to travellers to
North and West Africa, e.g. Henry, Earl of Derby (afterwards Henry IV), John Hawkwood, Thomas Chaloner, John
Foxe, Thomas Sanders, John Evesham, Laurence Aldersey, William Towrson, John Lock, William Rutter, John
Hawkin(s), George Fenner, Edmund Hogan, Thomas Stukeley, Henry Roberts, James Welsh, John Newton, John
Bird, Richard Rainolds, Thomas Dassel, and others.
Hallett, Robin. (Ed.) 1964. Records of the African Association, 1788-1831. London: Thomas
Nelson & Sons. Pp viii, 318.
Hartog, Jan. 1707. Dagregister gehouden op de landtogt en vee ruijling door den baas thuinier Jan
hartog anno 1707. Kaapstad: Kaapse Argief.
Haukins, John. 1589. The voyage made by the worshipful M. John Haukins. In: The principall
navigations, voiages and discoueries of the English nation, p. (?). Ed. by Richard Hakluyt.
London: George Bishop, Ralph Newberie, Robert Barker.
Haukins, John. 1890. Relations extracted from Sir John Hawkin's voyage. In: The principal
Goldsmid.
Hawkins, Joseph. 1797. A history of a voyage to the coast of Africa, and travels into the interior of
that country: containing particular descriptions of the climate and inhabitants, and
interesting particulars concerning the slave trade. Second edition. London: Luther Pratt. Pp
180.
When did the first edition appear?
Hayes, Charles. 1744. The importance of effectually supporting the Royal African Company of
England impartially consider’d, shewing, that a free and open trade to Africa, and the
support and preservation of the British colonies and plantations in America, depend upon
maintaining the forts and settlements, rights and privileges belonging to that corporation,
against the encroachments of the French, and all other foreign rivals in that trade. London:
M. Cooper. Pp 47.
Hebenstreit, J.E. 1830. Voyage à Alger, Tunis et Tripoli, entreprises aux frais et par ordre de
Frédéric-Auguste, roi de Pologne, etc., en 1732. Nouvelles annales des voyages, de la
géographie et de l’histoire ou recueil des relations originales inédites, 2ème série, v. 16, p.
5-90.
Hemmy, Gysbert. 1767. De promontorio bonae spei: oratorio latina de promontorio bonae spei,
in schola hamburgensi d. 10 aprilis 1767 publice recitata. Hamburgi: Harmsen.
A description of the Cape of Good Hope. Apparently it contains notes on the early Khoekhoe (Strohmeyer & Moritz
1975:11).
Hemmy, Gysbert. 1959. De promontorio bonae spei / The Cape of Good Hope: a Latin oration
delivered in the Hamburg Academy, 10 April 1767. Translated and edited by K.D. White,
with additional notes by G.S. Nienaber and D.H. Varley. Cape Town: South African Public
Library. Pp x, 40.
Herbert, Thomas. 1634. A relation of some yeares travaile, begunno Anno 1626, into Afrique and
the greater Asia, especially the territories of the Persian Monarchie, and some parts of the
Orientall Indies, and isles adiacent; of their religion, language, habit, discent, ceremonies
and other matters concerning them; together with the proceedings and death of the three
late ambassadors: Sir D.C., Sir R.S. and the Persian Nogdi-beg; as also the two great
monarchs, the King of Persia, and the great Mogol, 5, 225. London: W. Stansby & J.
Bloome.
Includes a few words of Souldaniaes (Khoekhoe) on page 16. Herbert was “the first author to introduce an original
click symbolism ... for any click he though he detected, [he] put an onomatopoeic ‘ist’” (Breckwoldt 1972:282).
Later editions were retitled Some yeares travels into diverse parts of Asia and Afrique. Reprinted 1971 by Theatrum
Orbis Terrarum in Amsterdam as A relation of some yeares travaile into Afrique, Asia, Indies, as well as by Da Capo
Press in New York (The English experience, its record in early printed books published in facsimile, #349; ISBN-10
90-221-0349-8).
Herbert, Thomas. 1638. Some yeares travels into diverse parts of Asia and Afrique: describing
especially two famous empires, the Persian and Great Mogull; weaved with the history of
these later times; as also, many rich and spatious kingdomes in the Orientall India, and
58
other parts of Asia, together with the adjacent iles; severally relating the religion, language,
qualities, customes, habit, descent, fashions, and other observations touching them; with a
revivall of the first discoverer of America. New (second) edition, revised and enlarged.
London: I. Blome & R. Bishop. Pp 6, 364, 14.
Includes a few Khoekhoe words. The original edition of 1634 was titled A relation of some yeares travaile [etc].
Herbert, Thomas. 1658. Zee-en lat reyse na verscheyde deelen van Asia en africa. Uyt het engels
in de nederlandsche tale overgeset door L. van Bosch. Dordrecht.
Herbert, Thomas. 1663. Relation du voyage de Perse et des Indes orientales. Traduit de l’anglois.
Paris: Jean du Puis. Pp 4, 632, 24.
more particularly the empires Persia and Industan; intervowen with such remarkable
occurences as hapned in those parts during these later times; as also, many other rich and
famous kingdoms in the Orientall India, with iles adjacent; severally relating the religion,
language, customs, and habit; as also proper observations concerning them. Third edition,
revised and further enlarged by the author. London: J. Best for Andrew Crook. Pp 8, 420, 20.
Includes a few Khoekhoe words. Apparently there’s another printing of the third edition dated 1665 which retains
the subtitle of the second edition.
especially the two famous empires, the Persian, and the Great Mogul; weaved with the
history of these later times; as also, many rich and spatious kingdomes in the Orienta’ll
India, and other parts of Asia, together with the adjacent iles; severally relating the religion,
language, qualities, customes, habit, descent, fashions, and other observations touching
them; with a revivall of the first discoverer of America. Fourth edition, with additions by the
author throughout the whole work, a also several sculptures, never before printed. London: R.
Everingham for R. Scot, T. Basset, J. Wright & R. Chiswell. Pp 8, 399, 19.
Includes a few Khoekhoe words as well as a short list of Comorian, recorded by the author as early as 1626. “These
words of the ‘Mohella’ language ... were not inserted into his book until the 1677-edition was produced” (Johnston
1919:2). They are reportedly a mish-mash of Arabic and Portuguese (Latham 1847:195). Doke (1960:32) quotes the
following: “A King is a ‘Sultan’, Bracelets ‘Arembo’, a Hen ‘Coquo’, an Ox ‘Gumbey’, Coco-nuts ‘Sejavoye’,
Plantains ‘Figo’, a Goat ‘Buze’, an Orange ‘Tudah’, a Lemon ‘Demon’, Water ‘Mage’, Paper ‘Cartassa’, a Needle
‘Sinzano’, etc.”.
Hervas, Lorenzo. 1784. Catalogo delle lingue conosciute e notizia della loro affinita’, e diversita.
Cesena (Italia): Gregorio Biasini. Pp 260.
May include a Khoekhoe vocabulary (cfr Latham 1847:197).
Hesse, Elias. 1687. Ost-indische Reise-Beschreibung; oder Diarium, was bey der Reise des [...]
Benjamin Olitzschens im Jahr 1680 von Dressden aus biss in Asiam auff die insul Sumatra
denckwürdiges vorgegangen. Dresden.
Not sure of the title. Contains notes on the Khoekhoe.
denckwürdiges vorgegangen. Zum andern mahl gedruckt, und mit sonderbahren Fleiss
übersehen, in vielen verbessert und vermehret. Leipzig: Verlag von Michael Günther.
Contains notes on the Khoekhoe. There is also a third edition dated 1735. The book was reprinted 1931 as GoldBergwerke in Sumatra, 1680-1683 by Martinus Nijhoff in Der Haag (Reisebeschreibungen von deutschen Beamten
und Krigsleuten, #10), though curiously it seems to be incomplete and lacks the passage about the Khoekhoe
(Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:11).
Hesse, Elias. 1690/1931. Gold-Bergwerke in Sumatra, 1680-1683. Neue Herausgabe nach der zu
Leipzig im Verl. von Michael Günther (1690) gedruckten verb. Ausgabe des im Jahre 1687
zum ersten Mal erschienen Textes. Reisebeschreibungen von deutschen Beamten und
Krigsleuten, #10. Den Haag: Martinus Nijhoff. Pp x, 195.
Originally published 1690. Curiously, the passage about the Khoekhoe is not included in this printing/edition
(Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:11).
denckwürdiges vorgegangen. Dritte Auflage. Leipzig.
May contain notes on the Khoekhoe. The earlier editions did. Not sure of the title.
59
Hoffmann, Johann Christian. 1680. Oost-Indianische Voyage: oder eigentliches Verzeichnüs,
worin nicht nur einige merckwürdige Vorfälle, die sich theils auff einer indischen See-Reise,
theils in India selbst begeben und zugetragen, sondern auch unterschiedliche Länder,
fremde Völcker, seltsame Thiere und arthige Gewächse, etc. der Örther kurtz und deutlich
angewiesen werden. Cassel (Frankreich): Hertzog.
Deals with the Khoekhoe on pages 26-31. Reprinted 1931 by Martinus Nijhoff as Reise nach dem Kaplande, nach
Mauritius und nach Java, 1671-1676.
Hoffmann, Johann Christian. 1931. Reise nach dem Kaplande, nach Mauritius und nach Java,
1671-1676. Reisebeschreibungen von deutschen Beamten und Krigsleuten, #7:1. Der Haag:
Martinus Nijhoff. Pp xiii, 104.
Originally published 1680. May contain additional material.
Hogan, Edmund. 1824. Embassy of Mr Edmund Hogan to Morocco in 1577. In: A general history
and collection of voyages and travels, v. 7, p. (?). Ed. by Robert Kerr. Edinburgh: William
Blackwood.
Hogan, Edmund. 1890. The ambassage of Edmund Hogan to the Emperor of Morocco, 1577. In:
The principal navigations, voyages, traffiques & discoveries of the English nation, v. 11, p.
(?). New (fourth) edition. Ed. by Richard Hakluyt & Edmund Goldsmid. Edinburgh: E. &
C. Goldsmid.
Hollingsworth, S. 1788. A dissertation on the manners, governments, and spirit of Africa, to
which is added observations on the present applications to Parliament for abolishing
Negroe slavery in the British West Indies. Edinburgh: William Creech. Pp 24, 43.
Holtzappel, Friedrich Gotthold. 1777. Manuscript VOC 4282, ff. 300-349. Den Haag: Algemeen
Rijksarchief.
The journal of a Dutch slave trader in and around Zanzibar. This is an officially attested copy, not the original (Ross
1986:307).
Peripherals: R.J. Ross, “The Dutch on the Swahili coast, 1776-1778: two slaving journals”, International journal
of African historical studies, v. 19 (1986) p. 305-360, 479-506.
Holtzappel, Friedrich Gotthold. 1986. The Dutch on the Swahili coast, 1776-1778: two slaving
journals, pt. 1: the first journal [translated, edited and published by Robert J. Ross].
International journal of African historical studies, v. 19, 2, p. 305-360.
URL: hdl.handle.net/1887/4223
Hondius, Jodocus. 1652. Klare besgryving van Cabo de Bona Esperanca, med de by-gelegen kust
naar Angola toe, van Cabo Negro af: vervattende de ondekking, benaaming, gelegenheyd,
verdeling en betrekking; als ook de hoedanigheden der elementen, bestandige-stoffen,
gewassen en diren; ende ook des volks nature, in wezen, zeden en staat; med de veel
moeyten zeer vlytig byeen, getogen en vervolgens duydelijk beshreven. Amsterdam: Hondius.
Pp 33.
Apparently this is the first extensive description of the inhabitants of the Cape. Not sure if Hondius is author,
publisher, or both. A copy of the original edition is available at the Fairbridge Collection, South Africa Public
Library (Cape Town?). Reprinted 1952, with parallel English translation.
Peripherals: A.J.D. Meiring, “Die Hottentotte aan die Kaap voor die tyd van Van Riebeeck soos opgeteken deur
Jodocus Hondius”, Navorsinge van die Nasionale Museum, v. 1 (1953) p. 35-40.
Hondius, Jodocus. 1652/1952. Klare besgryving van Cabo de Bona Esperanca. Met vertaling in
Engels deur L.C. van Oordt en van ’n inleiding en aantekeninge voorsien deur P. Serton.
Kaapstad: Komitee vir Boekuitstalling, Van Riebeeck-Fees. Pp xv, 33, 37.
Facsimile reprint of the original, with English translations added.
Hopkins, J.F.P. (Ed.) 1982. Letters from Barbary 1576-1774: Arabic documents in the Public
Record Office. Translated from Arabic. Oriental documents, #6. Oxford: Oxford University
Press for the British Academy. Pp xviii, 112. ISBN-10 0-19-726010-1.
Hornemann, Friedrich Conrad. 1802. Tagebuch seiner Reise von Cairo nach Murzak in den
Jahren 1797-98. Herausgegeben von Carl König. Weimar: Landes-Industrie-Comptoir. Pp
xxx, 240.
Hornemann, Friedrich Conrad. 1803. The journal of Frederick Horneman’s travels, from Cairo to
Mourzouk, the capital of the kingdom of Fezzan, in Africa. London: William Bulmer & Co.
for G. & W. Nicol. Pp iv, xxvi, 195.
60
Includes several appendixes, among them “Observations on the language of Siwah” by William Marsden. Reprinted
1964 in Missions to Niger, vol. 1 (Works issued by the Hakluyt Society, second series, #123; edited by E.W.
Bovill).
Hornemann, Friedrich Conrad. 1803. Voyages dans l’interieur de l’Afrique, pendant les années
1797, 1798. Traduit de l’anglais par L. Langlès. Paris: Joseph André. Pp lvi, [57]-390.
Høst, Georg Hjersing. 1779. Efterretninger om Marokos of Fes: samlede der i landene fra ao.
1760 til 1768. Kjöbenhavn. Pp 291, plates.
Høst, Georg Hjersing. 1781. Nachrichten von Marókos und Fes: im Lande selbst gesammlet, in
den Jahren 1760 bis 1768. Aus dem dänischen übersetzt. Kopenhagen: Christian Gottlob
Proft. Pp 20, 312, plates.
Houstoun, James. 1725. Some new and accurate observations [...] of the Coast of Guinea, so far
as relates to the improvement of that trade, for the advantage of Great Britain in general,
and the Royal African Company in particular. London.
Houtman, Frederik de. 1603. Spraakende woordboek inde maleische ende madagaskarsche talen,
met vele arabische en turksche woorden.
Berchem (1989/90:157) gives the dates 1603, 1687, 1703 and 1707. Presumably these refer to revisions.
Hulsius, Levinus. 1603. Siebende Schiffahrt in das Goldreiche Königreich Guineam, in Africa
gelegen, so sonsten das Goldgestadt von Mina genannt wird welches von den Portugalesern
vngefähr vor 200. Jahren erfunden, von den Holländern innerhalb 18. Jahren hero bekannt
gemacht. Frankfurt am Mayn: Wolffgang Richter. Pp 228.
Not sure about the correctness of this. It could be a German translation of Marées’ Beschryvinghe ende historische
verhael van het gout koninkrijck van Gunea, published 1602.
Hulsius, Levinus. 1924. Siebende Schiffahrt in das Goldreiche Königreich Guineam, in Africa
gelegen, so sonsten das Goldgestadt von Mina genannt wird welches von den Portugalesern
vngefähr vor 200. Jahren erfunden, von den Holländern innerhalb 18. Jahren hero bekannt
gemacht. Neue Auflage. Frankfurt am Mayn. Pp 232.
Hunwick, John O. (Ed.) 1999. Timbuktu and the Songhay Empire: al-Sa‘dî’s “Ta’rîkh al-sûdân”
down to 1613, and other contemporary documents. Translated and edited by John O.
Hunwick. Leiden & Boston: Brill Academic Publ. Pp lxv, 412. ISBN-10 90-04-11207-3.
Hunwick, John O. (Ed.) 2003. Timbuktu and the Songhay Empire: al-Sa‘dî’s “Ta’rîkh al-sûdân”
down to 1613, and other contemporary documents. Translated and edited by John O.
Hunwick; new edition with corrections and minor textual changes. Leiden & Boston: Brill
Academic Publ. Pp lxv, 414. ISBN-10 90-04-12560-4.
Ibn Furtu. 1576. Kitab ghazawat Barnu = The book of the Bornu wars.
Ibn Furtu. 1578. Kitab ghazawat Kanei = The book of the Kanem wars.
Ibn Furtu. 1928. The Kanem wars [translated from Arabic]. In: Sudanese memoirs: being mainly
translations of a number of Arabic manuscripts relating to the central and western Sudan,
v. 1, p. 15-81. Ed. by H. Richmond Palmer. Lagos: Government Printer.
Ibn Furtu. 1987. A Sudanic chronicle: the Borno expeditions of Idris Alauma (1564-1576),
according to the account of Ahmad b. Furtu (Arabic text, English translation and
geographical gazetteer). Translated, annotated and edited by Dierk Lange. Studien zur
Kulturkunde, #86. Stuttgart: Franz Steiner Verlag. Pp 179, 65, 2 plates.
Peripherals: H.T. Norris, Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, v. 52 (1989) p. 554-555.
Ibn Mâdjid. 1490. Kitâb al-fawâ’id fî usûl ‘ilm al-bahr wa ’l-kawâ‘id.
Ibn Mâdjid “was the first Arab navigator to describe in more positive terms the coast of Africa south of Sofala. He
seems to have acquired the information about the existence of a madkhal (place of entry, from the Atlantic into the
Indian Ocean) from the Portuguese” (quoted from Encyclopedia of Islam, new ed.). However, he seems to have
“conceived of Africa as being much smaller than it actually is, for according to his account the east coast of Africa
turns sharply westward and emerges at Kanem (south of the land of the ‘Black People’, i.e. Ghana, etc.) and from
there it reaches Morocco” (quoted from Encyclopedia of Islam, new ed.). His Kitâb al-fawâ’id deals with, for
instance, “the sea-routes of the Indian Ocean, the landmarks (‘alâmât) formed by birds and the outlines of coasts, the
landfalls of the west coast of India, the ten large islands of the Indian Ocean (the “islands” of Arabia, Madagascar,
Sumatra, Java, Taiwan, Ceylon, Zandjbâr, al-Bahrayn, Ibn Gâwân, and Socotra), a survey of the coastal regions of
Asia and Africa” (quoted from Encyclopedia of Islam, new ed.).
Ibn Mâdjid. 1957. Thalâth râhmâ-nadjât al-madjûla. Edited and translated by T.A. Shumovsky.
Moscow: Inst. of Oriental Studies, USSR Academy of Sciences.
61
This includes three of Ibn Mâdjid’s urdjûzas, the first of which is an undated one titled al-Sufâliyya, i.e. ‘On Sofala’.
It “deals with the knowledge of the madjrâs (day’s journey by sea) and astronomical calculations from Malabar,
Konkan, Gudjarât, sind, al-Atwâh up to Somaliland, and from there to the regions of al-Sawâhil (east coast of
Africa), Zandjbâr, Sofala, Madagascar and its islands. It also deals with various other aspects of navigation and with
the inhabitants, kings, monsoons, etc. of those regions” (quoted from Encyclopedia of Islam, new ed.). This 1957edition is “based on the unique manuscript in the Library of the Oriental Institute. The texts are accompanied by
Russian translations an valuable notes and commentaries by Shumovsky” (quoted from Encyclopedia of Islam, new
ed.).
Iorge, Marcos [Padre]. 1658. Doctrina Christiana.
Ewe translation. “‘Doctrina Christiana’ ist ein ursprünglich im Jahre 1658 für missionarische Zwecke
veröffentlichter Katechismus in spanischer Sprache mit einer Übersetzung in den Gê-Dialekt des Ewe, wie er an der
Küste Dahomes gesprochen wird. Der Text gibt also das Gê-Ewe aus der ersten Hälfte des 17. Jahrhunderts wieder.
Die Sprachkenntnis der Übersetzer war offenbar unzureichend, und die Text is nir teilweise deutbar, mit Sicherheit ist
aber feststellbar, dass die Sprache sich in den letzten drei Jahrhunderten kaum verändert hat” (Hintze 1959:54). The
Ewe translation appeared 1929 in Le royaume d’Arda et son évangéliation au XVIIe siècle by H. Labouret & P. Rivet
(idem).
Iorge, Marcos [Padre]; Cardoso, Mattheus [Padre]. 1624. Dovtrina Christaã. De nouo traduzida
na lingoa do Reyno de Congo. Lisboa.
The first known Bantu publication, a Kikongo catechism. Iorge is the author, Cardoso the translator. The word
‹Christaã›, a misprint for ‹Christãa›, appears as such on the title page (Doke 1959:49). “The constant use of the
circumflex accent upon penultimate vowels indicates the recognition of the stress. But perhaps the most remarkable
thing about Cardoso’s work ... is that his word-division seems almost perfectly conjunctive. Despite the fact that
the Kongo is written interlineally beneath the Portuguese, Cardoso’s word-division is practically unaffected by that
of the Portuguese - unconciously he has recorded the words as they were spoken” (Doke 1959:50).
Iorge, Marcos [Padre]; Cardoso, Mattheus [Padre]. 1650. Doctrina Christiana ad profectum
missionis totius Regni Congi in quatuor linguas per correlativas columnas distincta.
Romae: Sac. Congreg. de Propaganda Fide.
A second edition of the Kikongo translation (Doke 1959:114).
Isert, Paul Erdmann. 1788. Reise nach Guinea und den Caribäischen Inseln in Columbien, in
Briefen an seine Freunde beschrieben, 2 Teile. Copenhagen: J.F. Morthorst.
Contains 12 letters dated November 1783 to July 1787. Includes a glossary titled “Deutch-Akraisch-AssiantheischKrepeisch” (p. 203-204) totalling some 33 words (Hintze 1959:36). There are several subsequent editions and
translations of this book.
Isert, Paul Erdmann. 1790. Neue Reise nach Guinea und den Caribäischen Inseln in Amerika, in
den Jahren 1783 bis 1787, nebst Negerhandel in Afrika. Berlin & Leipzig. Pp 374.
Isert, Paul Erdmann. 1793. Voyages en Guinée et dans les Îles Carabïses en Amérique. Traduit de
l’allemand. Paris: Maradan. Pp viii, 343, 48.
Reprinted 1989 with introduction and footnotes.
Isert, Paul Erdmann. 1992. Letters on West Africa and the slave trade: Paul Erdmann Isert’s
‘Journey to Guinea and the Caribbean Islands in Columbia’ (1788). Translated from the
German and edited by Selena Axelrod Winsnes. Fontes historiae africanae, series varia, #7.
Oxford: Oxford University Press for the British Academy. Pp x, 278. ISBN-10 0-19726105-1.
Jannequin, Claude. 1643. Le voyage de Libye au royaume de Sénégal le long du Niger. Paris.
Reprinted 1980 by Slatkine in Geneva (Bibliothèque africaine, #2; ISBN-10 2-05-100239-8).
Jansz, Jacobus Coetzé. 1766. ... [Title wanting].
Early description of the Cape. First published 1916 in Reizen in Zuid-Afrika in de hollandse tijd, v. 2, edited by
E.C. Godée-Molsbergen (published by Martinus Nijhoff); and reprinted 1935 by the Van Riebeek Society, Cape
Town.
Jansz, Jacobus Coetzé. 1935. ... [with an English translation by E.E. Mossop]. In: The journal of
Hendrik Jacob Wikar (1779) and the journals of Jacobus Coetzé Jansz (1766) and Willem
van Reenen (1791), p. 276-291. Ed. by E.E. Mossop. Publications from the Van Riebeeck
Society, #15. Cape Town.
Title wanting.
Jenkins, Thomas; Lowellin, David. 1783. The admirable travels of Messieurs Thomas Jenkins and
David Lowellin through the unknown tracts of Africa, with the manner how Lowellin lived
62
five years on an uninhabited spot, and, having sustained many dangerous attacks from the
wild beasts and savages, returned safe to London, in September, 1781, after having been
eleven years in those extensive regions. Printed from the original manuscript, by the author’s
consent, for the benefit of Robert Barker, an unfortunate blind man. London. Pp 48.
Jobson, Richard. 1623. The golden trade: a discovery of the Riuer Gambra and the golden trade
of the Aethiopians: also the commerce with a great blacke merchant called Buckor Sano and
his report of the houses couered with gold and other strange obseruations for the good of
our owne countrey, set downe as they were collected in trauelling part of the yeares, 1620
and 1621. London: Nicholas Okes. Pp 166.
Reprinted 1904 by Speight & Walpole in Teignmouth UK, edited by Charles G. Kingsley; 1932 by Penguin Press in
London; and 1968 by Theatrum Orbis Terrarum in Aasterdam together with Da Capo Press in New York. Some
reprints use a shortened title The golden trade.
Jobson, Richard. 1999. The discovery of the River Gambra (1623). Edited, with additional material,
by David P. Gamble and Paul E.H. Hair. Works issued by the Hakluyt Society, third series,
#2. London. Pp xvi, 341. ISBN-10 0-904180-64-6.
Besides Jobson’s text, this reprint has been amended with lots of other contemporary(ish) texts by Jobson as well
as others.
Johnston, John. 1929. The journal of an African slaver, 1789-1792. Proceedings of the American
Antiquarian Society, v. 39, p. 379-465.
Reprinted/distributed 1930 as a pamphlet, with an added introduction by George A. Plimpton.
Jones, Adam. 1983. German sources for West African history, 1599-1669. Studien zur
Kulturkunde, #66. Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner Verlag. Pp xii, 417.
Includes critical translations of several texts.
Jones, Adam. (Ed.) 1985. Brandenburg sources for West African history, 1680-1700. Studien zur
Kulturkunde, #77. Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner Verlag. Pp 348. ISBN-10 3-515-04315-2.
“In the late seventeenth century Brandenburg made a tardy bid to establish itself in the Atlantic slave trade. The
Brandenburg Africa Company was created in 1682 ... In ‘Brandenburg sources’, Adam Jones presents transcripts and
translations from the Dutch or German of ninety-one documents relating to the Brandenburg Company” (Wilks
1989:402).
Peripherals: David Killingray, Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, v. 51 (1988) p. 187-188; Ivor
Wilks, Africa, v. 59 (1989) p. 402-404.
Jones, Adam. (Ed.) 1995. West Africa in the mid-seventeenth century: an anonymous Dutch
manuscript. Transcribed, translated and edited by Adam Jones. African historical sources,
#10. Atlanta: ASA (African Studies Association) Press. Pp xi, 348.
The manuscript in question is “located in the library of Leiden University under the class-mark ‘ms. BPL 927’. It
was acquired at an auction in March 1869. Hardly anything is known about its origin” (Jones 1995:3). It was
seemingly written sometime during 1642-1655. It contains a “hotch-potch of navigational, commercial,
ethnographic and linguistic information” (idem:3), e.g. descriptions of the Lower Guinea Coast as well as the coast
from Cape Lopez to Loango, a description of São Tomé, an ethnographic description of Benin, several lists of
merchandise, and a variety of miscellaneous bits and pieces, including three wordlists (idem:203-232). The
languages in the wordlists are similar to present-day Duala, Myene, and Twi/Fante.
Jones, Zacharias. 1715. Dissertatio de lingua silhense. In: Oratio Dominica in diversas omnium
fere gentium linguas versa et propriis cujusque linguae characteribus expressa: una cum
dissertationibus nonnullis de linguarum origine, variisque ipsarum permutationibus, p. (?).
Ed. by John Chamberlayne. Amsterdam: Guilielmi & Davidis Goerei.
Jong, Cornelis de. 1802/03. Reizen naar de Kaap de Goede Hoop, Ierland en Noorwegen in de
jaren 1791 tot 1797, 3 deele. Haarlem.
Jong, Cornelis de. 1803. Reise nach dem Vorgebirge der guten Hoffnung, nach Irland und
Norwegen in den Jahren 1791 bis 1797, 2 Bde. Aus dem holländischen übersetzt, nebst
einigen Anmerkungen und einem Anhange des Übersetzers, den Zustand der Brüdermission
unter den Hottentotten betreffend. Hamburg.
Juncker, Christian. 1710. Appendice adjectae sunt tum epistolae aliquot clarorum virorum, tum
etiam specimen linguae hottentotticae. In: Commentarius de vita scriptisque ac meritis
illustris viri Iobi Ludolfi, p. 229-237. Lipsiae & Francofurti: Friderici Braunii.
A small Dutch-Khoekhoe-Latin word list. Strohmeyer & Moritz (1975:12) say it originates from either Georg
Friedrich Wreede or Nicolaus Witsen; Köhler (1981:482) says it’s from Witsen. Not sure about the pagination.
63
Kani, A.M. 1968. “Asl al-Wangarawiyin”: a seventeenth century chronicle on the origins and
missionary activities of the Wangarawa. Kano studies, v. 1, 4, p. 9ff.
Kati, Mahmud. 15xx. Tarikh al-fattash = Chronicle of the seeker after knowledge.
Early scholarship published at Timbuktu.
Peripherals: John O. Hunwick, “Studies in the Ta’rîkh al-fattâsh, 1: its authors and textual history”, Research
bulletin of the Centre of Arabic Documentation, University of Ibadan, v. 5 (1969) p. 57-65; N. Levtzion, “A
seventeenth-century chronicle by Ibn al-Mukhtâr: a critical study of Ta’rikh al-fattâsh”, Bulletin of the School of
Oriental and African studies, v. 34 (1971) p. 571-593; John O. Hunwick, “Studies in Ta’rîkh al-fattâsh, III: Ka‘ti
origins”, Sudanic Africa, v. 11 (2001) p. 111-114.
Keeling, William [Capt.]. (Ed.) 1981. Sierra Leone and the English in 1607: extracts from the
unpublished journals of the Keeling voyage to the East Indies. Edited by Paul E.H. Hair.
Occasional papers from the Inst. of African Studies (IAS), #4. Freetown: University of Sierra
Leone. Pp 60.
Keeling, William [Capt.]; Bonner, Thomas. 1972. The East India Company journals of Captain
William Keeling and Master Thomas Bonner, 1615-1617. Edited by Michael Strachan and
Boeis Penrose. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press. Pp 237. ISBN-10 0-81660628-5.
Peripherals: H.M. Rovertson, International journal of African historical studies, v. 6 (1973) p. 170-172.
Kirby, Percival R. 1958. Jacob van Reenen and the ‘Grosvenor’ expedition of 1790-1791.
Johannesburg: Van Riebeeck Vereniging. Pp viii, 142.
“An account of the 1790 expedition to search for survivors of the wreck of the ‘Grosvenor’ believed to be living
among the Kaffir tribes” (from Fables Bookshop’s Africana List Q156 New Acquisitions 9th May 1999, posted on
H-Africa). Includes original Dutch journals with English translations.
Kitchin, Thomas. 1796. A new universal atlas: exhibiting all the empires, kingdoms, states,
republics, etc., in the whole world; being a complete collection of the most approved maps
extant. Corrected with the greatest care and augmented from the last edition of D’Anville and
Robert, with many improvements by Major James Rennel, and other eminent geographers.
London: Robert Laurie & James Whittle. Pp 66.
Knivet, Anthony. 1625. The admirable adventures and strange fortunes of master Antonie Knivet.
In: Hakluytus posthumus: or, Purchas his pilgrimes, contayning a history of the world in
sea voyages and land travells, by Englishmen & others, p. (?). Ed. by Samuel Purchas.
London: William Stansby for Henrie Fetherstone.
Kolb, Peter. 1719. Caput bonae spei hodiernum, das ist: vollständige Beschreibung des
afrikanischen Vorgebürges der Guten Hoffnung, worinnen in dreyen Theilen abgehandelt
wird, wie es heut zu Tage nach seiner Situation und Eigenschaft aussiehet. Nürnberg: Joh.
Georg Monath. Pp xxiv, 846.
Besides an anthropological description of the Khoekhoe, this contains a short Khoekhoe vocabulary which Kolben
presumably lifted from Graevenbroek’s Elegans et accurata gentis africanae, published 1695.
Kolb, Peter. 1719/1975. Lebenbeschreibung der Hottentotten. Mit einer Introduktion von
Hermann Braun. Schriftenreihe der Volkhochschule der Stadt Marktredwitz, #22.
Marktredwitz (Deutschland): Volkhochschule der Stadt Marktredwitz. Pp xxiv, 127.
Contains extracts from Kolben’s Caput bonae spei hodiernum.
Kolb, Peter. 1727. Naaukeurige en uitvoerige beschryving van de Kaap de Goede Hoop,
behelzend een zeer omstandig verhaal van den tegenwoordigen toestant van dat vermaarde
gewest, deszelfs gelegenheit, haven, sterkte, regerings-vorm, uitgestrekheit, en onlangs
ontdekte aanleggende landen; nevens een geleerde beschryving van het klimaat en aart van
dat landschap, van deszelfs dieren, visschen, vogelen, planten, kruiden; mitsgaders
verscheide wonderen der natuur, daat te lande ontdekt; waar by nog komt, een zeer nette en
uit eige ondervinding opgemaakte beschryving van den oorsprong der Hottentotten;
vervattende een merkwaardig bericht van derzelver tale, godsdienst, levenswyze, zeldzame
overleveringen, gewoonten, maniere van trouwen, besnydenis, opvoeding; als mede veele
andere kurieuse waarnemingen aangaande de zeden van die natie, 2 deele. Uit duits vertaalt.
Amsterdam: Lakeman.
The original German edition of 1719 bore the title Caput bonae spei hodiernum.
Kolb, Peter. 1731. The present state of the Cape of Good Hope: or a particular account of the
several nations of the Hottentots, their religion, government, laws, customs, ceremonies and
opinions; their art of war, professions, language, genius, etc., together with a short account
64
of the Dutch settlement at the Cape, 2 vols. Translated from German by Mr Medley. London:
W. Innys.
Facsimile reprint 1969 by Johnson Reprint Corporation (Landmarks in anthropology series) in New York. The
original edition of 1719 bore the title Caput bonae spei hodiernum.
Kolb, Peter. 1738. The present state of the Cape of Good Hope: or a particular account of the
several nations of the Hottentots, their religion, government, laws, customs, ceremonies and
opinions; their art of war, professions, language, genius, etc., together with a short account
of the Dutch settlement at the Cape, 2 vols. Second edition, translated from German by Mr
Medley. London: W. Innys & R. Manby.
Kolb, Peter. 1743. Description du Cap de Bonne-Espérance, où l’on trouve tout ce qui concerne
l’histoire-naturelle du pays; la religion, les moeurs et les usages des hottentots, et
l’établissement des hollandois, 3 vols. Traduit de l’allemand. Amsterdam.
The original German edition of 1719 bore the title Caput bonae spei hodiernum.
Kolb, Peter. 1745. Beschreibung des Vorgebürges der Guten Hoffnung und derer darauf
wohnenden Hottentotten worinnen von der natürlichen Beschaffenheit des Landes, von den
Gebräuchen der Einwohner, ingleichen von der Einrichtung dasiger holländischer Colonien
zuverlässige Nachricht gegeben wird. Frankfurt-am-Main: Joh. Georg Monath. Pp xxvi,
452.
Possibly a second edition.
Kolb, Peter. 1777. Nieuwe algemene beschryving van de Kaap de Goede Hoop, 2 deele. Tweede
uitgave, herzient van Petrus Conradi. Amsterdam & Harlingen (Nederlanden).
The original edition of 1719 bore the title Caput bonae spei hodiernum. The first volume includes a Khoekhoe
wordlist on p. 117-127.
Kolb, Peter. 1922. Reise zum Vorgebirge der Guten Hoffnung. Herausgegeben von Paul Germann.
Leipzig: F.A. Brockhaus. Pp 159.
Probably a reprint.
Kolb, Peter. 1926. Reise zum Vorgebirge der Guten Hoffnung. Zweite Ausgabe. Alte Reisen und
Abenteuer, #4. Leipzig: F.A. Brockhaus.
Probably a reprint.
Kolb, Peter. 1979. Unter Hottentotten 1705-1713: die Aufzeichnungen von Peter Kolb.
Herausgegeben von Werner Jopp. Alte abenteuerliche Reiseberichte. Tübingen & Basel:
Horst Erdmann. Pp 303. ISBN-10 3-7711-0317-7.
Labat, Jean-Baptiste. 1728. Nouvelle relation de l’Afrique: contenant une description exacte du
Sénégal et des pais situé entre le Cap-Blanc et la rivière de Serrelionne, 5 vols. Paris:
Guillaume Cavelier.
Labat, Jean-Baptiste. 1730. Voyage du chevalier des Marchais en Guinée, isles voisines, et à
Cayenne, fait en 1725, 1726 et 1727, 4 vols. Paris: G. Saugrain.
Often referred to simply as Voyages en Guinée et Cayenne. Several slightly differing printings exist. Volume 4
includes a brief grammatical description of Ewe.
Labat, Jean-Baptiste. 1730. Grammaire abrégée ou entretien en langue françoise et celles des
négres de Juda. In: Voyage du chevalier des Marchais en Guinée, isles voisines, et à
Cayenne, fait en 1725, 1726 et 1727, v. 4, p. 670-681. Paris: G. Saugrain.
Labat, Jean-Baptiste. 1745. A voyage to Guinea, and the adjacent islands, in 1725: account of the
French settlements between Cape Blanco and Sierra Leone, now first translated from the
French. In: A new general collection of voyages and travels: consisting of the most esteemed
relations, which have been hitherto published in any language, v. 2, p. (?). Ed. by John
Green. London: Thomas Astley.
Not sure about the English title. Abridged summary of Voyage du chevalier des Marchais en Guinée. This was later
translated to German.
Labat, Jean-Baptiste. 1747. Reisen zu Wasser und zu Land längs des westlichen Küsten von
Afrika. In: Allgemeine historie der Reisen, oder Sammlung aller Reisebeschribungen, Bd 2,
p. (?). Durch Herrn Andreas Brue aus dem französischen übersetzt. Ed. by Johann J.
Schwabe. Leipzig: Bey Arkstee und Merkus.
Based on the (abridged) English translation, not the French.
65
Lacerda y Almeida, Francisco José Maria de. 1873. Lacerda’s journey to Cazembe in 1789.
Translated by Captain R.F. Burton. Royal Geographical Society of London (RGSL).
Lacerda y Almeida, Francisco José Maria de. 1889. Diário da viagem de Moçambique para os
rios de Sena. Lisboa: Ministerio dos Negocios da Marinha e Ultramar, Portugal. Pp 31.
Lacerda y Almeida, Francisco José Maria de. 1936. Travessia de Africa: edição acrescida do
diário da viagem de Moçambique para os rios de Sena e do diário do regresso a Sena pelo
Padre Francisco Joao Pinto. Com uma introducção crítica do Dr Manuel Múrias. Lisboa:
Agência Geral das Colónias. Pp 411.
Lambert, Claude François. 1749. Recueil d’observations curieuses sur les moeurs, les coutumes,
les usages, les differentes langues, le gouvernement, 4 vols. Paris: Prault fils.
Issued anonymously.
Lamiral, Dominique Harcourt. 1789. L’Affrique et le peuple affriquain, considérés sous tous leurs
rapports avec notre commerce et nos colonies. Paris: Dessenne. Pp 399.
Lamiral, Dominique Harcourt. 1789. Afrika und seine Bewohner. Aus dem französischen
übersetzt. Hannover.
Lange, Dierk. 1972. Un vocabulaire kanuri de la fin du XVIIe siécle. Cahiers d’études africaines,
v. 12, 46, p. 277-290.
URL: www.persee.fr/showIssue.do?issueKey=cea_0008-0055_1972_num_12_46
Langhansz, Christoffel. 1705. Neue Ost-Indische Reise. Leipzig.
Langhansz visited Cape Town in 1694.
Peripherals: Rowland Raven-Hart, “The new East-Indian journey of Christoffel Langhansz”, Quarterly bulletin of
the South African Library, v. 19 (1965) p. 119-139.
Laporte, Joseph de [Abbé]. 1776. Le voyageur françois, ou la connoissance de l’ancien et du
nouveau monde, mis au jour par M. l’Abbé Delaporte. Nouvelle édition. Paris: Cellot. Pp
468.
Deals with the Cape of Good Hope and the Khoekhoe (p. 1-95) plus Angola (p. 96-130). This is certainly not the
first edition, nor the second. It could be a reprint of the third, fourth, fifth, etc.
Lauender, Theophilus. (Ed.) 1609. The trauels of certaine Englishmen into Africa, Asia, Troy,
Bythinia, Thracia, and to the Blacke Sea; and into Syria, Cilicia, Pisidia, Mesopotamia,
Damascus, Canaan, Galile, Samaria, Iudea, Palestina, Ierusalem, Iericho, and to the Red
Sea, and to sundry other places, begunne in the yeare of iubile 1600, and by some of them
finished in this yeere 1608, the others not yet returned; very profitable to the help of
trauellers, and no lesse delightfull to all persons who take pleasure to heare of the manners,
gouernement, religion, and customes of forraine and heathen countries. London: W.
Aspley. Pp c.120.
Compiled from letters written by William Biddulph and others. Biddulph is sometimes credited as an author for the
whole work, but Lauender is the actual editor/compiler. There seems to be several subsequent editions and/or
reprints.
Law, Robin. (Ed.) 1990. Correspondence from the Royal African Company’s factories at Offra
and Whydah on the slave coast of West africa in the Public Record Office, 1678-93.
Occasional papers from the Centre of African Studies (CAS), #24. University of Edinburgh.
Pp 81.
Law, Robin. (Ed.) 1991. Correspondence of the Royal African Company’s chief merchants at
Cabo Corso Castle with William’s Fort, Whydah, and the Little Popo Factory, 1727-1728:
an annotated transcription of Ms. Francklin 1055/1 in the Bedfordshire County Record
Office. African primary texts, #3. African Studies Program, University of WisconsinMadison. Pp 53. ISBN-10 0-942615-08-5.
Law, Robin. (Ed.) 1997. The English in West Africa. The local correspondence of the Royal
African Company of England, 1681-1699, pt. 1: 1681-1683. Fontes historiae africanae, new
series, #1. Oxford: Oxford University Press for the British Academy. Pp xix, 363. ISBN-10
0-19-726176-0.
Peripherals: Harvey M. Feinberg, International journal of African historical studies, v. 32 (1999) p. 206-208.
Law, Robin. (Ed.) 2001. The English in West Africa. The local correspondence of the Royal
African Company of England, 1681-1699, pt. 2: 1685-1688. Fontes historiae africanae, new
66
series, #5. Oxford: Oxford University Press for the British Academy. Pp xvi, 486. ISBN-10
0-19-726252-X.
Law, Robin. 2002. An alternative text of King Agaja of Dahomey’s letter to King George I of
England, 1726. History in Africa, v. 29, p. 257-271.
Leblanc, Vincent. 1649. Les voyages fameux du sieur Vincent le Blanc Marseillois, 3 parties.
Redigez fidellement sur ses memoires et registres, par Pierre Bergeron. Paris: Gervais
Clouzier. Pp 276; 179; 136.
Leblanc, Vincent. 1658. Les voyages fameux du sieur Vincent le Blanc Marseillois, 3 parties.
Redigez fidellement sur ses memoires, par Pierre Bergeron; et nouuellement reueu corrigé et
augmenté par le Sr Coulon. Paris: Nicolas Oudot. Pp 202; 147; 109.
Leblanc, Vincent. 1660. The world surveyed: the famous voyages and travailes of Vincent Le
Blanc, or, White, of Marseilles, who from the age of fourteen years, to threescore and
eighteen, travelled through most parts of the world, viz. the East and West Indies, Persia,
Pegu, the kingdoms of Fez and Morocco, Guinny, and through all Africa, from the Cape of
Good Hope, into Alexandria, by the territories of Monomotapa, of Preste John and Egypt,
into the Mediterranean isles, and through the principal provinces of Europe; containing a
more exact description of several parts of the world, then hath hitherto been done by any
other authour. The whole work enriched, with many authentick histories, originally written in
French, and faithfully rendred into English by F.B., gent. London: John Starkey. Pp 12, 407.
Leibniz, Gottfried Wilhelm von. 1717. Collectanea etymologica: illustrationi linguarum veteris
celticae, germanicae, gallicae, aliarumque inservientia [...]. Hannover.
Contains wordlist for some - or even several? - African languages. Khoekhoe appears on p. 375-384 (Strohmeyer &
Moritz 1975:114). Drexel (1921/22:91) gives a latinate form of the author’s name, G. Guil. Leibnitii.
Leyden, John. 1799. A historical and philosophical sketch of the discoveries and settlements of the
Europeans in northern and western Africa, at the close of the eighteenth century. Edinburgh:
J. Moir for Thomas Brown. Pp xvi, 442.
Lindsay, John [Chaplain]. 1759. A voyage to the coast of Africa in 1758: containing a succinct
account of the expedition to and the taking of the Island of Goree, by a squadron
commanded by the Hon. A. Keppel. London: S. Paterson, W. Bristow & C. Etherington. Pp
110.
Linschoten, Jan Huygen van. 1599. Descriptio totivs gvineae tractvs, Congi, Angolae, et
Monomotapae. Pp 44.
Lobo, Jeronimo. 1625/34. Itinerário.
Jeronimo Lobo visited Ethiopia during 1625-1634. His original journal remained unpublished during his life time
and was soon forgotten about; that is, until it was (re)discovered in a Jesuit monastery in Lisbon by one Joachim
LeGrand, who published a French translation in 1728. The Portuguese text was later edited and annotated by
Gonçalves da Costa, publ. 1971 at Lisbon.
Lobo, Jeronimo. 1673. A short relation of the river Nile, of its sources and current, of its
overflowing the campagnia of Egypt, till it runs into the Mediterranean, and of other
curiosities; written by an eye-witness who lived many years in the chief kingdoms of the
Abyssine empire. Translated by Sir Peter Wyche. London: John Martin. Pp 104.
This is not based on Lobo’s travel journals nor his memoirs, but on correspondence he had with a member of the
Royal Society of London. Several early English editions seem to exist (paginations vary). This may not be the
first.
Lobo, Jeronimo. 1728. Voyage historique d’Abissinie. Traduit du portugais, continué et augmenté
de plusieurs dissertations, lettres et memoires, par M. Le Grand. Paris: Costelier & Guerin.
Pp xiv, 514.
French translation of a Portuguese travel journal, nowadays commonly referred to simply as “Lobo’s Itinerário” (it
has no actual title), which Joachim LeGrand found in a Jesuit monastery in Lisbon. Some prints carry the
(erroneous?) title Relation historique d’Abissinie.
Lobo, Jeronimo. 1735. A voyage to Abyssinia. Translated from the French by Samuel Johnson.
London: A. Bettesworth, C. Hitch. Pp xii, 396.
URL: lobo.thefreelibrary.com/Voyage-to-Abyssinia
Lobo, Jeronimo. 1971. Itinerário e outros escritos inéditos. Edição crítica pelo M. Gonçalves, com
a colaboração de Charles F. Beckingham. Lisboa: Livraria Civilização. Pp xxviii, 832.
Loderus, Andries Lambert. (Ed.) 1707. Collectanea malaica vocabularia. Amsterdam & Batavia.
67
Several vols/parts. Includes reprints(?) of previously published vocabularies of Malay, Malagasy, and perhaps
other languages, too.
Lok, John [Capt.]. 1824. Voyage to Guinea, in 1554. In: A general history and collection of
Lok, John [Capt.]. 1890. The second voyage to Guinea set out by Sir George Barne, Sir Iohn
Yorke, Thomas Lok, Anthonie Hickman and Edward Castelin, in the yere 1554, the captaine
whereof was M. Iohn Lok. In: The principal navigations, voyages, traffiques & discoveries
of the English nation, v. 11, p. (?). New (fourth) edition. Ed. by Richard Hakluyt & Edmund
Goldsmid. Edinburgh: E. & C. Goldsmid.
Includes a travel log detailing travels in West Africa, followed by a lengthy description of three kinds of elephants,
and some ethnographic notes on the peoples of Libya (e.g. the Garamantes) and Ethiope.
Lok, John [Capt.]. 1890. A letter of John Lock to the company of marchants adventurers for
Guinea. In: The principal navigations, voyages, traffiques & discoveries of the English
nation, v. 11, p. (?). New (fourth) edition. Ed. by Richard Hakluyt & Edmund Goldsmid.
Edinburgh: E. & C. Goldsmid.
Loyer, Godefroy. 1714. Relation du voyage du royaume d’Issiny, Côte d’Or, païs de Guinée, en
Afrique: la description du païs, les inclinations, les moeurs, et la religion des habitans; avec
ce qui s’y est passé de plus remarquable dans l’établissement que les françois y ont fait.
Paris: Arnoul Seneuze; Jean-Raoul Morel. Pp xii, 298.
Lucca, Lorenzo di [Padre]. 1953. Relations dur le Confo du Laurent de Lucques (1700-1717).
Traduit et annotée par Jean Cuvelier. Mémoires de l’IRCB (Inst. Royal Colonial Belge),
collection in-8°, section des sciences morales et politiques, #32:2. Bruxelles. Pp 357.
Ludolfus, Job. 1661. Lexicon aethiopica-latinum, ex omnibus libris impressis, nonnullisque
manuscriptis collectum; et cum docto quodam aethiope relectum; accessit authoris
grammaticam cum aliis nonnullis, quorum catalogum sequens pagina exhibebit. Nunc
primum in lucem editum, studio et cura J.M. Wanslebii, qui indicem latinum et appendicem
operi additit. Londini: Th. Roycroft. Pp 8, 540, 40; 2, 76, 8.
Ge‘ez dictionary-cum-grammar written in Latin. The dictionary-part was revised and published separately in 1699.
Ludolfus, Job. 1681. Historia aethiopica, siva brevis et succincta descriptio regni habessinorum,
quod vulgò malè presbyteri Johannis vocatur. Francofurti: B.C. Wustii. Pp 144.
Ludolfus, Job. 1681. Grammatica aethiopica. Francofurti.
On Ge‘ez. Ludolf speculates about a North-African/Semitic origin for the southern African Khoikhoi (see Winter
1981:353).
Ludolfus, Job. 1681. Grammatica aethiopica. Editio altera. Francofurti: Johannem David
Zunnerum. Pp 184.
New (second) edition.
Ludolfus, Job. 1698. Lexicon amharico-latinum cum indice latino copioso inquirendis vocabulis
amharicis in hoc opere contentis. Edita. Francofurti. Pp 4, 103, 16.
Ludolfus, Job. 1698. Grammatica linguae amharicae quae vernacula est Habessinorum, in usum
eorum qui cum antiqua hac et praeclara natione Christiana conversati violent. Edita.
Francofurti. Pp 8, 60.
Ludolfus, Job. 1699. Hoc est: lobi Ludolphi lexicon aethiopica-latinum, ex omnibus libris
impressis, et multis MSStis contextum; nunc denuo ab ipso autore revisum ac emendatum,
plumrimisque novis readicibus & derivatis, nec non nominibus propriis auctum, ut in
praefatione pluribus dicetus. Editio secunda accedit index latinus copiosissimus, qvi vicem
lexici latino-aethioppici praestare possit. Frankfurt-am-Main: Johannem David Zunnerum.
Pp 14, 664, 42.
The title should appear also in Ge‘ez.
Ma Huan. 1451. Yingyai shenglan = The overall survey of the ocean shores.
Ma Huan & Guo Chongli accompanied Zheng He on all his travels. A travel journal was first drafted in 1416 by Ma
Huan, and bits were added to it during subsequent travels. It was finished by Ma Huan and Guo Chongli jointly
sometime during the late 1430s, and printed 1451. Not sure if Guo Chongli was a co-author or (just) the original
printer.
68
Ma Huan. 1970. Yinh-yai sheng-lan: the overall survey of the ocean’s shores. Translated from the
Chinese text and edited by Feng Ch’eng-Chün, with introduction, notes and appendices by
J.V.G. Mills. Works issued by the Hakluyt Society, extra series, #42. Cambridge: The
University Press. Pp xix, 393, 3.
Reprinted 1997 by White Lotus Press in Bangkok, ISBN-10 974-84-9678-3.
Macintosh, William. 1782. Travels in Europe, Asia, and Africa: describing characters, customs,
manners, laws, and productions of nature and art; containing various remarks on the
political and commercial interests of Great Britain; and delineating, in particular, a new
system for the government and improvement of the British settlements in the East Indies;
begun in the year 1777, and finished in 1781, 2 vols. London: John Murray.
Published without author’s name.
Peripherals: Joseph Price, Some observations and remarks on a late publication, intitled, Travels in Europe, Asia,
and Africa (London, 1782).
Maillet, M. de. 1735. Description de l’Egypte contenant plusieurs remarques curieuses sur la
geographie ancienne et moderne de ce pais, sur ces monumens anciens, sur les moeurs.
Composé sur les mémoires de M. de Maillet, ancien consul de France au Caire, par M.
l’Abbé de Mascrier. Paris: Louis Genneau. Pp xxi, 328, 242.
Maire, Jacques Joseph le. 1695. Les voyages du Sieur le Maire aux Isles Canaries, Cap-Verd,
Sénégal et Gambie, sous Monsieur Dancourt, directeur general de la Compagnie royale
d’Affrique. Paris: Collombat. Pp 215, 23.
language review, v. 6 (1967) p. 32-70; Paul E.H. Hair, “Sources on early Sierra Leone, 10: Schouten and Le Maire,
1615”, Africana research bulletin, v. 7,2 (1977) p. 56-75.
Maire, Jacques Joseph le. 1696. A voyage of the Sieur Le Maire to the Canary Islands, Cape Verd,
Senegal and Gamby, under Monsieur Dancourt, Director General of the Royal Affrican
Company. London.
Maire, Jacques Joseph le. 1696. The voyages of the Sieur Lemaire to the Canary islands. In: A new
voyage to the East-Indies in the years 1690 and 1691; to which is added, a new description
of the Canary Islands, Cape Verd, Senegal and Gambia, pt. 2, p. 1-109. Done into English
from the Paris edition. London: D. Dring.
The first part of the book is written by Abraham Duquesne (and deals with the “East-Indies”).
Maire, Jacques Joseph le. 1887. Voyage to the Canaries, Cape Verd, and the coast of Africa,
under the command of M. Dancourt (1682). Translated from the French by Edmund
Goldsmid. Edinburgh. Pp 76.
Printed privately (by the translator?).
Mairoser, G. 1901. Geschichte der Expedition Peter Kolbs nach dem Kap der Guten Hoffnung,
1705: seine kleineren schriftstellerischen Arbeiten. Nürnberg. Pp 80.
Manoncourt, Charles N. Sigisbert Sonnini de. 1799. Travels in Upper and Lower Egypt,
undertaken by order of the old government of France, 3 vols. Translated from the French by
Henry Hunter. London: John Stockdale.
Reprinted 1972 by Gregg Press (ISBN-10 0-576-17110-7).
Manoncourt, Charles N. Sigisbert Sonnini de. 1799. Voyage dans la haute et basse Egypte, fait
par ordre d l’ancien gouvernement, et contenant des observations de tous genres, 2 vols.
Paris: François Buisson.
Reprinted 1998 by Olms in Hildesheim (ISBN-10 3-487-27207-5).
Manoncourt, Charles N. Sigisbert Sonnini de. 1800. Reisen in Ober- und Niederägypten auf
Befehl der ehemaligen Regierung in Frankreich unternommen. Aus den französischen
übersetzt. Leipzig: Heinsius.
Manoncourt, Charles N. Sigisbert Sonnini de. 1803. Travels in Upper and Lower Egypt,
undertaken by order of the old government of France, 3 vols. Translated from the French by
Henry Hunter; new edition. London: John Stockdale.
Marchais, [Mns]. 1724/26. Journal du voiage de Guinée et Cayenne par le chevalier des Marchais,
capitaine comandant la fregatte de la Compagnie des Indes, l’expedition, pendant les années
1724, 1725, et 1726. Manuscrit, fonds français 24223. Paris: Bibliothèque Nationale.
Referred to by Alpern (1995:41n207).
69
Marées, Pieter de. 1602. Beschryvinghe ende historische verhael van het gout koninkrijck van
Gunea anders de gout-custe de Mina genaemt met haren gheloven, opinien, handelinghe, oft
manghelinge, manieren talen, etc. Amsterdam: Cornelisz Calesz.
Includes a brief vocabulary of what appears to be a mix of Orungu B11b and Kikongo H16. The work is credited to
the initials P.D.M. Not sure if the publisher/printer is correct. Reprinted 1912 by the Linschoten-Vereeniging.
Marées, Pieter de. 1603. Warhafftige historische Beschreibung dess gewaltigen goltreichen
Königreichs Guinea. In: Indiae orientalis, Bd 6, p. (?). Ed. by Johann Theodor de Bry &
Johann Israel de Bry. Francofurti: Wolffgangi Richteri.
Not sure about the title. The text probably appears here in a Latin translation.
Marées, Pieter de. 1987. Description and historical account of the Gold Kingdom of Guinea.
Edited and translated from Dutch by Albert van Dantzig and Adam Jones. Fontes historiae
africanae, series varia, #5. Oxford University Press. Pp xxvi, 272. ISBN-10 0-19-726056-X.
Peripherals: Richard Rathbone, Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, v. 52 (1989) p. 406; Ivor
Wilks, Africa, v. 59 (1989) p. 402-404.
Marsden, William. 1778. Vocabulary of the Makua language.
Apparently William Marsden had a servant who was a Makua-speaker from Mozambique. He elicited a Makua
vocabulary from the dictation of a slave in Sumatra. He gave the vocabulary to the Tuckey expedition (Doke
1959:6, see also Tuckey 1818).
Peripherals: C.M. Doke, “Bantu language pioneers of the nineteenth century”, African studies, v. 14 (1940) p. 207246; C.M. Doke, “Bantu language pioneers of the nineteenth century” (revised), African studies, v. 18 (1959) p. 127.
Marsden, William. 1796. A catalogue of dictionaries, vocabularies, grammars, and alphabets.
London. Pp 154.
Details wanting.
Marsden, William. 1802. Bemerkungen über die Sprache der Siwaer. In: Friedrich Conrad
Hornemann: Tagebuch seiner Reise von Cairo nach Murzak in den Jahren 1797-98, p. (?).
Weimar: Landes-Industrie-Comptoir.
Not too sure about the details of this.
Matthews, John. 1788. A voyage to the River Sierra-Leone, on the coast of Africa: containing an
account of the trade and productions of the country, and of the civil and religious customs
and manners of the people; in a series of letters to a friend in England. London: White &
Son. Pp iv, 183.
Mayeur, Nicolas. 1913. Voyage ay pays d’Ancove (1777). Bulletin de l’Académie Nationale des
Arts, des Lettres et des Sciences, Académie Malgache, v. 12, 1, p. 139-176.
Mayeur, Nicolas. 1913. Voyage à la côte de l’ouest de Madagascar (pays des séclaves). Edité par
Léon Huet de Froberville.
Details wanting. The travels took place in the 1770s.
Megiser, Hieronymus. 1603. Thesaurus polyglottus, vel, dictionarium multilingue, 2 vols.
Francofurti ad Moenum.
Includes lexical specimens from at least two West African languages, Twi and Wolof. “[I]n the language termed
‘Guineensium’, the term for aurum ‘gold’ is scheke, i.e. Twi s(h)ika. We have not yet discovered where Mengiser
found this orthographical version of the term, but it was presumably a Germanic-language source. Another West
African language occasionally cited in this work is ‘Ialophorum’, e.h. ‘Jolof’” (Hair 1969:244n43).
Peripherals: P.E.H. Hair, “An ethnolinguistic inventory of the Lower Guinea coast before 1700 (pt. 2)”, African
Mendonça, Jeronymo de. 1785. Jornada de Africa. Copiado fielmente da edição de Lisboa de
1607, por Bento Joze de Souze Farinha. Lisboa: Off. de Jose da Silva Nazareth. Pp xviii,
275.
Possibly the author’s last name should read Mendoça, not Mendonça.
Mentzel, Otto Friedrich. 1785. Vollständige und zuverlässige geographische und topographische
Beschreibung des berühmten und in aller Betrachtung merkwürdigen afrikanischen
Vorgebirgs der Guten Hoffnung, Bd 1. Glogau (Deutschland).
An English translation in two volumes appeared 1921/25, published by the Van Riebeeck Society in Cape Town.
Mentzel, Otto Friedrich. 1787. Vollständige und zuverlässige geographische und topographische
Beschreibung des berühmten und in aller Betrachtung merkwürdigen afrikanischen
Vorgebirgs der Guten Hoffnung, Bd 2. Glogau (Deutschland).
70
An English translation appeared 1944, published by the Van Riebeeck Society in Cape Town.
Mentzel, Otto Friedrich. 1921/25. A geographical and topographical description of the Cape of
Good Hope, v. 1-2. Translated from German by H.J. Mandelbrote. Publications from the
Van Riebeeck Society, #4+6. Cape Town.
Mentzel, Otto Friedrich. 1944. A geographical and topographical description of the Cape of Good
Hope, pt. 3. Translated from German, revised and edited by H.J. Mandelbrote. Publications
from the Van Riebeeck Society, #25. Cape Town. Pp xxv, 353.
This corresponds to the second volume of Vollständige und zuverlässige geographische und topographische
Beschreibung des berühmten und in aller Betrachtung merkwürdigen afrikanischen Vorgebirgs der Guten Hoffnung,
publ. 1787.
Mirievot, Fyodor Ivanovich Jankovich de. (Ed.) 1815. Linguarum totius orbis vocabularia
comparativa = Comparative dictionary of all languages and dialects, arranged in
alphabetic order, 4 vols. New edition. Moscow.
Not sure about the Latin title. The original edition by Pallas (1786/89) did not please Empress Catherine II, and a
new editor was swiftly instructed to re-edit the work. Mirievot “managed to do everything required, quickly and
precisely ... In this dictionary, words from all languages were mixed and arranged in alphabetical order -- according
to the Russian alphabet” (Olderogge 1993:114). Pallas’ first edition had included no African languages, but this one
contains specimens from 33 African languages (cfr Olderogge 1993), e.g. Coptic, Shilha Berber, Malagasy (or,
‘Arabic of Madagascar Island’), Ful, Wolof (‘Yalof’), Manding, Yalunka, Kikongo, Kamba, Xhosa (‘Kaffir’),
Khoekhoe. Many of the West African vocabularies were apparently lifted from Oldendorp (1777).
Peripherals: D.A. Olderogge, “The study of African languages in Russia”, St Petersburg journal of African studies, v.
1 (1993) p. 113-123.
Monclaro, [Father]. 1572/1899. Account of the journey made by Fathers of the Company of Jesus
with Francisco Barreto in the conquest of Monomotapa in the year 1569. In: Records of
South-Eastern Africa, collected in various libraries and archive deposits in Europe, v. 3, p.
202-253. Ed. by George McCall Theal. London: William Clowes & Sons for the
Contains “a number of Bantu words” (Doke 1960:30).
Montagu, Mary Wortley [Lady]. 1763. Letters of the Right Honourable Lady M--y W--y M--e:
written, during her travels in Europe, Asia and Africa, to persons of distinction, men of
letters, &c. in different parts of Europe. Which contain, among other curious relations,
accounts of the policy and manners of the Turks; drawn from sources that have been
inaccessible to other travellers, 3 vols. London: Becket & De Hondt.
There are many subsequent editions of this.
URL: www.archive.org/details/lettersofrightho01montiala
Montauban, [?]. 1698. Relation du voyage du Sieur de Montauban, capitaine des flibustiers en
Guinée, en l’année 1695. In: Relation des voyages et des découvertes que les Espagnols ont
fait dans les Indes Occidentales, p. 359-402. Amsterdam: J. Louis de Lorme.
A contemporary English translation also exists. Unsure about the details, however.
Montecuccolo, P. Giovanni Antonio Cavazzi da. 1665/67. Missione evangelica al regno del Congo:
et altri circonvicini, siti nell Ethiopia interiore parte dell Africa meridionalae, fata dalla
religione capuccina, con il racconto di varii successi seguiti, 3 vols.
Unpublished manuscripts. Issued/reprinted 1977 on 2 microfim reels by the Graphic Communication Services of the
Alderman Library, University of Virginia at Charlottesville.
Montecuccolo, P. Giovanni Antonio Cavazzi da. 1671. Istorica descrizione de’ tre Regni Congo,
Matamba et Angola, situati nell ‘Etiopia inferiore occidentale e delle missioni apostoliche
esercitatevi da religiosi capuccini. Milan.
The author is usually referred to only as “Cavazzi”. There exist several contemporary Milan-editions. Doke
(1959:59) gives the date as 1671, but most available 17th-century copies seem to have been printed 1687.
Montecuccolo, P. Giovanni Antonio Cavazzi da. 1687. Istorica descrizione de’ tre’ regni Congo,
Matamba et Angola: sitvati nell’Etiopia inferiore occidentale, e delle missioni apostoliche
esercitateui da religiosi Capuccini. Bologna: G. Monti. Pp 14, 933.
There are several reprints (some abridged) and translations of this. Not sure how it differs from the 1671-edition.
Montecuccolo, P. Giovanni Antonio Cavazzi da. 1694. Historische Beschreibung der drey
Königreichen, Congo, Matamba, und Angola, und der jenigen Apostolischen Missionen, so
71
von denen P.P. Capucinern daselbst verrichtet worden. In die teutsche Sprach übersetzet.
München: J. Jäcklin. Pp 6, 1030.
This “is a German translation which, though literal and accurate, sometimes leaves out passages or abridges them”
(Wainwright 1942:107n24).
Montecuccolo, P. Giovanni Antonio Cavazzi da. 1732. Relation historique de l’Ethiopie
occidentale: contenant la description des royaumes de Congo, Angolle, et Matamba, 5 vols.
Traduite de l’italien et augmentée de plusieurs relations portugaises des meilleurs auteurs,
avec des notes, des cartes géographiques, et un grand nombre de figures en taille-douce, par
le J.B. Labat. Paris: Charles-Jean-Baptiste Delespine le fils.
This is more Labat’s own work than a translation (Wainwright 1942:107n24).
Montecuccolo, P. Giovanni Antonio Cavazzi da. 1965. Descripção histórica dos três reinos do
Congo, Matamba e Angola, 2 tomos. Tradução, notas e índices pelo P. Graciano Maria de
Leguzzano, e introducção biobibliográfica por F. Leite de Faria. Agrupamento de estudos de
cartografia antiga, secçao de Lisboa, #2-3. Lisboa: Junta de Investigações do Ultramar (JIU).
Moore, Francis. 1738. Travels into the inland parts of Africa: containing a description of the
several nations for the space of six hundred miles up the River Gambia; their trade, habits,
customs, language, manners, religion, and government, the power, disposition and
characters of some Negro princes; with a particular account of Job Ben Solomon; to which
is added, Capt. Stibbs’s voyage up the Gambia in the year 1723, to make discoveries; with
an accurate map of that river taken on the spot, and many other copper plates; also extracts
from the Nubian’s geography, Leo the African, and other authors antient and modern,
concerning the Niger, Nile, or Gambia, and observations thereon. London: Edward Cave.
Pp 443.
Irregular pagination. Includes “A list of words, English and Mundingo” and translated fragments from the Latin
edition of al-Idrîsî’s Geographia nubiensis, among other things.
Moore, Francis. 1755. Travels into the inland parts of Africa. Second edition. London: Henry &
Cave. Pp xi, xiii, 229, 84, 25.
Morgan, J. 1728/29. A complete history of Algiers: to which is prefixed, an epitome of the general
history of Barbary, from the earliest times; interspersed with many curious remarks and
passages, not touched on by any writer whatever, 2 vols. London: Bettenham = J.
Bettenham.
URL: www.archive.org/details/completehistoryo01morgiala
URL: www.archive.org/details/completehistoryo02morgiala
Mossop, E.E. (Ed.) 1931. Joernale van die landtogte van die edele vaandrig Olof Bergh (1682 en
1683) en die vaandrig Isaq Schrijver (1689) / The journals of the expeditions of the
honorable ensign Olof Bergh (1682 and 1983) and the ensign Isaq Schrijver (1689).
Transcribed and translated into English and edited with a foreword and footnotes by Dr E.E.
Mossop. Publications from the Van Riebeeck Society, #12. Cape Town. Pp 270, plates,
maps.
Early descriptions of the Cape area and its inhabitants.
Mossop, E.E. (Ed.) 1935. The journal of Hendrik Jacob Wikar (1779) and the journals of
Jacobus Coetzé Jansz (1766) and Willem van Reenen (1791). With translations by A.W.
van der Horst and E.E. Mossop. Publications from the Van Riebeeck Society, #15. Cape
Town. Pp xii, 327.
Early descriptions of life and customs at the Cape.
Mossop, E.E. (Ed.) 1947. The journals of Brink and Rhenius, being the journal of Carel Frederik
Brink of the journey into Great Namaqualand, 1761-1762, made by Captain Hendrik Hop,
and the journal of Ensign Johannes Tobias Rhenius, 1724. Transcribed, translated, edited
and with an introduction by E.E. Mossop. Publications from the Van Riebeeck Society, #28.
Cape Town. Pp xiv, 160.
Early descriptions of the Cape area. Contains notes on the Khoekhoe.
Müller, Wilhelm Johann. 1673. Die afrikanische auf der guineischen Gold-Cust gelegene
Landschafft Fetu, wahshafftig und unablässiger Erforschung beschrieben, auch mit
dienlichen Kupffern und einem fetuischen Wörter-Buche gezieret. Hamburg: Michael
Pfeiffer. Pp 14, 287.
The “Wörter-Buche” contains 515 Fante-German words (Hintze 1959:36). Müller’s specimens of the ‘Fetu’
language, “though collected at Afutu, are not in the modern Afutu/Guan language, but in Twi” (Hair 1969:229).
72
Peripherals: P.E.H. Hair, “An ethnolinguistic inventory of the Lower Guinea coast before 1700 (pt. 2)”, African
Müller, Wilhelm Johann. 1675. Die afrikanische auf der guineischen Gold-Cust gelegene
Landschafft Fetu, wahshafftig und unablässiger Erforschung beschrieben, auch mit
dienlichen Kupffern und einem fetuischen Wörter-Buche gezieret. Neue Auflage. Nürnberg:
Johann Hoffmann. Pp xvi, 318, 6 tables.
Reprinted 1968 in Graz, edited by Jürgen Zwernemann.
Murray, Alexander. 1808. Account of the life and writings of James Bruce, of Kinnaird, Esq.
F.R.S., author of ‘Travels to discover the source of the Nile’. With an appendix containing
extracts from Bruce’s correspondence and journals. Edinburgh: Arch. Constable & Co. Pp
xiii, 504.
Includes, among other things, a “Vocabulary of the Amharic, Falashan, Gafat, Agow and Tcheretch Agow
languages” (p. 433-442), and an English-Oromo vocabulary (p. 446-447).
Mylius, Charles. 1790. Vocabulaire français et maquoua, ou recueil de quelques mots de la langue
maquoua: par ordre alphabétique, commencé en novembre 1790. Manuscrit.
A French-Makhuwa vocabulary containing some 600 words. Later edited and published by Carl Meinhof (1908).
Peripherals: Carl Meinhof, “Vocabulaire français et maquoua, ou recueil de quelques mots de la langue maquoua”,
Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 11 (1908) p. 117-131.
Newton, John; Bird, John. 1890. The voiage of John Newton and John Bird to Benin, 1588. In:
The principal navigations, voyages, traffiques & discoveries of the English nation, v. 11, p.
(?). New (fourth) edition. Ed. by Richard Hakluyt & Edmund Goldsmid. Edinburgh: E. &
C. Goldsmid.
Newton, John; Bird, John. 1890. The second voyage of John Newton and John Bird to Benin,
1590. In: The principal navigations, voyages, traffiques & discoveries of the English nation,
v. 11, p. (?). New (fourth) edition. Ed. by Richard Hakluyt & Edmund Goldsmid.
Niebuhr, Carsten. 1790. Das Innere von Afrika. Neues deutsches Museum, v. 3, 4, p. 963-1004.
Includes Hausa numerals and nouns (Newman 1996:57).
Niebuhr, Carsten. 1791. Das Innere von Afrika. Neues deutsches Museum, v. 4, 4, p. 419-430.
Includes Hausa numerals and nouns (Newman 1996:57).
Nienaber, Gabriel Stefanus. 1962. ’n Lysie Hottentotse woorde uit 1626. African studies, v. 21, 1,
p. 28-39.
Includes 31 words collected 1626 (by whom?) which are compared to modern Khoekhoe.
Nieuhof, J. 1682. Zee en lant-reize door verscheide gewesten van Oostindien. Amsterdam.
May have something on the Khoekhoe.
Norden, Frederick Ludwig. 1755. Voyage d’Egypte et de Nubie, 2 vols. Traduit par l’auteur et
rédigé par J.B. des Roches de Parthenay. Copenhague: Imprimerie de la Maison Royale des
Orphelins.
Norden, Frederick Ludwig. 1757. Travels in Egypt and Nubia, 2 vols. Translated from the original
(Danish text) published by command of his Majesty the King of Denmark, and enlarged with
observations from ancient and modern authors that have written on the antiquities of Egypt,
by Dr Peter Templeman. London: Lockyer Davis & Charles Reymers.
Nordenskiöld, August; Wadström, Carl Bernhard; Barrell, Colborn; Simpson, Johan Gottfried.
1789. Plan for a free community upon the coast of Africa, under the protection of Great
Britain; but interely independent of all European laws and governments; with an invitation,
under certain conditions, to all persons desirous of partaking the benefits thereof. London:
R. Hindmarsh. Pp xiv, 51.
Norris, Robert. 1789. Memoirs of the reign of Bossa-Ahade, King of Dahomy, an inland country
of Guinea; to which are added, the author’s journey to Abomey, the capital, and a short
account of the African slave trade. London: William Lowndes. Pp xvi, 184.
Norris, Robert. 1790. Mémoires de règne de Bossa-Ahadé, roi de Dahomé. Traduit de l’anglais;
ajouté des observations sur la traite des negres, et une description de quelques endroites de la
côte de Guinée par C.B. Wadstrom. Paris: Gattey. Pp 240.
O’Connor, M. 1749. Considerations on the trade to Africa; together with a proposal for securing
the benefits thereof to this nation, for fixing and ascertaining the capital stock of the Royal
73
African Company of England, for uniting the creditors and proprietors thereof in one joint,
or common interest, for raising the sum of two hundred thousand pounds to be employed in
the trade and service of that corporation. London: J. Barnes. Pp 53.
Ogilby, John. 1670. Africa: being an accurate description of the regions of Aegypt, Barbary,
Lybia, and Billedulgerid, the Land of Negroes, Guinea, Aethiopia, and the Abyssines, with
all the adjacent Islands, and also of their wonderful plants, beasts, birds, and serpents /
Collected and. Collected and translated from most authentick authors, and augmented with
later observations. London. Pp xii, 767.
Most of the information herein seeems to derive from Dapper’s Naukeurige beschrijvinge der Afrikaensche
Gewesten (1668).
Oldendorp, Christian Georg Andreas. 1777. Geschichte der Mission der Evangelischen Brüder
auf den Caraibischen Inseln S. Thomas, S. Croix und S. Jan, 2 vols. Herausgegeben durch
J.J. Bossart. Barby (Deutschland): Christian Friedrich Laux. Pp 1068.
“Enthält einige Informationen über Sprachen der Goldküste” (Hintze 1959:17), Kassenti (Kasem?; Roncador &
Miehe 1998:117), plus vocabularies for languages referred to as Loango, Mandongo, Camba, Congo, and Ibibio
(Latham 1847:190, Hair 1967:263). Latham (1847:170) also mentions Tambu (seemingly a Kwa language) and
says that the material derives from “one of Oldendorp’s vocabularies”. Otherwise, Oldendorp’s work seems to deal
with the West Indies.
Onkruidjt, Constant van Nuld. 1778. Manuscript VOC 4286, ff. 196-227. Den Haag: Algemeen
Rijksarchief.
The journal of a Dutch slave trader in and around Zanzibar. The author “seems to have taken as little pleasure in his
writing as he did in his negotiations with the governor of Zanzibar. The result is that there is very little structure or
life to be found his daily accounts” (Ross 1986:327). This is an officially attested copy, not the original (Ross
1986:307).
Peripherals: R.J. Ross, “The Dutch on the Swahili coast, 1776-1778: two slaving journals”, International journal
of African historical studies, v. 19 (1986) p. 305-360, 479-506.
Onkruidjt, Constant van Nuld. 1986. The Dutch on the Swahili coast, 1776-1778: two slaving
journals, pt. 2: the second journal [translated, edited and published by Robert J. Ross].
International journal of African historical studies, v. 19, 3, p. 479-506.
Ovington, John. 1696. A voyage to Suratt, in the yar 1689: giving a large account of that city, and
its inhabitants, and of the English factory there; likewise a description of Madeira, St Jago,
Annobon, Cabenda and Malemba (upon the coast of Africa) St Helena, Johanna, Bombay,
the city of Muscatt, and its inhabitants in Arabia Felix, Mocha, and other maritime towns
upon the Red-sea, and the Cape of Good Hope, and the island Ascension. London: Jacob
Tonson. Pp 16, 606.
Ovington, John. 1725. Voyages de Jean Ovington, fait à Surate, et en d’autres lieux de l’Asie et de
l’Afrique, 2 vols. Traduit de l’anglois par Pierre Niceron. Paris: Guillaume Cavelier.
Pacconio, Francisco [Padre]; Couto, Antonio de [Padre]. 1643. Gentio de Angola sufficientemente
instruido nos mysterios de nossa Sancta Fé. Obra postuma composta pello Padre Francisco
Pacconio da companhia de Iesu; redusida a methodo mais breve e accomodado á capacidade
dos sogeitos que se instruem, pello Padre Antonio de Couto da mesma Companhia. Lisboa.
Pp 90.
The second known Bantu publication, a Kimbundu catechism (Doke 1959:51). “The dialect in which it is written is
not the modern one of Loando, nor precisely that of Ambaca; it could be perhaps the one spoken in the XVIIth
century in the mission of Cabinda (district of Ambaca)” (Chatelain 1889:xv; quoted by Doke 1959:54).
Pacconio, Francisco [Padre]; Couto, Antonio de [Padre]. 1661. Gentilis angollae fidei mysteriis
lusitano olim idiomate. Nunc autem latino per Fr. Antonium Mariam Prandomontanum,
concionatorem capucinum, admod. rev. patris procuratoris generalis comissarij socium,
instructus, atque locupletatus. Romae: Sac. Congreg. de Propaganda Fide. Pp 16, 115, 3.
“This second edition, several copies of which are still extant, is a considerable advance upon the first. Certain
additions and corrections were made by Maria, and there were included three pages of ‘Observationes in legendo
idiomate angollae’ in preface, as well as two pages dealing with the ‘cases’ of nouns and pronouns and the numerals,
near the end of the book. The notes explaining the pronunciation and spelling brought in Portuguese and Italian for
comparison, and Portuguese orthography was used ... in the final paragraphs he records the existence of semantic
tone (back in 1661!) without fully realizing what it was” (Doke 1959:52).
74
Pacconio, Francisco [Padre]; Couto, Antonio de [Padre]. 1784. Gentilis angollae fidei mysteriis.
Lisboa.
Third edition (Doke 1959:53).
Pacconio, Francisco [Padre]; Couto, Antonio de [Padre]. 1855. Explicaçoes de doutrina Christã
angollae fidei mysteriis. Revisada por Francisco de Sales Ferreira. Loando.
Fourth edition of Gentio de Angola/Gentilis angollae fidei mysteriis, including a new section titled “Guia de
conversação” (Doke 1959:53).
Pallas, Peter Simon. (Ed.) 1786/89. Linguarum totius orbis vocabularia comparativa =
Comparative dictionaries in all languages and dialects, 2 vols. Petropoli: J.C. Schnoor.
This dictionary covers many languages of Asia and Europe, but seemingly none from Africa. It “was planned to
publish materials on the languages of Africa also, for lists of words of various African languages were included in
the materials gathered for the dictionary, and are still preserved in archives” (Olderogge 1993:113). The finished
work did not please Empress Catherine II, who had hoped “for a book that would permit easy comparison of various
world languages and, most likely, would be suitable for polite conversation about their origins, rather than a
serious edition intended for scientific research” (Olderogge 1993:113). Hence a new editor, F.I.J. de Mirievot, was
appointed and a second edition appeared 1815.
Peripherals: D.A. Olderogge, “The study of African languages in Russia”, St Petersburg journal of African studies, v.
1 (1993) p. 113-123.
Paterson, William. 1789. A narrative of four journeys into the country of the Hottentots and
Caffraria in the years one thousand seven hundred and seventy-seven, eight and nine.
London: Johnson. Pp xii, 171, iv.
Peripherals: V.S. Forbes “Paterson’s travels”, South African geographical journal, v. 30 (1948) p. 52-70.
Paterson, William. 1790. Wilhelm Paterson’s Reisen in das Land der Hottentotten und der
kaffern, während der Jahre 1777, 1778 und 1779. Aus dem englischen übersetzt. Berlin:
Christian Friedrich Voss & Sohn. Pp 170.
Paterson, William. 1790. A narrative of four journeys into the country of the Hottentots and
Caffraria in the years one thousand seven hundred and seventy-seven, eight and nine.
Second edition, corrected. London: Johnson. Pp xii, 175.
Paterson, William. 1790. Voyages dans le pays des hottentots à la Caffrerie, à la Baye Botanique,
et dans la Nouvelle Holland. Traduit de l’anglois, accompagnés de détails précieux relatifs à
de la Peyrouse. Paris: Letellier. Pp vi, 213; viii, 266.
Not sure if this is one or two volumes. Extracts from this were later issued anonymously as Observations sur les
Hottentots et la tribu des Chonacquas (Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:18).
Paterson, William. 1790. Quatre voyages chez les hottentots et chez les cafres, depuis mai 1777
jusqu’en décembre 1779. Traduit de l’anglois. Paris: Didot l’Aîne. Pp 329.
Peixoto, António da Costa. 1731/41. Obra nova de língua geral de Mina. Manuscrito. Evora
(Portugal): Biblioteca Pública.
Not sure about the title. Includes “a lengthy vocabulary and conversation manual for Gû/Ewe, drawn up in 1731 and
in 1741” (Hair 1969:246n57). Edited and published in 1945 by Silveira and Lopes.
Peixoto, António da Costa. 1945. Obra nova de língua geral de Mina de António da Costa
Peixoto. Publicado e apresentado por Luis Silveira e acompanhado de comentario filologico
de Edmundo Correia Lopes. Lisbon: Divisão de Publicações e Biblioteca, Agência Geral das
Colónias. Pp 66.
Pena, Nunez de la. 1676. Conqvista y antigvedades de las Islas de Gran Canaria, y sv
descripcion, con mvchas advertencias de sus priuilegios, conquistadores, poblasdores, y
otras particularidades en la muy poderosa isla de Thenerife. Madrid: Imprenta Real. Pp
560.
Travelogue. Includes something on the ancient Guanche language. There are apparently more than one edition
(imprint?) of this book. The original edition was reprinted 1994 by Universidad de Las Palmas de Gran Canaria
(ISBN-10 84-88412-93-2).
Pereira, Duarte Pacheco. 1505/08. Esmeraldo de situ orbis.
75
Pereira’s Esmeraldo de situ orbis was not properly published until 1892. It is based on the author’s explorations in
West Africa, from Morocco to Gabon. It includes mentions of several peoples and contains specimens from
languages (cfr Hair 1967), e.g. Manding, Vai (as ‘Coya’), Biafada, Banyun, Nalu, Temne, Bulom, Ijo, and others.
the Guinea coast”, Journal of African history, v. 8 (1967) p. 247-269; P.E.H. Hair, “An ethnolinguistic inventory
of the Lower Guinea coast before 1700”, African language review, v. 7 (1968) p. 47-73, v. 8 (1969) p. 225-236;
J.D. Fage, “A commentary on Duarte Pachero Pereira’s account of the Lower Guinea coastlands in his ‘Esmeraldo de
situ orbis’, and some other otjer early accounts”, History in Africa, v. 7 (1980) p. 47-80.
Pereira, Duarte Pacheco. 1506. ... [Title wanting].
Unpublished diaries. The originals are held by the Portuguese National Archives in Lisbon.
Pereira, Duarte Pacheco. 1892. Esmeraldo de situ orbis. Edição commemorativa da descoberta da
America por Christovao Colombo no seu quarto centenario, sob a direcção de Raphael
Eduardo de Azevedo Basto. Lisboa: Imprensa Nacional. Pp xxxv, 125.
Originally written sometime around 1505, but not published until 1892.
Pereira, Duarte Pacheco. 1905. Esmeraldo de situ orbis. Edição critica annotada por Augusto
Epiphanio da Silva Dias. Lisboa: Typographie Universal. Pp 173.
Pereira, Duarte Pacheco. 1937. Esmeraldo de situ orbis. Translated and edited by George H.T.
Kimble. Works issued by the Hakluyt Society, second series, #79. London. Pp xxxv, 193.
Pereira, Duarte Pacheco. 1954. Esmeraldo de situ orbis. Terceira edição, introducção e anotações
históricas pelo Damiao Peres. Lisboa: Academia Portuguesa da História.
Reprinted 1988 by Academia Portuguesa da História in Lisbon.
Pereira, Duarte Pacheco. 1956. Esmeraldo de situ orbis: Côte occidentale d’Afrique du Sud
Marocain au Gabon. Traduit par Raymond Mauny. Publicações do Centro de Estudos da
Guiné Portuguesa, #19. Bissau: Centro de Estudos da Guiné Portuguesa. Pp 226.
Perestrello, Manuel de Mesquita. 1576. Roteiro da África do sul e sueste desde o Cabo da Boa
Esperança até ao das Correntes. Lisboa.
Describes a ship wreck and the author’s subsequent stay in South Africa and Mozambique during 1554. It includes
early mentions of Ronga (Junod 1927:I.27, cfr Warmelo 1937:55).
Perestrello, Manuel de Mesquita. 1735. Relaçaõ summaria da viagem que fez Fernaõ d’Alvares
Cabral, desde que partio deste reyno por capitaõ mór da armada que foy no anno de 1553 às
partes da India athè que se perdeo no Cabo de Boa Esperasnça no anno de 1554. In:
Historia tragico-maritima, v. 1, p. 39-168. Ed. by Gomes de Brito. Lisboa: Congregaçaõ do
Oratorio.
This is presumably a reprint.
Perestrello, Manuel de Mesquita. 1939. Roteiro da África do sul e sueste desde o Cabo da Boa
Esperança até ao das Correntes / “Roteiro” of the South and South-east Africa, from the
Cape of Good Hope to Cape Corrientes. Portuguese text annotated by A. Fontoura da Costa,
English text translated by George McCall Theal. Lisboa: Agência Geral do Ultramar. Pp
lxvii, 95.
Includes both Portuguese and English texts.
Phillips, Thomas. 1732. A journal of a voyage made in the Hannibal of ondon, ann. 1693, 1694,
from England, to Cape Monseradoe, in Africa; and thence along the coast of Guiney to
Whidaw, the island of St Thomas, and so forward to Barbadoes. In: A collection of voyages
and travels, some now first printed from original manuscripts, others translated out of
foreign languages and now first published in English; to which are added some few that
have formerly appear’d in English, but do now for their excellency and scarceness deserve
to be reprinted, v. 6, p. (?). Ed. by Awnsham Churchill & John Churchill. London: A. & J.
Churchill.
Pigafetta, Filippo; Lopes, Duarte. 1591. Relatione del reame di Congo et delle circonvicine
contrade: tratta dalli scritti et ragionamenti di Odoardo Lopez, Portoghese. Roma:
Bartolomeo Grassi. Pp 4, 82, 2, 8, plates.
Includes a “considerable number of Kongo words” (Doke 1960:30).
Peripherals: R.H. Major, “On the map of Africa published in Pigafetti’s ‘Kingdom of Congo’, in 1591”,
Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society of London, v. 11 (1866/67) p. 246-251; C.M. Doke, “The earliest
records of Bantu”, African studies, v. 19 (1960) p. 26-32.
76
Pigafetta, Filippo; Lopes, Duarte. 1597. A report of the Kingdom of Kongo, a region of Africa, and
of the countries that border rounde about the same [...] drawen out of the writings and
discourses of Odoardo Lopez, a Portingall. Translated out of Italian by Abraham Hartwell.
London: Iohn Wolfe. Pp 22, 217, plates.
Pigafetta, Filippo; Lopes, Duarte. 1598. Regnum Congo, hoc est, Vera descriptio regni Africani:
quod tam ab incolis quam Lusitanis Congus appellatur. Nunc Latio sermone donata ab
August. Cassiod. Reinio. iconibus et imaginibus, etc. Francofurti: Wolffgangi Richteri. Pp
60.
Pigafetta, Filippo; Lopes, Duarte. 1658. De beschryvinghe vant [...] Coninckrijk van Congo.
Overgheset deur M. Everart. Amsterdam.
Pigafetta, Filippo; Lopes, Duarte. 1881. A report of the Kingdom of Kongo, and surrounding
countries: drawn out of the writings and discourses of the Portuguese Lopez. Newly
translated from the Italian, and edited with explanatory notes, by Margarite Hutchinson, and a
preface by Sir Thomas Fowell Buxton. London: John Murray. Pp xxi, 174.
Pigafetta, Filippo; Lopes, Duarte. 1883. Le Congo: la véridique description du royaume africain,
appelé, tant par les indigènes que par les portugais, le congo, telle qu’elle a été tirée
récemment des explorations d’Edouard Lopez. Traduite par Léon Cahun. Bruxelles: J.J.
Gay. Pp 213.
Pigafetta, Filippo; Lopes, Duarte. 1963. Description du royaume de Congo et des contrées
environnantes. Traduite de l’italien et annotée par Willy Bal. Publications de l’Université de
Léopoldville, #12. Louvain & Paris. Pp xxxvi, 249.
Pigafetta, Filippo; Lopes, Duarte. 1965. Description du royaume de Congo et des contrées
environnantes. Traduite de l’italien et annotée par Willy Bal; deuxième édition, revue.
Publications de l’Université de Léopoldville, #12. Louvain & Paris. Pp xxxvii, 253.
Pigafetta, Filippo; Lopes, Duarte. 1992. Beschrijving van het Koninkrijk Kongo en van de
omliggende gebieden. Vertaling en annotaties van W.F.G. Lacroix. Eburon.
Pococke, Richard. 1743/45. A description of the East, and some other countries, 2 vols. London:
W. Bowyer for the author.
Travels in Egypt and the Middle East.
Poiret, Jean Louise Marie [Abbé]. 1789. Voyage au Barbarie, ou lettres écrites de l’ancienne
Numidie pendant les années 1785 & 1786, sur la religion, les coutumes et les moeurs des
maures et des arabes-bedouins; avec un essai sur l’histoire naturelle de ce pays, 2 vols.
Paris: Rochelle.
Poiret, Jean Louise Marie [Abbé]. 1791. Travels through Barbary, in a series of letters, written
from the ancient Numidia, in the years 1785 and 1786, and containing an account of the
customs and manners of the Moors, and Bedouin Arabs. Abridged and translated from the
French. London: C. Forster. Pp xxxi, 336.
Poiret, Jean Louise Marie [Abbé]. 1792. Bref om Numidien = Letters on Numidia. I sammandrag
af Samuel Ödmann. Stockholm.
Poivre, Pierre. 1768. Voyages d’un philosophe: observations sur les moeurs et les arts des
peuples de l’Afrique, de l’Asie et de l’Amerique. Yverdun (France). Pp 142.
Poivre, Pierre. 1769. Travels of a philisopher: observations on the manner and arts of various
nations in Africa and Asia. Translated from the French. London: T. Becket & Co. Pp vi, 191.
Poncet, Charles Jacques. 1709. A voyage to Aethiopia made in the years 1698, 1699, and 1700;
describing particularly that famous empire, likewise the kingdoms of Dongola, Sennar, part
of Egypt, etc.; with the natural history of those parts. Faithfully translated from the French
original. London: W. Lewis. Pp 138.
Poncet, Charles Jacques. 1728. Nachrichten aus Aegypten, Nubien, Aethiopien oder Abyssina.
Details wanting.
Prévost, Antoine François [Abbé]. 1744. Voyages du Capitaine Robert Lade en differentes parties
de l’Afrique, de l’Asie et de l’Amerique; contenant l’histoire de sa fortune, et ses
observations sur les colonies et le commerce des espagnols, des anglois, des hollandois,
etc., 2 vols. Traduit de l’anglois. Paris: Didot.
Sometimes credited to Robert Lade, who apparently did not write this.
77
Prévost, Antoine François [Abbé]. 1746/70. Histoire générale des voyages: nouvelle collection des
toutes les relations de voyages par mer et par terre qui ont été publiées jusqu’à present
dans les différences langues de toutes les nations connues, 19 vols. Paris: Didot.
Says Homburger (1925:168): “recueil de mots du Congo et de l’Angola relevés dans les livres de voyagers”.
Prévost, Antoine François [Abbé]. 1751/59. Allgemeine Historie der Reisen zu Wasser und zu
Lande, oder Sammlung aller Reisebeschreibungen, welche bis itzo in verschiedenen
Sprachen von allen Völkern herausgegeben worden und einen vollständigen Begriff von der
neuern Erdbeschreibung und Geschichte machen, worinnen der wirkliche Zustand aller
Nationen vorgestellet und das Merkwürdigste, Nützlichste und Wahrhaftigste in Europa,
Asia, Africa und America [...] und anderer dergleichen Merkwürdigkeiten versehen. Durch
eine Gesellschaft gelehrter Männer im Englischen zusammen getragen, und aus demselben
und dem Französischen ins Deutsche übersetzt. Leipzig: Bey Arkstee und Merkus.
There are many volumes to this, many of which appeared during the 1750s. One of them includes a Congo
vocabulary (Latham 1847:190).
Protten, Chrishan. 1764. En nyttig grammaticalsk indledelse til tvende hidindtil gandske ubekiendte
sprog, fanteisk og acraisk (paa Guld-Küsten udi Guinea), efter den danske pronunciation
og udtale. Kjöbenhavn: Goldtmann Friedrich Kisel. Pp 63.
Fante grammar written in Danish (Hintze 1959:36).
Peripherals: M.E. Kropp Dakubu, “Notes on the linguistic situation on the coast of Ghana during the nineteenth
century”, Research review from the Institute of African Studies, University of Ghana, new series, v. 1 (1985) p.
192-202.
Protten, Chrishan. 1971. Introduction to the Fante and Accra (Gã) languages. Second edition,
corrected. London: Afro-Press. Pp 69.
Is this a translation?
Proyart, Liévain Bonaventure [Abbé]. 1776. Histoire de Loango, Kakongo et autres royaumes
d’Afrique: rédigée d’après les mémoires des préfets apostoliques de la mission française,
enrichie d’une carte utile aux navigateurs. Paris & Lyon: C.P. Berton & N. Crapart;
Bruyset-Ponthus. Pp viij, 390.
Includes a section “La langue du Royaume de Kakongo”, which contains the first known suggestion of a common
parent language for Bantu.
URL: books.google.se/books?id=zi8QAAAAYAAJ
Proyart, Liévain Bonaventure [Abbé]. 1776. History of Loango, Kakongo, and other African
kingdoms. Translated from French.
Details wanting. Date could be wrong.
Peripherals: C.M. Doke, “The early literature: the age of Brusciotto”, African studies, v. 18 (1959) p. 61-62; C.M.
Doke, “The growth of comparative Bantu philology (revised)”, African studies, v. 19 (1960) p. 193-218.
Proyart, Liévain Bonaventure [Abbé]. 1780. Rese-beskrifning, innehållande märkwärdiga
underrättelser om Loango, Kakongo och flere afrikanska riken = Travel-description,
containing remarkable news about Loango, Kakongo and several African kingdoms.
Öfwersatt ifrån fransyskan. Stockholm: Holmberg & Wennberg. Pp 256, map.
Swedish translation.
Pruneau de Pommegorge, Antoine Edmé. 1789. Description de la Nigritie. Amsterdam: Maradan.
Pp viii, 284.
Prutky, Vaclav Remedius. 1753. Vocabularium linguae gallicae, arabicae et abyssiniacae.
Unpublished vocabulary of Amharic, by an early Czech traveller (Zahorik 2006).
Peripherals: Jan Zahorik, “African studies in the Czech Republic: from the early Czech-African contacts until the
21st century”, Afrikanistik Online, art.596 (2006).
Prutky, Vaclav Remedius. 1991. Prutky’s travels to Ethiopia and other countries. Translated from
the Latin and published by J.H. Arrowsmith-Brown. London: The Hakluyt Society.
Purchas, Samuel. 1625. Hakluytus posthumus: Purchas his pilgrimes, contayning a history of the
world in sea voyages and land travells, by Englishmen & others, 4 vols. London: William
Stansby for Henrie Fetherstone.
This “provided the English reader with a very full list of the African peoples living along the Upper Guinea coast ...
The list was taken from the French translation of a Portuguese collection of Jesuit letters, published 1603-11 [cfr
Guerreiro 1603/11] ... the Jesuits appear to have obtained much of their own detailed information from a Portuguese
78
manuscript source, the lengthy account of the Rivers of Guinea by Alvares d’Almada” (Hair 1967:32). There are
apparently several editions of this. A reprint in 20 vols dated 1905-1907 was published by MacLehose & Sons in
Glasgow (Hakluyt Society, extra series, #14-30).
URL: www.archive.org/details/purchashispilgri00purc
Peripherals: P.E.H. Hair, “Material on Africa (other than in the Mediterranean and Red Sea lands) and on the Atlantic
islands in the publications of Samuel Purchas, 1613-1626”, History in Africa, v. 13 (1986) p. 117-159.
Rainolds, Richard; Dassel, Thomas. 1824. Voyage of Richard Rainolds and Thomas Dassel to the
Rivers Senegal and Gambia adjoining to Guinea, in 1591. In: A general history and
collection of voyages and travels, v. 7, p. (?). Ed. by Robert Kerr. Edinburgh: William
Blackwood.
Rainolds, Richard; Dassel, Thomas. 1890. The voyage of Richard Rainolds and Thomas Dassel to
Guinea. In: The principal navigations, voyages, traffiques & discoveries of the English
Ramusio, Giovanni Battista. (Ed.) 1550. Delle navigationi et viaggi, v. 1. Venezia: Luca-Antonio
Giunti.
A collection of travel descriptions. There’s at least one copy is available at the Brith Library. The entire collection
spans over three volumes. The first deals with Africa (publ. 1550), the second with Asia (publ. 1559), and the third
with the Americas (pub. 1556). Several subsequent editions exist. Not sure how much the contents changed from
one edition to another. The 1606 edition was reprinted 1970 by Teatrum Orbis Terrarum in Amsterdam.
Peripherals: George B. Parks, “Ramusio’s literary history”, Studies in philology, v. 52 (1955) p. 127-148; Jerome
Randall Barnes, Giovanni Battista Ramuso and the history of discoveries (dissertation, University of Texas at
Arlington, 2007).
Ramusio, Giovanni Battista. (Ed.) 1606. Delle navigationi et viaggi, v. 1. Venezia: Luca-Antonio
Giunti.
A total of 3 vols, the first of which deals with Africa. It may or may not be a mere reprint of the 1550 edition.
Reprinted 1970 by Teatrum Orbis Terrarum in Amsterdam.
Peripherals: George B. Parks, “The contents and sources of Ramusio’s Navigationi”, Delle navigationi et viaggi
(reprint of 1606 ed., Teatrum Orbis Terrarum, 1970).
Ramusio, Giovanni Battista. (Ed.) 1978. Navigazioni e viaggi, 1: la descrizione dell’Africa.
Traduzione de Marica Milanesi. Torino: G. Einaudi.
Modern Italian translation.
Rask, Johannes. 1754. En kort og sandferdig rejse-beskrivelse til of fra Guinea = A short and
truthful travel description to and from Guinea. Tronhjem: Jens Christensen Winding. Pp 58,
320, 48.
The book was written from notes after he had returned from Africa. “He covers a good deal of ground on the Akwamu
and Ga peoples, customs, nature, with the text constantly punctuated by yet another European death and funeral.
Rask had almost nothing good to say about Africans” (Winsnes 2001:52). The book “was published posthumously
in Trondheim and contained a long preace by Frederick Nannestad, Bishop of Trondheim” (Winsnes 2001:52). It
was subsequently translated into New Norwegian as Ferd til og frå Guinea (183 pp), publ. 1969 by Fonna in Oslo.
Ratelband, Klaas. 1942. De expeditie van Jol naar São Thomé, 30 Mei 1641 - 31 October 1641. De
west-indische gids, v. 24, p. (?).
Reprinted 1943 as a small booklet (24 pp) by Martinus Nijhoff at ’s-Gravenhage.
Ratelband, Klaas. 1950. Reizen naar West-Afrika van Pieter van den Broecke 1604-1614. Werken
uitgegeven door de Linschoten-Vereeniging, #52. ’s-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff. Pp cvi,
124.
Ratelband, Klaas. (Ed.) 1953. Vijf dagregisters van het kasteel São Jorge da Mina (Elmina) aan
de Goudkust, 1645-1647: dagregister lopende van 19 Januari 1645 tot 26 Mei 1645, van 27
Mei 1645 tot 22 April 1646 door Jakob Ruychaver; dagregister lopende van 11 October
1645 tot 21 December 1645, van 2 April 1646 tot 31 Mei 1646, dagregister en
scheepsjournaal lopende van 1 Juni 1646 tot 18 Maart 1647 door Jacob van der Wel.
Werken uitgegeven door de Linschoten-Vereeniging, #55. ’s-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff.
Pp cx, 439.
Ratelband, Klaas. 1961. De westafrikaanse reis van Piet Heyn 1624-1625. Werken uitgegeven
door de Linschoten-Vereeniging, #61. ’s-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff. Pp cv, 79.
Raven-Hart, Rowland. (Ed.) 1967. Before Van Riebeeck: callers at South Africa from 1488 to
1652. Cape Town: Cornelis Struik Publ.
79
Includes 153 original (Portuguese) documents, some translated.
Raven-Hart, Rowland. (Ed.) 1971. Cape of Good Hope, 1652-1702: the first 50 years of Dutch
colonisation as seen by callers. Cape Town.
Ravius, Christian. 1648. A generall grammer for the Hbrew, Samaritan, Calde, Syriac, Arabic
and Ethiopic tongue. London: J.Y. for G. Adderton. Pp 35.
Not sure about the pagination. Includes the first known English introduction to Arabic and Semitic. This is often
found bound together with A discourse of the Oriental languages (1649).
Ravius, Christian. 1649. A discourse of the Oriental languages, viz. Ebrew, Samaritan, Calde,
Syriac, Arabic and Ethiopic tongue. London: W. Wilson for T. Jackson. Pp 243.
Not sure about the pagination. This is often found bound together with A generall grammer (1648).
Ravius, Christian. 1650. A generall grammer for the ready attaining of the Ebrew, Samaritan,
Calde, Syriac, Arabic and Ethiopic languages; also a sesquidecury, or a number of fifteene
adoptive epistles sent together out of divers parts of the world concerning care of the
orientall tongues to be promoted. London: W. Wilson for T. Slater and T. Jackson. Pp 243,
35, plates.
Combines A generall grammer (1648) and A discourse of the Oriental languages (1649).
Reenen, Willem van. 1792. Journaal gehouden op de landtochd [...] van Cabo de Goede Hoop naar
de Groote Rivier, noordoosten aan de Groote Rivier, noorden aan tot aan de Rhenius Bergh
bij de natie genaamd Damras, begonnen de 17den September 1791 en volvoerd den 20sten
Junij 1792.
Early description of the Cape. Not sure about the title. First published 1916 in Reizen in Zuid-Afrika in de hollandse
tijd, v. 2, edited by E.C. Godée-Molsbergen (published by Martinus Nijhoff); and reprinted 1935 by the Van
Riebeek Society, Cape Town.
Reenen, Willem van. 1793. Journal d’un voyage dans l’intérieur de l’Afrique. Paris.
Possibly a translation from the Dutch original. Not sure about the date.
Reenen, Willem van. 1935. Journaal gehouden op de landtochd [...] van Cabo de Goede Hoop naar
de Groote Rivier, noordoosten aan de Groote Rivier, noorden aan tot aan de Rhenius Bergh
bij de natie genaamd Damras, begonnen de 17den September 1791 en volvoerd den 20sten
Junij 1792 / Journal kept on the inland journey [...] from Cabo de Goede Hoop to the Groote
Rivier, North-eastward of the Groote Rivier and north to the Rhenius Bergh and the nation
called Damras, etc. In: The journal of Hendrik Jacob Wikar (1779) and the journals of
Jacobus Coetzé Jansz (1766) and Willem van Reenen (1791), p. 292-323. Ed. by E.E.
Mossop. Publications from the Van Riebeeck Society, #15. Cape Town.
Reis, Pirus (Hadji Muhiddin Piri ibn Hadji Mehmed). 1521. Kitab-i bahriye = Book of navigation.
Includes maps of the North African coast, from Egypt to Morocco.
Reis, Pirus (Hadji Muhiddin Piri ibn Hadji Mehmed). 1525. Kitab-i bahriye = Book of navigation.
Revised edition.
Second edition containing c.300 maps.
Rezende, P.B. 1947. Rezende’s description of East Africa in 1634 [edited and published by Sir
John Gray]. Tanganyika notes and records, v. 23, p. 2-29.
Rhenius, Johannes Tobias. 1724. Dagh register.
Early description of the Cape. Properly published 1947 with an English translation by E.E. Mossop (Van Riebeek
Society, Cape Town).
Rhenius, Johannes Tobias. 1947. ... [with an English translation by E.E. Mossop]. In: The
journals of Brink and Rhenius, being the journal of Carel Frederik Brink of the journey into
Great Namaqualand, 1761-1762, made by Captain Hendrik Hop, and the journal of Ensign
Johannes Tobias Rhenius, 1724, p. (?). Ed. by E.E. Mossop. Publications from the Van
Riebeeck Society, #28. Cape Town.
Title wanting.
Rhyne, Willem Ten. 1686. Schediasma de promontoria bonae spei: ejusve tractus incolis
Hottentotis. Schaffhausen (Switzerland): Meister. Pp 76.
Peripherals: Hans van den Besten, “Deciphering three Pidgin Dutch statements concerning religion recorded by
Muller, Ten Rhyme, and Bövingh”, Quaterly bulletin of the National Library of South Africa, v. 57 (2003) p. 149155.
80
Rhyne, Willem Ten. 1686/1933. Gentis hottentotten nuncupatae descriptio / An account of the
Hottentots [English translation by B. Farrington]. In: The early Cape Hottentots, p. 84-157.
Ed. by Isaac Schapera. Publications from the Van Riebeeck Society, #14. Cape Town.
Includes extracts and translations from Rhyne’s Schediasma de promontoria bonae spei.
Rhyne, Willem Ten. 1704. An account of the Cape of Good Hope and the Hottentots [translated
from Latin by Awnsham and John Churchill]. In: Collection of voyages and travels, v. 4, p.
829-845. Ed. by Awnsham Churchill. London: Churchill.
Strohmeyer & Moritz (1975:22) date this 1732. Further editions seem to be dated 1744 and 1752. The Latin
original of 1686 bore the title Schediasma de promontoria bonae spei: ejusve tractus incolis Hottentotis.
Rhyne, Willem Ten. 1716. Schediasma de promontoria bonae spei: ejusve tractus incolis
Hottentotis. Zweite Ausgabe. Basel.
Roberts, Henry. 1824. Embassy of Henry Roberts from Queen Elizabeth to Morocco, in 1585. In:
A general history and collection of voyages and travels, v. 7, p. (?). Ed. by Robert Kerr.
Edinburgh: William Blackwood.
Robinson, A.M. Lewin; Selicks, P.W.N. (Ed.) 1973. François le Vaillant, traveller in South Africa
and his collection of one hundred and sixty-five water-colour paintings 1781-1784, 2 vols.
Cape Town: Library of Parliament (South Africa). Pp xx, 172, xx, 172 plates; xiv, 181, iv, 95
plates.
Römer, Ludevig Ferdinand. 1760. Tilforladelig efterretning om kysten Guinea = A reliable
account about the Guinea Coast. Kiøbenhavn.
The book “is rich in detail--and fantasy. He tells a great deal about the history of the peoples around Accra, and is an
excellent source of oral history” (Winsnes 2001:52).
Peripherals: Selena Axelrod Winsnes, “An eye-witness, hearsay, hands-on report from the Gold Coast”, Encounter
images in the meetings between Africa and Europe (ed. by Mai Palmberg, 2001) p. 37-53.
Römer, Ludevig Ferdinand. 1769. Nachrichten von der Küste Guinea. Mit einer Vorrede von Erich
Pontoppidan; aus dem dänischen übersetzt. Kopenhagen & Leipzig: Friederich Christian
Pelt. Pp 22, 304.
Römer, Ludevig Ferdinand. 1989. Le golfe du Guinée. Traduit par Mette Dige-Hess. Paris:
L’Harmattan.
Römer, Ludevig Ferdinand. 2000. A reliable account of the coast of Guinea (1760). Translated
from the Danish and editedby Selena Axelrod Winsnes. Fontes historiae africanae, new
series, #3. Oxford: Oxford University Press for the British Academy. Pp xxx, 290. ISBN-10
0-19-726218-X.
Ross, Robert J. 1986. The Dutch on the Swahili coast, 1776-1778: two slaving journals.
International journal of African historical studies, v. 19, p. 305-360, 479-506.
Includes English translations of the journals of “two slaving voyages made by ships of the Dutch East India
Company (VOC) from the Cape of Good Hope to Zanzibar ... the two journals provide a great deal of information
over and above that concerning the slave trade itself” (p305). See Holtzappel (1777) and Onkruidjt (1778).
Ruiters, Dietrick. 1623. Toortse der zeevaart: om te beseylen de custen gheleghen bezuyden den
tropicus cancri, als Brasilien, West-Indien, Guinea en Angola. Vlissingen: Maarten
Abramsz van der Nolk.
Peripherals: Paul E.H. Hair, “Sources on early Sierra Leone, 2: Andrade 1582, Ruiters 1623, Carvalho 1634”,
Africana research bulletin, v. 5,1 (1974) p. 47-56; Paul E.H. Hair, “Sources on early Sierra Leone, 4: Ruiters 1623”,
Africana research bulletin, v. 5,3 (1974) p. 52-72.
Ruiters, Dietrick. 1913. Toortse der zeevaart (1623). In: Toortse der zeevaart / Samuel Brun’s
Schiffahrten, p. (?). Ed. by Samuel P. Naber. Werken uitgegeven door de LinschotenVereeniging, #6. ’s-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff.
Rutter, William. 1824. Voyage to Guinea in 1562 [with a supplement]. In: A general history and
Blackwood.
Rutter, William. 1890. The relation of William Rutter to Anthony Hickman touching a voyage to
Guinea, 1562. In: The principal navigations, voyages, traffiques & discoveries of the English
81
Saar, Johann Jacob. 1662. Ost-indianische fünfzenhen-jährige Kriegs-Dienste, und wahrhafftige
Beschreibung, was sich Zeit solcher fünfzehen Jahr, von Anno Christi 1644 biss Anno
Christi 1659 zur See, und zu Land [...]. Nürnberg: Verlag von Johann Daniel Tauber.
Peripherals: Rowland Raven-Hart, “Johan Jacob Saar’s fifteen year’s military service 1662”, Quarterly bulletin of
the South African Library, v. 20 (1965) p. 10-19.
Saar, Johann Jacob. 1671. De reisbeschryving van J.J. Saar naar oostindien in de hogduitse taal
beschreven. Uit duits vertaalt van J.H. Glazemaker. Amsterdam.
Saar, Johann Jacob. 1672. Ost-indianische fünfzenhen-jährige Kriegs-Dienste, und wahrhafftige
Beschreibung, was sich Zeit solcher fünfzehen Jahr, von Anno Christi 1644 biss Anno
Christi 1659 zur See, und zu Land [...]. Zweite Ausgabe mit vielen denckwürdigen Notisen
oder Anmerckungen, wie auch Kupfferstücken vermehret und gezieret, von Daniel Wülfern.
Nürnberg: Verlag von Johann Daniel Tauber.
Reprinted 1930 as Reise nach Java, Banda, Ceylon und Persien 1644-1660 by Martinus Nijhoff in Der Haag.
Saar, Johann Jacob. 1672/1930. Reise nach Java, Banda, Ceylon und Persien 1644-1660. Zweite
Ausgabe mit vielen denckwürdigen Notisen oder Anmerckungen von Daniel Wülfern.
Reisebeschreibungen von deutschen Beamten und Krigsleuten, #6. Der Haag: Martinus
Nijhoff. Pp xv, 195.
The first edition appeared 1672, as Ost-indianische fünfzenhen-jährige Kriegs-Dienste, und wahrhafftige
Beschreibung.
Saint-Lô, Alexis de. 1637. Relation du voyage du Cap-Verd. Paris: D. Ferrand. Pp 212.
Saint-Pierre, J.H. Bernardin de. 1773. Voyage à l’Isle de France, à l’Isle de Bourbon, au Cap de
Bonne-Espérance, &c., avec des observations nouvelles sur la nature et sur les hommes, 2
vols. Par un officier du roi. Amsterdam & Paris: Merlin.
Includes some sort of account of the “Hottentots” and the Dutch at the Cape of Good Hope. Reprinted 1983 by
Maspero in Paris (ISBN-10 2-7071-1406-5).
Saint-Pierre, J.H. Bernardin de. 1775. A voyage to the Island of Mauritius (or, Isle of France), the
Isle of Bourbon, the Cape of Good-Hope, &c., with observations and reflections upon
nature, and mankind. By a French officer, translated from the French by John Parish.
London: W. Griffin. Pp 12, 291.
There’s another English edition dated 1800, which could be a reprint.
URL: www.archive.org/details/voyagetoisleofma00sainiala
Sandoval, P. Alonso de. 1627. De instauranda aethiopum salute, 1: historia de Aethiopia,
naturaleça, policia, sagrada y profana, costumbres, ritos, y cathecismo Evangelicos, de
todos los Aethiopes. Madrid: A. de Paredes. Pp 520.
Not sure if there were any further volumes. Includes mentions of several peoples and languages, as well as
something on early Portuguese-based African and American creoles. Reprinted 1956 in Bogotá (Biblioteca de la
Presidencia de Colombia, #22).
(1967) p. 247-269; P.E.H. Hair, “An ethnolinguistic inventory of the Lower Guinea coast before 1700 (pt. 2)”,
African language review, v. 8 (1969) p. 225-236; German de Granda, Un temprano testimonio sobre las hablas
‘criollas’ en Africa y America (Instituto Caro y Cuervo, Bogotá, 1970); Paul E.H. Hair, “Sources on early Sierra
Leone, 3: Sandoval 1623”, Africana research bulletin, v. 5,2 (1975) p. 78-92.
Sandoval, P. Alonso de. 1987. Un tratato sobre la esclavitud. Introducción, transcripción y
traducción de Enriqueta Vila Vilar. Madrid: Alianza Editorial. Pp 614. ISBN-10 84-2062508-6.
Spanish translation of De instauranda aethiopum salute.
Sandys, Edwin. 1615. A relation of a journey begun An: Dom: 1610: foure bookes, containing a
description of the Turkish Empire, of AEgypt, of the Holy Land, of the remote parts of Italy,
and Ilands adioyning. London: W. Barrett. Pp 310.
Early European travelogue.
Sandys, Edwin. 1627. A relation of a journey begun An: Dom: 1610: fovre bookes, containing a
description of the Turkish Empire, of AEgypt, of the Holy Land, of the remote parts of Italy,
and Ilands adioyning. Third edition. London: Ro Allot. Pp 4, 309.
Santos, João dos. 1609. Ethiopia oriental e varia historia de cousas notaveis do oriente, 2 vols.
Evora (Portugal): Manoel de Lyra.
82
Includes a handful Shona words (Doke 1960:30). Reprinted several times, e.g. 1891 by Escriptorio da Empreza in
Lisbon; and 1998 by Asian Educational Services in New Delhi (ISBN-10 81-206-1326-0); and 1999 by Comissão
Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses in Lisbon (ISBN-10 972-8325-76-2).
Santos, João dos. 1684. Histoire de l’Ethiopie orientale. Traduite en françois par le R.P. Dom
Gaetan Charpy. Paris.
Santos, João dos. 1808. History of eastern Ethiopia [translated from the Portuguese]. In: A general
collection of the best and most interesting voyages and travels in all parts of the world, v. 16,
p. (?). Ed. by John Pinkerton. London.
Santos, João dos. 1999. Etiópia oriental e vária história de cousas notáveis do oriente. Introdução
de Manuel Lobato; con notas de Manuel Lobato e Eduardo Medeiros. Lisboa:
Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses. Pp 759. ISBN-10 972-8325-76-2.
Annotated reprint.
Saugnier, [?]. 1791. Relations de plusiers voyages a la cote de l’Afrique, a Maroc, au Senegal, a
Goree, a Galam, etc.; avec de details interessans pour ceux qui se destinent a la Traite des
Nègres, de l’Or, de l’Ivoire, etc. Paris: Gueffier Jeune. Pp viii, 341.
URL: books.google.se/books?id=DvwOAAAAQAAJ
Saugnier, [?]. 1792. ... [translated from the French]. In: Voyages to the coast of Africa, by Mess.
Saugnier and Brisson, containing an account of their shipwreck on board different vessels,
and subsequent slavery and interesting details of the manners of the Arabs of the desert,
and of the slave trade as carried on at Senegal and Galam, p. (?). London: G.G.J. & J.
Robinson.
Title wanting.
Schapera, Isaac. (Ed.) 1933. The early Cape Hottentots, described in the writings of Olfert Dapper
(1676) and Willen ten Rhyne (1668) and Johannes Gulielmus de Grevensbroek (1695). The
original texts, with translations into English. Publications from the Van Riebeeck Society,
#14. Cape Town. Pp 299.
Contains three early texts on the “Cape Hottentots” by Dapper, Rhyne and Graevenbroek.
Peripherals: A. W[erner], Man, v. 34 (1934) p. 94-95 (art. 119).
Schebesta, Paul Joachim. 1919/20. Eine Bantugrammatik aus dem 17. Jahrhundert, ‘Arte da lingua
de Cafre’: ein sprachliches Dokument aus einer Bibliothek Lissabons, mit einer Introduktion
von A. Drexel. Anthropos: internationale Zeitschrift für Völker- und Sprachenkunde, v.
14/15, p. 764-787.
An annotated reprint of an anonymous Portuguese manuscript, comprising a grammar of Sena N44, which Schebesta
had found at the Bibliotheca Nacional d’Ajuda in Lisbon.
Schleicher, Adolf Walter. 1601/1893. Zenahu al-Galla / Geschichte der Galla: Bericht eines
abessinischen Mönches über die Invasion der Galla im sechzehnten Jahrhundert. Übersetzt
von amharischen. Berlin: Verlag von Theodor Fröhlich. Pp 42.
Parallel texts in Amharic and German.
Schneider, J.H. (Ed.) 1778. Nieuwste en beknopte beschryving van de Kaap der Goede-Hoop.
Amsterdam.
An anthology including accounts of various expeditions into the interior of South Africa.
Schouten, Willem Corneliszoon. 1618. Iournal ou description du merveilleux voyage de
Guilliaume Schouten, Hollandois natif de Hoorn: fait es années 1615, 1616 & 1617, comme
(en circumnavigeant le globe terrestre) il a descouvert vers le zud du destroit de Magellan
un nouveau passage, jusques à la grand mer de Zud. Amsterdam: Guillaume Ianson. Pp 88,
plates.
Schouten made a round-the-world journey during which he apparently made a stop in West Africa.
Peripherals: Paul E.H. Hair, “Sources on early Sierra Leone, 10: Schouten and Le Maire, 1615”, Africana research
bulletin, v. 7,2 (1977) p. 56-75.
Schouten, Willem Corneliszoon. 1619. Diarium vel descriptio laboriosissimi, & molestissimi
itineris, facti à Guilielmo Cornelii Schoutenio Hornano, annis 1615, 1616, & 1617.
Amsterdami: Petrum Kaerium. Pp 79, plates.
Latin translation.
83
Schouten, Willem Corneliszoon. 1619. The relation of a wonderfull voiage made by William
Cornelison Schouten of Horne: shewing how south from the Straights of Magelan, in Terra
Del-fuogo, he found and discouered a newe passage through the great South Sea, and that
way sayled round about the world; describing what islands, countries, people, and strange
aduentures he found in his saide passage. Translated by William Phillip. London: Thomas
Dawson for Nathanaell Newbery. Pp 82.
Schreyer, Johann. 1679. Neue Ost-Indianische Reiss-Beschreibung von Anno 1669 biss 1677.
Details wanting. Unsure of the exact title.
Peripherals: Hans Plischke, “Johann Schreyers Hottentotten-Beschreibung aus dem Jahre 1679”, Afrikanistische
Studien 5 (ed. by Johannes Lukas, 1955) p. 57-63; Rowland Raven-Hart, “Johan Schreijer’s description of the
Hottentots, 1679”, Quarterly bulletin of the South African Library, v. 19 (1964/65) p. 56-69, 88-101.
Schreyer, Johann. 1681. Neue Ost-Indianische Reiss-Beschreibung, von Anno 1669 biss 1677,
handelnde von unterschiedenen afrikanischen und barbarischen Völckern, sonderlich derer
an dem Vor-Gebürge, Caput boane spei sich enthaltenden so genanten Hottentoten LebensArt, Kleidung, Hausshaltung, Ehestand, Kinder-Zucht, Aber-Glauben, Leibes-Übung,
Kriegs-Rüstung, Tantzen, Handel und Gewerbe, Wohnungen, Tod und Begräbniss. Zweite
Ausgabe. Leipzig: Wohlfart.
Reprinted 1931 as Reise nach dem Kaplande und Beschreibung der Hottentotten, 1669-1677 by Martinus Nijhoff in
Der Haag.
Schreyer, Johann. 1681/1931. Reise nach dem Kaplande und Beschreibung der Hottentotten,
1669-1677. Zweite Ausgabe. Reisebeschreibungen von deutschen Beamten und Krigsleuten,
#7:2. Der Haag: Martinus Nijhoff. Pp iv, 68.
Originally published 1681 as Neue Ost-Indianische Reiss-Beschreibung von Anno 1669 biss 1677.
Schrijver, Isaq. 1689. ... [Title wanting].
Contains early notes on the Cape Khoekhoe. Reprinted 1931, with an English translation, by E.E. Mossop
(published by the Van Riebeek Society, Cape Town).
Schrijver, Isaq. 1931. Schrijver’s journal: the diary of an inland expedition made in the Cape
Province in the year 1689 [Original Dutch text with an English translation by E.E. Mossop].
In: Joernale van die landtogte van die edele vaandrig Olof Bergh (1682 en 1683) en die
vaandrig Isaq Schrijver (1689) / The journals of the expeditions of the honorable ensign
Olof Bergh (1682 and 1983) and the ensign Isaq Schrijver (1689), p. 193-259. Ed. by E.E.
Mossop. Publications from the Van Riebeeck Society, #12. Cape Town.
Not sure about the title.
Schweitzer, Christoph. 1688. Journal und Tage-Buch seiner sechsjährigen ost-indianischen Reise,
angefangen den 1. Decemb. Anno 1675 und vollendet den 2. Septemb. Anno 1682.
Tübingen: Cotta.
Contains notes on the Khoekhoe (p. 15-17). Reprinted 1931 as Reise nach Java und Ceylon, 1675-1682 by
Martinus Nijhoff in Der Haag.
Peripherals: Rowland Raven-Hart, “Journal and diary by Christopherus Schweitzer”, Quarterly bulletin of the South
African Library, v. 20 (1966) p. 84-89.
Schweitzer, Christoph. 1688/1931. Reise nach Java und Ceylon, 1675-1682. Reisebeschreibungen
von deutschen Beamten und Krigsleuten, #11. Der Haag: Martinus Nijhoff. Pp ix, 148.
Originally published 1688 as Journal und Tage-Buch seiner sechsjährigen ost-indianischen Reise.
Shaw, Thomas. 1738. Travels, or observations relating to several parts of Barbary and the
Levant. With a collection of such papers as serve to illustrate the foregoing observations with
separate half-title, pagination and register. Oxford: The Theatre. Pp xv, 442; 60.
Levant. Second edition, with great improvements. London: A. Millar. Pp xviii, 512.
Levant, 2 vols. Third edition, corrected, with some account of the author. Edinburgh: A.
Johnstone.
Shaw, Thomas. 1965. Reisen oder Anmerkungen verschiedene Theile des Barbarey und der
Levante betreffend. Nach der zweyten engländischen Ausgabe ins Deutsche übersetzt und
mit vielen Landcharten und andern Kupfern erläutert. Leipzig. Pp 424.
Silva Rego, A. da; Baxter, Paul T. William. (Ed.) 1962/64. Documents on the Portuguese in
Mozambique and Central Africa, 1497-1840 / Documentos sobre os portugueses em
84
Moçambique e na Africa central, 1497-1840, v. 1-3. Lisboa: Centro de Estudos Históricos
Ultramarinos; National Archives of Rhodesia and Nyasaland. Pp xxxv, 832; xxix, 612; xxvii,
662.
Includes Portuguese texts with English translations. Covers the years 1497-1506 (v1), 1507-1510 (v2), and 15111514 (v3).
Peripherals: D.N. Beach, “Publishing the past: progress in the ‘Documents on the Portuguese’ series”, Zambezia, v.
17 (1990) p. 175-183.
Silva Rego, A. da; Baxter, Paul T. William. (Ed.) 1965/75. Documents on the Portuguese in
Mozambique and Central Africa, 1497-1840 / Documentos sobre os portugueses em
Moçambique e na Africa central, 1497-1840, v. 4-8. Lisboa: Centro de Estudos Históricos
Ultramarinos; National Archives of Rhodesia. Pp xiii, 604; xxi, 623; xii, 510; xv, 580; xix,
613.
Covers the years 1515-1516 (v4), 1517-1518 (v5), 1519-1537 (v6), 1540-1560 (v7), 1561-1588 (v8). A ninth
volume was later edited by Luis de Albuquerque (1989).
Peripherals: D.N. Beach, “Publishing the past: progress in the ‘Documents on the Portuguese’ series”, Zambezia, v.
17 (1990) p. 175-183.
Silveira, Gonçalo da. 1560/1899. Letter to the Fathers and Brothers of the College at Goa, dated
August 9, 1560. In: Records of South-Eastern Africa, collected in various libraries and
archive deposits in Europe, v. 2, p. 93. Ed. by George McCall Theal. London: William
Clowes & Sons for the Government of the Cape Colony.
Written from Mozambique. “Records the name of God as Umbe” (Doke 1960:29).
Silveira, Gonçalo da. 1561/1899. Account of the voyage of Father Dom Gonçalo to the kingdom
of Monomotapa and of his happy passing away. In: Records of South-Eastern Africa,
collected in various libraries and archive deposits in Europe, v. 2, p. 116ff. Ed. by George
McCall Theal. London: William Clowes & Sons for the Government of the Cape Colony.
Includes several lexical specimens of what may be early Shona.
Smith, William. 1751. Nouveau voyage de Guinée. Traduit de l’anglais. Paris: Laurent Durand;
Noel-Jacques Pissot. Pp x, 258.
No data on the English original.
Smith, William. 1785. Voyages to the Gold Coast. London.
Snelgrave, William. 1734. A new account of some parts of Guinea and the slave-trade. London:
John, James & Paul Knapton. Pp 24, 288.
Part 1 = “The history of the late conquest of the Kingdom of Whidaw by the King of Dahomè”, part 2 = “The manner
how the negroes become slaves”, part 3 = “A relation of the author’s being taken by pirates, and the many dangers
he underwent”. Not entirely sure about the pagination. Reprinted 1971 by Frank Cass & Co. in London (Cass
library of African studies, slavery series, #11; ISBN-10 0-7146-1898-5).
Snelgrave, William. 1735. Nouvelle relation de quelques endroits de Guinée, et du commerce
d’esclaves qu’on y fait. Traduite de l’anglois par A.Fr.D. de Coulange. Amsterdam. Pp 24,
348.
Part 1 = “L’histoire de la dernière conquête du roïaume de Juda, par le roi de Dahomé”, part 2 = “La manière dont les
Nègres deviennent esclaves”, part 3 “La relation de tout ce qui est arrivé à l’auteur lorsqu’il fut pris par les pirates”.
Snelgrave, William. 1754. A new account of some parts of Guinea and the slave-trade. New
edition, with a new and corrected map of the coast of Guinea. London: J. Wren. Pp 13, 288.
Sorrento, Girolamo Merolla da. 1692. Breve, e succinta relatione del viaggio nel regno di Congo
nell’Africa meridionale. Scritto, e ridotto al presente stile istorico, e narratiuo dal P. Angelo
Piccardo da Napoli predicatore dell’istess’ordine. Napoli: Francesco Mollo. Pp 466.
Includes a “little vocabulary of 108 [Kikongo] words in the usual Portuguese orthography” (Doke 1959:61). There
are several later 18th-century editions of this book.
Sorrento, Girolamo Merolla da. 1692? Reise nach Kongo und verschiedenen andern Ländern in
den südlichen Theilen von Africa.
Details wanting. Not sure about the date.
85
Sorrento, Girolamo Merolla da. 1726. Breve e succinta relazione del viaggio nel regno di Congo.
Scritto, e ridotto al presente stile istorico, e narrativo dal Angelo Piccardo da Napoli. Napoli.
Pp 316.
Sorrento, Girolamo Merolla da. 1732. A voyage to Congo and several other countries, chiefly in
southern Africka [...] in the year 1682. Translated from Italian. Napoli: Francesco Mollo. Pp
466.
There are several 18th century editions/printings of this.
Sousa, Baltazar Almeida de. 1890. An advertisement sent to Philip II, king of Spaine, from Angola,
by Baltazar Almeida de Sousa, 1591. In: The principal navigations, voyages, traffiques &
discoveries of the English nation, v. 11, p. (?). New (fourth) edition. Ed. by Richard Hakluyt
& Edmund Goldsmid. Edinburgh: E. & C. Goldsmid.
Sparrman, Anders. 1783. Resa till Goda Hopps-udden, södra pol-kretsen och omkring jordklotet
samt till Hottentott- och Caffer-landen, åren 1772-76 = Journey to the Cape of Good Hope,
southern polar circle and around the globe, as well as to the countries of the Hottentots and
the Caffres, between the years 1772-1776, v. 1. Stockholm: Anders J. Nordström. Pp xv,
766, 9 plates, map.
Contains the earliest known vocabulary (63 words) of a southern Bantu language, namely Xhosa. This also appeared
in several English, French and German editions.
Sparrman, Anders. 1784. Reise nach dem Vorgebirge der guten Hoffnung, den südlichen
Polarländern und um die Welt, hauptsächlich aber in den Ländern der Hottentotten und
Kaffern in den Jahren 1772 bis 1776, 2 Bde. Aus dem swedischen übersetzt von Christian
Heinrich Groskurd, und herausgegeben von Georg Forster. Berlin: Haude & Spener. Pp
xxx, 624.
Sparrman, Anders. 1785. A voyage to the Cape of Good Hope towards the Atlantic Polar circle,
and round the world, but chiefly into the country of the Hottentots and Caffres, from the
year 1772 to 1776’,, 2 vols. Translated from Swedish by Georg Forster. London: White.
There were several contemporary English editions, e.g. 1785 by White, Cash & Byrne in Dublin. Not sure how or if
they differ from each other.
Sparrman, Anders. 1786. A voyage to the Cape of Good Hope towards the Atlantic Polar circle,
and round the world, but chiefly into the country of the Hottentots and Caffres, from the
year 1772 to 1776, 2 vols. Second edition, translated from Swedish by Georg Forster.
London: White.
Reprinted 1971 by Johnson Reprint Corporation in New York (Landmarks in anthropology series). A further
edition was published 1789 in Perth (UK) which was labelled simply “New edition”. Not sure if it differs from this.
Sparrman, Anders. 1786. Specimen of the language of the Caffres. In: A voyage to the Cape of
Good Hope towards the Atlantic Polar circle, and round the world, but chiefly into the
country of the Hottentots and Caffres, from the year 1772 to 1776, v. 2, p. (?). Second
edition. London: White.
Contains 63 words Xhosa words, “very incorrectly observed ... Nevertheless, Sparrman’s record is valuable as
being the earliest vocabulary of any South African Bantu language” (Doke 1959:2).
Sparrman, Anders. 1787. Voyage au Cap de Bonne-Espérance, et autour du monde avec le
capitaine Cook, et principalement dans le pays des hottentots et des caffres, 3 vols. Traduit
de l’édition anglaise par M. le Tourneur. Paris: François Buisson. Pp xxxii, 388; 366; 363.
Not sure about the pagination.
Sparrman, Anders. 1802. Resa till Goda Hopps-udden, södra pol-kretsen och omkring jordklotet
samt till Hottentott- och Caffer-landen, åren 1772-76 = Journey to the Cape of Good Hope,
southern polar circle and around the globe, as well as to the countries of the Hottentots and
the Caffres, between the years 1772-1776, v. 2. Stockholm: Carl Delén. Pp xii, 238, 14
plates, map.
Includes anthropological notes on Cape Khoekhoe, amongst other things.
Sparrman, Anders. 1944. A voyage around the world with Captain James Cook in H.M.S.
Resolution. With introduction and notes by Owen Rutter. London: Golden Cockerel Press.
Pp 218.
86
Translation of the second volume of Sparrman’s Resa till Goda Hopps-udden, originally published 1803. Limited to
300 copies.
Sparrman, Anders. 1975/77. A voyage to the Cape of Good Hope towards the Atlantic Polar
circle, and round the world, but chiefly into the country of the Hottentots and Caffres, from
the year 1772 to 1776, 2 vols. Based on the second English edition, with Georg Forster’s
original translation from Swedish revised by Jalmar and Ione Rudner, edited by V.S. Forbes.
Publications from the Van Riebeeck Society, second series, #6-7. Cape Town. Pp xiv, 331;
viii, 296. ISBN-10 0-620-02020-2.
Georg Forster’s original English translation appeared in 1786.
Sprenger, Balthasar. 1509. Die Merfart und Erfarung nüwer Schiffung und Wege zu viln
Onerkanten Inseln und Künigreichen, von dem grossmechtigen Portugalische Kunig
Emmanuel erforscht, funden, bestritten und ingenommen; auch wunderbarliche Streyt,
Ordenung, Leben, Wesen, Handlung und Wunderwercke, des Volcks und Thyrer dar iñ
wonende, findestu in diessem Buchlyn warhaftiglich beschryben und abkunterfeyt. Mit
Holzschnitten von Hans Burgkmair. Pp 30.
Details wanting. Contains the earliest known Western depiction of the Khoekhoe (Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:22).
Reprinted 1910? in Deutsche Pfadfinder des 16. Jahrhunderts in Afrika, Asien und Südamerika (ed. by M. Pannwitz;
Stuttgart).
Starrenberg, Johannes. 1705. Dagverhaal van den Landdrost Johannes Starrenberg, gehouden op
zyn landtogt na de Gounemas, Grigriquas, Namacquasche Hottentots, etc., 16. Oct. tot 7
Dec. 1705. Unpublished diaries.
Details wanting. Referred to by Strohmeyer & Moritz (1975:22).
Stavorinus, John Splinter. 1793. Reize van Zeeland over de Kaap de Goede Hoop [...] in de
jaaren 1768 tot 1771. Leiden.
Stavorinus, John Splinter. 1796. Reise nach dem Vorgebirge der Guten Hoffnung, Java und
Bengalen (1768-1771). Aus dem holländischen übersetzt. Berlin: Lüders.
Stavorinus, John Splinter. 1798. Reize van Zeeland over de Kaap de Goede Hoop [...] in de
jaaren 1774 tot 1778. Leiden.
Stavorinus, John Splinter. 1798. Voyages to the East Indies. Translated from Dutch. London.
Possibly this includes the second Dutch volume as well (1798).
Stel, Simon van der. 1685/86. Dagh register gehouden op de voiagie gedaen naer der Amcqua land.
Manuscript in the library of Trinity College, Dublin.
Stel, Simon van der. 1932. Simon van der Stel’s journal of his expedition to Namaqualand, 16851686 / Dagh register gehouden op de voiagie gedaen naer der Amcqua land, 1685-1686.
Edited from original manuscripts at Trinity College, Dublin, by Gilbert Waterhouse; with an
English translation by R.H. Pheiffer. London: Longmans, Green & Co. Pp xxviii, 183.
Contains both English and Dutch texts. Reprinted 1953 by Hodges & Figgis in Dublin; and 1969 by Cornelis
Struik in Cape Town. Various “revised” reprints also exist.
Stel, Simon van der. 1969. Simon van der Stel’s journal of his expedition to Namaqualand, 16851686. New edition, revised. Mystic CN: Verry.
Referred to by Strohmeyer & Moritz (1975:23). Not sure how much this differs from the original 1932 edition.
Stel, Simon van der. 1979. Simon van der Stel’s journey to Namakwaland in 1685. New edition,
with a revised introduction by Gilbert Waterhouse. Cape Town & Pretoria: Human &
Rousseau. Pp 431.
Stout, Benjamin. 1798. Narrative of the loss of the ship Hercules, commanded by Captain
Benjamin Stout, on the coast of Caffraria, the 16th of June, 1796; also, a circumstantial
detail of his travels through the southern deserts of Africa and the colonies, to the Cape of
Good Hope. New York: James Chevalier. Pp liii, 113.
Date uncertain. Date on dedication states November 1797.
Stout, Benjamin. 1820. Cape of Good Hope and its dependencies: an accurate and truly
interesting description of those delightful regions, situated five hundred miles north of the
Cape, formerly in possession of the Dutch, but lately ceded to the Crown of England.
London: Edwards & Knibb. Pp xvi, 144.
Date uncertain. Date on dedication states November 1797.
87
Stuck, Gottlieb Heinrich. 1784/87. Verzeichnis von aeltern und neuern Land- und
Reisebeschreibungen: ein Versuch eines Hauptstücks der geographischen Litteratur, 2
Theile. Mit einem vollstaendigen Realregister, und einer Vorrede von M. Iohann Ernst Fabri.
Halle: Iohann Christian Hendels Verlage.
Stukeley, Thomas. 1890. The voyage of Thomas Stukeley into Barbary. In: The principal
Goldsmid.
Sutherland, James [Lieut.]. 1761. A narrative of the loss of His Majesty’s ship the Litchfield: Capt.
Barton, on the coast of Africa; with an account of the sufferings of the captain, and the
surviving part of his crew, in their slavery under the Emperor of Morocco. London: Selfpublished. Pp 60.
Not sure about the details. See also Barton (1760).
Tappen, David. 1704. David Tappens funffzehen jährige curiöse und denckwürdige auch sehr
gefährliche Ost-Indianische Reise-Beschreibung. Hannover: Gottfried Freytag. Pp vi, 220.
Not sure where he travelled. Presumably somewhere in southern Africa.
Peripherals: Rowland Raven-Hart, “The fifteen-year’s journey of David Tappen”, Quarterly bulletin of the South
African Library, v. 21 (1967) p. 134-144.
Telles, Balthazar. 1696. Histoire de la Haute Ethiopie. Extraite et traduite de la copie Portugaise.
Paris.
Telles, Balthazar. 1710. The travels of the Jesuits in Ethiopia. Now first translated into English.
London: J. Knapton, A. Bell, J. Baker. Pp iv, 264, xviii.
Originally issued monthly in parts during 1708-1710.
Tervelli, Antoine de. 1652. Diccionario kongo-español, no publicado. Roma: Congregation de la
Propagande.
Title improvised. Kongo-Spanish dictionary referred to by Doke (1959:55).
Tervelli, Antoine de. 1652. Gramática de kongo, no publicado. Roma: Congregation de la
Propagande.
Title improvised. Referred to by Doke (1959:55).
Tervelli, Antoine de. 1657? Un vocabulario copioso in quattro lingue, cioe italiana, latina, spagnola e
del congo. Manuscrito. Roma: Congregation de la Propagande.
Date uncertain, but no earlier than 1657 (Doke 1959:55).
Theal, George McCall. 1882. Chronicles of Cape commanders: an abstract of original
manuscripts in the archives of the Cape Colony, dating from 1651 to 1691, compared with
printed accounts of the settlement by various visitors during that time; also four short
papers upon subjects connected with the East India Company’s government at a later
period, reprinted from colonial periodicals, and notes on English, Dutch, and French books
published before 1796, containing references to South Africa. Cape Town: W.A. Richards.
Pp xiv, 428.
Thevenot, Jean de. 1727. Voyages de Mns de Thevenot en Europe, Asie et Afrique, 5 vols.
Troisième édition. Amsterdam: Le Céne. Pp xii, 308.
Thevet, André. 1575. La cosmographie universelle, 2 vols. Paris: Pierre l’Huilier.
Early map work of the world.
Peripherals: Paul E.H. Hair, “A note on Thevet’s unpublished maps of overseas islands”, Terrae incognitae, v. 14
(1982) p. 101-111.
Thunberg, Carl Peter. 1788/93. Resa uti Europa, Africa, Asia, foerraettad åren 1770-1779 =
Journey in Europe, Africa, Asia, carried out between the years 1770-1779, 4 delen. Uppsala:
Joh. Edman.
Includes a Khoekhoe word list. The English edition includes “much material about the Hottentot tribes of the eastern
regions [and] their relations to the Xhosa” (Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:22), which is probably true also for the
other editions/translations.
88
Thunberg, Carl Peter. 1792. Reisen in Afrika und Asien, vorzüglich in Japan, während der Jahre
1772 bis 1779, 2 Bde. Auszugsweise übersetzt von K. Sprengel, mit Anmerkungen von J.R.
Forster. Berlin.
Thunberg, Carl Peter. 1792/94. Reise durch einen Theil von Europa, Afrika und Asien,
hauptsächlich in Japan in den Jahren 1779 bis 1779, 2 Bde. Aus dem Schwedischen frey
übersetzt von Christian Heinrich Groskurd. Berlin: Haude & Spener.
Thunberg, Carl Peter. 1794. Voyage en Afrique et en Asie, principalement au Japon, pendant les
années 1770-1779. Traduit du suédois, avec des notes du traducteur. Paris: Fuchs. Pp xii,
532.
Thunberg, Carl Peter. 1795. Travels in Europe, Africa and Asia made between the years 1770 and
1779, 4 vols. London: Francis & Charles Rivington.
This may have been translated by the author himself. There’s also a second edition of this, dated the same year.
Thunberg, Carl Peter. 1796. Voyages en Afrique et en Asie, principalement au Japon, par le Cap
de Bonne-Espérance, les îles de la Sonde [...], 2 vols. Nouvelle édition, traduits, rédigés et
augmentés de notes par L. Langlès et J.B. Lamarck. Paris.
Thunberg, Carl Peter. 1796. Travels in Europe, Africa and Asia made between the years 1770 and
1779, 4 vols. Third edition. London: Francis & Charles Rivington.
Thunberg, Carl Peter. 1814. An account of the Cape of Good Hope, and some parts of the interior
of southern Africa. In: A general collection of the best and most interesting voyages and
travels in all parts of the world, v. 16, p. (?). Ed. by John Pinkerton. London.
Extracted from Thunberg’s Travels in Europe, Africa and Asia made between the years 1770 and 1779, published
1795.
Thunberg, Carl Peter. 1986. Travels at the Cape of Good Hope 1772-1775. Edited by Emeritus
Prof. V.S. Forbes. Publications from the Van Riebeeck Society, second series, #17. Cape
Town.
Tilleman, Erick. 1697. En kort og enfoldig beretning om det landskab Guinea og dets
beskaffenhed. Kiøbenhavn.
“This is the first source [on West Africa] written in Danish ... [The author] made several voyages to the Gold Coast
between 1682 and 1698 ... [The book is] full of detailed information about sailing, anchoring, trading places all
along the West African coast. He also gives ethnographical information on the Akwamu, Akyem and Ga people,
their customs, etc. ... The material is brief because his target readership consisted of people who would be going to
the Coast themselves” (Winsnes 2001:51f).
Tilleman, Erick. 1994. A short and simple account of the country Guinea and its nature.
Translated from Danish and edited by Selena Axelrod Winsnes. African Studies Program,
University of Wisconsin-Madison. Pp v, 78. ISBN-10 0-942615-23-9.
Towerson, William. 1589. The first voiage made by Master William Towerson to Guinea in 1555.
In: The principall navigations, voiages and discoueries of the English nation, p. (?). Ed. by
Richard Hakluyt. London: George Bishop, Ralph Newberie, Robert Barker.
Not sure the title is correct. Includes scattered ethnographic notes and a brief Krahn vocabulary (Dalby & Hair
1964).
Peripherals: David Dalby & Paul E.H. Hair, “‘Le langage de Guynee’: a sixteenth-century vocabulary from the
Pepper Coast”, African language studies, v. 5 (1964) p. 174-191; Paul E.H. Hair, “The use of African languages in
Afro-European contacts in Guinea 1440-1560”, Sierra Leone language review, v. 5 (1966) p. 5-26; P.E.H. Hair, “An
ethnolinguistic inventory of the Lower Guinea coast before 1700 (pt. 2)”, African language review, v. 8 (1969) p.
225-236.
Towerson, William. 1824. Voyage to Guinea in 1555; Second voyage to Guinea in 1556; Third
voyage of William Towerson to Guinea in 1558. In: A general history and collection of
Towerson, William. 1890. The first voyage made by Master William Towrson Marchant of
London, to the coast of Guinea, with two ships, in the yeere 1555; The second voyage made
by Maister William Towrson to the coast of Guinea, and the Castle of Mina, in the yeere
1556; The third and last voyage of M. William Towrson to the coast of Guinie, and the
Castle de Mina, in the yeere 1577. In: The principal navigations, voyages, traffiques &
discoveries of the English nation, v. 11, p. (?). New (fourth) edition. Ed. by Richard Hakluyt
& Edmund Goldsmid. Edinburgh: E. & C. Goldsmid.
The author’s name is spelt without an ‹e› in the article titles.
89
Vaillant, François le. 1790. Reise in das Innere von Afrika vom Vorgebirge der Guten Hoffnung
aus, in den Jahren 1780 bis 1785, 2 Bde. Aus dem französischen übersetzt von Georg
Forster, und redigiert von J.H. Campe. Frankfurt-am-Main: Fleischer.
There seems to exist several German editions of this (Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:15). In 1792, it appeared in
Reutlingen (Reisebeschreibungen, #10-11). Also in 1792, there appeared a edition titled Le Vaillant’s erste Reise
in das Innere von Afrika während der Jahre 1780 bis 1782, published in Berlin. A further German edition appeared
1831 in Wien (Sämmtliche Kinder- und Jugendschriften, #26-27). An abridged German edition (vi+276 pp) was
published 1812 in Wien (Sammlung interessanter Reisebeschreibungen für die Jugend). Worth noting is a 3-volume
book titled Neue Reise in das Innere von Afrika, vom Vorgebürge der Guten Hoffnung aus, in den jahren 1780 bis
1785, published 1797 by Guilhauman in Frankfurt. These contain “Fabricated travels” (Strohmeyer & Moritz
1975:15).
Vaillant, François le. 1790. Voyage dans l’intérieur de l’Afrique, par le Cap de Bonne-Espérance,
dans les années 1780, 1781, 1782, 1783, 1784 et 1785, 2 vols. Paris & Liège: Leroy &
Dumoulin. Pp xxiv, 384; 399.
This was apparently “one of the most phenomenal best-sellers of the day. It went through twelve editions in six
years and was translated almost immediately into more than half a dozen European languages” (Marks 1975:157).
At least the second edition appeared the same year. There’s a further edition dated 1798. Not sure all were published
in Paris. There’s also a collection of “Fabricated travels” (Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:15) by Vaillant, which has
been translated into both English and German.
Vaillant, François le. 1790. Travels from the Cape of Good Hope into the interior parts of Africa,
including many interesting anecdotes, with elegant plates, descriptive of the country and
inhabitants, 2 vols. Translated from French by E. Helme. London.
Reprinted 1971 by Johnson Reprint Corporation in New York (Landmarks in anthropology series). An abridged
edition (181 pp) appeared 1790 as Anecdotes in travels from the Cape of Good Hope into the interior parts of
Africa, published by Darton in London. A second edition was published in 1796 by Robinson in London. Worth
noting is a collection of “Fabricated travels” (Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:15) by Vaillant titled New travels into the
interior parts of Africa by way of the Cape of Good Hope in the years 1783, 1784 and 1785, a 3-volume work
published 1796 in London.
Vaillant, François le. 1794/95. Second voyage dans l’interieur de l’Afrique, par le cap de BonneEsperance, dans les annees 1783, 84 et 85, 3 vols. Paris: H.J. Jansen. Pp xliv, 303; 426;
525.
URL: books.google.se/books?id=WjAPAAAAYAAJ
Vaillant, François le. 1796. New travels into the interior parts of Africa, by the way of the Cape of
Good Hope, in the years 1783, 84 and 85, 3 vols. Translated from the French. London:
G.G.J. & J. Robinson.
Vaillant, François le. 1803. Second voyage de F. le Vaillant dans l’interieur de l’Afrique pendant
les années 1783-1785, 3 vols. Édité par C. Varon et complété par P.J.B. Legrand d’Aussy.
Paris: Jansen.
New edition? Strohmeyer & Moritz (1975:15) seem to imply that these are fabricated travels!?!
Vaillant, François le. 1973. François le Vaillant: traveller in South Africa and his collection of 165
water-colour paintings, 2 vols. Cape Town: Library of Parliament. Pp xx, 172; xiv, 181; xix,
165 plates.
Who’s the editor? Contains “wesentlichen Anmerkungen über die Gonaqua” (Strohmeyer 1982:4).
Peripherals: Jürgen Zwernemann, Afrika und Übersee, v. 58 (1974/75) p. 159-162.
Valentyn, François. (Ed.) 1726. Beschryvinge van’t Nederlandsch Comptoir oft de kust van
Malabar, en van onzen handel in Japan; mitsgaders een beschryving van Kaap der Goede
Hoope en’t eyland Mauricius, mit de zaaken tot de voornoemde ryken en landen
behoorende, 8 deele. Dordrecht & Amsterdam: Van Braam, onder de Linden.
Reprinted by the Van Riebeeck Society in Cape Town (Oud en nieuw Oost-Indie, #5,2). Later also translated into
English.
Valentyn, François. 1971/73. Description of the Cape of Good Hope and matters concerning it, 2
vols. Translated from Dutch by R. Raven-Hart and edited by E.H. Raidt. Publications from
the Van Riebeeck Society, second series, #2+4. Cape Town.
Valentyn, François. (Ed.) 1971/73. Beschryvinge van Kaap der Goede Hoope, met de zaaken daar
toe behoorende, 2 vols. Edited by P. Serton, W.J. de Kock, R. Raven-Hart and E.H. Raidt,
with English translation by R. Raven-Hart and an introduction by P. Serton. Publications
from the Van Riebeeck Society, second series, #2+4. Cape Town.
Varthema, Ludovico di. 1510. Itinerario di Ludovico de Varthema. Roma. Pp cii, 40.
90
“Ludovico di Varthema, an Italian adventurer who visited Moçambique about 1505, relates how in a mountain of
caves on the mainland of Moçambique, was a people of dwarfish stature and yellow skin, whose speech was full of
clicks. He compares these clicks to the noises made by Sicilian mule-drivers in urging on their beasts” (Johnston
1913:380).
Varthema, Ludovico di. 1824. Navigation of the author to Ethiopia, and return to Europe by sea. In:
A general history and collection of voyages and travels, v. 7, p. (?). Ed. by Robert Kerr.
Varthema, Ludovico di. 1863. The travels of Ludovico di Varthema in Egypt, Syria, Arabia
Deserta and Arabia Felix, in Persia, India, and Ethiopia, AD 1503 to 1508. Translated from
the original Italian edition of 1510 by John Winter Jones, and edited, with notes and an
introduction, by George Percy Badge. Works issued by the Hakluyt Society, #32. London.
Pp cxxi, 320.
Varthema, Ludovico di. 1885. Itinerario di Ludovico de Varthema. Nuovamente posto in luce da
Alberto Bacchi della Lega. Bologna: G. Romagnoli. Pp li, 285.
Reprinted several times.
Varthema, Ludovico di. 1888. Les voyages de Ludovico di Varthema. Traduits de l’italien en
français par J. Balarin de Raconis, publiés et annotés par M. Ch. Schefer. Paris: Ernest
Leroux. Pp lxxi, 406.
Varthema, Ludovico di. 1928. The itinerary of Ludovico di Varthema of Bologna, from 1502 to
1508. Translated from the original Italian edition of 1510, by John Winter Jones, F.S.A., in
1863 for the Hakluyt Society. London: Argonaut Press.
Could be a reprint.
Velho, Alvaro. 1499-1507. ... [Title wanting].
Early unpublished (non-extant) source on the Guinea coast. Velho’s account was used by Valentim Fernandes in his
Descripçam de cepta por sua costa de Mauritania e Ethiopia, compiled before 1510. “According to Fernandes, Velho
spent nearly eight years in West Africa ... It has further been argued that he had been a member of Vasco da Gama’s
expedition to India and was responsible for the anonymous account of the expedition which incidentally showed
much interest in languages encountered along the route” (Hair 1966:10f). It would seem that “Velho had some
command of African languages, especially Temne ... If however he troubled to systematize his knowledge and
included any learned references to African languages in his manuscript, then unfortunately these were omitted by
Fernandes in compiling the extant account” (Hair 1966:11).
Peripherals: F. Hümmerich, “Studien zum Roteiro der Entdeckungsfahrt Vasco da Gama 1497-1499”, Revista da
Universidade de Coimbra, v. 10 (1924); Paul E.H. Hair, “The use of African languages in Afro-European contacts in
Guinea 1440-1560”, Sierra Leone language review, v. 5 (1966) p. 5-26.
Verdun de la Crenne, Jean René Antoine. 1778. Voyage fait par ordre du roi en 1771 et 1772 en
diverses parties de l’Europe, de l’Afrique et de l’Amérique pour vérifier l’utilité de plusieurs
méthodes et instruments servant à déterminer la latitude et la longitude tant du vaisseau que
des côtes, isles & écueils qu’on reconnoît; suivi de recherches pour rectifier les cartes
hydrographiques, 2 vols. Paris: Imprimerie Royale.
Has some lexical specimens of Wolof.
Vetralla, Hiacinto Brusciotto de. 1650. ... [Title wanting].
Brusciotto apparently compiled “a [now lost] quadrilingual Kongo dictionary ... It is possible that the vocabulary
of 1,000 words in the ‘Sonho’ dialect, appended to Cannecatim’s Ndongo grammar ... contains an abbreviated copy
of Brusciotto’s dictionary” (Doke 1959:55).
Vetralla, Hiacinto Brusciotto de. 1659. Regulae quaedam pro difficillimi congensium idiomatis
faciliori captu ad grammaticae normam redactae. Romae: Sac. Congreg. de Propaganda
Fide. Pp 8, 98.
Vetralla, Hiacinto Brusciotto de. 1882. Grammar of the Congo language as spoken two hundred
years ago, and translated from the Latin of Brusciotto. Translated by James Mew, edited by
H. Grattan Guiness. London: Hodder & Stoughton. Pp xii, 112.
Translation of Regulae quaedam pro difficillimi congensium idiomatis facilitori captu ad grammaticae normam
redactae, originally published 1659. Note that the editor, Grattan Guiness, wrote or compiled another Kikongo
grammar, published the same year (cfr Doke 1945:17).
Vetralla, Hiacinto Brusciotto de. 1886. Regras para, mais facil intelligencia do difficil idioma do
Congo, reduzidas à forma de gramática por Fr. Jacintho Brusciotho Vetralla. Traduzida
por D. Antonio Thomaz da Silva Leitão e Castro. Luanda. Pp 178.
91
Translation of Regulae quaedam pro difficillimi congensium idiomatis facilitori captu ad grammaticae normam
redactae, originally published 1659.
Vogt, John L. 1973. The Portuguese gold trade: an account ledger from Elmina, 1529-1531.
Transactions of the Historical Society of Ghana, v. 14, p. (?).
Volney, Constantin François de. 1787. Voyage en Syriè et en Egypte pendant les années 1783,
1784, et 1785, avec deux cartes géographiques & deux planches gravées, représentant les
ruines du Temple su Soleil à Balbek, & celles de la ville de Palmyre dans le Désert de Syrie,
2 vols. Paris: Volland.
There are apparently several subsequent editions of this.
Volney, Constantin François de. 1787. Travels through Syria and Egypt in 1783, 1784, and 1785:
containing the perfect natural and political state of those countries, their productions, arts,
manufactures, and commerce, with observations on the manners, customs, and government
of the Turks and Arabs, 2 vols. Translated from French. London: G.G.J. & J. Robinson.
Wadström, Carl Bernhard. 1789. Observations on the slave trade, and a description of some part
of the coast of Guinea, during a voyage made in 1787 and 1788, in company with Doktor A.
Sparrman and Captain Arrehenius. London: Phillips. Pp ix, 67.
Wadström, Carl Bernhard. 1790. Observations sur la traits des nègres, et une description de
quelques endroits de la côte de Guinée [traduit de l’anglais]. In: Mémoires de règne de
Bossa-Ahadé, roi de Dahomé, p. (?). Ed. by Robert Norris. Paris: Gattey.
This appears on the French translation of Norris’s book. Not sure of it appears also in the English original.
Wadström, Carl Bernhard. 1794/95. An essay on colonization, particularly applied to the western
coast of Africa, with some free thoughts on cultivation and commerce; also brief
descriptions of the colonies already formed, or attempted, in Africa, including those of
Sierra Leone and Bulama. London: Darton & Harvey.
Is there any mention of the Bidjogo in this?
Warburton, William. 1738/41. The divine legation of Moses demonstrated: on the principles of a
religious deist, from the omission of the doctrine of a future state of reward and punishment
in the Jewish dispensation. London: F. Gyles.
Several books/vols, one of which includes a whole lot about the antiquity of the Egyptians as well as something on
“hieroglyphics”. There are apparently many editions of this. Not sure when the first was dated.
Warburton, William. 1744. Essai sur les hiéroglyphes des Egyptiens, 2 vols. Traduit de l’anglois
pas Marc Antoine Léonard des Malpeines. Paris: H.-L. Guerin.
Based on extracts from Warburton’s The divine legation of Moses demonstrated.
URL: books.google.se/books?id=9YEBAAAAQAAJ
Welsh, James. 1824. Voyage to Benin beyond Guinea in 1588 [with a supplement: a letter from
Anthony Ingram the chief factor, written from Plymouth to the owners, dated 9th September,
the day of arriving at Plymouth]. In: A general history and collection of voyages and travels,
v. 7, p. (?). Ed. by Robert Kerr. Edinburgh: William Blackwood.
Welsh, James. 1824. Second voyage of James Welsh to Benin, in 1590. In: A general history and
Blackwood.
Welsh, James. 1890. A voyage to Benin, 1588. In: The principal navigations, voyages, traffiques
& discoveries of the English nation, v. 11, p. (?). New (fourth) edition. Ed. by Richard
Hakluyt & Edmund Goldsmid. Edinburgh: E. & C. Goldsmid.
Wemmers, Jacobus. 1638. Lexicon aethiopicum. Romae: Sac. Congreg. de Propaganda Fide. Pp
319, 47.
White, William. 1800. Journal of a voyage performed in the Lion, extra Indiaman, from Madras
to Colombo, and Delagoa Bay, on the eastern coast of Africa, in the year 1798; with some
account of the manners and customs of the inhabitants of Delagoa Bay, and a vocabulary of
the language. London: John Stockdale. Pp 70.
Includes a brief vocabulary of some 140 Ronga words. They are “recorded in a very strange orthography and a
number cannot be verified; those that are identified correspond to the Ronga dialect of Shangana-Tsonga” (Doke
1959:5).
92
Wikar, Hendrik Jacob. 1779. Berigt aan den weleedelen gestrengen Heer Mr Joachim van
Plattenbergh van’t geene my ondergeteekende ontmoetis wat ik gehoord ende gezien hebbe
zeedert dat ik langs de Groote rivier op ende needer gesworven hebbe. Den Haag:
Plettenberg-Sammlung, Hollandsche Reichsarchiv.
Not sure of the exact title. “Wikar’s journal includes probably the first attempt to classify the Khoisan peoples,
most specifically the various groups of ‘Hottentots’ in the Cape” (Barnard 1992:10). First published 1916 in
Reizen in Zuid-Afrika in de hollandse tijd, v. 2, edited by E.C. Godée-Molsbergen (published by Martinus Nijhoff);
and reprinted 1935 by the Van Riebeek Society, Cape Town.
Peripherals: L.F. Maingard, “Hendrik Jacob Wikar: his editors, translators and commentators”, Bantu studies, v. 10
(1936) p. 31-40.
Wikar, Hendrik Jacob. 1935. Berigt aan den weleedelen gestrengen Heer Mr Joachim van
Plattenbergh [with an English translation by A.W. van der Horst]. In: The journal of Hendrik
Jacob Wikar (1779) and the journals of Jacobus Coetzé Jansz (1766) and Willem van
Reenen (1791), p. 21-219. Ed. by E.E. Mossop. Publications from the Van Riebeeck Society,
#15. Cape Town.
Contains extracts from a manuscript dated 1799.
Peripherals: J.A. Engelbrecht, “The tribes of Wikar’s journal”, in the same book, p. 221-237; (A.W. van der
Horst?), “Aantekeninge oor die taal van Wikar se joernaal”, in the same book, p. 239-275.
Wikar, Hendrik Jacob. 1955. Reisen am Oranje 1778/9: Bericht des Hendrik Jakob Wikar von
Gothenburg an den Gouverneur Baron Joachim von Plettenberg (merkwürdige
abenteuerliche Reise am Oranje 1778 und 1779). Afrikanischer Heimatkalender, v. 26, p. 91116.
Contains extracts from a manuscript dated 1779. “Auszug aus dem verkürzten Bericht. - Namacquas, Eynicquas,
Koracquas, Blicquas, Damracquas (dunkelhäutig), Thaboek (Buschmänner)” (Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:24).
Wilson, [?]. 1691. ... [Title wanting].
“The strange Hottentot speech had already been transcribed to some extent by Wilson in 1691” (Johnston 1919:2).
Who’s Wilson?
Windham, Thomas [Capt.]. 1824. Second voyage of the English to Barbary, in the year 1552. In: A
general history and collection of voyages and travels, v. 7, p. (?). Ed. by Robert Kerr.
Windham, Thomas [Capt.]; Pinteado, Antonio Anes. 1824. A voyage from England to Guinea and
Benin in 1553. In: A general history and collection of voyages and travels, v. 7, p. (?). Ed. by
Robert Kerr. Edinburgh: William Blackwood.
Winkelmann, Franz von. 1791. Wörterverzeichnis der Kaffern- und Hottentottensprache,
gesammelt während einer Reise in 1788. Manuskript. Der Haag: Hollandsche Reichsarchiv.
“[G]enauer Titel unbekannt” (Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:116).
Wintergerst, Martin. 1712. Der durch Europam lauffende, durch Asiam fahrende, an Americam
und Africam anländende, und in Ost-Indien lange Zeit gebliebene Schwabe: Oder,
Reissbeschreibung, welche in 22 Jahren an bemeldte Oerther verrichtet, was dabey
denckwürdiges gesehen und in acht genommen worden; mit schönen Kupffern gezieret, und
an den Tag gegeben. Memmingen (Deutschland): Müller.
Contains some notes about the Khoekhoe (Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:24). Reprinted 1932 as Reisen auf dem
Mitteländischen Meere, der Nordsee, nach Ceylon und nach Java by Martinus Nijhoff in Der Haag.
Wintergerst, Martin. 1712/1932. Reisen auf dem Mitteländischen Meere, der Nordsee, nach
Ceylon und nach Java, 1688-1710, 2 Bde. Nach der Original-Ausgabe. Reisebeschreibungen
von deutschen Beamten und Krigsleuten, #12-13. Der Haag: Martinus Nijhoff.
Originally published 1712 as Der durch Europam lauffende, durch Asiam fahrende, an Americam und Africam
anländende, und in Ost-Indien lange Zeit gebliebene Schwabe.
Wintergerst, Martin. 1713. Zwey und zwantzig-jährige Reysen durch Europam, Asiam, Africam,
Americam und Ost-Indien, mit vielen Anmerckungen und Figuren versehen. Zweite Auflage.
Frankfurt am Mayn & Leipzig: Bartholomeo.
Witsen, Nicolaus. 169x. Excerpta ex literis illustris viri Nicolai Witsenii Consulis
Amstelodamensis [...].
Details wanting. Contains “Pater Noster, Credo und Decem Praecepta” in Dutch and Khoekhoe (Strohmeyer &
Moritz 1975:115).
93
Witsen, Nicolaus. 1710. Specimen linguae hottentotticae. In: Commentarius de vita scriptisque ac
meritis illustris viri Iobi Ludolfi, p. 229-237. Ed. by Christian Juncker. Lipsiae &
Francofurti: Friderici Braunii.
A small Dutch-Khoekhoe-Latin word list, included in an appendix (or supplement). There’s no author or compiler
given for it, but Strohmeyer & Moritz (1975:12) say it originates from either G.F. Wreede or N. Witsen; Köhler
(1981:482) says it’s from Witsen.
Wood, Richard. 1972. New light on the origins of Papiamentu: an eighteenth-century letter.
Neophilologus: an international journal of modern and mediaeval language and literature,
v. 56, p. 18-30.
Worden, Nigel A.; Groenewald, Gerald. (Ed.) 2005. Trials of slavery: selected documents
concerning slaves from the criminal records of the Council of Justice at the Cape of Good
Hope, 1705-1794. Publications from the Van Riebeeck Society, second series, #36. Cape
Town. Pp lxi, 681. ISBN-10 0-9584522-3-7 hb.
Wren, Walter. 1890. The voyage of George Fenner to Guinea. In: The principal navigations,
voyages, traffiques & discoveries of the English nation, v. 11, p. (?). New (fourth) edition.
Ed. by Richard Hakluyt & Edmund Goldsmid. Edinburgh: E. & C. Goldsmid.
Zhang Tingyu; others. 1679-1739. Ming shi = The histories of the Ming Dynasty.
This is the official history of Ming Dynasty China, written by Qing Dynasty court officials. It includes valuable
information about Zheng He’s travels made during the 15th century. There are apparently several commented
editions available, and they are continuously reprinted. The Ming Shi documents, along with the official histories
of the other dynasties, are even available on the web, but it helps if one can read Chinese Characters.
Zheng He. 1431/33. ... [Title wanting].
Title wanting. Zheng He’s travels took place 1405-33. The seventh and last voyage of 1431-33 took him to Arabia
and East Africa as far south as Malindi on the Kenyan coast. The original reports were destroyed during the 1480s.
Hence “our chief understanding of these expeditions today comes from Ma Huan, a Muslim interpreter, and Fei Hsin,
a member of the scholar class who served as a junior officer on some of Cheng Ho’s voyages” (Shen 1995:350).
Peripherals: Gong Zhen, Xiyang fanguozhi (1435); Fei Xin, Xingocha shenglan (1436); Ma Huan, Yingyai
shenglan (1451); Zhang Tingyu & others, Ming shi (1679-1739); Paul Wheatley, “Analecta sino-africana recensa”
and “Notes on Chinese texts containing references to East Africa”, East Africa and the Orient (ed. by H.N. Chittick
& R.I. Rotberg, 1975) p. 76-114, 284-290; Philip Snow, The Star Raft: China’s encounter with Africa (London,
1988); James Shen, “New thoughts on the use of Chinese documents in the reconstruction of early Swahili history”,
Zucchelli, Antonio. 1715. Merckwuerdige Missions- und Reise-Beschreibung nach Congo in
Ethiopien; worinnen nicht allein alles dasjenige, was sich auf dieser Reise aus Steyermarck,
durch Italien, Spanien, Portugall und Indien biss nach Ethiopien denckwürdiges
zugetragen, sondern auch die Sitten und Gebraeuche der Heydnischen Indianer, ihre
Abgötterey und Aberglauben, ihre Regiments-Verfassung, ihre innerliche und auswärtige
Kriege, ihr Handel und Wandel, ihre Kranckheiten und derselben Curen, ihre Art zu
begraben, die Früchte, Bäume, Thiere, Fische etc. so das Land hervor bringet, desgleichen
wie die Verfassung der Mission in diesem Lande beschaffen, und wie eine grosse Menge
Einwohner durch den Autorem von dem Heydnischen Unglauben zur Christlichen
Catholischen Religion bekehret und getaufft worden, nebst unzehlich vielen andern curiösen
und lesenswürdigen Sachen beschrieben werden. Frankfurt am Mayn: Gleditsch &
Weidmann. Pp 623.
Zur-Eich, Hans Jacob. 1677. Africanische Reissbeschreibung in die Landschaft Fetu, auf der
guineischen Goldcüst gelegen, etc. Zürich: M. Schauffelberger.
The word ‹Reissbeschreibung› actually appears as such. The author apparently “plagiarized most of his material
from his colleague Müller [1673]” (Winsnes 2001:51).
Zurara, Gomes Eannes de. 1450s. Crónica de el-rei D. Joao I. Porto.
Not sure what the correct title should be here. Contains the official description of the conquest of Ceuta. Zurara was
the royal chronicler (historian) working for King Afonso V.
Zurara, Gomes Eannes de. 1460s. Chronica do descobrimento e conquisita de Guiné. Porto.
94
Zurara, Gomes Eannes de. 1841. Chronica do descobrimento e conquisita de Guiné. Fielmente
trasladada do manuscrito original contemporaneo, que se conserva na Bibliotheca Real de
Pariz, e dada pela primeira vez á luz per diligencia do Visconde da Carreira. Paris: J.P.
Aillaud. Pp xxv, 474.
Includes a “glossario das palavras e phrases antiquadas e obsoletas”.
Zurara, Gomes Eannes de. 1899. The chronicle of the discovery and conquest of Guinea, 2 vols.
Translated from Portuguese by C.R. Beazley and E. Prestage. London: The Hakluyt Society.
Zurara, Gomes Eannes de. 1915. Crónica da tomada de Ceuta por El Rei D. Joao I. Publicada
segundo os manuscritos nos 368 e 355 do Arquivo Nacional por F.M. Esteves Pereira.
Lisboa: Academia das Ciências. Pp cxv, 341.
Zurara, Gomes Eannes de. 1937. Cronica do descobrimento e conquista da Guiné, 2 vols.
Segundo o manuscrito da Biblioteca Nacional de Paris. Textos de historia, #3-4. Porto:
Livraria Civilizaçao.
Zurara, Gomes Eannes de. 1960. Chronique de Guinée. Traduction de Léon Bourdon, avec la
collaboration de Robert Richard. Mémoires de l’IFAN (Inst. Français de l’Afrique Noire),
#60. Dakar. Pp 301.
Zurara, Gomes Eannes de. 1973. Crónica de Guiné: segundo o ms. de Paris. Modernizada,
introduçao, notas, novas consideraçoes e glossário de José de Bragança. Biblioteca histórica
de Portugal e Brasil, série ultramarina. Porto: Livraria Civilizaçao. Pp cxii, 438.
Section 4
EARLY MODERN WORKS: LINGUISTICS
from c.1800 to 1920
–– oOo ––
[Anon.] 1xxx. Cameroons vocabulary. Manuscript. London: Royal Asiatic Society.
Mentioned by Latham (1847:172). Not sure what Cameroons refers to, either Manenguba, Duala, or something else.
[Anon.] 1xxx. A modern dictionary of Yoruba. London: Church Missionary Society (CMS).
Reprinted 1913 by Oxford University Press in Ibadan.
[Anon.] 18xx. Haussa primer. Berlin: C. & F. Unger.
[Anon.] 18xx. Comparative vocabularies of Malay and various dialects. Manuscript, ref. Fol.154.
London: Royal Asiatic Society.
Includes items from Makua, erroneously thought to be a Malay dialect. The vocabularies were apparently written
down by someone in Maylasia during the late nineteenth century, in Arabic script. The manuscript is listed as no 29
in the “List of Malay books bequethed to the Society by the late Sir W.E. Maxwell”, Journal of the Royal Asiatic
Society of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, third series, 1899, p. 123.
Peripherals: C. Otto Blagden, “A comparative vocabulary of Malayam dialects”, Journal of the Royal Asiatic
Society of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, third series, 1902, p. 557-566; C. Otto Blagden, “Further notes on a
Malayam comparative vocabulary”, Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, third
series, 1903, p. 167-179.
[Anon.] 189x. Mang’anja grammar. Blantyre: Mission Press. Pp 24.
[Anon.] 189x. First Mang’anja lessons. Blantyre: Mission Press. Pp 22.
[Anon.] 1820. The language of Guberi and Kachenah. Annals of Oriental literature, 1820, p. 549552.
Not sure about the exact title, nor the pagination. Contains Hausa numerals and 60 other lexical specimens
(Newman 1996:4). It may also contain some lexical specimens of Bornu (Latham 1847:184) and “Sangnsangdi and
Timbuctoo” (idem:186).
[Anon.] 1830. Dictionnaire de la langue franque au petit mauresque, suivi de quelques dialogues
familiers et d’un vocabulaire de mots arabes les plus usuels: à l’usage des français en
Afrique. Marseilles. Pp 107.
[Anon.] 1832. Hodgon’s memoirs on the Berber language. The North American review (Cedar
Falls IO), v. 35, 76, p. 54-75.
Lenghty review, with several excerpts, of “Grammatical sketch and specimens of the Berber language”, publ. 1834
in Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, v. 4 (orig. read before the society in 1929), and Notes of a
journey into the interior of North Africa by Hadji Ebn-ed-Din el Eghwaati (transl. by W.B. Hodgson; London,
1830). Includes extensive extracts from both works.
URL: cdl.library.cornell.edu/moa/browse.journals/nora.html
[Anon.] 1837. ... = Grebo vocabulary. Cape Palmas.
Title wanting. Latham (1847:169) refers to a Grebo vocabulary printed at Cape Palmas in 1837. He gives no author
(or title), but it seems likely to be identical to John Leighton Wilson’s 1839-dictionary.
[Anon.] 1839. The captured Africans of the Amistad. New York morning herald, 4 October 1839,
p. 2.
Includes a brief Manding vocabulary, apparently taken from Pierce’s (1839) brief article.
[Anon.] 1839. Bukaniane A.B.C. ka puo ea basato / A.B.C. Büchlein in der Sprache der Basuto.
Kapstadt.
[Anon.] 1839. Sherbro vocabulary. Manuscript, ref. Afr.f.146. Nuneham Repository, Bodleian
Library, Rhodes House.
[Anon.] 1841. Sherbro vocabulary. Manuscript, ref. 12901.b.8. London: St. Pancras Reading
Rooms, British Library.
96
[Anon.] 1845. ... = Swahili (Zanzibar) word list. Nouvelles annales des voyages, de la géographie
et de l’histoire ou recueil des relations originales inédites, 5ème série, v. 3, p. (?).
Title wanting. Latham (1847:193) refers to a Swahili (Zanzibar) word list which apparently appears in the third
volume of Nouvelles annales des voyages. No other details are given.
[Anon.] 1846. ... = Herero spelling book. Cape Town: Saul Solomon & Co.
Details wanting.
[Anon.] 1848. Rules for reducing unwritten languages to alphabetical writing in Roman
characters, with reference especially to the languages spoken in Africa. London: Church
Missionary Society (CMS).
This “tacitly accepted the ‘vowels as in Italian, consonants as in English’ principle, and set down fixed values for
the letters of the Roman alphabet. It tried to avoid two-letter compounds for single sounds, and made much use of
the subscript dot” (Tucker 1971:619).
Peripherals: A.N. Tucker, “Orthographic systems and conventions in sub-Saharan Africa”, Current trends in
linguistics VII: linguistics in sub-Saharan Africa (ed. by T.A. Sebeok, 1971) p. 618-653.
[Anon.] 1849. Les langues et les peuples de la région maritime de l’Afrique australe. Nouvelles
annales des voyages, de la géographie et de l’histoire ou recueil des relations originales
inédites, 5ème série, v. 20, p. 285-306.
Not sure of the contents.
[Anon.] 1849. Lithuto tsa paliso: khaoganyo ea pele = Tswana spelling book. Platberg: Wesleyan
Methodist Mission Press. Pp 9.
[Anon.] 1850. ... = Plan to study the Bantu tongues scientifically. Cape of Good Hope observer, 2
July 1850, p. 424-428.
Title wanting. Includes “a lengthy communication from the American Mission in Natal addressed to Rev. Dr James
Adamson ... suggesting a plan to study the Bantu tongues scientifically” (Rochlin 1955:173).
Peripherals: S.A. Rochlin, “Some South African language pioneers of the nineteenth century”, African studies, v.
14 (1955) p. 171-173.
[Anon.] 1850. Literature in Africa. The international miscellany of literature, science and art (New
York), v. 1, 3, p. 311.
Brief blurb about Krapf’s translation of various Christian texts into Nyika. Includes a text sample of the Lord’s
Prayer in Nyika.
[Anon.] 1855? English-Zulu manuscript vocabulary, 2 vols. Johannesburg: Strange Collection of
Africana, South African Public Library.
This was “probably made by Silas McKinney about 1855 from a vocabulary used by new missionaries and
originally prepared by Lewis Grout, David Rood and Silas McKinney” (Doke 1959:17n71).
[Anon.] 1859. The Rosetta stone and its inscription. New Englander and Yale review, v. 17, 66, p.
549-550.
URL: cdl.library.cornell.edu/moa/browse.journals/nwng.html
[Anon.] 1861. Die Publikation einzelner Abschnitte der heiligen Schrift in der Hereró-Sprache
durch den Missionar H. Hahn. Zeitschrift für allgemeine Erdkunde, neue Folge, v. 11, p. 67.
[Anon.] 1862. Duala vocabulary. Mission Press. Pp 63.
What Mission Press?
[Anon.] 1862. W.B. Baikie’s Nachforschungen über die Existenz des Einhorns. Zeitschrift für
allgemeine Erdkunde, neue Folge, v. 13, p. 227-228.
Great research theme!
[Anon.] 1865. Buka ea dikao tsa eintla: tse (Rhode Isl.) rutañ go buisa puo ea secuana = First
spelling book. Kuruman: Mission Press. Pp 16.
[Anon.] 1865. Outlines of a grammar of the Susu language. Compiled with the assistance of the
Rev. J.H. Duport. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp 28.
Credited to R.R.; cfr also Duport (1892).
[Anon.] 1865. Mythological legendary tales of South Africa, and of the Esquimaux in Greenland
[= book review of Reynard the Fox in South Africa by Wilhelm Bleek]. The anthropological
review, v. 3, p. 138-145.
[Anon.] 1867. Protokolle der Hererokonferenz 1867. Barmen-Wuppertal: Archiv der Rheinischen
Missionsgesellschaft.
97
[Anon.] 1869. Buka ea dikao tsa ntlha, tse di rutañ go buisa puo ea sicwana = Book that teaches
the Sechuana language. Kuruman: Mission Press. Pp 16.
[Anon.] 1870. Lokwalo loa dikao tsa ntlha, tse di rutañ go buisa puo ea secwana = A book that
teaches the Tswana language. Kuruman: Mission Press. Pp 16.
[Anon.] 1871. English and Secoana phrase book. Thaba ’Nchu (Orange Free State): Church
Mission Press. Pp 56.
[Anon.] 1874/76. Congrès international des orientalistes: compte-rendu de la première session,
Paris 1873. Paris: Adrien Maisonneuve.
Alternate title: Mémoires du congrès international des orientalistes, 1re session, Paris 1873.
[Anon.] 1875. Dictionnaire volof-français, précédé d’un abrégé de la grammaire volofe. SaintJoseph de Ngasobil (Sénégal): Mission de la Congrégation du Saint Esprit et du Saint-Coeur
de Marie. Pp 432.
This may be identical to Kobès (1875).
[Anon.] 1877. Dictionnaire français-pongoué. Mission de la Congrégation du Saint Esprit et du
Saint-Coeur de Marie. Pp 354.
[Anon.] 1877. Vocabulary of the Yao language. Manuscript, ref. 20874 MF. School of Oriental
and African Studies (SOAS), University of London.
[Anon.] 1879. A vocabulary of the Mpongwe language. By American missionaries at Gabon, West
Africa. New York: Mission House. Pp 6, 54.
Issued anonymously -- John Leighton Wilson?
[Anon.] 1879. Dictionary of the English and Benga languages. New York: Mission House. Pp
151.
[Anon.] 1880/81. Atti del IV congresso internazionale degli orientalisti, tenuto in Firenze nel
settembre 1878. Firenze: Le Monnier.
[Anon.] 1881. Dictionnaire pongoué-français. Mission de la Congrégation du Saint Esprit et du
Saint-Coeur de Marie. Pp xxxix, 287.
[Anon.] 1881. Manuel de conversation en kiswahili. Bagamoyo: Mission de la Congrégation du
Saint Esprit et du Saint-Coeur de Marie.
[Anon.] 1883. Sarufi ya Kiswahili = Grammar of Swahili.
What’s this? Source?
[Anon.] 1884/85. Actes du 6ème congrès international des orientalistes, tenu en 1883 à Leide, 4
parties. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
Part 1: compte-rendu des séances. Part 2: section 1: sémitique. Part 3: section 2: aryenne. Part 4: section 3:
africaine; section 4: de l’Extrême-Orient; section 5: polynésienne.
[Anon.] 1885. The Arabic alphabet as used in writing Swahili. Zanzibar.
[Anon.] 1885. Vocabulaire français-kiswahili et kiswahili-français. Alger.
[Anon.] 1887. Syllabaire swahili. Zanzibar: Mission Catholique.
[Anon.] 1889. Berichte des 7. internationalen Orientalisten-Congresses gehalten in Wien im
Jahre 1886. Wien: Alfred Hölder. Pp 129.
[Anon.] 1890. Owé tintan to Ogunû gbe-me / First book of the Ogunû (Dahomian) language / Le
livre premier de la langue ogunû (dahomienne). Porto Novo: Wesleyan Methodist
Missionary Society. Pp 30.
Trilingual. The circumflex in ‹Ogunû› should be a tilde.
[Anon.] 1890. Phrase-book, Swahili-English. Universities’ Mission to Central Africa (UMCA).
Pp 68.
[Anon.] 1891/93. Actes du 8ème congrès international des orientalistes, tenu en 1889 à Stockholm
et à Christiania. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
Part 1: section I: sémitique (fasc 1-2). Part 2: section I: sémitique et de l’Islâm (sous-sections A-B); section II:
aryenne (fasc 1). Part 3: section II: sryenne (fasc 2). Part 4: section III: africaine; section IV: de l’Asie centrale et de
l’Extrême Orient; section V: de la Malaisie et de la Polynésie.
[Anon.] 1891/95. A vocabulary of the languages of Chaga & Taveta, eastern equatorial Africa.
Collected at the Church Missionary stations. Moshi (Tanganyika): Church Missionary
Society (CMS). Pp 126.
98
Possibly this should be credited to Rev. Steggall.
[Anon.] 1892. A practical guide to the use of Arabic alphabet in writing Swahili according to the
usage of the East Coast of Africa. Universities’ Mission to Central Africa (UMCA). Pp 57.
[Anon.] 1892. Ninth international congress of Orientalists: communications, papers, &c. Woking
UK: Oriental University Inst.
Not sure what this is. It’s apparently not the proceedings, though. Perhaps a collection of abstracts and/or papers.
[Anon.] 1892. Regeringsverordening oor spelling van plekname in S.W.A., 1892. Deutsches
Kolonialblatt, v. 111, 16, p. 407-409.
[Anon.] 1893. Omuleshifi ile omukanda uokuleshifa oshikuanjama: a Bantu dialect of the
Ovakuanjama in northern Ovamboland. Cape Town: Townshend, Taylor & Snashall. Pp 13,
2.
[Anon.] 1893. Demoniacal possession in Angola, Africa. Journal of American folklore, v. 6, 23, p.
258.
[Anon.] 1893. Syllabaire swahili. Zanzibar: Mission Catholique.
[Anon.] 1893. Maelezo ya sarufi ya Kiswahili = Grammatical description of Swahili.
Universities’ Mission Press.
[Anon.] 1893. The Rosetta stone. Manufacturer and builder (New York), v. 25, 4, p. 86.
URL: cdl.library.cornell.edu/moa/browse.journals/manu.html
[Anon.] 1894. English-Yao vocabulary, compiled for the use in the Domasi School of the Church
of Scotland Mission. Manuscript, ref. 31518 MF. School of Oriental and African Studies
(SOAS), University of London.
[Anon.] 1894. Vocabulaire français-kisouahili. Publication de l’Etat Indépendant du Congo. Pp
111.
[Anon.] 1895. Elementar-Grammatik der Zulu-Kaffrischen Sprache. Marianhill. Pp 128.
[Anon.] 1895. Eléments de la langue congolaise. Catholic Missionary Society. Pp 95.
[Anon.] 1895/97. Actes du 10ème congrès international des orientalistes: sessions de Genève,
1894. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
Part 1: Comptes rendus des séances. Part 2: section I: Inde; I bis: Linguistique et langues aryennes. Part 3: section
II: Langues sémitiques; section III: Langues musulmanes. Part 4: section IV: Égypte et langues africaines; section V.
Extrême-Orient; section VI: Grèce et Orient; section VII: Géographie et ethnographie orientales.
[Anon.] 1896. Dicionário portuguez olu-nyaneka. Huíla (Angola): Missão da Congregação do
Esprito Santo e do Sagrado Coração de Maria. Pp 126.
The second edition appeared in 1911 with a slight change in the Portuguese orthography.
[Anon.] 1896. The devil bush of West Africa. Journal of American folklore, v. 9, 34, p. 220-222.
[Anon.] 1898. Méthode de lecture en langue soñgay. Paris: Les Pères Blancs.
[Anon.] 1898. Syllabaire français à l’usage des indigènes de langue soñgay. Paris: Les Pères
Blancs.
[Anon.] 1898/99. Actes du 11ème congrès international des orientalistes, Paris, 1897. Paris:
Ernest Leroux.
Part 1 covers Aryan countries; part 2 covers countries in the Far East; part 3 covers Muslim countries; part 4 covers
Hebrew, Phoenecian, Aramaic, Ethiopic, Assyrian; part 5-7 cover Egypt, African languages, the Orient, Greece,
Bysanz, and Oriental folklore and ethnography.
[Anon.] 1899. Vocabulaire mossi. Bulletin du Comité de l’Afrique Française, v. 9, p. 133.
Peripherals: Félix Dubois, “Vocabulaire mossi”, Bulletin du Comité de l’Afrique Française, v. 8 (1898) p. 177-178.
[Anon.] 1900. Essai de grammaire kikemba. Saint-Cloud (?): Imprimerie Belin Frères. Pp xv, vii,
391.
Credited to J.D.
[Anon.] 1901. Rules of orthography for native names of places, persons, etc., in Egypt and the
Sudan. Cairo: War Office.
[Anon.] 1901. Ifa. London: The Religious Tract Society.
Yoruba sayings.
99
[Anon.] 1902. Chopi spelling book. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge
(SPCK). Pp 40.
Includes bible extracts presumably in Lenge, not Copi.
[Anon.] 1902. Dictionnaire volof-français avec abrégé de grammaire volof. Saint-Joseph de
Ngasobil (Sénégal): Mission de la Congrégation du Saint Esprit et du Saint-Coeur de Marie.
[Anon.] 1902. Mang’anja unit of thought. Blantyre: Mission Press. Pp 38.
Contains a vocabulary and model sentences (Doke 1945:68).
[Anon.] 1902. Native names: rules for spelling. Journal of the African Society, v. 1, 4, p. x-xii.
Includes guidelines for spelling African names.
[Anon.] 1902. Brief eines Ewe-Negers an den Missionar A.D. Fies. Zeitschrift für afrikanische,
ozeanische und ostasiatische Sprachen, v. 6, p. 254-260.
[Anon.] 1902. Patriot: woordeboek, Afrikaans-Engels / dictionary Cape Dutch-English. Paarl
(Suid-Afrika): D.F. du Toit & Co. Pp vi, 276.
The first Afrikaans-English dictionary. A new edition appeared 1968, edited by H.J.J.M. van der Merwe.
[Anon.] 1902/03. Actes du 12ème congrès international des orientalistes, Roma, 1899. Florence.
[Anon.] 1903. Orthography of native names in Egypt and the Egyptian Sudan. Cairo: Government
of the Egyptian Sudan.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 3 (1903/04) p. 114.
[Anon.] 1903. The orthography of African names and languages. Journal of the African Society, v.
2, 8, p. 456-459.
[Anon.] 1903. Dictionnaire des communes de l’Algérie. Alger. Pp 265.
[Anon.] 1903. Les soirées littéraires des babemba: fables. Journal of the African Society, v. 3, 9, p.
62-73.
[Anon.] 1903. Swahili phrases and large vocabulary. Mombasa.
[Anon.] 1903. A grammar of the Citonga language. Lebombo (Mozambique): Diocese. Pp 95.
A copy of this apparently exists in Lisbon at Arquivo Histórico do ex-Banco Nacional Ultramarino.
[Anon.] 1904. Primer of the Yalunka language, pt. 1. London: Society for Promoting Christian
Knowledge (SPCK).
[Anon.] 1904. Verhandlungen des 13. internationalen Orientalisten-Kongresses. Hamburg [...]
1902. Leiden.
[Anon.] 1904. Recueil de poésies kabyles (texte zouaoua). Alger.
[Anon.] 1905. The spelling of African words. Journal of the African Society, v. 5, 17, p. 108-109.
[Anon.] 1905. Manuel de la langue bambara. Par un missionaire. Alger: Maison-Carrée,
Imprimerie des Missionnaires d’Afrique (Pères-Blancs). Pp 155.
[Anon.] 1905. Linguistic notes. Journal of the African Society, v. 4, 15, p. 377-378.
Looks at Rev. Crabtree’s translation of the four Gospels into the Masaba language, with comparative material
drawn from Luganda and Swahili Bibles.
[Anon.] 1906/07. Actes du 14ème congrès international des orientalistes, Alger, 1905, 3 parties.
Paris: Ernest Leroux.
Part 1 covers India, China, the Far East, Greece & the Orient; part 2 covers Semitic languages, Egypt, African
languages, African archaeology, Muslim arts; part 3 covers Muslim languages (Arabic, Persian, Turkish).
[Anon.] 1907. Manuel de conversation wolof.
Details wanting. Reprinted 1987 by L’Harmattan in Paris.
[Anon.] 1907. English-Tsonga, Tsonga-English pocket dictionary. Johannesburg: Swiss Mission
in South Africa.
[Anon.] 1907. Report of proceedings of Zulu orthography conference held at Durban, Natal, May
1907. Pp 114.
Details wanting.
[Anon.] 1907. Phrases graduées en français et en kikongo ou langue du bas-Congo. Troisième
édition. Pp 67.
Details wanting.
100
[Anon.] 1907/08. A catalogue of linguistic works in the library of the African Society. Journal of
the African Society, v. 7, p. 284-306, 410-429.
Peripherals: Anon, “Supplement”, Journal of the African Society, v. 11 (1912) p. 1-43.
[Anon.] 1908. Guide pratique de conversation en français, anglais et yoruba ou nago: langue la
plus rèpandue sur la côte occidentale d’Afrique. Strasbourg: F.X. le Roux pour la Société
des Missions Africaines de Lyon. Pp 126.
Credited to C.B. & L.B. (Hintze 1959:70).
[Anon.] 1908. Pokomo-Grammatik mit Uebungsstücken. Neukirchener Missionsanstalt.
Includes a Pokomo-Swahili-German dictionary.
[Anon.] 1909. Actes du 15ème congrès international des orientalistes: session de Copenhague.
Copenhague: Imprimerie Graebe. Pp 87.
[Anon.] 1910. Elementary grammar of the Nilotic-Kavirondo language (Dhö Lwo), together with
some useful phrases, English-Kavirondo and Kavirondo-English vocabulary, and some
exercises with key to the same. London: St. Joseph’s Foreign Missionary Society. Pp 2, ii,
127.
[Anon.] 1911. A dictionary of the Umbundu language. American Board of Commissioners for
Foreign Missions (ABCFM) for the West Central African Mission.
[Anon.] 1911. A dictionary of the Mashona language. London: St. Augustine’s Mission at
Penhalonga.
See Buck (1911).
[Anon.] 1911. Dicionário português-olunyaneka. Segunda edição. Huíla (Angola): Tipografia da
Missão Católica.
[Anon.] 1912. Glossary of Arabic geographical terms, used in maps and route reports in the A.E.
Sudan. Journal of the African Society, v. 11, 42, p. 201-205.
[Anon.] 1912. Actes du 16ème congrès international des orientalistes: session d’Athènes, 6-14
avril 1912. Athènes: Imprimerie “Hestia”. Pp 252.
[Anon.] 1913. ... = Bena vocabulary. Kidugala (Tanganyika).
Title and details wanting. Says Johnston (1922:47n1): “Herr Bernhard Struck informs me that a partial vocabulary
of Bena was printed at Kidugala, German East Africa, in 1913”. He doesn’t say by whom.
[Anon.] 1914. English-Chinyanja. Mitsidi (Nyasaland) & Blantyre: Zambesi Mission Press.
Referred to by Hachipola (1998:113).
[Anon.] 1914. Language studies in Yoruba. Lagos: CMS (Church Missionary Society)
Bookshop. Pp 105.
[Anon.] 1914. A collection of Umbundu-proverbs, adages and conundrums. West Central African
Mission. Pp 80.
[Anon.] 1915. Essai de grammaire soussou. Paris. Pp 125.
[Anon.] 1915. English-Chinyanja dictionary. Blantyre: United Society for Christian Literature
(USCL) for the Zambesi Industrial Mission. Pp xv, 381.
[Anon.] 1915. A phrase book in English and Citonga, for the use of settlers in the country of the
Ba Tonga. Marianhill: Mission Press for the Chikuni Mission. Pp 38.
[Anon.] 1916. Welle tutor and vocabulary.
Mentioned to by Doke (1945:29).
[Anon.] 1917. Grammar and exercises in Chi-mang’anja. Blantyre: Mission Press. Pp 28.
[Anon.] 1918. Portuguese Nyasaland vocabularies: Nyanja, Yao, Ronga, Portuguese, Makua,
Swahili. London: Naval Intelligence Dept., Admiralty of England. Pp iv, 214.
[Anon.] 1919. Breve método da língua lunyaneka, falada nas regiões da Huíla e Gambos. Huíla
(Angola): Tipografia da Missão Católica. Pp viii, 148.
Further editions of this appeared in 1938, 1958, and perhaps later too. Says Strohmeyer & Moritz (1975:305):
“deve tratar-se da 3a edição do: Guia de conversação olunyaneka de J.S. da Silva”.
Abbadie, Antoine [Thompson] d’. 18xx. ... [Title wanting]. The Athenaeum: journal of literature,
science, the fine arts, music and the drama, v. (?), p. (?).
101
“In a letter from M. d’Abbadie, published in the Athenaeum, that gentleman states that his brother had visited the
sources of the Abháï, or Bruce’s Nile, crossed the river in several places, made frequent excursions into the Gállá
country, and proceeded to within 3 days’ journey of Enarea ... M. Arnauld d’Antoine had obtained a letter in two
languages, one of which, the Ilmorna, has an alphabet wholly unknown: he also discovered a MS. in two volumes
quarto, on vellum, in Amharic, composed by the favourite companion of Mohammed Grañ, the Tamerlane of
Abyssinia, whose exploits are only known by extracts from Ludolf and Bruce. This MS. abounds in descriptions and
names of places from Harar Geï to Sennár ...” (Greenough 1841:lv-lvi).
Abbadie, Antoine [Thompson] d’. 1843. Lettres à M. Jules Mohl: 1. sur les langues éthiopiennes;
2. sur la langue saho; 3. sur la langue hamtönga. Journal asiatique, 4ème série, v. 2 [43], p.
102-118, 388-396.
Abbadie, Antoine [Thompson] d’. 1848. Lettres à M. Jules Mohl. Journal asiatique, 4ème série, v.
12 [53], p. 370-376.
Unsure about the contents of this; somehow related to Cushitic studies though.
Abbadie, Antoine [Thompson] d’. 1859. Note sur le kafa [pt. 1]. Bulletin de la Société de
Géographie (Paris), 4ème série, v. 16, p. 170-180.
Abbadie, Antoine [Thompson] d’. 1859. Catalogue raisonné de manuscrits éthiopiens
appartenant à Antoine d’Abbadie. Paris. Pp xv, 236.
Includes some 130-ish annotated entries.
Abbadie, Antoine [Thompson] d’. 1860. Note sur le kafa [pt. 2]. Bulletin de la Société de
Géographie (Paris), 4ème série, v. 18, p. 355.
Abbadie, Antoine [Thompson] d’. 1872. Langues de Kham. Paris.
Not sure what this contains.
Abbadie, Antoine [Thompson] d’. 1881. Dictionnaire de la langue Amariñña. Actes de la Société
Philologique, #10. Paris. Pp xlvii, 1336 (columns).
Abbadie, Antoine [Thompson] d’. 1882. Note sur le mot “jana” qui designe l’eléphant dans le
groupe des langues agau. Bulletin de Société Philologique, v. 1, p. 67-71.
Abbadie, Antoine [Thompson] d’. 1912. Catalogue des manuscrits éthiopiens de la collection
Antoine d’Abbadie. Nouvelle édition, revisé. Paris. Pp x, 170.
Includes some 180-ish annotated entries.
Peripherals: Carlo Conti Rossini, “Notice sur les manuscrits éthiopiens de la collection d’Abbadie”, Journal
asiatique, 11ème série, v. 6 (1915) p. 189-238.
Abel, Hans. 1910. Zur Tonverschmelzung im Altägyptischen. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs’sche
Buchhandlung. Pp iv, 94.
Abel, Hans. 1913. Ein Erzählung im Dialekt von Ermenne (Nubien). Abhandlungen der
königlichen sächsischen Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften, philosophisch-philologischen
Classe, #29:8. Leipzig: B.G. Teubner. Pp 96.
Uncertain about the series title.
Peripherals: Hugo Schuchardt, Wiener Zeitschrift für die Kunde des Morgenlandes, v. ? (1913) p. 455-473.
Abel, Karl. 1876/77. Koptische
Verlagsbuchhandlung. Pp 842.
Untersuchungen. Berlin: Ferdinand Dümmlers
Reprinted 1970 at Niederwalluf bei Wiesbaden (ISBN-10 3-500-22450-4).
Peripherals: Karl Abel, Zur Ägyptischen Kritik (Berlin, 1916).
Abel, Karl. 1878. Zur ägyptischen Etymologie. Berlin: Leo Liepmannssohn. Pp 17.
Abel, Karl. 1878. Zur ägyptischen Kritik. Berlin. Pp 16.
Abel, Karl. 1879. Language and the Egyptian language [translated by Poultney Bigelow]. New
Englander and Yale review, v. 38, 153, p. 815-831.
URL: cdl.library.cornell.edu/moa/browse.journals/nwng.html
Abel, Karl. 1886. Einleitung in ein ägyptisch-indoeuropäisches Wurzelwörterbuch. Leipzig: W.
Friedrich. Pp x, 393.
Abel, Karl. 1890. Ägyptisch-indoeuropäische Sprachverwandtschaft. Einzelbeitrage zur
allgemeinen und vergleichenden Sprachwissenschaft, #6. Leipzig: W. Friedrich. Pp 58.
Peripherals: Raoul de la Grasserie, “De la parenté entre l’égyptien, les langues sémitiques et les langues
indoeuropéennes d’après les travaux de M.K. Abel”, Le muséon, v. 13 (1894) p. 78-88, 149-175, 269-298, 321346.
102
Abercromby, John A. 1917. A study of the ancient speech of the Canary Islands. Harvard African
studies (Cambridge MA), v. 1 (spec. theme: ‘Varia Africana I’, ed. by Oric Bates), p. 95-129.
The title is sometimes (erroneously) given as “The language of the Canary Islanders”.
Abès, M. 1916. Première année de langue berbère (dialecte du Maroc central). Rabat. Pp 147.
Contains grammar, vocabulary and sample texts.
Abiven, O. [Père]. 1896. Essai de grammaire malinkée. Saint-Michel-en-Priziac (?). Pp 428.
Published without author’s name. Not sure about the pagination.
Abiven, O. [Père]. 1896. Essai de dictionnaire pratique français-malinkée. St. Louis (Senegal):
Mission de la Congrégation du Saint Esprit et du Saint-Coeur de Marie. Pp iv, 429.
There may exist a later edition of this.
Abiven, O. [Père]. 1900. Dictionnaire malinkée-français. Saint-Michel-en-Priziac (?). Pp 118.
Abiven, O. [Père]. 1900. Grammaire malinké. Paris.
Abiven, O. [Père]. 1900. Méthode de lecture malinkée. Paris. Pp 22.
Abiven, O. [Père]. 1906. Dictionnaire français-malinké et malinké-français, précéde d’un abrégé
de grammaire malinké. Conakry: Mission de la Congrégation du Saint Esprit et du SaintCoeur de Marie. Pp xliv, 176.
Issued anonymously.
Acker, Auguste van. 1907. Dictionnaire kitabwa-français et français-kitabwa. Annales du Musée
du Congo, ethnographie et anthropologie, série 5: linguistique, #1:1. Tervuren. Pp 170.
Adam, Abdallah; Westermann, Diedrich. 1913. Erzählungen in Fulfulde, niedergeschrieben von
Abdallah Adam. Transkribiert, übersetzt und mit einem Nachtrag mit Erzählungen im Dialekt
von Sokoto. Lehrbücher des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, #30. Berlin: Georg
Reimer. Pp x, 52, 50.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 13 (1913/14) p. 115-119; A. Klingenheben, Zeitschrift für
Kolonialsprachen, v. 4 (1913/14) p. 79-80.
Adam, G. 1904. Légendes historiques du pays de Nioro (sahel). Paris: Augustin Challamel.
Adams, [Dr]. 18xx. Manuscript grammar of Zulu. Pp c.50.
Comprising “a brief grammatical outline ... amounting to some three or four dozen pages” (Grout 1849). The
manuscript seems to have disappeared, though. “Is it possible that Dr Adams’s manuscript is still in existence?”
asks Doke (1959:15).
Peripherals: Rev. Grout, “The Zulu and other dialects of southern Africa”, Journal of the American Oriental Society,
v. 1 (1849) p. 397-433; C.M. Doke, “Bantu language pioneers of the nineteenth century”, African studies, v. 14
(1940) p. 207-246; C.M. Doke, “Bantu language pioneers of the nineteenth century” (revised), African studies, v.
18 (1959) p. 1-27.
Adams, H.M. 1856. Fañwe primer and vocabulary. Gaboon Mission of the American Board of
Foreign Mission. Pp 199.
Adams, H.M. 1881. Fañwe primer and vocabulary. Second edition, revised by J. Bushnell and
published by R.H. Nassau. Gaboon Mission of the American Board of Foreign Mission.
This is sometimes credited to the publisher, Nassau.
Adams, P.G.A. 1907. Die Sprache der Ba-Nôho. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische
Sprachen, v. 10, III, p. 34-83.
Father G.A. Adams, among others, has “contributed valuable information about the tongues of the West Kamerun
group between 1898 and 1910” (Johnston 1919:13).
Peripherals: Carl Meinhof, Anthropos, v. 3 (1908) p. 383.
Adams, P.G.A. 1907. Die Banôho und Bapuku in Kamerun. Anthropos: internationale Zeitschrift
für Völker- und Sprachenkunde, v. 2, p. 1022-1028.
Adams, Robert. 1816. The narrative of Robert Adams, a sailor who was wrecked on the western
coast of Africa, in the year 1810, was detained three years in slavery by the Arabs of the
Great Desert, and resided several months in the city of Tombuctoo. Edited by Simon Cock.
London: William Bulmer & Co. for John Murray. Pp xxxix, 231.
Adams could neither read nor write, so his narrative was originally written down by someone else. Includes some
Songhai vocabulary material (Latham 1847:186).
Adams, Robert. 1817. Interior of Africa. The North American review (Cedar Falls IO), v. 5, 13, p.
11-26.
103
Includes material not included in the original narrative, written down by “a gentleman of Boston”. (Adams himself
was illiterate.) “It was withheld from the publick [sic], because the writer upon further inquiry, found reasons for
suspecting the veracity of Adams, particularly in regard to what he says of Tombuctoo, and of his travels among the
negroes” (p11).
URL: cdl.library.cornell.edu/moa/browse.journals/nora.html
Adelung, Johann Christoph. 1812/17. Mithridates, oder allgemeine Sprachenkunde mit dem Vater
unser als Sprachprobe in beynahe fünfhundert Sprachen und Mundarten, Bde 3-4. Berlin:
Christian Friedrich Voss & Sohn.
Includes lexical specimens for many language, incl. southern Bantu languages (Xhosa, Tswana, Ronga), Mandingo,
Susu, Kanga (?), Mangree (?), Gien (?), Fetu (Coastal Guang?), Moko (?), Krepee (Gbe), Amina (Nyo Kwa), Asianten
(Asante), Wawu (?), Calbra (Efik), Karaba (Efik), Ibo (Ibibio?), Ada (?), Camançons (?), Fulah, Fellatah (Sokoto
Fula), Afnu (Hausa?), Howssa (Hausa), Begirma (p. 152-153), Bornu, Gaog, Affadèh = Kanuri? (p. 231-235), Móbba
(Maba?), Dahera, Schilluk (p. 235-239), “Sprachproben der Schilluk-Sprache nach handschriftlichen Nachrichten
von Dr Seetzen” (p. 237-238), Dar Fur, Zeghawa, Dar Runga, Dar Kulla (p. 239-244), Gallas (p. 247-254), Tiggry,
Argubba, Massua (Tigré?), Suáken (Beja?), Korana (p. 256), Hottentot (p. 267-275), Khoi-San (p. 289-305).
Reprinted 1970 by Georg Olms Verlag in Hildesheim & New York.
Afework, G.J. 1905. Grammatica della lingua amarica: metodo pratico per l’insegnamento.
Roma. Pp 327.
Akukonkedua, Mafara. 1900. Dicionário cafre-tetense-português: idioma fallado no districto de
Tete e na vasta regi o do Zambeze inferior. Tradução de P. Victor Courtois. Coimbra:
Imprensa da Universidade. Pp xvii, 81.
Sometimes credited to Courtois. (See also Courtois 1899.).
Alaqâ Tâye. 1889. Matshafa sawâsew. Menkullu (Ethiopia): Tipografia Evangelica (Swedish
Mission). Pp 336, 14, 2.
Grammar of Ge‘ez, written in Amharic.
Alaqâ Tâye. 1918. Matshafa sawâsew. Second edition. Addis Ababa.
Grammar of Ge‘ez, written in Amharic.
Alarcon, Jerónimo M. Usera y. 1845. Ensayo gramátical del idioma de la raza africana de Nano,
por otro nombre Cruman, raza noble, y una de las mas relacionadas en todo el golfo de
Guinea y costa del Africa intertropical del oeste. Madrid: Sociedad Literaria y Tipográfica.
Pp 33.
Albino, J. 1859. Manual del lenguaje vulgar de los moros de la Riff. Cádiz (España).
Albright, William Foxwell. 1918. Notes on Egypto-Semitic etymology [pt. 1-2]. American journal
of Semitic languages and literature, v. 34, p. 81-98, 215-255.
A third part appeared 1927.
Allen, John Willoughby Tarleton. 1898-1977. Manuscripts, papers, correspondences, etc.
Manuscripts and notes in 13 boxes, ref. GB 0102 PP MS 20. School of Oriental and African
Studies (SOAS), University of London.
Includes papers/manuscripts on Swahili culture and literature, personal correspondence, stuff related to the Britain
Tanzania Society, tape recordings (poetry), fotocopies of various materials. Information given here as listed in the
AIM25 database; cfr also Anderson & Seton (1995:52), who claim only 10 boxes.
Allen, S.A. 1885. Ise Owe. Lagos: General Printing Press.
Includes 595 Yoruba proverbs (Hintze 1959:68).
Almeida, João Ferreira d’. 1941. Yishima / Provérbios. Translated into Chokwe by Malcolm B.
MacJanet of the Christian Missions in Many Lands. Lisboa: Escrituras Sagradas. Pp 33, 33.
The proverbs herein were originally translated into Portuguese sometime during the 17th century. Here MacJannet
has translated them back into Chokwe.
Almkvist, Hermann. 1875. Den semitiska språkstammens pronomen: bidrag till en jämförande
semitisk grammatik, 1: inledning; om det jämförande studiet af de semitiska språken och
deras förhållande till de ariska och hamitiska = The pronouns of the Semitic family:
contribution to a comparative Semitic grammar, 1: introduction; on comparative studies of
Semitic languages and their relationship to Aryan and Hamitic. Uppsala: Academ.
Boctryck.
Peripherals: Friedrich Philippi, Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 28 (1874) p. 366-379.
Almkvist, Hermann. 1881. Die Bischari-Sprache Tu-Bedawie in Nordost-Afrika beschreibend und
vergleichend dargestellt, Bd 1. Nova acta regiae societatis scientarium upsaliensis, serie 3,
#11:1/2. Uppsala. Pp vi, 302.
104
This first part contains a grammar. A subsequent second part (dated 1885) includes a lexicon.
Almkvist, Hermann. 1885. Die Bischari-Sprache Tu-Bedawie in Nordost-Afrika beschreibend und
vergleichend dargestellt, Bd 2: Bischari-deutsches und deutsch-bischarisches Wörterbuch,
nebst arabischem Wortverzeichnisse. Nova acta regiae societatis scientarium upsaliensis,
serie 3, #12:7. Uppsala. Pp viii, 114.
Almkvist, Hermann. 1896. Nubiska språket = The Nubian language. In: Nordisk familjebok, p. (?).
Stockholm.
Almkvist, Hermann. 1911. Nubische Studien im Sudan 1877-78. Auch dem Nachlass
herausgegeben von K.V. Zettersteen. Uppsala. Pp xxxviii, 282.
Unsure about the contents of this.
Alone, John Philip Herbert Mackenzie [Maj.]. 1909. Short manual, with vocabulary, of the
Amharic language. Prepared for the General Staff. London: Harrison for H.M. Stationary
Office. Pp 213.
Althaus, Gerhard. 1894. Sprachstudien im Dschaggaland. Evangelisch-lutherisches Missionsblatt
(Leipzig), v. (?), p. 325ff.
Listed in Schadeberg’s Bantu Bibliography.
Althaus, Gerhard. 1898. Zur Frage der Bibelübersetzung in die Dschaggasprache. Jahresbericht
der evangelisch-lutherischen Mission, v. 87, p. 75-86.
Amat, Charles. 1888. Le m’zab et les m’zabites. Paris: Augustin Challamel. Pp iii, 306.
Ambrosius, P. 1890. Grammatik der Zulu-Kaffrischen Sprache (für den Schulgebrauch und
Privatstudium). Marianhill: Trappist Monastery. Pp xii, 210.
This could be a locally distributed typescript rather than a “proper” publication.
Amery, Harold François Saphir [Capt.]. 1905. English-Arabic vocabulary for the use of officials in
the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan. Cairo: Al-Mokattam Printing Office. Pp xiii, 451.
Peripherals: R.C.T., Man, v. 6 (1906) p. 48.
Amess, M. 1917. Ökönyöñ words, numerals, phrases, sentences and the Prodigal Son. Calabar:
Hope-Waddell Mission.
The word list included herein was later republished by Jeffreys (1970).
Peripherals: M.D.W. Jeffreys, African studies, v. 29 (1970) p. 293-294.
Amet, M. 1912. Vocabulaire français-luguaret et luguaret-français. Bruxelles. Pp 28.
Lugbara.
Anaman, Jacob Benjamin. 1894. The Fanti spelling book. Prepared at the request of the Cape
Coast Wesleyan Sunday School Teachers’ Meeting. Cape Coast: Wesleyan Mission House.
Pp 24.
Anaman, Jacob Benjamin. 1919. Simple stories from Gold Coast history, book 2. Cape Coast
Castle: Fanti Book Depot. Pp 24.
“The stories which are mainly from Ghanaian traditional history, are aimed at acquainting elementary schoolchildren with this aspect of Ghanaian culture. Most of the footnotes explaining some of the obscure names are
today of great historical significance” (Ademekey 1970:2).
Ancessi, V. 1872. Etudes de grammaire comparée, 1: l’S causatif et le thème N dans les langues
de Sem et de Cham. Paris. Pp [51]-148.
Offprints?
Ancessi, V. 1873. Etudes de grammaire comparée, 2: le thème M dans les langues de Sem et de
Cham. Paris. Pp [95]-144.
Offprints?
Ancessi, V. 1875. Etudes de grammaire comparée, 3: la loi fondamentale de la formation
trilittère; les adformantes dans les langues sémitiques. Paris. Pp 72.
Anderson, W.G. 1897. An introductory grammar of the Sena language spoken on the lower
Zambesi. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp vi, 61.
Andersson, Karl Johan. 1855. Explorations in South Africa with route from Walfisch Bay to Lake
Ngami, and ascent to the Tiogé River (Damara). Journal of the Royal Geographical Society
of London, v. 25, p. 79-107.
Includes a “Comparative table of Otjiherero, Bayeye, and Chylimanse words” (p. 96-100).
105
Appleyard, John Whittle. 1847. Euphonic concord, general remarks; The Congo and Damara
dialects; The Sechuana dialects; The Kaffir dialects; Unclassified dialects of the allitteral
class. The South African Christian watchman and missionary magazine, v. 3-7, p. (?).
Five articles spread over several issues. Details wanting. The “dialects” of the allitteral class (i.e. the Bantu
languages) are divided into four branches, viz. Congo (= Kikongo), Damara (Herero), Sechuana (Sotho-Tswana), and
Kafir (Nguni). To these, the author adds an unclassified category comprising Yao, Swahili, Kamba, and Kauma (cfr
Doke 1960).
Peripherals: C.M. Doke, “The growth of comparative Bantu philology (revised)”, African studies, v. 19 (1960) p.
193-218.
Appleyard, John Whittle. 1847. Hottentot dialects; Hottentot grammar, Bushman dialects. The
South African Christian watchman and missionary magazine, v. 1-2, p. (?).
Two articles in separate issues. Details wanting.
Appleyard, John Whittle. 1850. The Kafir language: comprising a sketch of its history, which
includes a general classification of South African dialects, ethnographical and geographical
remarks upon its nature and a grammar. With a supplement by Carl F. Wuras on the
Hottentot grammar in the Korana dialect. King William’s Town: Wesleyan Missionary
Society. Pp xxii, 390.
Includes comparisons between Xhosa and Tswana.
URL: books.google.com/books?id=mssNAAAAQAAJ
Peripherals: C.M. Doke, “Bantu language pioneers of the nineteenth century”, African studies, v. 14 (1940) p. 207246; C.M. Doke, “Bantu language pioneers of the nineteenth century” (revised), African studies, v. 18 (1959) p. 127; C.M. Doke, “The growth of comparative Bantu philology (revised)”, African studies, v. 19 (1960) p. 193-218.
Arbousset, Jean Thomas; Daumas, François. 1842. Relation d’un voyage d’exploration au nordest de la colonie du Cap de Bonne-Espérance, entrepris dans les mois de Mars, Avril et
Mai, 1836. Paris: A. Bertrand. Pp x, 620.
Includes stuff on the Southern Sotho and Zulu, plus samples of various Bushman languages, e.g. Seroa (p. 510-516).
Various extracts from Arbousset’s journal were reprinted 1932 as Voyage d’exploration aux Montagnes Bleues (253
pp) by Société des Missions Evangéliques in Paris.
Arbousset, Jean Thomas; Daumas, François. 1846. Narrative of an exploratory tour to the northeast of the colony of the Cape of Good Hope. Translated from French by John Crumbie
Brown. Cape Town: Robertson & Solomon. Pp xii, 329.
Reprinted 1968 by Cornelis Struik in Cape Town (Africana collectanea, #27).
Archbell, James. 1833. Lichokopo tsa ba Wesliana metedista [...] koarileng mo puong ia Sicuana.
Platberg: Wesliana.
Unsure about the contents.
Archbell, James. 1837. A grammar of the Bechuana language. With an introduction by William
Boyce. Grahamstown: Meurant & Godlonton. Pp xxii, 82.
Arensdorff, L. 1913. Manuel pratique de la langue peulh (dialecte de la Guinée française):
grammaire, dialogues, contes et fabliaux, correspondances, etc. Paris: Librairie Orientaliste
Paul Geuthner. Pp xxii, 424.
Reprinted 1966 by Librairie Orientaliste Paul Geuthner in Paris. (Possibly the word “Manuel” was changed for
“Méthode” on the reprint.).
Armbruster, Charles Hubert. 1908. Initia amharica - an introduction to spoken Amharic, 1:
grammar. Cambridge University Press. Pp xxiii, 398.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 8 (1908/09) p. 446-447.
Armbruster, Charles Hubert. 1910. Initia amharica - an introduction to spoken Amharic, 2:
English-Amharic vocabulary with phrases. Cambridge University Press. Pp xxviii, 504.
Arnaud, R. 1900. Contribution à l’étude de la langue peuhle ou foulhaniyya [pt. 1-2]. Bulletin de la
Société de Géographie d’Alger, v. 5, p. 284-289, 432-437.
Société de Géographie d’Alger, v. 6, p. 152-157, 321-328, 600-604.
Société de Géographie d’Alger, v. 7, p. 156-160, 326-330, 488-493, 614-630.
106
Arnett, E.J. 1910. A Hausa chronicle. Journal of the African Society, v. 9, 34, p. 161-167.
Arnoux, Alex. [Père]. 1912. Le culte de la société secrète des imandwa au Ruanda [pt. 1-3].
Anthropos: internationale Zeitschrift für Völker- und Sprachenkunde, v. 7, p. 273-295, 529558, 840-874.
Arnoux, Alex. [Père]. 1913. Le culte de la société secrète des imandwa au Ruanda [pt. 4-5].
Anthropos: internationale Zeitschrift für Völker- und Sprachenkunde, v. 8, p. 110-134, 754774.
Auer, John Gottlieb. 1870. Elements of the Gedebo language for the use of schools in the Prot. Ep.
Mission at and near Cape Palmas, W.A. Stuttgart: J.F. Steinkopf. Pp 50.
Augustiny, Julius. 1914. Kurzer Abriss des Madschamedialekts. Archiv für das Studium der
deutscher Kolonialsprachen, #16. Berlin: Georg Reimer. Pp x, 106.
Reprinted 1964 by Gregg Press/International (ISBN-10 0-576-11451-0).
Autrique, Emile Jean Marie; others. 1912. Vocabulaire français-mangbetu et mangbetu-français.
Bruxelles: Imprimerie Veuve Monnom. Pp 144.
Avezac, Armand d’. 1845? Esquisse grammaticale de la langue yeboue.
This seems to be a Yoruba grammar. Says Latham (1847:171): “Monsieur D’Avezac’s researches are founded upon
the study of the Yebu language under a native of the name Ochi-Fekoue, resident in Paris”. Not sure if this is a standalone publication or included as a section in a larger work; or perhaps it’s a manuscript (though see Avezac 1845).
Avezac, G. d’. 1845. Vocabulaires guiolof, manding, foule, saracole, séraire, bagnon et floupe,
recueillis à la côte d’Afrique pour le service de l’ancienne Compagnie Royale du Sénégal.
Mémoires de la Société Ethnologique, #2. Paris.
Some (all?) of the vocabularies were collected during the 17th century (cfr Hair 1967). Latham (1847:159) gives the
title as Dictionnaire des langues françaises et negres dont on se sert dans la concession de la Compagnie Royal du
Sénégal, savoir: guiolof, foule, mandingue, saracolé, séraire, bagnon, floupe, papel, bizagots, nalous, et sapi. He
adds that “the four last [vocabularies] are missing” (idem). Apparently there’s a Benin (Edo) word list in there, too
(idem:171).
Avezac-Macaya, Marie Armand Pascal de. 1840. Les documents recueillis jusqu’a ce jour pour
l’étude de la langue berbère et sur divers manuscrits anciens en cette langue qu’il importe de
rechercher. Bulletin de la Société de Géographie (Paris), 2ème série, v. 14, p. 223-39.
Not sure if the jorno is correct. Could be some other Geographical Society.
Avezac-Macaya, Marie Armand Pascal de. 1840. Notes pour l’étude de la langue berbère. Paris.
Axenfeld, K. 1908. Die Sprachenfrage in Ostafrika vom Standpunkt der Mission aus betrachtet.
Allgemeine Missionszeitschrift, v. 35, p. 561-573.
Ayliff, John. 1846. Vocabulary of the Kafir language. London: Wesleyan Methodist Mission
Press.
Includes an English-Xhosa vocabulary of c.4000 words.
Ayliff, John. 1863. Vocabulary of the Kafir language. Second edition. London: Wesleyan
Methodist Mission Press.
Aymard, A. [Capt.]. 1911. Langue tamacheq. L’Afrique française: bulletin mensuel du Comité de
l’Afrique Francaise et du Comité du Maroc, v. 21, p. 200-205.
Bachmann, F. 1889/90. Wörterbuch Deutsch-Pondo. Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 3, p.
40-76.
Bachmann, Tr. 1915/16. Nyiha Märchen. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 6, 2, p. 81-101.
Baeyens, [?]. 1913. Les lesa. La revue congolaise, v. 4, p. 192-143, 193-206, 257-270, 321-336.
The fourth part contains a small Sakata vocabulary (Tylleskär 1989:145).
Baikie, William Balfour [Dr]. 1861. Observations on the Háusa and Fulfúlde languages, with
examples. Printed for private circulation. London. Pp 5, 29.
Copy available at the Bodleian Library, Oxford University.
107
Baillet, A. 1882. Dialectes égyptiens [pt. 1]. Recueil de travaux relatifs à la philologie et à
l’archéologie égyptiennes et assyriennes, v. 3, p. 32-42.
Baillet, A. 1883. Dialectes égyptiens [pt. 2]. Recueil de travaux relatifs à la philologie et à
l’archéologie égyptiennes et assyriennes, v. 4, p. 12-20.
Baillet, A. 1905. Les noms de l’esclave en egyptien [pt. 1-2]. Recueil de travaux relatifs à la
philologie et à l’archéologie égyptiennes et assyriennes, v. 27, p. 32-38, 193-217.
Baillet, A. 1906. Les noms de l’esclave en egyptien [pt. 3]. Recueil de travaux relatifs à la
philologie et à l’archéologie égyptiennes et assyriennes, v. 28, p. 113-131.
Baillet, A. 1907. Les noms de l’esclave en egyptien [pt. 4]. Recueil de travaux relatifs à la
Bailleul, P. 1902. Petit dictionnaire de la langue abouré. Dabou (Côte d’Ivoire).
Bain, James Alexander. 1891. Collections for the Mwamba language, spoken at the north end of
Lake Nyasa. Livingstonia: Mission Press. Pp vi, 34.
Baissac, Charles. 1880. Etude sur le patois créole mauricien. Nancy (France): Imprimerie BergerLevrault. Pp lvii, 233.
Baissac, Charles. 1888. Le folk-lore de l’Île-Maurice: texte créole et traduction française. Paris:
Maisonneuve Frères et Ch Leclerc. Pp xix, 466.
Baker, Edward. 1845. An outline of a grammar of the Madagascar language, as spoken by the
Hovas. Mauritius: E. Baker. Pp iv, 44.
Reprinted 1864 by W.M. Watts in London.
Baker, [Miss]. 1906. Unpublished collection of more than 200 Bahima proverbs. Mbarara
(Uganda): Church Missionary Society (CMS).
Referred to by Taylor (1962:149).
Baker, Samuel White. 1866. Words in Obbo, Latuka and Bari. In: The Albert N’yanza: great
basin of the Nile and exploration of the Nile sources, v. 1, p. 245. London: Macmillan.
Balbi, Adrien. 1826. Atlas ethnographique du globe, ou classification des peuples anciens et
modernes d’après leurs langues. Paris: Rey et Gravier.
The author divides the African languages into five geographical regions: i) Nile Region; ii) Atlas Region; iii)
Maritime Negro of Guinea and Senegambia; iv) South African Region; and v) Sudan and Interior Negro. Moreover,
he uses the label “Famille troglodyte” for Beja.
193-218.
Banfield, Alexander W. 1914/16. Dictionary of the Nupe language, 1: Nupe-English, 2 vols.
Shonga (Niger): Niger Press. Pp xviii, 514; 271.
Reprinted by Gregg International at Farnborough (ISBN-10 0-576-11942-3; 514+271 pp).
Banfield, Alexander W. 1916. Gamaga nya Nupe = Nupe proverbs. Shonga (Niger): Niger Press.
Pp 124.
Includes 623 Nupe proverbs (Hintze 1959:79).
Banfield, Alexander W.; MacIntyre, John Lester. 1915. A grammar of the Nupe language,
together with a vocabulary. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK).
Pp viii, 186.
Bang, W. 1889/90. Zwei Objektsakkusative bei Nominibus im Nuba. Zeitschrift für afrikanische
Sprachen, v. 3, p. 80.
Bareau, M.; Reding, M. 1912. Vocabulaire français-mobenge et mobenge-français. Bruxelles:
Imprimerie Veuve Monnom. Pp 70.
Issued anonymously.
Barfield, John. 1884. The concords of the Congo language, as spoken at Palaballa, being a
contribution to the syntax of the Congo tongue. London: East London Missions Inst. Pp
160.
“This is a most interesting study of syntax, and deserves more attention than has hitherto been accorded to it”
(Doke 1945:18).
Barker, William Henry; Sinclair, Cecilia. (Ed.) 1917. West African folk-tales. London: George G.
Harrap & Co. Pp 184.
108
Barlow, Arthur Ruffell. 1914. Tentative studies in Kikuyu grammar and idiom. Edinburgh:
Foreign Mission Committee, Church of Scottland. Pp xii, 236.
Reprinted several times, e.g. 1931 and 1946. Some reprints were apparently published also by the Society for
Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK) in London. Later edition retitled Studies in Kikuyu grammar and idiom.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 14 (1915) p. 337-339.
Barrett, W.E.H. 1912. A’Kikuyu fairy tales (Rogano) [pt. 1-3]. Man: a record of anthropological
science, v. 12, p. 41-42 (art. 22), 112-114 (art. 57), 183-185 (art. 98).
Barrett, W.E.H. 1913. A’Kikuyu fairy tales (Rogano) [pt. 4-6]. Man: a record of anthropological
science, v. 13, p. 10-11 (art. 6), 24-25 (art. 14), 73-76 (art. 43).
Barros, Marcellino Márques de. 1885. Notas sobre as linguas e dialectos da Guiné, e uma
colleccão de 30 poesias crioulas. Journal des colónias, 23 Junho 1885, p. (?).
Barrow, John. 1801. Voyage dans la partie méridionale de l’Afrique, fait dans les années 1797 et
1798: contenant des observations sur la géologie, la géographie, l’histoire naturelle de ce
continent et une esquisse du caractère physique et moral des diverses races d’habitants qui
environments l’establissement du cap de Bonne-Esperance, suivi de la description de l’état
present, de la population et du produit de cette importante colonie, 2 vols. Traduit de
l’anglais par L. Degranpré. Paris: E. Dentu. Pp xvi, 403; 326.
Barrow, John. 1801. Reisen in das Innere von Südafrika in den Jahren 1797 und 1798, Bd 1. Aus
dem englischen mit Anmerkungen übersetzt. Leipzig: Rein.
Barrow, John. 1801/04. Travels into the interior of southern Africa (1797-1798), in which are
described the character and the condition of the Dutch colonists of the Cape of Good Hope,
and of the several tribes of natives beyond its limits; the natural history of such subjects as
occured in the animal, mineral and vegetable kingdoms; and the geography of the southern
extremity of Africa; comprehending also a topographical and statistical sketch of Cape
Colony, with an inquiry into its importance as a naval and military station, as a commercial
emporium, and as a territorial possession, 2 vols. London: T. Cadell & W. Davies. Pp xvi,
427; 373.
Includes a vocabulary of 34 Xhosa words (which are contrasted with Khoekhoe).
Peripherals: C.M. Doke, “Bantu language pioneers of the nineteenth century”, African studies, v. 14 (1940) p. 207246; C.M. Doke, “Bantu language pioneers of the nineteenth century” (revised), African studies, v. 18 (1959) p. 127; Mary Louise Pratt, “Scratches on the face of the country, or, what Mr Barrow saw in the land of the Bushmen”,
Critical inquiry, v. 12 (1985) p. 119-143.
Barrow, John. 1802. A narrative of the travels in the interior of southern Africa (1797-1798), from
the Cape of Good Hope to Graaff Reynet and the countries of the Kaffers, Bosjemans,
Namaquas, etc. Abridged(?) edition. London: Kerby. Pp 80.
The unabridged edition includes a short Xhosa vocabulary. Not sure this edition does.
Barrow, John. 1805. Neue Reise in das Innere von Südafrika, nebst Robert Semple’s Beschreibung
der Capstadt und Schilderung seiner Einwohner. Aus dem englischen übersetzt von J.A.
Bergk. Wien: Doll in Kommission. Pp viii, 9-429.
Looks like an abridged edition.
Barrow, John. 1805. Reisen in das Innere von Südafrika in den Jahren 1797 und 1798, Bd 2. Aus
dem englischen mit Anmerkungen übersetzt, und herausgegeben von Theophil Friedrich
Ehrmann. Weimar: Landes-Industrie-Comptoir.
Barrow, John. 1806. Nouveau voyage dans la partie méridionale de l’Afrique, 2 vols. Traduit de
l’anglais par C.A.W. Paris: E. Dentu. Pp x, 310, maps; 312, maps.
Barrow, John. 1806. An account of travels into the interior of southern Africa, 1797-1798, in
which are described the character and condition of the Dutch colonists of the Cape of Good
Hope, and the several tribes of natives beyond the limits; the natural history of such subjects
as occured in the animal, vegetable and mineral kingdoms, and sketches of the physical and
moral characters of the various tribes of inhabitants surrounding the settlement of the Cape
of Good Hope, to which is annexed a description from actual observations made in the
course of travel, 2 vols. Second edition. London: T. Cadell & W. Davies.
Reprinted 1968 by Johnson Reprint Corporation in New York (Landmarks in anthropology series).
Barth, Heinrich. 1851. Report on Agádéz by Dr Barth [communicated through the Chevalier
Bunsen, by Lord Palmerston]. Journal of the Royal Geographical Society of London, v. 21,
p. 137-221.
109
Includes many items of interest, e.g. “Vocabulary of the Emghedesíe language” (p. 154-155) with “A short
dialogue” (p. 155-156), “Vocabulary of the language of Agádéz [Hausa, Emghedesíe, English]” (p. 169-188), Hausa
and Emghedesíe translations of “The Prodigal Son” (p. 188-189) and “The Lord’s Prayer” (p. 189), “A few words of
the Bang-bay language” (p. 212), “A few words of the Timbuktú language” (p. 213), and “Vocabulary of Budduma,
spoken by the inhabitants of the islands in Lake Chad” (p. 214).
Barth, Heinrich. 1853. Kelgeres-Lieder. Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft,
v. 7, p. (?).
Includes Berber sample texts.
Barth, Heinrich. 1855. Dr H. Barth’s Forschungen in Libtáko: Zahlwörter der Bewohner von
Gurma. Petermanns geographische Mitteilungen (Mittheilungen aus Justus Perthes’
Geographischer Anstalt über wichtige neue Erforschungen auf dem Gesammtgebiete der
Geographie), v. 1, p. (?).
Not sure about the reference details.
Barth, Heinrich. 1862/66. Sammlung und Bearbeitung central-afrikanischer Vokabularien der
Kanúri-, Téda-, Hausá-, Fulfúlde-, Songai-, Lógone-, Wándalá-, Bágrimma- und MabaSprachen / Collection of vocabularies of Central-African languages, 3 parts. Gotha: Justus
Perthes. Pp cx, 141; [cxi]-cccxxxiv; [144]-295.
Bilingual: German text on left side (verso), English on the right (recto). Reprinted 1971 by Frank Cass & Co. in
London (Cass library of African studies, African languages, #1; ISBN-10 0-7146-1914-0), edited and introduced by
A.H.M. Kirk-Greene.
URL: books.google.com/books?id=vTAOAAAAIAAJ
Barth, Heinrich. 1912. More (Mosi), Tombo, and Gurma words: extracts from a letter of Barth to
Mr Cooley, dated Timbukto, Feb. 26, 1854. In: Notes on some languages of the western
Sudan, including 24 unpublished vocabularies of Barth, extracts from correspondence
regarding Richardson’s and Barth’s expeditions, and a few Hausa riddles and proverbs, p.
(?). Ed. by Philip Askell Benton. London: Oxford University Press (Henry Frowde).
List of numerals. Referred to as above by Roncador & Miehe (1998:24).
Barth, Heinrich; Overweg, Adolph; Richardson, James. 1863. Reisen in Central-Afrika in den
Jahren 1849-1855, 558, xii. Afrika, dargestellt in den Forschungen und Erlebnissen der
berühmtesten Reisenden neuerer Zeit, #3. Berlin: Hasselberg.
Peripherals: A. Petermann, “Progress of the African mission, consisting of Messrs. Richardson, Barth, and
Overweg, to Central Africa”, Journal of the Royal Geographical Society of London, v. 21 (1851) p. 130-134; John
Hogg, “Notice of recent discoveries in Central Africa by Drs Barth and Overweg, and of two supposed new languages
in that country”, Transactions of the Royal Society of Literature of the United Kingdom, second series, v. 4? (1852)
p.(?); A. Petermann, An account of the progress of the expedition to central Africa performed by order of Her
Majesty’s Foreign Office, under Messrs Richardson, Barth, Overweg and Vogel, in the years 1850, 1851, 1852 and
1853 (London, 1854); Eduard Schauenburg, Die Reisen in Central-Afrika von Mungo Park bis auf Dr Barth und Dr
Vogel (Lahr, 1859).
Barth, J. 1885. Der verlorene Sohn in der Sprache von ku Sefe oder der Azarareye-Sprache.
Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 39, p. (?).
Unsure about the details of this reference.
Barth, J. 1889/91. Die Nominalbildung in den semitischen Sprachen. Leipzig.
Peripherals: August Müller, “Semitische Nomina: Bemerkungen zu De Lagarde und Barth”, Zeitschrift der deutschen
morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 45 (1891) p. 221-238; Friedrich Philippi, Zeitschrift der deutschen
morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 46 (1892) p. 149-172.
Barth, J. 1894. Die Nominalbildung in den semitischen Sprachen. Zweite Ausgabe, mit ein Wörterund ein Sachverzeichnis vermehrt. Leipzig. Pp xx, xxxii, 495.
Barth, J. 1913. Die Pronominalbildung in den semitischen Sprachen. Leipzig.
Bartholome, A. 1905. The Fanti-English method. Cape Coast: Catholic Printing Office. Pp 87.
Grammar and phrasebook for foreigners.
Bassano, Francesco da. 1918. Vocabolario tigray-italiano e repertorio italiano-tigray. Roma:
Casa Editrice Italiana di C. de Luigi. Pp xiv, 1308 (columns).
Basset, Henri. 1917. Rapport sur une mission chez les ntifa. Les archives berbères, v. 2, p. 97-122.
Basset, René. 19xx. Vocabulaire sangaran recueilli à Victoria (Rio-Nunez).
Referred to by Drexel (1923/24:12). No idea what “sangaran” refers to -- could be Susu (northwestern Mande).
Basset, René. 1879. Poème de Çabi en dialecte chelh’a. Journal asiatique, 7ème série, v. 13 [114],
p. 476-508.
110
Basset, René. 1883. Notes de lexicographie berbère [pt. 1]. Journal asiatique, 8ème série, v. 1
[122], p. 281-342.
[125], p. 518-556.
Basset, René. 1884. Salomon et le dragon. Bulletin de correspondance africaine (Alger), v. 2, p. 34.
Contains a Berber text.
Basset, René. 1885. Recueil de textes et de documents relatifs à la philologie berbère. Bulletin de
correspondance africaine, v. 3 [4], p. 317-326.
[126], p. 148-219.
[127], p. 302-371.
Basset, René. 1886. Le dialecte de Souyah. Bulletin de correspondance africaine, v. 5, p. (?).
[128], p. (?).
Basset, René. 1886. Recueil de textes et de documents relatifs à la philologie berbère, 3: dialecte
chelh’a du Sous et de l’Oued Dra‘a. Bulletin de correspondance africaine, v. 5, p. 98-119.
[131], p. 365-464.
Basset, René. 1887. Manuel de la langue kabyle (dialecte zouaoua): grammaire, bibliographie,
chrestomathie et lexique. Paris.
Basset, René. 1887. Recueil de textes et de documents relatifs à la philologie berbère. Alger.
Offprints?
Peripherals: ..., Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 2 (1888/89) p. 235-236.
Basset, René. 1887. Contes populaires berbères. Collection de contes et de chansons populaires,
#12. Paris.
Basset, René. 1890. Les dictons satiriques sur les villes et les tribus d’Algérie attribuées aSidi
Ah’med ben Yosuf.
What’s this?
Basset, René. 1890. Loqman berbère. Paris. Pp 409.
Contains texts from various dialects.
Basset, René. 1891. L’insurrection algerienne de 1871 dans les chansons populaires Kabyles. Le
muséon: revue d’études orientales, v. 11, p. 254-270, 330-351, 428-434.
Basset, René. 1892. Textes berbères dans le dialecte des Beni Menacer. Giornale della Società
Asiatica Italiana, v. 6, p. 37-84.
Basset, René. 1893. Etude sur le Zenatia du Mzab, de Ouargla et de l’Oued Rir’. Publications de
l’Ecole des Lettres d’Alger; Bulletin de correspondance africaine, #12. Paris: Ernest Leroux.
Pp 274.
Basset, René. 1893. Index des principales racines des mots berbères. Le muséon: revue d’études
orientales, v. 12, p. 5-16.
Basset, René. 1893. Notice sur les dialectes berbères des harakta et du djerid tunisien. In:
Transactions of the 9th international congress of Orientalists, held in London [...] 1892, v.
2, p. (?). Ed. by Delmar E. Morgan. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
Basset, René. 1894. Etude sur les dialectes berbères. Publications de l’Ecole des Lettres d’Alger;
Bulletin de correspondance africaine, #14. Paris: Ernest Leroux.
Basset, René. 1895. Etude sur la Zenatia de l’Ouarsenis et du Maghreb central. Publications de
Pp 162.
Basset, René. 1895. Les noms de métaux et de couleur en berbère. Mémoires de la Société de
Linguistique de Paris, v. 9, p. 58-92.
111
Basset, René. 1895. Le dialecte berbère de Taroundant. Giornale della Società Asiatica Italiana, v.
8, p. 1-63.
Basset, René. 1896. Note sur le chaouia de la province de Constantine. Journal asiatique, 9ème
série, v. 8 [149], p. 361-394.
Basset, René. 1897. Nouveau contes berbères. Collection de contes et de chansons populaires,
#23. Paris.
Basset, René. 1898. Notice sur le dialecte berbère des Beni-Iznacen. Giornale della Società
Basset, René. 1898/99. Etude sur les dialectes berbères du Rif marocain. In: Actes du 11ème
congrès international des orientalistes, Paris, 1897, pt. 5, p. 71-172. Paris: Ernest Leroux.
Basset, René. 1898/99. Rapport sur les langues africaines 1891-1897. In: Actes du 11ème congrès
international des orientalistes, Paris, 1897, pt. 5, p. 53-70. Paris: Ernest Leroux.
Basset, René. 1899. Les noms berbères des plantes dans le traité des simples d’Ibn el Beïtar.
Giornale della Società Asiatica Italiana, v. 12, p. 53-66.
Basset, René. 1901. Nendromah et le Traras. Publications de l’Ecole des Lettres d’Alger; Bulletin
de correspondance africaine, #24. Paris: Ernest Leroux.
Some sort of historical study. Includes a Berber glossary.
Basset, René. 1901. Popular tales of the Berbers [translated from the French]. In: Moorish
literature: comprising romantic ballads, tales of the Berbers, stories of the Kabylie, folklore and national traditions, p. (?). Ed. by Chauncey C. Starkweather. London & New York:
Colonial Press.
URL: www.archive.org/details/moorishliteratur00wilsiala
Basset, René. 1902. Rapport sur les études berbères et haoussa 1897-1902. Journal asiatique,
9ème série, v. 20 [161], p. 307-325.
Basset, René. 1903. Contes populaires d’Afrique. Paris.
Includes over 150 narratives originating from various African cultures/languages, e.g. Berber, Sukuma, Nyamwezi,
etc.
Basset, René. 1906. Les mots arabes pasés en berbère. In: Orientalische Studien Theodor Nöldeke
zum siebzigsten Geburtstag, v. 1, p. 439-443. Ed. by Carl Bezold. Giessen (Deutschland).
Basset, René. 1906/07. Le nom du chameau chez les berbères. In: Actes du 14ème congrès
international des orientalistes, Alger, 1905, pt. 2, p. 69-82. Paris: Ernest Leroux.
Basset, René. 1908. Rapport sur les études berbères et haoussa 1902-1908. Revue africaine:
journal des traveaux de la Société Historique Algérienne, v. 52, p. 243-264.
Basset, René. 1909. Mission au Sénégal, 3 vols. Publications de l’Ecole des Lettres d’Alger;
Bulletin de correspondance africaine, #39. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp ii, [2]-665.
Includes “Etude sur le dialecte Zenaga” (p. 2?-282?), “Notes sur le Hassania” (p. 283-434), “Bibliographie” (p. 441444), “Recherches historiques sur les Maures” (p. 445?-665?).
Basset, René. 1913. Notes sur la langue de la Guiné au XVe siècle. Coimbra: Imprensa da
Universidade. Pp 8.
Tries to link contemporary Ewe with speech fragments recorded in 1479 by Eustache de la Fosse.
Basset, René. (Ed.) 1915. Mélanges africains et orientaux. Paris.
Includes a few Berber articles, at least.
Basset, René. 1919. Rapport sur les études relatives à la linguistique berbère 1913-1918. Revue
africaine: journal des traveaux de la Société Historique Algérienne, v. 60, p. 161-169.
Basset, René; Yver, G. 1908. Berbères. Encyclopaedia of Islam, v. (?), p. (?).
Bastard, G. 1900. Essai lexique pour les idiomes soudanaises. Revue coloniale, 17 mai 1900, p. (?).
Bastian, P. 1893. Missel en langue yoruba. Lyon: Société des Missions Africaines de Lyon.
Batalha, Ladislau. 1890. Linguas d’Africa. Bibliotheca do povo e das escolas, #175. Lisboa. Pp 62.
Not sure what this is about. Presumably something about languages in Lusophone Africa.
112
Batalha, Ladislau. 1891. A lingua de Angola. Bibliotheca do povo e das escolas, #193. Lisboa:
Nacional Editora de Angola. Pp 62.
Deals with either Umbundu R11 or Kimbundu H21a.
Bateman, George W. 1901. Zanzibar tales told by natives of the East coast of Africa. Chicago:
A.C. McClurg. Pp 224.
Reprinted 1969 by Afro-American Press in Chicago; and 2001 by Gallery Publ. in Zanzibar.
URL: www.archive.org/details/zanzibartalestol00bateiala
Baudin, Noël. 1884. Essai de grammaire de la yoruba. Lyon: Société des Missions Africaines de
Lyon. Pp 117.
There’s also a “second edition” dated 1966, which may or may not be a reprint.
Baudin, Noël. 1885. Dictionnaire français-yoruba et yoruba-français, 2 parties. Lyon.
Baudin, Noël. 1966. Grammaire yoruba. Deuxième édition. Centre Catéchétique de Porto Novo,
Procure de l’Archidiocèse. Pp 97.
The original edition was published 1884, so this may or may not be a reprint.
Baudissin, Otto von [Graf]. 1900. Deutsch-Suaheli Taschen-Wörterbuch. Berlin: Wilhelm
Süsserott. Pp 142.
Bauer, Hans. 1910. Die Tempora in Semitischen: ihre Entstehung und ihre Ausgestaltung in den
Einzelsprachen. Beiträge zur Assyriologie und semitischen Sprachwissenschaft, #8:1.
Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs’sche Buchhandlung. Pp 53.
Publication of the author’s Inaugural-Dissertation, University of Berlin, 1910. Reprinted 1968 by
Zentralantiquariat der Deutschen Demokratischen Republik in Leipzig.
Peripherals: Carl Meinhof, Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 1 (1910/11) p. 157-158.
Baumann, Chr. 1915/16. Nama-Texte: aufgezeichnet von Christian Goliath zu Berseba,
Südwestafrika. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 6, p. 55-78.
Baumann, Chr. 1917/18. Nama-Fabeln: gesammelt von Missionar W. Schaar in Okombahe und
übersetzt von Chr. Baumann. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 8, p. 81-109.
Baumann, Oskar. 1887/88. Beiträge zur Kenntniss der Bube-Sprache auf Fernando Póo.
Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 1, p. 138-155.
Baumann, Oskar. 1888. Fernando Poo und die Bube: dargestellt auf Grund einer Reise im
Auftrage der K.K. Geographischen Gesellschaft in Wien. Wien: Alfred Hölder. Pp ix, 150.
Baumann, Oskar. 1891. Proben der Kissegeju- und Kiparesprache. In: Usambara und seine
Nachbargebiete: allgemeine Darstellung des nord-östlichen Deutsch-Ostafrika und seiner
Bewohner auf Grund einer im Auftrag der Deutsch-Ostafrikanischen Gesellschaft im Jahre
1890 ausgeführten Reise, p. 340-346. Ed. by Oskar Baumann. Berlin: Verlag von Dietrich
Reimer.
Baumann, Oskar. 1894. Durch Massailand zur Nilquelle: Reisen und Forschungen der
Massaiexpedition. Berlin: Verlag von Dietrich Reimer. Pp xiii, 385, plates.
Includes ethnographic notes on several peoples, plus brief vocabularies for Sandawe, Datooga, and others.
Contains “allusions” to Gogo, according to Johnston (1919:791).
Peripherals: E. Heawood, “Dr Baumann’s journey through East Africa”, The geographical journal, v. 4 (1894) p.
246-250.
Bazin, Hippolyte. 1906. Dictionnaire bambara-français, précédé d’un abrégé de grammaire
bambara. Paris: Imprimerie Nationale. Pp xxv, 693.
Reprinted 1965 by Gregg Press in Ridgewood NJ.
Bazin, Hippolyte. 1906. Les bambara et leur langue. Anthropos: internationale Zeitschrift für
Völker- und Sprachenkunde, v. 1, p. 681-694.
Beaussier, Marcelin. 1871. Dictionnaire pratique arabe-français, contenant tous les mots
employés dans l’arabe parlé en Algérie et en Tunisie, ainsi que dans le style épistolaire, les
pièces usuelles et les actes judiciaires. Nouvelle édition, révué, corrigée et augmentée par M.
Ben Cheneb, avec une préface de M. Mirante. Alger. Pp 764, xvi.
There are also later reprints/editions, e.g. one dated 1877 by Librairie Adolphe Jourdan in Paris (764 pp).
Beaussier, Marcelin. 1931. Dictionnaire pratique arabe-français, contenant tous les mots
employés dans l’arabe parlé en Algérie et en Tunisie ainsi que dans le style epistolaire, les
113
pièce usuelles et les actes judiciaires. Nouvelle édition, révué, corrigée et augmentée par M.
Ben Cheneb. Alger: Jules Garbonel. Pp viii, 1093.
Reprinted 1958 by La Maison des Livres in Alger, together with a new supplement by A.P. Lentin.
Peripherals: Albert Paul Lentin, Supplément au dictionnaire pratique arabe-français de Marcelin Beaussier (Alger,
1959); J. Quemeneur, “Notes sur quelques vocables du parler tunisien figurant au ‘supplement’ de A. Lentin”, Revue
de l’IBLA (Institut des Belles Lettres Arabes), v. 23 (1960) p. 1-22, 167-181.
Beech, Merwyn Worcester Howard. 1911. The Suk: their language and folklore. Oxford:
Clarendon Press. Pp xxiv, 151.
Reprinted 1969 by Negro Universities Press in New York.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 11 (1911/12) p. 257-259; A.J.N. T[remearne], Man, v. 13
(1913) p. 64 (art. 35).
Beech, Merwyn Worcester Howard. 1913. Endo vocabulary. Man: a record of anthropological
science, v. 13, p. 70-72 (art. 42).
Beech, Merwyn Worcester Howard. 1915. Pre-Bantu occupants of East Africa. Man: a record of
anthropological science, v. 15, p. 40-41 (art. 24).
Discusses a Kikuyu tradition “concerning the occupation of their country by two pre-Bantu peoples”. Apparently,
there were first some “cannibal dwarfs” called Maithoachiana. These were later replaced by a people referred to as
Gumba.
Peripherals: Hugh S. Stannus, “Pre-Bantu occupants of East Africa”, Man, v. 15 (1915) p. 131-132 (art. 76); P.W.
Laidler, “Bushmen of Namaqualand”, Man, v. 24 (1924) p. 140 (art. 104).
Beech, Merwyn Worcester Howard. 1918. Aids to the study of Ki-Swahili: four studies compiled
and annotated. London & New York: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co.; E.P. Dutton &
Co. Pp xvi, 160.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 17 (1917/18) p. 324-426; S.H. Ray, Man, v. 18 (1918) p.
142 (art. 76).
Beecham, John. 1841. Ashantee and the Gold Coast: being a sketch of the history, social state,
and superstitions of the inhabitants of those countries, with a notice of the state and
prospects of Christianity among them. London: J. Mason. Pp xix, 376.
Includes a Fanti vocabulary (apparently collected by some W. de Graft) as well as a brief grammatical sketch.
Reprinted 1968 by Dawsons of Pall Mall (Colonial history series) in London; and 1970 by the Johnson Reprint
(Landmarks in anthropology series) in New York.
Beecroft, W.S. 1914. Yoruba grammar and composition. Lagos: Church Missionary Society
(CMS). Pp 95.
Compare this title with Gaye & Beecroft (1914, 1923).
Beerst, Gustave de. 1896. Essai de grammaire tabwa. Zeitschrift für afrikanische und oceanische
Sprachen, v. 2, p. 271-287, 291-383.
Beguinot, Francesco. 1914. L’area linguistica berbera. Roma: Ministero delle Colonie, Italia.
Beke, Charles Tilstone. 1845. On the languages and dialects of Abyssinia and the countries to the
south. Proceedings of the Philological Society, v. 2, 33, p. 89-107.
Includes specimens from 33 languages.
Beke, Charles Tilstone. 1849. On the geographical distribution of the languages of Abessinia and
the neighbouring countries. Edinburgh: Neill & Co.
Could be an off-print.
Beke, Charles Tilstone. 1849. Über die geographische Verbreitung der Sprachen von Abessinien
und der Nachbarländer. Gotha.
Beke, Charles Tilstone. 1849/50. On the geographical distribution of the languages of Abessinia
and the neighbouring countries. Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, v. 2, p. 208223.
Mentions/discusses Nubian, Fatsokl (Fazoglo), Bisharye or Bidja, Ethiopic, Agau, Galla, Gonga, Shankala, Dalla
(= Dullay?), Takue (or Bodje), and Barea.
Bel, Alfred. 1919. Inscriptions arabes de Fès. Paris. Pp 347.
Extracts from Journal asiatique (11ème série), vols ?.
114
Bell, William Henry Somerset. 1910. South African legal dictionary: containing most of the
English, Latin and Dutch terms, phrases and maxims used in Roman-Dutch and South
African legal practice, together with definitions occurring in the statutes of the South African
colonies. Grahamstown: African Book Company. Pp xxxvii, 608.
Bellon, Immanuel. 1907. Kultus und Kultur der Tchi-Neger im Spiegel ihrer Sprichwörter. Basler
Missions-Studien, #33. Basel: Missionsbuchhandlung. Pp 90.
Bellon, Immanuel. 1911. Tshi lessons for beginners, including grammatical guide and numerous
idioms and phrases. Kumasi (Ghana): Basel Mission Book Depot.
Date could be wrong. Next edition (1955) retitled Twi lessons for beginners.
URL: www.archive.org/details/tshilessonsforbe00belliala
Bellon, Immanuel. 1914. Märchen des Tschi-Volkes auf der Goldküste. Mitteilungen des Seminars
für orientalische Sprachen, v. 17, III, p. 1-38.
Bellon, Immanuel. 1916. Personen- und Ortsnamen der Tschi-Neger. Mitteilungen des Seminars
Beltrame, D. Giovanni. 1867. Cenni sui denka e la loro lingua. Rivista orientale, v. 1, 8, p. 17ff.
Beltrame, D. Giovanni. 1868. Le stagione presso i negri denka e loro denominazione. Bollettino
della Società Geografica Italiana, v. 1, p. 294-298.
Beltrame, D. Giovanni. 1877. Studio sulla lingua degli Akkà: grammatica e dizionario. Bollettino
della Società Geografica Italiana, serie 2, v. 2, p. (?).
Beltrame, D. Giovanni. 1879. Il Sènnaar e lo Sciangallah, 2 vols. Verona: Padova.
Unsure about the contents of this. Sciangallah sounds like Oromo, but what is Sennaar?
Beltrame, D. Giovanni. 1880. Grammatica e vocabolario della lingua denka. Memoria della
Società Geografica Italiana, #3. Roma: Stabilimento Guiseppe Civelli. Pp 233.
Beltrame, D. Giovanni. 1881. Il fiume bianco e i Dénka. Verona: Stabilimento Guiseppe Civelli. Pp
323.
Includes linguistic material on Dinka and Shilluk (p. 66-71). Reprinted 2006 by Mazziana in Verona (ISBN 978-8885073-71-5).
Ben-Sedira, Belkassem. 1882. Petit dictionnaire arabe-français de langue parlée en Algerie.
Alger: Librairie Adolphe Jourdan.
Reprinted 1979 as Dictionnaire arabe-français by Slatkine Reprints in Geneva.
Ben-Sedira, Belkassem. 1886. Dictionnaire français-arabe de langue parlée en Algerie.
Quatrième édition. Alger: Librairie Adolphe Jourdan.
Ben-Sedira, Belkassem. 1887. Cours de langue kabyle. Alger. Pp 211, 430.
Ben-Sedira, Belkassem. 1887. Une mission en Kabyle sur les dialectes berbères et l’assimilation
des indigenes. Alger.
Ben-Sedira, Belkassem. 1893. Manuel épistolaire de langue arabe à l’usage des lycées, colléges
& écoles normales de l’Algérie: cadre épistolaire, formulaire administratif, lettres
manuscrites diverses avec transcriptions, notes et vocabulaire. Alger. Pp xv, 273.
Benfey, Theodor. 1844. Über das Verhältnis dre aegyptichen Sprache zu den semitischen
Sprachstamm. Leipzig: F.A. Brockhaus. Pp xvi, 367.
Bennie, John [Rev.]. 18xx. Manuscript fragments for a Kafir-English and English-Kafir
dictionary.
A large number of words from herein were later incorporated into the second edition of Kropf’s Kafir-English
dictionary, published 1915 (Doke 1959:8).
Bennie, John [Rev.]. 1826. A systematic vocabulary of the Kaffrarian language in two parts, to
which is prefixed an introduction to Kaffrarian grammar. Lovedale: Glasgow Missionary
Society. Pp 12, 92.
115
Bennie, John [Rev.]. 1832. Manuscript for a Kafir-grammar. Cape Town: Grey Collection, South
African Public Library.
“Bennie makes a significant allusion to the existence of semantic tone in Xhosa” (Doke 1959:7). Tucker (1938:16)
dates the manuscript 1830.
Bénoit, W. 1907. Gramática portuguesa em língua ronga. Bukhaleni portuguesa-ronga e
dicionário português-ronga e ronga-português (dialecto falado pelos indígenas de
Lourenço Marques). Lausanne: Imprimerie Georges Bridel. Pp 43.
Bentley, Mrs H.M. 1896. Guide de conversation en français, congolais, portugais et hollandais.
Pp 188.
Details wanting.
Bentley, Mrs H.M. 1902. Petite grammaire français.
This is written in Kikongo. It includes vocabularies which were published separately in 1904. Details wanting.
Bentley, Mrs H.M. 1904. Vocabulaire français-congolais, congolais-français.
Details wanting. This was originally a part of the author’s Petite grammaire français (1902), written in Kikongo.
Not sure if this is a book or a journal article.
Bentley, Mrs H.M. 1911. Guide de conversation français-congolaise. Bruxelles: Ministère des
Colonies, Belgique. Pp 123.
Bentley, William Holman [Rev.]. 1887. Dictionary and grammar of the Kongo language, as
spoken at San Salvador, the ancient capital of the Old Kongo Empire, West Africa. London:
Baptist Missionary Society in association with Trübner & Co. Pp xxiv, 718.
This and its 1895-appendix were reprinted 1967 by Gregg Press in Hants UK; and in the 1980s by Gregg
International (ISBN-10 0-576-11993-8).
URL: www.archive.org/details/dictionarygramma00bentuoft
Peripherals: T.G. Benson, “A century of Bantu lexicography”, African language studies, v. 5 (1964) p. 64-91.
Bentley, William Holman [Rev.]. 1895. Appendix to the dictionary and grammar of the Kongo
language, as spoken at San Salvador, the ancient capital of the Old Kongo Empire, West
Africa. London: Baptist Missionary Society. Pp vii, [719]-1052.
Benton, Philip Askell. 1911. Kanuri readings, including facsimiles of MSS, transliteration, interlinear translation, notes and vocabularies, English-Kanuri and Kanuri-English. London:
Oxford University Press (Henry Frowde). Pp 110.
Peripherals: A. Klingenheben, Zeitschift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 2 (1911/12) p. 331; A.J.N. T[remearne], Man, v.
12 (1912) p. 192 (art. 102); Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 12 (1912/13) p. 106-107.
Benton, Philip Askell. 1912. Notes on some languages of the western Sudan, including 24
unpublished vocabularies of Barth, extracts from correspondence regarding Richardson’s
and Barth’s expeditions, and a few Hausa riddles and proverbs. London: Oxford
University Press (Henry Frowde). Pp viii, 304.
Languages dealt with include, e.g., Dogon, Moore, Gurma, Buduma, Bolanci, Hausa. Includes a section titled “The
specific adverbs of emphasis in Hausa and Kanuri” (= translation of Prietze 1908). Reprinted 1968 by Frank Cass &
Co. in London, with a new introduction by A.H.M. Kirk-Greene.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 11 (1911/12) p. 484; A.J.N. T[remearne], Man, v. 12 (1912)
p. 192 (art. 102).
Bérenger-Féraud, Laurent Jean Baptiste. 1879. Les peuplades de la Sénégambie: histoire,
ethnographie, moeurs et coutumes, légendes, etc. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp xvi, 420.
Bérenger-Féraud, Laurent Jean Baptiste. 1885. Recueil de contes populaires de la Sénégambie.
Collection de contes et de chansons populaires, #9. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp ix, 260.
Berg, [Bezirktsamtmann]. 1901. Erklärung von Ortsnamen in Mikindanibezirk. Mitteilungen des
Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 4, III, p. 42ff.
Berggren, J. 1844. Guide français-arabe vulgaire des voyageurs et des francs en Syrie et en
Egypte. Uppsala: Leffler & Sebell.
Berghold, K. 1897. Somali-Studien. Zeitschrift für afrikanische und oceanische Sprachen, v. 3, p.
116-198.
116
Berghold, K. 1899. Somali-Studien. Wiener Zeitschrift für die Kunde des Morgenlandes, v. 13, p.
123-198.
Second part?
Bergmann, Ernst Ritter von. 1879. Hieroglyphische Inschriften gesammelt während einer im
Winter 1877/78 unternommenen Reise in Ägypten. Wien: Faesy & Frick. Pp iv, 3, 58, 1,
lxxxiv.
Bernard, J.M. 1893. La langue maure. Paris.
Listed by Jucovy & Alderete (2001). Could be a manuscript.
Bernsmann, Friedrich. 1909. Grammatische Anmerkungen. Archiv für die Herero- und
Namasprache in Deutsch Südwestafrika, #10. Windhoek: Rheinischen Missionsgesellschaft.
Pp 4.
Berre, [Mgr] le. 1873. Grammaire de la language pongouée. Pp 223.
Details wanting.
Berthold, Hugo. 1899. Bado moja! Erzählungen aus Deutsch-Ostafrika. Bielefeld: Helmich. Pp
152.
Bertholon, Lucien J. 1903-1906. Origin et formation de la langue berbère. Revue tunisienne, v. 1315, p. (?).
Not sure how many articles, nor in which exact issues they appear in. Listed by Jucovy & Alderete (2001).
Bertholon, Lucien J. 1905. Note sur les noms des iberes, berbères et africains. Bulletins et
mémoires de la Société d’Anthropologie de Paris, 5ème série, v. 6, p. 145-149.
Berthoud, Henri. 1895/97. Quelques remarques sur la famille des langues bantoe et sur la langue
Tzonga en particulier. In: Actes du 10ème congrès international des orientalistes: sessions
de Genève, 1894, p. 169-192. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
Berthoud, Henri. 1908. Shangaan grammar. incomplete, unpublished manuscript. Pp 56.
Details wanting (cfr also Bill 1984:72).
Berthoud, Paul. 1883. Leçons de sigwamba, langage des magwamba, tribu cafre du Sud de
l’Afrique. Lausanne. Pp 46.
The ‹s› in ‹sigwamba› should have a hatchet on it.
Peripherals: Mary C. Bill, “Berthoud’s ‘Leçons de Sigwamba’ (1883): the first Tsonga grammar”, The complete
linguist: papers in memory of Patrick J. Dickens (edited by A. Traill et al., Rüdiger Köppe Verlag, 1995) p. 481508.
Berthoud, Paul. 1884. Grammatical note on the Gwamba language of South Africa. Journal of the
Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, new series, v. 16, p. 45-73.
Berthoud, Paul. 1896. Les nègres gouamba, ou les vingt premières années de la mission
romande. Lausanne: Conseil de la Mission Romande. Pp 222.
Bertin, G. 1886. The Bushmen and their language. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great
Britain and Northern Ireland, new series, v. 18, 1, p. 51-81.
Deals with Seroa and !Xuai.
Beste, [?]. 1889/90. Zusätze und Berichtigungen zum Pondo-Wörterbuch. Zeitschrift für
afrikanische Sprachen, v. 3, p. 235-240.
Beurmann, [Carl] Moritz von. 1862. Brief des Herrn von Beurmann an Prof. Fleischer. Zeitschrift
der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 16, p. 563-565.
Has something on Berber lexicography (Jucovy & Alderete 2001).
Beurmann, [Carl] Moritz von. 1868. Glossar der Tigré-Sprache, wie sie den Massaua gesprochen
wird [bearbeitet und mit einem Lebensabriss des Sammlers herausgegeben von Adalbert
Merx]. Jahresbericht des Vereins von Freunden der Erdkunde zu Leipzig, v. 6, p. 33-111.
Includes brief grammatical notes by Merx.
Beurmann, [Carl] Moritz von. 1868. Vocabulary of the Tigré language. Published and edited by
Adalbert Merx. Halle. Pp viii, 78.
Includes extensive grammatical notes by Merx, but different from the German edition.
Peripherals: Franz Praetorius, Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 22 (1868) p. 746-748.
Beyer, Gottfried A. 1914. Kurze Sesotho Grammatik. Manuskript. Pretoria: Biblioteek van die
Universiteit van Suid-Afrika (UNISA).
117
Bianchi, G.M. 1903. Dizionario e frasario Eritreo: raccolta di 5500 vocaboli e frasi della lingua
principale della colonia Eritrea, italiano-tigrignà o tigrai. Milano. Pp iv, 275.
Biarnay, S. 1908. Etude sur le dialecte berbère de Ouargla. Publications de l’Ecole des Lettres
d’Alger; Bulletin de correspondance africaine, #37. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp 501.
Biarnay, S. 1910/11. Etude sur le dialecte des Bet’t’ioua du Vieil Arzeu. Revue de linguistique,
#277-282. Pp 199.
Looks like a bunch of jorno articles. But what journal is Revue de linguistique? Source? Details wanting.
Biarnay, S. 1911. Notice sur les dialectes berbères parlers par les aith-sadden et les beni-mgild.
Revue africaine: journal des traveaux de la Société Historique Algérienne, v. 55, p. (?).
Biarnay, S. 1912. Six textes berbères des berabers du Dadès. Journal asiatique, 10ème série, v. 19
[180], p. 347-371.
Biarnay, S. 1915/16. Notes sur les chants populaires du Rif. Les archives berbères, v. 1, p. 22-39.
Biarnay, S. 1917. Etude sur les dialectes berbères du Rif: lexique, textes et notes de phonétique.
Publications de la Fac. des Lettres d’Alger; Bulletin de correspondence de africaine, #54.
Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp xvi, 606.
Bieber, Fr. Friedrich Julius. 1908. Beiträge zu einem erotischen Lexikon der Abessinier (Amhara,
Galla und Kaffitsche). Anthrophyteia (Leipzig), v. 5, p. 18-24.
Bieber, Fr. Friedrich Julius. 1908. Dizionario della lingua cafficio, raccolto nel Caffa. Bollettino
della Società Geografica Italiana, 4a serie, v. 9, p. 368-380, 452-466.
Biehler, Edward. 1906. English-Chiswina dictionary, with an outline Chiswina grammar.
Roermond (Netherlands): J.J. Romen & Sons. Pp 263, 120.
The first part comprises a 56-page grammatical introduction followed by an English-Chiswina vocabulary with
some 4,500 entries. The second part contains a Chiswina-English index.
Biehler, Edward. 1913. English-Chiswina dictionary, with an outline Chiswina grammar. New
edition, enlarged. Chishawasha (Rhodesia): Jesuit Mission. Pp 288, 128.
The next edition bears the title Chiswina grammar with English-Chiswina dictionary and Chiswina-English
vocabulary.
Biggar, Emerson Bristol. (Ed.) 1899. The Boer War: its causes, and its interests to Canadians,
with a glossary of Cape Dutch and Kafir terms. Toronto: Biggar, Samuel & Co. Pp 38.
Binger, Louis-Gustave. 1886. Essai sur la langue bambara parlée dans le Kaarta et le
Bélédougou, suivi d’un vocabulaire. Paris: Maisonneuve Frères et Ch Leclerc. Pp 132.
Bir, Pedro M.F.C. 1902. A handbook of the English, Hindustani, Konkani and Swahili languages.
Nairobi: Uganda Railway Press.
Bird, James. 1845. Vocabulary of Gonga. Journal of the Bombay Geographical Society, v. 2, p.
(?).
Bissing, Frederick von. 1911/12. Recherches sur la formation des pronoms personnels en
égyptien. Sphinx: revue critique embrassant le domaine entier de l’égyptologie (Uppsala), v.
15, p. 136-150.
Biton, Alexander. 1907. Dictionnaire ndumu-français, français-ndumu, précédé d’éléments de
grammaire. Franceville (Congo Française). Pp xxxii, 178, 97.
There’s another printing (reprint? revision?) dated 1969, publ. by Archevêché de Libreville.
Bittremieux, Leo. 1912. Mayombsche Namen. Tervuren.
Blackledge, George Robert [Rev.]. 1904. A Luganda-English and English-Luganda vocabulary.
London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp 212.
Blagden, Charles Otto. 1902. A comparative vocabulary of Malayam dialects. Journal of the Royal
Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, 1902, p. 557-566.
The author looks at a 19th-century manuscript originating from Malaysia, which contains lexical material from six
“Malayan dialects” written down in Arabic script. One of these, Makuah or Makuat, Blagden refers to as “rather a
mystery”, and he has “suspicions as to its genuineness” (p. 558). The language is in fact Makhuwa. It appears here
on six pages of tables together with specimens from the other languages. The origin of the original manuscript
seems somewhat obscure.
Peripherals: C. Otto Blagden, “Further notes on a Malayam comparative vocabulary”, Journal of the Royal Asiatic
Society of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, third series, 1903, p. 167-179.
118
Blagden, Charles Otto. 1903. Further notes on a Malayam comparative vocabulary. Journal of the
Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, 1903, p. 167-179.
Having received a corrective letter from Mr Sidney H. Ray, Blagden comes to realize that his mystery language is
not Asian, but in fact East African (i.e. Makhuwa). Ray’s letter is reproduced in full here, and contains, for instance,
a table comparing the Makhuwa items from Blagden’s previous article with words drawn from Chauncey Maples’
Collections for a handbook of the Makua language.
Blanchard, John. 1909. Manuscrits abyssins. In: Mission en Ethiopie 1901-1903, v. 1, p. (?). Ed.
by Jean Duchesne-Fournet. Paris: Masson.
Bleek, Dorothea Frances. 1913. The language of the Khakhea Bushmen. Manuscript.
Referred to by Köhler (1981:476).
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 18xx. Ho-tan-to: a Hottentot expression analyzed. Cape
Town: Grey Collection, South African Public Library. Pp 1.
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 187x. “Grimm’s Law” in South Africa, or, Phonetic changes
in the South African Bantu languages, pt. 1: in the south-eastern branch. The Philological
Society.
What’s this? A speech or published paper? Source?
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1851. De nominum generibus linguarum africae australis,
copticae, semiticarum aliarumque sexualium. Scripsit et ad summos in philosophia honores
auctoritate amplissimi philosophorum ordinis. Bonnae: Formis Caroli Georgii. Pp iv, 61.
Dissertation. Credited to Guilelmus Bleek. Compares gender systems in Herero, Xhosa, Zulu, Tswana, Sotho, Tlapi,
Yao, Kongo, Mbundu, Swahili, Nyika, Pokomo (all Bantu), Nama and Korana (Central Khoesan), Aramaic, Hebrew,
Ethiopian, Arabic, Amharic (Semitic), Coptic (Egyptian), Galla (Kushitic), and one Berber language. It also
contains a classification of said languages based on gender systems.
193-218; Alexander Zajcev & Andrei Zhukov, “The data on Semito-Hamitic languages in W. Bleek’s De nominum
generibus...“, Studia chadica et hamitosemitica (edited by Dymitr Ibriszimow & Rudolf Leger, Rüdiger Köppe
Verlag, 1995) p. 10-16.
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1854. Entwurf einer Grammatik der Herero-Sprache, Teil 1.
Bonn. Pp 51.
Any further parts?
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1855. On the languages of western and southern Africa.
Transactions of the Philological Society, 1855, p. 40-50 (art. IV).
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1856. The languages of Mosambique: vocabularies of the
dialects of Lourenzo Marques, Inhambane, Sofala, Tette, Sena, Quellimane, Mosambique,
Cape Delgado, Anjoane, the Maravi, Mudasu etc. drawn up from the manuscripts of Dr
Wm Peters, M. Berl. Acd., and from other materials. London: Harrison & Sons. Pp xix,
404.
Contains vocabulary material for many languages, among them Ki-wibu a.k.a. Kimwani (cfr Johnston 1919:790).
URL: books.google.com/books?id=1rQFAAAAQAAJ
Peripherals: C.M. Doke, “Bantu language pioneers of the nineteenth century”, African studies, v. 14 (1940) p. 207246; C.M. Doke, “Bantu language pioneers of the nineteenth century” (revised), African studies, v. 18 (1959) p. 127; Mary C. Bill, “100 years of Tsonga publications, 1883-1983”, African studies, v. 43 (1984) p. 67-81.
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1857. Researches into the relations between the Hottentots
and the Kafirs [pt. 1]. Cape monthly magazine, v. 1, p. 199-208.
Contains, for instance, notes on the relatedness between Khoekhoe and “Alt-Ägyptisch”.
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1857. Researches into the relations between the Hottentot and
the Kafir races [pt. 2]. Cape monthly magazine, v. 1, p. 289-296.
Note the slightly different title compared to part 1.
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1857. Manuscript vocabulary of the Hottentots and Bushmen,
drawn up from various sources for the use of His Excellency Sir George Grey. Cape Town:
Grey Collection, South African Public Library.
Mentioned by, for instance, Levy (1968:3).
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1858. Catalogue of the Library of His Excellency Sir George
Grey, v. 1, pt. 1-3. London & Leipzig: Trübner & Co.
This is where Bleek first uses the term “Bantu”. Part 1 covers South Africa (within the limits of British influence),
part 2 covers Africa (north of the Tropic of Cancer), and part 3 covers Madagascar. The first part includes “The
119
family of sex-denoting languages: South African species, 1: the Hottentot language” and “The family of sexdenoting languages: South African species, 2: the Bushman language”. Reprinted at least once.
193-218; O. Silverstein, “A note on the term ‘Bantu’ as first used by W.H.I. Bleek”, African studies, v. 27 (1968) p.
211-212; P.E.H. Hair, correspondence to the editors, African studies, v. 28 (1969) p. 54.
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1858. South African philology. Cape monthly magazine, v. 3,
p. 21-27.
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1858. Untersuchungen über die Beziehungen zwischen
Hotentotten und Kafir. Petermanns geographische Mitteilungen (Mittheilungen aus Justus
Perthes’ Geographischer Anstalt über wichtige neue Erforschungen auf dem
Gesammtgebiete der Geographie), v. 4, p. 418.
Consists mainly of translated extracts from Bleek’s Researches into the relations between the Hottentots and the
Kaffirs (1857), such as a query into the relatedness between Khoekhoe and “Alt-Ägyptisch”.
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1858. Arbeiten in Süd-Afrika. Petermanns geographische
Mitteilungen (Mittheilungen aus Justus Perthes’ Geographischer Anstalt über wichtige neue
Erforschungen auf dem Gesammtgebiete der Geographie), v. 4, p. 418-419.
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1858. The Hottentot language. Cape monthly magazine, v. 3,
p. 34-41, 116-119.
Includes various translated extracts from contemporary literature, some Bible texts plus short vocabularies.
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1862. Sir George Grey’s library: native literature. Cape
monthly magazine, v. 11, p. 315-319, 385-389.
Includes Nama tales -- translations or originals?
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1862/69. A comparative grammar of South African
languages, 2 parts. Cape Town & London: J.C. Juta and Trübner & Co. Pp xii, 92; xxii,
[93]-322.
Bleek compares Xhosa with 24 other Bantu languages from all over the Bantu area. Part 1 is subtitled “Phonology”,
and the unfinished part 2 is subtitled “The concord. Section 1: the noun”. Both parts have been reprinted several
times (two parts in one; 344 pp), e.g. already during the late 19th century by Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co. in
London; and later by Gregg International (ISBN-10 0-576-11458-8).
Peripherals: W.H.I. Bleek, “A fragment: a continuation of a comparative grammar of South African languages
(paragraphs 559-562)”, Bantu studies, v. 10 (1936) p. 1-7; A.N. Tucker, “The meaning and value of comparative
Bantu philology”, Transactions of the Philological Society, 1938, p. 13-24; C.M. Doke, “The growth of
comparative Bantu philology (revised)”, African studies, v. 19 (1960) p. 193-218.
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1864. Reynard the Fox in South Africa, or Hottentot fables
and tales. London: Trübner & Co.
Peripherals: Anon, “Mythological legendary tales of South Africa, and of the Esquimaux in Greenland”, The
anthropological review, v. 3 (1865) p. 138-145.
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1869. The Bushman language. In: The Cape and its people,
and other essays, p. 269-284. Ed. by Roderick Noble. Cape Town: J.C. Juta.
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1870. African folklore [pt. 1]. Cape monthly magazine, new
series, v. 1, 7/12, p. (?).
series, v. 2, 7/12, p. (?).
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1872. The concord, the origin of pronouns and the formation
and classes or genders of nouns. Journal of the Anthropological Inst. of Great Britain and
Ireland, v. 1, appendix, p. lxiv-xc (64-90).
With a discussion by Hyde Clarke on p. lxxxix-xc.
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1873. Report of Dr Bleek concerning his researches into the
Bushman the Bushman language, presented to the Honourable House of Assembly by
command of His Excellency the Governor. Cape parliamentary papers, #A17’1873. Cape
Town: J.C. Juta.
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1873. Scientific reasons for the study of the Bushman
language. Cape monthly magazine, new series, v. 7, 9, p. 149-153.
Reprinted 1996 in Voices from the past (ed. by Janette Deacon & Thomas A. Dowson; Witwatersrand University
Press), p. 44-48.
120
series, v. 9, 7/12, p. (?).
There’s some mention of Herero (as “Damara”) in here.
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1874. On resemblances in Bushman and Australian
mythology, with preliminary remarks. Cape monthly magazine, new series, v. 8, p. 98-102.
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1875. Bushman researches. Cape monthly magazine, new
series, v. 11, p. 104-115, 150-155.
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel. 1875. Brief account of Bushman folklore and other texts:
second report concerning Bushman researches, presented to both Houses of the Parliament
of the Cape of Good Hope, by command of His Excellency the Governor. Cape
parliamentary papers, #G54’1875. Cape Town, London & Leipzig: J.C. Juta; Trübner &
Co.; F.A. Brockhaus.
Bleek, Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel; Lloyd, Lucy Catherine. 1911. Specimens of Bushman folklore.
With an introduction by G. Mc. Theal. London: George Allen & Unwin. Pp xl, 467.
The title on the cover says Bushmen folklore. Reprinted 1968 by Cornelis Struik in Cape Town (Africana
collectanea, #28).
URL: www.archive.org/details/specimensofbushm00bleeuoft
URL: www.sacred-texts.com/afr/sbf/index.htm
Block, M. 1912. Vocabulaire français-sakara et sakara-français. Bruxelles.
Later reprinted by Musée Royal de l’Afrique Centrale in Tervuren.
Bloxam, G.W. 1887. Exhibition of West African symbolic messages. Journal of the
Anthropological Inst. of Great Britain and Ireland, v. 16, p. 295-299.
Talks about various artefacts of the Jebu (Adamawa?). Includes some lexical specimens.
Bluzet, R. 1901. Vocabulaire de la langue mossi, précédé de notes grammaticales. Renseignements
coloniaux et documents: supplément au bulletin du Comité de l’Afrique Française, v. 11, p.
45-62.
Blyden, Edward Wilmot. 1905. The Koran in Africa. Journal of the African Society, v. 4, 14, p.
157-171.
Böcking, G. 1896. Sagen der Wa-Pokomo. Zeitschrift für afrikanische und oceanische Sprachen,
v. 2, 1, p. 33-39.
Böckner, C. 1891. Die wichtigsten Kultur- und Nutzpflanzen Deutsch-Ostafrikas. Koloniales
Jahrbuch, 1891, p. 100-117.
Boeck, Egide de. 1904. Notions du lingala ou langue du haut-fleuve. Pp 38.
Details wanting.
Boeck, Egide de. 1904. Grammaire et vocabulaire du lingala, ou langue du haut-Congo.
Bruxelles: Imprimerie Polleunis & Ceuterick. Pp 163.
A photographic reprint of Boeck’s grammar in its entirety was published by Michael Meeuwis in Annales
Aequatoria, v. 22 (2003), p. 341-421.
Boeck, Egide de. 1905. Langue congolaise. Pp 30.
Details wanting.
Boeck, Egide de. 1906. Lingala: petit vocabulaire et phrases usuelles. Pp 31.
Details wanting.
Boilat, D. 1858. Grammaire de la langue woloffe. Paris: Imprimerie Impériale. Pp 430.
Reprinted 1974 by Institut National des Langues et Civilisations Orientales (INALCO) in Paris.
URL: books.google.se/books?id=spMCAAAAQAAJ
Bolton, H. Carrington. 1890. Seega, an Egyptian game. Journal of American folklore, v. 3, 9, p.
132-134.
Bonatz, J.A. 1862. Anleitung zur Erlernung der Kaffer-Sprache. Pp xii, 292.
Details wanting.
Bonhomme, P.J.M. 1901. Petits exercises préparatoires pour l’étude de l’agni (Afema). Lyon.
Bonnard, [?]. 1890. Livret congolais: vocabularie et premiers exercises vili-français. Loango.
121
Details wanting.
Bonnaventure, A. 1895. Eléments de grammaire de la langue fon ou dahoméenne, suivis d’un
vocabulaire et d’un recueil de conversations. Paris: Charles-Lavauzelle. Pp 72.
Not completely sure about the publishers’ name. Maybe it should be just Lavauzelle.
Borchardt, P. 1912. Bibliographie de l’Angola (bibliotheca angolensis), 1500-1910.
Monographies bibliographiques, #2. Bruxelles: Misch & Thron. Pp iv, 61.
Borelli, Jules. 1890. Ethiopie méridionale: journal de mon voyage aux pays Amhara, Oromo et
Sidama, Septembre 1885 a Novembre 1888. Paris: May & Motteroz. Pp 520.
Includes vocabularies/phrases for “koullo” (p. 449-462) and “tambaro et hadia” (p. 463-482).
Peripherals: George C. Hurlbut, Journal of the American Geographical Society of New York, v. 22 (1890) p. 84126.
Borelli, Jules. 1890? Divisions, subdivisions, langues et races des régions Amhara, Oromo et
Sidama. Bulletin de la Société de Géographie (Paris), 7ème série, v. (?), p. (?).
Not sure if this exists. It could be a chapter title from his book Éthiopie méridionale.
Bork, Ferdinand. 1912/13. Zu den neuen Sprachen von Süd-Kordofan. Zeitschrift für
Kolonialsprachen, v. 3, p. 140-156.
A follow-up to Seligmann (1910/11). Includes notes on Talodi, Eliri, Lafofa, Kanderma, Kawama, and Lumun (all
Kordofanian) and Tumtum (Kadugli).
Bos, A. 1880. Note sur le créole qu’on parle a l’Ile Mauricia. Romania (Paris), v. 9, p. 571-578.
Bosman, Daniel Brink. 1916. Afrikaans en Maleis-Portuguees. Groningen: Noordhoff. Pp xi, 127.
Publication of the author’s dissertation, University at Groningen, 1916.
Boteler, Thomas [Capt.]. 1835. Narrative of a voyage of discovery to Africa and Arabia, from
1821-1826, performed in His Majesty’s ships Leven and Barracouta, from 1821 to 1826,
under the command of Capt. F.W. Owen, 2 vols. London: Richard Bentley.
Includes a Ronga vocabulary in a somewhat complicated orthography: “it takes some time to discover that one is
dealing with Bantu words and not Malagasy!” (Doke 1959:5).
Bouché, Pierre Bertrand [Abbe]. 1880. Etude sur la langue nago. Archives des pères
missionnaires, #1. Bar-le-Duc (France): L. Philipona. Pp 51.
Bouché, Pierre Bertrand [Abbe]. 1880. Les noirs peints par eux-mêmes. Paris: Librairie
Poussielgue Frères. Pp 144.
Contains proverbs in Nago and French (Hintze 1959:68).
Boulifa, Si Ammar ben Said. 1904. Recueil de poesies kabyles. Alger.
Reissued (revised?) in 1990 by Awal in Paris.
Boulifa, Si Ammar ben Said. 1905. Manuscrits berbères du Maroc. Journal asiatique, 10ème série,
v. 6 [167], p. 333-362.
Boulifa, Si Ammar ben Said. 1908. Textes berbères en dialecte de l’Atlas marocain. Publications
de l’Ecole des Lettres d’Alger; Bulletin de correspondance africaine, #36. Paris: Ernest
Leroux. Pp 388.
Boulifa, Si Ammar ben Said. 1909. L’inscription d’Ifr’a. Revue africaine: journal des traveaux de
la Société Historique Algérienne, v. 53, p. 411.
Journal could be wrong.
Boulifa, Si Ammar ben Said. 1910. Une premier année de langue kabyle, dialecte zouaoua.
Deuxième édition. Alger.
Not sure what this is.
Boulifa, Si Ammar ben Said. 1911. Noveaux documents archaeologiques découvertes dans le Haut
Sebaou. Revue africaine: journal des traveaux de la Société Historique Algérienne, v. 55, p.
16-41.
Boulifa, Si Ammar ben Said. 1913. Etude linguistique et sociologique sur la Kabylie de Djurdjura.
Alger.
122
Boulifa, Si Ammar ben Said. 1913. Lexique kabyle-français. Alger.
Boulifa, Si Ammar ben Said. 1913. Methode de langue kabyle. Alger.
Bourquin, Walther [Rev.]. 1912/13. Adverb und adverbiale Umschreibung im Kafir [pt. 1-2].
Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 3, p. 230-243, 279-326.
Peripherals: Karl Endemann, “Anmerkungen”, Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 5 (1914/15) p. 151-155.
Bourquin, Walther [Rev.]. 1913/14. Adverb und adverbiale Umschreibung im Kafir [pt. 3-5].
Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 4, p. 68-74, 118-155, 213-248.
Peripherals: Karl Endemann, “Anmerkungen”, Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 5 (1914/15) p. 151-155.
Boussoutrot, A. 1900. Vocabulaire berbère ancien. Revue tunisienne, v. 7, p. 489-507.
Bowdich, Thomas Edward. 1819. Voyage dans les pays d’aschantie: relation de l’ambassade
envoyée dans ce royaume par les anglais, avec details sur les mouers. Traduit de l’anglais.
Paris: Librairie de Gide. Pp 527.
Bowdich, Thomas Edward. 1819. Mission from Cape Coast Castle to Ashantee: with a statistical
account of that kingdom, and geographical notices of other parts of the interior of Africa.
London: John Murray. Pp x, 512.
Includes the first known vocabulary of Yoruba (Hair 1967). Reprinted and heavily abridged (292 pp) in 1873 as
Mission from Cape Coast to Ashantee, with a descriptive account of that kingdom, publ. by Griffith & Farran in
London, with an introduction by Bowdich’s daughter, Mrs Hal.
Peripherals: Paul E.H. Hair, The early study of Nigerian languages (Cambridge University Press, 1967); P.E.H. Hair,
“An ethnolinguistic inventory of the Lower Guinea coast before 1700 (pt. 2)”, African language review, v. 8 (1969)
p. 225-236; M.E. Kropp Dakubu, “Notes on the linguistic situation on the coast of Ghana during the nineteenth
century”, Research review from the Institute of African Studies, University of Ghana, new series, v. 1 (1985) p.
192-202.
Bowdich, Thomas Edward. 1824. Mission from Cape Coast to Ashantee, with a statistical account
of that kingdom and geographical notices of other parts of the interior of Africa. Third
edition. London: John Murray. Pp x, 512.
The vocabulary part contains numerals (and more?) from 31 African languages, e.g. Empoongwa B11a, Sheckan
B21, Kaylee B20?, Oongoomo B22b, Oongabai B20?, Garangi (Mande?), Kong, Callana, Garman, Fobee (Fon?),
Adampi (Gbe?), Tambi (?), Tembu (?), Ashantee, Fantee, Booroom (?), Inta (Guang?), Aowin (Anyi), Amanahea
(Nyo Kwa), Ahanta, Affootoo (Efutu?), Inkra (Fante), Acra (Fante), Kerrapay (Gbe?), Badaggry (Gbe?), Dagwhumba
(Gbe?), Mosee (Gbe?), Inwa (Gbe?), Kumsallahoo (Gbe?), Bornu, Maiha (Kanuri?), Mallowa (Hausa?), Quolla-liffa
(Hausa?), Kallaghee (Bade). “A few Malemba [Kikongo] words occur as glosses in Bowdich’s Ashantee vocabulary.
At first I thought these represented the language of the River Malimba, near the Cameroons. They seem, however,
to coincide more with the Malemba of Smith [cfr Tuckey 1818]” (Latham 1847:190). Reprinted 1966 by Frank Cass
& Co. in London, edited and introduced by W.E.F. Ward (65+viii+512 pp).
Reports of the meeting of the British Association for the Advancement of Science, v. 17 (1847) p. 154-229; J.D.
Fage, “On the reproduction and editing of classics of African history”, Journal of African history, v. 8 (1967) p.
157-161; Mary Esther Kropp-Dakubu, “Bowdich’s ‘Adampe’ word list”, Research review from the Institute of
African Studies, University of Ghana, v. 5 (1969) p. 45-49.
Bowen, Thomas J. [Rev.]. 1858. Grammar and dictionary of the Yoruba language, with an
introductory description of the country and people of Yoruba. Smithsonian contributions to
knowledge, #10:4. Washington DC: Smithsonian Inst. Pp xxii, 71, 136.
URL: www.archive.org/details/grammardictionar00bowerich
Boyce, William Binnington. 1832. Letter from W.B. Boyce dated March 31st, 1832. WesleyanMethodist magazine, third series, v. 11 [55], p. 664.
Something on/about Xhosa grammar.
Boyce, William Binnington. 1834. Grammar of the Kafir language. London & Graham’s Town:
Wesleyan Methodist Mission Press. Pp 54.
Boyce, William Binnington. 1844. Grammar of the Kafir language. Second edition, augmented
and improved with vocabulary and exercises by William J. Davis. London: James Nichols
for the Wesleyan Missionary Society. Pp xxviii, 228.
URL: books.google.com/books?id=Sy4OAAAAIAAJ
123
Boyce, William Binnington. 1863. Grammar of the Kafir language. Third edition, revised by
William J. Davis. Grahamstown: Wesleyan Methodist Mission Press.
Boyce, William Binnington. 1872. Grammar of the Kafir language. Fourth edition, revised and
enlarged by William J. Davis. Grahamstown: Wesleyan Methodist Mission Press. Pp viii,
183.
This is sometimes credited to the editor William Davis instead.
Boyle, C. Vicars [Capt.]. 1915. The Lala people and their customs. Journal of the African Society,
v. 14, 57, p. 54-69.
“These notes have been compiled by Mrs Boyle from a manuscript prepared by the la Captain C. Vicars Boyle
shortly before his death.” The article is credited to A.M.B. Includes four very brief word lists. “In dealing with the
present Lala district ... we find four different languages or dialects of one language [Ga-anda, Tua, Tenna, Kanukuru]
... it is practically impossible to find one native who can talk all four” (p55).
Brachiel, G.H. 1909. Vocabulaire sangho (Haut-Oubangui). Paris: Boyard. Pp 173.
Brackenbury, E.A. 1907. A short vocabulary of the Fulani language. Lokoja (Nigeria):
Government Printer. Pp 39.
Brackenbury, E.A. 1915. Notes on Fulfulde. Man: a record of anthropological science, v. 15, 57,
p. 70-82.
Brahim, El H’aoudh Meh’ammed ben Ali ben. 1897. Texte berbère (dialecte du Sous). Publié avec
une traduction française et des notes par J.D. Luciani. Alger. Pp 246.
Bramly, Alwyn Jennings. 1909. English-Galla-Amharic vocabulary. Manuscript. Khartoum
University Library.
Referred to by Unseth (1990:41).
Brandstetter, Renward. 1893. Die Beziehungen des Malagasy zum Malaiischen. Malaiopolynesische Forschungen, Reihe 1, #2. Luzern (Schweiz): Eisenring. Pp 43.
Brandstetter, Renward. 1902. Tagalen und Madagassen: eine sprachvergleichende Darstellung
als Orienterung für Ethnographen und Sprachforscher. Malaio-polynesische Forschungen,
Reihe 2, #2. Luzern (Schweiz): Eisenring. Pp 85.
Brandt, Friedrich Wilhelm. 1909. Mwalimu wa kidachi: deutsche Sprachlehre für Eingeborene in
Ostafrika. Tanga (Tanganyika). Pp viii, 204.
Bresnier, Louis Jacques. 1852. Anthologie arabe élémentaire, choix de maximes et de textes
variés, la plupart inédites, accompagné d’un vocabulaire arabe-français. Alger. Pp ii, 391;
138.
Bresnier, Louis Jacques. 1855. Cours pratique et théoretique de langue arabe: renfermant les
principes détaillés de la lecture, de la grammaire et du style; ainsi que les éléments de la
prosodie accompagné d’un traité du langage arabe usuel et des divers dialectes en Algérie.
Alger & Paris: Bastide & Challamel. Pp 668.
Bresnier, Louis Jacques. 1915. Cours pratique et théoretique de langue arabe: renfermant les
principes détaillés de la lecture, de la grammaire et du style; ainsi que les éléments de la
prosodie accompagné d’un traité du langage arabe usuel et des divers dialectes en Algérie.
Deuxième édition. Alger. Pp xvi, 679.
Brew, Samuel Henry. 1917. Practical Fanti course. London & Cape Coast: Waterlow & Sons;
Wesleyan Book Depot. Pp x, 132.
Brincker, Peter Heinrich. 1879. Omahonge ookuleza otyiherero, 2: with an Otyiherero-English
vocabulary. Published anonymously. Gütersloh: C. Bertelsmann. Pp 218.
Brincker, Peter Heinrich. 1886. Wörterbuch und kurzgefasste Grammatik des Otji-Hérero, mit
Beifügung verwandter Ausdrücke und Formen des Oshi-Ndonga-Otj-Ambo. Heraugegeben
von C.G. Büttner. Leipzig: T.O. Weigel. Pp viii, 351, 31.
124
Reprinted 1964 by Gregg Press, as well as during the 1980s by Gregg International.
Brincker, Peter Heinrich. 1889. Zur Sprachen- und Völkerkunde der Bantuneger und verwandter
Stämme Südwestafrikas. Internationale Zeitschrift für allgemeine Sprachwissenschaft, v. 5,
1, p. 19-46.
Also published in book form the same year by Henninger in Heilborn, Germany.
Brincker, Peter Heinrich. 1891. Lehrbuch des Oshikuanjama: Bantu-Sprache in DeutschSüdwest-Afrika. Lehrbücher des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, #8. Stuttgart & Berlin:
Verlag von W. Spemann. Pp ix, 118, 136.
Besides notes on Kwanyama, this also includes introductory notes on Herero and Ndonga.
Brincker, Peter Heinrich. 1894. Zur etymologischen Deutung des Namens “Ov-ámbo”. Globus, v.
66, 13, p. 207-208.
Brincker, Peter Heinrich. 1895. Zur Namenskunde von Deutsch-Süd-Westafrika. Globus, v. 68, p.
384-385.
Brincker, Peter Heinrich. 1895. Etymologische Deutung von Stammesnamen in der Lingua-Bantu.
Globus, v. 68, 1, p. 15-16.
Not sure what languages this deals with.
Brincker, Peter Heinrich. 1895. Suppositionen über die etymologisch-mythologische Bedeutung
der Nominum für “Leben, Seele, Geist” und “Tod” in der Lingua-Bantu. Zeitschrift für
afrikanische und oceanische Sprachen, v. 1, 2, p. 164-168.
Brincker, Peter Heinrich. 1897. Deutscher Wortführer für die Bantu-Dialekte Otjihérero,
Oshindónga und Oshikuánjama in Südwest-Afrika. Mit einem Anhang über die Thesen und
Hypothesen über Art und Wesen der Clicks in der Dialekten Kafir-Bantu und Hottentotten.
Elberfeld (Deutschland): Friederichsen & Co. Pp 562.
The original manuscript for this (v+684 pp) and the proof-read version (547 pp) are available at the Rheinische
Missionsgesellschaft in Windhoek.
Peripherals: C. Velten, Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 1 (1898) p. 205.
Brincker, Peter Heinrich. 1897. Vergleichende Grammatik des Otjiherero, Osikuanjama und
Osindonga.
Details wanting.
Brincker, Peter Heinrich. 1897. Die Bedeutung der Nominalpräformative und deren
Pronominalcharaktere und deren Verbalaffixe von e.g. sechs Dialekten der Lingua Bantu.
Zeitschrift für afrikanische und oceanische Sprachen, v. 3, 4, p. 318-331.
Peripherals: Alice Werner, “Zu P.H. Brinckers Aufsatz”, Zeitschrift für afrikanische und oceanische Sprachen, v. 4
(1898) p. 199-200.
Brincker, Peter Heinrich. 1897. Suppositionen über die etymologisch-mythologische Bedeutung
der Nominum für “Vater, Mutter” in der Lingua-Bantu. Zeitschrift für afrikanische und
oceanische Sprachen, v. 3, 4, p. 332-337.
Brincker, Peter Heinrich. 1898. Zur Symbolik und Etymologie der Zahlwörter in fünf Dialekten
der Lingua Bantu. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 1, III, p. 138145.
Includes a comparative section called “Etymologisch-mythologische Andeutungen über den Namen ‘omunduomuntu’ pl-‘ovandu-abantu’ (Mensch, Menschen)” on p. 139.
Brincker, Peter Heinrich. 1899. Die Eingeborenen Deutsch-Südwest-Afrikas nach Geschichte,
Charakter, Sitten, Gebrauchen und Sprachen. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische
Brincker, Peter Heinrich. 1900. Unsere Ovambo-Mission, sowie Land, Leute, Religion, Sitten,
Gebräuche, Sprachen u.s.w. der Ovakuanjama-Ovambo. Rheinische Missionstraktate,
#101. Barmen-Wuppertal: Rheinischen Missionsgesellschaft. Pp 76.
Reprinted 1998 in Ulm.
Brincker, Peter Heinrich. 1902. Sprachproben aus Deutsch-Südwestafrika. Mitteilungen des
Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 5, III, p. 149-174.
Brincker, Peter Heinrich. 1903. Beitrag zur Bantu-Forschung. Mitteilungen des Seminars für
orientalische Sprachen, v. 6, III, p. 99-108.
125
Brincker, Peter Heinrich; Huber, M. 1904. Contributions towards Bantu philology. Journal of the
African Society, v. 3, 11, p. 300-305.
Brinton, Daniel Garrison. 1890. On Etruscan and Libyan names: a comparative study. Proceedings
of the American Philosophical Society, v. 28, p. (?).
On Berber?
Brinton, Daniel Garrison. 1894. The alphabets of the Berbers. Science, v. 21, p. 104.
Jucovy & Alderete (2001) give the surname as Burton.
Brito, A. de P. de. 1887. Dialectos crioulos-portugueses: apontamentos para a gramática do crioulo
que se fala na Ilha de Santiago de Cabo Verde. Boletim da Sociedade de Geográfia de
Lisboa, 1887, p. (?).
Reprinted 1967 in Estudos linguísticos crioulos (edited by Jorge Morais-Barbosa; Academia Internacional da
Cultura Portuguesa, Lisboa), p. 329-404.
Brockelmann, Carl. 1906. Semitische Sprachwissenschaft. Sammlung Göschen, #291. Leipzig:
G.J. Göschen. Pp 160.
Brockelmann, Carl. 1907/13. Grundriss vergleichenden Grammatik der semitischen Sprachen, 2
Bde. Berlin & New York: Reuther & Reichard; Lemcke & Buechner.
Issued in parts, some of which bore the title Kurzgefasste vergleichende Grammatik der semitischen Sprachen.
Reprinted 1961 (v 1) and 1966 (v 1-2) by Georg Olms Verlag in Hildesheim (Germany).
Brockelmann, Carl. 1908. Kurzgefasste vergleichende Grammatik der semitischen Sprachen, 1:
Elemente der Laut- und Formenlehre. Porta linguarum orientalium: Sammlung von
Lehrbüchern für das Studium der orientalischen Sprachen, #21. Berlin & New York: Reuther
& Reichard; Lemcke & Buechner. Pp xii, 314.
This is identical to the first volume of Grundriss der vergleichenden Grammatik der semitischen Sprachen. Reprinted
1961 by Georg Olms Verlag in Hildesheim (Germany).
Brockelmann, Carl. 1910. Précis de linguistique sémitique. Traduit de l’allemand par W. Marçais
et Marcel Cohen. Paris: Librairie Orientaliste Paul Geuthner. Pp 224.
Translation of Semitische sprachwissenschaft.
Brockelmann, Carl. 1916. Semitische Sprachwissenschaft. Zweite verbesserte Auflage. Sammlung
Göschen, #291. Leipzig: G.J. Göschen. Pp 160.
Brode, Heinrich. 1902. Der Mord Sejid Thueni’s und seine Söhne. Mitteilungen des Seminars für
orientalische Sprachen, v. 5, II, p. 1-24.
Omani Arabic text.
Bronzi, Pietro. 1919. Frammento di fonologia berbera. Bologna. Pp 50.
Brooking, R. 1843. Nucleus of a grammar of the Fanti language, with vocabulary. Pp 24.
Was this ever published? Includes English-Fanti and Fanti-English.
Brosselard, Charles. 1844. Dictionnaire français-berbère.
Kabyle dictionary referred to by Jucovy & Alderete (2001). See also Jaubert (1844).
Broussais, Emile. 1882/83. Recherches sur les transformations du berbère. Bulletin de
correspondance africaine, v. 1, p. 200-218, 376-432.
Brown, John [of Taung]. 1875. Lokwalo loa mahuku a secwana le seeñeles. London Missionary
Society (LMS). Pp viii, 279, iv.
The second edition was revised by John Tom Brown and retitled Secwana dictionary, publ. 1895.
Brown, Joseph Peter. 1913. Mfantsi grammar. Cape Coast Castle: Wesleyan Book Depot. Pp 72.
Brown, Joseph Peter. 1915. Mfantsi grammar. Second edition, revised and enlarged. Cape Coast
Castle: Wesleyan Book Depot. Pp xii, 72.
Brown, John Tom. 1895. Secwana dictionary: English-Secwana and Secwana-English. Second
edition, enlarged and re-arranged; originally compiled by John Brown of Taung. Frome UK
& London: Butler & Tanner for the London Missionary Society (LMS). Pp 466.
The first edition compiled by one John Brown of Taung, and bore the title Lokwalo loa Mahuku a Secwana le
Seeñele, publ. 1875. This second edition was reprinted 1921 by the London Missionary Society.
Peripherals: S.H. Ray, Journal of the Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland, v. 26 (1897) p. 459.
126
Browne, John Ross. 1846. Etchings of a whaling cruise, with notes of a sojourn on the island of
Zanzibar, and a brief history of the whale fishery, in its past and present condition. London:
John Murray. Pp xiii, 580, plates.
Includes a Swahili vocabulary (Latham 1847:193). Simultaneously published by Harper & Bros in New York.
Bruce, A. 19xx. Unpublished notes on Turkana.
These “appear to have been lost” (Barton 1921:43).
Bruel, Georges. 1910. Les populations de la moyenne Sanga: Ponio, Boumali, Babinga, avec trentetrois figures, dix planches et deux cartes. Revue d’ethnographie et de sociologie, v. 1, p. 3-32,
125.
Brugger, [?]; Dewilder, [?]; Kocher, [?]; Rolleri, [?]; Wöhr, [?]. 1912. Vocabulaire françaisabarambo et abarambo-français. Bruxelles: Imprimerie Veuve Monnom. Pp 96.
Issued anonymously. Later reprinted by Musée Royal de l’Afrique Centrale in Tervuren.
Brugmann, Karl. 1904. Kurze vergleichende Grammatik der indogermanischen Sprachen.
Strassburg: Trübner & Co.
Brugsch, Heinrich Ferdinand Karl. 1850. De natura et indole lnguae popularis aegyptiorum.
Berolini: Libraria Dümmleriana. Pp 39.
Brugsch, Heinrich Ferdinand Karl. (Ed.) 1865. A. Henry Rhind’s zwei bilingue Papyri: hieratisch
und demotisch. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs’sche Buchhandlung. Pp vi, 49, plates.
Brugsch, Heinrich Ferdinand Karl. 1867/82. Hieroglyphisch-demotisches Wörterbuch, 7 Bde.
Leipzig.
Brugsch, Heinrich Ferdinand Karl. 1872. Hieroglyphische Grammatik; oder, übersichtliche
Zusammenstellung der graphischen, grammatischen und syntaktischen Regeln der heiligen
Sprache und Schrift der alten Aegypter. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs’sche Buchhandlung. Pp vi,
138.
Brugsch, Heinrich Ferdinand Karl. 1872. Index des hiéroglyphes phonétiques: y compris des
valeurs de l’écriture secrète et des signes déterminatifs qui se rencontrent dans le système
graphique des anciens Egyptiens. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs’sche Buchhandlung. Pp 23.
Brugsch, Heinrich Ferdinand Karl. 1879. A history of Egypt under the Pharaohs, derived entirely
from the monuments, 2 vols. London: John Murray.
Peripherals: Anon, Quarterly review, April 1879, p.(?); Anon, The Edinburgh review, July 1879, p.(?).
Brugsch, Heinrich Ferdinand Karl. 1883/91. Thesaurus inscriptionum aegyptiacarum, 6 vols.
Leipzig.
Brugsch, Heinrich Ferdinand Karl. 1891. Die Aegyptologie: Abriss der Entzifferungen und
Forschungen auf dem Gebiete der aegyptischen Schrift, Sprache und Alterthumskunde.
Leipzig: W. Friedrich. Pp viii, 535.
Brugsch, Heinrich Ferdinand Karl. 1891. Egypt under the Pharaohs: a history derived entirely
from the monuments. New edition, condensed and thoroughly revised by M. Brodrick.
London: John Murray. Pp xxviii, 496, plates.
Brun, Joseph [Père]. 1917. Proverbes et devinettes Khassonkés. Annuaire du Comité d’Etudes
Historiques et Scientifiques de l’Afrique Occidentale Française, 1917, p. 223ff.
Brun, Joseph [Père]. 1919/20. Recueil de fables et des chants en dialecte Hal Poular. Anthropos:
internationale Zeitschrift für Völker- und Sprachenkunde, v. 14/15, p. 180-214.
Brun-Rollet, Antoine. 1862. Brun-Rollets Reise in den Sumpfregionen des Nam Aith westlich vom
No-See und dem Bahr-el-Abiad, 1856. In: Inner-Afrika: Beurmanns Reise 1860, Kotschy
1839, Brun-Rollet 1856, p. 18-30. Dr A. Petermanns Mittheilungen aus Justus Perthes’
Geographischer Anstalt, Ergänzungsband #2:7. Gotha: Justus Perthes.
Includes “Vokabulieren der Dinka, Nuehr und Schilluk Sprachen”, p. 25-30.
Brunton, Henry. 1802. A grammar and vocabulary of the Susoo language: to which are added the
names of some of the Susoo towns near the banks of the Rio Pongas, a small catalogue of
Arabic books and a list of the names of some of the learned men of the Mandinga and
Foulah countries, with whom an useful correspondence could be opened up in the Arabic
language. Edinburgh: J. Ritchie. Pp xliv, [5]-136.
Issued anonymously. Sometimes also credited to one John Kemp.
127
Brutel, E. 1911. Vocabulaire français-kiswahili et kiswahili-français, précédé d’une grammaire
abrégée. Alger: Maison-Carrée, Imprimerie des Missionnaires d’Afrique (Pères-Blancs). Pp
lviii, 147.
Credited to P.E.B. The second edition appeared the same year.
abrégée. Deuxième édition. Alger: Maison-Carrée, Imprimerie des Missionnaires d’Afrique
(Pères-Blancs). Pp 231.
Brutel, E. 1911. Vocabulaire kiswahili. Bruxelles.
abrégée. Troisième édition. Alger: Maison-Carrée, Imprimerie des Missionnaires d’Afrique
(Pères-Blancs). Pp 470.
Brutzer, Ernst. 1906. Handbuch der Kambasprache. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische
Bryant, Alfred Thomas. 189x. Isigama, ukuti nje, inncwadi yamazwi esingisi ecasiselwe
ngokwabantu. Pinetown (Natal). Pp 249.
Credited to uNemo. Not sure what this is, or why Bryant’s name is there. Source?
Bryant, Alfred Thomas. 1905. A Zulu-English dictionary with notes on pronunciation, a revised
orthography and derivations and cognate words from many languages, including also a
vocabulary of Hlonipa words, tribal-names, etc., a synopsis of Zulu grammar and a
concise history of the Zulu people from the most ancient times. Durban & Pietermaritzburg:
Marianhill Press. Pp 111, 778.
URL: www.archive.org/details/zuluenglishdicti00brya
Bryant, Alfred Thomas. 1909. Incwadi yesingisi nesizulu: Zulu without a grammar, an EnglishZulu phrase-book.
Details wanting.
Bryant, Alfred Thomas. 1915. A Zulu-English dictionary, with notes on pronunciation. New(?)
edition. Marianhill: Mission Press. Pp 778.
Bryant, Alfred Thomas. 1917. An abridged English-Zulu word-book. Marianhill: Mission Press.
Pp 432.
Reprinted 1986 by the Marianhill Mission Press (ISBN-10 0-620-08855-9).
Bryant, James C. 1848. The Zulu language. Journal of the Oriental Society, v. 1, p. 383-396.
“Few people seem to have noticed what, for its size, is one the most accurate and concise accounts of Zulu ever
given” (Doke 1959:15).
Peripherals: C.M. Doke, “Two Zulu language pioneers”, The missionary herald (Boston), v. 133 (1937) p. 17-18;
C.M. Doke, “Bantu language pioneers of the nineteenth century”, African studies, v. 14 (1940) p. 207-246; C.M.
Doke, “Bantu language pioneers of the nineteenth century” (revised), African studies, v. 18 (1959) p. 1-27.
Buck, H. 1911. A dictionary with notes on the grammar of the Mashona language, commonly
called Chiswina. Penhalonga (Southern Rhodesia): Society for Promoting Christian
Knowledge (SPCK). Pp xliv, 206.
Issued without author’s name. Deals with the Manyika dialect. A later reprint (poss. revision) was retitled Mashona
dictionary.
Bud-M’Belle, I. 1903. Kafir scholar’s companion. Alice: Lovedale Mission Press. Pp xxiii, 181.
Book of readings? Details wanting.
Budge, Ernst Alfred Wallis. 1896. An Egyptian reading book for beginners: being a series of
historical, funereal, moral, religious and mythological texts printed in hieroglyphic
characters together with a transliteration and a complete vocabulary. London: Kegan Paul,
Trench, Trübner & Co. Pp liv, 592.
Budge, Ernst Alfred Wallis. 1898. The Book of the Dead: the chapters of coming forth by day, 3
vols. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co.
URL: www.etana.org
Budge, Ernst Alfred Wallis. 1899. Egyptian language: easy lessons in Egyptian hieroglyphics.
London. Pp 246.
128
Budge, Ernst Alfred Wallis. 1909. Texts relating to Saint Mêna of Egypt and canons of Nicaea in
a Nubian dialect. London.
Budge, Ernst Alfred Wallis. 1910. Egyptian language: easy lessons in Egyptian hieroglyphics.
Third edition. Books on Egypt and Chaldea, #3. London.
Budge, Ernst Alfred Wallis. 1910. Facsimiles of Egyptian hieratic papyri in the British Museum.
London.
Budge, Ernst Alfred Wallis. 1911. Hieroglyphic vocabulary to the Theban recension of the Book
of the Dead. New edition, revised and enlarged. Books on Egypt and Chaldea, #31. London:
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co. Pp viii, 522.
Reprinted 1991 by Dover in New York (ISBN-10 0-486-26724-5).
Budge, Ernst Alfred Wallis. 1913. The papyrus of Ani. New York: George P. Putnam’s Sons.
Budge, Ernst Alfred Wallis. 1915. Miscellaneous Coptic texts in the dialect of Upper Egypt.
London.
Bufe, E. 1910/11. Die Dualasprache in ihrem Verhältnis zu den Dialekten des Nordgebiets der
Station Bombe. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 1, p. 25-36.
Bufe, E. 1914/15. Material zur Erforschung der Bakundu-Spache. Zeitschrift für
Burchardt, M. 1909/10. Dei altkanaanäischen Fremdworte und Eigennamen im Ägypten, 2 Bde.
Leipzig.
Burchardt, M. 1912. Ägyptische Eigennamen in semitischer Umschreibung. Zeitschrift für
ägyptische Sprache, v. 50, p. 122-123.
Burchell, William John. 1824. Specimens of the Sichuana language. In: Travels in the interior of
southern Africa, v. 2, p. (?). London: Longman, Hurst, Rees, Orme & Brown.
Includes phonological and grammatical notes plus vocabulary and phrase-list.
Burckhardt, John Lewis. 1819. Travels in Nubia. London: John Murray. Pp xcii, 543.
Includes, among other things, vocabulary material for El Kenuz (Nubian), Wady Nuba, Borgho (Maba) and Bornu
(Kanuri/Kanembu), all collected in Cairo. Reprinted (facsimile) 1968 by Gregg Press at Farnborough.
Peripherals: Roland Werner, “Das ‘Vocabulary of the Kensy and Nouba languages’ des John Lewis Burckhardt im
Vergleich mit dem heutigen Nilnubisch”, Frankfurter afrikanistische Blätter, v. 1 (1989) p. 72-94.
Burckhardt, John Lewis. 1822. Travels in Nubia. Second edition. London: John Murray. Pp xcviii,
498.
Reprinted 1968 by Gregg Press in Farnborough.
Burckhardt, John Lewis. 1830. Arabic proverbs: the manners and customs of the modern
Egyptians. London: John Murray. Pp vii, 232.
Burckhardt, John Lewis. 1875. Arabic proverbs: the manners and customs of the modern
Egyptians. Second edition. London: Bernard Quaritch. Pp vii, 283.
Reprinted 1972 (as a third edition) jointly by Curzon Press in London and Rowman & Littlefield in Totowa NJ.
Bürgi, Ernst. 1894. Übungen in der Evhesprache: Dialoge. Bremen. Pp 28.
Bürgi, Ernst. 1897. Kurzgefasste Grammatik der Ewesprache. Machinen-Vervielfältigung. Bremen.
Pp viii, 120.
Bürgi, Ernst. 1902. Welcher Dialekt der Evhesprache verdient zur Schrift- und Verkehrssprache im
Evhelande (Süd-Togo) erhoben zu werden? Zeitschrift für afrikanische, ozeanische und
ostasiatische Sprachen, v. 6, p. 223-233.
Peripherals: G. Härtter, “Welcher Dialekt der Evhesprache verdient zur Schrift- und Verkehrssprache im Evhelande
(Togo) erhoben zu werden?”, Beiträge zur Kolonialpolitik und Kolonialwirtschaft, v. 3 (1901) p. 342-343; P.
Wilhelm Schmidt, “Welcher Dialekt der Evhesprache verdient zur Schrift- und Verkehrssprache im Evhelande (Togo)
erhoben zu werden?”, Beiträge zur Kolonialpolitik und Kolonialwirtschaft, v. 4 (1902) p. 65-70.
Bürgi, Ernst. 1909. Ewe-Gespräche für Anfänger. Bremen: Norddeutsche Missions-Gesellschaft.
Pp 51.
Bürgi, Ernst. 1915. Sammlung von Ewe-Sprichwörtern: gesammelt und übersetzt. Archiv für
Anthropologie, neue Folge, v. 13 [41], p. 415-450.
129
Contains 925 proverbs with German translations and annotations (Hintze 1959:58).
Burgt, Joannes Michael M. van der [Père]. 1902. Eléments d’une grammaire kirundi. Mitteilungen
des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 5, III, p. 1-108.
Burgt, Joannes Michael M. van der [Père]. 1903. Dictionnaire français-kirundi, avec l’indication
succincte de la signification swahili et allemande. Bois-le-duc (Pays Bas): Missionnaires
d’Afrique (Pères-Blancs). Pp cxix, 640.
Peripherals: Carl Meinhof, Zeitschrift für Eingeborenen-Sprachen, v. 36 (1903) p. 703-704; A. Werner, Man, v. 4
(1904) p. 127-128.
Burt, A.E. 1910. Swahili grammar and vocabulary. Drawn up by Mrs F. Burt, with an
introduction, article on phonetics, and syllabary by W.E. Taylor. London: Society for
Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp 252.
Deals with the Kimvita dialect.
Burt, A.E. 1917. Swahili grammar and vocabulary. Second edition, drawn up by Mrs F. Burt, with
an introduction and article on phonetics by W.E. Taylor. London: Society for Promoting
Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp vii, 263.
Deals with the Kimvita dialect. Reprinted several times.
Burton, Richard Francis [Capt.]. 1856. First footsteps in East Africa: an exploration of Harar.
London: Longman, Brown, Green & Longmans. Pp xl, 648.
Appendix II consists of a “Grammatical outline and vocabulary of the Harari language”.
URL: books.google.com/books?id=5POdm7UKXP4C
Burton, Richard Francis [Capt.]. 1865. Wit and wisdom from West-Africa: a book of proverbial
philosophy, idioms, enigmas, and laconisms. London: Tinsley Brothers. Pp xxx, 455.
Includes Ga proverbs (Hintze 1959:49). Reprinted 1969 by Greenwood Press at Westport CT; and Negro
Universities Press in New York (ISBN-10 0-8371-1378-4).
Bussy, T. Roland de. 1838. L’idiome d’Alger, ou dictionnaire français-arabe et arabe-français,
précédes principes grammaticaux de cette langue. Alger. Pp 370.
Bussy, T. Roland de. 1843. L’idiome d’Alger, ou dictionnaire français-arabe et arabe-français.
Nouvelle édition. Alger.
Butaye, Réne [R.P.]. 1901. Dictionnaire kikongo-français, français-kikongo. Roulers: Jules de
Meester. Pp 800.
In Schadeberg’s Bantu Bibliography, the title appears as “Dictionnaire français-kikongo (ntandu) et kikongofrançais”, unless that’s a different publication altogether. Reprinted 1909/10 by Jules de Meester in Roulers,
Belgium; and 1913 in Paris (a revision?).
Butaye, Réne [R.P.]. 1901. Grammaire kikongo.
This “more or less represents Kibwende and the speech of Leopoldville”, according Doke (1945:19), while
Lumwamu (1980:84) says it deals with the Santu dialect. Details wanting.
Butaye, Réne [R.P.]. 1910. Grammaire congolaise. Deuxième édition. Roulers: Jules de Meester.
Pp 90.
Deals with the Santu dialect (Lumwamu 1980:84). Original edition of 1901 was titled Grammaire kikongo.
Bute, John. 1891. On the ancient language of the natives of Tenerife: a paper contributed to the
anthropological section of the British Association for the Advancement of Science. London:
J. Masters. Pp 54.
Büttner, Carl Gotthilf. 1877/80. Contribution to a comparative dictionary of the Bantu languages.
Transactions of the South African Philosophical Society, v. 1, 3, p. 165-191.
Peripherals: Thilo C. Schadeberg, “Büttner’s contribution to a comparative dictionary of the Bantu languages”,
Africana marburgensia, v. 3 (1970) p. 31-35.
Büttner, Carl Gotthilf. 1881. Kurze Anleitung für Forschungsreisende zum Studium der BantuSprachen. Zeitschrift der Gesellschaft für Erdkunde zu Berlin, v. 16, p. 1-26.
Usure of the contents of this, though Ndonga probably appears there somehow.
Büttner, Carl Gotthilf. 1885. Die Temporalformen in den Bantusprachen. Zeitschrift für
Völkerpsykologie und Sprachwissenschaft, v. 16, p. 76-117.
Includes data from Herero as well as other languages.
130
Büttner, Carl Gotthilf. 1887. Hülfbüchlein für den ersten Unterricht in der Swaheli-Sprache, auch
für den Selbstunterricht, nach den ‘Suahili exercises’ der englischen Universitätsmission.
Leipzig: T.O. Weigel. Pp vi, 96.
Büttner, Carl Gotthilf. 1887/88. Deutsch-Kikamba Wörterbuch; nach den Vorarbeiten von Dr L.
Krapf. Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 1, p. 81-123.
Büttner, Carl Gotthilf. 1887/88. Sprachführer für Reisende in Damaraland. Zeitschrift für
Peripherals: Anon, Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 1 (1887/88) p. 252-294.
Büttner, Carl Gotthilf. 1887/88. Chuo cha utenzi: Gedichte im alten Suahili, aus den Papieren des
Dr L. Krapf [pt. 1-2]. Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 1, p. 1-42, 124-137.
Büttner, Carl Gotthilf. 1887/88. Weitere Märchen der Ova-Herero. Zeitschrift für afrikanische
Sprachen, v. 1, p. 295-307.
Büttner, Carl Gotthilf. 1887/88. Märchen der Ova-Herero. Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v.
1, 3, p. 189-216.
“Contains two original tales in the vernacular, their translations and annotations” (Stanley 1968:9). Reprinted
1888 as a small booklet by Ascher in Berlin.
Peripherals: Anon, Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 1 (1887/88) p. 189-216, 295-307.
Büttner, Carl Gotthilf. 1888/89. Zur Grammatik der Balubasprache. Zeitschrift für afrikanische
Sprachen, v. 2, p. 220-233.
Büttner, Carl Gotthilf. 1888/89. Chuo cha utenzi: Gedichte im alten Suahili, aus den Papieren des
Dr L. Krapf [pt. 3]. Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 2, p. 241-264.
Büttner, Carl Gotthilf. 1890. Wörterbuch der Suaheli-Sprache: Suaheli-Deutsch und DeutschSuaheli. Lehrbücher des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, #3. Stuttgart & Berlin: Verlag
von W. Spemann. Pp ix, 269.
Büttner, Carl Gotthilf. 1891. Hülfbüchlein für den ersten Unterricht in der Swaheli-Sprache, auch
für den Selbstunterricht, nach den ‘Swahili exercises’ von Steere. Zweite Ausgabe, vielfach
verbessert und vermehrt. Leipzig: T.O. Weigel. Pp viii, 103.
Büttner, Carl Gotthilf. 1892. Suaheli-Schriftstücke in arabischer Schrift. Mit lateinischer Schrift
umschrieben, übersetzt und erklärt. Lehrbücher des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen,
#10. Stuttgart & Berlin: Verlag von W. Spemann. Pp xi, 206, 73.
Büttner, Carl Gotthilf. 1893. Bilder aus dem Geistesleben der Suaheli. Verhandlungen der Berliner
Gesellschaft für Anthropologie, Ethnologie und Urgeschichte, v. 20, 2/3, p. 147-160.
Büttner, Carl Gotthilf. 1894. Anthologie aus der Suaheli-Literatur: Gedichte und Geschichten der
Suaheli, 2 Bde. Berlin: Emil Felber.
Peripherals: Carl Meinhof, Globus, v. 65 (1894) p. 71.
Büttner, Carl Gotthilf. 1894. Lieder und Gedichten der Suaheli. Berlin: Emil Felber. Pp xvi, 202.
Büttner, Carl Gotthilf; Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1911/12. Chuo cha Herkal: das Buch
von Herkal, transkribiert und übersetzt von Dr C.G. Büttner, weiland Lehrer des Suaheli am
Seminar für orientalische Sprachen zu Berlin. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 2, p. 1-36,
108-136, 194-232, 261-296.
Buxton, T.F. Victor. 1913. The creole in West Africa. Journal of the African Society, v. 12, 48, p.
385-394.
Byham, A. 1906. Die Masai und ihre Sagen. Geographischer Anzeiger: Blätter für den
geographischen Unterricht (Gotha), v. 7, p. 5-7, 31-33.
Cagnat, René Louis Victor. 1883. Explorations épigraphiques et archéologiques en Tunisie [pt. 1].
Archives des missions scientifiques et littéraires, 3ème série, v. 9, p. (?).
Cailliaud, Frédéric. 1826/27. Voyage à Méroé, au fleuve blanc, au-delà de Fâzoql dans le midi du
royaume de Sennâr, à Syouah et dans cinq autres oasis; fait dans les années 1819, 1820,
1821, et 1822, 4 vols. Paris: Rignoux. Pp 1749.
131
Includes a section titled “Vocabulaires des Nègres de Qamâmyl, dans le pays de Bertat” (p. 421-425), which appears
in either volume 1 (Unseth 1990:42), volume 2 (idem:83), or maybe even both. There also seems to be vocabularies
of Siwi Berber (cfr Jucovy & Alderete 2001) as well as Dongolah (Latham 1847:197). Reprinted 1972 by Gregg
Press at Farnborough (ISBN-10 0-576-17304-5).
Caillie, Rene. 1830. Journal d’un voyage à Temboctou et à Jenné, dans l’Afrique centrale, précédé
d’observations faites chez les maures braknas, les nalous et d’autres peuples; pendant les
années 1824, 1825, 1826, 1827, 1828, 3 vols. Paris: Imprimerie Royale.
Has brief wordlists for Mandingo (Bambara), ‘Kissour’ (Songhai?), and something on Berber.
URL: books.google.se/books?id=9wcPAAAAYAAJ
Peripherals: A.M. Jomard, “René Caillié et le docteur Barth à Timbouctou”, Bulletin de la Société de Géographie de
Paris, 4ème série, v. 7 (1854) p. 345-361; Maria Grosz-Ngaté, “Power and knowledge: the representation of the
Mande world in the works of Park, Caillié, Monteil, and Delafosse”, Cahiers d’études africaines, v. 111/112 (1988)
p. 485-511.
Caldwell, R. 1897. Chi-nyanja simplified. London: Zambesi Industrial Mission. Pp 88.
Caldwell, R. 1915. Chi-nyanja simplified. Second edition, with key. London: Zambesi Industrial
Mission. Pp 88, 44.
Calice, Fr. 1901. Zur ägyptisch-semitischen Wurzelverwandtschaft. Zeitschrift für ägyptische
Sprache, v. 39, p. 146-147.
Callaway, Henry [Rev.]. 1868. Nursery tales, traditions and histories of the Zulus, in their own
words with a translation into English and notes, v. 1. Sprindale (Natal) & London: J.A.
Blair; Trübner & Co. Pp 375.
Originally issued 1866-1868 in 6 parts entitled “Izinganekwane, nensumansumane, nezindaba zabantu”. The second
volume was planend but apparently never published. Reprinted 1970 by Negro Universities Press in New York.
Callaway, Henry [Rev.]. 1870. Some remarks on the Zulu language. Natal witness, v. (?), p. (?).
This was “republished in pamphlet form in the same year” (Doke 1945:77).
Callet, F. 1902/04. Nouveau dictionnaire malgache-français. Tananarive.
This probably stops long before Z - unfinished?
Calloc’h, J. [R.P.]. 1905. Manuel de conversation de la langue itékée (Brazzaville). Paris. Pp 90.
Deals with “kiSantu”, a Kikongo dialect, according to Doke (1945:30).
Calloc’h, J. [R.P.]. 1911. Vocabulaire français-gbwaga-gbanziri-monjombo (Congo français),
précédé d’éléments de grammaire. Paris: Librairie Orientaliste Paul Geuthner. Pp 204.
Peripherals: Carl Meinhof, Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 3 (1912/13) p. 160.
Calloc’h, J. [R.P.]. 1911. Vocabulaire français-sango et sango-français, langue commerciale de
l’Oubangui-Chari, précédé d’un abrégé grammatical. Paris: Librairie Orientaliste Paul
Geuthner. Pp vii, 86.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 12 (1912/13) p. 107; Carl Meinhof, Zeitschrift für
Kolonialsprachen, v. 3 (1912/13) p. 160.
Calloc’h, J. [R.P.]. 1911. Vocabulaire français-ifumu (batéké), précédé d’éléments de grammaire.
Paris: Librairie Orientaliste Paul Geuthner. Pp iv, 346.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 12 (1912/13) p. 107-108; Carl Meinhof, Zeitschrift für
Kolonialsprachen, v. 3 (1912/13) p. 251.
Calloc’h, J. [R.P.]. 1911. Vocabulaire français-gbéa (Congo français), précédé d’éléments de
grammaire. Paris: Librairie Orientaliste Paul Geuthner. Pp 170.
“Les principales populations de langue gbéa sont: les Buzéré, Burusé, Bokondi, Butuli, Bokuli, Bokwana, Bomba,
Boganu, Busé, Bimo, Busa, Koga, Ndobo, Bali” (quoted from Geuthner’s contemporary leaflet).
Calonne-Beaufaict, Adolphe de. 1909. Les ababua. Mouvement sociologique international
(Louvain), v. 10, p. (?).
Contains grammatical notes for Libwâle on p. 410-451 (Doke 1945:30).
Cambier, Emeri. 1891. Essai sur la langue congolaise (iboko). Bruxelles: Imprimerie Polleunis &
Ceuterick. Pp vii, 124.
Peripherals: Michael Meeuwis & Honoré Vinck, “Contribution à l’histoire du lingala: l’essai sur la langue
congolaise d’Emeri Cambier (1891)”, Annales Aequatoria, v. 24 (1993) p. 283-431.
132
Campbell, John. 1872? The Coptic element in languages of the Indo-European family. Canadian
journal of science, literature and history, 1872, p. (?).
Not sure about the details. “Read before the Canadian Institute, Feb. 10, 1872” (acc. to COPAC).
Campbell, John [Rev.]. 1815. Travels in South Africa, undertaken at the request of the Missionary
Society. London. Pp xv, 582.
First edition? Includes some 80 Tswana words (p. 304+306), 74 Xhosa words (p. 561), and something on Cape
Khoekhoe as well as the Korana.
Society. Second edition, corrected. London: Black, Parry & Co.; T. Hamilton. Pp xv, 400,
plates.
Society. Third edition, corrected. London: Black, Parry & Co. Pp xv, 400, plates.
Reprinted 1974 (though labelled as a fourth edition) in Cape Town (Africana collectanea, #47; ISBN-10 0-86977044-6).
Peripherals: Anon, Quarterly review, 1815, p. 309-340.
Campbell, John [Rev.]. 1816. Reisen in Süd-Afrika, unternommen auf Verlangen der MissionGesellschaft. Nach der zweiten verbesserten englischen Auflage übersetzt. Nürnberg: Campe.
Campbell, John [Rev.]. 1822. Travels in South Africa, undertaken at the request of the London
Missionary Society, being a narrative of a second journey in the interior of that country, 2
vols. London: Westley for the London Missionary Society (LMS).
Reprinted 1967 by the Johnson Reprint Co. in New York (Landmarks in anthropology).
Campbell, John [Rev.]. 1823. Reisen in Süd-Afrika: die zweite Reise in das Innere des Landes.
Aus dem englischen übersetzt. Weimar. Pp iv, 300.
Campbell, John [Rev.]. 1837. Journal of travels in South Africa, among the Hottentot and other
tribes, in the years 1812, 1813 and 1814. Abridged edition. London: The Religious Tract
Society. Pp vi, 228.
Campbell, John [Rev.]. 1840. Journal of travels in South Africa, among the Hottentot and other
tribes, in the years 1812, 1813 and 1814. Second edition, abridged. London: The Religious
Tract Society.
Could be a reprint.
Camphor, Alexander Priestley. 1909. Missionary story sketches: folk-lore from Africa. Cincinnati
OH: Jennings & Graham.
Details wanting.
URL: www.archive.org/details/missionarystorys00campuoft
Campion, A. 1884. Gramática de los cuatro dialectos literarios de la lengua euskara. Tolosa
(España).
Makes references to Saharan languages, apparently.
Candeo, Giuseppe. 1893. Vocabolario dancalo, compilato dal [...] in Assab e Dintorni. Bollettino
della Società Africana d’Italia, v. 12, p. 135-139, 157-163, 191-199.
Cannecatim, Bernardo Maria de. 1804. Diccionário da lingua bunda, ou angolense, explicada
portugueza e latina. Lisboa: Impressão Regia. Pp ix, 720.
“The body of the work is arranged in three columns, Portuguese-Latin-‘Mbundu’, and comprises over 10,000
‘Mbundu’ words” (Doke 1959:65). Johnston (1919:3) refers to this simply as the Angola dictionary.
Cannecatim, Bernardo Maria de. 1805. Collecção de observações grammaticaes sobre a lingua
bunda, ou angolense. Lisboa: Impressão Regia. Pp xxii, 218.
Grammar of Ndongo, a dialect of Kimbundu H21a. Includes a list of some 1,000 Kikongo words, which may
originate from a now lost dictionary by Brusciotto a Vetralla (cfr Doke 1959:65).
Cannecatim, Bernardo Maria de. 1859. A língua bunda ou angolese e dicionário abreviado da
língua congueza. Lisboa.
133
Revised edition of the author’s Collecção de observações grammaticaes sobre a lingua bunda ou angolense,
published 1805. Reprinted 1959 by Imprensa Nacional in Lisbon.
Cannell, W.M. [Rev.]. 1885. Exercises in Fanti and English. London: John Smith. Pp 32.
Cannell, W.M. [Rev.]; Anaman, Jacob Benjamin. 1886. A concise Fanti-English dictionary.
London & Cape Coast: T. Woolmer; Gold Coast District Book Dept. Pp 176.
Alphabetized according to root-initial consonants.
Peripherals: A.N. Tucker, “Orthographic systems and conventions in sub-Saharan Africa”, Current trends in
linguistics VII: linguistics in sub-Saharan Africa (ed. by T.A. Sebeok, 1971) p. 618-653.
Capello, Hermengildo Augusto de Brito; Ivens, Roberto. 1881. De Benguella ás terras de Iácca:
descripção de uma viagem na Africa central e occidental; comprehendendo narrações,
aventuras, e estudos importantes sobre as cabeceiras dos rios Cu-nene, Cu-bango, Luando, Cu-anza e Cu-ango, e de grande parte do curso dos dois ultimos; alem da
descoberta dos rios Hamba, Cauali, Sussa e Cu-gho, e larga noticia sobre as terras de
Quiteca, N’bungo, Sosso, Futa, e Iácca, 2 tomos. Lisboa: Imprensa Nacional. Pp xlv, 379;
ix, 413.
Includes vocabularies for Ngangela K12b (Homburger 1925:167), ‘Kaluiana’ K31, Cokwe K11, ‘Humba’ R21,
Nkumbi R14, Umbundu R11 (cfr Johnston 1919:799f). There is also an appended anonymous Kimbundu H21
vocabulary, which apparently “is full of misprints and inaccuracies, due to it being in reality the unacknowledged
and uncorrected work of a Brazilian traveller named Dutra” (Johnston 1919:801; cfr also Doke 1945:23).
Capello, Hermengildo Augusto de Brito; Ivens, Roberto. 1882. From Benguella to the territory of
Yacca: description of a journey into Central and West Africa; comprising narratives,
adventures, and important surveys of the sources of the rivers, Cunene, Cubango, Luando,
Cuanza, and Cuango, and of great part of the course of the two latter; together with the
discovery of the rivers Hamba, Cauali, Sussa, and Cugho, and a detailed account of the
territories of Quiteca, N’bungo, Sosso, Futa, and Yacca, 2 vols. Translated by Alfred Elwes.
London: Sampson Low, Marston, Searle & Rivington.
Capello, Hermengildo Augusto de Brito; Ivens, Roberto. 1882. Travels to the territories of Yacca.
Translated from Portuguese.
Details wanting. Translation (abridged?) of De Benguella ás terras de Iácca. This could, in fact, be identical to From
Benguella to the territory of Yacca. Source?
Capello, Hermengildo Augusto de Brito; Ivens, Roberto. 1886. De Angola á contra-costa:
descripção de uma viagem atravez do continente africano comprehendendo narrativas
diversas, aventuras e importantes descobertas entre as quais figuram a das origens do
Lualaba, caminhos entre as duas costas, visita ás terras da Garanganja, Katanga e ao
curso do Luapula, bem como a descida do Zambeze, do Choa ao Oceano, 2 tomos. Lisboa:
Imprensa Nacional de Angola.
Includes short vocabularies of Kwanyama R21, Umbundu R11, Garanganja L35, Katanga L33, and possibly others.
Capomazza, Ilario. 1907. La lingua degli Afar: vocabolario italiano-dankalo e dankalo-italiano.
Macerata (Italia): Unione Tipografica. Pp 197.
Capomazza, Ilario. 1910. L’assaorta-saho: vocabolario italiano-assaorta-saho ed assaorta-sahoitaliano [pt. 1-2]. Bollettino della Società Africana d’Italia, v. 29, p. 161-181, 213-214.
Unfinished vocabulary totalling four parts (Voigt 1975:54).
Capomazza, Ilario. 1911. L’assaorta-saho: vocabolario italiano-assaorta-saho ed assaorta-sahoitaliano [pt. 3-4]. Bollettino della Società Africana d’Italia, v. 30, p. 131-139, 173-181.
Capus, Auguste [Père]. 1xxx. Manuscript grammar of the Wakonongo language. Dar es Salaam
Museum.
Source?
Capus, Auguste [Père]. 1897. Contes, chants et proverbes des basumbwa dans l’Afrique orientale.
Capus, Auguste [Père]. 1898. Grammaire de shisumbwa. Zeitschrift für afrikanische und
Capus, Auguste [Père]. 1901. Dictionnaire shisumbwa-français, Saint-Cloud. Saint-Cloud (?) &
Paris: Imprimerie Belin Frères. Pp 147.
Carbou, Henri. 1912. La région du Tchad et du Oudaï: études ethnographiques, dialecte toubou, 2
vols. Publications de la Fac. des Lettres d’Alger; Bulletin de correspondence de africaine,
#47-48. Paris: Ernest Leroux.
134
Carbou, Henri. 1913. Méthode pratique pour l’étude de l’arabe parlé en Ouaday et à l’est du
Tchad. Paris: Inst. d’Ethnologie, Musée de l’Homme.
Carcoforo, E. 1912. Elementi di Somali el Ki-Suaheli parlati al Benadir. Milano. Pp 154.
Reprinted 1935 by Ulrico Hoepli in Milano.
Carr, D.L.; Brown, Joseph Peter. 1868. Mfantsi grammar. Cape Coast.
Carrey, Emile. 1858. Recits de Kabylie. Paris.
Carrie, [Father]. 1890. Grammaire de la langue fiote, dialecte du kakongo. Loango & Paris. Pp
198.
Not sure about the date. Possibly it appeared 1888 in Loango and 1890 in Paris. Or perhaps there are several
editions?
Carvalho, Henrique Augusto Dias de. 1888. Vocabulário dos dialectos africanos de vario povos.
Lisboa.
Referred to by Dunham (2001:254).
Carvalho, Henrique Augusto Dias de. 1889. Methodo pratico para falar a lingua da Lunda.
Lisboa: Imprensa Nacional. Pp 64.
Referred to by Doke (1945:106f).
Carvalho, Henrique Augusto Dias de. 1890. Expedição portugueza ao Muatiânvua, 1884-1888:
ethnographia e historia tradicional dos povos da Lunda. Illustrada por H. Casanova.
Lisboa: Imprensa Nacional. Pp xv, 731.
Carvalho, Henrique Augusto Dias de. 1890. Expedição portugueza ao Muatiânvua, 1884-1888:
methodo pratico para fallar a lingua da Lunda, contenado narracões historicas dos
diversos povos. Lisboa: Imprensa Nacional. Pp xv, vii, 391.
Not sure how this differs from Carvalho’s Methodo pratico para fallar a lingua da Lunda (publ. 1889); the
paginations differ considerably, at least.
Casalis, J. Eugène [R.P.]. 18xx. Sesuto and English exercises. Pp c.50.
Details wanting. Source?
Casalis, J. Eugène [R.P.]. 1841. Etudes sur le langue séchuana, précédés d’une introduction sur
le progrès de la mission chez les bassoutos. Paris: Imprimerie Royale. Pp 221.
This deals with Setswana and/or Sesotho. “As a matter of fact, it is not easy to tell, on account of the spelling and
the mixture of forms. Evidently it represents the dialect of the people round Thaba Nthsho, who were then, as they
are now, BaTshwana (BaRolong), but whose language is much interspersed with Southern Sotho elements”
(Lestrade, in Doke 1933:77).
Peripherals: C.M. Doke, “A preliminary investigation into the state of the native languages in South Africa”, Bantu
studies, v. 7 (1933) p. 1-99; C.M. Doke, “Bantu language pioneers of the nineteenth century”, African studies, v.
14 (1940) p. 207-246; C.M. Doke, “Bantu language pioneers of the nineteenth century” (revised), African studies,
v. 18 (1959) p. 1-27.
Casalis, J. Eugène [R.P.]. 1907. Sesuto and English exercises. Seventh edition.
Details wanting.
Casati, Gaetano [Maj.]. 1891. Tavola comparativa delle lingue dégli Dinca, Moru, Mambettu,
Bamba, Sandeli, Bari e Lur. In: Dieci anni in equatoria e ritorno con Emin Pascha, v. 1, p.
316-323. Bamberg (Deutschland): C.C. Buchnersche.
Casati, Gaetano [Maj.]. 1898. Comparative table of the languages of the Dinka, Moru, Mambettu,
Bamba, Sandeh, Bari and Lur. In: Ten years in Equatoria, and the return with Emin Pasha,
v. 1, p. 353-359. Translated from Italian by Mrs J. Randolph Clay. London: Frederick
Warne & Co.
Caspari, Carl Paul. 1844/48. Grammatica arabica in usum scholarum academicarum, 2 Teile.
Lipsiae: C.L. Frittzschii. Pp vii, 140, xxiv; [141]-315, 3, xxiv.
In Latin. Later translated to German, English and French.
Caspari, Carl Paul. 1859. Grammatik der arabischen Sprache. Zweite Auflage. Leipzig: C.L.
Fritzsche. Pp xxv, 418.
The first edition of 1844/48 was written in Latin and bore the title Grammatica arabica in usum scholarum
academicarum.
Caspari, Carl Paul. 1866. Grammatik der arabischen Sprache. Dritte Auflage. Leipzig: C.F.
Schmidt. Pp viii, 431.
135
Caspari, Carl Paul. 1876. Arabiche Grammatik. Vierte Auflage, bearbeitet von August Müller.
Halle: Verlag der Buchhandlung des Waisenhauses. Pp 12, 441.
Caspari, Carl Paul. 1876. Grammaire arabe. Traduit de l’allemande par E. Uricoeche. Paris:
Adrien Maisonneuve. Pp xii, 532.
Translated from the fourth German edition of 1876.
Caspari, Carl Paul. 1887. Arabische Grammatik. Fünfte Auflage, bearbeitet von August Müller.
Halle: Verlag der Buchhandlung des Waisenhauses. Pp 471.
Castagna, [?]. 1891. Di alcuni vocaboli e modi del vernacolo angolano.
Referred to by Homburger (1925:167). No language specified. Is it published at all?
Castelnau, Francis de. 1851. Renseignements sur l’Afrique centrale et sur une nation d’hommes à
Queue qui s’y trouverait, d’après le rapport des nègres du Soudan, esclaves à Bahia. Paris:
P. Bertrand.
Includes a Hausa word list on pges 48-60 (Newman 1996:17).
Cecchi, Antonio. 1887. Vocaboli e modi di dire della lingua afar. In: Da Zeila alle frontiere del
Caffa, p. 485-490. Roma: Ermanno Loescher.
Unsure about the details of this reference. It may have appeared as a journal article, and the title could be wrong, too.
Cecchi, Antonio; Viterbo, Ettore; Grattarola, Giuseppe. 1886. Da Zeila alle frontiere des Caffa:
viaggi di Antonio Cecchi / Spedizione italiana nell’Africa equatoriale, 1876-1882, 3 vols.
Roma: Ermanno Loescher a cura e spese della Società Geografica Italiana.
Includes sections with Oromo grammar and vocabularies, written by Ettore Viterbo.
Cerulli, Enrico. 1916/18. Di alcune presunte consonanti dei dialetti Somali. Rivista degli studi
orientali, v. 7, p. 877-883.
Cerulli, Enrico. 1916/18. Testi Somali. Rivista degli studi orientali, v. 7, p. 797-836.
Includes two parts: “Canti e proverbi nel dialetto degli Haber Auwa” and “Testi i diritto consuetudinario dei Somali
Marehan”.
Cerulli, Enrico. 1919/20. Nota sui dialetti Somali. Rivista degli studi orientali, v. 8, p. 693-699.
Cerulli, Enrico. 1919/20. Somali songs and little texts [pt. 1-2]. Journal of the African Society, v.
19, p. 135-140, 221-226.
Chabot, Jean-Baptiste. 1917. Notes sur l’alphabet libyque. Comptes rendus des séances de
l’Academie des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres, 1917, p. 558-564.
Chabot, Jean-Baptiste. 1918. Inscriptions punico-libyques. Journal asiatique, 11ème série, v. 11
[192], p. 259-302.
Not sure about the vol no.
Chaillu, Paul Belloni du. 1867. A journey to Ashango-land, and further penetration into
Equatorial Africa. London: John Murray. Pp xxiv, 501.
Appendix 3 includes a table of Sira B42 words.
Peripherals: Anon, The Atlantic monthly, v. 20 (1867) p. 122-123.
Chaillu, Paul Belloni du. 1867. Stories of the gorilla country, narrated for young people. New
York: Harper & Bros. Pp 292.
Peripherals: A.H. Guernsey, “Du Chaillu, gorillas, and cannibals”, Harper’s new monthly magazine, v. 36 (1868),
582-594.
Chaillu, Paul Belloni du. 1869. Wild life under the equator, narrated for young people. New York:
Harper & Bros.
Peripherals: A.H. Guernsey, “Paul du Chaillu again”, Harper’s new monthly magazine, v. 38 (1869) p. 164-175.
Chaillu, Paul Belloni du. 1870. Lost in the jungle, narrated for young people. London: Harper &
Bros.
URL: www.archive.org/details/lostinjungle00duchiala
Peripherals: A.H. Guernsey, “Paul du Chaillu once more”, Harper’s new monthly magazine, v. 40 (1870) p. 201213.
Chaine, Marius. 1907. Grammaire éthiopienne. Beyrouth: Imprimerie Catholique.
URL: www.archive.org/details/grammairethiop00chauoft
Chaine, Marius. 1913. Catalogue des manuscrits éthiopiens de la collection Mondon-Vidailhet.
Paris: Bibliothèque Nationale. Pp vii, 69.
136
Champollion, Jean-François. 1824. Précis du système hiéroglyphique des anciens Egyptiens:
recherches sur les élémens premiers de cette écriture sacrée, sur leurs diverses
combinaisons, et sur les rapports de ce système avec les autres méthodes graphiques
égyptiennes, 2 vols. Paris: Treuttel & Würtz.
Peripherals: Anon, “The Rosetta stone and its inscription”, New Englander and Yale review, v. 17 (1859) p. 549550; Anon, “The Rosetta stone”, Manufacturer and builder (New York), v. 25 (1893) p. 86; E.A.W. Budge, The
Rosetta stone (2nd ed., London, 1951); F.Ll. Griffith, “The decipherment of the hieroglyphs”, Journal of Egyptian
archaeology, v. 37 (1951) p. 38-46; Carol Andrews, The Rosetta stone (British Museum, 1981); Ian Shaw & Paul
Nicholson, “The Rosetta stone”, Dictionary of Ancient Egypt (British Museum, 1992) p. 247.
Champollion, Jean-François. 1836. Grammaire égyptienne. Paris: Firmin-Didot.
URL: www.lib.uchicago.edu/eos/html/page.form.html
Champollion, Jean-François. 1841/43. Dictionnaire égyptienne en écriture hiéroglyphique. Publié
d’après les manuscrits autographes, et sous les auspices de M. Villemain, Ministre de
l’Instruction Publique, par M. Champollion Figeac. Paris: Firmin-Didot. Pp xxxvi, 487.
Changuion, A.N.E. 1846. De nederduitsche taal in Zuid-Afrika hersteld, zijnde eene handleiding
tot de kennis dier taal, naar de plaatselijke behoefte van het land gewijzigd. Kaapstad:
Collard. Pp xxvi, 246.
Chapman, G. 1844. Brofu na Fanti: English and Fanti. Cape Town: Grey Collection, South African
Public Library. Pp 37.
Chapman, G. 1844. A vocabulary of the Fanti language, 1: Fanti and English. Cape Town: Grey
Collection, South African Public Library. Pp 93.
This is very fragmentary (Hintze 1959:36; see also Bleek 1858, #476).
Chapman, G. 1845. A vocabulary of the Fanti language, 2: English and Fanti. Cape Town: Grey
This is very fragmentary (Hintze 1959:37; see also Bleek 1858, #477).
Chapman, James. 1868. Travels in the interior of South Africa, comprising fifteen years’ hunting
and trading; with journeys across the continent from Natal to Walvisch Bay, and visits to
Lake Ngami and Victoria Falls, 2 vols. London: Bell & Daldy; Edward Stanford.
The appendix to the second volume includes short vocabularies. Herero is erroneously referred to as “Damara”. A
much-expanded edition with missing parts appeared 1971 as Traveller in the interior of South Africa, 1849-1863,
published by A.A. Balkema in Amsterdam.
Peripherals: Y. Baws, Index to ‘Travels in the interior of South Africa’ (1868) by James Chapman, (Public Library
of Johannesburg, 1964).
Chapman, James. 1868/1971. Traveller in the interior of South Africa, 1849-1863: hunting and
trading journeys, from Natal to Walvis Bay & visits to Lake Ngami & Victoria Falls, 2 vols.
Edited and expanded by E.C. Tabler. South African biographical and historical series, #10.
Cape Town: A.A. Balkema. Pp xiv, 258; xiv, 244.
“Chapman’s diaries were severely cut by more than one hand before they were first published in 1868. In this new,
annotated version, E.C. Tabler ... has followed Chapman’s original manuscripts now scattered in a number of
places” (Marks 1975:310f). The original edition, titled Travels in the interior of South Africa, was published 1868
by Bell & Daldy and Edward Stanford.
Charency, Hyacinthe de. 1862. Eléments de la grammaire hottentote (dialecte Nama). Revue
orientale et américaine, v. 8, p. 244-263.
Reprinted 1864 as a 20-page booklet by Soye & Bouchet in Paris (Extrait 47 de la revue orientale et américaine).
URL: books.google.se/books?id=VmYFAAAAMAAJ
Charency, Hyacinthe de. 1877. Grammatical notes of the Dankali language. Bulletin de la Société
Philologique, v. 216, p. (?).
Charlton, Lionel [Capt.]. 1908. A Hausa reading book: containing a collection of texts reproduced
in facsimile from native manuscripts, arranged for the use of beginners and advanced
students, with transliterations into Roman characters. London: Oxford University Press
(Henry Frowde). Pp 83, 45.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 8 (1908/09) p. 110; J. Lippert, Mitteilungen des Seminars für
orientalische Sprachen, v. 11 (1908) p. 323-326.
Charnock, R.S. 1892. Notes on the Kabyle language. Imperial and Asiatic quaterly review, second
series, v. 3, 6, p. (?).
137
Chatelain, Ch.W. 1909. Pocket dictionary Thonga (Shangaan)-English, English-Thonga
(Shangaan). Introduced with an elementary grammar by H.A. Junod. Lausanne: Imprimerie
Georges Bridel. Pp 98, 151.
Two version appeared in 1909, a full one and an abridged one. In the latter, Junod’s introductory chapter on
“Elementary Grammar” was cut down to a bunch of tables.
Chatelain, Héli. 1888/89. Die Grundzüge des Kimbundu oder der Angola-Sprache [pt. 1].
German translation of the author’s Gramática elementar do Ki-mbundu, ou lingua de Angola, publ. 1889.
Chatelain, Héli. 1888/89. Sammlung von Mbamba- und Umbangala-Wörtern und Bemerkungen
dazu. Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 2, p. 109-146.
The title(s) on the actual article(s) could be different than the above.
Chatelain, Héli. 1889. Gramática elementar do Ki-mbundu, ou lingua de Angola. Genebra:
Typografia de C. Schuchardt. Pp xxiv, 172.
Reprinted in the 1980s by Gregg International (ISBN-10 0-576-11453-7). A German translation titled “Grundzüge
des Kimbundu oder der Angola-Sprache” appeared in Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 2 (1888/89) & v. 3
(1889/90).
Peripherals: ..., Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 2 (1888/89) p. 236-237; George C. Hurlbut, Journal of the
American Geographical Society of New York, v. 21 (1889) p. 228-269.
Chatelain, Héli. 1889/90. Die Grundzüge des Kimbundu oder der Angola-Sprache [pt. 2].
Chatelain, Héli. 1893. Geographic names of Angola, West Africa. Journal of the American
Geographical Society of New York, v. 25, p. 304-312.
Chatelain, Héli. 1894. Bantu notes and vocabularies, 3: the Ma-Iaka and their language. Journal of
the American Geographical Society of New York, v. 26, p. 51-67.
Includes a general introduction (p. 51-56), brief lexical comparisons between U-Iaka and Ki-Teke (p. 56-57), notes
on informants and some miscellanea (p. 57-59), a section on “Ba-Cua dwarfs” (p. 59), grammatical notes on U-Iaka
(p. 60-61), a “Comparative table of the Ki-Teke cluster” (p. 62) with lexical specimens of U-Iaka, Buma, Ki-Teke,
Mbamba, U-Mbete, and Tsaia, followed by a comparative English-Portuguese-Kimbundu-UIaka vocabulary (p. 6367). Also, there is footnote on the first page stating that the author was “unable through ill-health to re-write No. II
(comparative vocabularies of Luba, Songe, etc.)”. Possibly the second part was never finished/published.
Chatelain, Héli. 1894. Folk-tales of Angola: fifty tales, with Ki-mbundu text, literal English
translation, introduction, and notes. Memoirs from the American Folk-Lore Society, #1.
Boston & New York: G.E. Stechert & Co. Pp xii, 315.
Not sure about the publisher. In Schadeberg’s Bantu Bibliography, it is given as Houghton Mifflin in London.
Reprinted by Kraus Reprint in Nendeln, Liechenstein.
Peripherals: George C. Hurlbut, Journal of the American Geographical Society of New York, v. 26 (1894) p. 249276; W.W. N[ewell], “Folk-tales of Angola”, Journal of American folklore, v. 7 (1894) p. 61-65; Anon, “Folktales of Angola” (notes and queries), Journal of American folklore, v. 7 (1894) p. 152; Anon, The Atlantic
monthly, v. 74 (1894) p. 562; W.W. N[ewell], “Folk-tales of Angola, II”, Journal of American folklore, v. 7
(1894) p. 311-316.
Chatelain, Héli; Summer, W.R. 1894. Bantu notes and vocabularies, 1: the language of the BashiLange and Ba-Luba. Journal of the American Geographical Society of New York, v. 25, p.
512-541.
The first part contains some general info on Bashi-Lange and Ba-Luba, and is a written by Chatelain (p. 512-528).
This is followed by grammatical sketch of “the language of Bashi-Lange” by Dr W.R. Summer (p. 529-536), and a
“vocabulary of Kishi-Lange” collected by Chatelain (p. 536-541).
Cherbonneau, Jacques Auguste. 1872. Dictionnaire français-arabe pour la conversation en
Algérie. Paris. Pp xxiii, 629.
Cherbonneau, M.A. 1855. Observations sur l’origine et la formation du langage arabe africain.
Journal asiatique, 5ème série, v. (?), p. 544ff.
Vol no is either 5 (= OS 66) or 6 (= OS 67).
Chevalier, Jean-Batiste Auguste. 1907. L’Afrique centrale française: récit du voyage de la mission
Chari-Lac Tchad 1902-1904. Paris: Augustin Challamel. Pp xv, 776.
Has something on Ubangi languages in it. Occasionally referred to simply as Mission Chari-Lac Tchad, 19021904, with or without the dates.
Peripherals: Anon, “Mr Chevalier’s scientific work in West Africa”, Journal of the African Society, v. 8 (1908) p.
62-74.
138
Chladni, Ernst Florens Friedrich. 1802. Die Akustik. Leipzig: Breitkopf & Härtel.
Possibly this might include something on clicks. Reprinted 1830 (“Neue unveränderte Ausgabe”) by Breitkopf &
Härtel in Leipzig.
Chladni, Ernst Florens Friedrich. 1809. Traité d’acoustique. Traduit de l’anglais. Paris: Courcier.
Pp xxviii, 375.
Not sure if this has any Africana.
Chladni, Ernst Florens Friedrich. 1825. Über die Hervorbringung der menschlichen Sprachlaute.
Annalen der Physik, v. 2, p. 187-216.
“Chladni appears to be the first author to give a precise and concise description of the major characteristics of click
sounds ... (1) their independence of the breath movement; (2) the suction or smack approach; (3) the phenomena of
rarefaction of air; and (4) the rarefaction of seal release” (Breckwoldt 1972:282). However, Chladni does not
transcribe any clicks, i.e. he employs no graphic symbolism; he only talks about them.
Chladni, Ernst Florens Friedrich. 1827. Kurze Uebersicht der Schall- und Klanglehre, nebst einem
Anhange die Entwicklung und Anordnung der Tonverhältnisse betreffend. Mainz: B.
Schott’s Söhnen. Pp 112.
Chladni, Ernst Florens Friedrich. 1830. Die Akustik bearbeitet. Bearbeitete Auflage. Leipzig:
Breitkopf & Härtel.
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]. 1875. A grammar of the Asante and Fante language called
Tshi (Chwee, Twi); based on the Akuapem dialect with reference to the other (Akan and
Fante) dialects. Basel: Evangelical Missionary Society. Pp xxiv, 203.
Reprinted 1964 by Gregg Press.
Peripherals: H. Steinthal, Zeitschrift für Völkerpsykologie und Sprachwissenschaft, v. 9 (1877) p.(?); A.N. Tucker,
“Systems of tone-marking African languages”, Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, v. 27 (1964)
p. 594-611.
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]. 1879. Twi mmebusem mpensã-ahansia mmoaano: a collection
of three thousand and six hundred Tshi proverbs in use among the negroes of the Gold
Coast speaking the Asante and Fante language, collected, together with their variations, and
alphabetically arranged. Basel: Verlag der Basler Missionsbuchhandlung. Pp xii, 152.
The publisher is possibly wrong. Includes no translations, but see Christaller (1990).
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]. 1881. A dictionary of the Asante and Fante language called
Tshi (Chwee, Twi), with a grammatical introduction and appendices on the geography of
the Gold Coast and other subjects. Basel: Evangelical Missionary Society. Pp xxviii, 671.
Peripherals: J.B. Danquah, “Notes on ‘Oburoni’ and ‘Buronya’”, Transactions of the Gold Coast and Togoland
Historical Society, v. 2 (1956) p. 71-72; A.N. Tucker, “Systems of tone-marking African languages”, Bulletin of
the School of Oriental and African Studies, v. 27 (1964) p. 594-611.
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]. 1887/88. Negersagen von der Goldküste, mitgeteilt und mit
Sagen anderer afrikanischer Völker vergleichen. Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 1, p.
49-63.
Twi texts with interlinear translations (Hintze 1959:38).
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]. 1887/88. Bemerkungen zu R. Lepsius’ Einleitung über die
Völker und Sprachen Afrikas, Nubische Grammatik, 1880. Zeitschrift für afrikanische
Sprachen, v. 1, p. 241-251.
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]. 1887/88. Die Volta-Sprachen-Gruppe: drei altbekannte und
zwei neubekannte Negersprachen vergleichend besprochen. Zeitschrift für afrikanische
Sprachen, v. 1, p. 161-188.
Deals with Twi, Guang, Gã, Avatime and Ewe (Hintze 1959:18).
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]. 1888/89. Die Sprachen in dem Negerfreistaat Liberia.
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]. 1889/90. Einheitliche Schreibweise für afrikanische Namen
und Sprachen. Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 3, p. 247-264.
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]. 1889/90. Näheres über die Kru-Sprache. Zeitschrift für
Apparently this does not deal with Kru languages, but numerals in Avikum, a Kwa language (Hintze 1959:28).
139
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]. 1889/90. Sprachproben aus dem Sudan von 40-60 Sprachen
und Mundarten hinter der Gold- und Sklavenküste. Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v.
3, p. 133-154.
Has material on Kwa languages, e.g. Brong, Gbanye, Nta, Nzima, Asante, Fante, Adangme, Gã, Ewhe, Togo, Popo,
Ogunu/Popo, Fo-gbe, Portonovo, and Dahome (see Hintze 1959), as well as Gur languages, e.g. Dagbani, Dagara,
Moore, Gambaga, Torotama, Balédye, Tjemba, Gulmanchema, Yom, Buli, Kasum, Sisaala, Tem, Kabiye, Lekpa, and
Baatonum (see Roncador & Miehe 1998:45).
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]. 1889/90. Sprachproben vom Sudan zwischen Asante und
Mittel-Niger. Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 3, p. 107-132.
Includes stuff on Akan, Guang, Kasem, Lyele, Sisaala, and other languages.
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]. 1892. Die Sprachen Afrikas. Jahresbericht des
Württembergischen Vereins für Handelsgeographie, #9/10. Stuttgart: W. Kohlhammer
Verlag. Pp 59.
This could be a journal article.
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]. 1893. Die Töne der Neger-Sprachen und ihre Bezeichnung.
Basel: Verlag der Basler Missionsbuchhandlung. Pp 19.
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]. 1894. Die Völker und Sprachen Afrikas. Mitteilungen der
geographischen Gesellschaft zu Jena, v. 13, p. 1-18.
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]. 1895. Die Sprachen des Togogebiets in kurzer allgemeiner
Übersicht. Zeitschrift für afrikanische und oceanische Sprachen, v. 1, 1, p. 5-8.
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]. 1895. Die Adelesprache im Togogebiet. Zeitschrift für
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]. 1895. Sprichwörter der Tshwi-Neger [pt. 1]. Zeitschrift für
afrikanische und oceanische Sprachen, v. 1, p. 184-187.
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]. 1896. Sprichwörter der Tshwi-Neger [pt. 2-3]. Zeitschrift für
afrikanische und oceanische Sprachen, v. 2, p. 51-53, 241-243.
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]. 1990. Three thousand six hundred Ghanian proverbs: from
the Asante and Fante language. Translated by Kofi Ron Lange. Studies in African literature,
#2. Lewiston NY & Lampeter UK: Edwin Mellen Press. Pp x, 302. ISBN-10 0-88946-2348.
Originally published 1870 without translations.
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]; Bohner, Heinrich. 1890. Übungen in der Akra- oder GãSprache, 2 Teile. Basel: Basler Missionsbuchhandlung. Pp 104.
The first part contains a “Sprachlehre” by Christaller. The second contains a collection of texts by Bohner.
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]; Locher, Christian Wilhelm; Zimmerman, Johannes [Rev.].
1874. A dictionary, English, Tshi (Asante), Akra - Tshi (Chwee) comprising as dialects:
Akán (Asànté, Akém, Akuapém etc.) and Fànté; Akra (Accra) connected with Adangme;
Gold Coast, W. Africa. Basel: Evangelical Missionary Society. Pp xxiv, 275.
Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]; Locher, Christian Wilhelm; Zimmerman, Johannes [Rev.].
1909. A dictionary, English-Tshi (Asante). Second edition, revised and enlarged by Ad.Th.
Mohr. Basel: Evangelical Missionary Society. Pp xvi, 247.
Sometimes credited to the editor, A.T. Mohr.
Peripherals: Diedrich Westermann, Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 15 (1912) p. 228-230;
Carl Meinhof, Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 7 (1916/17) p. 252-253.
Christaller, Theodor. 1892. Handbuch der Dualasprache. Basel: Missionsbuchhandlung. Pp vii,
214.
Christopher, Joseph S. 1850. Natal, Cape of Good Hope: a grazing, agricultural, and cottongrowing country; comprigin descriptions of this well-endowed colony, from the year 1575
to the present time, by government officials and travellers. With an appendix and a
vocabulary of the Natal or Zulu language. London: E. Wilson. Pp 146.
Cid Kaoui, S. 1894. Dictionnaire français-temâhaq, langue des touareg. Alger: Librairie Adolphe
Jourdan. Pp ix, 894, 10.
Cid Kaoui, S. 1900. Dictionnaire pratique tamahaq-français, langue des touareg. Alger: Librairie
Adolphe Jourdan. Pp viii, iv, 441, ii.
140
Cid Kaoui, S. 1907. Dictionnaire français-tachelh’it et français-tamazir’t. Paris: Ernest Leroux.
Pp 248.
Clapperton, Hugh [Capt.]. 1829. Journal of a second expedition into the interior of Africa, from
the Bight of Benin to Soccatee; to which is added the journal of Richard Lander from Kano
to the sea-coast. London: John Murray. Pp xiii, 355.
Includes brief word lists for Ibo, Yarriba (Yoruba), Nufee (Nupe). There exist several contemporary editions, e.g.
there is one printed by Carey, Lea & Carey in Philadelphia (xxiv+422 pp). The original Murray-edition was
reprinted 1966 by Frank Cass & Co. in London. Many recent reprints tend to be retitled, e.g. Difficult and
dangerous roads (Sickle Moon Books, 2000; ISBN-10 1-900209-06-3), and Hugh Clapperton into the interior of
Africa (Brill, 2005; ISBN-10 90-04-14155-3).
Clapperton, Hugh [Capt.]. 1829. Second voyage dans l’intérieur de l’Afrique, depuis le Golfe du
Benin jusq’à Sackatou, pendant les années 1825, 1826 et 1827, 2 vols. Traduit de l’anglais
par MM. Eyriès et de la Renaudière. Paris: Bertrand. Pp xlvi, 329; 439.
Clark, G.J. 1877. Vocabulary of the Chigogo language. London: Gilbert & Rivington for the
Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp 58.
Clarke, Hyde. 1879. On the Yarra dialect and the languages of Australia in connection with those of
the Mozambique and Portuguese Africa. Journal of the Royal Society of Victoria, v. (?), p.
(?).
Draws a connection between Australian and Bantu languages. Unsure of the exact publication date. Might be 1880.
The article itself is identical to Clarke (1880).
Peripherals: T. Hahn, “Critique on Hyde Clarke’s theory of the relation of the Australian to the South African
(Bantu) languages”, Transactions of the South African Philosophical Society, v. 2 (1880) p. 28-42.
Clarke, Hyde. 1880. On the languages of the Mozambique and of the South of Africa in their
relation to the languages of Australia. Cape monthly magazine, new series, v. 16, p. 22-27.
Draws a connection between Australian and Bantu languages. Unsure of the publishing date. It’s either 1879, 1880
or 1881. The article itself is identical to Clarke (1879).
Peripherals: T. Hahn, “Critique on Hyde Clarke’s theory of the relation of the Australian to the South African
(Bantu) languages”, Transactions of the South African Philosophical Society, v. 2 (1880) p. 28-42.
Clarke, J.A. 1911. Luba-Sanga grammar. Koni Hill (Belgian Congo). Pp 146, 17, 6, 51.
“This was produced in a number of roneo[e]d copies for the use of missionaries of the Garenganze Mission. It is a
painstaiking piece of work and of considerable reference value, consisting of three parts, Grammar (pp.1-46),
Idiomatic phrases and folk texts (pp.1-17,1-6), and English-Luba-Sanga Vocabulary (pp.1-51)” (Doke 1945:33).
Clarke, J.A. 1915. English Chi-luba-Sanga vocabulary. Madras. Pp 127.
Besides the vocabulary, there are also some idiomatic phrases and folk texts, all of which are preceded by “a few
pages of grammatical notes and tables” (Doke 1945:33).
Clarke, John [Rev.]. 1841. The Adeeyah vocabulary. Cape Town: Grey Collection, South African
Public Library.
Doke (1959:22) says this was written in 1841, but mentions nothing about it being published.
Clarke, John [Rev.]. 1846. Sentences in the Fernandian tongue, Bimbia (Cameroons). Cape Town:
Grey Collection, South African Public Library.
Mentioned by Doke (1959:22).
Clarke, John [Rev.]. 1848. Introduction to the Fernandian tongue. Second edition. Berwick-uponTweed UK: Daniel Cameron. Pp viii, 56.
Possibly Sentences in the Fernandian tongue, published two years earlier, is to be regarded as the first edition.
Clarke, John [Rev.]. 1848. Specimens of dialects: short vocabularies of languages and notes of
countries and customs in Africa. Berwick-upon-Tweed UK: Daniel Cameron. Pp v, 104.
The author claims that “however difficult to be accounted for”, both the Hottentots and the Malagassy people are of
a common Malay origin. Contains vocabularies for many (over 200?) languages, e.g. Avikum, Guang, Ewe,
Dagbani, Gulmancema, Moore, Sisaala, Buli, Kulango, Lekpa, Nuni, Yoruba, Igbo, Ibibio, several Nupoid
languages/dialects, as well as Mande, and Cushitic languages (cfr Doke 1945, Hintze 1959, Roncador & Miehe
1998:46). Bantu languages are represented by Duala A24, Isubu A23, Fernandian A31, ‘Angola’ H21a, Kongo H16,
141
and Mpongwe B11a. Reprinted 1972 by Gregg International at Westmead UK, edited by Edwin & Shirley Ardener
(76+104 pp; ISBN-10 0-576-11201-1).
Claus, Heinrich. 1910. Die Wangomwia. Zeitschrift für Ethnologie, v. 42, p. 489-494.
Meinhof’s contribution covers p. 494-497.
Peripherals: Carl Meinhof, “Bemerkungen zu vorstehenden Sprachproben”, Zeitschrift für Ethnologie, v. 42 (1910)
p. 494-497.
Clercq, Auguste de [Père]. 1897. Grammaire de la langue bena-lulua. Bruxelles: Imprimerie
Polleunis & Ceuterick. Pp vii, 110.
Contains a French-Bena Lulua wordlist.
Clercq, Auguste de [Père]. 1898. Esquisse de la langue bakete. Zeitschrift für afrikanische und
oceanische Sprachen, v. 4, p. 316-336.
Clercq, Auguste de [Père]. 1898. Les préfixes en langues bantoues. Zeitschrift für afrikanische und
oceanische Sprachen, v. 4, p. 179-198.
Clercq, Auguste de [Père]. 1900. Eléments de la langue kanioka. Paris. Pp 44.
Clercq, Auguste de [Père]. 1901. Vocabulaire français-kanioka. Paris. Pp 72.
Clercq, Auguste de [Père]. 1901. Vocabulaire kanioka-français. Paris. Pp 91.
Clercq, Auguste de [Père]. 1903. Grammaire de la langue luba. Louvain: J.B. Istas. Pp 4, vi, 504.
Contains a Luba-French vocabulary on p. 151-313 and a French-Luba on p. 315-504.
Peripherals: P. Wilhelm Schmidt, Anthropos, v. 2 (1907) p. 339-340.
Clercq, Auguste de [Père]. 1907. Grammaire du kiyombe. Anthropos: internationale Zeitschrift für
Völker- und Sprachenkunde, v. 2, p. 449-466, 761-794.
Reprinted (revised?) 1907 by Goemare in Paris (Kongo-Overzee bibliotheek, #5).
Clercq, Auguste de [Père]. 1909. Quelques légendes des bena kanioka. Anthropos: internationale
Zeitschrift für Völker- und Sprachenkunde, v. 4, p. 71-86, 442-456.
Clercq, Auguste de [Père]. 1911. Grammaire pratique de la langue luba. Bruxelles. Pp 2, vi, 151.
Clercq, Auguste de [Père]. 1911. Lubavolkeren in den spiegel van hun spreuken. Onze Kongo, v. 2,
p. 1-18.
Clercq, Auguste de [Père]. 1913/14. Vingt-deux contes luba. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 4,
p. 181-230.
Clercq, Auguste de [Père]. 1914. Dictionnaire luba: luba-français, français-luba. Bruxelles. Pp
vii, 583.
Clermont, J. 1909. L’arabe parlé tunisien. Tunis. Pp 286.
Cleve, G.L. 1897. Beiträge zur Logik der Sprache bei den Wasuaheli. Zeitschrift für afrikanische
und oceanische Sprachen, v. 3, p. 272-274.
Cleve, G.L. 1903. Die Lippenlaute der Bantu und die Negerlippen, mit besonderer
Berücksichtigung der Lippenverstümmelungen. Zeitschrift für Ethnologie, v. 35, p. (?).
Clozel, François-Joseph. 1896. Les bayas: notes ethnographiques et linguistiques. Paris: Librairie
Africaine & Coloniale (Joseph André). Pp 48.
Clozel, François-Joseph; Villamur, Roger. 1902. Les coutumes indigènes de la Côte d’Ivoire.
Paris: Augustin Challamel. Pp xx, 539.
Cobham, Henry. 1905. Animal-stories from Calabar. Journal of the African Society, v. 4, 15, p.
307-309.
Coelho, F.A. 1880. Os dialectos românicos ou neo-latinos na África, Ásia e América. Boletim da
Sociedade de Geográfia de Lisboa, 1880, p. (?).
Cultura Portuguesa, Lisboa).
142
Coelho, F.A. 1882. Os dialectos românicos ou neo-latinos na África, Ásia e América: notas
complementares. Boletim da Sociedade de Geográfia de Lisboa, 1882, p. (?).
Coelho, F.A. 1886. Os dialectos românicos ou neo-latinos na África, Ásia e América: novas notas
complementares. Boletim da Sociedade de Geográfia de Lisboa, 1886, p. (?).
Coens, [?]; Joderie, [?]. 1912. Vocabulaire français-azande et azande-français. Bruxelles:
Imprimerie Veuve Monnom.
Details wanting. Later reprinted by Musée Royal de l’Afrique Centrale in Tervuren.
Coens, [?]; Joderie, [?]. 1912. Vocabulaire français-monvu et monvu-français. Bruxelles:
Imprimerie Veuve Monnom. Pp 53.
Cohen, Marcel. 1912. Le parler arabe des juifs d’Alger. Collection linguistique de Société de
Linguistique de Paris, #4. Paris.
Cole, Desmond Thorne. 1971. Fredoux’s sketch of Tswana grammar. African studies, v. 30, 3/4, p.
191-211.
Contains a brief introduction by Cole (p. 191-199) followed by a reprint of Fredoux’s pamphlet (p. 200-211), orig.
published 1864.
Colenso, John William. 1855. An elementary grammar of the Zulu-Kafir language: prepared for
the use of the missionaries, and other students. London: Richard Clay & Sons. Pp 40.
Colenso, John William. 1859. First steps in Zulu: an abridgement of the elementary grammar of
the Zulu-Kafir language. Ekukanyeni (Natal). Pp 4, 82, 2.
The subsequent editions were retitled First steps in Zulu: being an elementary grammar of the Zulu language.
URL: books.google.com/books?id=DYgCAAAAQAAJ
Colenso, John William. 1861. Zulu-English dictionary. Pietermaritzburg: P. Davis. Pp 552.
URL: books.google.com/books?id=kpACAAAAQAAJ
Colenso, John William. 1865. Zulu vocabulary and phrase book. Durban.
Colenso, John William. 1865. On the efforts of missionaries among savages. Journal of the
Anthropological Society of London, v. 3, p. ccxlvii-cclxxxix.
With discussions by James Hunt, Dunbar Heath, Winwood Reade, William Arthur, Dr Irons, T. Bendyshe, J. Reddie,
Henry Brookes, A.R. Wallace, Edward G. Fishbourne, Dr Underhill and Burnard Owen.
Colenso, John William. 1871. First steps in Zulu: being an elementary grammar of the Zulu
language. Second edition. Pietermaritzburg & Durban: P. Davis & Sons. Pp 156.
Colenso, John William. 1871. Zulu-English dictionary. Second edition. Pietermaritzburg.
Colenso, John William. 1873. Zulu vocabulary and phrase book intended for the use of
immigrants and settlers in the colony of Natal. Fourth edition. Durban: J. Cullingworth.
Issued anonymously. Doke (1945:75) had “not found the dates of the earlier editions”. Even though Doke doesn’t
make the connection, it might in fact be a revision of Colenso’s vocabulary dated 1865.
Colenso, John William. 1878. Zulu-English dictionary. Third edition. Pietermaritzburg.
immigrants and settlers in the colony of Natal. Fifth edition. Durban: J. Cullingworth.
Issued anonymously.
language. Third edition. Pietermaritzburg: P. Davis & Sons. Pp 161.
143
language. Fourth edition. Pietermaritzburg & Durban: P. Davis & Sons. Pp 161.
immigrants and settlers in the colony of Natal. Eighth edition. Durban: J. Cullingworth.
Issued anonymously.
language. Fifth edition. Pietermaritzburg & Durban: P. Davis & Sons. Pp 4, 161.
Colenso, John William. 1905. Zulu-English dictionary. Fourth edition, revised and enlarged.
Pietermaritzburg: Shuter & Shooter. Pp 742.
“Later editions persist to the present day” (Doke 1945:74). Reprinted at least once by Gregg International (ISBN-10
0-576-11609-2).
immigrants and settlers in the colony of Natal. Twelfth edition. Durban: J. Cullingworth.
Issued anonymously.
Colizza, Giovanni. 1887. Lingua ‘Afar del nord-est dell’Africa: grammatica, testi e vocabolario.
Wien: Alfred Hölder. Pp xii, 153.
“Grundlegendes Werk” (Voigt 1988:56).
Peripherals: August Dillmann, Deutsche Literatur-Zeitung, v. 8 (1887) p. 302-303; Hans Georg von der Gabelenz,
Literarisches Zentralblatt für Deutschland, v. 38 (1887) p. 382; ..., Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 1
(1887/88) p. 156-160; Franz Praetorius, Zeitschrift für afrikanische und oceanische Sprachen, v. 1 (1895) p. 156158.
Colizza, Giovanni. 1889. Le lingue kuschitiche. Giornale della Società Asiatica Italiana, v. 3, p.
128-139.
Besides Cushitic, the article also has something on Barea (Nera) and Kunama.
Colombaroli, A. 1895. Premiers éléments de langue a-Sandeh. Le Caire.
Colyer, Stanley. 1914. SiKololo: notes on the grammar with a vocabulary. London: John Bale,
Sons & Danielson. Pp vi, 53.
Comte, Ernesto le. 1897. Methodo pratico da lingua umbundu. Supplement to Boletim da
Sociedade de Geográfia de Lisboa, v. 13. Lisboa: Imprensa Nacional de Angola.
Comte, P. 1895. Les n’sakkaras: leur pays, leurs moeurs, leurs coutumes, leurs croyances, etc.,
avec un glossaire n’sakkara. Bar-le-Duc (France): Imprimerie Comte-Jacquet.
URL: gallica.bnf.fr/scripts/ConsultationTout.exe?E=0&O=N049677
Connolly, R.M. 1897. Social life in Fanti-land. Journal of the Anthropological Inst. of Great
Britain and Ireland, v. 26, p. 128-153.
Includes sections on grammar, poetry, folklore, etc.
Conti Rossini, Carlo. 1894. Catalogo dei nomi propri di luogo dell’Etiopia. In: Atti del primo
congresso geografico italiano, Genova, 1892, p. 387-439. Ginevra.
Conti Rossini, Carlo. 1903. Per la conoscenza della lingua cunama. Giornale della Società Asiatica
Italiana, v. 16, p. 187-227.
Conti Rossini, Carlo. 1904. Appunti sulla lingua Khamta dell’Averghellé. Giornale della Società
Conti Rossini, Carlo. 1905. Note sugli Agau, 1: appunti sulla lingua khamta dell’Averghellé.
Giornale della Società Asiatica Italiana, v. 18, p. 183-242.
Not sure about the vol no. Perhaps it should be 17 (1904).
Conti Rossini, Carlo. 1905. Note sugli Agau, 2: appunti sulla lingua awiya del Danghelà. Giornale
della Società Asiatica Italiana, v. 18, p. 103-194.
Conti Rossini, Carlo. 1910/11. Studi su popolazioni dell’Etiopia [pt. 3?]. Rivista degli studi
orientali, v. 2, p. 849-900.
Conti Rossini, Carlo. 1912. La langue des kemant en Abyssinie. Schriften der
Sprachenkommission der kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Wien, #4. Vienne:
Alfred Hölder. Pp xii, 316.
144
Includes comparisons with other Agaw languages/dialects.
Conti Rossini, Carlo. 1912. Piccoli studi etiopici, appunti galla in lingua amhara. Zeitschrift für
Assyriologie und verwandte Gebiete, v. 27, p. 373-383.
orientali, v. 4, p. 599-651.
Conti Rossini, Carlo. 1913. I Mekan o Suro nell’Etiopia del sudovest e il suo linguaggio.
Rendiconti della Accademia Nazionale dei Lincei, classe di scienze morali, storiche e
filologiche (Rendiconti della Reale Accademia dei Lincei), 5a serie, v. 22, p. 397-463.
Conti Rossini, Carlo. 1913. Schizzo del dialetto saho dell’Alta Assaorta in Eritrea. Rendiconti della
Accademia Nazionale dei Lincei, classe di scienze morali, storiche e filologiche (Rendiconti
della Reale Accademia dei Lincei), 5a serie, v. 22, p. 151-246.
Conti Rossini, Carlo. 1913/14. Studi su popolazioni dell’Etiopia, 5: appunti di lingua Gonga.
Rivista degli studi orientali, v. 5, p. 404-415.
Conti Rossini, Carlo. 1914/15. Appunti di linguaggio janjero. Rivista degli studi orientali, v. 6, p.
(?).
orientali, v. 6, p. 365-425.
Conti Rossini, Carlo. 1914/15. I Bambala di Amarr Burji e il loro linguaggio. Rivista degli studi
orientali, v. 6, p. 415-425.
Conti Rossini, Carlo. 1915. Notice sur les manuscrits éthiopiens de la collection d’Abbadie.
Journal asiatique, 11ème série, v. 6 [187], p. 189-238.
Conti Rossini, Carlo. 1919. I Gunza ed il loro linguaggio. Rendiconti della Accademia Nazionale
dei Lincei, classe di scienze morali, storiche e filologiche (Rendiconti della Reale Accademia
dei Lincei), 5a serie, v. 28, p. 251-285.
Deals with Gumuz.
Cook, Albert Ruskin [Dr]. 1903. A medical vocabulary in Luganda. London: Society for
Cook, J.H. [Dr]. 1908. Further notes on y-stems.
Something on Ganda. Source?
Cook, J.H. [Dr]. 1908. Notes on transliteration into Luganda. London.
Coomber, A.G. 1866. Igbira otakerida / Igbira primer. Edited by J.F. Schön. London: Church
Missionary Society (CMS). Pp 2, 35.
Coomber, A.G. 1867. Igara primer. Edited by J.F. Schön. London: Church Missionary Society
(CMS). Pp ii, 26.
Corry, Joseph. 1807. Observations upon the windward coast of Africa: the religion, character,
customs etc., of the natives; with a system upon which they may be civilized, and a
knowledge attained of the interior of this extraordinary quarter of the globe; and upon the
natural and commercial resources of the country; made in the years 1805 and 1806.
London: G. & W. Nicol. Pp xiv, 163.
Contains a Fante vocabulary (Hintze 1959:36). Reprinted by Frank Cass & Co. in London (Cass library of African
studies, travels and narratives, #44; ISBN-10 0-7146-1800-4).
Cort, [?] de; Liaudet, [?]; Goethem, [?] van. 1912. Vocabulaire français-ababua et ababuafrançais. Bruxelles: Imprimerie Veuve Monnom. Pp 64.
Cos, Francisco Salvadó y. 1891. Collección de apuntes preliminares sobre la lengua benga, ó sea
introducción á una gramática de este idioma que se habla en la isla de Corisco, puelos de
su Bahía é islas adyacentes. Madrid: Imprenta de A. Pérez Dubrull. Pp 151.
Costa, Joaquim Vieira Botelho da; Duarte, José Custódio. 1886. O crioulo de Cabo Verde: breves
estudos sobre o crioulo das ilhas de Cabo Verde. Oferecidos ão Dr Hugo Schuchardt.
Boletim da Sociedade de Geográfia de Lisboa, 1886, p. (?).
Cultura Portuguesa, Lisboa), p. 235-328.
Cotel, Pierre. 1907. Dictionnaire français-banda et banda-français, précédé d’un essai de
grammaire banda. Brazzaville: Mission Catholique. Pp 60.
145
Cottini, Giovanni. 1914. Grammaire kinyamwezi: langue “bantu” parlée dans l’Afrique orientale,
territoire du Tanganyika. Miméographe. Tabora (Tanganyika). Pp 207.
This was re-issued 1957 by the White Fathers in Rome.
Courboin, Albert. 1908. ‘Bangala’, langue commerciale du haute-Congo: éléments et manuel de
conversation; lexique. Paris, Bruxelles & Anvers: Augustin Challamel. Pp ix, 146.
There are several subsequent editions of this, esp. one undated “édition augmentée” comprising 367 pages (Doke
1945:28).
Courdioux, Ph.E. 1879. Dictionnaire abrégé de la langue fõ-gbe ou dahoméenne, 1: françaisdahoméen. Actes de la Société Philologique, v. 9, 2, p. 43-86.
Apparently the only part ever published.
Courtois, Victor Jos. 1888. Elementos de gramática tetense, lingua chi-nyai ou chi-nyungue,
idioma fallado no districto de Tete. Moçambique: Imprensa Nacional. Pp ix, 158.
Courtois, Victor Jos. 1899. Dicionário portuguez-cafre-tetense: idioma fallado no districto de
Tete e na vasta regi o do Zambeze inferior. Coimbra: Imprensa da Universidade. Pp xiii,
484.
Not sure about the details. (See also Akukonkedua 1900).
Courtois, Victor Jos. 1900. Elementos de gramática tetense, lingua chi-nyai ou chi-nyungue,
idioma fallado no districto de Tete e em toda a vasta região do Zambeze inferior. Nova
(segunda) edição. Coimbra: Imprensa da Universidade. Pp xiii, 231.
Not entirely sure about the title.
Cowan, [?]. 18xx. ... [Title wanting].
In an unpublished travel journal by one Mr Cowan (possibly Reverend William Cowan), there appears a list of
numerals of Briqua and a few words of Mutshuana. The word lists were later included in a publication by Salt
(1814:xxvii); cfr Latham (1847:192).
Crabtree, William Arthur. 1902. Elements of Luganda grammar, together with exercises and a
vocabulary. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK) for the Church
Missionary Society (CMS). Pp 266.
Issued anonymously. Compiled from materials originally collected by G.L. Pilkington.
Crabtree, William Arthur. 1902-1921. Card index of English/Bantu and Bantu/English
vocabularies of 13 Bantu languages, with suggested Proto-Bantu reconstructions, and
material on Luganda and Kavirondo Masaba. Manuscripts and notes in 2 boxes, ref. GB
0102 MS 380335. School of Oriental and African Studies (SOAS), University of London.
“Card index of English/Bantu and Bantu/English vocabularies, incorporating 13 different Bantu languages and
symbols relating their hypothetical common roots, with some tentative conclusions about Bantu origins, together
with material on Luganda and Kavirondo” (Anderson & Seton 1995:54).
Crabtree, William Arthur. 1912. Luena. Journal of the African Society, v. 11, 44, p. 394-400.
“This contained second-hand information and gave little detail” (Doke 1945:106).
Crabtree, William Arthur. 1912/13. The ‘l’ sound in Lu-Ganda. Journal of the African Society, v.
12, p. 276-284, 395-406.
Crabtree, William Arthur. 1913. The systematic study of African languages. Journal of the African
Society, v. 12, 46, p. 177-189.
Crabtree, William Arthur. 1914. The languages of the Uganda Protectorate. Journal of the African
Society, v. 13, 50, p. 152-166.
Crabtree, William Arthur. 1918. Bantu speech: a philological study [pt. 1]. Journal of the African
Society, v. 17, 68, p. 307-313.
Peripherals: Alice Werner, “Bantu speech” (correspondence to the editor), Journal of the African Society, v. 18
(1918/19) p. 234-238.
Crabtree, William Arthur. 1918/19. Bantu speech: a philological study [pt. 2-5]. Journal of the
African Society, v. 18, p. 32-44, 101-113, 202-214, 290-301.
Peripherals: Alice Werner, “Bantu speech” (correspondence to the editor), Journal of the African Society, v. 18
(1918/19) p. 234-238.
Craven, Henry; Barfield, John. 1883. English-Congo and Congo-English dictionary. London:
Harley House. Pp xii, 248.
Reprinted 1971 by Books for Libraries Press in Freeport NY (Black heritage library collection; ISBN-10 0-83698803-5).
146
Crawford, D. 1905. African shibboleths (a new check in phonology). Journal of the African
Society, v. 4, 14, p. 232-237.
Crawfurd, John. 1863. On the numerals as evidence of the progress of civilisation. Transactions of
the Ethnological Society of London, new series, v. 2, p. 84-111.
Crawfurd, John. 1863. On the antiquity of man from the evidence of language. Transactions of the
Ethnological Society of London, new series, v. 2, p. 170-181.
Crawfurd, John. 1864. On language as a test of the races of man. Transactions of the Ethnological
Society of London, new series, v. 3, p. 1-8.
Crawshaw, C.J. 1888. A first Kafir course. Pp viii, 133.
Details wanting. According to Alexandre (1981:373), this deals with Fanagalo. Doke (1945:84) lists and discusses
it in connection with Xhosa.
Crawshaw, C.J. 1894. A first Kafir course. Second edition. Cape Town & London: J.C. Juta &
Co. Pp vii, 133.
Crawshaw, C.J. 1897. A first Kafir course. Third edition. Cape Town & London: J.C. Juta & Co.
Pp vii, 133.
Crawshaw, C.J. 1901. A first Kafir course. Fourth edition. Cape Town & Johannesburg: J.C. Juta
& Co. Pp vii, 133.
Crawshaw, C.J. 1903. A first Kafir course. Fifth edition. Cape Town: J.C. Juta & Co.
Crawshay, Richard. 1902. Kikuyu: notes on the country, people, fauna, and flora. The
geographical journal, v. 20, 1, p. 24-49.
Besides many lexical specimens in the text, there is also a brief grammatical section describing the Kikuyu noun
class system, plus brief lists of verbs, numerals, etc. (p. 43-45).
Creswick, H.C. 1867. On the syllabic characters in use amongst the Vey Negros. Transactions of
the Ethnological Society of London, new series, v. 6, p. 260-264.
Creusat, Jean Baptiste. 1873. Essai de dictionnaire français-kabyle (Zouaoua). Alger. Pp lix, 374.
Crisp, William. 1880. Notes towards a Secoana grammar with a series of exercises.
Bloemfontein. Pp 100.
Description of Southern Rolong, based on Rev. J. Fredoux’s A sketch of the Sechuana grammar (1864). “The best
thing to date. Vastly superior in compass and method to any of its predecessors, and in method at least to its
successors” (Lestrade, in Doke 1933:77).
studies, v. 7 (1933) p. 1-99.
Crisp, William. 1886. Notes towards a Secoana grammar with a series of exercises. Second
edition. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp 104.
Crisp, William. 1900. Notes towards a Secoana grammar with a series of exercises. Third edition.
London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp iv, 153.
Crisp, William. 1905. Notes towards a Secoana grammar with a series of exercises. Fourth
edition. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp 153.
Crocker, William Goss. 1844. Grammatical observations on the Basa language. Edina (Liberia).
Cronise, S.S. 1903. Cunnie Rabbit, Mr Spider and the other beef: West African folk tales. New
York.
Crowther, Samuel Ajayi [Bishop]. 1843. Vocabulary of the Yoruba language. London: Church
Missionary Society (CMS). Pp vii, 48, 196.
The first 48 pages contain “the grammatical elements of the Yoruba language”, which are followed by EnglishYoruba and Yoruba-English sections.
Crowther, Samuel Ajayi [Bishop]. 1852. A vocabulary of the Yoruba language. With introductory
remarks by the Rev. O.E. Vidal. London: Seeley, Service & Co. Pp v, 38, 291.
Peripherals: A.F. Pott, “Sprachen aus Afrika’s Inneren und Westen”, Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen
Gesellschaft, v. 8 (1854) p. 413-441.
Crowther, Samuel Ajayi [Bishop]. 1852. A grammar and vocabulary of the Yoruba language.
With introductory remarks by the Rev. O.E. Vidal. London: Seeley, Service & Co. Pp 38, vii,
52, 291.
147
Crowther, Samuel Ajayi [Bishop]. 1852. A grammar of the Yoruba language. London: Seeley,
Service & Co. Pp vii, 52.
Crowther, Samuel Ajayi [Bishop]. 1859. Isoama-Ibo primer. Pp 17.
Details wanting.
Crowther, Samuel Ajayi [Bishop]. 1860. Nupe primer. London: Church Missionary Society
(CMS). Pp 22.
Crowther, Samuel Ajayi [Bishop]. 1860. Isoama-Ibo primer. Second edition, revised and enlarged
by J.C. Taylor. London: Church Missionary Society (CMS). Pp 22.
Crowther, Samuel Ajayi [Bishop]. 1864. A grammar and vocabulary of the Nupe language.
London: Church Missionary Society (CMS). Pp vi, 208.
Crowther, Samuel Ajayi [Bishop]. 1882. Vocabulary of the Ibo language. London: Society for
Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp viii, 109.
This is only Ibo-English. The other part was published a year later by J.F. Schön.
Crowther, Samuel Ajayi [Bishop]; Sowande, E.J. [Rev.]; Fry, Mrs E.; Ogunbiyi, T.A.J. [Rev.].
1913. A dictionary of the Yoruba language. With an introduction by C.W. Wakeman.
Lagos: CMS (Church Missionary Society) Bookshop. Pp 259.
Reprinted (or revised?) 1918 by Church Missionary Society (CMS) Bookshop in Lagos.
Crum, Walter Ewing. 1893. Coptic manuscripts brought from the Fayyum by W.M. Flinders
Petrie, together with a papyrus in the Bodleian Library. London: D. Nutt. Pp viii, 92.
URL: www.archive.org/details/copticmanuscript00crumuoft
Crummell, Alexander. 1861. The English language in Liberia: the annual address before the
citizens of Maryland County, Cape Palmas, Liberia, July 26, 1860. New York: Bunce & Co.
Pp 32.
Reprinted the following year in the second edition of The future of Africa (ed. by Alexander Crummell; Charles
Scribner’s Sons, 1862), p. 9-54.
Peripherals: Anon, “Liberia College”, The North American review (Cedar Falls IO), v. 97 (1863) p. 102-132.
Crummell, Alexander. (Ed.) 1862. The future of Africa: being addresses, sermons, etc., etc.,
delivered in the Republic of Liberia. Second edition. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons. Pp
372.
Cummins, A.G. 1915. Annuak fable. Man: a record of anthropological science, v. 15, p. 34-35
(art. 19).
Cunha, Joaquim d’Almeida da. 1883. Vocabulários das linguas da provincia de Moçambique.
Details wanting.
Cunha, Joaquim d’Almeida da. 1886. Apontamentos para o estudo das línguas falladas pelos
indígenas da província portugueza de Moçambique na costa oriental d’Africa, v. 1. Luanda:
Imprensa Nacional.
Includes a “Vocabulario da lingua Mavia”.
Peripherals: ..., Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 2 (1888/89) p. 158-159.
Cunningham, James F. 1907. Gungu vocabulary.
Vocabulary of Gungu JE101 compiled in 1907; referred to without title by Johnston (1919:785).
Cunningham, James F. 1912. Gungu vocabulary. New version, revised and enlarged.
Cunningham’s Gungu-vocabulary of 1907 was subsequently “revised and added to by an educated Mu-ganda”
(Johnston 1919:785).
Cust, Robert Needham. 1882. Über unsere gegenwärtige Kenntnis der Sprachen Afrikas. In:
Verhandlungen der 5. internationalen Orientalisten-Congresses gehalten zu Berlin [...]
1881. Teil 2: Abhandlungen und Vorträge, p. (?). Ed. by Christian Friedrich August
Dillmann. Berlin.
This is listed in Hintze’s (1959:18, #12) Kwa-bibliography, so presumably it includes some Kwa material.
Cust, Robert Needham. 1883. A sketch of the modern languages of Africa, 2 vols. Trübner’s
oriental series. London: Trübner & Co. Pp xvi, 566, map.
Reprinted 1969 by Frank Cass & Co. in London, with a new introduction by P.E.H. Hair; and 2000 by Routledge in
London (ISBN-10 0-415-24454-4, 0-415-24453-6).
148
193-218.
Cust, Robert Needham. 1885. Les langues de l’Afrique. Traduit de l’anglais par L. de Milloué.
Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp 126.
Translation of some article originally published in The Calcutta review.
Cust, Robert Needham. 1885. Le lingue dell’Africa. Versione italiana per cura di Angelo de
Gubernatis. Serie scientifica, #50. Milano: Ulrico Hoepli. Pp 109.
Apparently, this is not from Cust’s Sketch of the modern languages of Africa, but a translation of some article
originally published in The Calcutta review.
Cust, Robert Needham. 1886. Le lingue dell’Africa. Traduzione libera dall’inglese coordinata con
profilo geografico del continente africano del prof. Giov. Scudellari. Torino. Pp 71.
Abridged/selected translation of Cust’s Sketch of the modern languages of Africa.
Cust, Robert Needham. 1893. Essay on the progress of African philology up to the year 1893.
London: Elliot Stock. Pp ii, 48.
Includes three appendices: “A. Bibliographical table of languages, dialects, localities and authorities, 1883-1893”,
“B. List of translations of the Bible (whole or part) up to 1893” and “C. List of scholars, who have contributed to
our knowledge up to 1893”.
Cust, Robert Needham. 1894. Essai sur les progrès de la philologie africaine jusqu’à l’année
1893. Genève: W. Kündig. Pp 23.
Cust, Robert Needham. 1901. South African officials and the African vernaculars. Hertford UK.
Not sure what this is.
Czermak, Wilhelm. 1917/19. Über phonetische Beobachtungen im Kordofan-Nubischen.
Jahresbericht der österreichische Gesellschaft für experimentelle Phonetik, v. 5/6, p. (?).
Czermak, Wilhelm. 1919. Kordofannubische Studien. Sitzungsberichte der (kaiserlichen)
Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Wien, philosophisch-historische Klasse, #177:1. Wien:
Alfred Hölder. Pp ix, 213.
Peripherals: Albert Drexel, Anthropos, v. 14/15 (1919/20) p. 597-600.
Dahin, [?]. 1895. Vocabulaire adouma-français, et français-adouma. Kempten (Allemagne). Pp
72.
Details wanting.
Dahl, Edmund. 1901. Lieder und Sangesweisen und Geschichten der Wanyanwezi. Mitteilungen
Dahl, Edmund. 1904. Die Töne und Akzente im Kinamwezi. Mitteilungen des Seminars für
Dahl, Edmund. 1912/13. Hundert Rätsel der Wanamwezi. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 3, 4,
p. 257-271.
Dahl, Edmund. 1913/14. Einige Beispiele aus dem Nyamwezi für die Vokalassimilation und
Konsonantenassimilation. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 4, p. 333-335.
Dahl, Edmund. 1914. Nyamwesi-Wörterbuch. Abhandlungen der hamburgischen Kolonial-Inst.,
#25; Reihe B: Völkerkunde, Kulturgeschichte und Sprachen, #15. Hamburg: Friederichsen,
De Gruyter & Co. Pp xvi, 696.
Dahl, Edmund. 1914/15. Die Verwandtschafts-Bezeichnungen im Namwezi. Zeitschrift für
Appears without author’s name.
Dahle, E. 1907. Termini technici der Rinderzuchttreibenden Watusi in Deutsch-Ost-Afrika.
Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 10, III, p. 84-89.
The Watusi speak Ruanda/Rundi.
Dahle, Lars Nielsen [Bishop]. 1876. The influence of the Arabs on the Malagasy language.
Antananarivo annual, 1876, p. 203-219.
Dahle, Lars Nielsen [Bishop]. 1877. Specimens of Malagasy folk-lore. Antananarivo: A. Kingdon.
Pp xiii, 457.
149
Dahle, Lars Nielsen [Bishop]. 1885. The Swahili element in the new Malagasy-English dictionary.
Antananarivo annual, 1885, p. 99-115.
Dahle, M. 1893. Kortfattet Zulugrammatik = A short Zulu grammar. Pp ii, 91.
Details wanting.
Dale, Godfrey. 1894. Bondei exercises, compiled for the Universities’ Mission to East Africa.
Magila (Tanganyika).
This came “with over 200 errata corrections” (Doke 1945:50n3). Place/publisher is given as “Holy Cross, Magila:
Universities’ Mission, East Africa” in Schadeberg’s Bantu Bibliography.
Dale, Godfrey. 1896. An account of the principal customs and habits of the natives inhabiting the
Bondei country, compiled mainly for the use of European missionaries in the country.
Journal of the Anthropological Inst. of Great Britain and Ireland, v. 25, p. 181-239.
Dalton, J.C. 1894. The spelling of Egyptian names. The geographical journal, v. 3, p. 504-506.
Dalziel, J.M. (Ed.) 1916. A Hausa botanical dictionary. London: T. Fisher Unwin. Pp 119.
Damm, P.J. 1910/11. Fabeln und Sagen der Wahehe, der Wapogoro und Wayao. Missionsblätter:
Organ der Erzabtei St. Ottilien, der Abtei Münsterschwarzach, der Abtei Schweiklberg, der
Abtei Königsmünster und der Abtei St. Georgenberg-Fiecht, dritte Folge, v. 1 [15], p. 153192.
Danckelmann, Alexander von. 1883/85. Sprachliches aus Pogges Tagebücher. Mitteilungen der
afrikanischen Gesellschaft in Deutschland, v. (?), p. (?).
Fragmentary reference given by Homburger (1925:167).
Daniell, [Dr]. 18xx. Manuscript vocabularies of Benin, Old Calebar, Ibo, Congo.
Latham (1847) mentions several manuscript vocabularies collected by one Dr Daniell, e.g. Benin (idem:171), Old
Calebar (idem), Ibo (idem:172), Emboma (“collected in 1846”; idem:191), Ambriz (“collected in 1846 ... a dialect
of the Congo”; idem). The name is sometimes spelled ‹Daniel›, sometimes ‹Daniell›.
Dannholz, Jakob J. 1916. Im Banne des Geisterglaubens: Züge des animistischen Heidentums bei
den Wasu in Deutsch-Ostafrika. Leipzig: Evangelisch-Lutherische Mission. Pp 133.
Darby, [Mr]. 1889. Unpublished Bobangi vocabulary with notes on grammar. Lukolela (Congo
Free State): Baptist Missionary Society.
Mentioned by Whitehead (1899:vi). A manuscript vocabulary based on this material was later prepared by some Mr
Glennie.
Dard, Jean. 1825. Dictionnaire français-wolof et français-bambara, suivi du dictionnaire woloffrançais. Paris: Imprimerie Royale. Pp xxxii, 300.
Dard, Jean. 1826. Grammaire wolofe: méthode pour étudier la langue des noirs qui habitent les
royaumes de Bourba-Yolof, de Walo, de Damel, de Bour-Sine, de Saloume, de Baole, en
Sénégambie. Suivie d’un appendice où sont établies les particularités les plus essentielles des
principales langues de l’Afrique septentrionale. Paris: Imprimerie Royale. Pp xxxi, 213.
URL: books.google.se/books?id=3acRAAAAIAAJ
Dard, Jean. 1855. Dictionnaire français-wolof et français-bambara. Deuxième édition. Paris.
Daull, P.A. 1879. Grammaire de kisouahili. Colmar (France). Pp 125.
Davis, William Jefford. 1872. Dictionary of the Kaffir language, including the Xosa and Zulu
dialects, 1: Kaffir-English. London: Wesleyan Mission House. Pp viii, 260.
dialects, 2: an English and Kaffir dictionary. Pp xiv, 232.
Details wanting.
dialects. Second edition, revised and enlarged by W. Hunter. Pp v, 499.
Details wanting. Some printings bear later dates (e.g. 1917, 1922), some of which may or may not be revisions.
150
Dayan, [?]. 18xx. Petit vocabulaire français-nègre et nègre-français (idiome de Tombouctou).
Paris: Librairie Africaine & Coloniale (Joseph André).
Not sure what language this deals with, presumably Songhai.
Dayrell, Elphinstone. 1907/11. Vocabulary of English words and sentences and list of greetings
and salutations translated into six different dialects (Injor, Olulumo or Okuni, Inde,
Akparabong, Boki and Inkun) spoken in the Okuni (or Ikom) district.
Several parts.
Dayrell, Elphinstone. 1908. Vocabulary and supplementary vocabulary of English words,
salutations, etc., translated into the Juku and Munchi languages.
Dayrell, Elphinstone. 1910. Some “Nsibidi”. Man: a record of anthropological science, v. 10, p.
113-114 (art. 67).
Dayrell, Elphinstone. 1910. Folk stories from southern Nigeria, West Africa. With an introduction
by Andrew Lang. London: Longmans, Green & Co. Pp 159.
URL: www.archive.org/details/folkstoriesfroms00dayrrich
URL: www.sacred-texts.com/afr/fssn/index.htm
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 9 (1909/10) p. 448-450; T.H.J., Man, v. 11 (1911) p. 30 (art.
18).
Dayrell, Elphinstone. 1911. Further notes on ’Nsibidi signs and their meanings from the Ikom
District, southern Nigeria. Journal of the Royal Anthropological Inst. of Great Britain and
Ireland, v. 41, p. 521-540.
Decken, Carl Claus von der [Baron]. 1865. Manuscript vocabulary of Swahili.
Date is a guess. Mentioned by Benson (1964:69).
Decken, Carl Claus von der [Baron]. 1887/88. Wörterverzeichnis aus dem Ki-Dschagga und Pare.
Delafosse, Maurice. 1894. Manuel dahoméen: grammaire, chrestomathie, dictionnaire françaisdahoméen et dahoméen-français. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp 435.
Delafosse, Maurice. 1897. Essai sur le peuple et la langue sara (bassin du Tchad). Précédé d’une
lettre-préface de M.F.-J. Clozel. Paris: Librairie Africaine & Coloniale (Joseph André). Pp
47.
Delafosse, Maurice. 1899. Les vai: leur langue et leur système d’écriture. L’anthropologie, v. 10, p.
129-151, 294-314.
Delafosse, Maurice. 1900. Essai de manuel de langue agni parlée dans la moitié orientale de la
Côte d’Ivoire; ouvrage accompagné d’un recueil de légendes, contes et chansons en langue
agni, d’une étude des origines et des migrations des tribus Agni-Achanti, de vocabulaires
comparatifs des différentes langues Agni-Achanti, d’une bibliographie et d’une carte. Paris:
Librairie Africaine & Coloniale (Joseph André). Pp xiv, 226.
The comparative vocabularies include material from several other Kwa languages, e.g. Gan, Nta (Gondja), Gbanyé
(Salaga), Gaman (Bondoukou), Abrono (Brong, Oboutou (Winnebah), Fante, Akuapim, Asante, Dahoméen, Adanmé, Gan (cfr Heintze 1959).
Delafosse, Maurice. 1901. Essai de manuel pratique de la langue mandé ou mandingue: étude
grammaticale du dialecte dyoula; vocabulaire français-dyoula; histoire de Samori en
Mandé; étude comparée des principaux dialectes mandé. Publications de l’Ecole des
langues orientales vivantes, 3ème série, #14. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp 304.
Delafosse, Maurice. 1901. Manuel de la langue haoussa. Paris. Pp 134.
Delafosse, Maurice. 1904. Vocabulaires comparatifs de plus de soixante langues ou dialectes
africains, parlés à la Côte d’Ivoire et dans les régions limitrophes, avec des notes
linguistiques et ethnologiques, une bibliographie, et une carte. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp iv,
284.
Includes material from Mékyiko, Abouré, Akyè, Goua, Kyama, Alaguian, Avikam, Ari, Abè, Adyoukrou (= ‘langues
des lagunes’), Dyida, Néouolé, Abrioui, Plaoui, Téoui, Krao, Kouaya, Godye, Bété, Boboua, Bakoué, Houané,
Grébo, Gbassa, Dé (= ‘langues krou’), Assanti, Abron, Zéma, Aféma, Baoulé (= ‘langues agni-assanti’), Soninké,
Bozo, Sya, Gbêlé, Guio, Kouéni sud de Séguéla, Kouéni de Bandama Ronge, Mouin, Ngan, Gbin (= ‘langues mandétamou et mandé-fou’), Noumou, Ligbi, Huéla, Dyoula, Maou (= langues mandé-tan), Bamâna, Foro, Tafilé,
Takponin, Guimini, Nafâna (= ‘la langue sénoufo’), Dagàri, Birifo, Gbanyan, Dagboma, Gouressi, Siti, Dégha,
Lobi, Dyan, Gan, Tara, Kyan, Koulango-nord, Koulango-sud (= ‘langues moussi-gourounsi’), Hausa, Pular, Arabe,
Pigeon-English, Petit-Nègre (= ‘langues étrangères’).
151
Peripherals: H.A. Wieschhoff, “Sur un exemplaire annoté d’un ouvrage de Maurice Delafosse”, Comptes rendus du
première conférence international des africanistes de l’ouest (Institut Français de l’Afrique Noire, 1951) p. 224-226;
Florence Abena Dolphyne, “Delafosse’s Abron wordlist in the light of a Brong dialect survey”, Languages of the
Akan area (edited by H.M.J. Trutenau, Basler Afrika Bibliographien, 1976) p. 35-46.
Delafosse, Maurice. 1911. Les langues voltaïques (boucle du Niger): étude comparative. Mémoires
de la Société de Linguistique de Paris, v. 16, 6, p. 386-395.
Has material from Samo, Dogon, Koromfe, Moore, Mampruli, Gulmancema, Dagbani, Nuni, Sisaala, Boussansi,
Vagla, Deg, Kabiye, Yom, Tem, Baatonum, Lobiri, Jaane, Phwi, Kaansa, Bwamu, Kulango (Roncador & Miehe
1998:55).
Delafosse, Maurice. 1912. Haut-Sénégal-Niger (Soudan Français): le pays, les peuples, les
langues, l’histoire, les civilisations, 3 vols. Avec une préface de M. le Gouverneur Clozel.
Paris: Emile Larose. Pp 428; 428; 316.
The first volume has some linguistics in it, primarily on Mossi, Mandingue, Peul and Songai, but there are
mentions of several other languages as well, e.g. Arabe, Tamacheq, Poular, Songai, Bozo, Soninke, Kagoro,
Mandingue, Sousou, Samorho, Sia, Ble, Natioro, Ouara, Sembla, “la famille Senoufo”, “la famille voltaique” (incl.
Dogon), Ouolof, Haoussa.
Peripherals: H. Richmond Palmer, “Delafosse’s account of the Fulani”, Journal of the African Society, v. 13 (1914)
p. 195-203; Maria Grosz-Ngaté, “Power and knowledge: the representation of the Mande world in the works of Park,
Caillié, Monteil, and Delafosse”, Cahiers d’études africaines, v. 111/112 (1988) p. 485-511.
Delafosse, Maurice. 1914. Esquisse générale des langues de l’Afrique et plus particuliérement de
l’Afrique française. Paris: Masson. Pp 42.
Reprinted 1930 in Enquête coloniale dans l’Afrique française, occidentale et équatoriale.
Delafosse, Maurice. 1914. Mots soudanais du Moyen Age. Mémoires de la Société de
Linguistique de Paris, v. 18, p. 281-288.
Identifies many Mandingo words in medieval Arabic documents.
Delaporte, J. Honorat. 1836. Vocabulaire berbère. Journal asiatique, 3ème série, v. 1 [28], p. 97122.
Delaporte, J. Honorat. 1836. Vocabulaire berbère-française. Paris.
Listed by Jucovy & Alderete (2001).
Delaporte, J. Honorat. 1836. Principes de l’idiome arabe en usage à Alger. Alger. Pp 154.
Delaporte, J. Honorat. 1837. Guide de la conversation française-arabe. Alger: Imprimerie du
Gouvernement. Pp vii, 87.
Delaporte, J. Honorat. 1839. Principes de l’idiome arabe en usage à Alger. Deuxième édition.
Alger & Paris: Brachet & Bastide; C. Hingray. Pp 163.
Delaporte, J. Honorat. 1840. Grammaire de la langue berbère. Paris.
Delaporte, J. Honorat. 1841. Guide de la conversation française-arabe. Deuxième édition. Alger:
Imprimerie du Gouvernement. Pp vii, 178.
Delaporte, J. Honorat. 1844. Specimen de la langue berbère. Paris.
Delaporte, J. Honorat. 1845. Principes de l’idiome arabe en usage à Alger. Troisième édition.
Paris: Dubos Frères. Pp 163.
Delaporte, J. Honorat. 1846. Guide de la conversation française-arabe. Troisième édition. Alger:
Imprimerie du Gouvernement. Pp vii, 186.
Delaporte, Pacifique Henri. 184x. ... [Title wanting]. Classical museum: a journal of philology and
of ancient history and literature, v. 1?, 10, p. (?).
“The numerals of the chief Gaboon vocabulary, the Pongo of Delaporte, are compared with the numerals of the
African languages in general, in the 10th number of Classical Museum, p. 431” (Latham 1847:180). Not sure if this
means that Delaporte is the actual author. No 10 is probably within the first volume, e.g. 1843/44.
Delaporte, Pacifique Henri. 1845. Vocabulaire de la langue ponga. Mémoires de la Société
Ethnologique, v. 8, 2, p. 197-203.
Referred to by Doke (1959:23) and Latham (1847:174).
Delauney, [Père]. 1885. Grammaire kiswahili. Paris: F. Levé. Pp 173.
Delauney, [Père]. 1885. Dictionnaire français-kiswahili. Paris.
Delauney, [Père]. 1898. Grammaire kiswahili. Deuxième édition. Paris. Pp 218.
152
Delegorgue, Adulphe. 1847. Voyage dans l’Afrique australe, notamment dans le territoire de
Natal, dans celui des cafres, amazoulous et makatisses et jusqu’a au tropique du
capricorne, exécuté pendant les années 1838-1844, 2 vols. Paris.
The second volume contains a 800-item Zulu vocabulary.
Delegorgue, Adulphe. 1847. Vocabulaire de la langue zoulouse. In: Voyage dans l’Afrique
australe, notamment dans le territoire de Natal, dans celui des Cafres, Amazoulous et
Makatisses et jusqu’ au tropique du Capricorne, exécuté pendant les années 1838-1844, v.
2, p. (?). Paris.
Some 800 items. Natal University Press published an English edition of the whole travelogue in 1990/97,
translated by Fleur Webb, with introduction & annotations by Stephanie Alexander and edited by Colin de B. Webb.
Peripherals: Anthony S. Davey & Adrian Koopman, “Adulphe Delegorgue’s vocabulaire de la langue zoulouse”,
South African journal of African languages, v. 20 (2000) p. 134-147.
Delegorgue, Adulphe. 1990/97. Travels in southern Africa, 2 vols. Translated from French by
Fleur Webb, with an introduction and annotations by Stephanie Alexander and edited by
Colin de B. Webb. Pietermaritzburg: University of Natal Press.
Delhaise, Charles Godefroid Félix François [Comdt.]. 1909. Les warega (Congo Belge). Avec une
préface par Cyr. de Overberghe. Collection de monographies ethnographiques: sociologie
descriptive, #5. Bruxelles: Librairie Albert de Wit pour l’Inst. International de Bibliographie.
Pp xx, 375.
Includes a section “La vie intellectuelle: langage” (p. 251-261).
Peripherals: Frederick Starr, American anthropologist, new series, v. 13 (1911) p. 148-149.
Delhaise-Arnould, Ch. 1912. Les bapopoïe [pt. 1]. Bulletin de la Société Royale Belge de
Géographie, v. 36, p. 86-113.
Poipoi is a Mangbetu dialect. Apparently the second part has a brief vocabulary in it. Have no details on that,
though.
Delitzsch, F. 1873. Studien über indogermanisch-semitische Wurzelverwandschaft. Leipzig.
Delius, Siegfried. 1910. Grammatik der Suaheli-Sprache, mit einem Anhang: Kurzer
Sprachführer für den ersten Anfang. Tanga (Tanganyika): Schuldruck. Pp xii, 106.
Delplace, E. 1895. Eléments de la langue congolaise, suivis d’un choix de phrases graduées et de
deux vocabulaires. Bruges: Desclée de Brouwer. Pp 96.
Delplace, E. 1898. Essai d’un dictionnaire fiote-français. Bruges. Pp 671.
Issued anonymously? (cfr Doke 1945:19).
Dempwolff, Otto. 1908. Einige Sonderheiten der Hehesprache. Mitteilungen des Seminars für
Dempwolff, Otto. 1911/12. Beiträge zur Kenntnis der Sprachen in Deutsch-Ostafrika, 1: das
Verbum im Hehe. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 2, p. 81-107.
Dempwolff, Otto. 1911/12. Beiträge zur Kenntnis der Sprachen in Deutsch-Ostafrika, 2: eine
lautliche Sonderheit des Dzalamo. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 2, p. 257-260.
Dempwolff, Otto. 1912/13. Beiträge zur Kenntnis der Sprachen in Deutsch-Ostafrika, 3: ein
Märchen und 30 Lieder der Dzalamo. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 3, p. 161-181.
Dempwolff, Otto. 1913. Sprechapparate beim Unterricht der Namasprache. Vox: internationales
Zentralblatt für experimentelle Phonetik, Reihe H, v. 5, p. 246-255.
Dempwolff, Otto. 1914/15. Beiträge zur Kenntnis der Sprachen in Deutsch-Ostafrika, 4: Kulia.
Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 5, p. 26-44, 113-136.
Dempwolff, Otto. 1914/15. Beiträge zur Kenntnis der Sprachen in Deutsch-Ostafrika, 5: Ilamba.
Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 5, p. 227-253.
Dempwolff, Otto. 1914/15. Die “etymologische Form” in Ostbantusprachen. Zeitschrift für
Dempwolff, Otto. 1914/15. Beiträge zur Kenntnis der Sprachen in Deutsch-Ostafrika, 6: Limi
(Rimi). Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 5, p. 270-298.
Dempwolff, Otto. 1915/16. Beiträge zur Kenntnis der Sprachen in Deutsch-Ostafrika, 7: Buwe
(Mbugwe). Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 6, p. 1-27.
153
Dempwolff, Otto. 1915/16. Beiträge zur Kenntnis der Sprachen in Deutsch-Ostafrika, 8: Irangi
(Langi). Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 6, p. 102-123.
Dempwolff, Otto. 1916. Die Sandawe: linguistisches und ethnographisches Material aus
Deutsch-Ostafrika. Abhandlungen der hamburgischen Kolonial-Inst., #34; Reihe B:
Völkerkunde, Kulturgeschichte und Sprachen, #19. Hamburg: Friederichsen, De Gruyter &
Co. Pp v, 180.
Reprinted 1971 by Friederichsen in Hamburg.
Dempwolff, Otto. 1916/17. Beiträge zur Kenntnis der Sprachen in Deutsch-Ostafrika, 9: OstbantuWortstämme. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 7, p. 134-149, 167-192.
Contains lexical reconstructions, based on Herero of Namibia plus 27 East African Bantu languages, i.e. Bondei,
Dschaga, Fipa, Ganda, Kamba, Kami, Kerewe, Kinga, Konde (Nyakyusa), Makua, Nika, Njamwesi, Pare, Pogoro,
Pokomo, Ruanda, Rundi, Sango, Schambala, Segedju, Siha, Suaheli, Sukuma, Sutu, Tusi, Yao, Ziba, and Zigula.
Dempwolff, Otto. 1916/17. Beiträge zur Kenntnis der Sprachen in Deutsch-Ostafrika, 10: Wörter
der Sprache von Iraku (Iraqw). Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 7, p. 309-314.
der Tatogasprache. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 7, p. 314-319.
der Hatzasprache. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 7, p. 319-325.
Dempwolff, Otto. 1917. Carl Meinhof: zum 60. Geburtstag. Koloniale Rundschau, v. 9, p. 248251.
Dempwolff, Otto. 1919/20. Ein Sanskritwort im Hottentottischen. Zeitschrift für EingeborenenSprachen, v. 10, p. 61-63.
Denham, Dixon [Maj.]; Clapperton, Hugh [Capt.]; Oudney, Walter [Dr]. 1826. Narrative of
travels and discoveries in northern and central Africa, in the years 1822, 1823 and 1824;
extending across the great desert to the tenth degree of northern latitute, and from Kouka in
Bornou, to Sackatoo, the capital of the Felatah empire. London: John Murray. Pp lxiv, 255,
iv, 104, 112, plates.
The book employs a non-continuous pagination. Starts with an introductory chapter by Denham (p. ix-xxxix) and
an account of the late Dr Oudney’s journey (p. xl-lxiv), followed by Major Denham’s narrative (p. 1-255), Captain
Clapperton’s narrative (p. 1-104), and an appendix with English translations of various letters (p. 1-112). The
appendix part includes at least four vocabularies: “Bornu vocabulary” (app. XVIII, p. 30-36), “Begharmi
vocabulary, taken from the mouth of the late Sultan’s son, now a slave of the Sheikh of Bornou” (app. XVIII, p. 3739), “Mandara vocabulary, taken from the mouth of Achmet Mandara, a slave of the Sheikh of Bornou” (app. XIX,
p. 40), and “Timbuctoo vocabulary” (app. XX, p. 41). Oudney’s account includes notes on the ‘Tuarick’ and their
alphabet. The book was simultaneously published in Boston (by Cummings, Hilliard & Co.) and Philadelphia (by
Carey & Lea).
URL: books.google.com/books?id=PjgkITgIWlQC
travels and discoveries in northern and central Africa, in the years 1822, 1823 and 1824;
extending across the great desert to the tenth degree of northern latitute, and from Kouka in
Bornou, to Sackatoo, the capital of the Felatah empire, 2 vols. Second edition. London: John
Murray.
Reprinted 1966 by the Hakluyt Society as Missions to Niger, II-IV: the Bornu missions, 1822-1825.
URL: books.google.com/books?id=vcENAAAAQAAJ (v.2)
travels and discoveries in northern and central Africa, in the years 1822, 1823 and 1824, 2
vols. Third edition. London: John Murray. Pp xii, 469; 467.
URL: books.google.com/books?id=QwkxpkAc_2sC
URL: books.google.com/books?id=sfITAAAAIAAJ
Denham, Dixon [Maj.]; Clapperton, Hugh [Capt.]; Oudney, Walter [Dr]. 1831. Travels and
discoveries in northern and central Africa, in 1822, 1823 and 1824, by Major Denham,
Captain Clapperton, and Doctor Oudney; with a short account of Clapperton’s and
Lander’s second journey in 1825, 1826, and 1827, 4 vols. London: John Murray.
Denham, Dixon [Maj.]; Clapperton, Hugh [Capt.]; Oudney, Walter [Dr]. (Ed.) 1966. Missions to
Niger, II-IV: the Bornu missions, 1822-1825, 3 vols. Edited by Edward W. Bovill. Works
154
issued by the Hakluyt Society, second series, #128-130. Cambridge: The University Press
for the Hakluyt Society. Pp 798, plates.
Reprint of the second edition, supplemented with plates from the first edition.
Peripherals: A.H.M. Kirk-Greene, Journal of African history, v. 8 (1967) p. 347-349.
Dennett, Richard Edward. 1898. Notes of the folk-lore of the Fjort (French Congo). With an
introduction by Mary H. Kingsley. Publications of the Folk-Lore Society, #41. London: D.
Nutt. Pp xxxii, 169.
The Fjort refers to “the tribes that once formed the great kingdom of Congo” (Newell 1898:302). Reprinted 1967 by
Kraus Reprint in Nedeln, Liechenstein.
URL: www.sacred-texts.com/afr/fjort/index.htm
Peripherals: W.W. N[ewell], Journal of American folklore, v. 11 (1898) p. 302-304.
Dennett, Richard Edward. 1904. Notes on the language of the Efa (people) or the Bini commonly
called Uze Ado. Journal of the African Society, v. 3, 10, p. 142-153.
Includes “ein vergleichendes Wörterverzeichnis Bini-Jekri-Yoruba con ca.280 Wörtern, ca.140 Bini-Sätzen, je ein
Paradigma pos. und neg. von ‘sein’ und ‘haben’, ebenfalls in Bini ohne Yoruba oder Jekri Entsprechung” (Hintze
1959:81).
Dennett, Richard Edward. 1905. The Bavili alphabet restored. Journal of the African Society, v. 5,
17, p. 48-58.
Dennett, Richard Edward. 1909. Yoruba salutations. Journal of the African Society, v. 8, 30, p. 187189.
Dennett, Richard Edward. 1911. Notes on West African categories. London: Macmillan & Co.
URL: www.archive.org/details/notesonwestafric00dennrich
Dennett, Richard Edward. 1914. West African categories and the Yoruba language, 1: vowels.
Journal of the African Society, v. 14, 53, p. 75-80.
Dennett, Richard Edward. 1916. My Yoruba alphabet. London: Macmillan & Co. Pp xi, 45.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 16 (1916/17) p. 86-89; Sidney H. Ray, Man, v. 17 (1917) p.
87-88 (art. 63).
Dennett, Richard Edward. 1917. How the Yoruba count, and the universal order of creation, etc. [pt.
1]. Journal of the African Society, v. 16, 63, p. 242-250.
Dennett, Richard Edward. 1917. How the Yoruba count [pt. 2]. Journal of the African Society, v.
17, 65, p. 60-71.
Dennis, J.T. 1903. The transliteration of Egyptian. Journal of the American Oriental Society, v. 24,
p. 275-281.
Derchi, Felice. 1895. Dizionario e frasario italo-dancalo. Memoria della Società Geografica
Italiana, #5. Società Geografica Italiana.
Dérendinger, R. [Gén.]. 1912. Notes sur le dialecte arabe du Tchad. Revue africaine: journal des
traveaux de la Société Historique Algérienne, v. 56, p. 339-370.
Not sure about the pagination. Could be 341-358.
Derouet, Jean. 1896. Dictionnaire français-fiote: dialecte kivili. Loango: Mission Catholique. Pp
38.
Desmaroux, [?]. 18xx. Grammática inedita do e-chwabo.
Could be early 20th century. Mentioned by Doke (1945:73), who in turn refers to Dupeyron (1909).
Desparmet, J. 1913. Enseignement de l’arabe dialectal d’après la méthode directe: seconde
période et brevet d’arabe - coutumes, institutions, croyances des indigènes de l’Algérie.
Deuxième édition. Alger. Pp viii, 190.
Destaing, Edmond. 1905. L’ennayer chez les beni snous. Revue africaine: journal des traveaux de
la Société Historique Algérienne, 1905, p. 51-70.
Berber texts.
Destaing, Edmond. 1906/07. Quelques particularités sur le dialecte berbère des Beni Snous. In:
Actes du 14ème congrès international des orientalistes, Alger, 1905, pt. 2, p. 93-99. Paris:
Ernest Leroux.
Destaing, Edmond. 1907. Fêtes et coutumes saisonnières chez les beni snous. Revue africaine:
journal des traveaux de la Société Historique Algérienne, v. 51, p. 244-284, 362-385.
155
Destaing, Edmond. 1907/11. Etude sur le dialecte berbère des Beni Snous, 2 vols. Publications de
l’Ecole des Lettres d’Alger; Bulletin de correspondence de africaine, #34-35. Paris: Ernest
Leroux. Pp xxxi, 377; 332.
Destaing, Edmond. 1914. Dictionnaire français-berbère (dialecte des Beni Snous). Publications de
la Fac. des Lettres d’Alger; Bulletin de correspondence de africaine, #49. Paris: Ernest
Leroux. Pp 374.
Destaing, Edmond. 1919. Note sur la conjugaison des verbes de forme C1eC2. Mémoires de la
Société de Linguistique de Paris, v. 21, p. 139-148.
Deals with Berber. The numbers in the title should be superscript.
Dévaud, Eugène. 1909. Permutation de r avec 3. Sphinx: revue critique embrassant le domaine
entier de l’égyptologie (Uppsala), v. 12, p. 123-124.
Dévaud, Eugène. 1909. Sur la substitution d’un y secondaire à un ‘ primaire. Sphinx: revue
critique embrassant le domaine entier de l’égyptologie (Uppsala), v. 12, p. 107-110.
The ‹y› and the ‹‘› should be written with hieroglyphs, viz. M17 and D36, respectively, according to Gardiner’s
(1957) index.
Devic, L. Marcel. 1883. Le pays des zendjs ou la côte orientale d’Afrique au moyen-age
(géographie, moeurs, productions, animaux légendaires), d’après les écrivains arabes.
Paris: Hachette. Pp 280.
Reprinted several times, e.g. 1975 by Oriental Press in Amsterdam (ISBN-10 90-6023-234-8).
Dewar, Emmeline H. 1900. Chinamwanga stories. Livingstonia: Mission Press. Pp 141.
Dijksterhuis, J. 1916. De nieuwe hollandse spraakkunst. Cape Town: Maskew Miller. Pp 164.
Dutch grammar for South African schools.
Dillmann, Christian Friedrich August. 1857. Grammatik der äthiopischen Sprache. Leipzig: B.
Tauchnitz. Pp xxiv, 435.
Dillmann, Christian Friedrich August. 1865. Lexicon linguae aethiopicae, cum indice latino.
Adiectum est vocabularium Tigre dialecti septentrionalis compilatum a W. Munzinger.
Leipzig: T.O. Weigel. Pp xxxii, 1522 (columns); vi, 64 (columns).
Reprinted 1955 by Frederick Ungar Publishing in New York; and 1970 in Osnabrück (by whom?).
Peripherals: Sylvain Grébaut, Supplément au lexicon linguae aethiopicae (Paris, 1952); Alilu Amsalu,
Etymologischer Beitrag zu A. Dillman’s Lexicon linguae aethiopicae (thesis, Eberhard-Karls-Universität Tübingen,
1962).
Dillmann, Christian Friedrich August. 1866. Chrestomathia aethiopica. Leipzig. Pp xvi, 190.
Another edition appeared in 1941. One of them was reprinted 1950 in Berlin; and 1966 in Darmstadt (Germany).
Dillmann, Christian Friedrich August. 1878. Verzeichnis der abessinischer Handschriften. Berlin:
Königlichen Bibliothek zu Berlin. Pp viii, 85.
Dillmann, Christian Friedrich August. (Ed.) 1881. Verhandlungen des 5. internationalen
Orientalisten-Congresses gehalten zu Berlin [...] 1881. Teil 1: Bericht über die
Verhandlungen. Berlin.
Dillmann, Christian Friedrich August. (Ed.) 1882. Verhandlungen des 5. internationalen
Orientalisten-Congresses gehalten zu Berlin [...] 1881. Teil 2: Abhandlungen und
Vorträge. Berlin.
Dillmann, Christian Friedrich August. 1899. Grammatik der äthiopischen Sprache. Zweite
Auflage, verbessert und vermehrt von Carl Bezold. Leipzig: B. Tauchnitz. Pp xiv, 488.
Reprinted 1959 by Akademische Druck- und Verlagsanstalt in Graz.
Dillmann, Christian Friedrich August. 1907. Ethiopic grammar. Translated by James A. Chrichton
from the second German edition enlarged and improved by Carl Bezold. London: Williams
& Norgate. Pp xxx, 581.
Reprinted 1974 by Philo Press in Amsterdam & London.
Dinckelacker, Ernst. 1902. Über Ortsnamen in Kamerun. Mittheilungen von Forschungsreisenden
und Gelehrten aus den deutschen Schutzgebieten: mit Benutzung amtlicher Quellen, v. 15, p.
173-180.
Dinckelacker, Ernst. 1914. Wörterbuch der Duala-Sprache. Abhandlungen der hamburgischen
Kolonial-Inst., #16. Hamburg: Friederichsen, De Gruyter & Co. Pp vi, 215.
156
Dinter, Kurt. 1912. Die vegetabilische Veldkonst Deutsch-Südwest-Afrika. Bautzen & Okahandja:
Rühl. Pp 47.
Dirr, Adolf. 1895. Manuel pratique de la langue haoussa, langue commerciale du Soudan,
chrestomathie et vocabulaire. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp 140.
Döhne, Jacob Ludwig [Rev.]. 1857. Zulu-Kafir dictionary, etymologically explained, with copious
illustrations and examples, preceded by an introduction on the Zulu-Kafir language. Cape
Town: G.J. Pike’s Machine Printing Office. Pp xlii, 417.
Contains some notes about clicks “and some etymological questions in ‘Hottentot-Kafir’ relations” (Strohmeyer &
Moritz 1975:126). Reprinted a few times by Gregg Press (ISBN-10 0-576-11610-6).
URL: books.google.com/books?id=nsIFAAAAQAAJ
Doke, Clement Martyn. 1917. Lamba sketches, 1: Lwambula and Walichupa. Lambaland, v. 4, p.
(?).
Doke, Clement Martyn. 1918. Lamba sketches, 2: Kasakambando. Lambaland, v. 6, p. (?).
Domet, S. 1898. Die Suaheli-Sprache. Jerusalem.
Dornan, Samuel Shaw. 1908. The Masarwas and their language. Report of the South African
Association of the Advancement of Science (South African journal of science), v. 8, p. 218225.
Not sure of the details.
Dornan, Samuel Shaw. 1917. The Tati Bushmen (Masarwas) and their language. Journal of the
Royal Anthropological Inst. of Great Britain and Ireland, v. 47, p. 37-112.
Contains comparisons between Tati Bushman and Nama, !Ora and several Bushman languages.
Dorsch, H. 1910/11. Grammatik der Nkosi-Sprache mit einer des Nkosi mit Duala vergleichenden
Einteitung. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 1, p. 241-283.
Dorsch, H. 1911/12. Vocabularium der Nkosi-Sprache [pt. 1-2]. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen,
v. 2, p. 161-193, 324-330.
Dorsch, H. 1912/13. Vocabularium der Nkosi-Sprache [pt. 3]. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v.
3, p. 34-62.
Dorsey, J. Owen. 1889. Bassa linguistic notes. American anthropologist, new series, v. 2, p. 78-80.
Includes a brief vocabulary.
Douglas, Robert K. (Ed.) 1876. Transactions of the second session of the international congress
of Orientalists, held in London [...] 1874. London: Trübner & Co. Pp viii, 456.
Doutté, Edmond; Gautier, Emile Felix. 1913. Enquête sur la dispersion de la langue berbère en
Algerie. Alger. Pp 163.
Douville, Jean-Baptiste. 18xx. ... [Title wanting].
Latham (1847:171) refers to a vocabulary of Inongo (Yoruba), “[c]ollected at Brazil by M. Douville from an Inongo
slave”. Not sure if it appears in any publication.
Douville, Jean-Baptiste. 1832. Voyage au Congo et dans l’intérieur de l’Afrique équinoxiale: fait
dans les années 1828, 1829 et 1830, 3 vols. Avec une atlas. Paris: J. Renouard.
Contains a “Français-Mogialoua-Abunda-Congo” vocabulary. ‘Mogialoua’ refers to Ndongo, a dialect of Kimbundu
(Doke 1959:6). ‘Abunda’ seemingly refers to Mbunda K15 while ‘Congo’ is Kikongo H16. “Although his records of
Bantu languages are very jumbled and full of inaccuracies, still they are not as apocryphal as they were afterwards
esteemed. Douville not only mentions some of the principal language groups in Añgõla and the western Congo, but
realizes through Portuguese information the importance of the Luba family beyond” (Johnston 1919:4). According
to Latham (1847:190f), “Douville’s voyage to Congo is a literary imposture, being concocted at Brazil.
Nevertheless, his three vocabularies represent Congo languages ... Three other vocabularies, however, following
the Congo ones, and named ho, Bomba and Salo, are, I think, like the rest of the work - fictions. They are more like
French or Latin than any language in Africa. Possibly they were, in some cases, excogitated by disguising French
and Latin roots.” Douville’s vocabularies are reproduced in full by Latham (1847:191.) There’s a recent
publication/reprint titled Viajes a Buenos Aires, 1826 y 1831, published 1984 by Emecé Editores at Bueno Aires
(ISBN-10 950-04-0391-9), which may or may not include the contents of Douville’s Voyage au Congo.
URL: books.google.se/books?id=uFYMAAAAYAAJ
Peripherals: William D. Cooley, The foreign quarterly review, v. ? (1832) p.(?); Anne Stamm, “Jean-Baptiste
Douville: voyage au Congo, 1827-1830”, Cahiers d’études africaines, v. 37 (1970) p. 5-39.
157
Dove, Karl. 1899. Geographische Bezeichnungen in der Namasprache. Mitteilungen des Seminars
Unsure about the pagination.
Drexel, Albert. 1917/18. Beiträge zur Grammatik des Bantu-Typus. Anthropos: internationale
Zeitschrift für Völker- und Sprachenkunde, v. 12/13, p. 89-133, 910-957.
Dreyfuss, G. 1900. Six mois dans l’Attié (Mbodin). Paris.
Contains a vocabulary (Hintze 1959:28).
Driberg, Jack H. 190x. Unpublished collection of Lugisu words.
Referred to without title by Johnston (1919:787).
Drival, E. van. 1879. Grammaire comparée des langues sémitiques et de l’égyptien. Paris: Adrien
Maisonneuve. Pp 206.
Dubois, Félix. 1898. Vocabulaire gourma. Bulletin du Comité de l’Afrique Française, v. 7, 7, p.
248-249.
Dubois, Félix. 1898. Vocabulaire mossi. Bulletin du Comité de l’Afrique Française, v. 8, 6, p. 177178.
Peripherals: Anon, “Vocabulaire mossi”, Bulletin du Comité de l’Afrique Française, v. 9 (1899), p. 133.
Dubois, Félix. 1898. Vocabulaire songhoï. Bulletin du Comité de l’Afrique Française, v. 8, p. (?).
Dubois, H. [R.P.]. 1917. Essai de dictionnaire betsileo, première partie: A-L. Tananarive.
Dubois, H. [R.P.]. 1917? Essai de dictionnaire betsileo, deuxième partie: M-Z. Tananarive.
Dufays, Félix [Père]. 1909. Lied und Gesang bei Brautwerbung und Hochzeit in Mulera-Ruanda.
Anthropos: internationale Zeitschrift für Völker- und Sprachenkunde, v. 4, p. 847-878.
Contains much lexical material, song texts, and music.
Dufays, Félix [Père]. 1912. Wörterbuch Deutsch-Kinjaruanda. Trier (Deutschland): MosellaVerlag.
Duisburg, A. von. 1913. Grundriss der Kanuri-Sprache in Bornu. Archiv für das Studium der
deutscher Kolonialsprachen, #15. Berlin: Georg Reimer. Pp 185.
Later translated and revised by P.A. Benton (1917).
Duisburg, A. von. 1914. Über Reste der Sso-Sprache. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische
A Biu-Mandara language?
Duisburg, A. von. 1917. Primer of Kanuri grammar. Translated and revised from German by
Philip Askell Benton. London: Oxford University Press.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 17 (1917/18) p. 172-173; Sidney H. Ray, Man, v. 18 (1918)
p. 80 (art. 47).
Dunning, A.R. 1901. A vocabulary of Hindi, Tamil and Telugu (in Roman charcaters). Durban.
“A phrasebook aimed at managers and overseers” (Mesthrie 1992:308).
Dupeyron, Pedro. 1909. Pequeno vademecum da lingua bantu na provincia de Moçambique ou
breve estudo da lingua chi-yao ou adjaua comp. com os dialectos de sena, tete e quelimane
[...]. Lisboa: Administração do Novo Mensageiro do Coração de Jesus. Pp 172.
This “contains a great amount of comparative material concerning Sena, Nyungwe and Chwabo, as well as the
analysis and vocabulary of Yao” (Doke 1945:72).
Dupont, M. 1912. Vocabulaire français-amadi et amadi-français. Bruxelles: Imprimerie Veuve
Monnom. Pp 29.
Later reprinted by Musée Royal de l’Afrique Centrale in Tervuren.
Duport, J.H. 1892. Outline grammar of the Susu language. London.
This is either a reprint or revision of an earlier publication titled Outlines of a grammar of the Susu language, publ.
1865 and credited to R.R. and which was “compiled with the assistance of the Rev. J.H. Duport”.
Dupuis-Yakouba, A. [R.P.]. 1911. Les gow, ou chaussers du Niger: légendes songaï de la région
Tombouctou. Avec une préface de Maurice Delafosse. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp x, 306.
Dupuis-Yakouba, A. [R.P.]. 1917. Essai de méthode pratique pour l’étude de la langue songoi ou
songaï. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp 210.
158
Durand, A. 1895. Le pronom en égyptien et dans les langues sémitiques. Journal asiatique, 9ème
série, v. 5 [146], p. 412-463.
Dutra, [?]. 18xx. Ki-Mbundu vocabulary.
Dutra’s vocabulary “was published without author’s name, as an appendix to Capello and Iven’s book De Benguella
ás terras de Iácca, Lisboa, 1881. In 1887 it was republished, and again without author’s name, by the then Bishop of
Angola and Congo, Don Antonio Leitão e Castro” (Doke 1945:23).
Dutrieux, P. 1880. Vocabulaire français-kisouahili. Bruxelles. Pp 112.
Dutrieux, P. 1880. Dictionnaire français-kisouahili. Association Internationale Africaine.
Eaton, M. 1900. A dictionary of the Mende language. Freetown: Albert Academy Press. Pp 122.
Eboué, Felix. 1918. Langues sango, banda, baya, mandjia. Paris: Emile Larose. Pp 112.
Eddie, Jos.B. 1887. Vocabulary of Kilolo, as spoken by the Bankundu at Ikengo (Equator). Pp v,
203.
Details wanting. The Bankundu are “a section of the Balolo tribe at Ikengo (Equator), Upper Congo” (Doke
1945:25).
Eddie, Jos.B. 1891. English-Kilolo vocabulary. East London Mission.
Reprint? Extract? Details wanting.
Edgar, Francis. 1909. A grammar of the Gbari language, with Gbari-English and English-Gbari
dictionaries. Belfast: W. & G. Baird. Pp 373.
Edgar, F. [Maj.]. 1911. Litafi na tatsuniyoyi na Hausa, 2 vols. Belfast: W. Erskine Mayne.
Peripherals: A.J.N. T[remearne], Man, v. 12 (1912) p. 149 (art. 79).
Edgar, F. [Maj.]. 1913. Litafi na tatsuniyoyi na Hausa, v. 3.
Details wanting.
Peripherals: A.J.N. T[remearne], Man, v. 15 (1915) p. 30-31 (art. 15).
Eggert, J.F.J. 1856. Vocabular der Namasprache. Manuskript. Inst. für Afrikanistik, Universität zu
Köln. Pp 290.
An unfinished Nama-Dutch/Dutch-Nama dictionary.
Eichtal, Gustave d’. 1841. Histoire et origine des foulahs ou fellans. Mémoires de la Société
Ethnologique, v. 1, p. (?).
Contains some sort of linguistic material. “M. Gustave d’Eichtal, in a paper presented to the Geographical society
of Paris, has investigated the origin of the fúlahs or Fellátahs, a swarthy race, inhabiting Nigritia. He considers it
certain that they are not aborigines, but colonists; their language, he maintains, belongs to the Malay family, and
is closely allied to the Javanese” (Greenough 1841:lii). Meyer (1897:4) refers to “Eichwaldt, Über die Fulbe.
(Journ. Soc. Ethnologique 1841)” which probably refers to this same article. Don’t know which details are correct,
though (i.e. Mémoire vs Journal).
Eidenschenk, [?]; Cohen-Solal, [?]. 1897. Mots usuels de la langue arabe accompagnés
d’exercises. Alger. Pp vi, 296.
Listed in the Smitskamp Oriental Antiquarium Catalogue #633, entry 304.
Elba, A.A.; Cole, E.T. 1892. Reading book (A-kafa ka Temne). London: Society for Promoting
Christian Knowledge (SPCK).
Eldred, [?]. 1914. Lonkundo-français. Pp 35.
Details wanting.
Elias, Elias Antoon. 1913. Modern dictionary: English-Arabic.
Details wanting. Unsure about the title.
Elliott, William Allan. 1897. Dictionary of the Tebele and Shuna languages, with illustrative
sentences and some grammatical notes. Frome UK & London: Butler & Tanner. Pp xxxvii,
3, 441.
The author “had lived among the Ndebele for fourteen years as a member of the London Missionary Society before
producing it, and it is a much more ambitious project than either of its predecessors and some of it successors”
(Fortune 1979:42f). The first part contains some 6,000 English entries with ‘Tebele’ and ‘Shuna’ translations.
Then follows ‘Tebele-English’ and ‘Shuna-English’ parts. The vocabularies are “preceded by a grammatical outline
... and followed by a series of phrases divided into sections dealing with Travel, Cattle, Work, Buying, and the like”
(Fortune 1979:43). “A reprint published 1897 omitted the last section, though leaving it referred to in the contents,
and ended at page 398” (Doke 1945:82). The second edition of 1912 was retitled Notes for a Sindebele dictionary
and grammar.
URL: www.archive.org/details/dictionaryoftebe00elliuoft
159
Elliott, William Allan [Rev.]. 1822. Grammar and vocabulary of the Hinzuan language.
Manuscript. Cape Town: Grey Collection, South African Public Library.
Includes c.900 words in the English-Nzuani vocabulary. The manuscript in its entirety, together with notes
concerning Elliott, his life and experiences, were later published by Heepe (1926).
Peripherals: Martin Heepe, “Darstellung einer Bantusprache aus den Jahren 1821-1822 von Elliott, nach einer
Handschrift der Grey Library in Kapstadt”, Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 29 (1926) p.
191-232; C.M. Doke, “Bantu language pioneers of the nineteenth century”, African studies, v. 14 (1940) p. 207246; C.M. Doke, “Bantu language pioneers of the nineteenth century” (revised), African studies, v. 18 (1959) p. 127.
Elliott, William Allan [Rev.]. 1912. Notes for a siNdebele dictionary and grammar, with
illustrative sentences. Second edition. Bristol: Sindebele Publ. Pp vii, 589.
The first edition from 1897 was titled Dictionary of the Tebele and Shuna languages. Reprinted 1934.
Elliott, William [Rev.]. 1845. Origin of the Hottentot language. Eastern Province herald (Port
Elizabeth), 7 May 1845, p. (?).
Peripherals: S.A. Rochlin, “Some South African language pioneers of the nineteenth century”, African studies, v.
14 (1955) p. 171-173.
Ellis, Alfred Burton. 1887. The Tshi-speaking peoples of the Gold Coast of West Africa; their
religion, manners, customs, laws, language, etc. London: Chapman & Hall. Pp vii, 343,
map.
The chapter on language is “linguistisch unbedeutend” (Hintze 1959:38).
Ellis, Alfred Burton. 1890. The Ewe-speaking peoples of the Slave Coast, their religion, manners,
customs, laws, languages, &c. London: Chapman & Hall. Pp vii, 331.
Reprinted 1966 by Anthropological Publications in Oosterhuyt (Netherlands).
Ellis, Alfred Burton. 1894. The Yoruba-speaking peoples of the slave coast of West Africa; their
religion, manners, customs, laws, language, etc.; with an appendix containing a
comparison of the Tshi, Gã, Ewe and Yoruba languages. London: Chapman & Hall. Pp vii,
402, map.
Reprinted 1964 by Benin Press in Chicago.
URL: www.sacred-texts.com/afr/yor/index.htm
Ellis, George Washington. 1914. Negro culture in West Africa: a social study of the Negro group
of Vai-speaking people, with its own invented alphabet and written language shown in two
charts and six engravings of Vai script, twenty-six illustrations of their arts and life, fifty
folklore stories, one hundred and fourteen proverbs and one map. New York: Neale Publ.
Pp 290.
Reprinted 1970 by Johnson Reprint Corp. in New York.
Elmslie, Walter Angus. 1891. The orthography of African names and the principles of
nomenclature. Scottish geographical magazine, v. 7, p. 370-376.
Elmslie, Walter Angus. 1891. Notes on the Tumbuka language as spoken in Mombera’s country.
Aberdeen: G. & W. Fraser. Pp vii, 32.
Elmslie, Walter Angus. 1891. Table of concords and paradigm of verbs of the Tumbuka
language, as spoken in Mombera’s country. Aberdeen: G. & W. Fraser.
Comprises one or two fold-out tables. Was this really issues separately from the grammar?
Elmslie, Walter Angus. 1891. Table of concords and paradigm of verbs of the Ngoni language.
Aberdeen: G. & W. Fraser.
Comprises 2 fold-out tables. Was this really issues separately from the grammar?
Elmslie, Walter Angus. 1891. Introductory grammar of the Ngoni (Zulu) language, as spoken in
Mobera’s country. Aberdeen: G. & W. Fraser. Pp 3, 58.
Elmslie, Walter Angus. 1913. Introductory grammar of the Ngoni (Zulu) language, as spoken in
Mobera’s country. New edition. Livingstonia: Mission Press. Pp 152.
Ember, Aaron. 1892. Das Verhältnis des Ägyptischen zu den semitischen Sprachen. Zeitschrift der
deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 46, p. 93-129.
Ember, Aaron. 1911. Kindred Semito-Egyptian words [pt. 1]. Zeitschrift für ägyptische Sprache, v.
49, p. 93-94.
160
Ember, Aaron. 1911. Semito-Egyptian sound changes. Zeitschrift für ägyptische Sprache, v. 49, p.
87-92.
Ember, Aaron. 1912. Notes on the relation of Egyptian and Semitic. Zeitschrift für ägyptische
Sprache, v. 50, p. 86-90.
Ember, Aaron. 1914. Kindred Semito-Egyptian words [pt. 2]. Zeitschrift für ägyptische Sprache, v.
51, p. 110-121.
Ember, Aaron. 1914. Mehri parallels to Egyptian stems with prefixed h. Zeitschrift für ägyptische
Sprache, v. 51, p. 138-139.
The ‹h› in the title should have a dot beneath it.
Ember, Aaron. 1914. Several Egypto-Semito-Egyptian particles. Zeitschrift für Assyriologie und
verwandte Gebiete, v. 28, p. 302-306.
Ember, Aaron. 1916. The etymological equivalent in Egyptian of the common Semitic word for
‘life’. Orientalistische Literatur-Zeitung, v. 19, p. 72-74.
Ember, Aaron. 1917. Kindred Semito-Egyptian words [pt. 3]. Zeitschrift für ägyptische Sprache
und Altertumskunde, v. 53, p. 83-90.
Endemann, Ch. 1916. Der Tonfall in den südostafrikanischen Bantusprachen. Vox: internationales
Zentralblatt für experimentelle Phonetik, v. 26, 4/5, p. 161-175.
Endemann, Karl. 1872. Mittheilungen über die Sotho-Neger. Zeitschrift für Ethnologie, v. 6, 1, p.
16-66.
Endemann, Karl. 1876. Versuch einer Grammatik des Sotho. Berlin: Wilhelm Hertz. Pp xi, 201.
A Sepedi grammar with references to both Kgatla S31b and Sesotho S33. “Phonetically ... very reliable, but not
tonetically, the author frankly admitting the tentativeness of this part of his researches” (Tucker 1964:596).
Reprinted at least once by Gregg International (ISBN-10 0-576-11454-5).
Peripherals: A.N. Tucker, “Systems of tone-marking African languages”, Bulletin of the School of Oriental and
African Studies, v. 27 (1964) p. 594-611; I.M. Kosch, A historical perspective on Northern Sotho linguistics
(Pretoria, 1993).
Endemann, Karl. 1887/88. Texte von Gesängen der Sotho. Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v.
1, p. 64-71.
Endemann, Karl. 1900. Zur Erklärung einer eigenthümlichen Verbalform im Konde. Mitteilungen
Endemann, Karl. 1901. Beitrag zu dem Capitel von dem Tönen in den sogenannten BantuSprachen. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 4, III, p. 37-41.
Endemann, Karl. 1910/11. Über die Wiedergabe von Fremdwörtern und -Namen in
Bantusprachen. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 1, p. 284-289.
Endemann, Karl. 1911. Wörterbuch der Sotho-Sprache (Süd-Afrika). Abhandlungen der
hamburgischen Kolonial-Inst., #7. Hamburg: Friederichsen, De Gruyter & Co. Pp viii, 727.
“Here ... the author uses a phonetic spelling of his own with the basic intonation of most of the words given,
though this is not always reliable. Besides Northern Sotho, much is drawn from Tswana and Southern Sotho” (Doke
1945:87).
Kolonialsprachen, v. 2 (1911/12) p. 155-156; A.N. Tucker, “Systems of tone-marking African languages”,
Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, v. 27 (1964) p. 594-611.
Endemann, Karl. 1913. Erste Übungen im Nyakyusa. Jahrbuch der Hamburger
wissenschaftlichen Anstalten, v. 31, Beiheft 10, p. 1-92. (Supplement 10 to Mitteilungen des
Seminars für orientalische Sprachen.)
Endemann, Karl. 1914/15. Anmerkungen zu der Abhandlung “Adverb und adverbiale
Umschreibung im Kafir” von W. Bourquin. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 5, p. 151155.
Eneberg, C.Fr. 1872/74. De pronominibus arabicis: dissertatio etymologica, 2 vols.
Helsingforsiae: Typis Frenckellianis.
Peripherals: Friedrich Philippi, Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 28 (1874) p. 379-389.
Engels, St. 1911. La langue des batshua (batwa). La revue congolaise, v. 2, p. 215.
Not sure who Batshwa refers to here.
Peripherals: Anon, Anthropos, v. 7 (1912) p. 512.
161
Englund, P. 1873. Ett litet prof på kunama språket = A small sample of the Kunama language.
Stockholm.
Erhardt, James J. [Rev.]. 1850. Unpublished Swahili vocabulary compiled at Rabai, Kenya.
Manuscript, ref. MS8. Church Missionary Society (CMS) Archives.
Mentioned by Benson (1964:68).
Erhardt, James J. [Rev.]; Krapf, Johann Ludwig [Rev.]. 1857. Vocabulary of the Enguduk Iloigob,
as spoken by the Masai-tribes in East-Africa. Ludwigsburg (Germany): F. Riehm. Pp 110.
Ermann, Adolf. 1876. Über den Werth der in den altägyptischen Texten vorkommenden
semitischen Fremdwörter. Zeitschrift für ägyptische Sprache, v. 14, p. 38-42.
Ermann, Adolf. 1878. Die Pluralbildung des Aegyptischen: ein grammatischer Versuch. Leipzig:
E. Engelmann. Pp vi, 47.
Ermann, Adolf. 1880. Neuägyptische Grammatik. Leipzig: Wilhelm Englemann. Pp x, 276.
Pages 274-276 erroneously paginated as 374-376.
Ermann, Adolf. 1883. Die tonlosen Formen der ägyptischen Sprache. Zeitschrift für ägyptische
Sprache, v. 21, p. 37-40.
Ermann, Adolf. 1883. Ägyptische Lehnworte im Griechischen. Beiträge zur Kunde der
indogermanischen Spachen, v. 7, p. 386-338.
Ermann, Adolf. 1889. Eine neue Art der ägyptischen Conjugation. Zeitschrift für ägyptische
Sprache, v. 27, p. 65-84.
Ermann, Adolf. 1889. Die Sprache der Papyrus Westcar. Göttingen.
Ermann, Adolf. 1892. Das Verhältnis des Aegyptischen zu den semitischen Sprachen. Zeitschrift
Ermann, Adolf. 1894. Ägyptische Grammatik. Berlin. Pp 200.
Ermann, Adolf. 1894. Egyptian grammar, with table of signs, bibliography, exercises for reading
and glossary. Translated from German by James Henry Breasted. London: Williams &
Norgate. Pp xiv, 200, 70.
Ermann, Adolf. 1896. Die Umschreibung des Ägyptischen. Zeitschrift für ägyptische Sprache, v.
34, p. 51-62.
Ermann, Adolf. 1900. Wechsel von f und w. Zeitschrift für ägyptische Sprache, v. 38, p. 152ff.
Ermann, Adolf. 1900? Die Flexion des aegyptischen Verbums. Sitzungsberichte der königlichen
preussischen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin, v. 19, p. 317ff.
Date uncertain.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland: anthropological reviews
and miscellanea, v. 30 (1900) p. 13-14.
Ermann, Adolf. 1902. Ägyptische Grammatik. Zweite Auflage.
Details wanting.
Ermann, Adolf. 1904. Aegyptisches Glossar die häufigeren Worte der aegyptischen Sprache.
Porta linguarum orientalium: Sammlung von Lehrbüchern für das Studium der orientalischen
Sprachen, #20. Berlin: Reuther & Reichard. Pp vii, 160.
Ermann, Adolf. 1904. Aegyptische Chrestomathie, zum Gebrauch auf Universitäten und zum
Selbstunterricht. Porta linguarum orientalium: Sammlung von Lehrbüchern für das Studium
der orientalischen Sprachen, #19. Berlin: Reuther & Reichard. Pp xxii, 156, 78.
Ermann, Adolf. 1909/10. Assimilation des ‘ajin an andere schwache Konsonanten. Zeitschrift für
Ermann, Adolf. 1911. Ägyptische Grammatik. Dritte Auflage. New York: G. Westermann.
Ermann, Adolf. 1912. Die ägyptischen Ausdrücke für ‘noch nicht’. Zeitschrift für ägyptische
Sprache, v. 50, p. 104-109.
Ermann, Adolf. 1915. Die Bedeutung der Adjektives auf j. Zeitschrift für ägyptische Sprache und
Altertumskunde, v. 52, p. 107-108.
Ermann, Adolf. 1919. Kurzer Abriss der ägyptischen Grammatik, zum Gebrauche in Vorlesungen
mit Schrifttafel. Mit Lesestücken und Wörterverzeichnis. Berlin: Reuther & Reichard. Pp 64.
162
Not sure this is the first printing. Reprinted several times by Akademische Druck- und Verlagsanstalt in Graz. Also
reprinted 1958 by the Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft in Darmstadt.
Peripherals: Gaston Maspero, “Nots sur la grammaire égyptienne de M.A. Erman”, Recueil de travaux relatifs à la
philologie et à l’archéologie égyptiennes et assyriennes, v. 40 (1923) p.(?).
Ernst, Harder von. 1903. Deutsch-arabisches Handwörterbuch. Heidelberg: Verlag von Carl
Winter.
Eudel, Paul. 1906. Dictionnaire des bijoux de l’Afrique du Nord: Maroc, Algérie, Tunisie,
Tripolitaine. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp 242.
Evangelium, J. 1888. Suaheli mit arabischen Schriftzeichen. London: British and Foreign Bible
Society (BFBS).
Not too sure about the accuracy of this reference.
Ewald, Heinrich von. 1844. Über die Saho-Sprache in Äthiopien. Zeitschrift für die Kunde des
Morgenlandes, v. 5, p. 410-424.
Ewald, Heinrich von. 1847. Ueber die Völker und Sprachen südlich von Aethiopien. Zeitschrift der
deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 1, 1, p. 44-56.
Mostly a study of Swahili, with some comparative data on Wanika E72, Wakamba E55, Ukuafi (Maa) and Msegua
G31.
Ewald, Heinrich von. 1850. Aus einem Briefe des Missionar S.W. Kölle. Zeitschrift der deutschen
morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 4, 4, p. 509-512.
Contains a number of carefully tone-marked lexical items from Kanuri.
Ewald, Heinrich von. 1861. Abhandlung über den Bau det Thatwörter im Koptischen.
Abhandlungen der königlichen Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften zu Göttingen, v. 9, p. 154219.
Ewald, Heinrich von. 1861. Abhandlung über den Zusammenhang des nordischen (türkischen)
mittelländischen, semitischen und koptischen Sprachstammes. Abhandlungen der
königlichen Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften zu Göttingen, #10. Göttingen. Pp 80.
Ewen, P.Fr.J. 1906. Grammatikalische Elemente von Südwest-Togo. Manuskript. Lomé. Pp 52.
Deals with Ewe. Source?
Eyles, Fred. 1900. Zulu self taught, with key. Johannesburg: South Africa General Mission. Pp
147.
Faidherbe, Louis L.C. [Le Général]. 1860. Vocabulaire d’environ 1500 mots français avec leurs
correspondants en ouolof de Saint-Louis, en popular de Fouta et en soninké (sakhollé) de
Bakel. Saint-Louis (Afrique Occidental Français).
Faidherbe, Louis L.C. [Le Général]. 1865. Etude sur la langue kéguem ou sérère-sine. In:
Annuaire du sénégal et dépendances pour l’année 1865, p. 173-242. St. Louis (Senegal).
Reprinted 1963 in Wolof et Sérèr (ed. by Gabriel Manessy & Serge Sauvageot; Université de Dakar), p. 167-224.
Faidherbe, Louis L.C. [Le Général]. 1870. Collection complete des inscription numidiques
(libyques), avec des aperçu ethnographiques sur les numides. Paris: Franckh; Friedrich
Vieweg & Sohn. Pp 79.
Peripherals: Auguste C. Judas, Examen des mémoires de M. le dr Reboud et de M. le général Faidherbe sur les
inscriptions libyques (Paris, 1871).
Faidherbe, Louis L.C. [Le Général]. 1875. Essai sur la langue poul: grammaire et vocabulaire, et
comparaison de cette langue avec le wolof, les idiomes sérères et les autres langues du
Soudan. Paris: Adrien Maisonneuve. Pp 132.
Off-print?
Faidherbe, Louis L.C. [Le Général]. 1875. Essai sur la langue poul et comparaison de cette langue
avec le wolof, les idiomes sérères et les autres langues du Soudan occidental. Revue de
linguistique et de philologie comparée, v. 7, p. 195-242, 291-321.
Faidherbe, Louis L.C. [Le Général]. 1877. Le zenaga des tribus sénégalaises: contribution à
l’étude de la langue berbère. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp 97.
Faidherbe, Louis L.C. [Le Général]. 1881. Dictionnaire de la langue poul. Bulletin de la Société de
Géographie (Paris), 7ème série, v. (?), p. 334-354.
163
Faidherbe, Louis L.C. [Le Général]. 1882. Grammaire et vocabulaire de la langue poul, a l’usage
des voyagers dans le Soudan, avec une carte indiquant les contrées où se parle cette langue.
Deuxième édition. Paris: Adrien Maisonneuve. Pp 165.
Faidherbe, Louis L.C. [Le Général]. 1887. Langues sénégalaises: wolof, arabe-hassania, soninke,
sérère; notions grammaticales, vocabulaires et phrases. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp 268.
Faïtlovitch, Jacques. 1907. Proverbes abyssins traduits, expliqués et annotés. Paris: Librairie
Orientaliste Paul Geuthner. Pp 86.
On Amharic. Publication of the author’s dissertation, University of Lausanne, 1907.
Falls, J.C. Ewald. 1908. Beduinen-Lieder der libyschen Wüste. Cairo. Pp 240.
Farias, P.F. de Moraes. 2003. Arabic medieval inscriptions from the Republic of Mali: epigraphy,
chronicles, and Songhay-Tuareg history. Fontes historiae africanae, new series, #4. London:
Oxford University Press for the British Academy. Pp ccxlvi, 280, 69.
Farina, Giulio. 1910. Grammatica della lingua egiziana antica in caratteri geroglifici. Milano:
Ulrico Hoepli. Pp viii, 185.
Farina, Giulio. 1926. Grammatica della lingua egiziana antica in caratteri geroglifici. Seconda
edizione, rinnovata. Milano: Ulrico Hoepli. Pp ix, 213.
Farinha, António Lourenço. 1917. Elementos de gramática landina (shironga), dialecto indígena
de Lourenço Marques. Lourenço Marques: Imprensa Nacional. Pp 196.
Farler, [Archd.]. 1885. Supplement: a brief vocabulary of the Kibwayo dialect. In: A pocket
vocabulary of the ki-Swahili, ki-Nyika, ki-Taita and ki-Kamba languages, p. (?). Ed. by
Archibald Downes Shaw. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK).
Fassmann, Richard. 1909. Die Gottesverehnung bei den Bantu-Negern. Anthropos: internationale
Zeitschrift für Völker- und Sprachenkunde, v. 4, p. 574-581.
A Chaga story translated into German; no original.
Faure, Pierre. 1895. Dictionnaire minier sud africain anglais, français, allemand. Paris. Pp 341.
Felkin, Robert William. 1883/84. Notes on the Madi or Moru tribe of Central Africa. Proceedings
of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, v. 12, p. 303-353.
Includes a “Short vocabulary of Madi words” (p. 352).
Fell, J.R. 1911. First Tonga primer: ka buku ka ku bala. Choma (Northern Rhodesia): The Book
Room of Kafue, Baila-Batonga Mission.
Fell, J.R. 1918. A Tonga grammar. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge
(SPCK).
URL: www.archive.org/details/tongagrammar00felluoft
Peripherals: S.H. Ray, Man, v. 19 (1919) p. 48 (art. 24).
Fell, J.R. 1918. Folk tales of the Batonga, and other sayings. London: Holborn Publ. House. Pp
247.
Peripherals: E.W. S[mith], Journal of the African Society, v. 22 (1922/23) p. 342; Alice Werner, Bulletin of the
School of Oriental Studies, v. 3 (1924) p. 394-395.
Ferrand, Gabriel M. 1886. Notes de grammaire çomalie. Alger: Imprimerie de l’Association
Ouvrière. Pp 28.
Ferrand, Gabriel M. 1903. L’élément arabe et souahili en malgache ancien et moderne. Journal
asiatique, 10ème série, v. 2 [163], p. 451-485.
Ferrand, Gabriel M. 1903. Essai de grammaire malgache. Paris.
Ferrand, Gabriel M. 1905. Trois étymologies arabico-malgaches. Mémoires de la Société de
Linguistique de Paris, #13. Paris: Société de Linguistique de Paris.
Ferrand, Gabriel M. 1909. Essai de phonétique comparée du malais et des dialectes malgaches.
Paris: Librairie Orientaliste Paul Geuthner.
Ferstl, P. Basilius. 1900. Yao-Erzählungen (Suaheli-Text mit deutscher Übersetzung). Mitteilungen
des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 3, III, p. 96-113, 244.
Figanière, Don Jorgé de. 1863/64. Notes on the language of South Africa. Proceedings of the
Royal Geographical Society of London, v. 8, 3, p. 105-107.
164
Makes some general and bibliographical remarks about Mbunda K15 and ‘Inhambane’ S54.
Peripherals: Don Jorgé de Figanière, “Errata“, Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society of London, v. 8
(1863/64) p. 157.
Finck, Franz Nikolaus. 1908. Die Verwandtschaftsverhältnisse der Bantu-Sprachen. Göttingen:
Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht. Pp 138.
Fisch, Rudolf. 1912. Grammatik der Dagomba-Sprache, gesprochen in Nord-Togo und den
nördlichen Bezirken der Goldküste. Archiv für das Studium der deutscher Kolonialsprachen,
#14. Berlin: Georg Reimer. Pp x, 78.
Fisch, Rudolf. 1913. Wörtersammlung Dagbáne-Deutsch. Mitteilungen des Seminars für
Fisch, Rudolf. 1913. Dagbane-Sprachproben. Jahrbuch der Hamburger wissenschaftlichen
Anstalten, v. 30, p. 1-190. (Supplement 8 to Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische
Sprachen.)
Fischer, A. 1907. Eine interessante algierisch-marokkanische Genitivumschreibung. Zeitschrift der
Fischer, A. 1915. Zur Lautlehre des Marokkanisch-Arabischen. Sonderdrücke aus der
Renunziationsprogramm für 1914/15. Philosophischen Fakultät der Universität Leipzig. Pp
xv, 61.
Fischer, Gustav Adolf [Dr]. 1878. Die Sprachen im südlichen Galla-Lande. Zeitschrift für
Ethnologie, v. 10, p. 141-145.
Has lexical specimens from Oromo (Galla), Swahili, Pokomo, Sanye (Dahalo?), Boni.
Fischer, Gustav Adolf [Dr]. 1879? Die Sprachen im südlichen Galla-Lande [pt. 2]. (journal?), v.
(?), p. (?).
Details wanting.
Fischer, H. 1911. Volkscharakter und Fabeln der Hottentotten. Deutsche Rundschau für
Geographie, v. 33, p. 555-559.
Fisher, Mrs A.B. 1911. Twilight tales of the Black Baganda. London: Marshall Brothers.
Peripherals: A.L.L., Man, v. 13 (1913) p. 134-135 (art. 75).
Fisher, Walter. 1919. English-Lunda and Lunda-English vocabulary. Manuscript.
Referred to by Doke (1945:107).
Fisher, W. Singleton. 1919. Unpublished grammatical notes and exercises on the Lunda language,
4 parts. Pp 132.
Four untitled manuscripts. Properly published in 1963 as Lunda-Ndembu handbook: 40 lessons.
Fisher, W. Singleton; Fisher, M.K. 1944. Lunda handbook. Mutshatsha (Congo-Kinshasa). Pp
178.
“Ce manuel pratique est une refonte totale d’un ouvrage édité en 1905” (A.S. 1947:160).
Peripherals: A.S., Aequatoria, v. 10 (1947) p. 160.
Fisher, W. Singleton; Fisher, M.K. 1963. Lunda-Ndembu handbook: 40 lessons (Mukanda
wedimi dawalunda). Lusaka: Northern Rhodesia Publ. Bureau. Pp vi, 135.
Not sure of this is a reprint or revision; cfr also Fisher & Fisher (1944).
Flad, Johann M. 1866. A short description of the Falasha and Kamants in Abyssinia, together
with an outline of the elements and a vocabulary of the Falasha language. Edited by J.L.
Krapf. St. Chrischona (Switzerland): Mission Press. Pp 92.
Fleischer, C.F. 1913. A new Ga-English method. Basel Missionary Society. Pp 155.
Fletcher, Ronald S. 1912. Hausa sayings and folklore with vocabulary of new words. Oxford:
Henry Frowde. Pp 173.
Peripherals: A. Klingenheben, Zeitschift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 2 (1911/12) p. 332; Anon, Journal of the African
Society, v. 11 (1911/12) p. 371-372.
Fleury, V.; Soualah, M. 1901. L’arabe pratique et commercial à l’usage des établissements
d’instruction et des commerçants: lecture, écriture, grammaire, syntaxe, exercises
d’application, conversation, lexiques, liste des marchandises. Alger. Pp x, 333.
165
Flothmeier, F. 1910. Ewe-Lieder. Monatsblatt der norddeutschen Missions-Gesellschaft, v. (?), p.
(?).
Fokken, Hermann A. 1905. Das Kisiha. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v.
8, III, p. 44-93.
Fokken, Hermann A. 1905. Einiges über die Sprache und Hörkunst der Arusaleute. Evangelischlutherisches Missionsblatt (Leipzig), 1905, p. (?).
Fokken, Hermann A. 1907. Einige Bemerkungen über das Verbum im Masai. Mitteilungen des
Fokken, Hermann A. 1914. Spruchweisheit der Masai. Leipzig: Evangelisch-Lutherische Mission.
Pp 37.
Fokken, Hermann A. 1916/17. Natinin o loig-etiani lo Larusa / Erzählungen und Märchen der
Larusa. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 7, p. 81-104, 193-211.
Foot, Edwin C. 1913. A Galla-English, English-Galla dictionary. Cambridge University Press. Pp
118.
Reprinted by Gregg International (ISBN-10 0-576-11622-X).
Peripherals: Carl Meinhof, Deutsche Literatur-Zeitung, v. 34 (1913) p. 3239-3240; A. W[erner], Journal of the
African Society, v. 13 (1913/14) p. 333-334.
Forbes, Frederick Edwyn. 1850. Despatch communicating the discovery of a native written
character at Bohmar, on the western coast of Africa, near Liberia, accompanied by a
vocabulary of Vahie or Vei tongue. Journal of the Royal Geographical Society of London, v.
20, p. 89-101.
Forbes, Frederick Edwyn. 1851. Discovery and vocabularies of the Vahie and Dahoman
languages. London.
What is this? Source?
Forfeitt, Mrs William. 190x. Unpublished materials on Ngombe. Manuscript.
Mrs William Forfeitt did some work on Ngombe (Doke 1945:25; cfr also Johnston 1919:10).
Forfeitt, William. 19xx. Manuscripts and notes on Bantu languages.
Johnston (1919:807-808) refers to several unpublished notes and materials collected by Rev. Forfeit, e.g. on
Likangala/Likanga (p. 807), Abuja (p. 807), Ngombe (p. 808).
Forfeitt, William. 1907. MoNdunga (vocabulaire).
Referred to by Johnston (1908:833; cfr Pasch 1986:414).
Foucauld, Charles de [Frère]. 1918/20. Dictionnaire abrégé touareg-français, 2 vols. Alger. Pp
652; 791.
Foulkes, H.D. 1915. Angass manual: grammar and vocabulary. London: Kegan Paul, Trench,
Trübner & Co. Pp xviii, 314.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 15 (1915/16) p. 108; S.H. Ray, Man, v. 15 (1915) p. 187189 (art. 105); Frederick Starr, American anthropologist, new series, v. 17 (1915) p. 741-742.
Foureau, Fernand. 1896. Essai de catalogue des noms arabes et berbères de quelques plantes,
arbustes et arbres algériens et sahariens ou introduits et cultivés en Algérie. Paris. Pp iii,
48.
François, [?] von. 1888/89. Sprachproben aus dem Togoland. Zeitschrift für afrikanische
Sprachen, v. 2, p. 147-154.
Contains material from several languages, e.g. Dagbani. Also, “Die unter ‘Asante’ mitgeteilten Wörter sind zum
grössten Teil kein Twi” (Hintze 1959:38).
Franke, R.O. 1893. Indische Fabeln bei den Suahelis. Wiener Zeitschrift für die Kunde des
Morgenlandes, v. 7, p. 215-216, 384-385.
Fraser, W.K. 1908. Vocabulary of the Jukon language: English-Jukon & Jukon-English. Zungeru
(Nigeria): Government Printing Office. Pp 38.
Frédoux, J. [R.P.]. 1864. A sketch of the Sechuana grammar. Cape Town: J.C. Juta. Pp 12.
“Crisp praises this pamphlet of 12 pp. only. It is very concise” (Doke 1933:77). It was later republished in full by
D.T. Cole (1971).
166
studies, v. 7 (1933) p. 1-99; D.T. Cole “Fredoux’s sketch of Tswana grammar”, African studies, v. 30 (1971) p.
200-211.
Frédoux, J. [R.P.]. 1971. Fredoux’s sketch of Tswana grammar [edited and published by D.T.
Cole]. African studies, v. 30, p. 200-211.
Freeman, Henry Stanhope. 1862. A grammatical sketch of the Temahuq or Towarek language.
London: Harrison. Pp vi, 47.
Freeman, Henry Stanhope. 1864. Dialecte de Ghat. Revue africaine: journal des traveaux de la
Société Historique Algérienne, v. 8, p. 396.
Not sure what this is. One page?
Freeman, J.J.; Johns, D. 1835. A dictionary of the Malagasy language. Tananarive.
In two parts: English-Malagasy and Malagasy-English.
Freiweger, [?]. 1896. Die Bildungssilben der Suaheli-Sprache. Breslau.
Details wanting.
Froberville, Barthélemy Huet de. 1816. Dictionnaire français et madécasse, 3 vols. Port Louis.
Froberville, Barthélemy Huet de. 1839. Aperçu sur la langue malgache. Bulletin de la Société de
Froberville, Barthélemy Huet de. 1847. Notes sur les mouers et traditions des amakoua sur le
commerce et la traite des esclaves dans l’Afrique orientale. Bulletin de la Société de
Whiteley & Gutkind (1958) refer to something titled “Notes sur la langue Macua”, which may be included in the
above title. Or possibly there a whole series of articles. Moreover, a Mawiha vocabulary was included in some
publication by Froberville (see Doke 1945:54); possibly this.
Froger, Fernand. 1910. Etude sur la langue des mossi (boucle du Niger), suivie d’un vocabulaire
et de textes. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp xxiv, 260.
Fry, Danby Palmer. 1866. Further remarks on the word Hottentot. Transactions of the Philological
Society, 1866, p. 21-25.
Reprinted 1971 in a pamphlet titled The word Hottentot (Pretoria State Library).
Fry, Danby Palmer. 1866. Kolben’s account of the name of the Hottentots, with comments.
Transactions of the Philological Society, 1866, p. 6-11.
Reprinted 1971 in a pamphlet titled The word Hottentot (Pretoria State Library).
Fuchs, Hans. 1910. Sagen, Mythen und Sitten der Masai: nach der Masaisprache und dem
Englischen. Jena: H. Constenoble. Pp 144.
Fuchs, Hans. 1912. Von Menschen, Geistern und Tieren: Geschichten aus dem Paregebirge.
Leipzig: Evangelisch-Lutherische Mission. Pp 54.
Funke, Emil. 19xx. Die Kusasi-Sprache: ein Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Togosprachen. Manuskript.
Referred to by Roncador & Miehe (1998:66).
Funke, Emil. 1909. Versuch einer Grammatik der Avatimesprache. Mitteilungen des Seminars für
Funke, Emil. 1910. Deutsch-Avatime Wörterverzeichnis. Mitteilungen des Seminars für
Funke, Emil. 1910. Die Nyangbo-Táfi-Sprache: ein Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Sprachen Togos.
Funke, Emil. 1911. Die Santrokofisprache: Beiträge zur Kenntnis der Sprachen Togos.
Funke, Emil. 1911/12. Die Familie im Spiegel der afrikanischen Volksmärchen. Zeitschrift für
Contains texts in Avatime, Nyangbo and Sankotrofi.
Funke, Emil. 1913. Die Sprache von Busa am Niger. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische
Funke, Emil. 1913. Die Dagarti-Sprache. Manuskript. Pp 15.
167
Funke, Emil. 1914/15. Die Sprachverhältnisse in Sugu, Dahomey, Franz. Westafrika. Zeitschrift
für Kolonialsprachen, v. 5, p. 257-269.
Funke, Emil. 1916. Die Stellung der Haussasprache unter den Sprachen Togos. Mitteilungen des
Discusses Hausa’s relationship to Kwa languages.
Funke, Emil. 1917. Der Gottesname in den Togosprachen. Archiv für Anthropologie, neue Folge,
v. 15 [43], p. 161-163.
Funke, Emil. 1919/20. Originaltexte aus den Klassensprachen in Mitteltogo. Zeitschrift für
Eingeborenen-Sprachen, v. 10, p. 261-313.
Contains texts from Avatime, Likpe, Logba, Lefana, Akposo and Akpafu.
Funke, Emil. 1919/22. Vokabular der Kussassi-Sprache im Westsudan. Mitteilungen des Seminars
für orientalische Sprachen, v. 23/25, III, p. 88-98.
Funke, Emil. 1919/22. Die Isala-Sprache im Westsudan. Mitteilungen des Seminars für
orientalische Sprachen, v. 23/25, III, p. 69-87.
Gabelenz, Hans Georg von der. 1847. Ueber die Sprache der Suaheli. Zeitschrift der deutschen
morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 1, 3/4, p. 238-242.
Includes comparative tables on Wanika E72, Sechuana S31, Angola H21 and Kongo H16.
Gabelenz, Hans Georg von der. 1886. Sprachliches über die Buschmänner und ihren angeblichen
Häretismus. Korrespondenzblatt der deutschen Gesellschaft für Anthropologie, Ethnologie
und Urgeschichte, v. 17, p. 60-63.
Gabelenz, Hans Georg von der. 1893. Baskisch und Berberisch. Berlin.
Gaden, Henri [Le Commandant]. 1908. Note sur le dialecte foul parlé par les foulbé du Baguirmi.
Journal asiatique, 10ème série, v. 11 [172], p. (?).
Also distributed as a book (70 pp) by Imprimerie Nationale in Paris.
Gaden, Henri [Le Commandant]. 1908. Essai de grammaire de la langue baguirmienne (territoire
du Tchad), suivi de dialogues et de vocabulaires baguirmien-français et français-baguirmien.
Revue de linguistique et de philologie comparée, v. 41, p. 1-12.
Contains also vocabulary and texts. Reprinted 1909 as a small booklet by Ernest Leroux in Paris.
Gaden, Henri [Le Commandant]. 1913. Le poular, dialecte peul du fouta sénégalais, 1: étude
morphologique, textes. Collection de la revue du monde musulman. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp
v, 336.
Gaden, Henri [Le Commandant]. 1914. Le poular, dialecte peul du fouta sénégalais, 2: lexique
poular-français. Collection de la revue du monde musulman. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp xi,
263.
Reprinted by Gregg International (ISBN-10 0-576-11603-3).
Gairdner, William Henry Temple; Kurayyim, Sallaam [Sheikh]. 1917. Egyptian colloquial Arabic:
a conversation grammar and reader. Cambridge: William Heffer & Sons. Pp xiv, 300, 3
fold-out leaves.
Gaisser, Karl. 1912. Die Produktion der Eingeborenen des Bezirks Sokode-Bassari (Schutzgebiet
Togo). Mitteilungen aus den deutschen Schutzgebieten, v. 25, 4, p. 234-318.
Galland, Henri. 1914. Lexique français-kikongo, avec notes grammaticales. Bordeaux:
Imprimeries Gounouilhou. Pp 155.
Deals with the dialect of Manyanga.
Galtier, Emile. 1905. Contribution à l’étude de la littérature arabe-copte. Le Caire. Pp 120.
Galtier, Emile. 1912. Le verbe “way” en afar (et emprunts arabes en afar). Mémoires et fragments
inédits de l’Inst. d’Archéologie Orientale (Le Caire), v. 27, p. 21-26.
Galtier, M. 1898/99. Le pronom affixe de la première personne du singulier en haoussa. In: Actes
du 11ème congrès international des orientalistes, Paris, 1897, pt. 5, p. 209-213. Paris:
Ernest Leroux.
Gamble, David Percy. 1992. John Hill’s vocabularies of Wolof, compiled in 1808 on the island of
Gorée (Senegal). Gambian studies, #27. Brisbane CA. Pp vi, 91.
168
Who’s John Hill?
Gamble, David Percy. 1999. The Gambia: place names on maps and in travellers’ accounts up to
1825, 2 vols. Gambian studies, #35. Brisbane CA.
Ganot, R.P. 1899. Grammaire ibo. Mesnière (France?) & Oniga (Nigeria): Imprimerie St. Joseph
pour la Mission Catholique de Niger. Pp 209.
Unsure about the publisher(s).
Ganot, R.P. 1904. English, Ibo and French dictionary. Salzburg (Austria): Holy Ghost Fathers of
the Sodality of St. Peter Claver. Pp 306.
Issued anonymously.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1900. The relative adjective nty. Proceedings of the Society of Biblical
Archaeology, v. 22, p. 37-42.
The ‹nty› in the title should be written with hieroglyphs, or N35/(X1+Z4) according to Gardiner’s (1957) index.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1900. Notes: (1) nty and nty; (2) the demonstrative n and its derivatives.
Proceedings of the Society of Biblical Archaeology, v. 22, p. 321-325.
The Egyptian words should be written in hieroglyphic script. Following Gardiner’s (1957) index, the first ‹nty›
should be D35/(X1+Z4), the second N35/(X1+Z4), and the (demonstrative) ‹n› should be N35.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1902. The word m-‘ in the inscription of wny and a note on the
Millingen Papyrus I. 3-4. Proceedings of the Society of Biblical Archaeology, v. 24, p. 349354.
The Egyptian words in the title should be written with hieroglyphs. With reference to Gardiner’s (1957) index, ‹m-‘›
should be G17+D36 and ‹wny› should be (E34/N35)+M17.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1903. On the meaning of the preposition h’. Proceedings of the Society
of Biblical Archaeology, v. 25, p. 334-336.
The Egyptian word should be written in hieroglyphic script, spec. M16+D1 according to Gardiner’s index.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1903. The group mr ‘overseer’. Zeitschrift für ägyptische Sprache, v.
40, p. 142-144.
The Egyptian word should be written in hieroglyphic script, or G17+D21, according to Gardiner’s index.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1903. Kjj-bw ‘foreigners’. Zeitschrift für ägyptische Sprache, v. 43, p.
160.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1904. A use of the later absolute pronoun. Zeitschrift für ägyptische
Sprache, v. 41, p. 135-136.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1904. The word iwn’. Zeitschrift für ägyptische Sprache, v. 41, p. 130135.
The Egyptian word should be written in hieroglyphic script, or E9+Z7+(N35/G1)+A2 according to Gardiner’s index.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1904. The name of King Sankhere. Proceedings of the Society of
Biblical Archaeology, v. 26, p. 75-76.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1904. The reading of d‘m. Zeitschrift für ägyptische Sprache, v. 41, p.
73-76.
The Egyptian word should be written in hieroglyphic script, or S40+G17+(S12/N33), according to Gardiner’s
index.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1905. The inscription of Mes. Untersuchungen zur Geschichte und
Altertumskunde Ägyptens, #4:3. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs’sche Buchhandlung. Pp 54.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1905. The Egyptian word for ‘herdsman’, etc. Zeitschrift für
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1906. The particle nhmn. Zeitschrift für ägyptische Sprache, v. 43, p.
159-160.
The Egyptian word should be written in hieroglyphic script, or (N35/N42)+G17+(D36/N35) according to Gardiner’s
index.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1906. The origin of the Coptic tense futurum [pt. 1]. Zeitschrift für
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1907. The hieratic writing of the verb hw ‘to strike’. Zeitschrift für
169
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1908. The origin of the Coptic negative. Zeitschrift für ägyptische
Sprache, v. 45, p. 73-79.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1908. The Egyptian name for the Nile. Zeitschrift für ägyptische
Sprache, v. 45, p. 140-141.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1910. Notes on the story of Sinuhe [pt. 1-2]. Recueil de travaux
relatifs à la philologie et à l’archéologie égyptiennes et assyriennes, v. 32, p. 1-28, 214-230.
A total of 8 parts. (The last appeared 1914 in vol 36 of the same journal.) They were subsequently collected into a
small booklet, with additional translations, a postscript and indexes, and published 1916 by Librairie Ancienne
Honoré Champion in Paris.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1911. ‘To wait for’ in Egyptian. Zeitschrift für ägyptische Sprache, v.
49, p. 100-102.
relatifs à la philologie et à l’archéologie égyptiennes et assyriennes, v. 33, p. 67-94, 221230.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. (Ed.) 1911. The Papyrus Anastasi I and the Papyrus Koller, together
with the parallel texts. Egyptian hieratic texts, series 1: literary texts of the New Kingdom,
#1. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs’sche Buchhandlung. Pp 42*, 99.
There doesn’t seem to be any further parts. Reprinted 1964 by Georg Olms in Hildesheim.
URL: www.etana.org
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1912. A Late-Egyptian use of the older absolute pronoun. Zeitschrift
für ägyptische Sprache, v. 50, p. 114-117.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1914. Notes on the story of the eloquent peasant [pt. 1-2]. Proceedings
of the Society of Biblical Archaeology, v. 36, p. 15-23, 69-74.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1915. The nature and development of the Egyptian hieroglyphic
writing. Journal of Egyptian archaeology, v. 2, p. 61-75.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1915. The Egyptian word for ‘Dragoman’. Proceedings of the Society
of Biblical Archaeology, v. 37, p. 117-125.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1916. Some Coptic etymologies. Proceedings of the Society of Biblical
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1916. The Egyptian origin of the Semitic alphabet. Journal of Egyptian
archaeology, v. 3, p. 1-16.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1916. An ancient list of the fortresses of Nubia. Journal of Egyptian
archaeology, v. 3, p. 184-192.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1916. Notes on the story of Sinuhe. With additional translation,
postscript and indexes. Paris: Librairie Ancienne Honoré Champion. Pp ix, 195.
The story was originally published 1911-1914 in 8 parts in Recueil de travaux relatifs à la philologie et à
l’archéologie égyptiennes et assyriennes, v. 32-34 & 36.
URL: www.etana.org
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1918. An unrecognized Egyptian adverb. Proceedings of the Society of
Gardiner, Alan Henderson. 1918. The supposed Egyptian equivalent of the name of Goshen.
Journal of Egyptian archaeology, v. 5, p. 218-223.
Gardiner, Alan Henderson; Sethe, Kurt. 1910. Zur Vokalisation des Dualis im Ägyptischen.
Zeitschrift für ägyptische Sprache, v. 47, p. 42-59.
Unsure of the correct order of the authors.
Garnier, R.A. 1903. Mu mbembo kivili ki Mayumbe. Loango. Pp 96.
170
Garstang, John. 1911. Meroë, the city of the Ethiopians. With an introduction and chapter on
decipherment by A.H. Sayce and a chapter on the inscriptions from Meroë by L. le Griffith.
Oxford.
Gaud, Fernand; Overberghe, Cyr. van. 1911. Les mandja (Congo français). Collection de
monographies ethnographiques: sociologie descriptive, #8. Bruxelles: Librairie Albert de Wit
pour l’Inst. International de Bibliographie. Pp xxiv, 574.
Includes dictionary/word list.
Peripherals: Frederick Starr, American anthropologist, new series, v. 13 (1911) p. 483-486.
Gaudefroy-Demombynes, Maurice. 1906/07. Documents sur les langues de l’Oubangui-Chari. In:
Actes du 14ème congrès international des orientalistes, Alger, 1905, pt. 2, p. 172-330. Paris:
Ernest Leroux.
Includes lexical specimens of Maba, Kodoi, Kashmere, Aiki, and Mimi/Mututu. It also includes the first published
linguistic data from Sango (cfr Samarin 1994:133).
Gaudefroy-Demombynes, Maurice. 1914. Langues du Maroc. Revue générale des sciences pures
et appliquées, v. 25, p. 301-305.
Gaudefroy-Demombynes, Maurice; Mercier, L. 1913. Manuel d’arabe marocain, avec
introduction historique et géographique. Bibliothèque de l’Ecole Supérieure d’Etudes
Arabes et Berbères de Rabat. Paris. Pp iii, 242.
Gauthier, Henri. 1907. Le livre de rois d’Egypte, 1: des origines à la fin de la XIIe dynastie.
Mémoires publiés par les membres de l’IFAO (Inst. Français d’Archéologie Orientale), #17.
Le Caire.
Gauthier, Henri. 1910/12. Le livre de rois d’Egypte, 2: des la XIIIe à la fin de la XVIIe dynastie; la
XVIIIe dynastie, 2 parties. Mémoires publiés par les membres de l’IFAO (Inst. Français
d’Archéologie Orientale), #18. Le Caire.
Gauthier, Henri. 1913/14. Le livre de rois d’Egypte, 3: XIXe et XXe dynastie; de la XXIe à la
XXIVe dynastie, 2 parties. Mémoires publiés par les membres de l’IFAO (Inst. Français
d’Archéologie Orientale), #19. Le Caire.
Gauthier, Henri. 1915/16. Le livre de rois d’Egypte, 4: dynasties XXVe à XXXIIe; les ptolémées, 2
parties. Mémoires publiés par les membres de l’IFAO (Inst. Français d’Archéologie
Orientale), #20. Le Caire.
Gauthier, Henri. 1917. Le livre de rois d’Egypte, 5: les empereurs romains. Mémoires publiés par
les membres de l’IFAO (Inst. Français d’Archéologie Orientale), #21. Le Caire.
Gautier, Emile Felix. 1902. Notes sur l’écriture antaimoro. Publications de l’Ecole des Lettres
d’Alger; Bulletin de correspondence de africaine, #25. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp 4, 83.
Gautier, Emile Felix. 1913. Repartition de la langue berbère en Algerie. Annis. Geogr.(?), v. 22, p.
255-266.
What’s Annis. Geogr.? Listed by Jucovy & Alderete (2001).
Gautier, Jean Marie. 1912. Grammaire de la langue mpongwée. Libreville & Paris: Mission
Catholique; Procure des Pères du Saint-Esprit. Pp xv, 250.
Gaye, Jules A. de; Beecroft, W.S. 1914. Yoruba grammar. Lagos: CMS (Church Missionary
Society) Bookshop. Pp 95.
Gehr, Chr. 1914. Die Bakoko-Sprache. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v.
17, III, p. 118-133.
Gehr, Chr. 1916/17. Zwei Dualamärchen. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 7, p. 25-35.
Gennep, Arnold van. 1907. Une système nègre de classification: sa portée linguistique. Revue des
idées: études de critique générale, v. 37, p. (?).
A total of some 12 pages.
Gennep, Arnold van. 1908. Religion, mouers et legendes: essais d’ethnographie et de linguistique.
Paris: Société du Mercure de France.
Date could be wrong.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 8 (1908/09) p. 335; Anon, Journal of the African Society, v.
9 (1909/10) p. 219-220.
Geslin, M. 1856. Rapport sur le tablau des dialectes de l’Algérie et des contrées voisines. Paris:
Panckoucke. Pp 26.
171
Geze, Louis. 1885. De quelques rapports entre les langues berbères et basque. Mémoires de la
Société Archéologique du Midi de la France, 2ème série, v. 13?, p. 30-36.
Not sure about vol no, nor the date.
Gheyn, Joseph van den. 1892. La langue congolaise et les idiomes bantous. Bruxelles: A.
Vromant & Co. Pp 29.
193-218.
Gibb, George Duncan. 1865/66. Essential points of difference between the larynx of the Negro and
that of the White man. Memoirs read before the Anthropological Society of London, v. 2, p.
1-13.
Gibb, George Duncan. 1867/69. The character of the voice in the nations of Asia and Africa
contrasted with that of the nations of Europe. Memoirs read before the Anthropological
Society of London, v. 3, p. 244-259.
Gibb, S. 1884. An easy Zulu vocabulary and phrase book with grammatical notes.
Details wanting.
Gibb, S. 1890. An easy Zulu vocabulary and phrase book with grammatical notes. Second(?)
edition. Pietermaritzburg: P. Davis & Sons. Pp 53.
Gibb, S. 1903. An easy Zulu vocabulary and phrase book with grammatical notes. New edition,
with additions and amendments by R.C.A. Samuelson. Pietermaritzburg: P. Davis & Sons.
Another edition (or a reprint?) was issued without author’s name by the Central News Agency in Johannesburg,
1902.
Gibbs, Josiah W. 1840. A Gissy or Kissy vocabulary. American journal of science, v. 38, p. 41-42
(art. 6).
Gibbs, Josiah W. 1840. A Vai or Vey vocabulary. American journal of science, v. 38, p. 43-44 (art.
7).
Gibbs, Josiah W. 1840. A Mendi vocabulary. American journal of science, v. 38, p. 45-48 (art. 8).
Gibert, E. 1899. Etude de la langue des pouls [pt. 1]. Revue de linguistique et de philologie
comparée, v. 32, p. 285-304.
Gibert, E. 1900. Etude de la langue des pouls [pt. 2-3]. Revue de linguistique et de philologie
comparée, v. 33, p. 49-66, 137-186.
Gibert, E. 1901. Etude de la langue des pouls [pt. 4]. Revue de linguistique et de philologie
comparée, v. 34, p. 50-78.
Gibson, J.Y. 1919. The evolution of South African native policy. Pietermaritzburg: P. Davis &
Sons.
Ginneken, Jacques van [Père]; Torrend, Julius. 1913. Les classes nominales des langues bantoues
[pt. 1]. Anthropos: internationale Zeitschrift für Völker- und Sprachenkunde, v. 8, p. 151164.
Ginneken, Jacques van [Père]; Torrend, Julius. 1914. Les classes nominales des langues bantoues appendice: la liste complète de noms de la langue Nyungwe (Zambèze). Anthropos:
internationale Zeitschrift für Völker- und Sprachenkunde, v. 9, p. 781-800.
Giraud, Gaston. 1908. Vocabulaire des dialectes sango, bakongo et a-zandé. Revue coloniale, 1908,
p. 263-291, 332-354.
The first part includes also notes on Mandja and Banda.
Glauning, [?] von. 1903. Über den Gruss der ostafrikanischen Eingeborenen. Mitteilungen des
Includes material from several East African languages, e.g. Bungu F25, Wanda M21, and an unspecified variety of
Nyiha M23.
Glauning, [?] von. 1904. Forms of salutation amongst natives of East Africa. Journal of the African
Society, v. 3, 11, p. 288-299.
Gleiss, Franz. 1908. Schambala Sprachführer. Tanga (Tanganyika): Kommunal-Druck. Pp 64.
Gleiss, Franz; Rösler, Frau O. 1912. Schambala-Grammatik: mit Übungssätzen nebst einer
Sammlung von Redensarten in Gesprächsform und Wörterbuch schambala-deutsch und
172
deutsch-schambala. Archiv für das Studium der deutscher Kolonialsprachen, #13. Berlin:
Verlag von Dietrich Reimer. Pp xii, 134.
Glennie, Robert [Rev.]. 189x. Bobangi vocabulary. Bolobo: Baptist Missionary Society.
Exact title not known. According to Whitehead (1899:vi), a Mr Glennie prepared a Bobangi vocabulary based on
material collected by a Mr Darby.
Glennie, Robert [Rev.]. 191x. Short vocabulary of Bisia or Bobanga. Bolobo: Baptist Missionary
Society.
Johnston (1919:807) mentions a short manuscript vocabulary of ‘Bisia or Bobanga’ given to him by Rev. Robert
Glennie. Possibly this is the Bobangi vocabulary mentioned by Whitehead (1899:vi). However, the location seems
a bit off. Johnston locates Bisia somewhere near the confluence of Congo and Aruwimi rivers, close to where
Ngelima C44 is spoken today.
Glennie, Robert [Rev.]. 191x. Lukete wordlist. Baptist Missionary Society.
Johnston (1919:803) makes mention of a Kete wordlist compiled by Rev. Glennie.
Gliddon, George Robins. 1849. Otia aegyptiaca: discourses on Egyptian archaeology and
hieroglyphical discoveries. London: J. Madden & Co. Pp viii, 148.
Goldie, Hugh [Rev.]. 1857. Principles of Efik grammar, with specimens of the language. Calabar:
Mission Press. Pp xviii, 103.
Goldie, Hugh [Rev.]. 1862. Dictionary of the Efik language. Edinburgh: United Presbyterian
College. Pp 776.
Williamson (1989:42) dates it 1890. Reprinted by Gregg International (ISBN-10 0-576-11446-4).
Goldie, Hugh [Rev.]. 1868. Principles of Efik grammar with specimen of language. Edinburgh:
Muir & Patterson. Pp 105.
Revision or reprint of Goldie (1857).
Goldie, Hugh [Rev.]. 1874. Efik grammar in English. Edinburgh: United Presbyterian College.
Goldie, Hugh [Rev.]. 1874. Dictionary of the Efik language in two parts: Efik and English,
English and Efik. Glasgow: Dunn & Wright. Pp li, 643, 28.
New edition? Bouquiax (1980:169) dates this 1886, which surely refers to a reprint; unless there was an addenda
published as well. Reprinted 1983 by Demand Reprints in Amersham UK.
Goldie, Hugh [Rev.]. 1874. Efik grammar in Efik. Edinburgh: United Presbyterian College.
Goldschmidt, L. 1893. Bibliotheca Aethiopica: vollständiges Verzeichnis und ausführliche
Beschreibung sämtlicher Äthiopischer Druckwerke. Leipzig. Pp 63.
Goldschmidt, M. 1899. Märchen und Erzählungen der Suaheli in Deutsch-Ostafrika. Globus, v.
76, 10, p. 160-162.
Gollmer, C.A. 1885. On African symbolic messages. Journal of the Anthropological Inst. of Great
Britain and Ireland, v. 14, p. 169-182.
On Yoruba.
Goodwin, Charles Wycliffe. 1866. The story of Sanehe: an Egyptian tale of four thousand years
ago. Fraser’s magazine for town and country (London), v. (?), p. (?).
Gore-Brown, W. 19xx. First words in Secoana. Church of England.
Published anonymously. “Extremely scanty” (Lestrade, in Doke 1933:79).
studies, v. 7 (1933) p. 1-99.
Gorju, Julien. 1906. Du ruganda au runyoro et au runyankole: essai de grammaire comparée.
Alger. Pp vi, 42.
The title is sometimes given as “Essai de grammaire comparée du ruganda au runyoro et au runyankole”.
Gourliau, Ernest. 1893. La conversation française-kabyle, dialecte zouaoua, avec figuration en
caractères latins. Miliana (Algérie). Pp xx, 228.
Gourliau, Ernest. 1898. Grammaire complète de la langue mzabite, comparé dans ses parties
essentielles aux dialectes kabyle et tamachek’. Miliana (Algérie). Pp x, 216.
Gouzien, Paul. 1889. Contribution à l’étude des dialectes du Dahomey: manuel franco-yoruba de
conversation spécialement à l’usage du médecin. Paris: Augustin Challamel. Pp viii, 64.
173
Gowers, W.F. 1907. 42 manuscript vocabularies of languages spoken in Bauchi Province, N.
Nigeria. Kaduna: National Archives.
Referred to by Crozier & Blench (1992:132).
Gråberg, Jakob af Hemsö [Count]. 1818. Indigações sobre a lingua dos Berberos. Lisboa.
Gråberg, Jakob af Hemsö [Count]. 1818. Observationes grammaticales et philologiques sur les
langues dans le Maghrib-al-Aqssà et principalement sur les dialectes arabes, berbère et
cheloe. Uppsala.
Gråberg, Jakob af Hemsö [Count]. 1836. Remarks on the language of the Amazirghs. Journal of
the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, v. 3, p. 106-130.
Gråberg, Jakob af Hemsö [Count]. 1837. Vocabulary of names of places, etc., in Moghribu-l-Aksa,
or the Empire of Marocco. Journal of the Royal Geographical Society of London, v. 7, p.
243-270.
Grade, Paul. 1889. Bemerkungen über das Neger-Englisch an der Westküste von Afrika. Archiv
für das Studium der neueren Sprachen, v. 83, p. (?).
Grade, Paul. 1892. Das Negerenglish an der Westküste von Afrika. Anglia, v. 14, p. 362-393.
Reprinted 1975 in Perspectives on Black English (ed. by J.L. Dillard; Mouton Publishers; Contributions to the
sociology of language, #4), p. 109-142.
Graham, Alexander; Ashbee, Henry Spencer. 1887. Travels in Tunisia, with glossary, a map, a
bibliography, and fifty illustrations. London: Dulau & Co. Pp vii, 295.
Grandidier, Alfred. (Ed.) 1903/07. Collection des ouvrages anciens concernant
Madagascar, 7 vols. Paris: Comité de Madagascar.
Contains original documents (or, Ouvrages ou extraits d’ouvrages portugais, hollandais, anglais, français,
allemands, italiens, espagnols et latins relatifs à Madagascar) dating from 1500-1800. The fourth vol contains “Les
aventures de Robert Drury” and the seventh includes, among other things, a “dictionnaire de la langue de
Madagascar”.
Granet, [?]. 1905. Manuel de conversation wolof-français. Paris.
Details wanting.
Granville, Reginald K.; Roth, Felix N. 1899. Notes on the Jekris, Sobos and Ijos of the Warri
district of the Niger Coast Protectorate; prepared by H. Ling Roth. Journal of the
Grapow, Hermann. 1908/09. Die Duale der Demonstrativpronomina pw, pn und pf. Zeitschrift für
Grapow, Hermann. 1915/17. Religiöse Urkunden: ausgewählte Texte des Totenbuches, 3 Bde.
Urkunden des Aegyptischen Altertums. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs’sche Buchhandlung.
URL: www.etana.org
Grasserie, Raoul de la. 1889. De la conjugaison objective.
Details wanting. No idea what this is about. Could be a journal article, though. Source?
Grasserie, Raoul de la. 1894. De la parenté entre l’égyptien, les langues sémitiques et les langues
indoeuropéennes d’après les travaux de M.K. Abel. Le muséon: revue d’études orientales, v.
13, p. 78-88, 149-175, 269-298, 321-346.
Grasserie, Raoul de la. 1896. Des quelques particularités de la langue des namas. Zeitschrift für
Greffier, H. 1901. Dictionnaire français-sérère, précédé d’un abrégé de la grammaire sérère.
Saint-Joseph de Ngasobil (Sénégal): Mission de la Congrégation du Saint Esprit et du SaintCoeur de Marie. Pp 350.
Greffier, H. 1901. Grammaire sérère. Saint-Joseph de Ngasobil (Sénégal): Mission de la
Congrégation du Saint Esprit et du Saint-Coeur de Marie.
Grégoire, Henri Baptiste. 1808. De la littérature des nègres: recherches sur leurs facultés
intellectuelles, leurs qualités morales, et leur littérature; suivie de notices sur la vie et les
ouvrages des nègres qui se sont distingués dans les sciences, les lettres, et les arts. Paris:
Maradan. Pp xvi, 287.
Grégoire, Henri Baptiste. 1810. An enquiry concerning the intellectual and moral faculties, and
literature of Negroes; followed with an account of the life and works of fifteen Negroes and
174
Mulattoes distinguished in science, literature, and the arts. Translated from the French by
D.B. Warden. Brooklyn: Thomas Kirk. Pp viii, [9]-253.
Reprinted 1967 by McGrath Publ. at College Park MD (ISBN-10 0-8434-0044-7).
Gregorio, Giacomo de. 1882. Cenni di glottologia bantu (sud africana). Palermo (Italia).
Says Johnston (1919:9): “little more than an extended review of Bleek’s writings.” Schadeberg’s Bantu
Bibliography gives the place of publication as Torino.
Peripherals: Anon, The Athenaeum (London), January 6 (1883) p. 15; S.A. Rochlin, “Some South African language
pioneers of the nineteenth century”, African studies, v. 14 (1955) p. 171-173.
Gregorio, Giacomo de. 1902/03. Sulla struttura della lingua Evé. In: Actes du 12ème congrès
international des orientalistes, Roma, 1899, p. 196-199. Florence.
Gregorio, Giacomo de. 1907. Origine significative dei cosidetti “prefissi” derivati dalle lingue
bantu. Studi glottologici italiani, v. 4, p. 85-124.
Grenfell, George [Rev.]. 191x. ... [Title and details wanting]. Baptist Missionary Society.
“George Grenfell had led the way (with Stapleton) in defining the northern limit of the Bantu family in the region of
the Mubañgi basin” (Johnston 1919:10). Apparently his work in this regard (whatever it consisted of) wasn’t
revealed until after his death in 1909. Not sure if they exist as manuscripts, or are included in one or other
publication (though see Johnston 1908).
Griffin, A.W. 1915. Chitonga vocabulary of the Zambesi Valley. London, Edinburgh, Glasgow,
New York, Toronto, Melbourne & Bombay: Oxford University Press; Humphrey Milford.
Pp 159.
Griffith, Francis Llewellyn. 1898. A collection of hieroglyphs. London: Egypt Exploration Society.
Not sure about the details.
Griffith, Francis Llewellyn. 1898. The Petrie papyri: hieratic papyri from Kahun and Gurob
(principally of the Middle Kingdom), 2 vols. London: Bernard Quaritch. Pp vi, 114; plates.
URL: www.etana.org
Griffith, Francis Llewellyn. 1900. The system of writing in Ancient Egypt. Journal of the
Griffith, Francis Llewellyn. 1909. Catalogue of the Demotic papyri in the John Rylands library,
Manchester: with facsimiles and complete translations, 3 vols. Manchester: Manchester
University Press.
URL: quod.lib.umich.edu/cgi/b/bib/bibperm?q1=0981732.0001.001
Griffith, Francis Llewellyn. 1909. Meroitic inscriptions. In: Areika, p. 43-54. Ed. by David
Randall-MacIver & Charles Leonard Woolley. Eckley B. Cox Jnr Expedition to Nubia, #1.
Oxford University Press.
Griffith, Francis Llewellyn. 1911. Karanòg: the Meroitic inscriptions of Shablûl and Karanòg.
Eckley B. Coxe jnr expedition to Nubia, #6. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania
Museum. Pp viii, 181.
Peripherals: Günther Roeder, Literarisches Zentralblatt für Deutschland, v. 32.9 (1913) p. 1049-1050.
Griffith, Francis Llewellyn. 1911. Meroitic inscriptions, 1: Sôbâ to Dangûl. In: The island of
Meroë, p. (?). Ed. by J.W. Crowfoot. Memoirs of the archaeological survey of Egypt, #19.
London.
Griffith, Francis Llewellyn. 1912. Meroitic inscriptions, 2: Napata to Philae and miscellaneous.
Memoirs of the archaeological survey of Egypt, #20. London. Pp xv, 80, plates.
Reprinted 1978 in London.
Peripherals: George Foucart, Journal des savants, v. 11 (1913) p. 516-518; Günther Roeder, Literarisches
Zentralblatt für Deutschland, v.? (1913) p. 107-109.
Griffith, Francis Llewellyn. 1913. Old Nubian lectionary. Berlin.
Later revised and re-published by Gerald M. Browne in 1982.
Griffith, Francis Llewellyn. 1913. The Nubian texts of the Christian period. Abhandlungen der
preussischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, philosophisch-historische Klasse, #8. Berlin.
Pp 134.
Griffith, Francis Llewellyn; Flinders Petrie, William Matthew [Sir]. 1899. Two hieratic papyri
from Tanis: facsimiles and introductory remarks. Memoirs of the Egypt Exploration Fund.
London: Trübner & Co. Pp 25, plates.
175
Peripherals: Gaston Maspero, Revue critique d’histoire et de littérature, v. 7 (1891) p. 121-124.
Griffith, Francis Llewellyn; Thompson, Herbert. (Ed.) 1904. The demotic magical papyrus of
London and Leiden, 2 vols. London: H. Grevel & Co. Pp vii, 207; 42.
The second volume includes a hand copy of the text.
URL: www.etana.org
Griffith, Francis Llewellyn; Thompson, Herbert. 1909. The demotic magical papyrus of London
and Leiden, 3: indices. London: H. Grevel & Co. Pp 154.
URL: www.etana.org
Griffiths, David. 1854. A grammar of the Malagasy language, in the Ankova dialect. Woodbridge
UK.
Griffiths, J. [Rev.]. 189x. ... [Title wanting]. London Missionary Society (LMS).
Some linguistic work was apparently done by Rev. Griffiths on Lega (see Johnston 1919:10). Not sure if anything
has been published, though.
Grigorév, Vasilii Vasilévich; Rosen, Victor Romanovich de [Baron]. (Ed.) 1879/80. Trudy tret’iago
Mezhdunarodnago s”iezda or’entalistov” v” S.-Peterburg” 1876 = Travaux de la
troisième session du congrès international des orientalistes, St Petersbourg, 1876, 2 vols.
St. Petersbourg: Imprimerie des frères Pantéléjeff.
Peripherals: F.C.H. Clarke, “Report on the congress of orientalists (third session) at St Petersburg”, Proceedings of
the Royal Geographical Society of London, v. 21 (1876/77) p. 204-212.
Groff, W. 1888. Etude sur le pronom de la 1re personne du singulier en égyptien. Revue
égyptologique, v. 5, p. 145-162.
Groh, B. 1911. Sprachproben aus zwölf Sprachen des Togohinterlandes. Mitteilungen des
Has material on Hausa, Twi, Tschokossi (Mangu), Dagbani/Dagomba (Yendi), Mamprussi (Gambayé), Moba
(Punpariene), Gourma/Gulmancema, Konkomba (Tschopova), Bassari, Nawdm, Kabiye, Tem (see Hintze 1959:39;
and Roncador & Miehe 1998:71).
Groh, B. 1919/22. Wie sich das Gottesbewusstsein in der Twisprache der Negervölker auf der
Goldküste widerspiegelt. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 23/25, III,
p. 60-68.
Grout, Lewis [Rev.]. 1849. The Zulu and other dialects of southern Africa. Journal of the
American Oriental Society, v. 1, p. 397-433.
Grout, Lewis [Rev.]. 1853. An essay on the phonology and orthography of the Zulu and kindred
dialects in southern Africa. Journal of the American Oriental Society, v. 3, 2, p. 421-472.
Grout, Lewis [Rev.]. 1854. On the phonology and orthography of the Zulu language, and its
kindred dialects. Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, v. 3, p. 247-296.
Grout, Lewis [Rev.]. 1859. The Isizulu: a grammar of the Zulu language, accompanied with a
historical introduction. Pietermaritzburg, Durban & London: May & Davis; J. Cullingworth;
Trübner & Co. Pp lii, 432.
Also published by Umsunduzi Mission Press in Natal.
URL: www.archive.org/details/isizulugrammarof00grouuoft
URL: www.archive.org/details/isizulugrammarof00grouiala
URL: books.google.com/books?id=XyMJAAAAQAAJ
Peripherals: Anon, New Englander and Yale review, v. 24 (1865) p. 411; C.M. Doke, “Two Zulu language
pioneers”, The missionary herald (Boston), v. 133 (1937) p. 17-18; C.M. Doke, “Bantu language pioneers of the
nineteenth century”, African studies, v. 14 (1940) p. 207-246; C.M. Doke, “Bantu language pioneers of the
nineteenth century” (revised), African studies, v. 18 (1959) p. 1-27.
Grout, Lewis [Rev.]. 1893. The Isizulu: a revised edition of a grammar of the Zulu language with
an introduction and an appendix. Second edition. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner &
Co. Pp xxvi, 313.
Peripherals: C.M. Doke, “Two Zulu language pioneers”, The missionary herald (Boston), v. 133 (1937) p. 17-18.
176
Guay, J. 1918/19. La forme feminine berbère à Sale. Les archives berbères, v. 3, p. 31-32.
Gubernatis, Angelo de. 1888. La lingua dei Gallas sui materiali raccolti dal capitano cecchi e
ordinati dal Prof. Viterbo. Bollettino della sezione fiorentina della Società Africana d’Italia,
v. 4, p. 27-38.
Guernsey, A.H. 1868. Du Chaillu, gorillas, and cannibals. Harper’s new monthly magazine, v. 36,
215, p. 582-594.
Review of Chaillu’s Stories of the gorilla country, narrated for young people, publ. 1867.
URL: cdl.library.cornell.edu/moa/browse.journals/harp.html
Guernsey, A.H. 1869. Paul du Chaillu again. Harper’s new monthly magazine, v. 38, 224, p. 164175.
Review of Chaillu’s Wild life under the equator, publ. 1869.
Guernsey, A.H. 1870. Paul du Chaillu once more. Harper’s new monthly magazine, v. 40, 236, p.
201-203.
Review of Chaillu’s Lost in the jungle, publ. 1870.
Guidi, Ignazio. 1887/88. Frammenti copti. Roma: Tipografia della Reale Accademia dei Lincei.
Guidi, Ignazio. 1889. Grammatica elementare della lingua amariña. Roma. Pp 63.
Guidi, Ignazio. 1891. Documenti amariña. Rendiconti della Reale Accademia dei Lincei, 4a serie, v.
7, p. 8.
Guidi, Ignazio. 1892. Grammatica elementare della lingua amariña. Seconda edizione. Roma:
Tipografia della Reale Accademia dei Lincei. Pp 63.
Guidi, Ignazio. 1894. Proverbi, strofe e racconti abissini. Roma: Tipografia della Reale Accademia
dei Lincei. Pp 131.
Amharic.
Guidi, Ignazio. 1901. Vocabolario amarico-italiano. Roma: Casa Editrice Italiana. Pp xv, 918
(columns).
Peripherals: I. Guidi, Supplemento al vocabolario amarico-italiano (Istituto per l’Oriente, Rome, 1940).
Guidi, Ignazio. 1907. Strofi e brevi testi amarici. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische
Sprachen, v. 10, II, p. (?).
Guidi, Ignazio. 1910. Langues et littérature éthiopiennes. L’année linguistique, v. 4, p. 13-58.
Deals with Ethio-Semitic languages.
Guiness, H. Grattan. 1882. Grammar of the Congo language. Livingstone (Congo) Inland
Mission. Pp 267.
This reference is listed by Doke (1945:17). He says it contains, amongst other things, almost 200 pages of
wordlists of Kikongo “as spoken in the cataract region below Stanley Pool” (idem). Note that Guiness also edited a
translation of Brusciotto à Vetralla’s famous Kikongo grammar into English the same year.
Guiraudon, Thomas Grimal de. 1887. Notes de linguistique africaine: les puls. Paris: Ernest
Leroux.
Peripherals: ..., Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 1 (1887/88) p. 308.
Guiraudon, Thomas Grimal de. 1893. Dyebayli vocabulary, from an unpublished manuscript A.D.
1831. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, 1893, p.
669-698.
Guiraudon, Thomas Grimal de. 1894. Bolle fulbe. Manuel de la langue foule parlée dans la
Sénégambie et le Soudan: grammaires, textes, vocabulaire. Paris & Leipzig: Librairie
Universitaire. Pp viii, 144.
Gunn, Hugh. 1910. The language question in the Orange River Colony, 1902-1910: including
certain papers and correspondence connected therewith. Johannesburg: Argus Printing &
Publ.
URL: www.archive.org/details/languagequestion00gunniala
Günther, Wilfried. 1968. A Fula word-list of the early 19th century. Africana marburgensia, v. 1,
1, p. 14-22.
177
Gutmann, Bruno. 1906. Etwas über Zahlen und Rechenkunst der Wadschagga. Nürnberger
Missionsblatt, v. 6, p. 62-64.
Gutmann, Bruno. 1907. Fabelwesen in den Märchen der Wadschagga. Globus, v. 91, 15, p. 239243.
Gutmann, Bruno. 1909. Dichten und Denken der Wadschagganeger: Beiträge zur
ostafrikanischen Volkskunde. Leipzig: Evangelisch-Lutherische Mission.
Gutmann, Bruno. 1911. Zur Psychologie der Dschaggarätsels. Zeitschrift für Ethnologie, v. 43, 3/4,
p. 522-540.
Gutmann, Bruno. 1914. Volksbuch der Wadschagga: Sagen, Märchen, Fabeln und Schwänke der
Dschagganegern nacherzählt. Leipzig: Evangelisch-Lutherische Mission. Pp 225.
Gutzmann, Hermann. 1896. Die Sprache des Kindes und der Naturvölker. Vox: internationales
Zentralblatt für experimentelle Phonetik, v. 6, p. 308-313.
Guy-Grand, V.-J. 1890. Dictionnaire français-volof. Troisième édition, revue et augmentée. SaintJoseph de Ngasobil (Sénégal): Mission de la Congrégation du Saint Esprit et du Saint-Coeur
de Marie. Pp viii, 628.
Haarpaintner, P. Max. 1909. Grammatik der Yaundesprache. Anthropos: internationale Zeitschrift
für Völker- und Sprachenkunde, v. 4, p. 684-701, 919-930.
Hacquard, Augustin [R.P.]; Dupuis-Yakouba, A. [R.P.]. 1897. Manuel de la langue soñgay parlée
de Toumbouctou à Say dans la boucle du Niger. Paris: J. Maisonneuve. Pp iv, 254.
Häfliger, P. Johannes. 1909. Kimatengo-Wörterbuch. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische
Sprachen, v. 12, III, p. 131-214.
Häfliger, P. Johannes. 1909. Fabeln der Matengo (Deutsch-Ostafrika). Anthropos: internationale
Häfliger, P. Johannes. 1910. Wörtersammlung des Wadengo. Mitteilungen des Seminars für
orientalische Sprachen, v. 12, III, p. (?).
This is either Ngom B22b or Ngom (Wide Grassfields).
Hagen, Gunther Tronje von. 1913. Kurzes handbuch für Neger Englisch und der West Küste
Afrikes unter besonderer Verucksichting von Kamerun. Berlin: Dingeldey & Werres.
Hagen, Gunther Tronje von. 1914. Lehrbuch der Bulu Sprache. Berlin: Druck und Verlag von
Gebr. Rodetzki Hofbuchhandlung. Pp 402.
Hagos, Takasta. 1903. ... [Title wanting].
Vocabulary of Tigrinya. Published? Source?
Hahn, Johannes Theophilus. 1870. Die Sprache der Nama. Dissertation. Jena: Friedrich-SchillerUniversität. Pp 52.
Published the same year by Barth, which has an added 22-page appendix on proverbs; unless that was already there
in the thesis?
Hahn, Johannes Theophilus. 1870. Mythen der Khoi-khoin, nebst Übersetzung und
Wörterverzeichnis. Dissertation. Jena: Friedrich-Schiller-Universität.
This also appeared appendixed to Hahn’s Die Sprache der Nama, published 1870.
Hahn, Johannes Theophilus. 1870. Beiträge zur Kunde der Hottentotten. Jahresbericht des
Vereins für Erdkunde zu Dresden, v. 6/7, p. 1-73.
Includes Seroa and !Khuai vocabulary plus lots of Nama stuff (Bonny Sands, pc). Köhler (1981:477) dates this
1873.
Hahn, Johannes Theophilus. 1870. Die Sprache der Nama, nebst einem Anhang enthaltend
Sprachproben aus dem Munde des Volkes. Redigierte Ausgabe eine Dissertation mit einem
Anhang über Mythen der Khoi-khoin nebst Übersetzung und Wörterverzeichnis. Leipzig:
Johann Ambrosius Barth. Pp 52, 22.
Publication of the author’s thesis, Universität Jena, 1870. Unsure if the appendix was added to this or if it was there
already in the thesis version. “Contains considerable new material; but, while it has useful exercises, the general
superstructure is unreliable” (Doke 1933:36).
studies, v. 7 (1933) p. 1-99.
178
Hahn, Johannes Theophilus. 1880. Critique on Hyde Clarke’s theory of the relation of the
Australian to the South African (Bantu) languages. Transactions of the South African
Philosophical Society, v. 2, p. 28-42.
Hahn, Johannes Theophilus. 1881. Tsuni-//Goam: the supreme being of the Khoi-Khoi. London:
Trübner & Co. Pp xi, 154.
Reprinted 1971 (with an extra 95 pages of adverts) by Books for Libraries Press in Freeport NY (Black heritage
library collection; ISBN-10 0-8369-8847-7).
URL: www.archive.org/details/tsunillgoamsupre00hahnuoft
Hahn, Johannes Theophilus. 1882. On the science of language and its study, with special regard
to South Africa: address delivered at the South African Public Library on Saturday 29th
April, 1882. Cape Town: Herrmann Michaelis. Pp 37.
Makes brief mentions to many languages (most of them non-South African) without focussing on any on particular.
URL: www.archive.org/details/onscienceoflangu00hahniala
Hahn, Johannes Theophilus. 1901. Collectanea hottentotica, 2 vols. Manuscript. Johannesburg:
City Library.
Hahn snr, Carl Hugo. 1857. Grundzüge einer Grammatik des Hereró (im westlichen Afrika) nebst
einem Wörterbuch. Berlin, London & Paris: Wilhelm Hertz; Williams & Norgate; Librairie
C. Klincksieck. Pp x, 197.
“Die Tabellen enthalten ein vergleichendes Vokabularium, u.a. auch Nama, Rondu (Ba-rondu), Vanda (Oki-vanda),
Rui (A-ruí), Ngola (Ma-ngóla), Indu (Ma-indu). Die Vorrede enthält eine Aufzählung der Kunene-Anrainer”
(Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:211). Published simultaneously by Wilhelm Hertz in Berlin, Williams & Norgate in
London and Klincksieck in Paris.
Hahn snr, Carl Hugo. 1860. Hereroübersetzungen und wie es gegenwärtig bei den Herero aussieht.
Evangelisches Monatsblatt für Westfalen, v. 17, p. (?).
Hahn snr, Carl Hugo. 1868. Sagen und Märchen der Ova-Herero in Südafrika. Globus, v. 13, p.
(?).
Hailes, L.M. de. 1891. Kilolo-English vocabulary. London: Harley House. Pp 159.
Hale, Horatio Emmons. 1846. Ethnography and philology: United States exploring expedition
during the years 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842, under the command of Charles Wilkes,
U.S.N. Philadelphia: Lea & Blanchard. Pp xii, 666.
This is somehow part of Narrative of the United States exploring expedition during the years 1838, 1839, 1840,
1841, 1842, a 5-volume travel journal usually credited to Charles Wilkes and first published 1844 (and of which
there exist several abridged and condensed editions). Possibly Hale’s Ethnography and philology is supplementary
to those, unless it is included in them. At any rate, Hale’s title contains various ethnographic notes and
vocabularies (or parts thereof), most of which deal with American peoples and languages. There are also wordlists
from 13 African languages, collected in “Rio de Janeiro from native Africans living there as slaves” (Fodor
1980:127), e.g. Eyo/Nago (= Yoruba), Kambinda H16, Mundjola H16, Kongo H16, Angola H21a, Bengera R11,
Makua P31, Mudjana P21, Makonde P23, Takwani P32, Masena N41?/N44?, Sofala S15, and Nyambana S16?.
There’s also supposed to be a Maviha vocabulary in here somewhere (cfr Doke 1945:54). Reprinted 1968 by Gregg
Press in Ridgewood NJ. Also available on microfiche from the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions
(CIHM microfiche series, #35669).
Halévy, Joseph. 1869. Etudes sur les langues de l’Afrique: le hadendoa. Revue de linguistique et de
philologie comparée, v. 3, p. 175-209.
Halévy, Joseph. 1873. Essai sur la langue agaou, le dialect des falachas, juifs d’Abyssinie. Actes de
la Société Philologique, v. 2, p. 151-188.
Halévy, Joseph. 1874. Vocabulaires de diverses langues africaines. Paris.
Contains vocabulary materials for various languages, e.g. Berta.
Halévy, Joseph. 1874. Etudes berbères: essai d’epigraphie libyque [pt. 1]. Journal asiatique, 7ème
série, v. 3 [104], p. 73-203.
Halévy, Joseph. 1874. Etudes berbères: essai d’epigraphie libyque [pt. 2]. Journal asiatique, 7ème
série, v. 4 [105], p. 369-416.
Halévy, Joseph. 1877. Prières des falashas ou juifs d’Abyssinie. Paris: Joseph Baer & Co.
Halévy, Joseph. 1905. L’origine des alphabets berbères. Journal asiatique, 10ème série, v. 7 [168],
p. 119.
179
Halévy, Joseph. 1911. Nouvelles prières des falashas. Revue sémitique d’épigraphie et d’histoire
ancienne, v. 19, p. 96-104, 215-218, 344-364.
Halévy, Joseph. 1913. L’inscription punique-berbère du temple de Masinissa. Rev. sem.(?), v. (?),
p. 136-138.
What’s Rev. sem.? It’s not Revue des études semitiques. Listed in Jucovy & Alderete (2001).
Hall, C.R. 1907. English-Teso vocabulary. Portsmouth NH. Pp 41.
Reprinted 1979 by Charpentier in Portsmouth.
Hall, F.F.W. Byng. 1908. English-Okpoto vocabulary. Zungeru (Nigeria): Government Printing
Office. Pp 21.
Hall, H. 1858. Modern geographical nomenclature, from a colonial point of view. Cape monthly
magazine, v. 3, p. (?).
Halleur, Herrmann. 18xx. Abecedarium in der Aschanti Sprache.
Mentioned by Latham (1847:169). Published?
Hammer-Purgstall, Joseph von [Baron]. 1806. Ancient alphabets and hieroglyphic characters
explained, with an account of the Egyptian priests, their classes, initiation, and sacrifices, in
the Arabic language by Ahmad Bin Abubekr Bin Wahshih. London: William Bulmer & Co.
for G. & W. Nicol. Pp xxiii, 54, 136.
“The text contains Ibn Wahshîya’s Shauq al-mustahâm in excellent printing, and gives the illustration and
explanation of some 80 real and mystical alphabets. In the commentary by von Hammer special attention has been
paid to the sections treating the hieroglyphs and of Egyptian priests” (Smitskamp Oriental Antiquarium Catalogue
#620, entry 1935).
Hammer-Purgstall, Joseph von [Baron]. 1852. Neustes zur Forderung der Länder, Sprachen, und
Völkerkunde Nord-Afrikas. Wien.
Hammond-Tooke, W. 1889. The star lore of the South African natives. Transactions of the South
African Philosophical Society, v. 5, p. 304-312.
This “explains names for celestial bodies among Bushmen, Hottentots and Bantu” (Strohmeyer & Moritz
1975:123).
Hamouda, Ben. 1918. Devinettes songhay. Bulletin du Comité d’Etudes Historiques et
Scientifiques de l’Afrique Occidentale Française, v. 1, p. 62-67.
Hanoteau, Louis-Adolphe. 1857. Rapport sur un essai de grammaire de la langue des kabyles et
sur une mémoire rélatif à quelques inscriptions en caractères touaregs. Versailles.
Hanoteau, Louis-Adolphe. 1858. Essai de grammaire kabyle. Alger.
Hanoteau, Louis-Adolphe. 1860. Essai de grammaire de la langue tamachek’: renfermant les
principes du langage parlé par les imouchar ou touareg. Alger: Librairie Adolphe Jourdan.
Pp xxxi, 299.
Hanoteau, Louis-Adolphe. 1860. Lettre à M. Reinaud sur les noms de nombre en berbère. Journal
asiatique, 5ème série, v. (?), p. (?).
The vol no is either 15 (OS 76) or 16 (OS 77). Listed by Jucovy & Alderete (2001).
Hanoteau, Louis-Adolphe. 1867. Poésies populaires de la kabylie du Djurdjura. Paris. Pp 475.
Hanoteau, Louis-Adolphe. 1896. Essai de grammaire de la langue tamachek’: renfermant les
principes du langage parlé pas ler Imouchar’, ou Touareg, des conversations de
Tamachek’, des fac-simile d’écriture en caractères Tifinar’, et une carte indiquant les
parties de l’Algérie où la langue berbère est encore en usage. Deuxième édition. Alger:
Librairie Adolphe Jourdan. Pp xxxii, 299.
URL: gallica.bnf.fr/ark:/12148/bpt6k1047497
Hanoteau, Louis-Adolphe. 1906. Essai de grammaire kabyle, renfermant les principes du langage
parlé par les population du versant nord du Jurjura, et spécialement par les Igaouaouen ou
Zouaoua, suivi de notes et d’une notice sur quelques inscriptions en caractères dits tifinar’
et en langue tamacher’t. Deuxième édition. Alger: Librairie Adolphe Jourdan. Pp xxiv, 404.
Hanson, A.W. 1848/50. On the Vei and Mendi dialects. Proceedings of the Philological Society, v.
4, p. (?).
180
Hanson, A.W. 1856. The grammatical principles of the Accra language. Journal of the
Ethnological Society of London, v. 4, p. 84-98.
Harkavy, A. 1870. Les mots égyptiens de la Bible. Journal asiatique, 6ème série, v. 15 [96], p. 2732.
Harris, Herrmann Gundert. 1908. Hausa stories and riddles, with notes on the language, etc., and
a concise Hausa dictionary. Weston-super-mare UK: Mendip Press. Pp xv, 111, 33.
The dictionary part was also published separately.
Peripherals: Bernard Struck, Journal of the African Society, v. 7 (1907/08) p. 441-442.
Harris, Herrmann Gundert. 1908. A concise Hausa dictionary. Weston-super-mare UK: Mendip
Press. Pp 33.
This appears also as an appendix to Harris’s Hausa stories and riddles, publ. the same year.
Hartland, Sidney E. 1901. On some problems in early religion, in the light of South African
folklore. Man: a record of anthropological science, v. 1, p. 26 (art. 21).
Hartland, Sidney E. 1915. Ibo-speaking peoples of southern Nigeria. Journal of the African
Society, v. 14, 55, p. 266-270.
Hartmann, A.M. [Rev.]. 1893. An outline of a grammar of the Mashona language. Cape Town:
F.Y. St. Leger. Pp 69.
The author “called the form of Shona which he described the Gomo dialect, no doubt Zezuru as spoken among the
Shawasha” (Fortune 1979:42).
Hartmann, A.M. [Rev.]. 1894. English-Mashona dictionary. Cape Town: J.C. Juta. Pp vi, 74.
Includes c.1,000 entries.
Hartmann, Josef. 1908. Amharische Grammatik. Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner Verlag.
There seems to have been a reprint of this in the early 1980s.
Peripherals: Ludwig Gerhardt, Afrika und Übersee, v. 65 (1982) p. 279-283; A.K. Irvine, Bulletin of the School of
Oriental and African Studies, v. 46 (1983) p. 559-560.
Hartmann, M. 1899. Lieder der libyschen Wüste: die Quellen und die Texte nebst einem Exkurse
über die bedeutenderen Beduinenstämme des westlichen Unterägypten. Abhandlungen für
die Kunde des Morgenlandes, #11:3. Leipzig. Pp viii, 244.
Härtter, G. 1902. Aus der Volksliteratur der Evheer in Togo. Zeitschrift für afrikanische,
ozeanische und ostasiatische Sprachen, v. 6, p. 105-137, 206-221, 239-247.
Härtter, G. 1902. Welcher Dialekt der Evhesprache verdient zur Schrift- und Verkehrssprache im
Evhelande (Togo) erhoben zu werden? Beiträge zur Kolonialpolitik und Kolonialwirtschaft,
v. 3, p. 342-343.
Peripherals: P. Wilhelm Schmidt, “Welcher Dialekt der Evhesprache verdient zur Schrift- und Verkehrssprache im
Evhelande (Togo) erhoben zu werden?”, Beiträge zur Kolonialpolitik und Kolonialwirtschaft, v. 4 (1902) p. 65-70;
Ernst Bürgi, “Welcher Dialekt der Evhesprache verdient zur Schrift- und Verkehrssprache im Evhelande (Süd-Togo)
erhoben zu werden?”, Zeitschrift für afrikanische, ozeanische und ostasiatische Sprachen, v. 6 (1902) p. 223-233.
Hattersley, Charles W.; Duta, Henry Wright. 1904. Luganda phrases and idioms for the new
arrivals and travellers in Uganda. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge
(SPCK). Pp 138.
Haupt, Paul. 1878. The oldest Semitic verb-form. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great
Britain and Northern Ireland, new series, v. 10, p. 244-257.
Hay, John H. Drummond. 1844. Western Barbary: its wild tribes and savage animals. London:
John Murray. Pp vi, 177.
Contains a “Moorish ode” (p. 177), plus apparently something on Berber languages (cfr Jucovy & Alderete 2001).
Haywood, Arthur Hubert Wightwick [Capt.]. 1907. English-Hausa vocabulary of words in
everyday use. London: Kegan Paul & Co. Pp 30.
everyday use. Second edition, enlarged. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co. Pp 31.
Peripherals: G.W.R., Journal of the African Society, v. 13 (1913/14) p. 334-336.
everyday use. Fourth edition, enlarged. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co. Pp 31.
Hedborg, M. 1912. Vocabulaire français-mabinza et mabinza-français. Bruxelles: Imprimerie
Veuve Monnom. Pp 24.
181
Heepe, Martin. 1913/14. Kontinuativ und Imperativ im Jaunde. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v.
4, p. 75-79.
Heepe, Martin. 1914. Suaheli -nge- and -ngani-. Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen
Gesellschaft, v. 68, p. 590-595.
Possibly this deals with Comorian.
Heepe, Martin. 1914. Zur Aussprache der Velarlabialen. Zeitschrift der deutschen
morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 68, p. 583ff.
Heepe, Martin. 1914. Die Komorendialekte Ngazidja und Nzwani. Hamburg: Friederichsen & Co.
Pp vi, 55.
Publication of the author’s dissertation, University of Leipzig, 1914. An enlarged version appeared 1920.
Heepe, Martin. 1918/19. Alte Verbalformen mit vollständiger Vokalassimilation im Suaheli.
Heepe, Martin. (Ed.) 1919. Jaunde-Texte von Karl Atangana und Paul Messi. Abhandlungen der
hamburgischen Kolonial-Inst., #24. Hamburg: Friederichsen, De Gruyter & Co. Pp xvi, 325.
Peripherals: Carl Meinhof, Zeitschrift für Eingeborenen-Sprachen, v. 10 (1919/20) p. 67-68; Carl Meinhof, “Zu
meiner Besprechung”, Zeitschrift für Eingeborenen-Sprachen, v. 10 (1919/20) p. 159-160.
Heepe, Martin. 1919/20. Die Trommelsprache der Jaunde in Kamerun. Zeitschrift für
Eingeborenen-Sprachen, v. 10, 1, p. 43-60.
Heepe, Martin. 1919/20. Weitere Jaunde-Texte. Zeitschrift für Eingeborenen-Sprachen, v. 10, 2, p.
122-147.
Heepe, Martin. 1920. Die Komorendialekte Ngazidja, Nzwani und Mwali. Abhandlungen der
hamburgischen Kolonial-Inst., #23; Reihe B: Völkerkunde, Kulturgeschichte und Sprachen,
#13. Hamburg: Friederichsen, De Gruyter & Co. Pp xi, 166.
This is an extended edition of Heepe’s dissertation (Die Komorendialekte Ngazidja und Nzwani) from 1914, with a
supplementary section of textual material (Doke 1945:65).
Peripherals: Carl Meinhof, Zeitschrift für Eingeborenen-Sprachen, v. 10 (1919/20) p. 67-78, 159-160.
Heepe, Martin. 1926. Darstellung einer Bantusprache aus den Jahren 1821-1822 von Elliott, nach
einer Handschrift der Grey Library in Kapstadt. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische
Sprachen, v. 29, III, p. 191-232.
Contains a manuscript prepared by William Elliott in 1821-1822 plus notes concerning both Elliott and his life
experiences.
Heese, Paul. 1919/20. Die Sango-Sprache: eine kurze Grammatik. Zeitschrift für EingeborenenSprachen, v. 10, p. 87-106.
Hegner, Hermann. 1882. Wörterbuch Nama-Deutsch: abgeschrieben von Br. Krefts Wörterbuch,
angefangen 1871, beendet 1872; vervollständigt aus Krönleins Wörterbuch 1873, weiter
vervollständigt 1882. Manuskript. Berseba (Südwestafrika). Pp 331.
Unsure of the exact difference between this and the other one with a similar title. Referred to by Strohmeyer &
Moritz (1975:113). Available at Rheinische Missionsgesellschaft in Windhoek.
Hegner, Hermann. 1882. Wörterbuch Nama-Deutsch: abgeschrieben von Br. Krefts Wörterbuch,
angefangen am Montag den 23. October 1871, beendet Donnerstag den 3. October 1872;
vervollständigt aus Krönleins Wörterbuch 1873. Manuskript. Berseba (Südwestafrika) &
Rehoboth. Pp 342.
Unsure of the exact difference between this and the other one with a similar title. Referred to by Strohmeyer &
Moritz (1975:113). Contains 3 parts: 1. Names of months; 2. Character of the Nama people; 3. Trees, bushes,
plants and “Zwiebeln”. It is available at the Rheinische Missionsgesellschaft in Windhoek.
Hegner, Hermann. 1907/08. Nama gowab-di ≠gei tsi khom-ei ≠kaniros: Buchstabier- und
Lesebüchlein der Nama-Sprache, 2 Bde. Gütersloh: C. Bertelsmann.
Hegner, Hermann; Westermann, Diedrich. 1909. Nama-Grammatik. In: Lehrbuch der NamaSprache, p. 45-101. Ed. by Carl Meinhof. Lehrbücher des Seminars für orientalische
Sprachen, #23. Berlin: Georg Reimer.
Heinitz, Wilhelm. 1917. Photographische Sprachaufnahmen aus dem ägyptischen Sudan.
Abhandlungen der hamburgischen Kolonial-Inst., #38; Reihe B: Völkerkunde,
Kulturgeschichte und Sprachen, #21. Hamburg: Friederichsen & Co. Pp 103.
182
Contains transcriptions of phonograph recordings of various Nubian languages (= Nilnubisch or Kenuz Fadidja, and
Kordofannubisch, incl. Dair, Gulfan, Garko, Gulfan-Kenuz), Kudugli, Tima, Katla, Tagoy (= Kordofanian), and
Bischarin.
Peripherals: Carl Meinhof, Koloniale Rundschau, v. 9 (1917) p. 335-336.
Heinitz, Wilhelm. 1919. Musikinstrumente und Phonogramme des Ost-Mbamlandes: Beitrag zu
Thorbeckes “Im Hochland von mittel-Kamerun”, 3. Teil. Abhandlungen der hamburgischen
Kolonial-Inst., #30. Hamburg: Friederichsen & Co.
Hélòt, Léon; Hélòt, Henri. 1847. Dictionnaire de poche français-arabe et arabe-français à l’usage
des militaires, des voyagers et des negociants en Afrique. Paris: Dubos Frères & Marest. Pp
xviii, 531.
There are also reprints (tirages) dated 1850, 1858, and later. Some were printed in Algiers, others by Joseph André
in Paris.
Héméry, A. 1901. Vocabulaire français-swahili-teita. Zanzibar: Mission Catholique.
Héméry, A. 1902. Handbook of the Kikuyu language. Roman Catholic Mission (White Fathers).
Pp 87.
English-Kikuyu dictionary. Not sure about the title.
Henderson, J.E. 1xxx. Easy Gikuyu lessons.
Mentioned by Barlow (1914; cfr Doke 1945:14).
Hendle, P.J. 1907. Die Sprache der Wapogoro (Deutsch-Ostafrika) nebst einem DeutschChipogoro und Chipogoro-Deutschen Wörterbuch. Archiv für das Studium der deutscher
Kolonialsprachen, #6. Berlin: Georg Reimer. Pp vii, 171.
Johnston (1919:791) claims erroneously that Eduard Sachau wrote this thing, while Whiteley & Gutkind (1958)
credit it to “Hendel, P.G.” as well as “Reimer, G.” in separate entries. (The latter are the publishers.).
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 7 (1907/08) p. 327-329; Carl Meinhof, Anthropos, v. 3
(1908) p. 1127-1129.
Henrici, Ernst. 1891. Lehrbuch der Ephe-Sprache (Ewe), Anlo-, Anecho- und Dahome-Mundart
mit Glossar und einer Karte der Sklavenküste. Lehrbücher des Seminars für orientalische
Sprachen, #6. Stuttgart & Berlin: Verlag von W. Spemann. Pp xxi, 270.
Henrici, Ernst. 1898. Westafrikanisches Negerenglisch. Anglia, v. 20, p. 397-403.
Henry, George. 1891. Grammar of Chinyanja, a language spoken in British Central Africa, on
and near the shores of Lake Nyasa. Livingstonia: Mission Press.
Henry, George. 1904. Grammar of Chinyanja, a language spoken in British Central Africa, on
and near the shores of Lake Nyasa. Second edition. Aberdeen: G. & W. Fraser. Pp viii, 232.
Published posthumously. Reprinted 1961.
Hensey, A.F. 1913. English-Lonkundo and Lonkundo-English vocabulary. Pp 427.
Details wanting.
Héricourt, C.E.X. Rochet d’. 1841. Voyage sur la côte orientale de la Mer Rouge, dans la pays
d’Adel et le Royaume de Choa. Paris: A. Bertrand. Pp 493.
Includes a section titled “Recueil de mots arabes, amharras et gallas employés usuellement dans la conversation” (p.
371-432), in which there’s an Oromo word list and list of verb conjugations (p. 399-432).
Herrmann, C. [Hauptm.]. 1898. Kissukuma, die Sprache der Wassukuma, speziell der Dialekt der
am Speke-Golf und Smithsund gelegenen nordwestlichen Stämme. Mitteilungen des
This deals with the dialect of the north-western tribes “near Smith Sound and Speke Gulf” (Doke 1945:45).
Herrmann, C. [Hauptm.]. 1904. Lusíba, die Sprache der Länder Kisíba, Bugábu, Kjamtwára, Kjánja
und Ihángiro. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 7, III, p. 150-200.
Hess, Johann Jakob. 1902. Der demotische Teil der dreisprachigen Inschrift von Rosetta
übersetzt und erklärt. Freiburg (im Üechtland): Universitätsbuchhandlung Veith. Pp x, 99.
Publication of the author’s dissertation, University of Strassbourgh, 1902.
Hess, Johann Jakob. 1918/19. Geographische Benennungen und Pflanzennmen in der nördlichen
Bischari-Sprache. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 9, 4, p. (?).
Unsure about the details. If the vol/date is 10 (1919/20), then the jorno is Zeitschrift für Eingeborenen-Sprachen.
Hess, Johann Jakob. 1919/20. Beiträge zur Kenntnis der Kordofân-Nubische Sprache. Zeitschrift
für Eingeborenen-Sprachen, v. 10, p. 63-67.
183
Hesseling, Dirk Christiaan. 1897. Het hollandsch in Zuid-Afrika. De Gids, v. 61, p. 138-162.
Hesseling, Dirk Christiaan. 1899. Het Afrikaansch: bijdrage tot de geschiedenis der
nederlandsche taal in Zuid-Afrika. Leiden: E.J. Brill. Pp 156.
Hesseling, Dirk Christiaan. 1916. De naam Hottentot. Tijdschrift voor nederlandsche taal- en
letterkunde, v. 35, p. 267-274.
Hestermann, P.F. 1912. Der Anlautwechsel in der Serersprache in Senegambien, westafrika.
Wiener Zeitschrift für die Kunde des Morgenlandes, v. 26, p. 350-362.
Hestermann, P.F. 1915. Die Repetition in der Serersprache von Senegambia. Zeitschrift der
Hestermann, P.F. 1918. Die dreistufige Anlautwechsel und die Suffixbildung im Serer. Wiener
Zeitschrift für die Kunde des Morgenlandes, v. 30, p. 223-263.
Hestermann, S. 1912. Kritische Darstellung der neuesten Ansichten über Gruppierungen und
Bewegungen der Sprachen und Völker in Afrika [pt. 1]. Anthropos: internationale
Discusses early classifications, more specifically Meinhof, Westermann and Struck.
Hestermann, S. 1913. Kritische Darstellung der neuesten Ansichten über Gruppierungen und
Bewegungen der Sprachen und Völker in Afrika [pt. 2-3]. Anthropos: internationale
Zeitschrift für Völker- und Sprachenkunde, v. 8, p. 214-250, 1104-1137.
Hetherwick, Alexander [Rev.]. 1889. Introductory handbook and vocabulary of the Yao language.
London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp xvi, 281.
The second edition was retitled A handbook of the Yao language, published 1902.
Hetherwick, Alexander [Rev.]. 1902. A handbook of the Yao language. Second edition. London:
Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp xxii, 420.
The first edition had the title Introductory handbook and vocabulary of the Yao language.
Hetherwick, Alexander [Rev.]. 1904. A practical manual of the Nyanja language. Glasgow &
Blantyre: African Lakes Corp.
Details wanting.
Hetherwick, Alexander [Rev.]. 1907. A practical manual of the Nyanja language. Second edition.
Glasgow & Blantyre: African Lakes Corp.
Details wanting.
Hetherwick, Alexander [Rev.]. 1914. A practical manual of the Nyanja language. Third edition.
Glasgow & Blantyre: African Lakes Corp.
The title appears as “Manual of the Nyanja language” on the front cover.
Hetherwick, Alexander [Rev.]. 1916. A practical manual of the Nyanja language. Fourth edition.
Glasgow & Blantyre: African Lakes Corp. Pp xx, 299.
Heuglin, Theodor von [Baron]. 1877. Reise in Nordost-Afrika: Schilderungen aus dem Gebiete
der Beni Amer und Habab nebst zoologischen Skizzen und einem Führer für Jagdreisende,
2 vols. Braunschweig: G. Westermann.
Includes lots of plant taxonomies. In Arabic?
Hewat, Matthew L. 1906. Bantu folk lore (medical and general). Cape Town: T.M. Miller. Pp 112.
Hewitt, J.A. 1876. The topographical nomenclature of South Africa. Cape monthly magazine, v. 13,
p. 169-175.
Hewitt, J.A. 1877. The names of our rivers. Cape monthly magazine, v. 15, p. 380-381.
Peripherals: J. Noble, “The names of our rivers”, Cape monthly magazine, v. 15 (1877) p. 291-294.
Hichens, William. 1792-1943. Collected papers, manuscripts, and various tidbits, 59 files.
Unpublished miscellanea, ref. GB 0102 PP MSS 34882, 47707-8, 47770, 47779, 47781,
47796-7, 53489-98, 53500-5, 53507-9, 53823-7, 53829, 54342, 193290-2, 196884, 205000,
210002-11, 210013-14, 228624, 253028-9, 256191, 263325. School of Oriental and African
Studies (SOAS), University of London.
184
Listed in the AIM25 database. Comprises Swahili literature, mythologies, vocabularies, correspondence, etc. Not
everything seems to have been produced or written by Hichens; hence the wide date range.
Hildebrandt, J.M. 1876. Fragmente der Johanna-Sprache. Zeitschrift für Ethnologie, v. 8, p. 89-96.
Contains vocabularies of (Comorian) dialects of Johanna Island.
Hinde, Hildegard [Beatrice] [Ginsburg]. 1901. The Masai language: grammatical notes together
with a vocabulary. Cambridge: The University Press. Pp ix, 75.
Peripherals: R.N. Cust, Man, v. 1 (1901) p. 92 (art. 73).
Hinde, Hildegard [Beatrice] [Ginsburg]. 1904. Vocabularies of the Kamba and Kikuyu languages
of East Africa. Cambridge: The University Press. Pp xvii, 75.
Contains grammatical notes and vocabularies of Kamba, Kikuyu and Swahili.
Peripherals: R.W. F[elkin], Man, v. 4 (1904) p. 189.
Hinde, Sidney Langford [Capt.]. 1899. Notes on the Masai section of Lieut.-Colonel
MacDonald’s vocabulary. Journal of the Anthropological Inst. of Great Britain and Ireland,
v. 29, p. 248-249.
Hinks, Arthur R. 1918. Notes on the construction of a general map of Africa, 1/two million. The
geographical journal, v. 52, 4, p. 218-233.
Hirschfield, H. 1919. An Ethiopic-Falasi glossary [pt. 1]. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of
Great Britain and Northern Ireland, 1919, p. 209-220.
Hobley, Charles William. 1902. Eastern Uganda: an ethnological survey. Occasional papers from
the Anthropological Inst. of Great Britain and Ireland, #1. London: The Anthropological Inst.
Pp 95.
Contains linguistic materials for several languages, e.g. Luwanga (Hanga), Ketosh (Masaba), Kossova (Guzii), ThoLuo (Dholuo), Nandi, Elgumi, Lusinga/Chola, Eldorobo (cfr Johnston 1919:787; Rottland 1983:214).
Hobley, Charles William. 1905. Further notes on the El Dorobo or Oggiek. Man: a record of
anthropological science, v. 5, p. 39-44 (art. 21).
Includes “comparative vocabulary of three ‘Dorobo’ dialects, Nandi and Maasai” (Rottland 1983:214).
Hobley, Charles William. 1906. Kikuyu medicines. Man: a record of anthropological science, v.
6, p. 81-83 (art. 54).
Hobley, Charles William. 1910. Ethnology of A-Kamba and other East African tribes. Cambridge:
The University Press. Pp xvi, 172.
Includes a Mogogodo (Yaaku) vocabulary and phrase list (p. 141-155). Reprinted 1972 by Frank Cass & Co. in
London (Cass library of African studies, general studies, #96; ISBN-10 0-7146-1678-8).
URL: www.archive.org/details/ethnologyofakamb00hobluoft
Peripherals: T.E.J., Man, v. 11 (1911) p. 61-62 (art. 40).
Hobley, Charles William; Ravenstein, Ernst Georg. 1899. Vocabularies from Kavirondo, British
East Africa [collected by C.W. Hobley]. Journal of the Anthropological Inst. of Great
Britain and Ireland, v. 28, 3/4, p. 338-342.
Includes comparative vocabularies for the Kisisa dialect of ‘Bantu Kavirondo’ or Kisisa JE32a, Muhasa JE31, Nife
(Luo?), Elgume (Teso), Nandi or Jangwel (Kalenjin) and Lako (Pok).
Hodgson, William Brown. 1834. Grammatical sketch and specimens of the Berber language,
preceded by four letters on Berber etymologies. Transactions of the American Philosophical
Society, new series, v. 4, p. 1-48.
Includes a paper originally read at the American Philosophical Society on October 2, 1929.
Peripherals: Anon, “Hodgon’s memoirs on the Berber language”, The North American review (Cedar Falls IO), v. 35
(1832) p. 54-75.
Hodgson, William Brown. 1844. Notes on northern Africa, the Sahara and Soudan: in relation to
the ethnography, languages, history, political and social condition, of the nations of those
countries. New York: Wiley & Putnam. Pp 107.
Has brief vocabulary materials for several languages, e.g. Berber, Fur Wadai (Maba?), Hausa (c.100 words, p. 109110), Songai/Suaing, Fulah of Massina (collected by one Mr Couper), another Fulah dialect (collected by Hodgson),
and other languages (cfr Latham 1847: passim).
185
Peripherals: Anon, Littell’s living age (New York), v. 4 (1845) p. 733-736; Robert Gordon Latham, “On the
present state and recent progress of ethnographical philology”, Reports of the meeting of the British Association
for the Advancement of Science, v. 17 (1847) p. 154-229.
Hoffmann, C. 1915/16. Märchen und Erzählungen der Eingeborenen in Nord-Transvaal.
Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 6, p. 28-54, 125-153, 206-243, 285-331.
Hofmann, J.B. 1901. Wörterbuch der Kambasprache: Kamba-Deutsch. Leipzig: Leipziger
Mission. Pp 368.
Could be a manuscript.
Hofmeister, J. 1918/19. Kurzgefasste Wute-Grammatik. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 9, 1,
p. 1-19.
Hofmeister, J. 1919. Wörterverzeichnis der Wute-Sprache. Jahrbuch der Hamburger
wissenschaftlichen Anstalten, v. 36, 2, p. 1-49. (Supplement to Mitteilungen des Seminars für
orientalische Sprachen.)
Pagination could be wrong. I’ve also seen 1-14.
Hogg, John. 1852. Notice of recent discoveries in Central Africa by Drs Barth and Overweg, and
of two supposed new languages in that country. Transactions of the Royal Society of
Literature of the United Kingdom, second series, v. 4?, p. (?).
Details wanting. No idea about what languages this deals with.
Hollis, Alfred Claud. 19xx. Pare-Gweno manuscript vocabulary.
Johnston (1919:789) refers to a Pare-Gweno manuscript vocabulary by Hollis, for a language Johnston calls ‘PareGweno’. Presumably this is Gweno E65, not Pare/Asu G22.
Hollis, Alfred Claud. 19xx. Unpublished notes on Turkana.
Mentioned by Barton (1921:43).
Hollis, Alfred Claud. 1905. The Masai: their language and folklore. With an introduction by Sir
Charles Eliot. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Pp xxxii, 364.
Reprinted 1970 by Negro Universities Press in Westport CN (ISBN-10 0-8371-5156-2); and 1971 by Books for
Libraries Press in Freeport NY (The Black library heritage collection; ISBN-10 0-8369-8810-8).
URL: www.archive.org/details/masaitheirlangua00holluoft
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 4 (1904/05) p. 493; A. Werner, Man, v. 5 (1905) p. 108-110;
Carl Meinhof, Zeitschrift für Eingeborenen-Sprachen, v. 37 (1905) p. 637-639.
Hollis, Alfred Claud. 1910. The Nandi: their language and folk-lore. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Pp
xxiv, 328.
Reprinted 1969 (and later?) by Clarendon Press, edited and introduced by G.W.B. Huntingford (ISBN-10 0-19823132-6); and in 1971 by Negro Universities Press in New York.
Peripherals: A. Werner, Man, v. 9 (1909) p. 121-123; Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 10 (1910/11) p.
237-240.
Hollis, Alfred Claud. 1910. Taveta sayings and proverbs. Journal of the African Society, v. 9, 35, p.
255-266.
Hollis, Alfred Claud. 1910/11. Vocabulary of English words and sentences, translated into six
languages or dialects, viz. Zanzibar Swahili (Ki-Unguja), Mombasa Swahili (Ki-Mwita),
Lamu Swahili (Ki-Amu), Patta Swahili (Ki-Pate), Siyu Swahili (Ki-Siu) and Bajun (Faza)
Swahili (Ki-Tikuu). Journal of the African Society, v. 10, supplement, p. 1-24.
Preceded by a preparatory note and orthography explanation by Harry Johnston.
Hollis, Alfred Claud. 1911. Taveta enigmas. Journal of the African Society, v. 10, 38, p. 200-212.
Hollis, Alfred Claud; Werner, Alice. 1916. Nyika proverbs. Journal of the African Society, v. 16,
61, p. 62-70.
Hollis, Alfred Claud; Werner, Alice. 1917. Nyika enigmas. Journal of the African Society, v. 16, 62,
p. 135-142.
Holma, H. 1918. Zur semitisch-hamitischen Wortvergleichung. Zeitschrift für Assyriologie und
Holroyd, Arthur T. 1839. Notes on a journey to Kordofan, in 1836-7. Journal of the Royal
Geographical Society of London, v. 9, p. 163-191.
Includes a “Jebel Nuba” word list (Latham 1847:198).
186
Homburger, Lilias. 1910. Etude de quelques correspondences de sonores bantoues. Mémoires de
la Société de Linguistique de Paris, v. 16, p. (?).
Homburger, Lilias. 1911. Les pronoms de la 1e et 2e personne des parlers bantu. Mémoires de la
Société de Linguistique de Paris, v. 17, p. (?).
Homburger, Lilias. 1912. Le wolof et les parlers bantou. Mémoires de la Société de Linguistique
de Paris, v. 17, 5, p. 311-336.
Homburger, Lilias. 1913. Etude sur la phonétique historique du bantou. Bibliothèque de l’Ecole
des Hautes Etudes, section des sciences historiques et philologiques, #209. Paris: Librairie
Ancienne Honoré Champion. Pp x, 396.
“The first part of this work consists of a bibliography and a rather imprecise outline of the sounds occuring in the
languages dealt with. The body of the work is made up of long lists of words from some 70 languages and dialects
under the heading of starred roots ... The inadequacy of the transcription used in a large number of cases impairs the
value of the material even as a source for those who cannot consult the original works” (Guthrie 1971:113).
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 13 (1913/14) p. 454-455; A. Werner, Man, v. 15 (1915) p. 48
(art. 30); C.M. Doke, “The growth of comparative Bantu philology (revised)”, African studies, v. 19 (1960) p.
193-218.
Homburger, Lilias. 1913. Morphèmes africains en peul et dans les parlers bantous. Mémoires de la
Société de Linguistique de Paris, v. 18, 3, p. (?).
Homburger, Lilias. 1915. Le bantou et le mandé. Mémoires de la Société de Linguistique de Paris,
v. 19, p. 224-242.
Hommel, Fritz. 1891. Das semitische Imperfect im alt-ägyptischen nachgewiesen. Ansbach
(Deutschland).
Hommel, Fritz. 1894. Über den Grad der Verwandtschaft des Altägyptischen mit dem Semitischen.
Beiträge zur Assyriologie und semitischen Sprachwissenschaft, v. 2, p. 342-358.
Hommel, Fritz. 1899. Die ältesten Lautwerte einiger ägyptischen Buchstabenzeichen. Zeitschrift
Honey, Charles Robertson. 1901. The Egyptian negative. New York: Evening Post Job Printing
House. Pp 10.
Offprints?
Honey, James Albert. 1910. South African folktales. New York: Baker & Taylor.
Includes English translations of stories “mainly from the Bushmen. Some are perverted types from what were
originally Bushmen tales, but have been taken over by Hottentots or Zulus; a few are from the Dutch. Most of these
last named will show a European influence, especially French” (p.1f). There’s a section titled “Origin of the
difference in modes of life between Hottentots and Bushmen” (p.8-9) and “A Zulu version of the legend of the
‘Origin of death’” (p.147).
URL: www.archive.org/details/southafricanfolk00hone
URL: www.sacred-texts.com/afr/saft/index.htm
Hopkinson, E. 1911. A vocabulary of the Mandingo language, as spoken in the Gambia. London:
West, Newman & Co. Pp xii, 72.
Hornberger, Chr. 1867. Das Ewe-Gebiet an der Sklavenküste von West-Afrika. Petermanns
geographische Mitteilungen (Mittheilungen aus Justus Perthes’ Geographischer Anstalt
über wichtige neue Erforschungen auf dem Gesammtgebiete der Geographie), v. 13, p. 4854.
“Enthält kein sprachliches Material, nur eine vergleichende Übersicht von 16 Wörtern und der Zahlen 1-21 ... ‘Ewe
Anglo Dahome Kposo, Aku Sprache (Ana-Dialekt) Afatime Sprache’ ... Ohne Bedeutung” (Hintze 1959:54).
Hornbostel, E.M. von. 1909. Wanyamwezi-Gesänge. Anthropos: internationale Zeitschrift für
Völker- und Sprachenkunde, v. 4, p. 781-88, 1033-1052.
Peripherals: Carl Meinhof, Die evangelischen Missionen, v. 16 (1910) p. 46-47.
Hörner, M. Erasmus. 1899. Grammatik der Shambalasprache. Natal.
Not sure what this is. Referred to by Whiteley & Gutkind (1958). It could be a pre-publication version of Hörner’s
1900-grammar, or even the same thing.
187
Hörner, M. Erasmus. 1900. Kleine Leitfaden zur Erlernung des Kishambala. Marianhill: St.
Thomas Aquinas Druckerei. Pp 340.
Houdas, Octave. 1897. Précis de grammaire arabe (arabe régulier et vulgaire). Paris: Librairie
Africaine & Coloniale (Joseph André).
Houdas, Octave. 1897. Premières notions de langue arabe. Paris: Librairie Africaine & Coloniale
(Joseph André). Pp 82.
Extracts from Précis de grammaire arabe.
Hove, Florent van [R.P.]. 1911. Esquisse de la langue des wankutshu. Anthropos: internationale
Hovelacque, Abel. 1876. Les langues agglutinantes. In: La linguistique, p. 55-154. Paris: Reinwald.
Deals with African languages on p. 69-73.
Hovelacque, Abel. 1877. The agglutinative languages. In: The science of language, p. (?).
Translated by A.H. Keane. London: Chapman & Hall.
Hughes, Isaac. 1834. Sechuana grammar, copied from a manuscript belonging to Sir George Grey
for the late Right Reverend Bishop Mackenzie. Griquatown. Pp 242.
Referred to by Peters & Tabane (1982:vii+61). This is probably the same as Hughes (1859).
Hughes, Isaac. 1859. Rudiments of a Sechuana grammar. Cape Town: South African National
Library. Pp 242.
“This study of Tswana grammatical structure shows him [i.e. the author] to have been a man of logical mind and
considerable ability in the linguistic studies of his day ... It takes cognizance of pitch or tone of syllables, and even
uses marks to indicate them” (Sandilands 1958:192). Curiously, it was never printed nor published. This is
probably the same as Hughes (1834).
Peripherals: Alexander Sandilands, “The ancestor of Tswana grammars”, African studies, v. 17 (1958) p. 192-197.
Hunter, Fred Mercer A. 1880. A grammar of the Somali language with an English-Somali and
Somali-English vocabulary. Bombay: Education Society’s Press, Byculla. Pp 181.
Huppenbauer, Hans. 1914/15. Moba-Sprache (Mole): Grammatik; Wörterverzeichnis MobaDeutsch, Deutsch-Moba. Manuskript. Pp 120.
Huppenbauer, Hans. 1915/16. Basari (Ntjam): Grammatik; Wörterverzeichnis Ntjam-Deutsch,
Deutsch-Ntjam. Manuskript. Pp 150.
Huppenbauer, Hans. 1915/16. Konkomba: Substantiva; Wörterverzeichnis Konkomba-Deutsch,
Deutsch-Konkomba. Manuskript. Pp 90.
Hurel, Eugène [R.P.]. 1909. La langue kikerewe: essai de grammaire. Mitteilungen des Seminars
Grammar followed by a vocabulary.
Hurel, Eugène [R.P.]. 1911. Manuel de langue kinyarwanda. Mitteilungen des Seminars für
Unsure about the pagination.
Hutton, William. 1821. A voyage to Africa, including a narrative of an embassy to one of the
interior kingdoms, in the year 1820, with remarks on the the course and termination of the
Niger, and other principal rovers in that country. London: Longman, Hurst, Rees, Orme &
Brown. Pp x, 488.
Includes Fanti vocabularies.
Huyghe, G. 1901. Qamus qbaili-rumi / Dictionnaire kabyle-français. Deuxième édition. Paris. Pp
xxvii, 354.
Huyghe, G. 1903. Dictionnaire français-kabyle. Malines (Belgique). Pp xvi, 893.
Huyghe, G. 1906. Dictionnaire français-chaouia. Alger. Pp viii, 750.
Huyghe, G. 1907. Dictionnaire chaouia-arabe-kabyle & français / Qamus caui-arbi-qbaili u
rumi. Alger: Librairie Adolphe Jourdan. Pp xiv, 571.
Hynde, R.S. 1890. Yao primer and first reader; prepared for the use in Yao-speaking schools.
Church of Scottland Mission, East Africa.
188
Hynde, R.S. 1894. Second Yao-English primer. London: Society for Promoting Christian
Knowledge (SPCK). Pp 104.
Illiare, W. von St. Paul. 1890. Suaheli Handbuch. Lehrbücher des Seminars für orientalische
Sprachen, #2. Stuttgart & Berlin: Verlag von W. Spemann. Pp xxvi, 202.
Illiare, W. von St. Paul. 1896. Suaheli Sprachführer. Pp c.600.
Details wanting. Contains “vocabulary, phrases and conversation covering a very wide range of subjects and topics
(there are also eleven pages of errata!)” (Doke 1945:60).
Irle snr, Jakob. 1913/14. Herero-Sprichwörter. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 4, p. 1-19.
Irle snr, Jakob. 1917. Deutsch-Herero Wörterbuch. Abhandlungen der hamburgischen KolonialInst., #32; Reihe B: Völkerkunde, Kulturgeschichte und Sprachen, #18. Hamburg:
Friederichsen, De Gruyter & Co. Pp viii, 455.
Peripherals: M. von Tiling, Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 8 (1917/18) p. 75-77; Carl Meinhof, Petermanns
geographische Mitteilungen, v. 64 (1918) p. 140.
Irle snr, Jakob. 1917/18. Herero-Texte. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 8, p. 36-45.
Isenberg, Karl Wilhelm [Rev.]. 1840. A small vocabulary of the Dankali language, in three parts:
Dankali and English, English and Dankali, and a selection of Dankali sentences with
English translations. London: Church Missionary Society (CMS). Pp xvi, 22.
Isenberg, Karl Wilhelm [Rev.]. 1841. Dictionary of the Amharic language in two parts: AmharicEnglish and English-Amharic, 2 vols. London: Richard Watts for the Church Missionary
Society (CMS). Pp vii, 215; 218.
Isenberg, Karl Wilhelm [Rev.]. 1842. Grammar of the Amharic language. London: Church
Missionary Society (CMS). Pp x, 184.
Isenberg, Karl Wilhelm [Rev.]. 1842. Sommalia: Wörter, grammatische Biegungen und Phrasen in
der Sommalsprache gesammelt in Zeila im J. 1842. Pp 14.
A manuscript received by the library of the Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft in 1851; see Zeitschrift der
deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 5 (1851), p. 548.
Iwarson, J.; Tron, A. 1918. Notizie storiche e varie sulla missione evangelica svedese dell’Eritrea,
1866-1916. Asmera. Pp x, 53.
“An account of the Swedish mission in Eritrea, and despite of its popular contents an important source for the
history of early printing and publishing in Ethiopia, with a bibliography of the works issued by the Mission Press
up to 1918” (Smitskamp Oriental Antiquarium Catalogue #617, entry 225).
Jackson, James Grey; Shabeeny, El Hage Abd Salam. 1820. An account of Timbuctoo and
Howssa, territories in the interior of Africa; with notes, critical and explanatory; to which is
added, letters descriptive of travels through west and south Barbary, and across the
mountains of Atlas, also, fragments, notes, and anecdotes, specimens of the Arabic
epistolary style, &c. London: Longman, Hurst, Rees, Orme & Brown. Pp xxx, 547.
Has something on Mandingo and Howssa (Hausa). The book relies on an account told to the author by one El Hage
Abd Salam Shabeeny.
Jacottet, Edouard. 1893. Introduction: an elementary sketch of Sesuto grammar. In: Sesuto-English
dictionary, p. (?). Ed. by Adolphe Mabille.
Jacottet, Edouard. 1895. Contes populaires des ba-souto (Afrique du Sud). Paris: Ernest Leroux.
Jacottet, Edouard. 1896. Etudes sur les langues du haut-Zambèze, 1: grammaires soubiya et
louyi. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp xxxvii, 134.
Jacottet, Edouard. 1901. Etudes sur les langues du haut-Zambèze, 2: textes soubiya. Paris: Ernest
Leroux. Pp x, 182.
Jacottet, Edouard. 1901. Etudes sur les langues du haut-Zambèze, 3: textes louyi. Paris: Ernest
Leroux. Pp xii, 238.
Jacottet, Edouard. 1906. A practical method to learn Sesuto with exercises and a short vocabulary.
Morija: Sesuto Book Depot.
Jacottet, Edouard. 1907. Bantu phonetics. Supplement to The Christian express, September 1907.
Alice: Lovedale Mission Press.
Issued anonymously. Discusses sound changes in Bantu, but seems to be scarcely more than a review of Meinhof’s
Grundriss einer Lautlehre der Bantusprachen (1899), Das Tshivenda: linguistische Studie (1901), and
Hottentottische Laute und Lehnwörter im Kaffir (1904/05).
189
Peripherals: H.H. Johnston, The geographical journal, v. 31 (1908) p. 94-96.
Jacottet, Edouard. 1908. Grammar e nyenyane ea Sesotho. Morija: Morija Printing Press. Pp vi,
70.
Jacottet, Edouard. 1908. The treasury of Ba-Suto lore, being original Se-Suto text with a literal
English translation and notes, pt. 1. Morija & London: Sesuto Book Depot; Kegan Paul.
Peripherals: S.S.D., Journal of the African Society, v. 9 (1909/10) p. 110-112.
Jacottet, Edouard. 1914. Practical method to learn Sesuto with exercises and a short vocabulary.
New edition. Morija: Sesuto Book Depot. Pp viii, 232.
Jacottet, Edouard. 1918. Practical method to learn Sesuto with exercises and a short vocabulary.
New edition. Morija: Sesuto Book Depot. Pp viii, 232.
Jahn, Adolf. 1910. Lautlehre der Saho-Sprache in Nordabessinien. Jahresbericht der kaiserlichköniglichen Staats-Realschule, v. 24, p. 3-38.
Jalla, Adolphe. 1910. Litaba tsa sechaba sa Marotse. Firenze.
“Notes sur les Louyi en sotho” (Homburger 1925:168).
Jalla, Adolphe. 1917. Sikololo-English dictionary. Pp 205.
Details wanting.
Jalla, Adolphe. 1917. English-Sikololo dictionary. Torre Pellice (Italy): Imprimerie Alpine for the
British South Africa Company (BSAC). Pp 161.
Jalla, Adolphe. 1917. Elementary grammar of the Sikololo language. Pp 102.
Details wanting.
Jannsens, A. 1895. Eléments du dialecte muluba, haut Kassai. Mouvement Géographique. Pp 185.
Jaubert, P.-A. 1844. Dictionnaire français-berbère. Paris: Imprimerie Royale. Pp iv, 656.
Jucovy & Alderete (2001) credit an identical work to Charles Brosselard.
Jayakar, A.S. 1889. The Omanée dialect of Arabic. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great
Britain and Northern Ireland, new series, v. 21, p. 649-687, 811-889.
Jayakar, A.S. 1904. The Shahee dialect of Arabic. Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal
Asiatic Society, v. 21, p. 246-277.
Jayakar, A.S. 1904. Omanée proverbs. Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society,
v. 21, p. 435-498.
Jeand’heur, F. 1893. Vocabulaire français-agni. Paris: Librairie Plon.
Based on the Assinie dialect.
Jeffreys, Merwyn David Waldegrave. 1970. Letters to the editor [on Ökönyöñ words]. African
studies, v. 29, 4, p. 293-294.
Has no proper title. Contains a one and a half page long word list for Ökönyöñ, an Upper Cross language. The item
in question was originally compiled and published in 1917 by a Scottish missionary, Miss M. Amess, in Nigeria.
Jenkins, E.V. [Maj.]. 1908/09. An English-Arabic vocabulary with grammar and phrases
(representing the language as spoken by Uganda Sudanese in the Uganda and British East
Africa Protectorate). Kampala: The Uganda Co. Pp iv, 104.
Peripherals: Anon [Alice Werner], Journal of the African Society, v. 9 (1909/10) p. 328-329.
Jenkinson, Thomas B. 1882. Amazulu: the Zulus, their past history, manners, customs, and
language, with observations on the country and its productions, climate, etc., the Zulu War,
and Zululand since the war. London: W.H. Allen & Co. Pp x, 215.
Reprinted 1968 by the State Library in Pretoria (State Library reprints, #23); and 1969 by Negro Universities Press
in New York.
Jenkinson, Thomas B. 1884. Amazulu: the Zulus, their past history, manners, customs, and
language, with observations on the country and its productions, climate, etc., the Zulu War,
and Zululand since the war. Second edition. London: W.H. Allen & Co. Pp x, 268.
Jenniges, Emile. 1909. Dictionnaire français-kiluba, exposant le vocabulaire de la langue kiluba
telle qu’elle se parle au Katanga. Bruxelles: Ministère des Colonies, Belgique. Pp 192.
Jenniges, J.-M. 1908. Traité de kiluba-sanga tel, qu’il est parlé au secteur du Haut Luapula
(Katanga) et régions limitrophes. Publication de l’Etat Indépendant du Congo. Pp 44.
Jesus, Sebastião de. 1883. Dicionário n’bundo. Manuscripto.
190
“About 1883 Sebastião de Jesus completed [the above-mentioned title] ... which was not without value, but the
author died before he could find a publisher. It still exists in manuscript, but is not worth publishing now” (Doke
1945:23).
Johanssen, Ernst; Döring, P. Paul. 1914/15. Das Leben der Schambala, beleuchtet durch ihre
Sprichwörter: ein Beitrag zum Verständnis der Eingeborenen Deutsch-Ostafrikas. Zeitschrift
für Kolonialsprachen, v. 5, p. 137-150, 190-226, 306-318.
Johnes, Arthur James. 1854. Philological proofs of the original unity and recent origin of the
human race, derived from a comparison of the languages of Asia, Europe, Africa, and
America, being an inquiry how far the differences in the languages of the globe are
referrible to causes now in operation. London: John Russell Smith. Pp lx, 172, 103.
Chapter IV is titled “Identity of the Egyptians with the Indians, Jews, and other branches of the human race” (p.
125-146). Appendix A(p. 1-82) contains comparative tables with lexical specimens various unidentified African
languages. Appendix B (p. 83-94) contains the same “African words geographically arranged”, and mentions
Egypt, Nubia and Abyssinia, Berbers and Dongolans, Phellatahs and Fulahs, Jolofs and Serers, Mandingoes,
Jalunkan and Sokko, Kanga, Mangree and Gien, Fetu, Fanti and Gold Coast, Amina, Akkim and Akripon, Akrai and
Tambi, Widah, Papah, and Watje, Kongo and Angola, Loango, Mandongo and Camba, Karabari, Ibo, and Mokko,
Wawu and Temu, Krepeers, Ashantees, and Kassenti, Affadeh, Mobba and Schilluck, plus Dâr Fûr and Dâr Runga.
URL: www.archive.org/details/philologicalproo00johnuoft
Johnson, H. 1882. Nupe reading-book for the use of the schools in the Niger Mission of the
Church Missionary Society. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK).
Pp 48.
Johnson, H. 1905. Nupe reading-book for the use of the schools in the Niger Mission of the
Church Missionary Society. Second edition. London: Society for Promoting Christian
Knowledge (SPCK).
Johnson, Henry; Christaller, Johann Gottlieb [Rev.]. 1886. Vocabularies of the Niger and Gold
Coast, West Africa. With a preface by R. Cust. London: Society for Promoting Christian
Knowledge (SPCK). Pp iv, 34.
Includes lexical specimens of Yoruba (p. 1-4), Nupe (p. 5-8), Kakanda (p. 9-12), Igbira (p. 13-16), Igara (p. 17-20),
Ibo (p. 21-24), Gá Akrá (p. 27-30), and Obutu (p. 31-34).
Johnston, Alex. 1929. The life and letters of Sir Harry Johnston. London: Jonathan Cape. Pp 351.
Peripherals: A. W[erner], Journal of the African Society, v. 29 (1929/30) p. 205-207.
Johnston, Harry Hamilton [Sir]. 1884. The River Congo, from its mouth to Bolobo: a general
description of the natural history and anthropology of its western basin. London: Sampson
Low, Marston, Searle & Rivington. Pp xvii, 470.
Includes linguistic notes about Kibuma B82 (p. 457-458). There are several subsequent editions of this book.
Johnston, Harry Hamilton [Sir]. 1885. The Bantu languages of Kilima-njaro: Ki-caga, Ki-taveita,
Ki-gweno. In: The Kilima-Njaro expedition: a record of scientific exploration in eastern
equatorial Africa, and a general description of the natural history, languages, and
commerce of the Kilima-Njaro District, p. 478-534. London: Kegan Paul & Trench.
There’s something on the Maasai (p. 453-477, 501-520), too, in this book.
Johnston, Harry Hamilton [Sir]. 1888. The Bantu borderland in western Africa. Proceedings of the
Royal Geographical Society and monthly record of geography, new monthly series, v. 10, 10,
p. 633-637.
Peripherals: ..., “Explorations in the Cameroons district western equatorial Africa”, Zeitschrift für afrikanische
Sprachen, v. 2 (1888/89) p. 159-160.
Johnston, Harry Hamilton [Sir]. 1892. Vocabulaire mangbétu. In: Dix ans en Equatorie, p. 483.
What’s “Dix ans en Equatorie”?
Johnston, Harry Hamilton [Sir]. 1895. The River Congo, from its mouth to Bolobo: a general
description of the natural history and anthropology of its western basin. Fourth edition,
revised and cheaper. London: Sampson Low, Marston & Co. Pp xv, 300.
Johnston, Harry Hamilton [Sir]. 1897. British Central Africa: an attempt to give some account of
a portion of the territories under British influence north of the Zambezi. London: Methuen
& Co. Pp xix, 544.
URL: www.archive.org/details/britishafrica00johnuoft
Peripherals: Anon, The geographical journal, v. 10 (1897) p. 410-412.
191
Johnston, Harry Hamilton [Sir]. 1899. British Central Africa: an attempt to give some account of
a portion of the territories under British influence north of the Zambezi. Second edition.
London: Methuen & Co. Pp xix, 544.
Not sure how this is different from the first edition. Includes linguistic specimens for Manyema D27?, Guha D28,
Wemba M42, Emba/Luemba M42?, Lungu M14, Mambwe M15, Fipa M13, Wungu F25, Sukuma F21, Nyixa M23,
Wandia M21, Nyikiusa M31, Kese G67, Henga N21, Tonga N15?, Senga N41, Bisa M51, Chewa N31,
Nyanja/Chipeta N31, Nyanja/Mang’anja N31, Sena/Nyungwi N43, Mbo P34?, Mazaro N44?, Pozo N46, Chuambo
P34, Lomwe P32, Makua P31, Yao P21, and Ngindo P14. Reprinted 1969 by Negro Universities Press in New York.
Johnston, Harry Hamilton [Sir]. 1902. The Uganda Protectorate, 2 vols. London: Hutchinson &
Co. Pp 1018.
The second volume (p. 885-1001) contains vocabulary material for Abaluki C37?, Abüdja C37?, Acholi (West
Nilotic), Aluru (West Nilotic), Avukaya (Central Sudanic), Bakawari JD56, Bambute D313?, Bari (West Nilotic),
Bomangi C37?, Dorobo (South Nilotic), Elgumi/Teso (East Nilotic), Ganda JE15, Gesu JE31a, Hima JE13, Igizii
JE42, Ilingi C42?, Jaluo (West Nilotic), Kabarasi JE32e, Kakisera (East Nilotic), Kamasia (South Nilotic),
Karamojo (East Nilotic), Kibira D32, Kikuyu E51, Konde/Elgon JE31a, Konjo JD41, Kuamba E55, Lango (West
Nilotic), Lega D28, Lendu (Central Sudanic), Libvanuma D331, Logbwari (Central Sudanic), Madi (Central Sudanic),
Makarka (Zande?), Mangala C36d, Masai (East Nilotic), Mbuba D33, Mundu (Ngbaka Ubangi?), Nandi (South
Nilotic), Ngishu (East Nilotic?), Nyara JE18, Nyoro JE11, Ruanda JD61, Sese D32, Singa JE32a, Soga JE16,
Sokwia JE31a, Somal (Cushitic), Suk (South Nilotic), Toro JE12, Turkana (East Nilotic), Upoto C36a, Wanga
JE32a.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 1 (1901/02) p. 462; E. H[eawood], The geographical journal,
v. 20 (1902) p. 328-331.
Johnston, Harry Hamilton [Sir]. 1903. Bantu languages. Encyclopaedia britannica, 10th edition, v.
(?), p. (?).
Johnston, Harry Hamilton [Sir]. 1904. The Uganda Protectorate, 2 vols. Second edition. London:
Hutchinson & Co.
Unsure of the difference between this and the 1902-edition. Possibly very little.
Johnston, Harry Hamilton [Sir]. 1906. Liberia, 2 vols. London: Hutchinson & Co. Pp xxviii; xvi,
1184.
Contains a section “The languages of Liberia” (p. 1091-1160) including vocabulary materials for De (Kru?), Basa
(Kru), Kru (Kru), Grebo (Kru), Padebu (Kru), Kpwesi (West Mande), Buzi (West Mande), Mandina (Manding), Vai
(North Mande), Gora (Mel?), Bulom (Mel), Fula (North Atlantic) and Wolof (North Atlantic).
URL: www.archive.org/details/liberiaharr02johnuoft
Peripherals: Anon, “Sir Harry Johnston’s ‘Liberia’”, Journal of the African Society, v. 6 (1907) p. 177-185.
Johnston, Harry Hamilton [Sir]. 1907. The basis for a comparative grammar of the Bantu
languages. Journal of the African Society, v. 7, 25, p. 13-19.
This is a review of Meinhof’s Grundzüge einer vergleichenden Grammatik der Bantusprachen, published 1906.
Peripherals: Carl Meinhof, “Note”, Journal of the African Society, v. 7 (1907/08) p. 20-25; Sir Harry Johnston,
“Additional note”, Journal of the African Society, v. 7 (1907/08) p. 25-27.
Johnston, Harry Hamilton [Sir]. 1907. The origin of the Bantu. Journal of the African Society, v. 6,
24, p. 329-340.
Johnston, Harry Hamilton [Sir]. 1908. George Grenfell and the Congo: a history and description
of the Congo Independent State and adjoining districts of Congoland, together with some
account of the native peoples and their languages, the fauna and flora; and similar notes on
the Cameroons and the island of Fernando Pô, the whole founded on the diaries and
researches of the late Rev. George Grenfell, B.M.S., F.R.G.S.; and on the records of the
British Baptist Missionary Society; and on additional information contributed by the author,
by the Rev. Lawson Forfeitt, Mr Emil Torday, and others, 2 vols. London: Hutchinson &
Co. Pp 990.
Includes sections/chapters on “Modern missionary pioneers in Congoland”, “Modern history of Congo”,
“Grenfell’s 1ast journey beyond Stanley Pool”, “Discovery of Mubangi”, “Lunda expedition”, “Congoland before
white man ruled”, “Anthropology”, “Traditions, stories”, “Languages”, and many other things. Vol 2 contains brief
vocabularies of, e.g., Ndunga-le (p. 833), Mangbetu (p. 836), Mba-ne (p. 876).
Peripherals: N.W. Thomas, “Sir Harry Johnston on ‘George Grenfell and the Congo’”, Journal of the African
Society, v. 8 (1908) p. 21-30; Ralph Durand, Man, v. 9 (1909) p. 11-12.
Johnston, Harry Hamilton [Sir]. 1910. Die Rassen Afrikas. Stuttgart.
Probably a translation of some earlier English publication.
Johnston, Harry Hamilton [Sir]. 1910/11. Bantu languages. Encyclopaedia britannica, 11th
edition, v. (?), p. (?).
192
This is a revision of the article that he had written for the tenth edition.
Johnston, Harry Hamilton [Sir]. 1917. The Bantu and Semi-Bantu languages. Journal of the
Johnston, Harry Hamilton [Sir]. 1919. Collected Bantu and Semi-Bantu vocabularies. Manuscripts
and notes in 3 boxes, ref. GB 0102 MS 193299. School of Oriental and African Studies
Contains the manuscripts for what later ended up in his two-volume comparative work of 1919/22 (Anderson &
Seton 1995:55).
Johnston, Harry Hamilton [Sir]. 1919. Bantu languages: an English work on African dialects. The
times (London), July 8, p. (?).
Johnston, Harry Hamilton [Sir]. 1919/22. A comparative study of the Bantu and semi-Bantu
languages, 2 vols. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Pp xi, 819; xii, 544.
Reprinted 1977 by AMS Press in New York (ISBN-10 0-404-12092-X set).
URL: www.archive.org/details/comparativestudy01johnuoft
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 18 (1918/19) p. 322; A.C., The geographical journal, v. 54
(1919) p. 253-254; Carl Meinhof, Zeitschrift für Eingeborenen-Sprachen, v. 10 (1919/20) p. 156-159; E.A.
Hooton, Journal of Negro history, v. 5 (1920) p. 383-385; A. Werner, Man, v. 20 (1920) p. 12-15 (art. 7); A.
W[erner], Journal of the African Society, v. 21 (1921/22) p. 340-341; A. Werner, Man, v. 22 (1922) p. 156-158
(art. 88); Anon, Journal of Negro history, v. 8 (1923) p. 241-242; W.A. C[rabtree], The geographical journal, v. 61
(1923) p. 57-59; C.M. Doke, “The growth of comparative Bantu philology (revised)”, African studies, v. 19
(1960) p. 193-218.
Joly, Alexandre. 1909. Chansons du repertoire algerois. Revue africaine: journal des traveaux de
la Société Historique Algérienne, v. 53, p. 46-66.
Joly, Alexandre. 1909. Poesies de sud [pt. 1]. Revue africaine: journal des traveaux de la Société
Historique Algérienne, v. 53, p. 285-307.
Joly, Alexandre. 1910. Poesies de sud [pt. 2]. Revue africaine: journal des traveaux de la Société
Historique Algérienne, v. 54, p. 96.
Joly, Alexandre. 1911. Le chaouiya des Ouled-Sellem, suivi d’un vocabulaire [pt. 1]. Revue
africaine: journal des traveaux de la Société Historique Algérienne, v. 55, 4, p. (?).
Joly, Alexandre. 1912. Le chaouiya des Ouled-Sellem, suivi d’un vocabulaire [pt. 2]. Revue
africaine: journal des traveaux de la Société Historique Algérienne, v. 56, 2, p. (?).
Jomard, Edme François. 1845. Observations sur le voyage au Darfour, suivies d’un vocabulaire
de la langue des habitants et de remarques sur le Nil-Blanc supérieur. Paris: Benjamin
Duprat. Pp 76.
Includes apparently a vocabulary of Kissour or Songhai (cfr Latham 1847:186).
Jones, A. [Rev.]. 1889. Unpublished vocabulary of Guha. London Missionary Society (LMS),
Tanganyika.
Listed by Johnston (1919:792) as one of his sources.
Jones, Daniel. 1907. Implosive sounds and clicks. Le maître phonétique, novembre/décembre
1907, p. (?).
According to Breckwoldt (1972, fig 2), the author uses the following symbols for the clicks: ‹px2› for the bilabial
[O]; ‹tx2› for the dental [/]; ‹cx2› for the palatal [≠]; ‹xx2› for the alveolar [!]; and a rather complex one for the
lateral [//] which seems uninterpretable without Jones’ original article. NB! In Jones’ click symbols, the medial ‹x›
should be superscript and the final ‹2› should be subscript.
Jones, Daniel. 1911. The pronunciation and orthography of the Chindau language. London:
Hodder & Stoughton for the University of London Press. Pp 16.
Jones, Daniel. 1917. The phonetic structure of the Sechuana language. Transactions of the
Philological Society, 1917, p. 99-106.
Jones, Daniel; Plaatje, Sol[omon] Tshekisho. 1916. A Sechuana reader (Lipalo tsa Sechuana) in
international phonetic orthography, with English translations. London: University of
London Press. Pp xxviii, 45.
Reprinted 1970 together with Daniel Jones’s The tones of Sechuana nouns (1929) by Gregg International (ISBN-10
0-576-11455-3; 114 pp).
Peripherals: A. W[erner], Journal of the African Society, v. 16 (1916/17) p. 267; A. Werner, Man, v. 17 (1917) p.
180-182 (art. 125); A.N. Tucker, “Systems of tone-marking African languages”, Bulletin of the School of Oriental
and African Studies, v. 27 (1964) p. 594-611.
193
Jones, David Picton. 1890. Grammar and vocabulary of Mambwe. London Missionary Society
(LMS).
Jones, David Picton. 1893. Outlines of Ki-Mambwe grammar, with English-Kimambwe and
Kimambwe-English vocabularies appended. London Missionary Society (LMS). Pp 124.
Jones, David Picton. 1901. An English-Kimambwe and a Kimambwe-English vocabulary. London
Missionary Society (LMS).
Joulord, R.P.J. 1907. Manuel français-dahoméen: grammaire, phrases usuelles, vocabulaires.
Lyon: Veuve Paquet. Pp 220.
Joulord, R.P.J. 1914. Manuel de conversation française-dahoméenne. Albi (France): Imprimerie
des Orphelins Apprentis pour la Société des Missions Africaines de Lyon.
Jouvencel, P. 1876. Sur les peuples de l’Afrique australe. Bulletins de la Société d’Anthropologie
de Paris, 2ème série, v. 11, p. 350-359.
Not sure of contents.
Jouvencel, P. 1876. Sur la langue et les traditions des bochimans. Bulletins de la Société
d’Anthropologie de Paris, 2ème série, v. 11, p. 398-402.
Juanola, Joaquin. 1890. Primer paso á la lengua bubí, ó sea ensayo á una gramática de este
idioma. Madrid: Imprenta de A. Pérez Dubrull. Pp 189.
Botne (1999:507) gives the title as Grammatica de la lengua bubi, Fernando Poo. It deals with the northern dialect
at San Carlos and the western dialect at Conception. According to Doke (1945:3), this is “a model of what a Bantu
grammar should not be. It would weary to give the many instances of this which one might quote. Let two suffice. In
the first place he entirely missed the significance of the noun classes, calling the noun prefixes ‘articles’ as the
Spanish ‘el’, ‘la’, ‘lo’, ‘los’ and ‘las’. On page 20, for instance, he sets out four ways of forming plurals in Bube: (i)
by adding a word of quantity, e.g. ‘chobo’ > ‘chobo nkenke’; (ii) by inflexion, i.e. ‘bompo’ > ‘bempo’; (iii) by
inflexion and addition, e.g. ‘eria’ > ‘biria’; and (iv) by change of word (“por cambio de Palabra”), ‘lottó’ > ‘mattó’.
In the second place, his verb classifications are hopelessly mixed; in one of these (page 61) he makes the division
into auxiliary, regular, irregular, reflexive, reciprocal and impersonal, shewing no grasp of the principle of verbal
derivation.”.
Judas, Auguste-Célestin. 1842. Essai sur la langue phénicienne: avec deux inscriptions puniques
inédite. Paris: Duriez. Pp 93.
Judas, Auguste-Célestin. 1847. Etude démonstrative de la langue phénicienne et de la langue
libyque.
Not sure about this one. Details wanting.
Judas, Auguste-Célestin. 1847. Note sur l’alphabet berbère. Journal asiatique, 4ème série, v. (?), p.
(?).
The vol no is either 9 (OS 50) or 10 (OS 51).
Judas, Auguste-Célestin. 1848. Etude comparative de la langue berbère. Revue de l’Orient et de
l’Algérie, 2ème série, v. 3, p. 57.
Judas, Auguste-Célestin. 1857. Nouvelles études sur les inscriptions numidico-puniques dont
plusieurs sont inédites. Paris.
Judas, Auguste-Célestin. 1860. Mémoire sur dix-neuf inscriptions numidico-puniques. Annuaire
de la Société Archéologique de la Province de Constantine, v. (?), p. (?).
Judas, Auguste-Célestin. 1862. Addition au mémoire sur les inscriptions numidico-puniques de
Constantine. Constantine: Alessi & Arnolet. Pp 15.
Judas, Auguste-Célestin. 1863. Sur l’écriture et la langue berbères dans l’antiquitét dennos jours.
Paris: Pillet fils. Pp 48.
Judas, Auguste-Célestin. 1869. Sur plusieurs séries d’épitaphes libyques découvertes en Algérie
particulièrement dans le cercle de Bone. Annales des voyages, de la géographie, de l’histoire
et de l’archéologie, v. (?), p. (?).
Judas, Auguste-Célestin. 1869. Nouvelle analyse de l’inscription libyco-punique de Thugga, en
Afrique, suivie de nouvelles observations sur plusieurs épitaphes libyques. Paris.
Judas, Auguste-Célestin. 1870. Sur quelques épitaphes libyques et latino-libyques. Paris.
Judas, Auguste-Célestin. 1871. Examen des mémoires de M. le dr Reboud et de M. le général
Faidherbe sur les inscriptions libyques. Paris. Pp 15.
194
Judd, A.S. 1916. Notes on the Munshi tribe and language [pt. 1]. Journal of the African Society, v.
16, 61, p. 52-61.
Judd, A.S. 1917. Notes on the Munshi tribe and language [pt. 2]. Journal of the African Society, v.
16, 62, p. 143-148.
Jully, Antony. 1901. Manuel des dialectes malgaches; comprenant sept dialectes: hova, betsileo,
tankarna, betsimisaraka, taimorona, tanosy, sakalava (mahafaly), et le soahely. Paris:
Librairie Africaine & Coloniale (Joseph André). Pp 90.
Seems to include notes on Madagascar Swahili, too!
Junker, Herrmann. 1906. Grammatik der Denderatexte. Leipzig. Pp 207.
Junker, Herrmann. 1908. Eine neue Bezeichnung des Pronomen absolutum im Ägyptischen.
Wiener Zeitschrift für die Kunde des Morgenlandes, v. 22, p. 175-179.
Junker, Herrmann; Czermak, Wilhelm. 1913. Kordofân-texte im Dialekt von Gebel Dair.
Sitzungsberichte der (kaiserlichen) Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Wien, philosophischhistorische Klasse, #174:3. Pp 76.
Details wanting. Not sure what “Dialekt” this refers to. Could be a Kordofanian, Nubian or other language; perhaps
even Arabic.
Junker, Wilhelm Johann [Dr]. 1888/89. Verzeichnis von Wörtern centralafrikanischer Sprachen.
Includes specimens of A-Madi, A-Barambo, A-Sandeh, A-Mangbettu, Medje, Moigo-Mungu, A-Bangba, Momvu, AGobbu, A-Ndakko (Bantu?), A-Kahle (Ambango, Apia) and A-Biri.
Junod, Henri-Alexandre. 1893. Etude comparative du shigoamba et du shironga. Manuscrit, ref.
B.1254. Lausanne: Archives du Mission Suisse Romande.
Junod, Henri-Alexandre. 1894. Sipele sa sironga: abécédaire et le livre de lecture en dialecte
ronga. Lausanne: Mission des Eglisses Evangelique Libres de la Suisse Romande. Pp 94.
Junod, Henri-Alexandre. 1894. Thonga, gouamba, djonga, ronga. Bulletin missionnaire des églises
libres de la Suisse Romande, v. 10, 114, p. 67-74.
Junod, Henri-Alexandre. 1896. Grammaire ronga, suivie d’un manuel de conversation et d’un
vocabulaire ronga-portugais-français-anglais, pour exposer et illustrer les lois du ronga,
langage parlé par les indigènes du district de Lourenço-Marquès. Lausanne: Imprimerie
Georges Bridel. Pp 218, 90.
The vocabulary part was also published separately.
Junod, Henri-Alexandre. 1896. Manuel de conversation et dictionnaire ronga-portugais-françaisanglais. Lausanne: Imprimerie Georges Bridel. Pp 90.
Junod, Henri-Alexandre. 1896. La tribu et la langue thonga avec quelques échantillons du folklore
thonga. Lausanne.
Junod, Henri-Alexandre. 1897. Les chants et les contes des ba-ronga de la baie de Delagoa.
Lausanne: Imprimerie Georges Bridel. Pp 327.
Includes French translations.
Junod, Henri-Alexandre. 1897. Carte linguistique de la tribu Thonga. Bulletin missionnaire des
églises libres de la Suisse Romande, v. 11, 132, p. 225-230.
Junod, Henri-Alexandre. 1898. Nouveaux contes ronga transcrits dans la langue indigène avec
traduction française. Neuchâtel: Imprimerie P. Attinger. Pp 91.
Junod, Henri-Alexandre. 1903. Bukhaneli bya Shironga. Pp 59.
Details wanting. A grammar written in Ronga “for use in schools, where it has proved of value despite its close
following of European structural methods” (Doke 1945:95).
Junod, Henri-Alexandre. 1903. Vuvulavuri bya Shithonga = The laws of Shithonga speech.
Lausanne: Mission Suisse Romande.
Junod, Henri-Alexandre. 1903. Some remarks on the folklore of the Bathonga. Folklore: journal
of the Folklore Society (London), v. 14, p. 116-124.
Junod, Henri-Alexandre. 1905. The native language and native education. Journal of the African
Society, v. 5, 17, p. 1-14.
195
Junod, Henri-Alexandre. 1907. Elementary grammar of the Thonga-Shangaan language.
Lausanne. Pp 98.
Justinard, Leopold Victor. 1914. Manuel de berbère marocain (dialecte chleuch). Paris. Pp vi, 164.
Kampffmeyer, Georg. 1898. Materialen zum Studium der arabischen Beduinendialekte
Innerafrikas. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 2, II, p. 143-221.
Deals with Mauritanian and western Saharan Arabic dialects.
Kampffmeyer, Georg. 1899. Beiträge zur Dialektologie des arabischen, 1: das marokkanische [...]
ka. Zeitschrift für die Kunde des Morgenlandes, v. 13, p. 1-34, 227-250.
Kampffmeyer, Georg. 1900. Beiträge zur Dialektologie des arabischen, 2: die arabische
Verbalpartikel b (m). Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 3, II, p. 48101.
Publication of the author’s Habilitationsschrift, University of Marburg.
Kampffmeyer, Georg. 1909. Texte aus Fes, mit einem Text aus Tanger. Mitteilungen des Seminars
für orientalische Sprachen, v. 12, II, p. 1-32.
Kampffmeyer, Georg. 1912. Marokkanisch-arabische Gespräche im Dialekt von Casablanca, mit
Vergleichung des Dialekts von Tanger. Lehrbücher des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen,
#28. Berlin: Georg Reimer. Pp xiii, 141.
Kampffmeyer, Georg. 1913. Weitere Texte aus Fes und Tanger. Mitteilungen des Seminars für
orientalische Sprachen, II. Abt., v. 16, p. 81-82.
Kannemeyer, D.R. 1890/91. Colonial nomenclature. Cape illustrated magazine, v. 1, p. 402-407,
454-458, 472-477.
Kannenberg, Carl [Hauptm.]. 1900. Reise durch die hamitischen Sprachgebiete um Kondoa.
Mittheilungen von Forschungsreisenden und Gelehrten aus den deutschen Schutzgebieten:
mit Benutzung amtlicher Quellen, v. 13, p. 144-172.
Travels among the Gogo, Langi, Mbugwe, Alagwa, Burunge, Gorowa, Datooga, and Maasai. Includes some lexical
specimens of Akie (Kalenjin), and maybe others.
Kannenberg, Carl [Hauptm.]. 1900. Beiträge zur afrikanischen Sagenkunde. Zeitschrift für
Karlberg, G. 1912. Über die ägyptischen Wörter in alten Testamente. Uppsala.
Kaufmann, A. 1862. Beiträge zur Erforschung der Bari-Sprache. In: Schilderungen aus CentralAfrika, p. 156-165. Brixen.
Kaufmann, A. 1862. Schilderungen aus Central-Afrika. Brixen.
Includes “Notizen über die Sprache der Dinka” on p. 95-100.
Keane, Augustus Henry. 1885. Ethnology of Egyptian Sudán. Journal of the Anthropological Inst.
of Great Britain and Ireland, v. 14, p. 91-113.
Discusses “The Bantus” (incl. Wa-ganda, Wa-nyoro), “The Negroes” (incl. Zandeh, Mittu, Monbuttu, Bari, Nuer,
Bongo, Rol, Krej, Funj of Senaar, Shilluks, Dinkas, Oigob Masai), “The Semites” (incl. Ismaelites/Arabs proper,
Tigré, Amhara, Bogos), “The Hamites” (incl. Zoghâwa, Baele, Tibu, Wa-Huma/Wa-Tusi, Beja/Bishari), “The Nubas”
(incl. Nubas proper, Nile Nubas, Fur, ‘Kordo’, Jebel). Includes some lexical specimens for a few languages, e.g.
Oigob Masai, Shilluk, Bongo, Dongolawi, Jebel.
Keeling, [Father]. 19xx. Unpublished vocabularies of Northern Ngangela, Luimbi, Huambo.
Referred to by Johnston (1919:799f).
Keller, I.; Huber, M. 1903. Knowledge and theories of astronomy on the part of the Isubu natives
of the western slopes of the Cameroon Mountains, in German West Africa (Kamerun).
Kemp, John Theodore van der [Rev.]. 1802. Specimens of the Caffra language. Transactions of
the (London) Missionary Society, v. 1, p. (?).
Includes alphabet, pronunciation and vocabulary divided into various semantic fields consisting of circa 600 words
plus some 90 phrases.
196
Kemp, John Theodore van der [Rev.]. 1802. Religion, customs, population, language, history and
natural productions of the country [Caffraria]. Transactions of the (London) Missionary
Society, v. 1, p. 432-468.
Kersten, Otto. 1865. Manuscript vocabulary of Zanzibar Swahili.
Date is a wild guess. Mentioned by Benson (1964:69).
Khauwas, Ahmad ibn. 1881. Notions succinctes de grammaire kabyle. Algiers.
Khauwas, Ahmad ibn. 1881. Dialogues français-kabyles. Algiers.
Texts.
Kielmaier, C. 1840. Notizen über das östliche Afrika. Das Ausland: Wochenschrift für Länderund Völkerkunde, v. 13, p. 181-182, 286-287, 294-295, 297-299, 302-303.
“Darin: Sammlung von Wörtern aus den Sprachen der Küstenbewohner des östlichen Afrika” (Voigt 1988:57).
Kilham, Hannah. 1823. African lessons: Wolof and English, 3 parts. London: Committee of the
Society of Friends for Promoting African Instruction.
Includes grammar notes.
Kilham, Hannah. 1827. Elementary sounds of African languages or general spelling lessons.
London.
Includes mentions of, for instance, Manding and Ewe. Latham (1847:167) gives the title as African lessons:
Mandingo and English elementary sounds, and general spelling lessons; a short vocabulary, & c..
Kilham, Hannah. 1828. Specimens of African languages, spoken in the colony of Sierra Leone.
London: P. White for the Committee of the Society of Friends. Pp xi, 1, 47, 1, 12, 12.
Issued anonymously. Contains vocabularies of 30 languages, incl. Bongo B303?, Rungo B11b, Kongo H16,
Bagnon (Banyun), Bornu (Kanuri?), Fot (Gbe?), Popo (Gbe?), Karaba (Efik?), Appa (?), Woloff, Susu, Timmani
(Temne), Mandingo, Bambara, Bullom, Kissi, Kossa (Mande?), Pessa (Mande?), Feloop (Dyula), Kru (Klao?),
Bassa, Ashantee, Kouri (?), Ako (Amgbe?), Eio (Yoruba?), Benin (Edo), Moko (Edoid?), Ibu (Igbo), Tapua (Nupe),
Akuonga or Uhobo (Urhobo), Fulah, Bornu, Howssa. Kilham’s vocabularies were later republished (with some
additions) by Norris (1841).
Peripherals: Edwin Norris, Outline of a vocabulary of a few of the principal languages of western and central Africa
(London, 1841); Robert Gordon Latham, “On the present state and recent progress of ethnographical philology”,
Reports of the meeting of the British Association for the Advancement of Science, v. 17 (1847) p. 154-229; C.M.
Doke, “Bantu language pioneers of the nineteenth century”, African studies, v. 14 (1940) p. 207-246; C.M. Doke,
“Bantu language pioneers of the nineteenth century” (revised), African studies, v. 18 (1959) p. 1-27; Paul E.H. Hair,
“A bibliographical note on Hannah Kilham’s linguistic work”, Journal of the Friends’ Historical Society, v. 49
(1960) p. 165-168.
Kilham, Hannah. 1830. The claims of West Africa to Christian instruction, through the native
languages. London: Harvey & Darton. Pp 28.
On religious education in Wolof.
Kilham, Hannah; Patarieu, Adrien. 1820. Ta-re wa-loof, ta-re boo juk-à = First lessons in Jaloof.
Tottenham (UK): G. Stockwell.
Issued anonymously.
King, [?]. 190x. Unpublished notes on Swahili.
Referred to by Whiteley & Gutkind (1958:199), who date it pre-1903.
King, Philip V. 1909. Some Hausa idioms. Journal of the African Society, v. 8, 30, p. 193-201.
King, William Joseph Harding. 1903. A search of the masked Tawareks. London: Smith, Elder &
Co. Pp viii, 334.
Includes a section on “The origin of the Tawarek alphabet” (p. 319-329).
Kingon, J.R.L. 1918. A survey of aboriginal place-names. South African journal of science, v. 15,
p. 712-779.
Kingon, T.R.L. 1916. Some place-names of Tsolo. South African journal of science, v. 13, p. 603619.
Kirk, John William Carnegie. 1903. Notes on the Somali language, with examples of phrases and
conversational sentences. London: Oxford University Press. Pp 94.
Reprinted 1968 by Gregg International in Farnborough UK (ISBN-10 0-576-11624-6); and by Henry Frowde in
London & New York.
197
Kirk, John William Carnegie. 1904. The Yibirs and Midgàns of Somaliland, their traditions and
dialects. Journal of the African Society, v. 4, 13, p. 91-108.
Kirk, John William Carnegie. 1905. A grammar of the Somali language, with examples in prose
and verse and an account of the Yibir and Midgan dialects. London: Cambridge University
Press. Pp xvi, 216.
Reprinted 1969 by Gregg International at Farnborough.
Kisbey, Walter H. 1896. Zigula exercises, compiled for the Universities’ Mission to Central
Africa. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp 116.
Kisbey, Walter H. 1899. Unpublished notes and corrections of Swahili.
Referred to by Whiteley & Gutkind (1958:199).
Kisbey, Walter H. 1906. Zigula-English dictionary, compiled for the Universities’ Mission to
Central Africa. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp 120.
Apparently this includes an English-Zigula section, too.
Kisbey, Walter H. 1906. Zigula exercises, compiled for the Universities’ Mission to Central
Africa. Revised edition. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp
96.
Kitching, Arthur Leonard. 1907. An outline grammar of the Gang language. London: Society for
Kitching, Arthur Leonard. 1915. A handbook of the Ateso language. London: Society for
Klamroth, Martin. 1907. Kurze Skizze der Lautlehre des Kipangwa. Mitteilungen des Seminars für
Klamroth, Martin. 1912/13. Afrikanische Liebeslieder: ein Dzalamo-Lied. Zeitschrift für
Kolonialsprachen, v. 3, 3, p. 247.
This appears stacked at the end of article by Schürle & Klingenheben entitled “Afrikanische Liebeslieder: DualaLieder”, p. 244-247.
Klamroth, Martin. 1913. Der literarische Charakter des ostafrikanischen Islams. Die Welt des
Islams, v. 1, p. 21-31.
Klaproth, H. Julius von. 1826. Essai sur la langue du Bournou, suivi des vocabulaires du
Begharmi, du Mandara, et de Timbouctoo. Paris: Imprimerie de Decourchant. Pp 41.
Klaproth, H. Julius von. 1826. Sur les langues de l’Afrique meridionale. Nouvelles annales des
voyages, de la géographie et de l’histoire ou recueil des relations originales inédites, v. (?),
p. 219-224.
Apparently this has something on Bantu languages, possibly Tswana (cfr Latham 1847:192).
Klingenheben, August von. 1919/20. Eine amharische Form der Wiedererkennungsgeschichte der
Placidas-Legende. Zeitschrift für Eingeborenen-Sprachen, v. 10, 3, p. 181-208.
Knittel, K. 1919. Unpublished linguistic notes on Chagga. Nürnberg: Bavarian Church Archive.
Consists of 2 notebooks in A5-format plus one in A6-format (see Africa in German mission archives, Schroedter
1999, online).
URL: www.uni-leipzig.de/~ifa/ma/Intro.html
Knoblecher, Ignaz. 1850? Vocabularium linguae Baricae. Manuskript, ref. MS 15099. Wien:
Österreichische Nationalbibliothek.
Referred to by Somerauer (1993).
Knudsen, Hans Christian. 185x. Stoff zu einer Grammatik in der Namaquasprache. Manuskript.
Kapstadt: Grey Sammlung, Südafrikanische Öffentliche Bibliothek. Pp 29.
Knudsen, Hans Christian. 1845. Nama A.B.Z.: :kannis, :gei *hu-*ze khom-ei-.kannis. Cape Town:
Pike & Philip. Pp 16.
The colons in ‹:kannis› and ‹:gei› should be superscript.
Knudsen, Hans Christian. 1846. A spelling-leaf in the Namaqua language. Manuscript. Cape
198
Knudtzon, J.A. 1908/15. Die El-Amarna Tafeln, 2 Bde. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs’sche
Buchhandlung.
Knüsli, J. 1891. Ewe-German-English vocabulary / Ewe-deutsch-englisches Wörterbuch.
Manuskript. Kéta (Goldküste). Pp xvi, 1084.
The originals are held by the British Library, London.
Knüsli, J. 1892. Deutsch-Ewe Wörterbuch. Bremen. Pp 413.
Is this a manuscript, too?
Kobès, Aloys. 1869. Grammaire de la langue wolofe. Saint-Joseph de Ngasobil (Sénégal):
Mission Catholique. Pp vi, 360.
Peripherals: Mamadou Cissé, “Revisiter ‘La grammaire de la langue volofe’ d’A. Kobes (1869), ou l’étude critique
d’un pan de l’histoire de la grammaire du wolof”, Sudlangues: revue electronique internationale de sciences du
langage, v. 4 (2005) p. 68-81.
Kobès, Aloys. 1875. Dictionnaire wolof-français. Saint-Joseph de Ngasobil (Sénégal): Mission
Catholique.
Koch, Adolf. 1874. Der semitische Infinitiv: eine sprachwissenschaftliche Untersuchung. Beilage
zum Osterprogramm. Stuttgart: Staffhauser Gymnasium.
Koebele, K. 1895. Fibel für die Schule in Klein-Popo, in der Anecho-Mundart. Frankfurt-amMain.
Koelle, Sigismund Wilhelm [Rev.]. 1849. Narrative of an expedition into the Vy country of West
Africa, and the discovery of a system of syllabic writing, recently invented by the natives of
the Vy tribe. London: Seeley, Service & Co.
URL: www.archive.org/details/narrativeofexped00koeliala
Koelle, Sigismund Wilhelm [Rev.]. 1854. Outlines of a grammar of the Vei language, together
with a Vei-English vocabulary and an account of the discovery of the Vei mode of syllabic
writing. London: Church Missionary House. Pp 268.
Later reprinted by Gregg International, with a new introduction by Paul E.H. Hair (ISBN-10 0-576-11611-4).
URL: www.archive.org/details/outlinesofgramma00koeluoft
Koelle, Sigismund Wilhelm [Rev.]. 1854. Grammar of the Bórnu or Kánurî language. London:
Church Missionary House. Pp xx, 326.
Koelle, Sigismund Wilhelm [Rev.]. 1854. African native literature, or proverbs, tales, fables and
historical fragments in the Kanuri or Bornu language; to which are added a translation of
the above and a Kanuri-English vocabulary. London. Pp xiv, 434.
Koelle, Sigismund Wilhelm [Rev.]. 1854. Polyglotta africana, or a comparative vocabulary of
nearly three hundred words and phrases in more than one hundred distinct African
languages. London: Church Missionary House. Pp vi, 24, 188.
Says Welmers (1971:564f): “For this remarkable accomplishment, at his own request, Koelle [missionary educator
at Sierra Leone] was permitted the less than princely period of six months free from other duties ... Though some of
his notes may have been taken before this six-month period of full-time work, one can only be struck by the sheer
enormity of the task of manuscript preparation ... His map alone, and the questions he asked to get the information
on which it is based, is a masterpiece of meticulous attention to detail. Every linguist should carefully read Koelle’s
Preface as model for humility, enterprise, and linguistic perception over a century later ... Although Koelle’s
unparalleled work falls somewhat short of contemporary standards in linguistics - his fairly flexible phonetic
transcription cannot be expected to be fully accurate for all languages, and he understandably failed to recognize
tone, although he marked what he heard as stress - it is nevertheless useful to the comparativist today, and remains a
model of careful research.” Reprinted 1963 by Akademische Druck- und Verlagsanstalt in Graz, with a
historiographical introduction by Paul H.E. Hair and a word index by David Dalby.
Peripherals: Bernhard Ankermann, “Koelle’s Mbe-Sprache”, Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen,
v. 30 (1927) p. 1-4; Robert Cornevin, “Notes de Koelle [...]”, Notes africaines: bulletin d’information et de
correspondance, v. 81 (1959) p. 21; P.D. Curtin & Jan Vansina, “Sources of the nineteenth century Atlantic slave
trade”, Journal of African history, v. 2 (1964) p. 185-208; David Dalby, “Provisional identification of languages in
the Polyglotta Africana”, Sierra Leone language review, v. 3 (1964) p. 83-90; Malcolm Guthrie, “Bantu languages
in Polyglotta Africana”, Sierra Leone language review, v. 3 (1964) p. 59-64; Oswin R.A. Köhler, “Gur languages in
the Polyglotta Africana”, Sierra Leone language review, v. 3 (1964) p. 65-73; F.D.D. Winston, “Nigerian CrossRiver languages in the Polyglotta Africana (pt. 1)”, Sierra Leone language review, v. 3 (1964) p. 74-82; David W.
Arnott, “Fula dialects in the Polyglotta Africana”, Sierra Leone language review, v. 4 (1965) p. 109-121; David
Dalby, “The Mel languages in Polyglotta Africana (pt. 1)”, Sierra Leone language review, v. 4 (1965) p. 129-135;
Paul E.H. Hair, “The enslavement of Koelle’s informants”, Journal of African history, v. 6 (1965) p. 193-203; E.C.
Rowlands, “Yoruba dialects in the Polyglotta Africana”, Sierra Leone language review, v. 4 (1965) p. 103-108;
F.D.D. Winston, “Nigerian Cross-River languages in the Polyglotta Africana (pt. 2)”, Sierra Leone language
review, v. 4 (1965) p. 122-128; David Dalby, “The Mel languages in Polyglotta Africana (pt. 2)”, Sierra Leone
199
language review, v. 5 (1966) p. 139-151; Joseph H. Greenberg, “Polyglotta evidence for consonant mutation in the
Mandyak languages”, Sierra Leone language review, v. 5 (1966) p. 106-110; Paul E.H. Hair, “Collections of
vocabularies of western Africa before the Polyglotta: a key”, Journal of African languages, v. 5 (1966) p. 208-217;
Mary Esther Kropp Dakubu, “The Adampe and Anfue dialects of Ewe in the Polyglotta Africana”, Sierra Leone
language review, v. 5 (1966) p. 116-121; R.P.A. Prost, “La langue gurma dans la Polyglotta Africana”, Sierra Leone
language review, v. 5 (1966) p. 134-138; John Spencer, “S.W. Koelle and the problem of notation for African
languages, 1847-1855”, Sierra Leone language review, v. 5 (1966) p. 83-105; John M. Stewart, “Asante Twi in the
Polyglotta Africana”, Sierra Leone language review, v. 5 (1966) p. 111-115; Kay Williamson, “Ijo dialects in the
Polyglotta Africana”, Sierra Leone language review, v. 5 (1966) p. 122-133; Margret M. Green, “Igbo dialects in
the Polyglotta Africana”, African language review, v. 6 (1967) p. 111-119; Gordon Innes, “Mende in the
Polyglotta Africana”, African language review, v. 6 (1967) p. 120-127; Pierre-Francis Lacroix, “Le vocabulaire
‘kandin’ dans la Polyglotta Africana”, African language review, v. 6 (1967) p. 153-158; Jürgen Zwernemann,
“Kasem dialects in the Polyglotta Africana”, African language review, v. 6 (1967) p. 128-152; John Kelly,
“Urhobo in the Polyglotta Africana”, African language review, v. 7 (1968) p. 107-113; Jacques Delord, “Le kaure de
la Polyglotta Africana et le kabrè d’aujourd’hui”, African language review, v. 7 (1968) p. 114-139; J.L. Doneux, “Le
gio”, African language review, v. 8 (1969) p. 263-271; John Laver, “Etsako in the Polyglotta Africana”, African
language review, v. 8 (1969) p. 257-262; A. Prost, “La langue de Tumbuktu”, African language review, v. 8 (1969)
p. 272-278; David Dalby, “Reflections on the classification of African languages, with special reference to the
work of Sigismund Wilhelm Koelle and Malcolm Guthrie”, African language studies, v. 11 (1970) p. 147-171; Udo
Essien, “Anang and the Polyglotta Africana”, African language review, v. 9 (1970) p. 177-186; J. David Sapir,
“Diola in the Polyglotta Africana”, African language review, v. 9 (1970) p. 186-203; Kiyoshi Shimizu, “Jukunoid
languages in the Polyglotta Africana (pt. 1)”, African language review, v. 9 (1970) p. 204-226; Russell Schuh,
“Bóde, Ngó:djin and Dó:ai in the Polyglotta Africana”, African languages/Langues africaines, v. 1 (1975) p. 290299; Russell Schuh, “Kándin in the Polyglotta Africana: two languages in one”, African languages/Langues
africaines, v. 1 (1975) p. 300-304; Kiyoshi Shimizu, “Jukunoid languages in the Polyglotta Africana (pt. 2)”,
African languages/Langues africaines, v. 1 (1975) p. 260-289; Ben Ohi Elugbe, “Edo (Bini) in the Polyglotta
Africana”, African languages/Langues africaines, v. 2 (1976) p. 145-151; Paul E.H. Hair, “A few more words in
“Eregba””, African languages/Langues africaines, v. 3 (1977) p. 158-159; Philip Jaggar, “The Kano dialect of
Hausa in the Polyglotta africana”, Afrika und Übersee, v. 64 (1981) p. 47-58; Lawrence A. Boadi, “Busumur and the
Akan language in Koelle’s Polyglotta”, Afrika und Übersee, v. 67 (1984) p. 199-217; William A.A. Wilson,
“Biafada, Pajade and the ‘Polyglotta’”, Journal of West African languages, v. 14 (1984) p. 61-80; Guillaume
Ségérer, “La langue bijogo dans Polyglotta Africana”, Actes du 3e congrès mondial de linguistique africaine Lomé
2000 (edited by K.K. Lébikaza, 2003); Lugwid Gerhardt, “Some notes on Yeskwa (North-Western Plateau, Nigeria),
with comments on Koelle’s Polyglotta Africana”, Hamburger afrikanistische Arbeitspapiere, v. 3 (2005) p. 35-52.
Kolbe, Friedrich Wilhelm [Rev.]. 1868. A brief statement of the discovery of the laws of the vowels
in Herero, a dialect in South West Africa. Cape Town: Van der Sandt de Villiers & Co. Pp
8.
Kolbe, Friedrich Wilhelm [Rev.]. 1869. The vowels, their primeval laws and bearing upon the
formation of roots in Herero, a dialect of South West africa. Cape Town: J.C. Juta. Pp ii, 32.
Kolbe, Friedrich Wilhelm [Rev.]. 1870. The Ba-ntu prefixes. Cape monthly magazine, new series,
v. 1, 6, p. 344-355.
Compares Herero, Zulu and Kikongo.
Kolbe, Friedrich Wilhelm [Rev.]. 1880. On the primeval laws of the vowels and bearing upon
universal etymology. Transactions of the South African Philosophical Society, v. 2, p. 69-78.
Deals primarily with Herero.
Kolbe, Friedrich Wilhelm [Rev.]. 1883. An English-Herero dictionary, with an introduction to the
study of Herero and Bantu in general. London & Cape Town: Trübner & Co.; J.C. Juta. Pp
lv, 570.
Kolbe, Friedrich Wilhelm [Rev.]. 1885. On the bearing of the study of the Bántu languages of
South Africa on the Aryan family of languages. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great
Britain and Northern Ireland, new series, v. 17, 1, p. (?).
Kolbe, Friedrich Wilhelm [Rev.]. 1888. A language study based on Bantu: an inquiry into the
laws of root-formation, the original plural, the sexual dual and the principles of wordcomparison, with tables illustrating the primitive pronominal system restored in the African
Bantu family of speech. London: Trübner & Co. Pp viii, 97.
“In this work ... Kolbe allowed his imagination to run away with his judgment” (Doke 1945:103). It contains
“comparisons between Indogermanic, Bantu (Herero), and Hottentot language and root-formation” (Strohmeyer &
Moritz 1975:211). Reprinted 1971 by Books for Libraries Press in Freeport NY (Black heritage library collection;
ISBN-10 0-8369-8792-6); and 1972 by Zentralantiquariat der Deutschen Demokratischen Republik in Leipzig.
Peripherals: ..., Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 1 (1887/88) p. 308-309;.
Köler, Hermann. 1843. Kleines Wörterbuch der Bonny-Sprache. Monatsbericht der
Geographischen Gesellschaft der Berlin, v. 2-3, p. (?).
Presumably a multipart article.
200
Köler, Hermann. 1848. Einige Notizen über Bonny an der Küste von Guinea, seine Sprache und
seine Bewohner, mit einem Glossarium. Göttingen: Dietrische Universitäts-Buchdruckerei.
Pp iv, 182.
Kollmann, Karl Paul [Hauptm.]. 1897. Eine Erzählung der Waganda. Zeitschrift für afrikanische
und oceanische Sprachen, v. 3, 4, p. 382-384.
Kollmann, Karl Paul [Hauptm.]. 1898. Der Nordwesten unserer ostafrikanischen Kolonie: eine
Beschreibung von Land und Leuten am Victoria-Nyanza nebst Aufzeichnungen einiger
daselbst gesprochener Dialekte. Berlin: A. Schall. Pp viii, 191.
Contains “useful vocabularies of some of the South Victoria Nyanza languages” (Johnston 1919:10), e.g. Ganda,
Ha, Ziba (a Haya dialect), Karagwe (Nyambo) and Kerebe (idem:785ff).
Kollmann, Karl Paul [Hauptm.]. 1899. The Victoria Nyanza: the land, the races and their customs
with specimens of some dialects. Translated from German by H.A. Nesbitt. London: Swan
Sonnenschein & Co. Pp ix, 254.
English translation of Der Nordwesten unserer ostafrikanischen Kolonie.
Kolmodin, Johannes A. 1912/16. Traditions de Tsazzega et Hazzega, 3 vols. Archives d’études
orientalis, #5. Uppsala: K.W. Appelbergs Boktryckeri. Pp xxix, 270; xxvii, 253; xxiv, 112.
Contains “Textes tigrigna” (1912), “Traduction français” (1915), and “Annales et documents (textes ge‘ez)” (1914).
The third part constitutes the author’s dissertation, Uppsala University, 1914.
Kolmodin, Johannes A. 1914. Observations sur les textes bilin de M. Reinisch. Le monde oriental,
v. 8, 2, p. 81-91.
Kolmodin, Johannes A. 1914. Annales et documents: textes ge‘ez. PhD thesis. Uppsala
University. Pp xxiv, 112.
Kolmodin, Johannes A. 1918. Tigrinische Wochenbettlieder. In: Studies tillägnade Esaias Tegnér,
p. 65-101. Lund: Gleerup.
König, Mathieu Auguste. 1839. Vocabulaires appartenant à diverses contrées ou tribus de
l’Afrique recueillis dans la Nubie Supérieure. Recueil de voyages et de mémoires publié par
la Société de Géographie de Paris, v. 4, p. 190-197.
Includes vocabulary materials for Somali, Dankali, Berber, Mandara, and other languages (cfr Latham 1847:185,
passim). Newman (1996:116) says the work comprises 4 vols.
Koti, Candlish. (Ed.) 1910/15. Longmans’ Kaffir readers. London: Longmans, Green & Co.
Kotz, Ernst. 1909. Grammatik des Chasu in Deutsch Ost-Afrika (Pare-Gebirge). Archiv für das
Studium der deutscher Kolonialsprachen, #10. Berlin: Georg Reimer. Pp vii, 79.
Reprinted by Gregg International (ISBN-10 0-576-11448-0).
Krall, J. (Ed.) 1897/1903. Demotische Lesestücke, 2 Bde. Wien.
Krapf, Johann Ludwig [Rev.]. 18xx. Msambara vocabulary.
Manuscript vocabulary mentioned by Latham (1847:195).
Krapf, Johann Ludwig [Rev.]. 1840. An imperfect outline of the elements of the Galla language.
With introductory remarks concerning the nation of the Gallas and an Evangelical mission
among them by Rev. C.W. Isenberg. London: Church Missionary Society (CMS).
Krapf, Johann Ludwig [Rev.]. 1842. Vocabulary of the Galla language. Edited by C.W. Isenberg.
London: Church Missionary Society (CMS).
Krapf, Johann Ludwig [Rev.]. 1844. Suaheli manuscripts. Library of the Church Missionary
Society (CMS).
Manuscripts referred to by Latham (1847:193). Includes a “lexicon of 10,000 words, with grammatical
observations, and a translation of the Genesis, the Gospels, and the Acts of the Apostles” (idem).
Krapf, Johann Ludwig [Rev.]. 1847. Manuscript vocabulary of Sooahelee, Wonica, Pokomo, and
Galla.
Totalling som 2,200 entries. Mentioned by Benson (1964:66).
Krapf, Johann Ludwig [Rev.]. 1850. Outline of the elements of the KiSuáheli language, with
special reference to the KiNika dialect. Tübingen: Lud Fries Fues. Pp 142.
201
With frequent references to Nika E72. Reprinted 1970 by Zentralantiquariat der Deutschen Demokratischen Republik
in Leipzig.
Krapf, Johann Ludwig [Rev.]. 1850. Vocabulary of six East African languages: Kisuaheli, Kinika,
Kikamba, Kipokomo, Kihiau, Kigalla. Tübingen: Lud Fries Fues. Pp x, 64.
Contains specimens of Kisuáheli G40, Kiníka E72, Kikàmba E55, Kipokómo E71, Kihiuá P21, and Kigalla
(Oromo), according to Doke (1960:78). Reprinted a few times by Gregg International (ISBN-10 0-576-11612-2).
Krapf, Johann Ludwig [Rev.]. 1852. A vocabulary of the Kihiau language. Compiled with the
assistance of Rabbay Mpia, and with introductory remarks by Rev. O.E. Vidal. London:
Seeley, Service & Co. Pp v, 38, 291.
Peripherals: A.F. Pott, “Ueber die Kihiau-Sprache”, Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 6
(1852) p. 331-348.
Krapf, Johann Ludwig [Rev.]. 1854. Vocabulary of Engutuk Eloikob, or of the language of the
Wakuafi-nation in the interior of equatorial Africa. Tübingen: Lud Fries Fues. Pp 144.
Krapf, Johann Ludwig [Rev.]. 1858. Reisen in Ostafrika ausgeführt in den Jahren 1837-1855, 2
Bde. Stuttgart: Selbstverlag. Pp xiv, 506; 522.
Reprinted 1964 by F.A. Brockhaus in Stuttgart.
Krapf, Johann Ludwig [Rev.]. 1860. Travels, researches and missionary labours during an
eighteen years’ residence in eastern Africa: together with journeys to Jagga, Usambara,
Ukambani, Shoa, Abessinia and Khartum; and a coasting voyage from Mombaz to Cape
Delgado. With an appendix respecting the snow-capped mountains of Eastern Africa; the
sources of the Nile; the languages and literature of Abessinia and Eastern Africa, etc., etc.,
and a concise account of geographical researches in Eastern Africa up to the discovery of the
Uyenyesi by Dr Livingstone in September last, by E.G. Ravenstein. London: Trübner & Co.
Pp li, 566.
Reprinted 1968 as a “second edition” by Frank Cass & Co. in London, with a new introduction by R.C. Bridges
(Cass library of African studies, missionary researches and travels, #2).
Peripherals: Anon, The North American review (Cedar Falls IO), v. 92 (1861) p. 326-364; S., Zeitschrift für
allgemeine Erdkunde, neue Folge, v. 10 (1861) p. 243-244; Roland Oliver, Bulletin of the School of Oriental and
African Studies, v. 32 (1969) p. 237.
Krapf, Johann Ludwig [Rev.]. 1878. Kürze Wörtersammlung Englisch-Deutsch-AmharischGallanisch-Guaresh. Basel & St. Chrischona (Schweiz).
Guaresch presumably refers to Gurage.
Krapf, Johann Ludwig [Rev.]. 1882. A dictionary of the Suahili language. With an introduction
containing an outline of Suahili grammar. London: Trübner & Co. Pp xl, 433.
Reprinted 1969 by Negro Universities Press in New York; and 1964 by Gregg Press. A new edition, revised by H.K.
Binns, appeared 1925.
Krapf, Johann Ludwig [Rev.]; Mpia, Rabbay. 1848. A vocabulary of the Kihiau language, with a
translation of Joh. 1, 1-14. Pp 33.
“This small [English-Yao] vocabulary has been compiled by the Author in Sept. 1848 with the help of an
uncommonly clever lad of the Kamanga tribe” (quoted by Pott 1852:331). Not sure if this is a manuscript or a
published thing.
Krapf, Johann Ludwig [Rev.]; Rebmann, Johann [Rev.]. 1848. The beginning of a spelling book of
the Kinika language, accompanied by a translation of the Heidelberg Catechism. Bombay:
American Mission Press. Pp 157.
Peripherals: A.F. Pott, Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 5 (1851) p. 405-412.
Krapf, Johann Ludwig [Rev.]; Rebmann, Johann [Rev.]. 1887. A Nika-English dictionary. Edited
by Rev. T.H. Sparshott. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp
vii, 391.
202
Krause, Gottlob Adolf. 1884. Ein Beitrag zur Kenntnis der fulischen Sprache in Afrika.
Mittheilungen der Riebeck’schen Niger-Expedition, #1. Leipzig. Pp 108.
Krause, Gottlob Adolf. 1884. Proben der Sprache von Ghat in der Sáhara, mit haussanischer
und deutscher Übersetzung. Leipzig: F.A. Brockhaus. Pp 82.
Krause, Gottlob Adolf. 1895. Die Stellung des Temne innerhalb der Bantu-Sprachen. Zeitschrift
für afrikanische und oceanische Sprachen, v. 1, 3, p. 250-267.
Apparently this uses data from Herero.
Krause, Gottlob Adolf. 1895. Die Fada-Sprache am Geba-Glusse im portugiesischen Westafrika.
Zeitschrift für afrikanische und oceanische Sprachen, v. 1, p. 363-372.
Krichenbauer, Anton. 1877. Die Irfahrt des odysseus als eine Umschiffung Afrikas. Berlin: S.
Calway & Co.
Krönlein, Johann Georg. 1861. Vokabular der /Nusan-Sprache. Manuskript.
This is sometimes referred to as “List of the language of the /Nusan” or just “/Nusan vocabulary”. Much (most? all?)
of the data appears in Bleek (1956).
Peripherals: Tom Güldemann, “The San languages of southern Namibia: linguistic appraisal with special reference
to J.G. Krönlein’s Nuusaa data”, Anthropological linguistics, v. 48 (2006) p.(?).
Krönlein, Johann Georg. 1869. Nama Grammatik.
Details wanting. Referred to by Strohmeyer & Moritz (1975:110) who add the note “weitere Angaben nicht zu
ermitteln”.
Krönlein, Johann Georg. 1889. Wortschatz der Khoi-Khoin (Namaqua-Hottentotten). Berlin:
Deutsche Kolonialgesellschaft. Pp vi, 350.
“The tones are unreliable, but the grammatical matter is of the highest value” (Doke 1933:36). It was later revised
and enlarged by Rust (1969). Reprinted a few times by Gregg International in Farnborough UK (Gregg reprint no
19; ISBN-10 0-576-11491-X).
Peripherals: Anon, Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 2 (1888/89) p. 237-239; Carl Wandres, “Sammlung
von Bergdama-Worten, die in Krönlein’s Wortschatz nicht enthalten sind”, Archiv für Otjiherero und Nama
(Swakopmund), v. 6 (1909); Carl Wandres, “Namaworte, die in Krönleins Wortschatz fehlen oder nicht verdeutscht
sind, gesammlet in Warmbad und Windhuk seit 1884”, Archiv für Otjiherero und Nama (Swakopmund), v. 11 (1909)
p. 5-13; Carl Wandres, “Nama-Wörter (nicht bei Kroenlein 1889 aufgeführt), mit Anhang: Bergdama-Wörter”,
Zeitschrift für Eingeborenen-Sprachen, v. 16 (1925/26) p. 275-297; C.M. Doke, “A preliminary investigation into
the state of the native languages in South Africa”, Bantu studies, v. 7 (1933) p. 1-99.
Kropf, Albert. 1899. A Kaffir-English dictionary. Alice: Lovedale Mission Press. Pp vii, 486.
According to Doke (1945:85), this “is a masterly study”, but see Moropa & Kruger (2000).
URL: www.archive.org/details/kafirenglishdict00kroprich
Peripherals: Carl Meinhof, Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 55 (1901) p. 538-542; Carl
Meinhof, Globus, v. ? (1901) p. 114-115; Koliswa Moropa & Alet Kruger, “Mistranslation of culture-specific terms
in Kropf’s Kafir-English dictionary”, South African journal of African languages, v. 20 (2000) p. 70-79.
Kropf, Albert. 1915. Kaffir-English dictionary. Second edition, revised by R. Godfrey. Alice:
Lovedale Mission Press. Pp xxxii, 525.
This edition “was added to and greatly improved by R. Godfrey ... A third edition of this great work is awaiting
completion and publication” (Doke 1945:85). Reprinted 1917 by the Lovedale Mission Press.
Peripherals: W. Bourquin, Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 8 (1917/18) p. 140.
Krug, Adolph N. 1912. Bulu tales from Kamerun, West Africa. Journal of American folklore, v.
25, 96, p. 106-124.
Contains English translations of 24 folk-tales.
Kruger, F.H. 1876. Sesuto-English vocabulary. Pp 158.
Details wanting. Mentioned in a footnote by Doke (1945:91).
Kruger, F.H. 1878. Steps to learn the Sesuto language.
Details wanting.
Kruger, F.H. 1883. Steps to learn the Sesuto language. Second edition.
Details wanting.
Kruger, F.H. 1904. Steps to learn the Sesuto language. Third edition.
Details wanting.
203
Kruger, F.H. 1905. Steps to learn the Sesuto language, comprising an elementary grammar,
graduated exercises and a short vocabulary. Fourth edition. Morija: Sesuto Book Depot. Pp
viii, 127.
Krumm, Bernhard. 1912. Grundriss einer Grammatik des Kimatumbi (Deutsch-Ostafrika, Bezirk
Kilwa-Rufiji). Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 15, III, p. 1-63.
Krumm, Bernhard. 1913. Kimatumbi-Wörterverzeichnis. Mitteilungen des Seminars für
Kuhlmann, August. 190x. Wörterverzeichnis zu den Hereropredigten. Manuscript. Windhoek:
Rheinischen Missionsgesellschaft. Pp 28.
Kuhlmann, August. 1906. Über Anwendung des “nanda”. Archiv für Otjiherero- und NamaForschung, #2. Windhoek: Rheinischen Missionsgesellschaft. Pp 2.
Kurvinen, Pietari. 1876. ABD moshindonga: omukanda uatango koshindonga ua piangoa = The
ABC of Oshindonga: the first book in Oshindonga. Helsinki: Suomalaisen Kirjallisuuden
Kirjapaino. Pp 32.
Lacau, P. 1902. Notes de phonétique et d’étymologie égyptien [pt. 1]. Recueil de travaux relatifs à
la philologie et à l’archéologie égyptiennes et assyriennes, v. 24, p. 201-228.
Lacau, P. 1909. Notes de phonétique et d’étymologie égyptien [pt. 2]. Recueil de travaux relatifs à
Lademann, Gebhard. 1910. Tierfabeln und andere Erzählungen in Suaheli, wiedergegeben von
Leuten aus dem Innern Deutsch-Ostafrikas. Übersetzt von Assessor Ludwig Kausch und
Assessor Dr Alfred Reuss. Archiv für das Studium der deutscher Kolonialsprachen, #12.
Berlin: Georg Reimer. Pp 4, 120.
Laird, Macgregor; Oldfield, R.A.K. 1837. Narrative of an expedition into the interior of Africa, by
the river Niger in the steam-vessels Quorra and Alburkah in 1832, 1833 and 1834, 2 vols.
London: Richard Bentley. Pp 451; 409.
The second volume contains an English-Kacundah or Shabbee vocabulary (p. 421-423, 447) plus a Nufie or
Nupaysee vocabulary comprising numerals 1-200 and some 35 other words (p. 442-443). There’s also something
about Igbo (Hintze 1959:77+85), Hausa (Latham 1847:186), Fula (idem:189). Reprinted 1971 by Frank Cass & Co.
in London (Cass library of African studies, travels and narratives, #68; ISBN-10 0-7146-1826-8).
Laman, Karl Edward. 1899. Nzailu andinga akikongo kivovulwanga mu Kongo diabanda /
Lärobok i kongospråket, sådant det talas i Nedre Kongo = Textbook in the Congo
language, as spoken in the Lower Congo. Matadi (Congo Free State): Svenska
Missionsförbundet. Pp 17.
Laman, Karl Edward. 1907. Om språket i nedre Kongo = On the language in Lower Congo. In:
Etnografiska bidrag af svenska missionärer, p. 1-3. Ed. by Erland Nordenskiöld.
Stockholm.
Laman, Karl Edward. 1907. Gåtor på mazingadialekten = Enigmas in the Mazinga dialect. In:
Stockholm.
Laman, Karl Edward. 1907. Ordspråk på mazingadialekten = Proverbs in the Mazinga dialect. In:
Stockholm.
Laman, Karl Edward. 1907. Sånger på mazingadialekten = Songs in the Mazinga dialect. In:
Stockholm.
Laman, Karl Edward. 1907. Sagor på mazingadialekten = Fables in the Mazinga dialect. In:
Stockholm.
Laman, Karl Edward. 1907. Saga på bwendedialekten = A fable in the Bwende dialect. In:
Stockholm.
Laman, Karl Edward. 1910. Malongi mandinga akikongo kivovwanga mu Kongo diabanda =
Grammar of the Congo language, as spoken in the Lower Congo. Matadi (Congo Free
State): Svenska Missionsförbundet. Pp 27.
204
Laman, Karl Edward. 1912. Grammar of the Kongo language (kiKongo). New York: Christian
Alliance Publ. Pp 296.
Laman, Karl Edward. 1912. Lärobok i Kongo-språket (kiKongo) = Textbook in the Congolanguage (kiKongo). Stockholm: Svenska Missionsförbundets Förlag. Pp xxvi, 336.
Lammond, William. 1916. Lessons in Bemba, being one hundred easy graded lessons. Pp 122.
Details wanting.
Lamoise, R.P. 1873. Grammaire de la langue sérère. Saint-Joseph de Ngasobil (Sénégal):
Mission de la Congrégation du Saint Esprit et du Saint-Coeur de Marie.
Lander, Richard Lemon. 1830. A vocabulary of the short phrases of the Houssa tongue. In:
Records of Captain Clapperton’s last expedition to Africa: by his faithful attendant and the
only surviving member of the expedition, with the subsequent adventures of the author, v. 2,
p. 289-293. London: H. Colburn & R. Bentley.
Landeroin, Moïse Augustin; Tilho, Marie Auguste Jean. 1909. Grammaire et contes haoussas.
Paris: Imprimerie Nationale. Pp 292.
Landeroin, Moïse Augustin; Tilho, Marie Auguste Jean. 1910. Dictionnaire haoussa, comprenant
haoussa-français et français-haoussa. Paris: Emile Larose. Pp xv, 172, 163.
Landreau, L. 1900. Vocabulaire de la langue baya (Haute-Sangha). Paris: Augustin Challamel. Pp
64.
Lane, Edward William. 1863/93. An Arabic-English lexicon: derived from the best and most
copious Eastern sources, 8 parts. Edited, with a memoir, by Stanley Lane-Pool. London:
Williams & Norgate.
This was the first volume of two. The second was never published. Reprinted many times by various publishers.
URL: tabs-online.com/TABS/Lane/
Lang, Affonso Maria. 1906. Ensaios de gramática nyaneka, idioma fallado no districto de Huilla,
provincia d’Angola. Lisboa: Minerva Lusitana. Pp vi, 121.
Langlès, Louis Mathieu. 1803. Mèmoire sur les Oasis, composé principalement d’après les
auteurs arabes. Paris.
Includes a Berber glossary (Jucovy & Alderete 2001).
Lanzone, Ridolfo Vittorio. 1881/84. Dizionario di mitologi egizia, 3 vols. Torino: Litografia
Fratelli Doyen. Pp xv, 1312.
Reprinted 1974 by John Benjamins in Amsterdam together with a fourth volume completing the work.
Laoust, Emile. 1912. Etude sur le dialecte du chenoua comparé avec des beni-menacer et des
beni-salah. Publications de la Fac. des Lettres d’Alger; Bulletin de correspondence de
africaine, #50. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp 197.
Laoust, Emile. 1918. Etude sur le dialecte berbère des Ntifa: grammaire, textes. Paris: Ernest
Leroux. Pp 446.
Publication of the author’s thèse de doctorat, Université d’Alger, 1918.
Laoust, Emile. 1918/19. Le nom de la charrue et de ses accessoires chez les berbères. Les archives
berbères, v. 3, p. 1-29.
Lapa, Joaquim José; Ferreri, Alfredo Brandão Cró de Castro. 1889. Elementos para um
diccionario chrographico da Província de Moçambique. Lisboa: Sociedade de Geográfia de
Lisboa. Pp 147.
Laperrine, [?]. 1909. Les noms des années chez les touareg du Ahaggar de 1875 à 1907. Revue
Laperrine, [?]. 1910. Noms donnes par les touareg ahaggar aux diverses années de 1860 à 1874.
Revue africaine: journal des traveaux de la Société Historique Algérienne, v. 54, p. 191-194.
Larajasse, Evangeliste de [R.P.]. 1897. Somali-English and English-Somali dictionary. London:
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co. Pp xvii, 301.
Larajasse, Evangeliste de [R.P.]; Sampont, Cyprien de [Ven.] [Frère]. 1897. Practical grammar of
the Somali language, with a manual of sentences. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner &
Co. Pp 265.
205
Largeau, Victor. 1901. Encyclopédie pahouine, Congo français: éléments de grammaire et
dictionnaire français-pahouin. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp 697.
Deals with southern Fang A75.
Last, J.L. 1896. Notes on the languages spoken in Madagascar. Journal of the Anthropological
Inst. of Great Britain and Ireland, v. 25, p. 46-71.
Last, Joseph Thomas. 1883. A visit to the Masai people living beyond the borders of the Nguru
country. Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society and monthly record of geography,
new monthly series, v. 5, 9, p. 517-543.
Includes a section titled “Phrases and words in the Masai language” (p. 534-538). Has “[v]aluable comments on
Kaguru and Nguru” (Beidelman 1967:80).
Last, Joseph Thomas. 1885. Polyglotta africana orientalis: a comparative collection of two
hundred and fifty words and sentences in fourty-eight languages and dialects spoken south
of the Equator, and additional words in nineteen languages. London: Society for Promoting
Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp ix, 239.
Includes lexical materials for several languages and dialects, such as, Nyambo, Bondei (p. 37), Shambala (p. 41),
Nguru (p. 45), Zigula (p. 49+213), Maasai and related (p. 190-193, 219-220, 234-239), Taturu (either Okiek or
Datooga), and many more. Reprinted 1972 by Zentralantiquariat der Deutschen Demokratischen Republik in
Leipzig.
Peripherals: ..., Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 1 (1887/88) p. 77-78; G.W.B. Huntingford, “Note on the
‘Taturu’ language”, Man, v. 28 (1928) p. 190 (art. 139).
Last, Joseph Thomas. 1885. Grammar of the Kamba-language. London: Society for Promoting
Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp iv, 40.
This apparently “contains specimens of a Kikamba so corrupt that one might suppose the fault to be the author’s.
Last himself owns that he never lived among the Kamba, but worked among another, neighbouring people”
(Lindblom 1926:17).
Last, Joseph Thomas. 1886. Grammar of the Kagúru language, eastern equatorial Africa.
London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp iv, 147.
This “is marred with numerous press errors” (Johnston 1922:791). It also has “much Gogo material mixed in it”
(Beidelman 1967:81).
Latham, Robert Gordon. 184x. ... [Title wanting]. Classical museum: a journal of philology and of
ancient history and literature, v. (?), 12, p. (?).
Says Latham (1847:188): “In the twelfth number of Classical Museum, some special affinities between the Kissour
[Songhay?] and Howssa were indicated”. Not sure who the author is supposed to be, but possibly Latham himself.
Latham, Robert Gordon. 1844. On the ethnography of Africa as determined by its languages.
Reports of the meeting of the British Association for the Advancement of Science, v. 14, p.
79-80.
Has material on Hausa, Songhai, and others.
Latham, Robert Gordon. 1846. Contributions to the study of the languages of Africa. Proceedings
of the Philological Society, v. 2, p. 218-222.
Apparently this includes, amongst other things, some Kwa material.
Latham, Robert Gordon. 1847. On the present state and recent progress of ethnographical
philology, pt. 1: Africa. Reports of the meeting of the British Association for the
Advancement of Science, v. 17, p. 154-229.
Discusses languages from all over Africa and has many word lists for many languages, i.e. Abunda, Acra, Affadeh,
Affootoo, Afnu, Agau of Agaum, Agow, Akkim, Ako, Akripon, Akuonga, Amanahea, Amina, Appa, Ashantee,
Bagnon, Bambarra, Barea, Bassa, Begharmi, Benin, Bimbia, Bogharmi, Bomba, Bongo, Bonny, Bornu, Boroom,
Bullom, Bunda, Caffre, Calbra, Camançons, Camba, Cameroons, Cape Lopez, Congo, Coptic, Dalla, Danakil,
Darfoor, Darfur, Darrunga, Denka, Ediyah, Embomma, Falasha, Fantee, Fazoglo, Feloop, Fertit, Fetu, Fot, Fulah,
Fulasha, Galla, Gien, Gongo, Guderu, Harargie, Ho, Hottentot, Howssa, Hurrur, Ibakpáh, Ibo, Ibollóh, Ibu,
Kallaghee, Kanga, Karaba, Kassenti, Kaylee, Kensy, Kerrapay, Kissi, Kissour, Koldagi, Kongo, Kossa, Kouri,
Krepee, Kru, Loango, Makua, Malemba, Mallowa, Mandara, Mandingo, Mangree, Mendi, Mobba, Mobilian,
Mogialona, Moko, Msambara, Msegua, Noub, Nufee, Old Calebar, Oyóh, Pessa, Popo, Qamamyl, Quilimani,
Quolla-liffa, Rungo, Salo, Saracole, Serawoolli, Sereres, Shabum, Shabun, Shankala, Shiho, Shilluck, Showiah,
Somauli, Souldanian, Sowaiel, Susu, Takeli, Takne, Tambu, Tapua, Tembu, Tigré, Timbuctoo, Timmani, Tumali,
Uhobo, Ukuafi, Vei, W. Agau, Wakamba, Wanika, Wawu, Wolaitsa, Woloff, Woratta, Yangaro, Yarriba. There are
also some grammatical notes for, e.g. Tumali, Tswana, and other languages. Most of the data has been culled from
other contemporary sources, such as Salt (1814), Bowdich (1819), Kilham (1828), Rüppell (1829), Norris (1841),
Hodgson (1844), Avezac (1845), Beke (1845), etc., but some material comes from manuscripts handed to the author
by various friends and colleagues.
206
Latham, Robert Gordon. 1849/50. On the Edeeyah vocabulary. Journal of the Ethnological Society
of London, v. 2, p. 117-119.
Latham, Robert Gordon. 1850. On a vocabulary of Aveekvoom, Ivory Coast. Proceedings of the
Philological Society, v. 4, p. 183-184.
Latham, Robert Gordon. 1850. Remarks upon a vocabulary of the Bonny language. Proceedings of
the Philological Society, v. 4, p. 73-74.
Latham, Robert Gordon. 1858. On certain classes in African philology, especially the Mandingo,
Kouri, Nufi, and Fula groups. Transactions of the Philological Society, 1858, p. 107-122.
Does Nufi refer to the Fe’fe’? And who are the Kouri?
Latham, Robert Gordon. 1862. Elements of comparative philology. London: Walter & Maberly.
Pp xxxii, 774.
Includes something on Chadic languages (Newman 1996:117), as well as on Ako, Nufi and Ashanti on p. 775ff
(Hinzte 1959:37).
Lauth, F.J. 1871. Semitische Lehnwörter im Ägyptischen. Zeitschrift der deutschen
morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 25, p. 618-644.
Lauture, Pierre Henri Stanilas d’Escayrac de. 1855. ... [Title and details wanting]. Bulletin de la
Société de Géographie (Paris), 4ème série, v. (?), p. (?).
The volume number is either 9 or 10. The article has a small Tibu vocabulary, something on Beja, and other things.
Laws, Robert. 1880. English-Tshigunda vocabulary. Edinburgh?
Referred to by Johnston (1919:795).
Laws, Robert. 1885. Table of concords and paradigm of verbs of the Chinyanja language as
spoken at Lake Nyasa. Edinburgh: J. Thin for the University of Edinburgh.
Laws, Robert. 1894. An English-Nyanja dictionary of the Nyanja language spoken in British
Central Africa. Edinburgh: James Thin. Pp xi, 231.
Leander, Pontus. 1918. Kurze Bemerkungen zur aetiopischen Formenlehre. In: Studier tillegnede
E. Tegnér den 13 januari 1918, p. 1-7. Lund.
Lecomte, Ernesto. 189x. Clef des langues mbundu, ganguella, etc. Portugal em Africa, v. (?), p. (?).
Not sure about this? Source?
Lecomte, Ernesto. 1894. Método prático de umbundu. Boletim da Sociedade de Geográfia de
Lisboa, 1894, p. (?).
Lecomte, Ernesto. 1897. Método prático de língua Mbundu, falada no distrito de Benguella.
Lisboa. Pp 124.
This could be a reprint from 1894.
Lecomte, Ernesto. 1899. Elongiso liumbundu lioputu: ou methodo de leitura em umbundu e
portuguez. Luanda. Pp 27.
Lecomte, Ernesto. 1902. Pequeno método português-cuanhama: pequeno método de aprender
português para uso dos povos do cuanhama (sul de Angola). Huíla (Angola).
Lecomte, Ernesto. 1902. Elongiso lioputu: pequeno methodo de para o uso dos povos vimbundu,
districto de benguela. Segunda edição. Caconda (Angola). Pp 35.
The first edition of 1899 was titled Elongiso liumbundu lioputu.
Lecomte, Ernesto. 1903. Pequeno methodo de aprender portuguez para uso dos povos: ganguellas
e ambuellas, vimbundo, quanhama [pt. 1-9]. Portugal em Africa, v. 10, p. 141-144, 218-222,
269-272, 406-409, 458-461, 570-573, 526-527, 620-623, 670-671.
Lecomte, Ernesto. 1904. Pequeno methodo de aprender portuguez para uso dos povos: ganguellas
e ambuellas, vimbundo, quanhama [pt. 10]. Portugal em Africa, v. 11, p. 14-18.
Lecomte, Ernesto. 1905. Methodo de leitura em portuguez: para se seguir á leitura em lingua
indígena nas missões do districto de Benguella. Terceira edição.
Details wanting. Earlier editions bore the titles Elongiso liumbundu lioputu (1899) and Elongiso lioputu (1902).
Lederbogen, Wilhelm. 1901. Duala-Märchen [pt. 1]. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische
207
Lederbogen, Wilhelm; Huber, M. 1904. Duala fables. Journal of the African Society, v. 4, 13, p.
56-77.
Leesberg, A.C.M. 1905. Comparative philology: a comparison between Semitic and American
languages. Leiden: E.J. Brill. Pp viii, 82.
Peripherals: J. Dyneley Prince, American anhropologist, new series, v. 6 (1904) p. 153-155.
Lefebvre, Théophile Charlemagne; Petit, Antoine; Quartin-Dillon, Léon Richard; others. 1845/54.
Voyage en Abyssinie exécute pendant les années 1839-43 par une commission scientifique, 6
vols. Paris: A. Bertrand.
A total of 6 volumes in four parts by several author. The third volume includes, among other things, a list of Oromo
numerals (p. 328-329), and a French-Oromo vocabulary with dialogues (p. 377-392). There seems also to be an
earlier account of these travels: “M. Lefevre, M. Petit, and M. Dillon have given routes of their travels in Tegrí in
the year 1839, accompanied by a native itinerary from Derita to Naxda” (Greenough 1841:lv).
Legge, G.F. 1902. The history of transliteration of Egyptian. Proceedings of the Society of Biblical
Legrain, Georges. 1908. Répertoire généalogique et onomastique du Musée du Caire: monuments
de la XVIIe et de la XVIIIe dynastie. Genève: Société Anonyme des Arts Graphiques. Pp
340.
Peripherals: J. Lieblein, Sphinx, v. 12 (1908) p. 5.
Leigh, John Studdy. 1837/39. Unpublished vocabularies of Sohili and Quilimani.
Manuscript vocabularies in the possession of Latham (1847:193). The Quilimani (Echuwabo?) vocabulary is
reproduced by Latham (1847:193f).
Lejean, Guillaume. 1865. Voyage aux deux nils (Nubie, Kordofan, Soudan oriental), exécuté de
1860 à 1864 par ordre de l’empereur. Paris: Hachette. Pp 191.
Includes vocabulary material for Fougn (= Gule) and Goubba/Goumouz (p. 177-178) plus Barea and Denka (p. 183184).
Lejeune, L. [R.P.]. 1892. Dictionnaire français-fañg, précédé de quelques principes
grammaticaux sur cette même langue. Paris: Librairie Africaine & Coloniale (Joseph
André). Pp viii, 347.
Deals with the Makei dialect of Ogowo (southern Fang A75). The introduction includes a grammatical description
comprising 51 pages which were separately reprinted 1895 in Actes de la sociéte philologique, v. 24.
Lejeune, L. [R.P.]. 1895. Quelques principes grammaticaux. Actes de la Société Philologique, v. 24,
p. (?).
This was originally published 1892 as an introduction to the author’s Dictionnaire français-fang.
Lemaire, Charles [Capt.]. 1894. Vocabulaire pratique français-anglais-zanzibarite. Bruxelles.
Lemm, Oskar [Eduardovich] von. 1912. Kleine koptische Studien, 3 vols. Bulletin de l’Academie
Imperiale des Sciences de St.-Pétersburg. St. Petersburg: Buchdruckerei der Kaiserlichen
Akademie der Wissenschaften.
Includes off-prints of 58 articles originally published in Bulletin de l’Académie Imperiale des Sciences de St.Pétersbourg, beginning in 1899. Reprinted 1972 by Zentralantiquariat der Deutschen Demokratischen Republik in
Leipzig (Subsidia byzantina lucis ope iterata, #10; ix+680 pp).
Lentzner, Karl August. 1891. Colonial English: a glossary of Australian, Anglo-Indian, pidgin
English, West Indian, and South African words. London.
Lepsius, [Karl] Richard. 1836. Über den Ursprung und die Verwandtschaft der Zahlwörter in der
Indogermanischen, Semitischen und der Koptischen Sprache. Berlin: Ferdinand Dümmlers
Verlagsbuchhandlung. Pp 265. ISBN-10 3-905141-73-6.
Lepsius, [Karl] Richard. (Ed.) 1842. Das Todtenbuch der Ägypter nach dem hieroglyphischen
Papyrus in Turin. Leipzig: G. Wigand. Pp 24, plates.
Lepsius, [Karl] Richard. (Ed.) 1849/59. Denkmäler aus Ägypten und Äthiopin nach den
Zeichnungen der von seiner Majestäts den Könige von Preussen, Friedrich Wilhelm IV,
nach diesen Länder gesendeten und in den Jahren 1842 - 45 ausgeführten
wissenschaftlichen Expedition auf Befehl seiner Majestäts, 12 Bde. Berlin: Nicolai.
Lepsius, [Karl] Richard. (Ed.) 1852. Discoveries in Egypt, Ethiopia and the Peninsula of Sinai, in
the years 1842-1845, during the mission sent out by His Majesty Frederick William IV of
208
Prussia. Edited, with notes, by Kenneth R.H. Mackenzie. London: Richard Bentley. Pp xvi,
455.
Lepsius, [Karl] Richard. 1854. Das allgemeine linguistische Alphabet: Grundsätze der
Übertragung fremder Schriftsysteme und bisher noch ungeschriebener Sprachen in
europäische Buchstaben. Berlin: Wilhelm Hertz.
Includes stuff on, for instance, Beja/Bishari (p. 54), Oromo (p. 204-205).
Lepsius, [Karl] Richard. 1855. Standard alphabet for reducing unwritten languages and foreign
graphic systems to a uniform orthography in European letters. London: Williams &
Norgate.
193-218.
Lepsius, [Karl] Richard. 1863. Standard alphabet for reducing unwritten languages and foreign
graphic systems to a uniform orthography in European letters. Second edition. London:
Williams & Norgate. Pp viii, 99; xvii, 336.
Reprinted 1981 by John Benjamins (Amsterdam classics in linguistics, #5), edited and introduced by J. Alan Kemp.
Peripherals: Carol M. Eastman, Language, v. 58 (1982) p. 724-725.
Lepsius, [Karl] Richard. 1880. Nubische Grammatik, mit einer Einleitung über die Völker und
Sprachen Afrikas. Berlin: Wilhelm Hertz. Pp xii, cxxvi, 506.
Includes a section “Hottentotten” (p. lxv-lxxii). Reprinted 1969 by Frank Cass & Co. in London.
Peripherals: Adolf Erman, Göttingische gelehrte Anzeigen, v. 2/33 (1880) p. 1043-1056; H. Steinthal, Zeitschrift
für Völkerpsykologie und Sprachwissenschaft, v. 12 (1880) p. 335-359; Georg Ebers, Zeitschrift der deutschen
morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 35 (1881) p. 207-218; Johann Gottlieb Christaller, “Bemerkungen zu R.
Lepsius’ Einleitung über die Völker und Sprachen Afrikas”, Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 1 (1887/88) p.
241-251; C.M. Doke, “The growth of comparative Bantu philology (revised)”, African studies, v. 19 (1960) p.
193-218.
Lerchundi, J. 1892. Vocabulario español-arabigo del dialecto de Marruecos con gran número de
voces usadas en Oriente y en la Argelia. Tánger.
Leslie, David. 1875. Among the Zulus and the Amatongas, with sketches of the natives, their
language and customs, and the country, products, climate, wild animals, &c., being
principally contributions to magazines and newspapers. Edited by W.H. Drummond.
Edinburgh: Edmondston & Douglas. Pp 436.
URL: www.archive.org/details/amongzulusamaton00leslrich
Letourneux, A. 1880/81. Du dechiffrement des inscriptions libyco-berbères. In: Atti del IV
congresso internazionale degli orientalisti, tenuto in Firenze nel settembre 1878, v. 1, p. 5775. Firenze: Le Monnier.
Levi-Provençal, E. 1917. Une liste de surnoms populaires des tribus Djebalah. Les archives
berbères, v. 2, p. (?).
Lewinsky, A. von. (Ed.) 1905. Neun Dschagga-Märchen: erzählt von den Missionaren Gutmann
und Fokken. Lichtstrahlen aus dem dunkeln Erdteile, kleine Serie, #3. Leipzig: EvangelischLutherische Mission. Pp 16.
Lewinsky, A. von. 1909. Acht Kambamärchen, erzählt von den Missionaren Pfitzinger, Kanig,
Brutzer, Gerthold. Lichtstrahlen aus dem dunkeln Erdteile, kleine Serie, #4. Leipzig:
Evangelisch-Lutherische Mission. Pp 16.
Lewis, Locke. 1834. An account of the Ovahs, a race of people residing in the interior of
Madagascar, with a sketch of their country, appearance, dress, language, etc. Journal of the
Royal Geographical Society of London, v. 4, p. 230-242.
Lichtenstein, Hinrich [Martin] [Karl]. 1807. Ueber der Bectjuanas.
Not sure what this is. Either a book, an article, or a manuscript. The title is apparently accurate (even the gender).
An English translation appeared 1973 in the book Foundation of the Cape.
Lichtenstein, Hinrich [Martin] [Karl]. 1808. Bemerkungen über die Sprachen der südafrikanischen
wilden Völkerstämme, nebst einem kleinen Wörterverzeichnisse aus den gebräuchlichsten
Dialecten der Hottentotten und Kaffern. Allgemeines Archiv für Ethnographie und Linguistik
(Weimar), v. 1, p. 259-331.
193-218.
209
Lichtenstein, Hinrich [Martin] [Karl]. 1811/12. Reisen im südlichen Afrika in den Jahren 1803,
1804, 1805 und 1806, 2 Bde. Berlin: Salfeld. Pp x, 1346.
Volume II includes an appendix on Korana and /Xam Bushman. First volume reprinted 1967 by F.A. Brockhaus in
Stuttgart, with a new introduction by Wahrhold Drascher (Quellen zur Forschungen zur Geschichte der Geographie
und der Reisen, #4).
Lichtenstein, Hinrich [Martin] [Karl]. 1812. Über die Sprache der wilden Hottentottenstämme,
insonderheit der Koranen und Buschmänner. In: Reisen im südlichen Afrika in den Jahren
1803, 1804, 1805 und 1806, v. 2, p. 603-618. Berlin: Salfeld.
Lichtenstein, Hinrich [Martin] [Karl]. 1812. Remarks upon the language of the Koossas,
accompanied by a vocabulary of their words. In: Travels in southern Africa in the years
1803, 1804, 1805 and 1806, v. 1, p. (?). London: Henry Colburn.
Lichtenstein, Hinrich [Martin] [Karl]. 1812/15. Travels in southern Africa in the years 1803,
1804, 1805 and 1806, 2 vols. Translated from German by Anne Plumptre. London: Henry
Colburn. Pp 1383.
Reprinted 1928/30 by the Van Riebeeck Society in Cape Town (Publications from the Van Riebeeck Society, nos
10-11).
Peripherals: John Barrow, Quarterly review, v. 8 (1812) p. 374-395.
Lichtenstein, Hinrich [Martin] [Karl]. 1815. Upon the language of the Betjuanas. In: Travels in
southern Africa in the years 1803, 1804, 1805 and 1806, v. 2, p. (?). London: Henry
Colburn.
Brief vocabulary.
Lichtenstein, Hinrich [Martin] [Karl]. 1973. Foundation of the Cape: being a history of the
discovery and colonization of southern Africa. Fragments of an unpublished manuscript
written c.1811, with additional material; translated, edited and with a biographical introduction
by O.H. Spohr. South African biographical and historical series, #18. Cape Town: A.A.
Balkema. Pp viii, 113. ISBN-10 0-86961-030-9.
Includes a translation of “Ueber die Bectjuanas”, originally published 1807.
Lidzbarski, Mark. 1913. Eine Punisch-Altberberische Bilinguis aus einem Tempel des Massinissa.
Sitzungsberichte der (kaiserlichen) Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Wien, philosophischhistorische Klasse, v. 15, p. (?).
Lieblein, Jens Daniel Carolus. 1871. Dictionnaire de noms hiéroglyphiques en ordre généalogique
et alphabétique. Publié d’après les monuments égyptiens. Christiania (Schweiz): Brögger &
Christie. Pp iv, 555.
A supplement to this was apparently published 1892.
Lieblein, Jens Daniel Carolus. 1875. Index alphabétique de tous les mots contenus dans le livre
des morts. Publié par R. Lepsius, d’après le papyrus de Turin. Paris: Friedrich Vieweg &
Sohn. Pp 186.
Lieblein, Jens Daniel Carolus. 1897. Mots égyptiens dans la Bible. Proceedings of the Society of
Liebrecht, Felix. 1865? Hottentottische Märchen. Zeitschrift für Völkerpsykologie und
Sprachwissenschaft, v. 5, p. 58-73.
Lilani, Alidina Somjee. 1890. Guide to the Swahili language in Gujerati characters, with English
and Gujerati translations. Bombay: Self-published. Pp 204, 4.
Lindblom, [Karl] Gerhard. 1914. Outlines of a Tharaka grammar, with a list of words and
specimens of the language. Archives d’études orientalis, #9. Uppsala: K.W. Appelbergs
Boktryckeri. Pp 54.
The orthography used is the so-called Swedish dialect alphabet.
Peripherals: Carl Meinhof, Deutsche Literatur-Zeitung, 1917, p. 1067-1069.
Lippert, Julius. 1900. Sudanica II: die Monatsnamen in der Haussasprache. Mitteilungen des
210
Lippert, Julius. 1905. Haussa-Märchen. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v.
8, III, p. 223-250.
Lippert, Julius. 1906. Über die Stellung der Haussasprache unter den afrikanischen
Sprachgruppen. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 9, III, p. 334-344.
Littmann, Enno. 1897. Die Pronomina im Tigre. Zeitschrift für Assyriologie und verwandte
Gebiete, v. 12, p. 188-230, 291-316.
Littmann, Enno. 1898. Das Verbum det Tigresprache [pt. 1]. Zeitschrift für Assyriologie und
Littmann, Enno. 1899. Das Verbum det Tigresprache [pt. 2]. Zeitschrift für Assyriologie und
verwandte Gebiete, v. 14, p. (?).
Littmann, Enno. 1904. L’origine de alphabet libyque. Journal asiatique, 10ème série, v. 4 [165], p.
423-440.
Littmann, Enno. 1904/11. Bibliotheca Abessinica: studies concerning language, literature and
history of Abyssinia, 4 vols. Leiden & Princeton NJ. Pp xi, 40; vii, 30; xxii, 158; 240.
Includes four texts with notes and comments. But are they Ge‘ez or Amharic?
Littmann, Enno. 1907. Geschichte der äthiopischen Literatur. Die Litteraturen des Ostens in
Einzeldarstellung, #7:2. Leipzig.
Littmann, Enno. 1910. Tales, customs, names and dirges of the Tigre tribes. Publications of the
Princeton Expedition to Abyssinia, #1-2. Leiden: E.J. Brill. Pp xvii, 287; xvii, 344.
The first part contains the Tigre text, the second contains an English translation.
Littmann, Enno. 1913. Lieder der Tigrê-Stämme: Tigre text. Publications of the Princeton
Expedition to Abyssinia, #3. London: E.J. Brill. Pp xxiv, 541.
Littmann, Enno. 1913/15. Lieder der Tigrê-Stämme: Deutsche Übersetzung und Commentar - A.
Lieder der Mänsa’, Bêt-Gûk und Mâryâ / B. Lieder der ‘Ad-Temâryâm, ‘Ad-Hebtês
(Habâb), ‘Ad-Taklês und kleinerer Stämme, 2 parts. Publications of the Princeton
Expedition to Abyssinia, #4. London: E.J. Brill. Pp x, 587; [591]-1097.
Littmann, Enno. 1914. Die altamharische Kaiserlieder. Strassburg: Heitz. Pp 36.
Littmann, Enno. 1917. Ge‘ez-Studien I-II. Nachrichten von der Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften
zu Göttingen, philosophisch-historische Klasse, 1917, p. 672-702.
Littmann, Enno. 1918. Ge‘ez-Studien III. Nachrichten von der Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften zu
Göttingen, philosophisch-historische Klasse, 1918, p. 318-339.
Livingstone, David [Rev.]. 18xx. Dictionary of the Barotse, Tete, etc., languages. Cape Town: Grey
Livingstone, David [Rev.]. 18xx. An alphabetical vocabulary of the various Tsuana dialects. Cape
In addition to what is stated in the title, “from [page] 214 on it is a polyglottic comparison of Bakhoba [R41],
Bashubea [K42], Baloyazi [K13]; Bamaponda [K13], Barotse [K21], Batoka [M64], Banyenko [K16], Bechuana
[S31] and English” (Doke 1959:11n41).
Livingstone, David [Rev.]. 185x. Comparative vocabulary of eight Bantu languages: Bakhoba
(Bayeyi), Bashubea, Balojazi, Ba(ma)ponda, Barotse, Batoka, Banyenko, Betshwana.
Handwritten manuscript, ref. MSB 305-1. Cape Town: Grey Collection, South African
Public Library. Pp 35.
No title. Sometimes referred to as “Livingstone’s five vocabularies”. It does, however, contain columns for eight
languages, i.e. Bakhoba/Bayeyi R41, Bashubea K42, Balojazi K13, Ba(ma)ponda K13, Barotse K21, Batoka M64,
Banyenko K16, and Betshwana S31.
Livingstone, David [Rev.]. 1855. Unpublished Kimbundu wordlist(s). Cape Town: Grey
Collection, South African Public Library.
“Vocabularies of Ki-mbundu have been collected by Dr Livingstone, of whose work an unpublished copy exists in
the Grey Library, Cape Town” (Doke 1945:23). Dated 1855 by Johnston (1919:801).
Livingstone, David [Rev.]. 1858. Analysis of the language of the Bechuanas. Johannesburg:
Gubbins Library, University of the Witwatersrand. Pp 40.
“Printed for private circulation among the members of Livingstone’s Zambesi expedition ... originally written in
1852 ... a careful and accurate account of the language. Three pages are devoted to pronunciation ... An appreciative
account of this publication was written by A. Sandilands in the Tiger Kloof Magazine, No. 22, Dec. 1940, under the
mistaken title of “The first Setswana grammar” (Doke 1959:11).
211
Peripherals: Alexander Sandilands, “The first Setswana grammar”, Tiger Kloof magazine, v. 22 (1940) p.(?); C.M.
Doke, “Bantu language pioneers of the nineteenth century”, African studies, v. 14 (1940) p. 207-246; C.M. Doke,
“Bantu language pioneers of the nineteenth century” (revised), African studies, v. 18 (1959) p. 1-27.
Livingstone, David [Rev.]. 1874. Unpublished Mawiha vocabulary.
Apparently Livingstone compiled a Mawiha vocabulary (see Doke 1945:54). Possibly it exists in manuscript form
somewhere (Cape Town?).
Livinhac, Leon. 1885. Essai de grammaire ruganda. Paris: F. Levé pour la Société des
Missionnaires de Notre-Dame des Missions d’Afrique. Pp xiii, 98.
Issued anonymously.
Livinhac, Leon. 1890. Grammaire luganda. Nouvelle édition. Pp 134.
Details wanting.
Livinhac, Leon. 1894. Manuel de langue luganda comprenant la grammaire et un recueil de
contes et de légendes. Nouvelle édition, revue par C. Denoit. Einsiedeln (Suisse): Benzinger
& Co. Pp 290.
Livinhac, Leon. 1914. Manuel de langue luganda. Nouvelle édition, revue par P.H. le Veux. Pp xv,
475.
Details wanting.
Lloyd, B.G. 191x. Kitchen-Kafir grammar and vocabulary. Second edition. Johannesburg:
Central News Agency (CNA).
Doke (1945:82) says this is “weird but amusing” and that it “went through several editions.” No idea when the first
edition may have appeared. Mesthrie (1992:323) gives the author’s initials as D.C.
Lloyd, E. 1910. Some Sudanese superstitions. Man: a record of anthropological science, v. 10, p.
152 (art. 89).
Lloyd, Lucy Catherine. 1880. Bushman folklore. Folk-lore journal (Cape Town), v. 2, p. 39-43.
Without author’s name.
Lloyd, Lucy Catherine. 1889. A short account of further Bushman material collected: third report
concerning Bushman researches, presented to both Houses of the Parliament of the Cape of
Good Hope, by command of His Excellency the Governor. London: David Nutt. Pp 28.
Lloyd, Lucy Catherine. 1911. A few !Kun texts (supplement). In: Specimens of Bushman folklore,
p. 404-433. Ed. by Wilhelm Heinrich Immanuel Bleek & Lucy Catherine Lloyd. London:
George Allen & Unwin.
Lomax, John A. 1913. Stories of an African Prince: Yoruba tales. Journal of American folklore, v.
26, 99, p. 1-12.
Lopes, Gustavo de Bivar Pinto. 1889. Elementos para um vocabulário do dialécto falado em
Quelimane: Ichuábo. Lourenço Marques: Imprensa Nacional. Pp 36.
Loram, C.T. 1917. The education of the South African native. London: Longmans, Green & Co.
URL: www.archive.org/details/educationofsouth00lorauoft
Lorenz, A. 1914. Entwurf einer Kimakonde-Grammatik. Mitteilungen des Seminars für
Loret, Victor. 1889. Manuel de la langue égyptienne: grammaire, tableau des hièroglyphes, textes
et glossaire. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp ix, 173.
Loret, Victor. 1904. Une hypothèse au sujet de la vocalisation égyptienne. Proceedings of the
Society of Biblical Archaeology, v. 26, p. (?).
Lottner, C. 1860/61. On sister families of languages, specially those connected with the Semitic
family. Transactions of the Philological Society, 1860/61, p. 112-132 (sect. XX-XXVII).
The Roman numbers refer to sections.
Louet, [R.P.]. 1890. Dictionnaire français-fiote, dialecte Kakongo. Paris.
This may be identical to Visseq (1889).
Loupias, [Père]. 1908. Tradition et légende des batutsi sur la création du monde et leur
etablissement au Ruanda. Anthropos: internationale Zeitschrift für Völker- und
Sprachenkunde, v. 3, p. 1-13.
Johnston (1919/22) used this as one of his main sources for Ha, so presumably it contains something.
212
Louttit, Thomas. 1916. A brief grammar of the Chokwe language. Chicago. Pp 47.
Also referred to as Chokwe grammar.
Louw, C.S. [Mrs]. 1915. A manual of the Chikaranga language with grammar, exercises, useful
conversational sentences and vocabulary. Bulawayo: Philpott & Collins. Pp x, 397.
Includes grammar (p. 3-104), key to exercises (p. 105-128), useful conversational sentences (p. 129-144), EnglishChikaranga vocabulary (p. 149-290), and Chikaranga-English vocabulary with over 8,000 entries (p. 291-397).
Peripherals: Carl Meinhof, Zeitschrift für Eingeborenen-Sprachen, v. 10 (1919/20) p. 78-80.
Low, W.P. 1908. Gbari grammar, notes and vocabulary. Compiled at Kuta, Northern Nigeria.
Zungeru (Nigeria): Government Printing Office. Pp 17.
Loyre, E. 1909. Les populations de la moyenne Sangha. Questions diplomatiques et coloniales, v.
1, p. (?).
“L’article comporte des notations sur les langues des populations de la moyenne Sangha” (Lumwamu 1980:84).
Loze, Pierre. 1907. Vocabulário portuguez-shironga. Pp 24.
Details wanting.
Lucas, Louis. 1877. Extract from a letter to the President of the Anthropological Institute together
with an accompanying short vocabulary of Bishareen words. Journal of the Anthropological
Inst. of Great Britain and Ireland, v. 6, p. 191-194.
Luddington, William. 187x. ... [Title wanting].
Early manuscript work on Bobe A31. “In the seventies and eighties Primitive Methodist missionaries (coloured as
well as white), such as William Luddington and Theophilus Parr, and Spanish Dominicans such as Juanola, did a
great deal for the elucidation of the Bantu dialects of Fernando Pô. Much of the work of the Primitive Methodists,
however, has not yet been printed” (Johnston 1919:9).
Lunis, ’Amr Nur ibn Si; Yahya, Moka Mas’ud ibn. 1897. Grammaire mozabite. Alger. Pp 67.
Lux, Anton Erwin. 1880. Von Loanda nach Kimbundu: Ergebnisse der Forschungsreise im
Äquatorialen West-Afrika 1875-1876. Wien. Pp viii, 219.
“Vocabularies of Ki-mbundu have been collected ... by the German explorer Lux, published as an appendix to his
book” (Doke 1945:23).
Lyne, R.N. 1903. Native names of plants in Zanzibar and Pemba. Shamba: Zanzibar journal of
agriculture, June 1903, p. 11-16.
Lyon, George Francis. 1821. A narrative of travels in northern Africa, in the years 1818, 19, and
20; accompanied by geographical notices of Soudan, and of the course of the Niger, with a
chart of the routes, and a variety of coloured plates, illustrative of the costumes of the
several natives of Northern Africa. London: John Murray. Pp xii, 383.
Includes several vocabularies, e.g. the language of Bornou (Kanuri; p 122-123), “words from a young woman from
Sakkatoo” (Fula?; p 135-138), the language of Tembuctoo (Songhai?; p 146-147), Haousa (p. 149-151), Tibboo
language (Daza?; p 232-233), and the language of Sockna/Ertana (Nubian?; p 314-316). Reprinted 1966 by Frank
Cass & Co. in London; and 1985 by Darf Publishers in London (ISBN-10 1-85077-032-8).
Maass, [Missionar]; Seidel, August. 1897. Beiträge zur Kenntnis des Kizaramo. Zeitschrift für
Mabille, Adolphe. 1876. Sesuto-English dictionary. Pp 158.
Details wanting. The second edition of 1893 was supplemented with a grammar and an English-Sesuto dictionary
part. This English-Sesuto part was later revised by H. Dieterlen and appeared in various editions (3rd 1904; 4th
1911; 5th 1924; 6th 1937). The Sesuto-English section was later revised by A. Casalis and also appeared in a
variety of editions (2nd 1905; 3rd 1908; 4th 1911; 5th 1925). See Doke (1945:91).
Mabille, Adolphe. 1878. Helps for to learn the Sesuto language. Morija: Mission Press. Pp 223.
Mabille, Adolphe. 1891. Mantsue a go buisana ka ke se Sotho le se English: dictionary of
conversation, Sesutho-English. Morija: Mission Press.
Issued without author’s name. “This later became known as ‘Puisano’, the oft-reprinted and much-used phrase book Sesotho-English” (Doke 1945:91).
Mabille, Adolphe. 1893. Sesuto-English dictionary. Second edition, introduced with a grammatical
sketch by E. Jacottet, and supplemented with an English-Sesuto vocabulary. Pp 487.
Details wanting. The English-Sesuto vocabulary was later published separately.
213
Mabille, Adolphe. 1893. Se-Suto-English and English-Se-Suto vocabulary / Mantsue a se-Sotho le
se-English le hlalaso ea’ona. Second edition, with an elementary sketch of se-Suto grammar
by E. Jacottet. Morija: Mission Press. Pp viii, 487.
Mabille, Adolphe. 1904. Sesuto-English dictionary. Third edition, preceded by a grammatical
sketch by E. Jacottet, and revised by H. Dieterlen.
Details wanting.
Mabille, Adolphe. 1905. English-Sesuto vocabulary. Second edition, revised by A. Casalis. Morija:
Sesuto Book Depot.
The original version appeared in 1893 as a supplement to Mabille’s Sesuto-English dictionary.
Mabille, Adolphe. 1908. English-Sesuto vocabulary. Third edition, edited by A. Casalis. Morija:
Sesuto Book Depot.
Mabille, Adolphe. 1911. Sesuto-English dictionary. Fourth edition, revised and considerably
enlarged by H. Dieterlen. Morija: Sesuto Book Depot. Pp viii, 511.
Mabille, Adolphe. 1911. English-Sesuto vocabulary. Fourth edition, revised by A. Casalis. Morija:
Sesuto Book Depot.
Later editions (and perhaps also this?) were credited to the editor, A. Casalis, with no or slight mention of Mabille.
Mabille, Adolphe. 1912. Puisano ea Sesotho le se-English: phrase book Sesuto-English. Morija:
Sesuto Book Depot.
MacBriar, R. Maxwell [Rev.]. 1837. A grammar of the Mandingo language, with vocabularies.
London: Wesleyan Methodist Missionary Society. Pp 74.
MacBriar, R. Maxwell [Rev.]. 1854. A grammar of the Fulah language, with vocabularies.
London.
MacDonald, C. 1894. Asiatic origin of the Oceanic languages: etymological dictionary of the
language Efate (New Hebrides). London.
Asiatic refers to the Semitic languages.
MacDonald, C. 1896. The Asiatic or Semitic origin of the Oceanian numerals, personal pronouns,
phonology and grammar. Journal of the Polynesian Society, v. 5, p. 212-232.
MacDonald, C. 1901. The Asiatic (Semitic) relationship of the Oceanian family of languages:
triliteralism and internal vowel change. Journal of the Polynesian Society, v. 13, p. 57-64.
Macdonald, James Ronald Leslie [Maj.]. 1899. Notes on the ethnology of tribes met with during
progress of the Juba Expedition of 1897-1899. Journal of the Anthropological Inst. of Great
Britain and Ireland, v. 29, 3/4, p. 226-248.
Includes vocabularies for Swahili, Usoga, N. Kavirondo (Isuxa?), Masai, Latuka, Karamojo, Suk, Nandi,
Wanderobo, Save (Sapiny), S. Kavirondo/Wanyifa, Borana Galla and Ogaden Somali. In some bibliographies, the
title is given simply as “Central African vocabularies”.
Peripherals: S.L. Hinde, “Notes on the Masai section of Lieut.-Colonel MacDonald’s vocabulary”, Journal of the
Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland, v. 29 (1899) p. 248-249; M.E. Woodward, “Notes on the
Swahili section of Lieut.-Colonel MacDonald’s vocabulary”, Journal of the Anthropological Institute of Great
Britain and Ireland, v. 29 (1899) p. 250.
Macedo, J.J. da Costa de. 1841. Ethnographical remarks on the original languages of the
inhabitants of the Canary Islands. Journal of the Royal Geographical Society of London, v.
11, p. 171-183.
Macgregor, J.K. 1909. Some notes on Nsibidi. Journal of the Royal Anthropological Inst. of
Great Britain and Ireland, v. 39, p. 209-219.
Machuel, Louis. 1901. Al-Dalil / Eddalil ou guide de l’arabisant dans l’étude des dialectes parlés
en Algérie et en Tunisie. Alger: Librairie Adolphe Jourdan. Pp 96, 79.
Consist of two parts, one with Arabic text, one with French.
MacKenzie, D.R. 1911. Notes on the Tumbuka syntax. Unpublished? Livingstonia.
Mackenzie, Kenneth. 1856. Recent discoveries in the ancient history of Egypt. Littell’s living age
(New York), v. 50, 638, p. 396.
Brief report of a paper read before the Syro-Egyptian Society, June 10. Until recently “the names of the Egyptian
planets were very imperfectly known, but for the fortunate discovery of a set of demotic tablets of the Roman period
[which have now solved the mystery] ... the lecturer enlarged upon the important fact that the union of science with
philology had been the sole means by which these results were mathematically demonstrated.”.
214
URL: cdl.library.cornell.edu/moa/browse.journals/livn.html
MacKenzie, T.C. 1910. Vocabulary of the Bangala language. Cairo: Intelligence Dept. of the
Sudan Government. Pp 47.
Deals with Lingala “as spoken in the Lado district, Mongalla Province” (Doke 1945:28).
Mackey, James Love. 1855. A grammar of the Benga language. New York: Mission House. Pp
60.
Mackey, James Love. 1855. Benga primer.
Details wanting. A second edition appeared 1892 as Mackey’s grammar of the Benga-Bantu language, edited and
published by R.H. Nassau.
MacMichael, Harold Alfred. 1912. Notes on the Zaghawa and the people of Gebel-Midob, AngloEgyptian Sudan. Journal of the Royal Anthropological Inst. of Great Britain and Ireland, v.
42, p. 288-348.
MacMichael, Harold Alfred. 1918. Nubian elements in Darfur. Sudan notes and records, v. 2, p.
30-48.
On Meidob Nubian.
MacVicar, Neil. 190x. An English-Kafir nurses’ dictionary. Alice: Lovedale Mission Press. Pp viii,
94.
Madan, Arthur Cornwallis. 1884. An English-Swahili vocabulary: compiled from the works of the
late Bishop Steere and from other sources. London: Society for Promoting Christian
Knowledge (SPCK). Pp 56.
There are many reprints of this (e.g. 1911, 1922, 1927, 1941), most or all by the original publishers.
Madan, Arthur Cornwallis. 1888. Maelezo ya sarufi ya Kiswahili = Grammatical description of
Swahili. Pp 16.
Details wanting.
Madan, Arthur Cornwallis. 1894. English-Swahili dictionary. Compiled for the use of the
Universities’ Mission to Central Africa. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Pp vii, 415.
Madan, Arthur Cornwallis. 1902. English-Swahili dictionary. Second edition, revised. Oxford:
Clarendon Press. Pp xvi, 462.
Peripherals: A. Werner, Man, v. 2 (1902) p. 143 (art. 104).
Madan, Arthur Cornwallis. 1903. Swahili-English dictionary. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Pp xix,
442.
Reprinted several times.
URL: www.archive.org/details/swahilienglishdi00madauoft
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 3 (1903/04) p. 112-114; Anon(?), Amendments to Madan’s
Swahili-English dictionary (Inter-territorial Language Committee, 1935).
Madan, Arthur Cornwallis. 1904. An outline grammar, intended as an aid in the study of Bantu
and kindred languages. Fort Jameson: Administration Press. Pp 132.
Madan, Arthur Cornwallis. 1905. Senga handbook: a short introduction to the Senga dialect, as
spoken on the Lower Luangwa. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Pp 100.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 5 (1905/06) p. 325-326; A. Werner, Man, v. 6 (1906) p. 109.
Madan, Arthur Cornwallis. (Ed.) 1905. An outline dictionary, intended as an aid in the study of the
languages of the Bantu (African) and other uncivilised races. Oxford: Oxford University
Press (Henry Frowde). Pp xv, 400.
Contains an English wordlist to be used when collecting Bantu data.
Madan, Arthur Cornwallis. 1905. A Swahili (Zanzibar) grammar. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Pp
62.
215
Madan, Arthur Cornwallis. 1906. Wisa handbook: a short introduction to the Wisa dialect of
north-eastern Rhodesia. Oxford: The University Press. Pp 136.
Madan, Arthur Cornwallis. 1906. Correspondence to the editor: African languages. The
geographical journal, v. 28, 5, p. 516.
Madan, Arthur Cornwallis. 1907. Correspondence to the editor: African languages. Journal of the
African Society, v. 6, 22, p. 202.
Madan, Arthur Cornwallis. 1908. Lala-Lamba handbook: a short introduction to the southwestern division of the Wisa-Lala dialect of Northern Rhodesia, with stories and
vocabulary. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Pp 142.
Madan, Arthur Cornwallis. 1908. Lenje handbook: a short introduction to the Lenje dialect spoken
in north-west Rhodesia. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Pp 154.
Madan, Arthur Cornwallis. 1911. Living speech in central and south Africa: an essay introductory
to the Bantu family of languages. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Pp 95.
Comparative gramamr based on a survey of contemporary literature. The title is sometimes given as “Living speech
in Africa”.
URL: www.archive.org/details/livingspeechince00madaiala
Peripherals: W.A. C[rabtree], Journal of the African Society, v. 10 (1910/11) p. 365-367; Carl Meinhof, Zeitschrift
für Kolonialsprachen, v. 1 (1910/11) p. 238; H.H. Johnston, The geographical journal, v. 38 (1911) p. 308-310.
Madan, Arthur Cornwallis. 1913. Lala-Lamba-Wisa and English, English and Lala-Lamba-Wisa
dictionary. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Pp 328.
Madan, Arthur Cornwallis. 1914. Lala and the evolution of Bantu speech. Journal of the African
Society, v. 13, 50, p. 183-194.
Madan, Arthur Cornwallis. 1914. The syllabic basis of Bantu. Journal of the African Society, v. 13,
51, p. 296-306.
Madan, Arthur Cornwallis. 1915. Early stages of speech and thought in Bantu. Journal of the
Madan, Arthur Cornwallis. 1917. English-Swahili vocabulary. Abridged edition, revised by C.G.
Richards. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp 56.
Abridgement of English-Swahili dictionary. Reprinted 1942 by The Sheldon Press in London.
Madan, Arthur Cornwallis. 1917. Standards of Bantu speech. Journal of the African Society, v. 17,
65, p. 25-37.
Maddox, Harry Edward. 1902. An elementary Lunyoro grammar. London: Society for Promoting
Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp 81, 77.
Deals with Toro, here referred to as the western dialect of Nyoro.
Magyar, László. 1843. ... [Details wanting].
In one or other journal article, Magyar included a short vocabulary of Mbundu/Nano (see Doke 1945:101).
Magyar, László. 1859. Délafrikai utazásai 1849-57 években. Pest: Eggenberger.
Includes various vocabularies of southern African languages, e.g. Mbundu R11.
Magyar, László. 1859. Reisen in Süd-Afrika in den Jahren 1848-57. Aus dem ungarischen von
Johann Hunfalvy. Pest & Leipzig: Lauffer & Stolp.
Reprinted 1973 by Kraus Reprint in Nendeln.
Mahaffy, John Petland [Sir]. 1891/1905. The Flinders Petrie papyri, with transcriptions,
commentaries, and index, 3 vols. Cunningham memoirs, #8. Dublin: Academy House.
Mallon, A. 1904. Grammaire copte avec une bibliographie, chrestomathie et vocabulaire.
Beyrouth. Pp 148.
Malzac, V. [R.P.]. 1908. Grammaire malgache. Paris.
Malzac, V. [R.P.]. 1910/11. Philologie comparée du malgache. Bulletin de l’Académie Nationale
des Arts, des Lettres et des Sciences, Académie Malgache, v. (?), p. (?).
216
Probably several parts. Vol nos are 9 or 10, or both.
Mann, Adolphus. 1886. Notes on the numeral system of the Yoruba nation. Journal of the
Mann, Adolphus. 1886. Das Zahlensystem von Jóruba. (journal?), v. (?), p. (?).
Details wanting. Source?
Mann, Adolphus. 1888/89. Eine geschichtliche Sage aus der Zeit ersten Niederlassungen der Egba,
ein Stamm der Yoruba-Nation, West-Afrika. Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 2, p.
209-219.
Mansfeld, Alfred. 1908. Urwald-Dokumente: Vier Jahre unter den Crossflussnegern Kameruns.
Berlin: Verlag von Dietrich Reimer (Ernst Vohsen). Pp 310.
Contains, among other things, texts in Ekoi, Keaka, Obang, Anyang and Banyang.
Mansvelt, N. 1884. Proeve van een Kaapsch-Hollandsch idioticon, met toelichtingen en
opmerkingen betreffende land, volk en taal. Kaapstad: Martin. Pp viii, 190.
Maples, Chauncy [Bishop]. 1879. Collections for a handbook of the Makua language. London:
Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp xii, 100.
This deals “with the dialect spoken in the neighbourhood of Masasi” (Doke 1945:72).
Maples, Chauncy [Bishop]. 1880. Mawiha vocabulary.
A (manuscript?) Mawiha vocabulary, mentioned in passing by Doke (1945:54).
Maples, Chauncy [Bishop]. 1880/81. Notes on the Makua language. Transactions of the
Philological Society (London), 1880/81, p. 58-74.
Maples, Chauncy [Bishop]. 1888. Yao-English vocabulary, compiled from various sources.
Zanzibar: Universities’ Mission Press. Pp 114.
Marais-Hoogenhout, Nicolaas. 1904. Praktisches Lehrbuch der kapholländischen Sprache
(Buren-Sprache): Sprachlehre, Gespräche, Lesestücke, und Wörterbuch. Die Kunst der
Polyglottie, #84. Wien & Leipzig: A. Hartleben’s Verlag. Pp viii, 176.
Marçais, Philippe. 1902. Le dialecte arabe parlé à Tlemcen: grammaire, textes et glossaire.
Publications de l’Ecole des Lettres d’Alger; Bulletin de correspondance africaine, #26. Paris:
Ernest Leroux. Pp 325.
Marçais, Philippe. 1906. Le dialecte arabe des Ûlad Brâhîm de Saïda, département d’Oran [pt. 12]. Mémoires de la Société de Linguistique de Paris, v. 14, p. 97-164, 416-499.
Marçais, Philippe. 1907. Le dialecte arabe des Ûlad Brâhîm de Saïda, département d’Oran [pt. 34]. Mémoires de la Société de Linguistique de Paris, v. 15, p. 40-72, 104-109.
Marçais, Philippe. 1908. Le dialecte arabe des Ûlad Brâhîm de Saïda (Département d’Oran).
Revu et augmenté d’additions et correction. Paris. Pp iv, 210.
Contains revised versions of articles originally published in Mémoires de la société de Linguistique de Paris, v. 14
& 15.
Marçais, William. 1906. L’euphemisme et l’anti-phrase dans les dialectes arabes de l’Algérie. In:
Orientalische Studien Theodor Nöldeke zum siebzigsten Geburtstag, p. 425-438. Ed. by
Carl Bezold. Giessen (Deutschland).
Marçais, William. 1911. Textes arabes de Tanger: transcription, traduction annotée, glossaire.
Bibliothèque de l’Ecole des Langues Orientales Vivantes, #4. Paris.
Marçais, William. 1912. L’alternance vocalique a-u (a-i) au parfait du verbe régulier (1re forme)
dans le parler arabe de Tanger. Zeitschrift für Assyriologie und verwandte Gebiete, v. 27, p.
22-27.
Marichelle, Chr. 1900. Dictionnaire français-vili. Loango. Pp 114.
Marichelle, Chr. 1902. Dictionnaire vili-français. Loango: Imprimerie de la Mission. Pp 224.
Marichelle, Chr. 1907. Méthode pratique pour l’étude du dialecte vili. Loango. Pp 132.
Marichelle, Chr. 1912. Dictionnaire français-vili. Edition revisé. Loango: Imprimerie de la
Mission. Pp 164.
Marichelle, Chr. 1913. Méthode pratique pour l’étude du dialecte vili: grammaire vili du Loango.
Deuxième édition. Loango. Pp 126.
217
Marie, E. 1914. Vocabulaire français-djerma et djerma-français. Avec une préface de Maurice
Delafosse. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp 91.
Marie-Bernard, [Frère]. 1893. Méthode d’arabe parlé (idiome du Sénégal), 2 vols. Paris.
Marling, [?]. 1872. Dictionnaire fang-français. New York.
Referred to by Ella (2007:286).
Marno, Ernst. 1874. Reise im Gebiete des Blauen und Weissen Nil im ägyptischen Sudan und den
angrenzenden Negerländern, in den Jahren 1869 bis 1873. Wien: Carl Gerold’s Sohn. Pp
vi, 516, plates.
Includes “Kleine Vocabularien der Fungi, Tabi, Bertat und Nuer-Sprache” (p. 481-495).
Marno, Ernst. 1878. Reise in der aegyptischen Aequatorial-Provinz und in Kordofan in den
Jahren 1874-1876. Wien: Alfred Hölder. Pp 286, 160.
Includes “Anhang V: Linguistische Ergebnisse” (p. 145-158) with notes on Bari & Moru (p. 147-148), Mundo &
Golo (p. 148-151), Abaka, Bongo & Bagrimma (p. 152-156), Abu-Keia & Niam-Bari (p. 156-158).
Marr, N.J. 1886. Osnovnyje tablicy k gramatike drevne-gruzinskogo jazyka s predjvariteljnym
soobscenijem o rodstve gruzinskogo jazyka s semiticeskimi.
Details wanting. Unsure about contents.
Marré, Ernst C. 1901. Die Sprache der Hausa: Grammatik, Übungen, und Chrestomathie, soqie
hausanisch-deutsches und deutsch-hausanisches Wörterverzeichnis. Die Kunst der
Polyglottie, #11. Wien, Pest & Leipzig: A. Hartleben’s Verlag. Pp xi, 176.
Marsden, William. 1802. Observations on the language of Siwah. In: African researchers:
proceedings of the Association for Promoting the Discovery of the Interior Parts of Africa,
v. 2, pt. 2, p. 209-212. London: William Bulmer & Co.
Marsden, William. 1803. Observations on the language of Siwah (Appendix V). In: The journal of
Frederick Horneman’s travels, from Cairo to Mourzouk, the capital of the kingdom of
Fezzan, in Africa, p. (?). London: William Bulmer & Co. for G. & W. Nicol.
Marsden, William. 1803. Observations sur la langue siwahane, dans une lettre à l’honorable Sir
Joseph Banks. In: Friedrich Conrad Hornemann: voyages dans l’interieur de l’Afrique,
pendant les années 1797, 1798, p. 378-384. Paris: Joseph André.
Martrou, Louis. 1906. Les “eki” des fang. Anthropos: internationale Zeitschrift für Völker- und
Maspéro, Gaston. 191x. Les contes populaires de l’Egypte ancienne. Quatrième édition,
entièrement remaniée et augmentée. Paris: E. Guilmoto. Pp lxxvi, 328.
Maspéro, Gaston. 1867. L’inscription dédicatoire du temple d’Abydos. Paris: Librairie Franck. Pp
81.
Maspéro, Gaston. 1871. Les pronoms personnels en égyptien. Journal asiatique, 6ème série, v. 18
[99], p. 62-105.
Maspéro, Gaston. 1871. Des formes de la conjugation en égyptien antique, en démotique et en
copte. Bibliothèque de l’Ecole des Hautes Etudes, section des sciences historiques et
philologiques, #6. Paris. Pp 4, 123.
Maspéro, Gaston. 1875. Des pronoms en égyptien et dans les langues sémitiques. Mémoires de la
Société de Linguistique de Paris, v. 2, p. 1-8.
Maspéro, Gaston. 1879/90. Etudes égyptiennes, 2 vols. Paris: Imprimerie Nationale. Pp 314; 288.
Not sure about the dates. The first volume contains three parts: I.1 comprises “Romans et poésies du papyrus Harris
n° 500”, I.2 comprises “Etude sur quelques peintures et sur quelques textes relatifs aux funérailles”, and I.3 comprises
“Les chants d’amour du papurys de Turin et du papyrus Harris n° 500”, “Fragments d’une version égyptienne de la
fable des membres et de l’estomac” and “Quelques fragments inédits de la version thébaine de livres saints”. The
second volume contains two parts: II.1 comprises “Un manuel de hiérarchie égyptienne” and “La culture et les
bestiaux dans les tableaux des tombeaux de l’ancien empire”, while II.2 comprises “La carrière administrative de
deux hauts fonctionnaires égyptiens vers la fin de la IIIe dynastie et les quatre noms officiels des rois d’Egypt”.
Maspéro, Gaston. 1881. Sur la formation des thèmes trilitères en égyptien. Mémoires de la Société
de Linguistique de Paris, v. 4, p. 185-203.
Maspéro, Gaston. 1882. Les contes populaires de l’Egypte ancienne. Paris: Maisonneuve. Pp lxxx,
222.
218
Maspéro, Gaston. 1888. Sur les noms géographiques de la liste de Thoutmos III, qu’on peut
rapporter a la Judée. London: Harrison & Sons. Pp 23.
Maspéro, Gaston. 1889. Contes populaires de l’Egypte ancienne. Paris.
Maspéro, Gaston. 1889. Les contes populaires de l’Egypte ancienne. Deuxième édition. Paris:
Maisonneuve. Pp c, 338.
Maspéro, Gaston. 1893. A travers la vocalisation égyptienne [pt. 1]. Recueil de travaux relatifs à la
Maspéro, Gaston. 1894. Les inscriptions des pyramides de Saqqarah, 5 vols in 1. Paris: E.
Bouillon. Pp 458.
Comprises articles previously published in the journal Recueil de travaux relatifs à la philologie et à l’archéologie
égyptiennes et assyriennes, during 1882-1892.
Maspéro, Gaston. 1896. Une inscription trilingue découverte à Philae. Comptes rendus des
séances de l’Academie des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres, 1896, p. (?).
Maspéro, Gaston. 1899. Sur une forme du pronom féminin de la seconde personne du singulier.
Recueil de travaux relatifs à la philologie et à l’archéologie égyptiennes et assyriennes, v. 21,
p. 197-199.
Maspéro, Gaston. 1901. A travers la vocalisation égyptienne [pt. 7-8]. Recueil de travaux relatifs à
la philologie et à l’archéologie égyptiennes et assyriennes, v. 23, p. 48-60, 172-194.
Maspéro, Gaston. 1902. A travers la vocalisation égyptienne [pt. 9-10]. Recueil de travaux relatifs
à la philologie et à l’archéologie égyptiennes et assyriennes, v. 24, p. 77-90, 142-159.
Maspéro, Gaston. 1903. A travers la vocalisation égyptienne [pt. 11-12]. Recueil de travaux relatifs
à la philologie et à l’archéologie égyptiennes et assyriennes, v. 25, p. 15-22, 161-177.
Maspéro, Gaston. 1905. A travers la vocalisation égyptienne [pt. 13]. Recueil de travaux relatifs à
Maspéro, Gaston. 1906. Les contes populaires de l’Egypte ancienne. Troisième édition.
Details wanting.
Maspéro, Gaston. 1915. Introduction à l’étude de la phonétique égyptienne [pt. 1]. Recueil de
travaux relatifs à la philologie et à l’archéologie égyptiennes et assyriennes, v. 37, p. 147202.
Maspéro, Gaston. 1915. Une exemple saite de la transcription RIA pour r‘. Recueil de travaux
relatifs à la philologie et à l’archéologie égyptiennes et assyriennes, v. 37, p. 111-112.
The ‹r‘› should be written with hieroglyphs, viz. (D21/D36)+N5 according to Gardiner’s (1957) index.
Maspéro, Gaston. 1915. Popular stories of ancient Egypt. Translated by Mrs C.H.W. Johns (A.S.
Griffith) from the fourth French edition, revised by Sir G. Maspero. London: H. Grevel &
Co. Pp lxxv, 316.
219
Maspéro, Gaston. 1916. Introduction à l’étude de la phonétique égyptienne [pt. 2]. Recueil de
travaux relatifs à la philologie et à l’archéologie égyptiennes et assyriennes, v. 38, p. 85164.
Maspéro, Gaston. 1923. Nots sur la grammaire égyptienne de M.A. Erman. Recueil de travaux
relatifs à la philologie et à l’archéologie égyptiennes et assyriennes, v. 40, p. (?).
Masqueray, Émile. 1879. Comparaison d’un vocabulaire des zenaga avec les vocabulaires
correspondants des dialectes chawia et des beni mzab. Archives des missions scientifiques et
littéraires, 3ère série, v. 5, p. 473-533.
Masqueray, Émile. 1893/95. Dictionnaire français-touareg, dialecte des Taitoq, suivi
d’observations grammaticales. Publications de l’Ecole des Lettres d’Alger; Bulletin de
correspondence de africaine, #11. Paris. Pp 362.
Masqueray, Émile. 1896/97. Observations grammaticales sur la grammaire touarègue et textes
de la tamahaq des Taitoq. Publications de l’Ecole des Lettres d’Alger; Bulletin de
correspondence de africaine, #18. Paris. Pp ii, 272.
Massaia, Guglielmo. 1867. Lectiones grammaticales pro missionariis qui addiscere volunt
linguam amaricam seu vulgarem Abyssiniae, nec non et linguam oromonicam seu
populorum Galla nuncupatorum. Paris: Imprimerie Impériale. Pp xx, 501.
Massaquoi, Momolu. 1911. The Vai people and their syllabic writing. Journal of the African
Society, v. 10, 40, p. 459-466.
Massi, Ibrahim ibn Muhammad al. 1837. Translation of a Berber manuscript [prepared by W.B.
Hodgson]. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, v. 4,
p. (?).
Massi, Ibrahim ibn Muhammad al. 1883. Relation de Sidi Brahim de Massat. Edité par René
Basset. Paris.
Includes Berber texts.
Masury, S.K. 1846. A vocabulary of the Soaheli language. Memoirs of the American Academy of
Arts and Sciences, new series, v. 2, p. 248-253.
Originally published/distributed in the form of a 5- or 6-page pamphlet at Cambridge MA, 1845.
Mate, P. 1891. Kleines Deutsch-Kaffrisches Wörterbuch. Marianhill: St. Thomas Aquinas
Druckerei. Pp 173.
Matta, J.D. Cordeiro da. 1891. Jisaba, jingele, etc. Lisboa.
A “collection of proverbs and riddles with Portuguese translation” (Doke 1945:24).
Matta, J.D. Cordeiro da. 1892. ... [Title wanting].
Kimbundu H21a primer, referred to by Doke (1945:24).
Matta, J.D. Cordeiro da. 1893. Ensaio de dicionário kimbundu-portuguez. Lisboa: António Maria
Pereira. Pp xiv, 174.
Matthews, H.F. 1917. Notes on the Nungu tribe, Nassarawa Province, northern Nigeria, and the
neighboring tribes which use the duodecimal system of numeration. Harvard African
studies, v. 1 (spec. theme: ‘Varia Africana I’, ed. by Oric Bates), p. 83-93.
Maugham, Reginald Charles Fulke. 1898. A handbook of the Chi-Makua language. Johannesburg:
Adlington & Co. Pp 39.
Doke (1945:73) dates this to c.1905, and adds that a “most strange orthography is used primarily for the use of
British searchers after knowledge in which he uses the entire alphabet with the exception of the letter w!” (idem).
Maugham, Reginald Charles Fulke. 1905. Studies in the chi-Makua language. Zanzibar:
Universities’ Mission Press.
Not sure about the date. Could be a couple years later. This could be a revision of Maugham’s earlier Makuahandbook.
Maxwell, Charles H. 1916. Chindau: um exemplo da linguagem. Beira: American Board Mission
in South Africa. Pp 47.
Maxwell, J. 1906. Calabar stories. Journal of the African Society, v. 5, 18, p. 191-196.
Peripherals: J. Maxwell, “Correction”, Journal of the African Society, v. 5 (1906) p. 328.
220
Mayer, Johannes. 1878. Kurze Wörter-Sammlung in Englisch, Deutsch, Amharisch, Gallanisch,
Guraguesch. Herausgegeben von L. Krapf. Basel & St. Chrischona (Schwitzerland):
Pilgermissions-Buchdruckerei. Pp 28.
Maynard, [Archbishop]. 1907. Dawida, a grammatical sketch. As copied by Miss M.H. Murray in
1950. Wundanyi (Kenya): Taita District Education Office.
Reference from Derek Nurse (2004, pc).
Mayr, Franz [Rev.]. 1889. Zulu simplified. Pietermaritzburg.
Mayr, Franz [Rev.]. 1899. Zulu simplified. Second edition. Pietermaritzburg.
Mayr, Franz [Rev.]. 1902. Zulu simplified. New edition. Pietermaritzburg: P. Davis & Sons.
Mayr, Franz [Rev.]. 1904. Zulu simplified. Fifth edition.
Details wanting.
Mayr, Franz [Rev.]. 1908. Language of colours among the Zulu. Annals of the Natal Museum, v. 1,
p. 159-165.
Mayr, Franz [Rev.]. 1910. Zulu simplified. Sixth edition. Pp 119, ix.
Details wanting.
Mayr, Franz [Rev.]. 1912. Zulu proverbs. Anthropos: internationale Zeitschrift für Völker- und
McGregor, Arthur Wallace. 1904. English-Kikuyu vocabulary. London: Society for Promoting
Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp 192.
McGregor, Arthur Wallace. 1905. A grammar of the Kikuyu language. London: Richard Clay &
Sons for the Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp 160.
McKittrick, J.; McKittrick, F.T. 1893. Guide to the Luñkundu language. London: Gilbert &
Rivington. Pp iv, 230.
McKittrick, J.; McKittrick, F.T. 1897. Guide to the Luñkundu language. Second edition. London:
Gilbert & Rivington. Pp iv, 266.
McLaren, James. 1886. An introductory Kafir grammar with progressive exercises. Alice:
Lovedale Mission Press. Pp viii, 112.
McLaren, James. 1906. A grammar of the Kaffir language. London: Longmans, Green & Co. Pp
xiv, 240.
This is a reworking of the author’s earlier An introductory Kafir grammar with progressive exercises, published
1886.
McLaren, James. 1915. A concise Kaffir-English dictionary. London: Longmans. Pp xv, 194.
This is sometimes erroneously credited to Albert Kropf, who published a similar title the same year.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 15 (1915/16) p. 203; S.H. Ray, Man, v. 18 (1918) p. 158159 (art. 84).
McLaren, James. 1917. A grammar of the Kaffir language. Second edition. Longmans. Pp xiv,
240.
McLeod, John. 1820. A voyage to Africa, with some account of the manners and customs of the
Dahomian people. London: John Murray. Pp iv, 162.
Includes specimens of Ardrah (a Gbe dialect?), plus a section titled “The Yebu, Ako, Byo, Hio, Yoruba or Yarriba
languages”. Reprinted 1971 by Frank Cass & Co. in London (Cass library of African studies, travels and narratives,
#59; ISBN-10 0-7146-1833-0).
Meeuwis, Michael. 2001. La ‘Grammaire et vocabulaire du lingala, ou langue du haut-Congo’
d’Egide de Boeck de 1904: commentaires historiques, presentation et texte. Annales
Aequatoria, v. 22, p. 327-421.
Pages 341-421 contains a photographic reprint of Boeck’s grammar in its entirety.
Meeuwis, Michael; Vinck, Honoré. 1993. Contribution à l’histoire du lingala: l’essai sur la langue
congolaise d’Emeri Cambier (1891). Annales Aequatoria, v. 24, p. 283-431.
Meeuwis, Michael; Vinck, Honoré. 1999. Une conférence sur le lingala à Nouvelle Anvers en
1918: texte préparatoire de Mgr Van Ronslé. Annales Aequatoria, v. 20, p. 387-412.
Meeuwis, Michael; Vinck, Honoré. 2003. Contribution à l’histoire du lingala: l’essai sur la langue
congolaise d’Emeri Cambier (1891) - situation historique et texte intégral. Annales
Aequatoria, v. 24, p. 283-431.
221
Meillet, Antoine. 1911. Vocabulaire français-ifumu (Bateke), Congo français. Paris.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1888/89. Benga and Dualla. Zeitschrift für afrikanische
Sprachen, v. 2, p. 190-208.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1888/89. Das Zeitwort in der Duallasprache; nach
schriftlichen und mündlichen Mitteilungen grammatisch dargestellt. Zeitschrift für
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1889/90. Das Zeitwort in der Benga-Sprache: Versuch einer
grammatischen Darstellung. Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 3, p. 265-284.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1889/90. Das Verbum in der Isubu-Sprache: Versuch einer
grammatischen Darstellung. Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 3, p. 206-234.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1889/90. Ein Märchen aus Kamerun. Zeitschrift für
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1892. Linguistisches und ethnographisches aus DeutschSüdwestafrika. Allgemeine Zeitung (München), v. 194, Beiheft 162, p. 5-7.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1892. Die Sprachwissenschaft und die afrikanischen
Sprachen. Allgemeine Zeitung (München), v. 76, Beilage 64, p. 6ff.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1893. Aus der Literatur der Suaheli in Ostfrika. Kölnische
Zeitung, v. 1038, p. (?).
Not sure about the volume no.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1894. Fortschritte in der afrikanischen Sprachforschung.
Globus, v. 65, p. 196-198.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1894. Die Geheimsprachen Afrikas. Globus, v. 66, p. 117119.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1895. Vorbemerkungen zu einem vergleichenden Wörterbuch
der Bantusprachen. Zeitschrift für afrikanische und oceanische Sprachen, v. 1, p. 268-281.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1895. Bemerkungen zur vorstehenden Bali-Studie [von Dr
Zintgraff]. Zeitschrift für afrikanische und oceanische Sprachen, v. 1, 4, p. 322-323.
Unsure what this contains. Bali presumably refers to Mungaka (Bantoid).
Peripherals: Dr E. Zintgraff, “Einiges aus der Balisprache”, Zeitschrift für afrikanische und oceanische Sprachen, v.
1 (1895) p. 318-322.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1895. Die Sprachverhältnisse in Kamerun. Zeitschrift für
Makes brief mentions of Murundo/Rundo A11, Isubu A23, Duala A24, Malimba A27, Batanga A32c, Banoko A32a,
Bakwiri A22, Abo A42, Bakundu A122, Bali (Mungaka?), Wuri A25, Bayoñ (Bantoid?), Pati (Bantoid?), Bakoko
A32b, Bati A65, Mabea A81, Fan A75, Yaunde A72a, Wute (Mambe), Benga A34 and Kele/Dikele B22a.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1895. Dr C.G. Büttner und die afrikanische
Sprachforschung. Zeitschrift für afrikanische und oceanische Sprachen, v. 1, p. 329-333.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1896. Die Bedeutung des Sotho für die Erforschung der
Bantusprachen. Zeitschrift für afrikanische und oceanische Sprachen, v. 2, 2, p. 150-167.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1899. Grundriss einer Lautlehre der Bantusprachen.
Abhandlungen für die Kunde des Morgenlandes, #11:2. Leipzig: F.A. Brockhaus. Pp 245.
Includes detailed descriptive sections of Duala, Swahili, Herero, Sango, Konde (Nyakyusa) and Northern Sotho.
Peripherals: R.N. C[ust], Journal of the Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland: anthropological
reviews and miscellanea, v. 30 (1900) p. 19-20; E. Jacottet, “Bantu phonetics”, Christian express, supplement,
September 1907; C.M. Doke, “The growth of comparative Bantu philology (revised)”, African studies, v. 19
(1960) p. 193-218.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1899. Einwirkung der Beschäftigung auf die Sprache bei den
Bantustämmen Afrikas. Globus, v. 75, p. 361-364.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1901. Das Tshivenda’: linguistische Studie. Zeitschrift der
deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 55, 4, p. 607-682.
Also published as a book(let) the same year by Kreysing in Leipzig.
Peripherals: E. Jacottet, “Bantu phonetics”, Christian express, supplement, September 1907; A.N. Tucker,
“Systems of tone-marking African languages”, Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, v. 27 (1964)
p. 594-611.
222
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1903. Das Dahl’sche Gesetz. Zeitschrift der deutschen
Discusses Nyamwezi and Chaga.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1904. Hottentottische Laute und Lehnwörter im Kaffir [pt. 1].
Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 58, p. 727-769.
Parts 1 and 2 were reprinted 1905 as a book by FA Brochaus in Leipzig.
Peripherals: E. Jacottet, “Bantu phonetics”, Christian express, supplement, September 1907.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1904. Einige Bantuwortstämme. Mitteilungen des Seminars
What languages does this deal with?
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1904. Linguistische Studien in Ostafrika, 1: Swahili.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1904. Linguistische Studien in Ostafrika, 2: Shambala.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1904. Linguistische Studien in Ostafrika, 3: Namwezi.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1904. Linguistische Studien in Ostafrika, 4: Sukuma.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1904. Über M. Merkers “Masai”. Zeitschrift für Ethnologie,
v. 36, p. 735-744.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1905. Hottentottische Laute und Lehnwörter im Kaffir [pt. 2].
Peripherals: H.G., Vox, v. 16 (1906) p. 157-158; E. Jacottet, “Bantu phonetics”, Christian express, supplement,
September 1907.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1905. Probleme der afrikanischen Linguistik. Wiener
Zeitschrift für die Kunde des Morgenlandes, v. 19, p. 77-90.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1905. The language of the Hottentots. Addresses and papers
delivered at the Joint Meeting of the British and South African Associations for the
Advancement of Science, v. 3, p. 119-129.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1905. Linguistische Studien in Ostafrika, 5: Digo.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1905. Linguistische Studien in Ostafrika, 6: Nika.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1905. Linguistische Studien in Ostafrika, 7: Pokomo.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1905. Die Christianisierung der afrikanischen Sprachen.
Allgemeine Missionszeitschrift, v. 32, p. 82-90, 141-153, 194-202.
Published also as a little book (55 pp) the same year.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1906. Über den gegenwärtigen Stand der afrikanischen
Sprachforschung. In: Verhandlungen des deutschen Kolonialkongresses 1905, p. 114-128.
Berlin: Verlag von Dietrich Reimer.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1906. Die Bedeutung des Studiums der
Eingeborenensprachen für die Kolonialverwaltnung. In: Verhandlungen des deutschen
Kolonialkongresses 1905, p. 343-364. Berlin: Verlag von Dietrich Reimer.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1906. Grundzüge einer vergleichenden Grammatik der
Bantusprachen. Berlin: Verlag von Dietrich Reimer. Pp 160.
Peripherals: Wilhelm Planert, Anthropos, v. 1 (1906) p. 1007-1010; H.H. Johnston, “The basis for a comparative
grammar of the Bantu languages“, Journal of the African Society, v. 7 (1907) p. 13-19; Carl Meinhof, “Note”,
Journal of the African Society, v. 7 (1907/08) p. 20-25; Sir Harry Johnston, “Additional note”, Journal of the
African Society, v. 7 (1907/08) p. 25-27; A.N. Tucker, “Philology and Africa”, Bulletin of the School of Oriental
and African Studies, v. 20 (1957) p. 541-554; C.M. Doke, “The growth of comparative Bantu philology (revised)”,
African studies, v. 19 (1960) p. 193-218.
223
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1906. The language of the Hottentots. Report of the South
African Association of the Advancement of Science (South African journal of science), v. 3, p.
119-129.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1906. Linguistische Studien in Ostafrika, 8: Bondei.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1906. Linguistische Studien in Ostafrika, 9: Zigula.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1906. Linguistische Studien in Ostafrika, 10: Mbugu.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1906. Linguistische Studien in Ostafrika, 11: Mbulungwe.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1906. Untersuchung der Pygmäensprachen. Zeitschrift für
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1906. Das missionarische Sprachproblem. Allgemeine
Missionszeitschrift, v. 33, p. 205-216, 253-261.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1906. Die Mission als Sprachbilderin. Der Alte Glaube:
evangelisch-lutherisches Gemeindeblatt, v. 8, p. 123-129, 151-156.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1906. Die Einführung des Missionars in das Volkstum der
Heiden durch die Sprache. In: Die Einwurzelung des Christentums in der Heidenwelt, p.
145-161. Ed. by J. Richter. Gütersloh.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1907. Linguistische Studien in Ostafrika, 12: Dzalamo.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1907. Linguistische Studien in Ostafrika, 13: Ndorobo.
The Ndorobo discussed here are the Akie, who live in the Usambara Mountains in Tanzania.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1907. Warum studiert man primitive sprachen? Anthropos:
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1907. Erfolge und Ziele der modernen Sprachforschung in
Afrika. München: Bayerische Druckerei & Verlagsanstalt.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1908. Vocabulaire français et maquoua, ou recueil de
quelques mots de la langue maquoua. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen,
v. 11, III, p. 117-131.
This is part of Meinhof’s article “Linguistische Studien in Ostafrika. Teil 14: Makua”. It’s a French-Makua
vocabulary based on the Tugulu dialect containing c.600 words. Meinhof found this vocabulary, dated November
1790, in the library of the Seminar für Orientalische Sprachen in Berlin. “Elsewhere it contained the name of
Charles Mylius, who was probably the author” (Doke 1959:4).
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1908. Linguistische Studien in Ostafrika, 14: Makua.
Includes excerpts from an old manuscript found by Meinhof: “Vocabulaire français et maquoua, ou recueil de quelques
mots de la langue maquoua” (p. 117-131).
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1908. Linguistische Studien in Ostafrika, 15: Yao.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. (Ed.) 1909. Lehrbuch der Namasprache. Mit Beiträgen von
Hermann Hegner, Diedrich Westermann und Carl Wandres. Lehrbücher des Seminars für
orientalische Sprachen, #23. Berlin: Georg Reimer. Pp 14, 177.
Includes “Lautlehre” (p. 1-45) by Carl Meinhof, “Nama-Grammatik” (p. 45-101) by Hermann Hegner & Diedrich
Westermann, “Wortbildungslehre” (p. 102-148) by Carl Meinhof, and “Texte” (p. 149-177) by Carl Wandres.
Peripherals: B.S., Journal of the African Society, v. 9 (1909/10) p. 329-333.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1909. Versuch einer Lautlehre des Nama. Mitteilungen des
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1909. Die Sprache der Herero in Deutsch-Südwestafrika.
Deutsche Kolonialsprachen, #1. Berlin: Verlag von Dietrich Reimer. Pp 114.
Reprinted several times, e.g. 1973 by Kraus Reprint in Nendeln, Liechenstein. A revised edition appeared in 1937.
224
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1909. Die Sprachen des dunklen Erdteils. Stuttgart.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1909. Die mohammedanische Gefahr in Afrika und die
Einheitssprache. Evangelische Missions-Magazin, neue Folge, v. 53, p. 49-65.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1910. Grundriss einer Lautlehre der Bantusprachen, nebst
Anleitung zur Aufnahme von Bantusprachen. Zweite Ausgabe. Berlin: Verlag von Dietrich
Reimer. Pp vi, 340.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 10 (1910/11) p. 115-116; A.N. Tucker, “The meaning and
value of comparative Bantu philology”, Transactions of the Philological Society, 1938, p. 13-24.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1910. Ergebnisse der afrikanischen Sprachforschung. Archiv
für Anthropologie, neue Folge, v. 9 [37], p. 179-201.
Deals with the (now outdated) Hamitic-Khoekhoe theory.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1910. Über den gegenwärtigen Stand der afrikanischen
Sprachforschung. In: Verhandlungen des deutschen Kolonialkongresses 1910, p. 93-106.
Berlin: Verlag von Dietrich Reimer.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1910. Die praktische Bedeutung der Einheitssprachen für die
Kolonien. In: Verhandlungen des deutschen Kolonialkongresses 1910, p. 732-739. Berlin:
Verlag von Dietrich Reimer.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1910. Bemerkungen zu vorstehenden Sprachproben [=
Addendum zu “Die Wangomwia” von H. Claus]. Zeitschrift für Ethnologie, v. 42, p. 494497.
Mentions Kwadza (= Ngomwia), Burunge, Mbugu, and others.
Peripherals: Heinrich Claus, “Die Wangomwia”, Zeitschrift für Ethnologie, v. 42 (1910) p. 489-494.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1910. Die Sprache der Suaheli in Deutsch-Ostafrika.
Deutsche Kolonialsprachen, #2. Berlin: Verlag von Dietrich Reimer. Pp viii, 109.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1910/11. Sudansprachen und Hamitensprachen. Zeitschrift
für Kolonialsprachen, v. 1, p. 161-166.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1910/11. Das Studium der Kolonialsprachen. Zeitschrift für
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1911. Das Ful in seiner Bedeutung für die Sprachen der
Hamiten, Semiten und Bantu. Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v.
65, p. 177-220.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1912. Die Sprache der Duala in Kamerun. Deutsche
Kolonialsprachen, #4. Berlin: Verlag von Dietrich Reimer. Pp xv, 119.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1912. Die Sprachen der Hamiten. Nebst einer Beigabe über
die hamitische Typen von Felix von Luschan. Abhandlungen der hamburgischen KolonialInst., #9. Berlin: Friederichsen & Co. Pp xvi, 256.
Chapter 2 deals with Fulani. There are also some notes on Nama (p. 211-240), Maasai, and others.
Peripherals: Edward Sapir, Current anthropological literature (Lancaster PA), v. 2 (1913) p. 21-27; N.W. T[homas],
M a n , v. 14 (1914) p. 12 (art. 7); J.H. Greenberg, “The classification of African languages”, A m e r i c a n
anthropologist, new series, v. 50 (1948) p. 24-30; A.N. Tucker, “Philology and Africa”, Bulletin of the School of
Oriental and African Studies, v. 20 (1957) p. 541-554.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1912. Nama. In: Die Sprache der Hamiten, p. 211-240.
Abhandlungen der hamburgischen Kolonial-Inst., #9. Hamburg: Friederichsen & Co.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1912. Recent German research in African languages.
International review of missions, v. 1, p. 312-318.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1912. Über die Bedeutung der experimentellen Phonetik für
die Erforschung der afrikanischen Sprachen. Vox: internationales Zentralblatt für
experimentelle Phonetik, v. 22, p. 370-274.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1912/13. Dissimilation der Nasalverbindung im Bantu.
Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 3, 4, p. 272-278.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1913. Die Bedeutung der experimentellen Phonetik für die
Erforschung der afrikanischen Sprachen. Vox: internationales Zentralblatt für
experimentelle Phonetik, v. 23, p. 22-26.
225
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1914/15. Das Sumerische und die Sprachen Afrikas.
This seems to be a long book review of Delitzsch’s Grundzüge der sumerischen Grammatik, Sumerisches Glossar,
and Kleine sumerische Sprachlehre für Nichtassyriologen, all seemingly published 1914.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1915. An introduction to the study of African languages.
Translated by Alice Werner. London & New York: J.M. Dent & Sons; E.P. Dutton & Co.
Pp vii, 169.
Translation of Die moderne Sprachforschung in Afrika, published 1910. Reprinted 1973 by AMS Press in New York
(ISBN-10 0-404-07955-5).
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 15 (1915/16) p. 104-108; B.Z. S[eligman], Man, v. 16
(1916) p. 31-32 (art. 22); Frederick Starr, American anthropologist, new series, v. 19 (1917) p. 288-289; J.H.
Greenberg, “The classification of African languages”, American anthropologist, new series, v. 50 (1948) p. 24-30.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1915/16. Sprachstudien in egyptischen Sudan [pt. 1: I.
Tagoy; II. Tumale]. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 6, p. 161-205.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1915/16. Sprachstudien in egyptischen Sudan [pt. 2: III.
Talodi]. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 6, p. 264-284.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1916. Theoretische und empirische Tonhöhen im Ewe. Vox:
internationales Zentralblatt für experimentelle Phonetik, v. 26, p. 91-94.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1916. Eine Studienfahrt nach Kordofan. Abhandlungen der
hamburgischen Kolonial-Inst., #35. Hamburg: Friederichsen, De Gruyter & Co. Pp 134.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1916. Ursprüngliche und abgeleitete musikalische Töne in
afrikanischen Sprachen. Vox: internationales Zentralblatt für experimentelle Phonetik, v. 26,
p. 125-139.
Not sure about the contents.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1916/17. Sprachstudien in egyptischen Sudan [pt. 3: IV. Eliri;
V. Lafofa; VI. Tumtum; VII. Kanderma; VIII. Kawama]. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v.
7, p. 36-80.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1916/17. Sprachstudien in egyptischen Sudan [pt. 4: IX.
Lumun; X. Schabun; XI. Tegele; XII. Rashad; XIII. Koalib]. Zeitschrift für
What’s Schabun?
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1916/17. Sprachstudien in egyptischen Sudan [pt. 5: XIV.
Katla; XV. Tima; XVI. Miri]. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 7, p. 212-250.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1916/17. Sprachstudien in egyptischen Sudan [pt. 6: XVII.
Kudugli; XVIII. Kurungu; XIX. Nyima]. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 7, p. 326-335.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1917/18. Sprachstudien in egyptischen Sudan [pt. 7: XX.
Dagig; XXI. Keiga; XXII. Moro; XXIII. Tira; XXIV. Saburi; XXV. Anywak; XXVI.
Djabalawi; XXVII. Zande]. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 8, p. 46-74.
Djabalawi is Moru, apparently. What’s Saburi and Djabalawi?
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1917/18. Sprachstudien in egyptischen Sudan [pt. 8: XXVIII.
Kredj; XXIX. Kondjara]. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 8, p. 110-139.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1917/18. Sprachstudien in egyptischen Sudan [pt. 9: XXIX.
Kondjara (Fortsetzung); XXX. Borgu]. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 8, p. 170-196.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1917/18. Sprachstudien in egyptischen Sudan [pt. 10: XXXI.
Dair; XXXII. Dilling]. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 8, p. 257-267.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1918. Der Anteil der deutschen Mission an der Erforschung
der afrikanischen Sprachen. Allgemeine Missionszeitschrift, v. 45, p. 257-276.
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1918/19. Sprachstudien in egyptischen Sudan [pt. 11:
XXXIII. Dulman; XXXIV. Garko; XXXV. Gulfan]. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 9, p.
43-64.
XXXVI. Kadero; XXXVII. Koldegi; XXXVIII. Zur Formenlehre der nubischen Dialekte].
226
XXXIX. Vergleichendes Wörterverzeichnis (Deutsch-Nubian)]. Zeitschrift für
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1918/19. Sprachstudien in egyptischen Sudan [pt. 14: XL.
Kenuzi; XLI. Dongola; XLII. Fadidja; XLIII. Mahas; XLIV. Bedauye]. Zeitschrift für
Meinhof, Carl [Friedrich] [Michael]. 1919/20. Afrikanische Worte in orientalischer Literatur.
Zeitschrift für Eingeborenen-Sprachen, v. 10, p. 147-152.
Meinhof, Elli. 1889. Märchen aus Kamerun, erzählt von Njo Dibone. Strassburg.
Peripherals: C.G. Büttner, Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 2 (1888/89) p. 155-157.
Meldon, J.A. [Maj.]. 1906/07. Notes on the Bahima of Ankole. Journal of the African Society, v. 6,
p. 136-153, 234-249.
Contains “an excellent description of Hima aristocracy” plus some vocabulary items (Johnston 1919:785).
Meldon, J.A. [Maj.]. 1910. The Latuka and Bari languages: numerals and words in Bari. Journal
of the African Society, v. 9, 34, p. 193-195.
Meldon, J.A. [Maj.]. 1913. Some remarks on the Nilotic Negro and a review of Mr Westermann’s
‘Shilluk people’. Journal of the African Society, v. 12, 46, p. 165-176.
Ménard, P.F. 1908. Grammaire kirundi. Alger: Maison-Carrée, Imprimerie des Missionnaires
d’Afrique (Pères-Blancs). Pp xiii, 516.
Johnston (1919:786) dates this 1910.
Ménard, P.F. 1909. Dictionnaire français-kirundi et kirundi-français. Roulers: Jules de Meester.
Pp xxvi, 262, 308.
Johnston (1919:786) dates this 1912.
Ménard, P.F. 1910. Guide de conversation Kirundi. Alger: Maison-Carrée, Imprimerie des
Missionnaires d’Afrique (Pères-Blancs). Pp 507.
Menges, Josef. 1885. Die Zeichensprache des Handels in Arabien und Ost-Afrika. Globus, v. 48,
1, p. 9.
Mense, C. 1895. Linguistische Beobachtungen am unteren und mittleren Kongo. Kassel.
Méraud, P. 1902. Essai sur la langue attié (Nindin). Dabou (Côte d’Ivoire).
Mercier, Ernest. 1903. L’art de la traduction: l’interprétariat en Algérie. Alger. Pp 43.
Mercier, Gustave. 1896. Le chaouia de l’Aures (dialecte de l’Ahmar-Khaddou): étude
grammaticale, texte en dialecte chaouia. Publications de l’Ecole des Lettres d’Alger;
Bulletin de correspondence de africaine, #17. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp 80.
Mercier, Gustave. 1898/99. Etude sur la toponymie berbère de la region de l’Aures. In: Actes du
11ème congrès international des orientalistes, Paris, 1897, pt. 5, p. 173-207. Paris: Ernest
Leroux.
Mercier, Gustave. 1900. Cinq textes berbères en dialect chaouia de l’Aures. Journal asiatique,
9ème série, v. 16 [157], p. 189-249.
Mercier, Gustave. 1901. Five Berber stories [translated from the French]. In: Moorish literature:
comprising romantic ballads, tales of the Berbers, stories of the Kabylie, folk-lore and
national traditions, p. (?). Ed. by Chauncey C. Starkweather. London & New York: Colonial
Press.
Mercier, Gustave. 1906/07. Les noms des plantes en dialecte chaouia. In: Actes du 14ème congrès
international des orientalistes, Alger, 1905, pt. 2, p. 79-82. Paris: Ernest Leroux.
Mercier, Gustave. 1914. Notes sur l’etymologie du nom rusccuru. Recueil des notices et mémoires
de la Société Archéologique du Dépt. de Constantine, 5ème série, v. 5 [48], p. 94-95.
Merensky, Alexander. 1891. Wörterverzeichnis zum Gebrauch bei Bearbeitung afrikanischer
Sprachen. Berlin: Evangelische Missionsgesellschaft. Pp 208.
Unsure about the contents of this. It is listed in Kwa bibliography (Hintze 1959:18), but could deal with other
languages as well.
227
Merrick, George [Capt.]. 1905. Languages in northern Nigeria. Journal of the African Society, v. 5,
17, p. 43-47.
Merrick, George [Capt.]. 1905. Hausa proverbs. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co. Pp
113.
Merrick, George [Capt.]. 1909. Notes on Hausa and Pidgin English. Journal of the African
Society, v. 8, 31, p. 303-307.
Merrick, Joseph. 1849. Grammatical elements of the Isubu language. Incomplete manuscript(s).
London: British Library.
The date refers to when the author died. The manuscript itself “is not complete, closing abruptly in the middle of the
chapter on the verbs, the rest of the MS. having been lost. Merrick did not seem to have a sound appreciation of the
noun class system” (Doke 1959:24). Merrick’s manuscript was later edited and published by Saker in 1852.
Peripherals: Alfred Saker, A grammar of the Isubu tongue (Baptist Mission Press, 1852); C.M. Doke, “Bantu
language pioneers of the nineteenth century”, African studies, v. 14 (1940) p. 207-246; C.M. Doke, “Bantu
language pioneers of the nineteenth century” (revised), African studies, v. 18 (1959) p. 1-27.
Merrick, Joseph. 1854. A dictionary of the Isubu language, pt. 1. Edited by Alfred J. Saker. Baptist
Mission Press. Pp 384.
Published posthumously. Only “A” to “Potter” has apparently been printed (Doke 1959:24). Johnston (1919:4n1)
dates this 1942.
Mertens, P. Franz. 1906. Deutsch-Ewe-Wörterbuch. Lomé.
Peripherals: Carl Meinhof, Deutsche Kolonialzeitung, neue Folge, v. 23 (1906) p. 419ff.
Merwe, Hendrik Johannes Jan Matthys van der. 1968. Patriot-woordeboek. Patriotvereniging vir
Afrikaanse teksuitgawes, nuwe reeks, #3. Pretoria: J.L. van Schaik. Pp 171.
The original edition appeared 1902 as an anonymous work. This might not be a revision as such, but a reprint with
a newly written introduction.
Metelerkamp, Sanni. 1914. Outa Karel’s stories: South African folk-lore tales. With illustrations
by Constance Penstone. London: Macmillan & Co. Pp xvi, 149.
English translations of (Afrikaans) stories claimed to be “the common property of every country child in South
Africa” (p.viii).
URL: www.archive.org/details/outakarelsstorie00mete
Meyer, Alois. (Ed.) 1914. Kleines Ruhaya-Deutsches Wörterbuch. Trier (Deutschland): MosellaVerlag. Pp 165.
Miani, Giovanni. 1863. Lingua degli Auidi, tribu nilotica equatoriale. Il commercio d’Egitto
(Cairo), v. 171/174, p. (?).
Auidi refers to Madi, apparently. What’s Il commercio d’Egitto?
Miani, Giovanni. 1865. Vocabulario auidi. In: Le spedizione alle origini del Nilo, p. 44-46.
Venezia.
Auidi (Madi?) vocabulary. Not sure of the details of this reference is correct. It could be that the book in question is
really a mistaken reference to Maini’s 1860 book Spedizione verso le origine del Nilo (or a reprint thereof).
Michell, George Babington. 1902. Notes on a comparative table of Berber dialects of North Africa.
Michell, George Babington. 1907. Unpublished Bambuttu vocabulary.
Johnston (1919:806) mentions a Bambuttu language that “is almost a dialect of ... Lihuku [D33]”. His material
comes from a manuscript vocabulary collected by Consul Michell.
Migeod, Frederick William Hugh. 1908. The Mende language, containing useful phrases,
elementary grammar, short vocabularies, reading materials. London: Kegan Paul, Trench,
Trübner & Co. Pp xv, 271.
URL: www.archive.org/details/mendelanguagecon00migeuoft
URL: www.archive.org/details/mendelanguagecon00migeiala
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 8 (1908/09) p. 111; Frederick Starr, A m e r i c a n
anthropologist, new series, v. 17 (1915) p. 741.
228
Migeod, Frederick William Hugh. 1909. The syllabic writing of the Vai people. Journal of the
Migeod, Frederick William Hugh. 1911/13. The languages of West Africa, 2 vols. London: Kegan
Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co. Pp 350; 419.
Discusses various African languages, e.g. Kwa (p. 141ff), Nupe/Tapa (p. 340-341), Bwem/Lefana, Yoruba, ‘Sierra
Leonese’ (= Krio), and others (cfr Hintze 1959, Roncador & Miehe 1998:104). Later reprinted by Gregg
International, with a new introduction by Elizabeth Mills (ISBN-10 0-576-11208-9).
Kolonialsprachen, v. 2 (1911/12) p. 79-80; N.W. T[homas], Man, v. 12 (1912) p. 115-117 (art. 59); Anon,
Journal of the African Society, v. 12 (1912/13) p. 441-445; H.H. J[ohnston], The geographical journal, v. 43
(1914) p. 431-432; Frederick Starr, American anthropologist, new series, v. 17 (1915) p. 739-741.
Migeod, Frederick William Hugh. 1913. Mende natural history vocabulary. London: Kegan Paul,
Trench, Trübner & Co. Pp viii, [9]-64.
Peripherals: Frederick Starr, American anthropologist, new series, v. 17 (1915) p. 741.
Migeod, Frederick William Hugh. 1914. A grammar of the Hausa language. London: Kegan
Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co. Pp 241.
URL: www.archive.org/details/grammarofhausala00migeiala
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 14 (1915) p. 331-335; Frederick Starr, A m e r i c a n
anthropologist, new series, v. 17 (1915) p. 741.
Migeod, Frederick William Hugh. 1916. Mende songs. Man: a record of anthropological science,
v. 16, p. 184-191 (art. 112).
Migeod, Frederick William Hugh. 1917. Personal names among some West African tribes.
Deals with, at least, Twi, Fante and Ewe (see Hintze 1959:20).
Migeod, Frederick William Hugh. 1917. Supposed duodecimal system in Burum language. Man:
a record of anthropological science, v. 17, p. 9-10 (art. 4).
Milbert, M.J. 1812. Voyage pittoresque à l’Ile de France, au Capo de Bonne Espérance et à l’Ile
Ténériffe. Paris.
More than one volume. Has apparently something on Mauritian Creole.
Miller, F.V. Bruce. 1919. Correspondence to the editor: Bantu pronunciation. The geographical
journal, v. 53, 6, p. 430.
Corrects a bit of mis-information in a previous article (by another author) about map-making.
Miller, Walter Richard Samuel. 1901. Hausa notes. With an introduction by Sir F. Lugard. Exeter:
Henry Frowde. Pp 127.
Miller, Walter Richard Samuel. 1907. Hausa and English vocabulary. Lagos: CMS (Church
Missionary Society) Bookshop.
Millman, William. 1917. Petit vocabulaire de français-anglais-swahili. Congo: Société des
Missions Bibliques.
Minutoli, Johann Heinrich Carl von. 1824. Reise zum Tempel des Jupiter Ammon in der Libyschen
Wuste und nach Ober-Aegypten in den Jahren 1820 und 1821. Herausgegeben von E.H.
Toelken. Berlin. Pp xl, 448, plates.
Includes word lists of Siwa Berber (Jucovy & Alderete 2001) as well as Kenzi, Dongola and Mahas Nubian (cfr
Latham 1847:197). The Nubian words had apparently been collected by Girolamo Segato.
Mischlich, Adam. 1902. Lehrbuch der hausanischen Sprache (Hausa-Sprache). Archiv für das
Studium der deutscher Kolonialsprachen, #1. Berlin: Georg Reimer. Pp x, 184.
Not sure about the title. Possibly it should start “Grammatik der...”.
Mischlich, Adam. 1906. Wörterbuch der Hausasprache. Lehrbücher des Seminars für
orientalische Sprachen, #20. Berlin: Georg Reimer. Pp 692.
Peripherals: H.G. Harris, Journal of the African Society, v. 6 (1906/07) p. 325-327.
Mischlich, Adam. 1907. Über Sitten und Gebräuche in Hausa [pt. 1]. Mitteilungen des Seminars
229
Mischlich, Adam. 1912. Lehrbuch der Hausa-Sprache. Zweite Auflage. Lehrbücher des Seminars
für orientalische Sprachen, #27. Berlin: Georg Reimer. Pp 250.
The first edition of 1902 bore the title Lehrbuch der hausanischen Sprache.
Mischlich, Adam. 1913/15. Hausa-Märchen. Jahresbericht des frankfürter Vereins für
orientalische Sprachen, 1913/15, p. (?).
Mischlich, Adam. 1914. Haussa. Metoula-Sprachführer. Berlin: Langenscheidt. Pp 112.
Misiugin, Viacheslav [Mikhailovich]. 1966. Suaxilijskaja xronika srednevekovogo gosudarstva
Pate = The Swahili chronicle of the medieval state of Pate. Africana: afrikanskii
etnograficheskii sbornik, v. 6, p. 52-83. (Trudy Inst. etnografii imeni N.N. Miklucho
Maklaja, novaja serija, #90.)
Mitchell, George Babington. 1906/09. Unpublished vocabularies.
Johnston (1919:806f) refers to unpublished vocabularies of Bambole D11, Abobwa C44, and Babale C374,
collected by Mitchell between 1906 and 1909.
Mitchell, George Babington. 1919. ... [Title wanting].
Mitchell is the author of “a treatise on the intrusive Sudanic (?) language of the Bakumu, near Stanley Falls, not yet
published” (Johnston 1919:806).
Mitterrutzner, Johann Chrysostomus. 1866. Die Dinka-Sprache in Central-Afrika: kurze
Grammatik, Text und Wörterbuch. Herausgegeben mit Unterstützung der kaiserlichen
Akademie der Wissenschaften in Wien. Brixen: Verlag von A. Weger’s Buchhandlung. Pp
xv, 307.
Simultaneously published/distributed by several publishing houses.
Mitterrutzner, Johann Chrysostomus. 1867. Likíkiri-lo-kíjaua í jur ló Bari. Thiermärchen im Lande
der Bari (Central-Afrika): Original-Text mit Uebersetzung und sprachlicher Analyse.
Mitterrutzner, Johann Chrysostomus. 1867. Die Sprache der Bari in Central-Afrika: Grammatik,
Text und Wörterbuch. Brixen: Verlag von A. Weger’s Buchhandlung. Pp xxv, 262.
Reprinted 1986 by Sändig Reprint Verlag (ISBN-10 3-253-02966-2).
Peripherals: R.C.R. Owen, Bari grammar and vocabulary (London, 1908).
Mittwoch, Eugen. 1907. Proben aus dem amharischen Volksmund. Mitteilungen des Seminars für
Mockler-Ferryman, A.F. [Maj.]. 1892. Numerals of Hausa, Nupe, Yoruba, Fula: up the Niger.
London: Philip & Sohn.
Modas, A.C. 1906. Idiomas africanos. Revista portugueza colonial e maritima (Lisboa), v. 112, p.
172-173.
Moffat jnr, Robert. 1864. The standard alphabet problem: the preliminary subject of a general
phonic system considered on the basis of some important facts in the Sechwana language of
South Africa, and in reference to the views of Professors Lepsius, Max Muller, and others;
a contribution to phonetic philology. Published and edited by John Moffat. London, Cape
Town & Port Natal: Trübner & Co.; J.C. Juta; J.O. Browne. Pp xxviii, 174.
URL: www.archive.org/details/standardalphabet00moffiala
Moffat snr, Robert [Rev.]. 1826. Bechuana spelling-book. Holborn UK & London: J. Dennettt for
the London Missionary Society (LMS). Pp 24.
There are also some later editions.
Mohl, Alexander van der. 1904. Praktische Grammatik der Bantu-Sprache von Tete, einem
Dialekt des Unter-Sambesi mit varianten der Sena-Sprache. Pp viii, 68, 108.
Details wanting. Extracts from this appeared the same year in Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen,
v. 7.
Mohl, Alexander van der. 1904. Praktische Grammatik der Bantu-Sprache von Tete, einem Dialekt
des Unter-Sambesi mit varianten der Sena-Sprache. Mitteilungen des Seminars für
A much-enlarged version appeared in book-form the same year.
230
Möhlig, Wilhelm Johann Georg; Faulenbach, Barbara; Henn, Petra. (Ed.) 2007. Die Witbooi in
Südwestafrika während des 19. Jahrhunderts: Quellentexte aus der Archiv- und
Museumsstiftung Wuppertal. InterCultura: Missions- und kulturgeschichtliche Forschungen,
#8. Köln: Rüdiger Köppe Verlag.
Molitor, P.H. 1913. La musique chez les nègres du Tanganika. Anthropos: internationale
Includes notes and lyrics for chants in Kibende, Kibemba, Kifipa, Kipimbwe, Kifimbwe (Pimbwe?) and a Nyamwezi
soldiers’ speech called Kirugaruga.
Möller, Georg. 1909/10. Hieratische Lesestücke für den akademischen Gebrauch-, 2 Bde. Leipzig:
J.C. Hinrichs’sche Buchhandlung.
Could be more than 2 vols.
Möller, Georg. 1909/12. Hieratische Paläographie, 3 Bde. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs’sche
Buchhandlung.
URL: www.egyptology.ru/lang.htm
Peripherals: Alan H. Gardiner, Man, v. 10 (1910) p. 152-153 (art. 90).
Mollien, Gaspar Théodore. 1820. Reise in das Innere von Afrika, an die Quellen des Senegal und
des Gambia, im Jahre 1818 auf Befehl der französischen Regierung unternommen. Aus
dem französischen. Weimar: Landes-Industrie-Comptoir. Pp xiv, 400.
Mollien, Gaspar Théodore. 1820. Travels in the interior of Africa, to the sources of the Senegal
and Gambia, performed by command of the French Government, in the year 1818.
Translated from the French, edited by T.E. Bowdich. London: Henry Colburn. Pp xi, 378,
plates.
Reprinted 1967 by Frank Cass & Co. in London (Cass library of African studies, travels and narratives, #27).
Mollien, Gaspar Théodore. 1820. Voyage dans l’intérieur de l’Afrique, aux sources de Sénégal et
de la Gambie, fait en 1818, par ordre du gouvernement français. Paris: Courcier.
Includes some Fula material (cfr Latham 1847:188). There also exist a printing dated 1889, which may or may not
be a revised edition.
Moltedo, G. 1905. Petit vocabulaire des langues arabe et ki-swaili. Bruxelles. Pp 31, 17.
Mondon-Vidailhet, Casimir. 1891. Manuel pratique de langue abyssine (amharique) à l’usage des
explorateurs et des comemrçants. Paris: Librairie Africaine & Coloniale (Joseph André). Pp
201.
Mondon-Vidailhet, Casimir. 1898. Grammaire de la langue abyssine (amharique). Paris:
Imprimerie Nationale. Pp xxiv, 301.
Mondon-Vidailhet, Casimir. 1913. Etudes sur le Guragiê: mises en ordre, complétees et publiées
d’après ses notes par Erich Weinzinger. Schriften der Sprachenkommission der
kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Wien, #5. Wien. Pp xi, 119.
Includes poems and such. Claimed to be Argobba, but Leslau (1991:2452) considers them to be Amharic.
Montel, E. [Père]. 1886. Dictionnaire bambara-français. Saint-Joseph de Ngasobil (Sénégal):
Montel, E. [Père]. 1887. Eléments de grammaire bambara. Saint-Joseph de Ngasobil (Sénégal):
Montenegro, Teresa; Morais, Carlos. 1919. Junbai: cultura popular oral da Guiné-Bissau.
Bolama (Guiné-Bissau): Imprensa Nacional.
Moon, E.R. 1917. First lessons in Lo-Nkundo. Pp 73.
Referred to without details by Doke (1945:26).
Morestal, [?]. 1857. Chant kabile sur l’expedition de 1857. Revue africaine: journal des traveaux
de la Société Historique Algérienne, v. 2, p. 221.
Morestal, [?]. 1857. Un chant kabile. Revue africaine: journal des traveaux de la Société
Historique Algérienne, v. 2, p. 500.
Morgan, E. Delmar. (Ed.) 1893. Transactions of the 9th international congress of Orientalists,
held in London [...] 1892. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
This congress was apparently summoned on private initiative, and is therefore not always considered to be a proper
part of the Orientalist Congress series.
231
Morgan, Nathaniel. 1833. An account of the Amakosae. South African quarterly journal, second
series, v. 1, 3, p. (?).
In this, the author gives “a very detailed description of Xhosa sounds” (Doke 1959:4).
Moritz, Bernhard. 1892. Sammlung arabischer Schriftstücke aus Zanzibar und Oman: mit einem
Glossar. Lehrbücher des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, #9. Stuttgart & Berlin: Verlag
von W. Spemann. Pp xxxiv, lll, 136.
Morrison, William McCutchan. 190x. Luba-Lulua exercise book. American Presbyterian Congo
Mission. Pp 50.
Morrison, William McCutchan. 1906. Grammar and dictionary of the Buluba-Lulua language as
spoken in the Upper Kasai and Congo Besin. New York: American Tract Society. Pp x, 417.
There’s an unrevised “second edition” dated 1930 lacking the dictionary part. A revised second edition appeared
1965, commonly credited to the editors V.G. Pruitt and W.K. Vass.
Morrison, William McCutchan. 1914. Simplified grammar of the Baluba language. Luebo
(Congo-Léopoldville). Pp 26.
Motylinski, Adolphe de Calassanti. 1885. Chanson berbère de Djerba. Bulletin de correspondance
africaine, v. 3 [4], p. 461-464.
Motylinski, Adolphe de Calassanti. 1897. Dialogue et textes en berbère de Djerba. Journal
asiatique, 9ème série, v. 10 [151], p. 377-401.
Motylinski, Adolphe de Calassanti. 1904. Le dialecte berbère de R’edamès. Publications de
Pp xxxii, 334.
Motylinski, Adolphe de Calassanti. 1905. Le nom berbère de dieu chez les abadhites. Revue
Motylinski, Adolphe de Calassanti. 1908. Grammaire, dialogues et dictionnaires touaregs, 1:
grammaire et dictionnaire français-touareg. Publié par René Basset. Alger: Imprimerie
Orientale Pierre Fontana. Pp 328.
Apparently no further volumes appeared.
Mouliéras, Auguste. (Ed.) 1891/92. Les fourberies de Si Djeh’a: contes kabyles, 2 parties. Oran.
Mouliéras, Auguste. 1893/97. Legendes et contes merveilleux de la grande Kabylie, 2 parties.
Publications de l’Ecole des Lettres d’Alger; Bulletin de correspondence de africaine, #13.
Paris: Ernest Leroux.
Müller, August. 1891. Semitische Nomina: Bemerkungen zu De Lagarde und Barth. Zeitschrift der
Müller, Friedrich. 1861. Bari-Text mit Anmerkungen. Zeitschrift für Völkerpsykologie und
Sprachwissenschaft, v. 2, 2, p. 254-256.
Müller, Friedrich. 1864. Die Sprache der Bari: ein Beitrag zur afrikanischen Linguistik.
Sitzungsberichte der (kaiserlichen) Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Wien, philosophischhistorische Klasse. Wien. Pp 84.
Müller, Friedrich. 1866. Über die Sprache der Bega in nordöstliche Afrika. Orient und Occident, v.
3, 2, p. 336-347.
Müller, Friedrich. 1876. Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Bd I, Abt. I: Einleitung in die
Sprachwissenschaft. Wien: Alfred Hölder. Pp 178.
Peripherals: Anon, Zeitschrift für Völkerpsykologie und Sprachwissenschaft, v. 9 (1877) p. 373-401.
Müller, Friedrich. 1877. Die Sprachen Basa, Grebo und Kru im westlichen Afrika.
Sitzungsberichte der (kaiserlichen) Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Wien, philosophischhistorische Klasse, April 1877, p. (?).
Müller, Friedrich. 1877. Die Bantu-Sprachen. In: Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Bd I, Abt. II:
die Sprachen der wollhaarigen Rassen, p. 238ff. Wien: Alfred Hölder.
Müller, Friedrich. 1877. Ueber die Verwandtschaftsverhältnisse des Hausa. In: Grundriss der
Sprachwissenschaft, Bd I, Abt. II: die Sprachen der wollhaarigen Rassen, p. 235f. Wien:
Alfred Hölder.
232
Müller, Friedrich. 1877. Die Hausa-Sprache. In: Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Bd I, Abt. II:
die Sprachen der wollhaarigen Rassen, p. 215-237. Wien: Alfred Hölder.
Müller, Friedrich. 1877. Die Kanuri-Sprache. In: Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Bd I, Abt. II:
Müller, Friedrich. 1877. Die Teda-Sprache. In: Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Bd I, Abt. II:
Müller, Friedrich. 1877. Die Maba- (Mobba-) Sprache. In: Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Bd
I, Abt. II: die Sprachen der wollhaarigen Rassen, p. 179-184. Wien: Alfred Hölder.
Müller, Friedrich. 1877. Die Bagrimma- (Baghirmi-) Sprache. In: Grundriss der
Sprachwissenschaft, Bd I, Abt. II: die Sprachen der wollhaarigen Rassen, p. 174-178.
Wien: Alfred Hölder.
Müller, Friedrich. 1877. Die Wandala- (Mandara-) Sprache. In: Grundriss der
Müller, Friedrich. 1877. Die Logone-Sprache. In: Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Bd I, Abt.
II: die Sprachen der wollhaarigen Rassen, p. 162-166. Wien: Alfred Hölder.
Müller, Friedrich. 1877. Die Sonrhai-Sprache. In: Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Bd I, Abt.
Müller, Friedrich. 1877. Die Mande-Sprachen (Vei, Mandingo, Susu, Bambara). In: Grundriss der
Müller, Friedrich. 1877. Die Efik-Sprache. In: Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Bd I, Abt. II:
Müller, Friedrich. 1877. Die Sprachen der Bullom und Temne. In: Grundriss der
Müller, Friedrich. 1877. Die Wolof-Sprache. In: Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Bd I, Abt. II:
Müller, Friedrich. 1877. Die Sprache der Bari. In: Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Bd I, Abt.
Müller, Friedrich. 1877. Die Sprache der Dinka. In: Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Bd I, Abt.
Müller, Friedrich. 1877. Die Sprachen der Buschmänner [Seroa, !Khuai, ≠Nusa]. In: Grundriss
der Sprachwissenschaft, Bd I, Abt. II: die Sprachen der wollhaarigen Rassen, p. 25-29.
Müller, Friedrich. 1877. Hottentotisch (Nama-Dialekt). In: Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Bd
I, Abt. II: die Sprachen der wollhaarigen Rassen, p. 1-24. Wien: Alfred Hölder.
Müller, Friedrich. 1884. Die Sprache der Sandeh (Nyam-nyam). In: Grundriss der
Sprachwissenschaft, Bd III: die Sprachen der lockhaarigen Rassen; Abt. I: die Sprachen
der Nuba- und der Dravida-Rasse, p. 99-105. Wien: Alfred Hölder.
Müller, Friedrich. 1884. Die Sprache der Il-Oigob. In: Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Bd III:
die Sprachen der lockhaarigen Rassen; Abt. I: die Sprachen der Nuba- und der DravidaRasse, p. 86-98. Wien: Alfred Hölder.
Müller, Friedrich. 1884. Die Sprache der S-umale (T-umale). In: Grundriss der
Sprachwissenschaft, Bd III: die Sprachen der lockhaarigen Rassen; Abt. I: die Sprachen
der Nuba- und der Dravida-Rasse, p. 80-85). Wien: Alfred Hölder.
Müller, Friedrich. 1884. Die Sprache der Barea. In: Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Bd III: die
Sprachen der lockhaarigen Rassen; Abt. I: die Sprachen der Nuba- und der Dravida-Rasse,
p. 67-79. Wien: Alfred Hölder.
Müller, Friedrich. 1884. Die Sprache der Kunama. In: Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Bd III:
233
Müller, Friedrich. 1884. Die Sprache der Nuba. In: Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Bd III: die
Sprachen der lockhaarigen Rassen; Abt. I: die Sprachen der Nuba- und der Dravida-Rasse,
p. 26-53. Wien: Alfred Hölder.
Müller, Friedrich. 1884. Die Sprache der Ful-be. In: Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Bd III:
Müller, Friedrich. 1884. Ueber die Beziehungen der Sprache der Il-Oigob zur Sprache der Bari. In:
Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Bd III: die Sprachen der lockhaarigen Rassen; Abt. I:
die Sprachen der Nuba- und der Dravida-Rasse, p. 95-98. Wien: Alfred Hölder.
Müller, Friedrich. 1886. Die Musuk-Sprache in Central-Afrika: nach den Aufzeichnungen von
G.A. Krause herausgegebt. Sitzungsberichte der (kaiserlichen) Akademie der
Wissenschaften zu Wien, philosophisch-historische Klasse, v. 112, 1, p. 353-421.
Müller, Friedrich. 1887. Der hamito-semitischen Sprachstamm. In: Grundriss der
Sprachwissenschaft, Bd III: die Sprachen der lockhaarigen Rassen; Abt. II: die Sprachen
der mittelländischen Rasse, p. 224-417. Wien: Alfred Hölder.
Followed by a section titled “Nachträge und Verbesserungen” (p. 418-419).
Müller, Friedrich. 1888. Die Sprache de /Kham Buschmänner. In: Grundriss der
Sprachwissenschaft, Bd 4, p. (?). Wien: Alfred Hölder.
This is referred to by Hewitt (1986:267). I’ve not seen a similar reference anywhere else, nor have I seen Müller’s
fourth volume (only the first three).
Müller, Friedrich. 1889. Die äquatoriale Sprachfamilie in Central Afrika. Sitzungsberichte der
(kaiserlichen) Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Wien, philosophisch-historische Klasse, v.
119, p. 1-16.
Peripherals: ..., Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 3 (1889/90) p. 155-156; Friedrich Müller, “Nachträge”,
Sitzungsberichte der (kaiserlichen) Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Wien, philosophisch-historische Klasse, v.
127/10 (1892) p. 78-84.
Müller, F. 1900. Erklärung einiger ostafrikanische Ortsnamen. Mitteilungen des Seminars für
Müller, Franz. 1904. Grammatik der Kinyamwesi-Sprache. Salzburg (Österreich): St. Petrus
Claver-Sodalität für die afrikanischen Missionen.
Müller, P.Fr. 1902. Ein Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Atakpame. Zeitschrift für afrikanische,
ozeanische und ostasiatische Sprachen, v. 6, p. 138-166, 194-205.
Müller, P.Fr. 1902. Wörterverzeichnis, atakpame-deutsch. Zeitschrift für afrikanische, ozeanische
und ostasiatische Sprachen, v. 6, p. 194-205.
Müller, P.Fr. 1905. Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Tem-Sprache (Nord-Togo). Mitteilungen des
Müller, P.Fr. 1906. Ein Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Akasele (Tsamba)-Sprache; mit Zusätzen von
P.W. Schmidt. Anthropos: internationale Zeitschrift für Völker- und Sprachenkunde, v. 1, p.
787-803.
Müller, W. Max. 1854. Proposals for a missionary alphabet submitted to the alphabetical
conferences, held at the residence of Chevalier Bunsen in January 1854. London.
Müller, W. Max. 1892. Zur Pronomen absolutum der ersten Person. Zeitschrift für ägyptische
Sprache, v. 30, p. 59-62.
Müller, W. Max. 1892. Abgekürzte Orthographie der Pronominalsuffixe. Zeitschrift für ägyptische
Sprache, v. 30, p. 121-124.
Müller, W. Max. 1906. Die Religionen Togos in Einzeldarstellungen [pt. 1]. Anthropos:
Deals with Atakpame (Yoruba), Kposo, Kebu, Anyanga, Fõ (see Hintze 1959).
Peripherals: Ralph Durand, “Short notice”, Anthropos, v. 2 (1907) p. 742.
234
Müller, W. Max. 1909. The false r in archaic Egyptian orthography. Recueil de travaux relatifs à
Müller, W. Max. 1912. Ein libysch-ägyptisches Wort. Wiener Zeitschrift für die Kunde des
Munzinger, Johann Albert Werner. 1864. Ostafrikanische Studien. Schaffhausen (Schweiz): F.
Hurter. Pp viii, 584.
Includes sections “Reise ins land der Marea”, “Ueber die Beni Amer”, “Ueber die Sprache To’bedauie” (p. 339-369),
“ Reise durch das land der Kun’ama”, “Einige bemerkungen über Ethnographie von Kordofan”, etc. Reprinted 1883
by Benno Schwabe in Basel; and 1967 by Johnson Reprint Corporation in New York.
Peripherals: R.H., Zeitschrift für allgemeine Erdkunde, neue Folge, v. 17 (1864) p. 160-164.
Munzinger, Johann Albert Werner. 1864. Bericht über eine Reise von Massua nach Kordofan,
1861 und 1862. In: Die deutsche Expedition in Ost-Afrika 1861 und 1862, p. 1-13. Ed. by
Theodor von Heuglin, Gottlob Theodor Kinzelbach, Johann Albert Werner Munzinger &
Hermann Steudner. Dr A. Petermanns Mitteilungen aus Justus Perthes’ Geographischer
Anstalt, Ergänzungsband #3:13. Gotha: Justus Perthes.
Includes a few lexical specimens for Tobedauie, Barea, For, Tegele, and Nuba, plus Belen and Basen (whatever those
are).
Munzinger, Johann Albert Werner. 1865. Vocabulaire de la langue tigre. Leipzig: T.O. Weigel.
Pp x, 93.
Murray, G.W. 1912. The fox who lost his tail: a Nubian tale. Man: a record of anthropological
science, v. 12, p. 182-183 (art. 97).
Murray, Margaret A. 1911. Elementary Coptic (Sahidic) grammar. London.
Nachtigal, Gustav. 18xx. Unpublished manuscripts and notes on Sila (Daju).
Referred to by Stevenson (1971:?).
Nagel, Emil. 1887. Praktisches Hülfsbuch der Kaffern-Sprache, zur leichten Verständigung mit
den eingeborenen Kaffern Sud-Afrikas. Leipzig: T.O. Weigel. Pp 43.
Najjari, Muhammad. 1903/06. Dictionnaire français-arabe. Alexandria: Imprimerie F. Mizrahi.
Nallino, Carlo ALfonso. 1900. L’arabo parlato in Egitto: grammatica, dialoghi e raccolta di
circa 6000 vocaboli. Milano: Ulrico Hoepli. Pp xxviii, 386.
Nascimento, José Pereira do. 1894. Gramática do umbundo ou lingua de Benguella. Supplement
102 to Boletim da Sociedade de Geográfia de Lisboa, v. 13. Lisboa: Imprensa Nacional de
Angola. Pp xii, 105.
This may have been originally published in Boletim da Sociedade de Geográfia de Lisboa (v.13?).
Nascimento, José Pereira do. 1894. Diccionário portuguez-umbundu e umbundu-portuguez.
Lisboa. Pp 53.
Nascimento, José Pereira do. 1903. Diccionário portuguez-kimbundu. Huíla (Angola):
Typographia da Missão. Pp xx, 137.
Includes a brief grammar introduction.
Nassau, Robert Hamill. 1904. Fetichism in West Africa: 40 years’ observations of native customs
and superstitions. London: Gerald Duckworth & Co. Pp xvii, 389.
Simultaneously published/distributed in New York by the Young People’s Missionary Movement.
URL: www.sacred-texts.com/afr/fiwa/index.htm
URL: www.archive.org/details/fetichisminwesta00nassuoft
Nassau, Robert Hamill. 1912. Where animals talk: West African folk lore tales. Boston: Richard
G. Badger. Pp 250.
Includes English translations of folk tales from Mpongwe, Benga and Fang. There’s also as “Index of names of
animals, etc.” (p. 248-250) with lexical specimens from Benga, Mpongwe, Bapuku, Kombe, and Fang.
URL: www.archive.org/details/whereanimalstalk00nassuoft
Nassau, Robert Hamill. 1915. Batanga tales. Journal of American folklore, v. 28, 107, p. 24-51.
Nassau, Robert Hamill; Mackey, James Love. 1892. Mackey’s grammar of the Benga-Bantu
language. Second edition, revised. New York: American Tract Society. Pp 108.
The first edition is credited to Mackey. It appeared 1855 as A grammar of the Benga language.
235
Naumann, [?]. 1915. Die Baja-Sprache. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v.
18, III, p. 42-51.
Naville, Edouard Henri. 1883. Letter à M. le professeur Maspero sur la vocalisation des noms
égyptiens. Zeitschrift für ägyptische Sprache, v. 21, p. 1-11.
Naville, Edouard Henri. 1886. Das aegyptische Totenbuch der XVIII. bis XX. Dynastie, aus
verschiedenen Urkunden zusamgestellt und herausgegeben. Berlin: Verlag von A. Asher &
Co.
URL: www.etana.org
Naville, Edouard Henri. 1905. Etudes grammaticales: la lettre 3. Recueil de travaux relatifs à la
The ‹3› should be a hierogplyph, viz. G1 according to Gardiner’s (1957) index.
Naville, Edouard Henri. 1920. L’évolution de la langue égyptienne et les langues semitiques. Paris:
Librairie Orientaliste Paul Geuthner. Pp xiii, 178.
Negri, Cristoforo. 18xx. ... [Title wanting]. Petermanns geographische Mitteilungen (Dr A.
Petermanns Mitteilungen aus Justus Perthes’ Geographischer Anstalt), v. (?), p. (?).
Comparative vocabulary of some 600 words (Shilluk, Dinka, Nuer). Mentioned by Somerauer (1993).
Nehlil. 1909. Etude sur le dialecte de Ghat. Publications de l’Ecole des Lettres d’Alger; Bulletin
de correspondance africaine, #38. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp xii, 218, 3.
Nekes, P. Hermann. 1911. Lehrbuch der Jaunde-Sprache. Mit einem Anhang, “Übungs- und
Wörterbuch mit genauer Tonstranskription” von H. Nekes und W. Planert. Lehrbücher des
Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, #26. Berlin: Georg Reimer. Pp xii, 4, 303.
Reprinted 1991 by the original publishers.
Peripherals: W.A. C[rabtree], Journal of the African Society, v. 10 (1910/11) p. 503-504; Carl Meinhof,
Literarisches Zentralblatt für Deutschland, v. 62 (1911) p. 1024-1025; Carl Meinhof, Zeitschift für
Kolonialsprachen, v. 2 (1911/12) p. 156-157; P. Wilhelm Schmidt, “Einiges über afrikanische Tonsprachen”,
Anthropos, v. 7 (1912) p. 783-791.
Nekes, P. Hermann. 1911. Die Bedeutung des musikalischen Tones in den Bantusprachen.
Anthropos: internationale Zeitschrift für Völker- und Sprachenkunde, v. 6, p. 546-574.
Compares Yaunde with Shambala and concludes that Proto-Bantu was likely a two-tone language.
Nekes, P. Hermann. 1911. Die musikalischen Töne in der Dualasprache. Anthropos:
Nekes, P. Hermann. 1913. Die Sprache der Jaunde in Kamerun. Deutsche Kolonialsprachen, #5.
Berlin: Verlag von Dietrich Reimer (Ernst Vohsen). Pp 111.
Peripherals: Martin Heepe, Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 4 (1913/14) p. 156-158.
Nekes, P. Hermann. 1914. Über den Mittelton in Jaunde und Basa. Anthropos: internationale
Appended to Skolaster’s (1914) article “Die musikalischen Töne in der Basa-Sprache”.
Nesib, Onesimus. 1894. The Galla spelling-book. Moncullo (Italy?). Pp 174.
Nettelbladt, F. von [Baron]. 1891. Suaheli-Drogoman: Gespräche, Wörterbuch und praktische
Anleitung zum Verkehr mit den Eingeborenen in Deutsch-Ostafrika. Leipzig. Pp xii, 256.
New, E. 1873. Nika vocabulary.
Referred to by Whiteley & Gutkind (1958).
Newell, William Wells. 1894. Folk-tales of Angola. Journal of American folklore, v. 7, 26, p. 6165.
Sort of a review article based on Chatelain’s Folk-tales of Angola, which had recently been published by the
American Folk-Lore Society.
Peripherals: Anon, “Folk-tales of Angola” (notes and queries), Journal of American folklore, v. 7 (1894) p. 152;
W.W. N[ewell], “Folk-tales of Angola, II”, Journal of American folklore, v. 7 (1894) p. 311-316.
Newell, William Wells. 1894. Folk-tales of Angola [pt. 2]. Journal of American folklore, v. 7, 27,
p. 311-316.
Newman, Francis William. 1835/36. Outline of the Kabail grammar. The West of England journal
of science and literature, v. 1, p. (?).
Newman, Francis William. 1844. On the structure of the Berber language. London.
236
Listed by Jucovy & Alderete (2001). Could be a journal article.
Newman, Francis William. 1845. A grammar of the Berber language. Zeitschrift für die Kunde des
Newman, Francis William. 1846/48. The narrative of Sidi Ibrahim ben Muhammed el Messi el
Susi in the Berber language. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and
Northern Ireland, v. 9, p. 215-266.
Not at all sure about the details of this.
Newman, Francis William. 1847. Notes on the Galla verb and pronoun. Proceedings of the
Philological Society, v. 63, p. 125-128.
Newman, Francis William. 1857. Wörterbuch des Dialektes der Auelimmiden. Gotha.
Newman, Francis William. 1871. A dictionary of modern Arabic. London: Trübner & Co.
Newman, Francis William. 1880. Notes on the Libyan languages. Journal of the Royal Asiatic
Society of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, new series, v. 12, p. 417-434.
Newman, Francis William. 1882. Libyan vocabulary: an essay towards reproducing the ancient
Numidian language, out of four modern tongues. London: Trübner & Co. Pp 204.
A later edition was retitled Kabail vocabulary.
Newman, Francis William. 1882. Kabail vocabulary. New edition, supplemented by the aid of a
new source. London.
New edition of Libyan vocabulary, publ. 1882.
Newton, A.J. 1885. Lessons in words and phrases in English and Kafir. St. Peter’s-on-Indwe
(Cape Colony). Pp 40.
Nicolas, Alfred. 19xx. Dictionnaire arabe-français, français-arabe: idiome tunisien. Tunis.
The fourth edition appeared 1920, so presumably the first three editions appeared prior to 1920.
Nigmann, Ernst. 1909. Versuch einer Wörterbuches für Kissandaui. Mitteilungen des Seminars
Noble, John. 1877. The names of our rivers. Cape monthly magazine, v. 15, p. 291-294.
Peripherals: J.A. Hewitt, “The names of our rivers”, Cape monthly magazine, v. 15 (1877) p. 380-381.
Noble, Roderick. (Ed.) 1869. The Cape and its people, and other essays. Cape Town: J.C. Juta.
Reprinted 1970 by Negro Universities Press in New York (ISBN-10 0-8371-2855-2).
Nogueira, António Francisco. 1885. O lu’n kunbi: dialecto do grupo o’n bundo que se falla no
interior de Mossamedes. Boletim da Sociedade de Geográfia de Lisboa, v. 5, 4, p. 175-262.
With a comparative Nkumbi-Nyaneka-Nano wordlist.
Nöldeke, Th. 1898. Die semitischen Sprachen. Leipzig: B. Tauchnitz.
Nöldeke, Th. 1910. Lehwörter in und aus dem Äthiopischen. Neue Beiträge zur semitischen
Sprachwissenschaft (Strassburg), 1910, p. 31-66.
Norris, Edwin. 1841. Outline of a vocabulary of a few of the principal languages of western and
central Africa, compiled for the use of the Niger expedition. London. Pp viii, 213.
Contains vocabularies for Bongo B303?, Rungo B11b?, Kongo H16, Bagnon (Banyun), Bornu (Kanuri?), Fot
(Gbe?), Popo (Gbe?), Karaba (Efik?), Woloff, Susu, Timmani, Mandingo, Bambara, Bullom, Kissi, Kossa (?), Pessa
(?), Feloop (Dioula), Kru (Klao?), Bassa, Ashantee, Kouri (?), Ako (Amgbe?), Benin (Edo), Moko (Edoid?), Mendi,
Vei, Howssa, Fulah, Fantee, Ibu (Igbo), Yebu (Yoruba?), Bonny, Nufee (Nupe), Tapua (Nupe), Akuonga/Uhobo, and
others. Many of these were culled from previous and contemporary works (e.g. Beecham 1841, Kilham 1827). The
title is sometimes given as “Outline of a few of the principal languages of western and central Africa”.
Norris, Edwin. 1850. Notes on the Vei language and alphabet. Journal of the Royal Geographical
Society of London, v. 20, p. 101-113.
Norris, Edwin. 1853. Grammar of the Bornu or Kanuri language, with dialogues, translations
and vocabulary. London. Pp 101.
Gesellschaft, v. 8 (1854) p. 413-441.
237
Northcote, G.A.S. 19xx. Manuscript vocabularies of Ki-guzii (Ki-suba) and Ki-koria (in the Kisuna and Ki-tende dialects).
Johnston (1919:787) refers to untitled vocabulary manuscripts by Northcote of “Ki-guzii (Ki-suba) and ... Ki-koria
languages (in the Ki-suna and Ki-tende dialects)”.
Norton, W.A. 1915. The study of the South African native languages. South African journal of
science, v. 12?, p. (?).
Norton, W.A. 1916. Bantu place names in Africa. South African journal of science, v. 13, p. 264277.
Not sure of the pagination. Reprinted 1917 in Report of the 14th annual meeting of the South African Association,
Maritzburg 1916.
Norton, W.A. 1918. Sesuto etymology: specimen - Suto etymology dictionary. South African
journal of science, v. 15, p. (?).
Not sure about the exact title of this one.
Norton, W.A.; Velaphe, H.W.A. 1924. Some Sesutho riddles and their translations. South African
journal of science, v. 21, p. (?).
Nylander, Gustavus R. 1814. Grammar and vocabulary of the Bullom language. London: Ellerton
& Henderson. Pp 159.
O’Flaherty, Philip [Rev.]. 1892. Collections of a lexicon in Luganda and English and English and
Luganda. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp 41.
O’kraku, John Atna Simeon. 1917. Dagomba grammar, with exercises and vocabularies.
Cambridge: The University Press. Pp viii, 152.
Not sure about the publisher.
O’Leary, De Lacey. 1916. Characteristics of the Hamitic languages. Bristol: J. Wright & Sons.
Pp 46.
O’Leary, De Lacey. 1923. Comparative grammar of the Semitic languages. London: Kegan Paul,
Trench, Trübner & Co.
URL: www.archive.org/details/comparativegramm00oleauoft
O’Neil, Joseph. 1909. A phrase book in English and siNdebele with a full vocabulary, for the use
of settlers in Matabeleland. Bulawayo & London: Ellis Allen for Simpkin, Marshall & Co.
Pp xi, 104.
This “went through a second edition at least” (Doke 1943:82n4).
O’Neil, Joseph. 1910. A phrase book in English and Sindebele, with a full vocabulary and a list of
wild animals, bird and reptiles. Second edition. Bulawayo: Ellis Allen.
O’Neil, Joseph. 1912. A grammar of the Sindebele dialect of Zulu, with numerous examples and a
key to the exercises. Bulawayo: Ellis Allen for Simpkin, Marshall & Co. Pp xii, 177.
This is “useful and straightforward, albeit simple” (Doke 1945:82).
O’Neill, Henry E. 1882. A three months’ journey in the Makua and Lomwe countries.
Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society and monthly record of geography, new
monthly series, v. 4, 4, p. 193-213.
Includes a brief “Table of Makua and Lomwe words” (p. 209-210).
O’Neill, Henry E. 1883. Journey in the district west of Cape Delgado Bay, Sept.-Oct. 1882.
Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society and monthly record of geography, new
monthly series, v. 5, 7, p. 393-404, map.
Includes a brief Mavia (Mabiha) vocabulary in two columns on p. 403-404. Whiteley & Gutkind (1958) claim this
includes a Makonde wordlist, but it doesn’t. O’Neill does, however, refer to the Mavia as “a branch of Makonde”.
O’Neill, Henry E. 1884. Journey from Mozambique to Lakes Shirwa and Amaramba. Proceedings
of the Royal Geographical Society and monthly record of geography, v. 6, p. 632-655, 713741.
Includes a “Brief collection of Lomwe [and Makhuwa] words made in passing through the Lomwe country, July to
October 1883” (p. 648-654).
Obst, Erich. 1912. Von Mkalama ins Land der Wakindega: vorläufiger Bericht der OstafrikaExpedition der Hamburger Geographischen Gesellschaft (2). Mitteilungen der
geographischen Gesellschaft in Hamburg, v. 26, p. 1-45.
238
Has some linguistic notes on Hadza (Whiteley & Gutkind 1958).
Offeio, Francesco da [Padre]. 1906. Proverbi abissini in lingua Tigray [pt. 1]. Anthropos:
Offeio, Francesco da [Padre]. 1908. Proverbi abissini in lingua Tigray [pt. 2]. Anthropos:
Offeio, Francesco da [Padre]. 1915. Grammatica della lingua tigrai. Seconda edizione, riveduta ed
accresciuta. Asmera: Tipografia Francescana. Pp 274.
Offeio, Francesco da [Padre]. 1936. Grammatica della lingua tigrai. Terza edizione. Roma.
Öhlschlager, [?]. 1891. Vocabulaire dankali. Melun (France): Imprimerie Administratif.
Details wanting.
Olderogge, Dmitry Alekseevich. 1969. Eine Swahili-Wortliste aus dem Jahre 1811 aus den
handscriftlichen Materialen von Admiral Krusenstern. In: Wort und Religion, Kalima na
dini: Studien zur Afrikanistik, Missionswissenschaft, Religionswissenschaft, Ernst
Dammann zum 65. Geburtstag, p. 19-27. Ed. by Hans-Jürgen Greschat & Herrmann
Jungraithmayr. Stuttgart: Evangelischer Missionsverlag.
Olderogge, Dmitry Alekseevich. 1971. ... = The 1811 Swahili language dictionary. Africana:
afrikanskii etnograficheskii sbornik, v. 8, p. (?). (Trudy Inst. etnografii imeni N.N. Miklucho
Maklaja, novaja serija, #96.)
Title wanting. In Russian.
Oliveira, Saturnino de Sousa e. 1864. Dicionário da lingua n’bundu. Manuscripto.
“In 1864, Dr Saturnino de Souza e Oliveira began the publication of [the above title] ... a large part or the whole was
printed but never stitched, and only a few unique manuscript slips and printed pages of this valuable work are left”
(Doke 1945:23) - but where?
Oliveira, Saturnino de Sousa e; Francina, Manuel Alves de. 1864. Elementos grammaticaes da
lingua mbundu: offerecidos a S.M. o Senhor D. Luiz I. Luanda. Pp xv, 73.
Presumaly this deals with Kimbundu H21a, though it could be Umbundu R11.
Oliver, Roland Anthony. (Ed.) 1977. The Cambridge history of Africa, 3: from c.1050 to c.1600.
Cambridge University Press. Pp 803. ISBN-10 0-521-20981-1.
Peripherals: P.S. Garlake, Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, v. 41 (1978) p. 637.
Olivier, Augustine. 1878. Dictionnaire français-kabyle. Le Puy (France): J.-M. Freydier. Pp vi,
316.
Olpp jnr, Johannes. 1908. Gespräche aus der Praxis für die Praxis. Archiv für Otjiherero- und
Nama-Forschung, #3. Windhoek: Rheinischen Missionsgesellschaft. Pp 4.
Olpp jnr, Johannes. 1917. Grammatik der Nama-Sprache. Gründet sich aus Hans Vedder’s
Versuch einer Grammatik der Namasprache. Swakopmund.
This is a reworking of Hans Vedder’s Versuch einer Grammatik der Namasprache, published 1909.
Olpp jnr, Johannes. 1917. Nama-Grammatik. Handschriftliches Manuskript. Windhoek:
Rheinischen Missionsgesellschaft.
This was apparently published the same year. It is a reworking of Hans Vedder’s Versuch einer Grammatik der
Namasprache, 1909.
Olpp snr, Johannes. 1884. Angra pequaña und Gross-Nama-Land, auf Grund vieljährigen
Beobachtung kurz geschildert. Elberfeld (Deutschland): Friederichsen & Co. Pp 41.
Apparently this contains something about languages on p. 32-38 (Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:18).
Olpp snr, Johannes. 1885. Aus dem Sagenschatz der Nama Khoi-Khoin. Mitteilungen der
Listed by Doke (1933:38). Not sure if this exists ( cfr Olpp Snr 1887).
Olpp snr, Johannes. 1887. Aus dem Sagenschatz der Nama Khoi-Khoin. Mitteilungen der
Listed by Levy (1968:13). Could be a second part in a series.
Peripherals: Anon, Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 1 (1887/88) p. 315-316.
Olpp snr, Johannes. 1888. Nama-Deutsches Wörterbuch. Elberfeld (Deutschland): Friederichsen
& Co. Pp iii, 119.
“Pocket dictionary. Tones not marked” (Doke 1933:37). The publisher could be wrong.
239
Peripherals: Anon, Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 3 (1889/90) p. 155; C.M. Doke, “A preliminary
investigation into the state of the native languages in South Africa”, Bantu studies, v. 7 (1933) p. 1-99.
Olpp snr, Johannes. 1910. Agende für die Nama sprechenden Gemeinden in Herero- und
Namaland. Gütersloh: C. Bertelsmann.
Onipede, D.B. 1919. Hausa in thirty days. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co.
Oordt, J.F. van. 1903. Phrases and dialogues in Cape Dutch. Amsterdam & Cape Town.
Oordt, J.F. van. 1907. Hottentot language and its place in philology. African monthly
(Grahamstown), v. 2, p. 3-20.
Oordt, J.F. van. 1910. Stray notes on South African philology. The state of South Africa
(Johannesburg), v. 4, p. 97-104.
Oordt, L.C. van. 1947/56. Die kaapse taalargief, 10 dele. Kaapstad: Nasionale Pers.
Includes 18th-century letters from the Cape, written in early Afrikaans or Cape Dutch. Some parts may have
appeared as journal articles.
Ormsby, G. 1913. Notes on the Angass language [pt. 1]. Journal of the African Society, v. 12, 48,
p. 421-424.
Ormsby, G. 1913/14. Notes on the Angass language [pt. 2-4]. Journal of the African Society, v. 13,
p. 54-61, 204-210, 313-315.
Ormsby, S. 190x. Unpublished Lugisu vocabulary.
Referred to without a title by Johnston (1919:787).
Ornelas, Aires de. 1905. Raças e linguas indigenas em Moçambique. Lourenço Marques:
Imprensa Nacional.
Otto, [Brother]. 1907. Zulu konstruktive elemente. Marianhill. Pp 84.
Ouizilleau, [?]. 1911. Noites sur la langue des pygmées de la Sanga. Revue d’ethnographie et de
sociologie, v. 2, p. 75-92.
Ovir, Ewald. 1896. Die abgeleiteten Verba im Kiswahili. Zeitschrift für afrikanische und
Ovir, Ewald. 1897. Märchen und Rätsel der Wamadschame. Zeitschrift für afrikanische und
Owen, Roger Carmichael Robert. 1908. Bari grammar and vocabulary. London: J. & E. Bumpus.
Pp vii, 164.
Based on Mitterrutzner’s Die Sprache der Bari in Central-Afrika, published 1867.
Oyler, D.S. [Mrs]. 1919. Examples of Shilluk folklore. Sudan notes and records, v. 2, p. 216-223.
Pacho, Jean-Raimond. 1827/28. Relation d’un voyage dans la Marmarique, la Cyrenaique et les
oasis d’Audjelah et de Maradeh, 2 vols. Paris: Firmin-Didot.
Includes a “Vocabulaire de la langue des habitants d’Audjelah” (i.e. Berber). Reprinted 1978 by Jeanne Laffitte in
Marseilles.
Pagès, G. [R.P.]. 1919/20. Au Ruanda, sur les bords du lac Kivou (Congo Belge): ethnologie,
histoire et religion. Anthropos: internationale Zeitschrift für Völker- und Sprachenkunde, v.
14/15, p. 941-967.
Contains some lexical data.
Paiva Raposo, Alberto Carlos de. 1895. Noçoes de gramática landina e breve guia de conversação
em portuguez, inglez e landim. Lisboa: Sociedade de Geográfia de Lisboa. Pp 75.
Paiva Raposo, Alberto Carlos de. 1901. Dicionário da lingua landina, português, inglês, landim
[...]. Supplement to Boletim da Sociedade de Geográfia de Lisboa, v. 18. Lisboa: Imprensa
Nacional de Moçambique. Pp 88.
Pajares, A. Martinez. 1918. Toponimia hispanomarroqui. In: Estudio sobre apellidos y nombres de
lugar hispano-marroquies, p. (?). Ed. by Johannes Jungfer & A. Martinez Pajares. Madrid:
Imprensa Blass.
Palermo, G.M. da. 1915. Dizionario somalo-italiano e italiano-somalo. Asmera.
240
Panconcelli-Calzia, Giulio. 1910/11. Über die aspirierten und nichtaspirierten Verschlusslaute,
sowie den Frageton im Suaheli. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 1, p. 305-315.
Panconcelli-Calzia, Giulio. 1915/16. Objektive Untersuchungen über die stimmlosen Nasale im
Ndonga. Zeitschrift für Kolonialsprachen, v. 6, p. 257-263.
Panconcelli-Calzia, Giulio. 1919/20. Über die Abhängigkeit bezw. Unabhängigkeit der Laute von
der Atmung. Zeitschrift für Eingeborenen-Sprachen, v. 10, p. 32-43.
Paradis, Jean-Michel Venture de. 1832. Principes de la langue berbère. Paris.
Paradis, Jean-Michel Venture de. 1844. Grammaire et dictionnaire abrégés de la langue berbère.
Recueil de voyages et de mémoires publié par la Société de Géographie de Paris, #7. Paris:
Imprimerie Royale. Pp xxiii, 236.
This may not have been the first appearance of this. Some biblios date it 1824.
URL: books.google.se/books?id=YRoJAAAAQAAJ
Park, Mungo. 1799. Mungo Park’s Reise in das Innere von Afrika in den Jahren 1795, 1796 und
1797: auf Veranstaltung der afrikanischen Gesellschaft unternommen; nebst einem
Wörterbuche der Mandingo-Sprache und einem Anhange geographischer Erläuterungen
von Rennell. Aus dem englischen übersetzt. Hamburg: Benjamin Gottlob Hoffman. Pp 10,
543.
Peripherals: Maria Grosz-Ngaté, “Power and knowledge: the representation of the Mande world in the works of Park,
Park, Mungo. 1799. Travels in the interior districts of Africa, performed under the direction and
patronage of the African Association, in the years 1795, 1796, and 1797. With an appendix
containing geographical illustrations of Africa by Major Rennell. London: W. Bulmer & Co.
for the author. Pp xxviii, 372, xcii, plates.
Includes vocabulary items from Mandingo, Feloop (= Dioula), and possibly other languages, too. Mungo Park’s
journals have gone through several editions (abridged, revised, corrected, etc.), reprints (often retitled), as well as
several translations, e.g. to French, German, Swedish, Danish.
URL: books.google.se/books?id=aL4RAAAAYAAJ
Peripherals: Maria Grosz-Ngaté, “Power and knowledge: the representation of the Mande world in the works of Park,
Park, Mungo. 1816. Travels in the interior districts of Africa, performed in the years 1795, 1796,
and 1797, with an account of a subsequent mission to that country in 1805, 2 vols. With an
appendix containing geographical illustrations of Africa by Major Rennell. London: W.
Bulmer & Co. for John Murray.
Includes a corrected/revised edition of Travels in the interior district of Africa (1799) and a reprint of The journal of
a mission to the interior of Africa (1815).
URL: books.google.se/books?id=ByYAAAAAQAAJ
URL: books.google.se/books?id=R-4MAAAAIAAJ
URL: books.google.se/books?id=3tINAAAAQAAJ
Parker, George Williams. 1883. On the people and language of Madagascar. Journal of the
Parker, George Williams. 1883. Concise grammar of the Malagasy language. Trübner’s
collection of simplified grammars, #4. London: Trübner & Co. Pp iv, 66.
Parkinson, John. 1906. Note on the Asaba people (Ibos) of the Niger. Journal of the
Parkinson, John. 1909. Yoruba folk-lore. Journal of the African Society, v. 8, 30, p. 165-186.
Parr, Theophilus. 1881. Bubi na English dictionary, with notes on grammar. Primitive Methodist
Mission Press. Pp xv, 40.
Parsons, Allen C. 1915. A Hausa phrase book, with medical and scientific vocabulary. London:
Humphrey Milford.
Peripherals: A. Werner, Man, v. 15 (1915) p. 127-128 (art. 71).
Pasha, Emin (Eduard Schnitzer). 18xx. Vocabularies of the Bakonjo, Baamba, Babira, Balega,
Lendu and Banyari languages. Unpublished manuscripts.
241
“Emin Pasha, when Governor of Equatoria, compiled a number of vocabularies ... [When he] returned to take service
in German East Africa he inscribed some interesting vocabularies of the Nyanza and Ituri forest languages, which
after long concealment were brought to light and published recently through the energy of Bernhard Struck”
(Johnston 1919:13); see Struck (1910), whose article bears the title Vokabularien der Bakondjo-, Baamba-,
Bambuba-, Babira-, Balega-, Lendu- und Banyarisprachen.
Pasha, Emin (Eduard Schnitzer). 1879. Wörtersammlung des Kiganda und Kinyoro-Deutsch.
Zeitschrift für Ethnologie, v. 11, p. 259-280.
Credited to Emin-Bey.
Pasha, Emin (Eduard Schnitzer). 1882. Wörterverzeichnisse afrikanischer Sprachen. Zeitschrift für
Article credited to Emin-Bey. Contains data for Acholi, Alur, Madi and Lattuka (Lotuxo).
Passarge, Siegfried. 1900. Über geographische Ortsnamen in Afrika. Beiträge zur Kolonialpolitik
und Kolonialwirtschaft, v. 1, p. 71-75.
Passarge, Siegfried. 1905. Die Mambukuschu. Globus, v. 87, 13, p. 229-234, 295-301.
Contains a German-Mbukushu vocabulary, among other things.
Passarge, Siegfried. 1905. Das Okavangosumpfland und seine Bewohner. Zeitschrift für
Ethnologie, v. 37, 5, p. 649-716.
Contains a German-Subiya-Yeyi vocabulary, as well as some notes on Bushman groups in the Okavango Delta.
Passy, Paul. 1890. Etudes sur les changements phonétiques et leurs caractères generaux. Paris:
Firmin-Didot. Pp 270.
Contains something about clicks. Publication of the author’s thèse pour la doctorat, Faculté des Lettres de Paris (?),
1890.
Passy, Paul. 1906. Zulu. Le maître phonétique, novembre 1906, p. 119.
Passy, Paul. 1914. La langue thonga. Miscellanea phonetica, v. 1, p. 27-32.
Paul, Marguerite L. 1905. Chants berbères du Maroc. Paris.
Paulitschke, Philipp. 1896. Ethnographie Nordost-Afrikas, 2: die geistige Cultur der Danâkil,
Galla und Somâl. Berlin: Verlag von Dietrich Reimer. Pp xvii, 312.
Contains, for instance, “[v]ergleichender grammatikalischer Abriss der drei Sprachen, sonst allenthalben Notierung
von Termini” (Voigt 1988:59).
Payne, John. 1864. Grebo grammar. New York.
Not sure about this one - cfr Payne (1882).
Payne, John. 1867. A dictionary of the Grebo language. Second edition. Philadelphia: King &
Baird. Pp 153.
Is this a second edition of Wilson’s 1839-dictionary?
Payne, John. 1882. Grebo grammar, for the use of the Protestant Episcopal Mission at Cape
Palmas and parts adjacent, West Africa. New York: American Tract Society. Pp 66.
Pechuël-Loesche, Eduard. 1879. Die Sprache der Loangobewohner. In: Die Loango-Expedition,
ausgesendt von der Deutschen Gesellschaft zur Erforschung Aequatorial-Afrikas, 18731876: ein Reisewerk in drei Abteilungen, pt. 3, p. (?). Leipzig: P. Frohberg.
Pellissier, J.P. 1857. A vocabulary of the Sechuna language. Manuscript. Pp 24.
Source? And *no*, I can’t change the spelling “Sechuna” until I remember the source.
Périer, J.B. 1903. Petits exercises arabes, 1: morphologie. Alger. Pp iii, 114.
Perini, Ruffillo. 1892. Gl’idiomi parlati nella nostra colonia; del cap. L. Bettini. Bollettino della
Società Geografica Italiana, 3a serie, v. 5, p. 54-67.
Deals with nine Ethiopic languages - which?
Périquet, L. 1915. Rapport général sur la mission de délimitation Afrique Equatoriale Français Cameroun (1912-1913-1914), partie 4: vocabulaires. Paris: Imprimerie Chapelot pour le
Ministère des Colonies, France.
Includes vocabularies for Pandé C12 (p. 31-35), Yakinga A90 (37-43), Kako de la Kadei A93 (45-50), Boka-Bonga
C10 (51-54), Mouna de Bagandou C10 (55-59), Goundi C11 (61-64), Bokaka C10 (71-74), and Bakouli C10 (7578). Info taken from Schadeberg’s Bantu Bibliography. Is Périquet the same as Péringuey?
Péroz, E. 1891. Dictionnaire français-mandingue. Paris. Pp 163.
242
Deals with the Bissandougou dialect - is that in Senegal?
Perrin, James. 1855. An English-Kafir dictionary of the Zulu-Kafir language, as spoken by the
tribes of the colony of Natal. Pietermaritzburg. Pp 225.
Perrin, James. 1855. A Kafir-English dictionary of the Zulu-Kafir language, as spoken by the
tribes of the colony of Natal. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK).
Pp 166.
Perrin, James. 1865. Perrin’s English-Zulu dictionary. Second edition, revised by J.A. Brickhill.
Pietermaritzburg.
The original edition bore the title English-Kafir dictionary of the Zulu-Kafir language, as spoken by the tribes of
the colony of Natal.
Perrin, James. 1878. Perrin’s English-Zulu dictionary. Third edition, revised by J.A. Brickhill.
Pietermaritzburg.
Perrin, James. 1890. Perrin’s English-Zulu dictionary. Fourth edition, revised by J.A. Brickhill.
Pietermaritzburg.
Perrin, James. 1917. Perrin’s English-Zulu dictionary. New edition, revised. Pietermaritzburg: P.
Davis. Pp 822.
Could be a reprint.
Persson, J.A. 1917. Outlines of Sheetswa grammar. Cleveland (South Africa): Inhambane Mission
Press. Pp 88.
Petermann, Augustus. 185x. Map of the tropical regions of Africa, extending nearly to 20° north
and south latitude showing the approximate localities of the languages collected by the Rev.
S.W. Kölle.
Referred to in Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 10 (1856), p. 324.
Peters, Karl Friedrich Hubert [Dr]. 1891. Die deutsche Emin-Pascha-Expedition. Mit 32
Vollbildern und 66 Texabbildungen von Rudolf Hellgrewe in Berlin, dem Porträt des
Verfassers nach Franz von Lenbach und einer karte in Farbendruck. München & Leipzig:
Oldenbourg. Pp vi, 560.
Contains a wordlist for Luganda, at least. Various editions of this book exist.
Peters, Karl Friedrich Hubert [Dr]. 1891. New light on dark Africa: being the narrative of the
German Emin Pasha Expedition, the journeyings and adventures among the native tribes of
eastern equatorial Africa, the Gallas, Massais, Wasukuma, etc., etc., on the Lake Baringo
and the Victoria Nyanza. Translated from the German by H.W. Dulcken. London, New York
& Melbourne: Ward, Lock & Co. Pp xviii, 597.
Peters, Karl Friedrich Hubert [Dr]. 1907. Die deutsche Emin-Pascha-Expedition. Volksausgabe.
Hamburg: Deutscher Kolonial-Verlag WT Mumm. Pp vi, 446.
Several other editions/printings exist, e.g. by H. Hillger in Berlin (1909) and J. Knoblauch in Berlin (1910). They
all seem to be 446 pp.
Petrie, William Matthew Flinders [Sir]. (Ed.) 1895. Egyptian tales, translated from the papyri, 2nd
series: 18th to 19th dynasty. London: Methuen & Co. Pp xii, 146.
URL: onlinebooks.library.upenn.edu/webbin/gutbook/lookup?num=7413
Petrie, William Matthew Flinders [Sir]. 1899. Egyptian tales, translated from the papyri, 2nd
series: 18th to 19th dynasty. Second edition. London: Methuen & Co.
Petrie, William Matthew Flinders [Sir]. 1917. Scarabs and cylinders with names. Publications of
the British School of Archaeology and Egyptian Research Account. London: Arch.
243
Constable & Co. and Bernard Quaritch in association with the British School of
Archaeology in Egypt and the University College London (UCL).
URL: www.etana.org
Petrie, William Matthew Flinders [Sir]. (Ed.) 1918. Egyptian tales, translated from the papyri, 1st
series: 4th to 12th dynasty. Third edition. London: Methuen & Co. Pp viii, 145.
Petsch, Robert. 1900. Erzählungen der Suaheli. Nord und Süd, v. 95, p. 244-251.
What journal is this?
Pettmann, Charles. 1913. Africanderisms: a glossary of South African colloquial words and
phrases and of place and other names. London: Longmans, Green & Co. Pp xvii, 579.
A kind of etymological dictionary of South African English. Reprinted 1968 by... who?
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 13 (1913/14) p. 225-227; C.P. Swart, “Africanderisms: a
supplement to Rev. Charles Pettman’s glossary” (manuscript?, 1934).
Pettmann, Charles. 1914/15. An inquiry into the derivation of certain South African place-names
[pt. 1-2]. South African journal of science, v. 12, p. 95-106, 159-170.
Pettmann, Charles. 1919. An inquiry into the derivation of certain South African place-names [pt.
3]. South African journal of science, v. 16, p. 432-442.
Peyron, A. 1835. Lexicon linguae copticae. Torino: Regio Typographeo. Pp xxvii, 401.
Peyssonnel, Jean-André; Desfontaines, R. Louiche. 1838. Voyages dans les regences de Tunis et
d’Alger, 2 vols. Paris.
Includes a Zouaoua (Berber) vocabulary.
Pharaon, Joanny. 1832. Grammaire elementaire d’arabe vulgaire our algerienne. Paris.
Philippi, Friedrich [Wilhelm] [Martin]. 1886. Die Aussprache der semitischen Konsonanten 3 und
‘. Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 40, p. 639-654.
Peripherals: Fr. Philippi, “Nochmals die Aussprache der semitischen Konsonanten 3 und ‘”, Zeitschrift der
deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 51 (1897) p. 66-104.
Philippi, Friedrich [Wilhelm] [Martin]. 1897. Nochals die Aussprache der semitischen
Konsonanten 3 und ‘. Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 51, p. 66104.
Piehl, K. 1886/95. Inscriptions hiéroglyphiques recueillis en Europe et en Egypte, 3 vols.
Stockholm & Leipzig.
Piehl, K. 1891/93. Remarques générales sur le dictionnaire hiéroglyphique. In: Actes du 8ème
congrès international des orientalistes, tenu en 1889 à Stockholm et à Christiania, v. 4,3, p.
1-23. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
Piehl, K. 1895/97. Notes de lexicographie égyptienne. In: Actes du 10ème congrès international
des orientalistes: sessions de Genève, 1894, p. 123-138. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
Piehl, K. 1896. Notes de lexicographie égyptienne. Sphinx: revue critique embrassant le domaine
Piehl, K. 1897. sw pronom-suffixe des basses époques. Sphinx: revue critique embrassant le
domaine entier de l’égyptologie (Uppsala), v. 1, p. 68-69.
The ‹sw› should be written with hieroglyphs, viz. M23+V1 according to Gardiner’s (1957) index.
Piehl, K. 1898. Contribution au une dictionnaire hiéroglyphique. Proceedings of the Society of
Biblical Archaeology, v. 20, p. 190-201, 306-327.
Piehl, K. 1898. Le pronom-suffixe féminin de la première personrie du singulier [pt. 1]. Sphinx:
revue critique embrassant le domaine entier de l’égyptologie (Uppsala), v. 2, p. 75-78.
Piehl, K. 1898. Quelques formes pronominales en égyptien. Sphinx: revue critique embrassant le
Piehl, K. 1901. Le pronom-suffixe féminin de la première personrie du singulier [pt. 2]. Sphinx:
revue critique embrassant le domaine entier de l’égyptologie (Uppsala), v. 4, p. 54-60.
Piehl, K. 1902/03. Notes de lexicographie égyptienne. In: Actes du 12ème congrès international
des orientalistes, Roma, 1899, v. 3, p. 33-36. Florence.
Piehl, K. 1903. A propos de “The transliteration of Egyptian”. Sphinx: revue critique embrassant
le domaine entier de l’égyptologie (Uppsala), v. 7, p. 62-64.
244
Piehl, K. 1903. Notes de lexicographie égyptienne. Sphinx: revue critique embrassant le domaine
Piehl, K. 1903. Quelques points de la grammaire égyptienne. Sphinx: revue critique embrassant le
Pierce, [Professor]. 1839. A vocabulary of the African captives. The New England review, 21
September 1839, p. (?).
Includes a brief vocabulary of ‘Mendingo’.
Pietri, Camille [Capt.]. 1885. Les français au Niger: voyages et combats. Paris: Hachette. Pp 438.
Contains “remarques linguist. sur le poular” (Drexel 1925:210).
Pietschmann, Richard. 1879. Über die kanarischen Zahlwörte. Zeitschrift für Ethnologie, v. 11, p.
(?).
Pilkington, George Lawrence. 1891. A hand-book of Luganda. London: Society for Promoting
Pilkington, George Lawrence. 1892. Luganda-English and English-Luganda vocabulary. London:
Church Missionary Society (CMS). Pp 211.
Doke (1945:12) dates this 1892. Alexandre (1981:373) dates it 1899. Perhaps the latter refers to a reprint or even
new edition.
Pilkington, George Lawrence. 1901. A hand-book of Luganda. Reprint, with a few corrections.
London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp vi, 95.
Reprinted numerous times, e.g. 1967 by Gregg International at Farnborough.
Pilkington, George Lawrence; Cook, Albert Ruskin [Dr]. 1901. Engero za Baganda = Proverbs of
the Baganda. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp 31.
Issued anonymously.
Pinheiro, Augusto Soares. 1896. Subsidios para a gramática landina (xijonga) de Lourenço
Marques. Portugal em Africa, v. 3, 35, p. 477-534.
Plaatje, Sol[omon] Tshekisho. 1916. Sechuana proverbs with literal translations and their
European equivalents / Diane tsa secoana le maele a sekgooa a a dumalanang naco.
London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co. Pp xii, 98.
“Purports to contain 732 proverbs, though in fact there are numerous repetitions. The phrase ‘literal translations’
in the title is often as not a misnomer. The ‘European equivalents’ are often ingeniously fitted to the Tshwana
proverbs, but are as often misplaced. The orthography os one of Plaatje’s own ... The book is valuable as a sourcebook” (Lestrade, in Doke 1933:80).
Peripherals: A. W[erner], Journal of the African Society, v. 16 (1916/17) p. 183-184; Sidney H. Ray, Man, v. 17
(1917) p. 150-151 (art. 99); C.M. Doke, “A preliminary investigation into the state of the native languages in
South Africa”, Bantu studies, v. 7 (1933) p. 1-99.
Planert, Wilhelm. 1905. Handbuch der Nama-Sprache in Deutsch-Südwestafrika. Berlin: Verlag
von Dietrich Reimer. Pp 6, 104.
Peripherals: Carl Meinhof, Die evangelischen Missionen, v. 12 (1906) p. 120.
Planert, Wilhelm. 1905. Über die Sprache der Hottentotten und Buschmänner. Mitteilungen des
Reprinted as a booklet by Verlag von Dietrich Reimer in Berlin.
Planert, Wilhelm. 1907. Die syntaktischen Verhältnisse des Suaheli. Glückstadt: J.J. Augustin. Pp
59.
Peripherals: Carl Meinhof, Anthropos, v. 3 (1908) p. 382.
Plazikowsky-Brauner, Herma. 1913. Ein äthiopisch-amharisches Glossar (Sawâsew). Mitteilungen
des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 16, II, p. (?).
Publication of the author’s thesis, Berlin, 1913.
Plessis, Johannes du. 1917. The origin and meaning of the name “Hottentot”. South African
journal of science, v. 14, p. 189-193.
Ponceau, Peter S. du. 1830. Grammatical sketch and specimens of the Berber language.
Philadelphia.
Portal, Frédéric; Simons, John W. 1904. A comparison of Egyptian symbols with those of the
Hebrews. New York: Macoy Publ. & Masonic Supply Co. Pp 85.
245
Porter, William Carmichael. 1911. Translations into Makua with notes. London. Pp 100.
Posselt, C.W. 1850. The Zulu companion offered to the Natal colonist, to facilitate his intercourse
with the natives. Pietermaritzburg. Pp 64.
A Zulu-English phrase book.
Pott, August Friedrich. 1848. Verwandtschaftliches Verhältnis der Sprachen vom Kaffer- und
Kongo-Stamme unter einander. Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v.
2, p. 5-25, 129-158.
Includes remarks on the influence of Khoekhoe on southeastern Bantu languages.
Pott, August Friedrich. 1852. Ueber die Kihiau-Sprache. Zeitschrift der deutschen
Pott, August Friedrich. 1854. Sprachen aus Afrika’s Inneren und Westen. Zeitschrift der
Reviews of four recently published books, i.e. Grammar of the Bornu or Kanuri language (Norris 1853), Dialogues,
and a small portion of the New Testament in the English, Arabic, Haussa, and Bornu languages (Norris 1853),
Elemente des Akwapim-Dialekts der Odschi-Sprache (Riis 1853), and A vocabulary of the Yoruba language
(Crowther 1854).
Poutrin, Lucien. 1911. Travaux scientifiques de la Mission Cottes au sud-Cameroun, 1905-1908:
anthropologie, ethnographie, linguistique - d’après les observations et documents recueillis
par le Dr Gravot. Paris: Ernest Leroux.
Praetorius, [Georg] [Fr.] Franz. 1869. Ueber die Sprache von Harar. Zeitschrift der deutschen
Praetorius, [Georg] [Fr.] Franz. 1869. Bemerkungen über die Agausprache. Zeitschrift der
Praetorius, [Georg] [Fr.] Franz. 1870. Die Zählmethode in der äthiopischen Gruppe der
hamitischen Sprachen. Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 24, p.
415-424.
Not sure what languages are talked about.
Praetorius, [Georg] [Fr.] Franz. 1870. Ueber die Somalisprache. Zeitschrift der deutschen
Praetorius, [Georg] [Fr.] Franz. 1871/72. Grammatik der Tigriñasprache in Abessinien,
hauptsächlich in der gegend von Aksum und Adoa, 2 Teile. Mit einer Textbeilage. Halle. Pp
viii, 368; 5.
Reprinted 1972 in Leipzig.
Praetorius, [Georg] [Fr.] Franz. 1874. Ueber zwei Tigriñadialekte. Zeitschrift der deutschen
Praetorius, [Georg] [Fr.] Franz. 1878/79. Die amharische Sprache. Halle. Pp 523.
Reprinted 1970 in Hildesheim.
Praetorius, [Georg] [Fr.] Franz. 1880. Ueber den arabischen Dialekt von Zanzibar. Zeitschrift der
Praetorius, [Georg] [Fr.] Franz. 1883. Tigriñya-Sprüchwörter [pt. 1]. Zeitschrift der deutschen
Praetorius, [Georg] [Fr.] Franz. 1886. Grammatica aethiopica: äthiopische Grammatik mit
Paradigmen, Litteratur, Chrestomathie und Glossar. Karlsruhe & Leipzig: H. Reuther. Pp
x, 164, 65.
Not sure if the German part of the title appeared on the original publication. It may have been added to reprints.
Reprinted 1955 in New York.
Praetorius, [Georg] [Fr.] Franz. 1889. Hamitische Bestandteile im Äthiopischen. Zeitschrift der
246
Amharic or Ge‘ez?
Praetorius, [Georg] [Fr.] Franz. 1889/90. Eine Galla-Fabel; aus Karl Tutscheks Nachlass
mitgeteilt. Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 3, p. 77-79.
Praetorius, [Georg] [Fr.] Franz. 1892. Über die hamitischen Sprachen Ostafrika’s. Beiträge zur
Assyriologie und semitischen Sprachwissenschaft, v. 2, 2, p. 312-341.
Praetorius, [Georg] [Fr.] Franz. 1893. Zur Grammatik der Gallasprache. Berlin: Reuther &
Reichard. Pp 310.
Reprinted 1978 in Hildesheim.
Praetorius, [Georg] [Fr.] Franz. 1893. Noch ein Dualrest im Aethiopischen. Zeitschrift der
deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 46, p. 395.
Deals probably with Amharic.
Praetorius, [Georg] [Fr.] Franz. 1893. Kushitische Bestandtheile im Aethiopischen. Zeitschrift der
Praetorius, [Georg] [Fr.] Franz. 1894. Über die hamitischen Sprachen Ostafrikas. Beiträge zur
Assyriologie und semitischen Sprachwissenschaft, v. 2, p. 312-341.
Peripherals: Fritz Hommel, Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 55 (1901) p. 532-537.
Prat, J. 1904. Manuel de la langue tejé (Batéké). Brazzaville.
First known grammar of Teke.
Prat, J. 1917. Grammaire mbochie et dictionnaire (rivière Alima, Congo français). Brazzaville:
Mission Catholique. Pp 96.
Prat, J. 1917. Petit grammaire de la langue mboshi. Paris.
Presumably this is an extract from the author’s Grammaire mbochie et dictionnaire.
Prebois, Paul le Blanc de. 1897. Essai de contes kabyles, avec traduction en français. Batna
(Algérie): A. Beun. Pp 47.
Preston, Ira M.; Best, J. 1854. Grammar of the Bakele language with vocabularies. By the
missionaries of the A.B.C.F.M., Gaboon Station, Western Africa; with an introduction by J.
Leighton Wilson. New York: J.P. Prall. Pp 117.
Issued anonymously.
Prichard, James Cowles. 1813. Researches into the physical history of mankind. London: J. & A.
Arch. Pp iv, 558.
Includes a classification of the “Kaffrarian Family”. Reprinted 1973 by the University of Chicago Press (ISBN-10
0-226-68120-3).
Prichard, James Cowles. 1826. Researches into the physical history of mankind, 2 vols. Second
edition. London: J. & A. Arch.
Subsequent editions comprise 5 vols, of which only the second deals with Africa.
193-218.
Prietze, Rudolf. 1897. Beiträge zur Erforschung von Sprache und Volksgeist in der Togo-Kolonie.
Deals with Ewe (Ge).
Prietze, Rudolf. 1897. Zwei Haussa-Texte. Zeitschrift für afrikanische und oceanische Sprachen, v.
3, p. 140-156.
Prietze, Rudolf. 1902. Sprichwörter der Hausa. Zeitschrift für afrikanische, ozeanische und
ostasiatische Sprachen, v. 6, p. 248-253.
Prietze, Rudolf. 1904. Haussa-Sprichwörter und Haussa-Lieder. Kirchhain (Deutschland). Pp 86.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 4 (1904/05) p. 494-496; Julius Lippert, Mitteilungen des
Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 8 (1905) p. 287ff.
Prietze, Rudolf. 1907. Tiermärchen der Haussa. Zeitschrift für Ethnologie, v. 6, p. 916-939.
Prietze, Rudolf. 1908. Die spezifischen Verstärkungsadverbien im Haussa und Kanuri.
247
Prietze, Rudolf. 1914. Bornu-Lieder. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 17,
III, p. 134-260.
Prietze, Rudolf. 1915. Bornu-Sprichwörter. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen,
v. 18, III, p. 85-172.
Prietze, Rudolf. 1916. Haussa-Sänger. Dissertation. Göttingen: Georg-August-Universität
(Georgia Augusta).
Prietze, Rudolf. 1916. Lieder fahrender Haussa-Schüler. Mitteilungen des Seminars für
Prietze, Rudolf. 1917. Gesungenen Predigten eines fahrenden Haussalehrers. Mitteilungen des
Prietze, Rudolf. 1918. Haussa-Preislieder auf Parias. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische
Pringle, Thomas. 1834. African sketches. London.
Includes two parts, Poems illustrative of South-Africa and Narrative of a residence in South Africa. The latter part
was published separately the following year.
Probst, F. 1898. Arabischer Sprachführer in ägyptischem Dialekt: ein Leitfaden der arabischen
Conversation für Reisende, Kaufleute u.s.w. in Afrika. Neue Ausgabe. Giessen
(Deutschland). Pp viii, 280.
Includes grammar, a two-way dictionary and proverbs.
Procter, Lovell James; Blair, John Andrew. 1875. Grammar and vocabulary of the Manganja
language. London: William Clowes & Sons. Pp 66.
Provotelle, [?]. 1911. Etudes sur la Tamazir’t ou Zenatia de Qalaat es-sened. Publications de
l’Ecole des Lettres d’Alger; Bulletin de correspondence de africaine, #46. Paris: Ernest
Leroux. Pp 154.
Includes grammar, texts, and a glossary.
Purvis, John Bremner [Rev.]. 1900. Handbook to British East Africa and Uganda. London: Swan
Sonnenschein & Co. Pp 94.
The appendixes include “English-Kiswahili: useful phrase” (p. 78-85) and “English-Luganda: useful phrase” (p. 8690).
URL: www.archive.org/details/handbooktobritis00purviala
Purvis, John Bremner [Rev.]. 1907. A manual of Lumasaba grammar. London: Society for
Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK) for the Church Missionary Society (CMS). Pp 96.
Deals with Gisu JE31a.
Quartey-Papafio, A.B. 1914. The use of names among the Gãs or Accra people of the Gold Coast.
Quintão, José Luís. 1917. Gramática xi-ronga: landim. Lisboa: Centro Typografico Colonial. Pp
85.
Not totally sure about the details of this one.
Raban, John A. 1830/32. A vocabulary of the Eyo or Aku, a dialect of western Africa, 3 parts.
London: Church Missionary Society (CMS).
Raddatz, Hugo. 1892. Einige Dialekte aus dem Innern. In: Die Suahili-Sprache, enthaltend
Grammatik, Gespräche und Wörterverzeichnisse, p. 59-65. Dresden: C.A. Koch’s
Verlagsbuchhandlung.
Contains, amongst other things, fragmentary mentions (and lexical specimens) of Gogo, Sagara, and possibly
others. Further editions (2nd 1900, 3rd 1912) edited by August Seidel had an appendix with more info on other
languages. Not sure if the appendix was in the first edition.
Raddatz, Hugo. 1892. Die Suahili-Sprache, enthaltend Grammatik, Gespräche und
Wörterverzeichnisse. Dresden: C.A. Koch’s Verlagsbuchhandlung. Pp xiv, 176.
Wörterverzeichnisse, mit einem Anhange: Sansibar-Arabisch, sowie Wörterverzeichnissen
der Sprachen von Usambara, Bondeï, Unyamwezi und des Yao. Zweite Ausgabe, redigiert
von August Seidel. Dresden & Leipzig: C.A. Koch’s Verlagsbuchhandlung. Pp vi, 184.
The first edition appeared in 1892. Not sure of the appendix was there already then.
248
Wörterverzeichnisse, mit einem Anhange: Sansibar-Arabisch, sowie Wörterverzeichnissen
der Sprachen von Usambara, Bondeï, Unyamwezi und des Yao. Dritte Ausgabe, redigiert
von August Seidel. Koch’s Sprachführer, #22. Dresden & Leipzig: C.A. Koch’s
Verlagsbuchhandlung. Pp iv, 184.
Rahidy, Basilide [R.P.]. 1895. Cours pratique de langue malgache, 3 parties. Paris: Librairie
Africaine & Coloniale (Joseph André).
Includes grammar and vocabularies.
Raimbault, Jean-Baptiste. 1885. Dictionnaire français-soso et soso-français. Rio Pongo (Guinée).
Pp 164.
Rambaud, J.-B. 1893. La langue mandé. Mémoires de la Société de Linguistique de Paris, v. 9, p.
(?).
“Grammaire et dictionnaire des dialectes du nord et du sud” (Drexel 1923/24:12).
Rambaud, J.-B. 1897. Des rapports de la langue yorubo avec les langues de la famille mandé.
Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique de Paris, v. 10, p. (?).
Rambaud, J.-B. 1898. De la détermination en wolof. Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique de
Paris, v. 10, p. 122-136.
Rambaud, J.-B. 1903. La langue wolof. Bibliothèque de l’Ecole des Langues Orientales Vivantes,
#2. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pp 108.
Randall-MacIver, David; Woolley, Charles Leonard. 1909. Areika. With a chapter on Meroitic
inscriptions by F. Ll. Griffith. Eckley B. Cox Jnr Expedition to Nubia, #1. Oxford
University Press. Pp 4, 56, plates.
Peripherals: Anon(?), The nation, v. 90/2344 (1910) p. 560-561.
Ranke, Hermann. 1910. Keilschriftliches Material zur altägyptischen Vokalisation. Abhandlungen
der königlich-preussischen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin, philosophischhistorische Klasse, #2. Berlin: Georg Reimer. Pp 96.
Ranke, Hermann. 1911. Zur keilschriftlichen Umschreibungen ägyptischer Eigennamen. Zeitschrift
für ägyptische Sprache, v. 48, p. 112ff.
Rankin, Daniel J. 1886. Arab tales translated from the Swahili language into the Túgulu dialect of
the Mákua language: together with comparative vocabularies of five dialects of the Mákua
language. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (SPCK). Pp xv, 46.
“The dialects dealt with were those of Maples [P31], O’Neill [P31/P32] and his own collection of ‘Túgulu’ [P33],
together with ‘Makónde’ [P23] and ‘Mbwabe’ [P23]” (Doke 1945:72). Apparently it also includes an “imperfect
vocabulary Kiwibu [G403]” (Johnston 1919:790).
Rask, Rasmus. 1828. Vejledning til Akra-sproget paa kysten Ginea, met et tillaeg om akvambuisk.
Kjöbenhavn: S.L. Möllers Bogtrykkeri. Pp 78.
Rat, Joseph Numa. 1889. The elements of the Hausa language: a short introductory grammar in
that language. London: Waterlow & Sons. Pp vi, 60.
Rat, Joseph Numa. 1889. Physical training: English-Hausa. London: Waterlow & Sons.
Rath, F. 1865. Six Otshi-Herero fables with interlinear versions in English and German.
Manuscript.
Referred to by Stanley (1968:13).
Rath, Johannes. 18xx. Wörterbuch des Otjiherero, 3 Bde. Manuskript. Windhoek: Rheinischen
Missionsgesellschaft. Pp 228.
Referred to by Strohmeyer & Moritz (1975:214).
Rath, Johannes. 18xx. Manuscript wordlist of Nano (Umbundu). Cape Town: Grey Collection,
South African Public Library.
No title. Contains a “Sammlung von Nano-Wörter” (Strohmeyer & Moritz 1975:307).
Rath, Johannes. 18xx. Ausführliches Wörterbuch des Otjiherero. Manuskript. Windhoek:
Rheinischen Missionsgesellschaft. Pp 490.
249
Rath, Johannes. 186x. A short English-Otyiherero vocabulary. Cape Town: Grey Collection, South
Rath, Johannes. 1854. Materials for a Nama grammar. Manuscript. Cape Town: Grey Collection,
South African Public Library.
Mentioned in Strohmeyer & Moritz (1975:110).
Rath, Johannes. 1865. Materialien zu einem Otyi-Herero-Deutschen Wörterbuche, 17 Teile.
Rath, Johannes. 1873. Deutsch-Otyiherero Wörtersammlung. Manuskript.
Rattray, Robert Sutherland [Capt.]. 1879. Tshi proverbs. Basel: Basel Missionary Society.
Includes some 3,600 proverbs. These were later translated and published 1916 in English as Ashanti proverbs.
Rattray, Robert Sutherland [Capt.]. 1916. Ashanti proverbs: the primitive ethics of a savage
people. Translated from the original, with grammatical and anthropological notes; with a
preface by Sir Hugh Clifford. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Pp 190.
Includes some 800 proverbs. Hintze (1959:40+44) gives this item twice, with different dates (1916 and 1946), but
otherwise equal details. Reprinted 1969 by Clarendon Press in London; and 1979 by Oxford UP in New York (ISBN10 0-19-823147-4).
URL: www.archive.org/details/ashantiproverbst00rattuoft
Peripherals: P.A.B., Journal of the African Society, v. 15 (1915/16) p. 289-290; H.H. Johnston, Man, v. 17
(1917) p. 17-19 (art. 9); Anon, Folklore (London), v. 28 (1917?) p. 108-111.
Rattray, Robert Sutherland [Capt.]. 1918. An elementary Mole grammar, with a vocabulary of
over 1,000 words. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Pp 85.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 18 (1918) p. 73-75; S.H. Ray, Man, v. 18 (1918) p. 174 (art.
95).
Rattray, Robert Sutherland [Capt.]; Hetherwick, Alexander [Rev.]. 1907. Some folklore stories and
songs in Chinyanja with English translations and notes. London: Society for Promoting
Raum, Johannes W. 19xx. Unpublished Chagga vocabulary. Nürnberg: Bavarian Church Archive.
Consists of 11 exercise books in A6-format and one exercise book in A5-format (see Africa in German mission
archives, Schroedter 1999, online).
Raum, Johannes W. 1898. Etwas aus den Kimadschame-Sprachstunden. Jahresbericht der
evangelisch-lutherischen Mission, v. 80, p. 89-92.
Raum, Johannes W. 1898. Einige Masai-Märchen in Kimadschame. Zeitschrift für afrikanische
und oceanische Sprachen, v. 4, 2, p. 124-132.
Raum, Johannes W. 1898. Beiträge zur Swahili Grammatik. Zeitschrift für afrikanische und
oceanische Sprachen, v. 4, 2, p. (?).
Raum, Johannes W. 1905. Die biblische Geschichte in der Dshagga-Sprache (Moshi-Dialekts).
Leipzig: Evangelisch-Lutherische Mission.
Raum, Johannes W. 1909. Versuch einer Grammatik der Dschaggasprache (Moschi-Dialekts).
Archiv für das Studium der deutscher Kolonialsprachen, #11. Berlin: Georg Reimer. Pp ix,
399.
Whiteley & Gutkind (1958) refer to an undated Caga grammar (manuscript?) by Raum, which could be an English
translation. Reprinted by Gregg Press/International (ISBN-10 0-576-11450-2).
Raum, L. 1914/19. Unpublished linguistic notes on Chagga. Nürnberg: Bavarian Church Archive.
Consists of 2 exercise books in A5-format (see Africa in German mission archives, Schroedter 1999, online).
Réallon, Léon. 1919. Premiers éléments de langage douala. Douala. Pp 56.
Rebmann, Johann [Rev.]. 1848. The beginning of a spelling-book of the Kinika language,
accompanied by a translation of the Heidelberg Catechism. Bombay.
250
Rebmann, Johann [Rev.]. 1877. Dictionary of the Kiniassa language. St. Chrischona
(Switzerland): Church Missionary Society (CMS). Pp viii, 184.
According to Gregg Press’s 1985-catalogue, this is “still the only work on the south-western dialect of Nyanja.”
Reprinted by Gregg Press in Farnborough UK (ISBN-10 0-576-11614-9).
Reboud, Victor Constant. 1870. Recueil d’inscriptions libyco-berbères. Paris.
Peripherals: Auguste C. Judas, Examen des mémoires de M. le dr Reboud et de M. le général Faidherbe sur les
inscriptions libyques (Paris, 1871).
Reboud, Victor Constant. 1875. Recueil d’inscriptions libyco-berbères. Recueil des notices et
mémoires de la Société Archéologique du Dépt. de Constantine, 2ème série, v. 7 [17], p. (?).
Reckendorf, S. 1887. Ueber den Werth der altätiopischen Pentateuchübersetzung für die
Reconstruction der Septuaginta. Zeitschrift für die alttestamentliche Wissenschaft, v. 7, 1, p.
(?).
Publication of the author’s dissertation, University of Leipzig, 1886.
Reding, M. 1910. Vocabulaire mabinza. Bruxelles.
Referred to by Mangulu (1993:515).
Reeb, Antoine [R.P.]. 1895. Grammaire douma (Haut-Ogowé, Congo français). Paris: Mission
Catholique. Pp 48.
Rees, E.J. 1915. Grammar of Luragoli. Kaimosi (Kenya).
Rehse, Hermann. 1912/13. Die Sprache der Baziba in Deutsch-Ostafrika. Zeitschrift für
Kolonialsprachen, v. 3, p. 1-33, 81-123, 201-229.
Rehse, Hermann. 1913. Wörtersammlung des Ruziba. Jahrbuch der Hamburger
wissenschaftlichen Anstalten, v. 31, p. 93-140. (Supplement 10 to Mitteilungen des Seminars
für orientalische Sprachen.)
Rehse, Hermann. 1913/14. Eigentümlichkeiten in der Sprache der Bazinza in Deutsch-Ostafrika.
Rehse, Hermann. 1915/16. Die Priestersprache und die Frauendsprache der Bazinza. Zeitschrift für
Reichardt, Charles Augustus Ludwig. 1859. Primer in the Fulah language. Berlin. Pp 29.
Reichardt, Charles Augustus Ludwig. 1859. Three original Fulah pieces in Arabic letters, in Latin
transcription and in English translation. Berlin: C. & F. Unger. Pp 62.
URL: books.google.com/books?id=YEYPAAAAIAAJ
Reichardt, Charles Augustus Ludwig. 1876. Grammar of the Fulde language. With an appendix
on some original traditions and portions of scripture translated into Fulde, together with eight
chapters of the Book of Genesis, translated by the late Dr Baikie, R.N., late Consul at Lokoja,
River Niger. London: Church Missionary House. Pp xxiii, 339.
Reichardt, Charles Augustus Ludwig. 1878. Vocabulary of the Fulde language. London: Church
Missionary Society (CMS). Pp 357.
Reinaud, Joseph Toussaint. 1856. Rapport sur le tableau des dialectes de l’Algérie et des contrées
voisines de M. Geslin. Le moniteur universel (Paris), v. 7/8, p. (?).
May consist of two articles. Published in book-form the same year by Panckoucke in Paris.
Reinaud, Joseph Toussaint. 1858. Rapport sur en essai de grammaire de la langue de Kabyles et
sur un mémoire relatif a quelques inscriptions, orthographie en caractères Touaregs. Revue de
l’Orient et de l’Algérie, 3ème série, v. 6, p. (?).
Reinaud, Joseph Toussaint. 1860. Notices sur les dictionnaires géographiques arabes et sur le
système primitif de la numération chez les peuples de race berbère. Journal asiatique, 5ème
série, v. 16 [77], p. (?).
Not sure of the vol no (might be 15). May consists of one or more articles. Published in book-form 1861 by
Imprimerie Impériale in Paris.
Reinhardt, Carl. 1894. Ein arabischer Dialekt gesprochen in ‘Oman und Zanzibar. Lehrbücher
des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, #13. Stuttgart & Berlin: Verlag von W. Spemann.
Pp xxv, 428.
251
Reprinted 1972 by Philo Press in Amsterdam (ISBN-10 90-6022-256-3).
Peripherals: C. Vollers, Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 49 (1895) p. 484-515.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1873. Der einheitliche Ursprung der Sprachen der Alten Welt
nachgewiesen durch Vergleichung der afrikanischen, erythräischen und indogermanischen
Sprachen mit Zugrundelegung des Teda. Wien: Alfred Hölder.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1874. Sprachen von Nord-Ost-Afrika, Bd 1. Mit einer Beilage über die
Barea-Sprache nach handschriftlichen Materialien von Werner Munzinger Pascha bearbeitet.
Wien.
Unsure about what this deals with exactly. The supplement deals with Barea (Nera), but what does the book proper
deal with?
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1874. Die Barea-Sprache: Grammatik, Text und Wörterbuch. Nach den
handschriftlichen Materialen von Werner Munzinger Pascha bearbeitet. Wien: Wilhelm
Braunmüller. Pp xxviii, 186.
Reprinted 1972 by Sändig in Wiesbaden.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1878. Die Sahosprache. Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen
Gesellschaft, v. 32, p. 415-464.
A longer version was published in book-form (2 vols) in 1889/90.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1878. Die Sprache der Irob-Saho in Abessinien. Sitzungsberichte der
90, p. 89-142.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1879. Die Nuba-Sprache, 2 Bde. Wien: Wilhelm Braunmüller.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1881. Die Kunama-Sprache in Nordost-Afrika [pt. 1]. Sitzungsberichte der
98, p. 87-99.
The article could go all the way to p 174.
Peripherals: Hans Georg von der Gabelenz, Literarisches Zentralblatt für Deutschland, v. 32 (1881) p. 1580.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1882. Die Bilin-Sprache in Nordost-Afrika. Sitzungsberichte der
99, 2, p. 583-718.
Two parts (I. Texte der Bilin-Sprache; II. Wörterbuch der Bilin-Sprache). Unsure if pagination above covers both.
Part 1 reprinted 1883 by Th. Griebens in Leipzig. Part 2 reprinted or revised 1887 by Alfred Hölder in Wien. Both
parts reprinted 1986 by Sändig Reprints in Vaduz, Liechenstein.
Peripherals: Hans Georg von der Gabelenz, Literarisches Zentralblatt für Deutschland, v. 33 (1882) p. 1194-1195;
David [von] Müller, Literatur-Blatt für orientalische Philologie, v. 1 (1884) p. 434-440.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1883. Die Bilin-Sprache, 1: Texte der Bilin-Sprache. Leipzig: Th. Griebens.
Originally published 1882 in Sitzungsberichte der (kaiserlichen) Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Wien,
philosophisch-historische Klasse, v. 99. Reprinted 1986 by Sändig Reprints in Vaduz, Liechenstein.
Peripherals: Hans Georg von der Gabelenz, Literarisches Zentralblatt für Deutschland, v. 34 (1883) p. 1452; David
[von] Müller, Literatur-Blatt für orientalische Philologie, v. 1 (1884) p. 434-440; Hans Georg von der Gabelenz,
Literarisches Zentralblatt für Deutschland, v. 38 (1887) p. 309; J. Kolmodin, Le monde oriental, v. 8 (1914) p. 8191.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1884. Die Chamirsprache in Abessinien [pt. 1]. Sitzungsberichte der
105, p. 655-772.
Not sure about the pagination; maybe it should be 573-697?
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1884. Die Chamirsprache in Abessinien [pt. 2]. Sitzungsberichte der
106, p. 317-450.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1884. Die Chamirsprache in Abessinien. Wien: Kaiserliche Akademie der
Wissenschaften. Pp 2 Teile.
Offprints/reprint from Sitzungsberichte der (kaiserlichen) Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Wien, philosophischhistorische Klasse, v. 105-106 (1884).
Peripherals: August Dillmann, Deutsche Literatur-Zeitung, 1884, p. 1374; Franz Praetorius, Literarisches
Zentralblatt für Deutschland, v. 35 (1884) p. 891-894, 1789-1800.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1884. Sprache von Quara. Österreichische Monatschrift für den Orient, v.
10, p. 96.
252
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1885. Die Quarasprache in Abessinien [pt. 2]. Sitzungsberichte der
109, p. 3-152.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1885. Die Afar-Sprache [pt. 1]. Sitzungsberichte der (kaiserlichen)
Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Wien, philosophisch-historische Klasse, v. 111, p. 5-112.
Peripherals: Hans Georg von der Gabelenz, Literarisches Zentralblatt für Deutschland, v. 38 (1887) p. 817+1347;
Franz Praetorius, Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 1 (1887/88).
108, p. 655-772.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1885. Die Quarasprache in Abessinien. Wien: Kaiserliche Akademie der
Wissenschaften.
Offprints/reprint from Sitzungsberichte der (kaiserlichen) Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Wien, philosophischhistorische Klasse, v. 108-109 (1885).
Peripherals: Hans Georg von der Gabelenz, Literarisches Zentralblatt für Deutschland, v. 36 (1885) p. 1348; Hans
Georg von der Gabelenz, Literarisches Zentralblatt für Deutschland, v. 37 (1886) p. 196-197.
Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Wien, philosophisch-historische Klasse, v. 113, p. 795916.
114, p. 89-168.
Unsure how this ties to the earlier parts.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1887. Die Bilin-Sprache, 2: Wörterbuch der Bilin-Sprache. Wien: Alfred
Hölder. Pp vi, 426.
Originally published 1882 in Sitzungsberichte der (kaiserlichen) Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Wien,
philosophisch-historische Klasse, v. 99. Reprinted 1986 by Sändig Reprints in Vaduz, Liechenstein.
Peripherals: Hans Georg von der Gabelenz, Literarisches Zentralblatt für Deutschland, v. 38 (1887) p. 309; J.
Kolmodin, Le monde oriental, v. 8 (1914) p. 81-91.
Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Wien, philosophisch-historische Klasse, v. 114, p. 89-168.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1888. Die Kafa-Sprache in Nordost-Afrika. Sitzungsberichte der
116, p. 53-143, 251-386.
Also published as two separate book(let)s.
Peripherals: Carl G. Büttner, Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 1 (1887/88) p. 310-311; August Dillmann,
Deutsche Literatur-Zeitung, v. 9 (1888) p. 1110-1111; Hans Georg von der Gabelenz, Literarisches Zentralblatt für
Deutschland, v. 40 (1889) p. 859.
119, 5, p. 1-94.
Peripherals: ..., Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 3 (1889/90) p. 156; Hans Georg von der Gabelenz,
Literarisches Zentralblatt für Deutschland, v. 41 (1890) p. 998.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1889. Die Saho-Sprache, 1: Texte. Wien: Alfred Hölder. Pp 310.
Peripherals: Carl G. Büttner, Zeitschrift für afrikanische Sprachen, v. 2 (1888/89) p. 239; Hans Georg von der
Gabelenz, Literarisches Zentralblatt für Deutschland, v. 40 (1889) p. 1414; David Heinrich Müller, Zeitschrift der
deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 46 (1892) p. 399-411.
122, 5, p. 1-112.
Unsure about the date.
Peripherals: Hans Georg von der Gabelenz, Literarisches Zentralblatt für Deutschland, v. 41 (1890) p. 998.
253
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1890. Die Saho-Sprache, 2: Wörterbuch der Saho-Sprache. Wien: Alfred
Hölder.
Peripherals: Hans Georg von der Gabelenz, Literarisches Zentralblatt für Deutschland, v. 41 (1890) p. 1335; David
Heinrich Müller, Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, v. 46 (1892) p. 399-411.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1890. Das Zahlwort “vier” und “neun” in den chamito-semitischen
Sprachen. Sitzungsberichte der (kaiserlichen) Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Wien,
philosophisch-historische Klasse, v. 81, p. (?).
Also published as an offprint.
123, 1, p. 1-136.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1893. Die Bedauye-Sprache in Nordost-Afrika [pt. 1]. Sitzungsberichte der
128, 3, p. (?).
Peripherals: Franz Praetorius, Literarisches Zentralblatt für Deutschland, v. 45 (1894) p. 1569-1570.
128, 7, p. (?).
130, 7, p. (?).
131, 3, p. (?).
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1895. Wörterbuch der Bedauye-Sprache. Wien. Pp v, 365.
Peripherals: Franz Praetorius, Literarisches Zentralblatt für Deutschland, v. 47 (1896) p. 743.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1900. Die Somali-Sprache, 1: Texte. Wien: Alfred Hölder.
Peripherals: Carl Meinhof, Globus, v. ? (1902) p. 338-339.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1902. Die Somali-Sprache, 2: Wörterbuch Somali-Deutsch, DeutschSomali. Wien: Alfred Hölder.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1903. Die Somali-Sprache, 3: Grammatik. Wien: Alfred Hölder.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1904. Der Dschäbärtidialekt der Somalisprache. Sitzungsberichte der
(kaiserlichen) Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Wien, philosophisch-historische Klasse,
#148:5. Wien.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1909. Das persönliche Fürwort und die Verbalflexion in den chamitosemitischen Sprachen. Schriften der Sprachenkommission der kaiserlichen Akademie der
Wissenschaften zu Wien, #1. Wien: Alfred Hölder für die Kommission zur Erforschung von
Illiteraten Sprachen Aussereuropäischer Völker. Pp 327.
Peripherals: K.V. Zetterstéen, Le monde oriental, v. 4 (1919), following p. 88.
Reinisch, Simon Leo. 1911. Die sprachliche Stellung des Nuba. Schriften der
Sprachenkommission der kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Wien, #3. Wien.
Peripherals: P. Leander, Le monde oriental, v. 4 (1910) p.(?); George William Murray, The Cairo scientific journal,
v. 5 (1911) p. 131-132.
Reis, Jayme Batalha. 1897/98. Denominações geographicas: alguns nomes das colonias
portuguezas d’África. Revista portugueza colonial e maritima (Lisboa), v. 2, 10, p. 621-630.
Renan, Ernest. 1855. Histoire générale et système comparé des langues sémitiques, 1: histoire
générale des langues sémitiques. Paris: Benjamin Duprat. Pp viii, 499.
Only the first part was ever published, though several revisions of it did appear.
générale des langues sémitiques. Deuxième édition, revue et augmenté. Paris: Imprimerie
Impériale. Pp xiv, 515.
254
générale des langues sémitiques. Troisième édition, revue et augmenté. Paris: Imprimerie
Impériale.
générale des langues sémitiques. Cinquième édition, revue et augmenté. Paris. Pp xvi, 527.
Renouf, Peter le Page. 1875. An elementary grammar of the ancient Egyptian language in the
hieroglyphic type. London.
Renouf, Peter le Page. 1888. Pronominal forms in Egyptian [pt. 1]. Proceedings of the Society of
Renouf, Peter le Page. 1889. The thematic vowel in Egyptian. Proceedings of the Society of Biblical
Renouf, Peter le Page. 1889. Egyptian phonology. Proceedings of the Society of Biblical
Renouf, Peter le Page. 1889. Pronominal forms in Egyptian [pt. 2]. Proceedings of the Society of
Renouf, Peter le Page. 1893. Are there really no vowels in the Egyptian alphabet? In: Transactions
of the 9th international congress of Orientalists, held in London [...] 1892, v. 2, p. 279-283.
Ed. by Delmar E. Morgan. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
Révillout, E. 1880. Chrestomathie démotique. Etudes égyptologiques, 1880, p. 13-16.
Révillout, E. 1911. Les voyelles en égyptien et dans les langues sémitiques. Revue égyptologique, v.
13, p. 134-136.
Reynier, A. 1909. Méthode pour l’étude du dialecte maure. Tunis.
Rhodes, J. 1904. Anglo-Franco Dahomian grammar and vocabulary. Colwyn Bay UK. Pp 44.
Richardson, C.H. 1887/88. Zur Grammatik der Sprache der Bakundu (Kamerun). Zeitschrift für
Richardson, James. 1847. Touarick alphabet, with the corresponding Arabic and English letters.
London: T.R. Harrison. Pp c.40.
Richardson, J. 1885. A new Malagasy-English dictionary. Tananarive.
Richardson, James; Norris, Edwin. 1853. Dialogues, and a small portion of the New Testament in
the English, Arabic, Haussa, and Bornu languages. London. Pp 116.
Gesellschaft, v. 8 (1854) p. 413-441.
Riddel, Alexander. 1880. A grammar of the Chi-nyanja language as spoken at Lake Nyassa.
Edinburgh: McLaren for the London Missionary Society (LMS). Pp 150.
Rigby, Christopher Palmer [Col.]. 1841/44. Remarks on the north-east coast of Africa, and the
various tribes by which it is inhabited. Transactions of the Bombay Geographical Society, v.
6, p. 67-92.
Date uncertain. Includes a short vocabulary of ‘Sowahili’ (Whiteley & Gutkind 1958:204; who date this 1841/44),
Afar and other languages (Voigt 1988:60; who dates this 1865).
Riis, H.N. 1853. Elemente des Akwapim-Dialekts der Odschi-Sprache, enthaltend grammatische
Grundzüge und Wörtersammlung nebst einer Sammlung von Sprüchwörtern der
Eingeborenen. Basel: Bahnmeier’s Buchhandlung (C Detloff). Pp xviii, 322.
Gesellschaft, v. 8 (1854) p. 413-441.
Riis, H.N. 1854. Grammatical outline and vocabulary of the Oji-language, with special reference
to the Akwapim-dialect, together with a collection of proverbs of the natives. Basel:
Bahnmeier’s Buchhandlung (C Detloff). Pp viii, 276.
This is not a translation of Riis (1853). They are both based on the same material though (Hintze 1959:37).
Rinn, Louis. 1881ff. Essai d’études linguistiques et ethnologiques sur les origines berbères. Revue
africaine: journal des traveaux de la Société Historique Algérienne, v. (?), p. (?).
Several articles (cfr Jucovy & Alderete 2001).
Rinn, Louis. 1887. Lettres de Touareg. Revue africaine: journal des traveaux de la Société
Historique Algérienne, v. 31, p. 321-340.
255
Rinn, Louis. 1887. Deux chansons kabyles sur l’insurrection de 1871. Revue africaine: journal
des traveaux de la Société Historique Algérienne, v. 31, p. 55-71, 240.
Rinn, Louis. 1889. Les origines berbères: études linguistiques et ethnologiques. Alger: Librairie
Adolphe Jourdan. Pp 412, xxxix.
Riviere, Joseph. 1882. Recueil de contes populaires de la Kabylie du Djurdjura. Collection de
contes et de chansons populaires, #4. Paris: Ernest Leroux.
Riviere, Joseph. 1882. Popular tales of the Kabyles [translated from the French]. In: Moorish
literature: comprising romantic ballads, tales of the Berbers, stories of the Kabylie, folklore and national traditions, p. (?). Ed. by Chauncey C. Starkweather. London & New York:
Colonial Press.
Robb, A. 1866. Principles of Efik grammar. Calabar: Mission Press.
Robecchi-Bricchetti, Luigi. 1889. Sul dialetto di Siwah. Rendiconti della Reale Accademia dei
Lincei, 4a serie, v. 5, p. (?).
Robecchi-Bricchetti, Luigi. 1890. Vocabolario harari, somali, galla. Roma.
Robecchi-Bricchetti, Luigi. 1890. Lingue parlate somali, galla e harari. Bollettino della Società
Geografica Italiana, 3a serie, v. 3, p. 257-271, 380-391, 689-708.
Robecchi-Bricchetti, Luigi. 1891. Vocaboli della lingua oromonica [pt. 1-4]. Bollettino della
Società Africana d’Italia, v. 10, p. 98-104, 168-175, 191-193, 214-222.
Robecchi-Bricchetti, Luigi. 1892. Testi nelle lingue harar e galla. Rendiconti della Accademia
Nazionale dei Lincei, classe di scienze morali, storiche e filologiche (Rendiconti della Reale
Accademia dei Lincei), 5a serie, v. 1, p. 254-263.
Robecchi-Bricchetti, Luigi. 1892. Vocaboli della lingua oromonica [pt. 5-8]. Bollettino della
Società Africana d’Italia, v. 11, p. 7-17, 63-68, 92-93, 162-164.
Robecchi-Bricchetti, Luigi. 1895. Note sulle lingue parlate somali, galla e harari raccolte ed ordinate
nell’Harar [pt. 1-5]. Bollettino della Società Africana d’Italia, v. 14, p. 48-60, 93-99, 123130, 156-163, 217-224.
nell’Harar [pt. 6-10]. Bollettino della Società Africana d’Italia, v. 15, p. 15-22, 57-64, 92-99,
133-140, 158-165.
nell’Harar [pt. 11-15]. Bollettino della Società Africana d’Italia, v. 16, p. 24-27, 48-55, 121128, 140-155, 170-174.
Robecchi-Bricchetti, Luigi. 1898. Materiali linguistici dell’Africa orientale. Napoli.
Robert, M. 1908. Méthode pour l’étude de l’Omyene.
Details wanting. Unsure about the contents. Some kind of instructional language guide.
Roberts, Charles. 187x. Step-by-step in Zulu.
Roberts, Charles. 1874. The Zulu-Kafir language simplified for beginners. Mount Coke (Natal?):
Wesleyan Methodist Mission Press. Pp vii, 145.
Roberts, Charles. 1874. Grammatical note.
On Xhosa. Referred to by Doke (1945:83).
Roberts, Charles. 1880. The Zulu-Kafir language simplified for beginners. Second edition.
London: Wesleyan Missionary Society. Pp vii, 151.
Roberts, Charles. 1880. An English-Zulu dictionary, with the principles of pronunciation and
classification fully explained. London: Wesleyan Missionary Society. Pp xxii, 259.
“Later editions were but fresh ‘impressions’” (Doke 1945:75).
Roberts, Charles. 1895. The Zulu-Kafir language simplified for beginners. Third edition, enlarged.
London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co. Pp viii, 177.
256
Reprinted numerous times, e.g. 1899, 1902, 1904, 1909, etc.
Roberts, Charles. 1895. An English-Zulu dictionary. Second edition, with a supplement. London:
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co. Pp xxii, 267.
Roberts, Charles. 1900. A Zulu manual or vade-mecum, being a companion volume to “The ZuluKafir language” and the “English-Zulu dictionary”. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner
& Co. Pp viii, 153, errata page.
Includes grammar and word list.
URL: www.archive.org/details/zulumanualorvade00robeuoft
Roberts, Charles. 1905. English-Zulu dictionary. Fourth edition. London.
Roberts, Charles. 1911. English-Zulu dictionary. Fifth edition.
Details wanting.
Roberts, Charles. 1915. English-Zulu dictionary. Sixth edition.
Details wanting.
Robertson, G.A. 1819. Vocabulary of the Old Calebar language. In: Notes on Africa: particularly
those parts which are situated between Cape Verd and The River Congo; containing
sketches of the geographical situations, the manners and customs, the trade, commerce, and
manufactures, and the government and policy of the various nations in this extensive tract;
also a view of their capabilities for the reception of civilization, with hints for the melioration
of the whole African population, p. (?). London: Sherwood, Neely & Jones.
Robertson, William Govan. 19xx. Bemba-English dictionary. Manuscript. Cape Town: South
Robertson, William Govan. 19xx. English-Mambwe-Rungu vocabulary, collected in Northern
Rhodesia, 2 parts. Manuscripts, ref. 106346 PA. School of Oriental and African Studies
Robertson, William Govan. 1904. An introductory handbook to the language of the Bemba-people
(Awemba). London Missionary Society (LMS). Pp xxii, 545.
Includes 100 pages of grammatical notes, followed by a Bemba-English vocabulary (p. 103-404) and an EnglishBemba vocabulary (p. 407-545). Robertson’s informants were apparently influenced by Mambwe (cfr Doke
1945:37).
Robertson, William Govan. 1907. Language of the Bemba-people. London.
Unsure about the title. This is probably a reprint/revision of Robertson (1904).
Robinson, Charles Henry [Canon]. 1896. Specimens of Hausa literature. Cambridge: The
University Press. Pp xix, 112, 54.
Reprinted by Cambridge University Press, more than once; and 1969 by Gregg International in Westmead UK
(ISBN-10 0-576-11489-8).
Robinson, Charles Henry [Canon]. 1896. Hausaland: fifteen hundred miles through the central
Soudan. London: Sampson Low, Marston & Co. Pp xvi, 304, plates.
There are several subsequent editions of this. Includes “The Hausa language” (p. 170-182) and a “List of books
published on the Hausa people or language during the last half century” (p. 293-295).
Robinson, Charles Henry [Canon]. 1897. Hausa grammar, with exercises, readings and
vocabularies. Trübner’s collection of simplified grammars. London: Kegan Paul, Trench,
Trübner & Co. Pp x, 123, 32.
Robinson, Charles Henry [Canon]. 1899/1900. Dictionary of the Hausa language. Cambridge:
The University Press.
Part I: Hausa-English. Part II: English-Hausa.
Peripherals: Julius Lippert, Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 4 (1901) p. 280-287.
Robinson, Charles Henry [Canon]. 1900. Hausaland: fifteen hundred miles through the central
Soudan. Third edition. London: Sampson Low, Marston & Co. Pp xvi, 303, plates.
vocabularies. New (second) edition, revised. Trübner’s collection of simplified grammars.
London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co. Pp viii, 210.
Robinson, Charles Henry [Canon]. 1906. Dictionary of the Hausa language, 2 vols. Second
edition, revised and enlarged. Cambridge: The University Press.
257
vocabularies. Third edition. Trübner’s collection of simplified grammars. London: Kegan
Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co. Pp xii, 218.
Robinson, Charles Henry [Canon]. 1913/14. Dictionary of the Hausa language, 2 vols. Third
edition, revised and enlarged. Cambridge: The University Press.
URL: www.archive.org/details/dictionaryofhaus01robiuoft
URL: www.archive.org/details/dictionaryofhaus02robiuoft
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 13 (1913/14) p. 109-111; Anon, Journal of the African
Society, v. 14 (1914/15) p. 331-335.
vocabularies. New (fourth) edition, revised. Trübner’s collection of simplified grammars.
London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co. Pp x, 218.
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 14 (1915) p. 331-335.
Rochemonteix, Maxence de Chalvet [Marquis]. 1874/76. Essai sur les rapports grammaticaux qui
existent entre l’égyptien et le berbère. In: Congrès international des orientalistes: compterendu de la première session, Paris 1873, v. 2, p. 67-106. Paris: Adrien Maisonneuve.
Rochemonteix, Maxence de Chalvet [Marquis]. 1888. Quelques contes nubiens. Paris:
Maisonneuve Frères et Ch Leclerc.
Rochemonteix, Maxence de Chalvet [Marquis]. 1889. Documents pour l’étude du berbère: contes
du Sous et de l’Oasis de Tafilelt. Journal asiatique, 8ème série, v. 13 [134], p. 198-228, 402427.
Rochemonteix, Maxence de Chalvet [Marquis]. 1894. Essai sur les rapports grammaticaux qui
existent entre l’égyptien et le berbère. Bibliothèque égyptologique, v. 3, p. (?).
Could be a book or monograph. Perhaps a reprint of Rochemonteix (1874/76).
Roeder, Gunther. 1913. Ägyptisch: praktische Einführung [...] mit Lesestücken und Wörterbuch.
München: Verlagshandlung Oskar Beck.
Details wanting.
Roeder, Gunther. 1927. Altägyptische Erzählungen und Märchen. Jena: Eugen Diederichs Verlag.
Pp xxii, 342.
Roger, J.-F. [Baron]. 1829. Recherches philosophiques sur la langue ouolofe, suivies d’un
vocabulaire abrégé français-ouolof. Paris: Dondey-Dupré.
Rogozinski, Stephen [Count]. 1889. Rysy charrakterystyczne murzynskiego narzecza Bakwiri =
Characteristic features of the Bantu dialect Bakwiri. Rozprawy i sprawordania z posiedzen
wydzialu filologicznego, v. 13, p. (?).
Referred to by Olderogge (1993:122).
Rogozinski, Stephen [Count]. 1903. Characteristic features of the Bantu dialect “Bakwiri” used in
the Cameroon Mountains, compared with some other related dialects [translated by Maude A.
Biggs]. Journal of the African Society, v. 2, 8, p. 400-415.
Röhl, Karl. 1911. Versuch einer systematischen Grammatik der Schambalasprache (DeutschUsambara). Abhandlungen der hamburgischen Kolonial-Inst., #2. Hamburg: Friederichsen,
De Gruyter & Co. Pp xvi, 214.
Kolonialsprachen, v. 1 (1910/11) p. 236-238; Carl Meinhof, Hamburger Korrespondent, Beilage 7 (1911) p. 5253.
Röhl, Karl. 1917/18. Das Dahlsche Gesetz und verwandte Erscheinungen im Ruanda-Rundi-Ha.
Roscoe, John. 1907. The Bahima: a cow tribe of Enkole in the Uganda Protectorate. Journal of the
Royal Anthropological Inst. of Great Britain and Ireland, v. 37, p. 93-118.
Includes some vocabulary items (Johnston 1919:786).
Rosenhuber, P. Simon. 1908. Die Basá-Sprache. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische
Sprachen, v. 11, III, p. 219-306.
Rossi, Fr. 1901. Grammatica egizia nelle tre scrittura geroglifica, demotica et copta. Torino.
Rössler, Walter. 1898. Nachal und Wad il Ma‘awil: eine Erzählung im Omandialekt. Mitteilungen
des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 1, II, p. 56-90.
258
Rössler, Walter. 1900. Die Geschichte von der pockenkrankheit: eine Erzählung im Omandialekt.
Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen, v. 3, II, p. 1-92.
Roux, Jean Marie le [Capt.]. 1886. Essai de dictionnaire français-haoussa et haoussa-français,
précédé d’un essai de grammaire de la langue haoussa. Algiers: Librairie Adolphe Jourdan.
Pp xlv, 330.
Roux, Thomas Hugo le. 1910. Beschrijvende klankleer van het Afrikaans. Leiden: Sijthoff. Pp viii,
136.
Rowling, F. 1912. Guide to Luganda prose composition.
Details wanting.
Ruelle, E. 1904. Notes anthropologiques, ethnographiques, et sociolinguistiques sur quelques
populations noires du deuxième territoire militaire de l’Afrique occidentale française.
L’anthropologie, v. 15, p. 519-562, 657-704.
Rugendas, Moritz. 1835. Voyage pittoresque dans le Brésil, 4 Teile. Traduit de l’allemand par Mr
de Golbery. Paris: E. Engelmann. Pp 48, plates; 34, plates; 51, plates; 32, plates.
Johnston (1919:3) gives the French title as Voyage pittoresque et descriptif au Brésil and dates it “?1824”.
Rugendas, Moritz. 1835. Malerische Reise in Brasilien, 4 parties. Paris: E. Engelmann. Pp 50; 38;
56; 32.
Includes several African word lists, all collected in Brasil, e.g. Masanja (Kikongo?), “spoken in the interior of
Congo, and to the north of Benguela” (Latham 1847:191), Tschoambo (Ecuwabo?), “spoken in the interior of
Mozambique, near the Makuas” (idem:192), Matibani (Copi?), “spoken ... in Inhambane” (idem). Rugendas was “a
Bavarian artist who had travelled through eastern Brasil in the early nineteenth century and had taken down
descriptions of West Africa and scraps of speech from negro slaves ... Rugendas dealt with the languages of Añgôla
and Moçambique” (Johnston 1919:3). Reprinted 1986 by Daco-Verlag in Stuttgart (ISBN-10 3-87135-001-X).
Rüppell, Edward. 1829. Vokabularien von sieben Nuba-Sprachen, die im Kordofan und am Bahher
Abbiad im Gebrauch sind. In: Reisen in Nubien, Kordofan und dem peträischen Arabien, p.
370-373. Frankfurt-am-Main: Friedrich Wilmans.
Includes vocabularies for Fertit (Kara), Koldagi (Hill Nubian), Schabun (Hill Nubian), Dngke (Dinka), Schilluk,
Takele (Tegali), and Darfur.
Ruskin, Edward Algernon. 1897. Proverbs, fables, similes and sayings of the Bamongo.
Bongandanga (Congo Free State).
Ruskin, Edward Algernon; Ruskin, Lily Adèle [Waldron]. 1903. Outlines of the grammar of the
Lomóngo language, with exercises. London: Congo Balolo Mission. Pp xii, 76.
Russell, J. Delaney. 1910. Fanti-English dictionary. Cape Coast Castle: Wesleyan Book Depot.
Pp vi, 193.
Rust jnr, Friedrich. 1916-1917. Vokabeln und Wendungen, Nama-Gesänge, Verzeichnis der von
H. Vedder übersetzen Kirchenlieder. Manuscript. Windhoek: Rheinischen
Missionsgesellschaft.
Rust snr, Friedrich. 1884. Deutsch-Nama Wörtersammlung, begonnen im December 1884.
Manuscript. Windhoek: Rheinischen Missionsgesellschaft. Pp 245.
Sachau, Eduard. 189x. ... [Title wanting].
According to Johnston (1919:12), Sachau did some work on Pogoro. However, he may be in error, because he also
credits Hendle’s Pogoro-grammar to Sachau.
Sachau, Eduard. 1898. Über eine arabische Chronik aus Zanzibar. Mitteilungen des Seminars für
Sacleux, Charles de [Père]. 1891. Dictionnaire français-swahili. Zanzibar. Pp xix, 989; xxxvi, 4.
Sacleux, Charles de [Père]. 1903. Introduction à l’étude des langues bantoues. La parole, 1903, p.
2-15.
Sacleux, Charles de [Père]. 1905. Essai de phonétique, avec son application à l’étude des idiomes
africains. Paris & Leipzig: H. Welter. Pp xiv, 245.
Includes data for several languages, e.g. Swahili, Nyaturu, Luba, Karanga.
259
Peripherals: Anon, Journal of the African Society, v. 8 (1908/09) p. 104; C.M. Doke, “The growth of comparative
Bantu philology (revised)”, African studies, v. 19 (1960) p. 193-218.
Sacleux, Charles de [Père]. 1909. Grammaire des dialectes swahilis. Paris: Procure des Pères du
Saint-Esprit. Pp 332.
Sacleux, Charles de [Père]. 1909. Grammaire swahilie. Paris: Procure des Pères du Saint-Esprit.
Pp xvi, 268.
Sacleux, Charles de [Père]. 1910. L’article dans les langues bantoues. Anthropos: internationale
Sacramento, José Vicente do. 1904. Apontamentos soltos da lingua macúa [pt. 1-2]. Boletim da
Sociedade de Geográfia de Lisboa, v. 22, p. 329-338, 361-366.
Sacramento, José Vicente do. 1905. Apontamentos soltos da lingua macúa [pt. 3-9]. Boletim da
Sociedade de Geográfia de Lisboa, v. 23, p. 40-52, 125-131, 187-196, 263-272, 300-307,
337-344, 368-381.
Sacramento, José Vicente do. 1906. Apontamentos soltos da lingua macúa. Supplement to Boletim
da Sociedade de Geográfia de Lisboa. Lisboa: Imprensa Nacional de Moçambique. Pp 12,
104.
Comprises nine articles previously published in Boletim da Sociedade de Geográfia de Lisboa, v. 22-23.
Saint-Lys, Odette. 1919. From a vanished German colony: a collection of folklore, folk tales and
proverbs from South West Africa. London: Gipsey Press.
Saker, Alfred J.S. 1852. A grammar of the Isubu tongue. Compiled from the incomplete, corrected
manuscript(s) of Joseph Merrick. Baptist Mission Press. Pp 41.
Saker, Alfred J.S. (Ed.) 1855. Grammatical elements of the Dualla language, with a vocabulary
compiled for the use of missionaries and teachers. Cameroons: Baptist Mission Press. Pp 4,
47, 1, 16, 37.
Based on a manuscript written by Merrick (1849). “The ‘elements of grammar’ are treated under the heading of
orthography, etymology and syntax in 47 pages, in a very clear and accurate manner ... Following the grammatical
part are the first thirty-three Psalms (Mienge) and a vocabulary, of which Part I, Dualla and English, occupies 37
pages, while Part II, English and Dualla, of two pages, only reaches the word ‘accede’. Meinhof [1899:142] did not
express a high opinion of Saker’s work. Probably he did not study it closely, for it is certainly a meritious
production, considering the time in which it was written” (Doke 1959:23).
Salisbury, E.E. 1849. On the Fanti dialect. Journal of the American Oriental Society, v. (?), p.
378ff.
Salkeld, R.E. 1905. Notes on the Boni hunters of Jubaland. Man: a record of anthropological
science, v. 5, p. 168-170 (art. 94).
Includes vocabularies for Zayse, Zergulla, Ganjule, Kachama, Koorete (all Omotic) and Bayso (East Cushitic).
Salle, Eusebe de. 1840. ... [Title wanting]. Journal asiatique, 3ème série, v. 10 [37], p. (?).
Includes word lists of Routana and Noby, both seemingly Nubian languages (Latham 1847:197).
Salt, Henry. 1814. Vocabularies of the dialects spoken by different tribes of the natives inhabiting
the coast of Africa, from Mosambique to the borders of Egypt, with a few others spoken in
the interior of that continent. In: A voyage to Abyssinia and travels into the interior of that
country, p. i-xxvii (= appendix I). London: William Bulmer & Co. for Francis, Charles &
John Rivington.
Includes the following sections: “Vocabularies of the Makooa [Makhuwa] and Monjou [Yao] languages” (p. i-iii),
“Sowauli [Swahili]” (p. iii-iv), “Sowaiel” (p. iv), “Vocabulary of the Somauli language” (p. iv-vi), “Vocabularies of
the Hurrur and southern Galla dialects, from Hadjee Abdelkader, Hadjee Belal, and other natives; and of the Adaiel
from Mr Stuart’s journal written during a residence at Zeyla” (p. vi-x), “Vocabulary of the Danakil language” (p. xixii), “Language spoken at Arkeeko and by the Shiho” (p. xiii-xiv), “A few words of the Takué and Boja language”
(p. xiv), “A few words of the Barea language” (p. xv), “Language of the Adareb and Bishareen tribes near Egypt” (p.
xv-cvi), “Vocabulary of the language of Darfoor” (p. xvi-xviii), “Vocabularies of the Agow, Tigre, and Amharic” (p.
xviii-xxiii), “Vocabulary of the language of the Dar-Mitchequa, or a tribe of Shangalla in the interior” (p. xxiiixxv), “Dialect of the Tacazze Shangalla” (p. xxv-xxvi), “A few words of the Mutshuana language, copied from a
manuscript journal by Mr Cowan” (p. xxvii), and “Briqua numerals from the same” (p. xxvii).
260
Salt, Henry. 1814. A voyage to Abyssinia and travels into the interior of that country, executed
under the orders of the British government, in the years 1809 and 1810; in which are
included, an account of the Portuguese settlements on the east coast of Africa, visited in the
course of the voyage; and a concise narrative of late events in Arabia Felix; and some
particulars respecting the aboriginal African tribes, extending from Mosambique to the
borders of Egypt; together with vocabularies of their respective languages. London:
William Bulmer & Co. for Francis, Charles & John Rivington. Pp xi, 506, lxxv.
URL: books.google.com/books?id=vXZNSUQkoqYC
Salt, Henry. 1815. Heinrich Salt’s neue Reise nach Abyssinia in den Jahren 1809 und 1810. Aus
dem englischen übersetzt. Weimar.
Not sure if the vocabularies are included herein.
Salt, Henry. 1816. Voyage en Abyssinie, entrepris par ordre du gouvernement britannique,

Sub-Saharan languages and peoples

Transcription

Documents pareils

Ethnologie in Bayreuth

Themenausschreibungen_Service Management

Presseinformation

Architektur Journal SALZBURGER HOF BAD GASTEIN

Africa Amini Maasai Lodge (West Kilimanjaro)

Out Of Africa

Mama kann stolz sein auf ihre Kinder

Flyer Open-Air-Kino: Auf den Spuren der Graf Götzen

CAFE SOCIETY

African Symphony - Trachtenkapelle Ottenschlag